Sharp MX5500,6200,7000 Service Manual

SERVICE MANUAL
Parts marked with " " are important for maintaining the safety of the set. Be sure to replace these parts with
specified ones for maintaining the safety and performance of the set.
This document has been published to be used
for after sales service only.
The contents are subject to change without notice.
SHARP CORPORATION
NOTE FOR SERVICING
[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
[2] SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
[4] UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION
For how to unpacking and installation,
refer to the installation manual
(00ZMX7000/I1E)
[5] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL
STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
[6] ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
[7] SIMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
[8] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE. 8-1
[9] MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
[10] ROM VERSION-UP . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
[11] ELECTRICAL SECTION. . . . . . . . . 11-1
[12] OTHERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
DETAILS OF EACH SECTION
[A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT. . . . . . . . . . . . .A-1
[B] OPERATION PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . .B-1
[C] DSPF SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
[D] SCANNER SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
[E] MANUAL PAPER FEED SECTION .E-1
[F] TRAY PAPER FEED SECTION . . . . F-1
[G] PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION . . G-1
[H] DUPLEX SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . H-1
[ i ] LSU SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i -1
[J] PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION. . . J-1
[K] TONER SUPPLY SECTION . . . . . . .K-1
[L] DEVELOPING SECTION . . . . . . . . . L-1
[M] TRANSFER SECTION . . . . . . . . . . M-1
[N] PROCESS CONTROL SENSOR,
REGISTRATION SENSOR
SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-1
[O] FUSING SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-1
[P] PAPER EXIT SECTION . . . . . . . . . .P-1
[Q] DRIVE SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q-1
[R] PWB SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-1
[S] FAN, FILTER SECTION . . . . . . . . . .S-1
[T] SENSOR, SWITCH SECTION . . . . . T-1
CONTENTS
CODE: 00ZMX7000/S1E
DIGITAL FULL COLOR
MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM
MODEL
MX-5500N
MX-6200N
MX-7000N
CONTENTS
NOTE FOR SERVICING
1. Precautions for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
2. Warning for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
3. Note for installing site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE
1. Product features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1
2. Newly employed technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1
3. Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 2
[2] SPECIFICATIONS
1. Basic specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1
2. Functional specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 4
3. Ambient conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 15
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS
1. Supply system table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1
2. Maintenance parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2
3. Production number identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 5
4. The indication of remaining toner amount and the
status of toner cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 6
[4] UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION
* For how to unpacking and installation,
refer to the installation manual (00ZMX7000/I1E)
[5] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE
1. Identification of each section and functions . . . . . . 5 - 1
[6] ADJUSTMENTS
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1
2. Adjustment item list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1
3. Details of adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 2
[7] SIMULATION
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1
2. List of simulation codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 3
3. Details of simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 10
4. Soft switch (Detail of SIM 66-1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 111
[8] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE
1. Self diag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 1
2. Trouble code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 4
3. Details of trouble code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 8
[9] MAINTENANCE
1. Maintenance system table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 1
2. Details of maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 4
3. Other related items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 16
[10] ROM VERSION-UP
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10- 1
2. Version-up procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10- 1
[11] ELECTRICAL SECTION
1. Block diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11- 1
2. Actual wiring chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11- 12
3. Signal list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11- 43
[12] OTHERS
1. System settings (Administrator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12- 1
2. Paper JAM code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12- 4
3. Hidden Page for Serviceman Only . . . . . . . . . . . . 12- 6
DETAILS OF EACH SECTION
[A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT
1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 1
[B] OPERATION PANEL
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram. . . . . . B - 1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B - 2
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B - 2
[C] DSPF SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram. . . . . . C - 1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C - 7
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C - 8
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C - 39
[D] SCANNER SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram. . . . . . D - 1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D - 2
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D - 3
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D - 10
[E] MANUAL PAPER FEED SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram. . . . . . E - 1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 2
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 2
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 10
[F] TRAY PAPER FEED SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram. . . . . . .F - 1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F - 5
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F - 6
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F - 23
[G] PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram. . . . . . G - 1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G - 6
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G - 6
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G - 20
[H] DUPLEX SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram. . . . . . H - 1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H - 2
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H - 2
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H - 17
[ i ] LSU SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram. . . . . . . i - 1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i - 2
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i - 3
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i - 10
[J] PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram. . . . . . . J - 1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J - 4
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J - 5
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J - 15
[K] TONER SUPPLY SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram. . . . . . K - 1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K - 2
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K - 2
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K - 5
[L] DEVELOPING SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram. . . . . . .L - 1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L - 2
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L - 2
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L - 13
[M] TRANSFER SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram. . . . . . M- 1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M- 2
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M- 3
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M- 18
CONTENTS
[N] PROCESS CONTROL SENSOR, REGISTRATION SENSOR
SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . N - 1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N - 2
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N - 2
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N - 4
[O] FUSING SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . O - 1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O - 2
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O - 3
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O - 24
[P] PAPER EXIT SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . P - 1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P - 2
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P - 2
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P - 7
[Q] DRIVE SECTION
1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q - 1
2. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q - 32
[R] PWB SECTION
1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R - 1
[S] FAN, FILTER SECTION
1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S - 1
2. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S - 9
[T] SENSOR, SWITCH SECTION
1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T - 1
MX-7000N NOTE FOR SERVICING - i
MX-7000N
Sv` Huuuu!

NOTE FOR SERVICING
This Service Manual uses some symbols to assure safe operation.
Please understand the meanings of photographs before servicing.
1. Precautions for servicing
1) When servicing, disconnect the power plug, the printer cable,
the network cable, and the telephone line from the machine,
except when performing the communication test, etc.
It may cause an injury or an electric shock.
2) There is a high temperature area inside the machine. Use an
extreme care when servicing.
It may cause a burn.
3) There is a high voltage section inside the machine which may
cause an electric shock. Be careful when servicing.
4) Do not disassemble the laser unit. Do not insert a reflective
material such as a screwdriver in the laser beam path.
It may damage eyes by reflection of laser beams.
5) When servicing with the machine operating, be careful not to
squeeze you hands by the chain, the belt, the gear, and other
driving sections.
6) Do not leave the machine with the cabinet disassembled.
Do not allow any person other than a serviceman to touch
inside the machine. It may cause an electric shock, a burn, or
an injury.
7) When servicing, do not breathe toner, developer, and ink
excessively. Do not get them in the eyes.
If toner, developer, or ink enters you eyes, wash it away with
water immediately, and consult a doctor if necessary.
8) The machine has got sharp edges inside. Be careful not to
damage fingers when servicing.
9) Do not throw toner or a toner cartridge in a fire. Otherwise,
toner may pop and burn you.
10) When replacing the lithium battery of the PWB, use a specified
one only.
If a battery of different specification is used, it may be broken,
causing breakdown or malfunction of the machine.
11) When carrying a unit with PWB or electronic parts installed to
it, be sure to put it in an anti-static-electricity bag.
It may cause a breakdown or malfunctions.
2. Warning for servicing
1) Be sure to connect the power cord only to a power outlet that
meets the specified voltage and current requirements.
Avoid complex wiring, which may lead to a fire or an electric
shock.
It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
2) If there is any abnormality such as a smoke or an abnormal
smell, interrupt the job and disconnect the power plug.
3) Be sure to connect the grounding wire. If an electric leakage
occurs without grounding, a fire or an electric shock may
result.
To protect the machine and the power unit from lightening,
grounding must be made.
4) When connecting the grounding wire, never connect it to the
following points.
It may cause an explosion, a fire or an electric shock.
Gas tube
Lightning conductor
A water pipe or a water faucet, which is not recognized as a
grounding object by the authorities.
Grounding wire for telephone line
5) Do not damage, break, or work the power cord.
Do not put heavy objects on the power cable. Do not bend it
forcibly or do not pull it extremely.
6) Keep the power cable away from a heat source.
Do not insert the power plug with dust on it into a power outlet.
7) Do not put a receptacle with water in it or a metal piece which
may drop inside the machine.
8) With wet or oily hands, do not touch the power plug, do not
insert the telephone line jack, do not operate the machine, or
do not perform servicing.
It may cause an electric shock.
3. Note for installing site
Do not install the machine at the following sites.
1) Place of high temperature, high humidity, low tempera-
ture, low humidity, place under an extreme change in tem-
perature and humidity.
Paper may get damp and form dews inside the machine, caus-
ing paper jam or copy dirt.
For operating and storing conditions, refer to the specifications
described later.
2) Place of much vibrations
It may cause a breakdown.
3) Poorly ventilated place
An electro-static type copier will produce ozone inside it.
The quantity of ozone produced is designed to a low level so
as not to affect human bodies. However, continuous use of
such a machine may produce a smell of ozone. Install the
machine in a well ventilated place, and ventilate occasionally.
WARNING: If this WARNING should be ignored, a serious
danger to life or a serious injury could result.
CAUTION: If this CAUTION should be ignored, an injury or
a damage to properties could result.
CAUTION
DOUBLE POLE/NEUTRAL FUSING
MX-7000N NOTE FOR SERVICING - ii
4) Place of direct sunlight.
Plastic parts and ink may be deformed, discolored, or may
undergo qualitative change.
It may cause a breakdown or copy dirt.
5) Place which is full of organic gases such as ammonium
The organic photoconductor (OPC) drum used in the machine
may undergo qualitative change due to organic gases such as
ammonium.
Installation of this machine near a diazo-type copier may result
in dirt copy.
6) Place of much dust
When dusts enter the machine, it may cause a breakdown or
copy dirt.
7) Place near a wall
Some machine require intake and exhaust of air.
If intake and exhaust of air are not properly performed, copy
dirt or a breakdown may be resulted.
8) Unstable or slant surface
If the machine drops or fall down, it may cause an injury or a
breakdown.
If there are optional paper desk and the copier desk specified,
it is recommendable to use them.
When using the optional desk, be sure to fix the adjuster and
lock the casters.
45 cm
(17-23/32")
30 cm
(11-13/16")
30 cm
(11-13/16")
MX-7000N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 1
MX-7000N
Sv` Huuuu!

[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE
1. Product features
2. Newly employed technology
No. Features Content Employed technology
1 High-speed color output by tandem process Color output: 41 sheets/min Print by the 2-beam LSU, paper
transport by the full grip short path
(Monochrome print only)
Monochrome output: 70 sheets/min [MX-7000N]
62 sheets/min [MX-6200N]
55 sheets/min [MX-5500N]
* When A4/8.5 x 11 paper is used.
2 High-volume paper feed, Paper exit option Standard paper feed capacity: 3,100 sheets
Max. paper feed capacity: 6,600 sheets
Paper feed option: A4LCC, Large LCC
Paper exit option: 4K finisher, 4K saddle finisher
3 Color document duplex simultaneous scan
(DSPF)
Single surface scan
Monochrome: 65 sheets/min
Color: 35 sheets/min
Color duplex document is scanned by
one scan.
Duplex scan
Monochrome: 65 pages/min
Color: 35 pages/min
4 Improved usability by the large-type color LCD
panel
The color VGA LCD panel (10.4") is employed to improve
visibility and operability.
The mode keys are arranged on the LCD panel. The
number of mode keys is increased or decreased
depending on the installation of option units. Linked with
the user authentication.
User's frequently used features can be concentrated on
the home screen, allowing quick selection of a desired
function with less key operations.
No. Item Content Remark
1 2-beam LSU employed Simultaneous writing with 2-beam allows high speed
monochrome printing.
Resolution: 600dpi
2 Full grip short path The full grip short path is used for the paper transport
system to stabilize paper transport.
3. Configuration
A. Lineup (Main unit and option)
Finisher
MX-FNX3
Saddle stitch finisher
MX-FNX4
Saddle staple cartridge
(For saddle stitch finisher)
AR-SC3
Staple cartridge
(For finisher/saddle stitch finisher)
AR-SC2
Inserter
MX-CFX1
Paper pass unit
MX-RBX2
Large capacity tray
MX-LCX2
Large capacity tray
MX-LCX3
Punch module
MX-PNX2A
MX-PNX2B
MX-PNX2C
MX-PNX2D
Digital full color multifunctional system
(Copier/Printer/Scanner)
MX-5500N/6200N/7000N
Facsimile expansion kit
MX-FXX1
Sharpdesk 1 license kit
MX-USX1
MX-USX5
MX-US10
MX-US50
MX-USA0
PS3 expansion kit
MX-PKX1
Application integration
module
MX-AMX1
Barcode font kit
AR-PF1
Expansion kit (Software, ROM)
Fiery print controller
MX-PEX2
Data security kit
(Authentication version)
MX-FRX3
Data security kit
(Commercial version)
MX-FRX3U
Application communication
module
MX-AMX2
External account module
MX-AMX3
Internet Fax expansion kit
MX-FWX1
Expansion kit (Software)
Data security kit FAX system
Fiery option
B. Machine configuration
C. Combination of options list
Copier memory (Local memory) (MB) 1GB
Printer memory (System memory) (MB) 896MB
Copier Standard provision
PCL printer Standard provision
PS printer Option (Product key target.)
Main body LCD Color VGA 10.4"
FAX Option (No support for some areas.)
Scanner Standard provision
Filing Standard provision
HDD Standard provision
DSPF Standard provision
Automatic duplex Standard provision
Security Option (Product key target.)
Internet Fax Option (Product key target.)
Section Name Model name Remarks
Paper feed system Large capacity tray MX-LCX2 (A4)
Large capacity tray MX-LCX3 (A3)
Paper exit system Paper pass unit MX-RBX2 Required when the finisher or the saddle stitch finisher is installed.
Inserter MX-CFX1 The finisher or the saddle stitch finisher is required.
When combining the finisher with the inserter, the punch unit is required.
Finisher MX-FNX3 Simultaneous installation with the saddle stitch finisher is inhibited.
Saddle stitch finisher MX-FNX4 Simultaneous installation with the finisher is inhibited.
Punch module MX-PNX2A Requires the finisher or the saddle stitch finisher and the paper pass unit.
MX-PNX2B
MX-PNX2C
MX-PNX2D
Staple cartridge
(For finisher/saddle stitch finisher)
AR-SC2 Staple section
Saddle staple cartridge
(For saddle stitch finisher)
AR-SC3 Saddle stitch section
Data security kit Data security kit
(Commercial version)
MX-FRX3U
Data security kit
(Authentication version)
MX-FRX3
Expansion kit
(Software, ROM)
Barcode font kit AR-PF1
Expansion kit
(Software)
PS3 expansion kit MX-PKX1
Internet Fax expansion kit MX-FWX1
Sharpdesk 1 license kit MX-USX1
Sharpdesk 5 license kit MX-USX5
Sharpdesk 10 license kit MX-US10
Sharpdesk 50 license kit MX-US50
Sharpdesk 100 license kit MX-USA0
Application integration module MX-AMX1
Application communication module MX-AMX2
External account module MX-AMX3
FAX system Facsimile expansion kit MX-FXX1 No support for some areas.
Fiery option Fiery print controller MX-PEX2
MX-7000N SPECIFICATIONS 2 1
MX-7000N
Sv` Huuuu!

[2] SPECIFICATIONS
1. Basic specifications
A. Base engine
(1) Type
(2) Engine speed (ppm)
a. Tray 1 4 (Main unit), LCC
b. Large LCC
* 8K and 16K are for China only.
c. Manual (Main unit)
*1: Switched by the service simulation setting
(3) Engine composition
(4) Engine resolution
(5) Warmup
(6) Jam recovery time
(7) Printable area
*1: When the PLC6/5c or the PS driver is used to print on A3W
(12 x 18) paper, the maximum print area is 299mm x 450mm
(11-49/64 x 17-45/64).
* The printable area with the printer is the area excluding 4.2mm
(5/32) from the each edge of paper.
(8) Void area
(9) Power source
Type Console
Color support Full color
Paper size
Black and white
Color
MX-5500N MX-6200N MX-7000N
A3W, 12 x 18 29 31 37 18
A3, 11 x 17, 8K 30 33 38 19
B4, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13 35 38 44 22
A4, A5R, B5, 8.5 x 11,
5.5 x 8.5R, 16K
55 62 70 41
A4R, B5R, 8.5 x 11R,
7.25 x 10.5R, 16KR
40 44 51 26
Extra 30 31 37 18
Paper size
Black and white
Color
MX-5500N MX-6200N MX-7000N
A3W, 12 x 18 29 31 37 18
A3, 11 x 17, 8K 30 33 38 19
B4, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13 35 38 44 22
A4, A5R, B5, 8.5 x 11,
5.5 x 8.5R, 16K
55 62 70 41
A4R, B5R, 8.5 x 11R,
7.25 x 10.5R, 16KR
40 44 51 26
Paper size
Black and white
Color
MX-5500N MX-6200N MX-7000N
A3W, 12 x 18 29 30 35 13
A3, 11 x 17, 8K 30 32 37 14
B4, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13, 8K 35 36 42 15
A4, A5R, B5, 8.5 x 11,
5.5 x 8.5R, 16K
55 62 70 27
A4R, B5R, 8.5 x 11R,
7.25 x 10.5R, 16KR
40 42 49 17
OHP (A4, 8.5 x 11) 23 23 23 19
OHP (A4R, 8.5 x 11R) 18 18 18 12
OHP (Other) 13 13 13 9
Extra 29 30 35 13
Envelope 29 30 35 13
Heavy paper
(B5, A4, A5R, 8.5 x 11,
8.5 x 5.5R, 16K)
23 23 23 19
Heavy paper
(Postcard HIGH) *
1
23 23 23 19
Heavy paper
(Postcard LOW) *
1
13 13 13 9
Heavy paper (A4R, B5R,
8.5 x 11R/8.5 x 5.5R/
16KR)
18 18 18 12
Heavy paper
(Other sizes)
13 13 13 9
Photoconductor kind OPC (Drum diameter: Black; |80mm,
Color; |30mm x 3)
Copying method Electronic photo (Laser)
Developing system Dry-type dual-component magnetic brush
development
Charging system Charged saw-tooth method
Transfer system Intermediate transfer belt
Cleaning system Counter blade
Fusing system Heat roller
Waste toner disposal No toner recycling system (With waste
toner box)
Toner supply during
operation
Available (Black only)
Resolution [Writing]
600 x 600dpi
1200 x 600dpi (Black and white print only. Rotation
output inhibited. The PS extension is required.)
Smoothing
function
None
Gradation [Writing]
Black and white:
2 levels (1bit) * 256 levels equivalent
Color:
PCL/PS3: Each color 2 levels (1bit)
Each color 16 levels (4bits) * 256 levels equivalent
FIERY:
Each color 64 levels (6bits) * 256 levels equivalent
Warmup time 360 sec or less
Pre-heat Yes
With the door
open
Approx.
60 sec
After leaving the machine with the door open
for 60sec, in the standard condition and the
polygon stop conditions.
A3W *
1
297 x 420mm 12 x 18 *
1
279 x 432mm
A3 293 x 413mm 11 x 17 275 x 425mm
B4 253 x 357mm 8.5 x 14 212 x 349mm
A4 206 x 290mm 8.5 x 13 212 x 323mm
B5 178 x 250mm 8.5 x 11 212 x 272mm
A5 144 x 203mm 5.5 x 8.5 136 x 209mm
7.25 x 10.5 180 x 260mm 8K 266 x 383mm
Postcard 96 x 141mm 16K 191 x 263mm
Void area
Image loss
Top: 4 mm or less
Bottom: 4 mm or less
FR Total: 4 mm or less
100V type 200V type
Voltage / Current 100 127V, 16A 220 240V, 8A
Frequency 50/60Hz
Power source
code
Fixed type (direct) Inlet type
Power switch 2 switches (Primary switch: in the front cover;
Seconday switch: the operation panel)
(10) Power consumption
* An option (finisher, inserter, punch unit, paper pass unit) is not
included.
(11) Noise
(12) Dimensions
(13) Weight
(14) Dimensions occupied by Machine
B. Paper feed unit/Transport/Paper exit secton
(1) Paper feed section
(2) Paper feed tray
a. Tray 1/Tray 2
b. Tray 3/Tray 4
(3) Manual feed tray (Bypass tray)
100V type 200V type
Maximum rated power
consumption
1.8kW 1.84kW
In action Black and white 7.3B or less
Color 6.8B or less
Standby (Standby
mode)
Black and white/Color 5.5B or less
Outer dimensions 795 (W) x 715 (D) x 1225 (H) mm
(31-19/64 (W) x 28-9/64 (D) x 48-7/32 (H) inch)
Footprint 795 (W) x 715 (D) mm
(31-19/64 (W) x 28-9/64 (D) inch)
Main unit Approx. 209 kg (460 lbs)
Main unit + Developer + Toner cartridge Approx. 214 kg (471 lbs)
Dimensions occupied by machine
(with multi bypass extended)
1130 (W) x 715 (D) mm
(44-31/64 (W) x 28-9/64 (D) inch
Form Standard: Fourfold feeder tray + multi bypass
Maximum: Fourfold feeder tray (serial LCC + 2
trays) + multi bypass + large capacity feeder tray
(Normal or large)
Heater (Engine part) Service parts
Tray 1 Tray 2
Paper size A4, 8.5 x 11 A4, 8.5 x 11
Changing of paper
size
Guide adjustment and size setting by serviceman
Paper type setting Yes
Default paper size
setting
Inch system: 8.5 x 11
AB system: A4
Feedable paper
type/weight
Plain paper: 60 105g/m
2
(16 - 28lbs)
Paper capacity 1200 sheets
(80g/m
2
, 21lbs)
800 sheets
(80g/m
2
, 21lbs)
Paper type Plain paper, pre-printed paper (not including
backing paper), recycled paper, letter head, pre-
punched paper, colored paper
* Users can set up all of these paper types.
Paper size detection No
Detection of
remaining paper
100%, 33%, 6%, none 100%, 50%, 9%, none
Tray rising/falling
time
Rising: Within 12 seconds
* Time required from tray insertion to empty
detection without paper.
Falling: Self-weight falling
Tray 3 Tray 4
Paper size A3W, A3, B4, A4, A4R,
B5, B5R, A5R, 8K, 16K,
16KR, 12 x 18, 11 x 17,
8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13,
8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R,
7.25 x 10.5R, 5.5 x 8.5R,
Special size (uncertain
paper size) inhibited.
A3W, A3, B4, A4, A4R,
B5, B5R, 8K, 16K, 16KR,
12 x 18, 11 x 17,
8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13,
8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R,
7.25 x 10.5R
Changing of paper
size
By users
Default paper size
setting
Maximum width of paper guide
Feedable paper
type/weight
Plain paper:
60 105g/m
2

(16 - 28lbs)
Heavy paper 1 (including
gloss paper):
106 209g/m
2

(28 - 56lbs)
OHP
Label paper
Tab paper
Plain paper:
60 105g/m
2

(16 28lbs)
Heavy paper 1 (including
gloss paper):
106 209g/m
2

(28 56lbs)
Paper capacity Plain paper:
500 sheets
(80g/m2, 21lbs)
OHP: 40 sheets
Heavy paper: 80 sheets
Tab paper: 40 sheets
Gloss paper: 40 sheets
Other special paper:
1 sheet
Plain paper:
500 sheets
(80g/m
2
, 21lbs)
Paper type Plain paper, pre-printed
paper (not including
backing paper), recycled
paper, letter head, pre-
punched paper, colored
paper, heavy paper 1,
label paper, OHP,
tab paper
* Users can set up all of
these paper types.
Plain paper, pre-printed
paper (not including
backing paper), recycled
paper, letter head, pre-
punched paper, colored
paper, heavy paper 1
* Users can set up all of
these paper types.
Paper size
detection
AB auto detection:
A3W, A3, B4, A4, A4R,
B5, B5R, A5R, 8.5 x 13
AB auto detection:
A3W, A3, B4, A4, A4R,
B5, B5R, 8.5 x 13
Inch auto detection:
12 x 18, 11 x 17,
8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11,
8.5 x 11R, 7.25 x 10.5R,
5.5 x 8.5R
Inch auto detection:
12 x 18, 11 x 17,
8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11,
8.5 x 11R, 7.25 x 10.5R
Detection of
remaining paper
Level detection
(3 levels: 100%, 67%, 33%, none)
Paper size A3W, A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 8K, 16K,
16KR, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11,
8.5 x 11R, 7.25 x 10.5R, 5.5 x 8.5R, Envelope
(Monarch / Com-10 / DL / C5 / Rectangle 3 /
Western 2 / Western 4)
* For Western type 2 with the inserter installed,
paper feed is inhibited.
Extra Size (Tab paper is limited to A4; tab width
12mm-20mm / 8.5 x 11; tab width 6.1-17mm)
Changing of
paper size
Guide adjustment by users
Feedable paper
type/weight
Thin paper: 55 59g/m
2
(15 16 lbs)
Plain paper: 60 105g/m
2
(16 28 lbs)
Heavy paper 1 (including gloss paper):
106 209g/m
2
(28 56 lbs)
Heavy paper 2 : 210 256g/m
2
(56 68 lbs)
Envelope: 75 90g/m
2
(20 24 lbs)
OHP
Label paper
Tab paper
Gloss paper
Tray 3 Tray 4
(4) Double-sided
(5) Paper exit tray (Center tray)
(6) Paper exit tray unit (Right tray)
C. Scanner section
(1) Resolution/Gradation (or Levels)
(2) Original cover
(3) Duplex single pass feeder
Paper capacity Plain paper: 100 sheets (80g/m
2
)
Envelope: 20 sheets
OHP: 20 sheets
Heavy paper: 40 sheets
Tab paper: 20 sheets
Gloss paper: 20 sheets *
Other special paper: 1 sheet
* The gloss paper is sucked under a high humidity
environment to cause double feed or misfeed. In
such a case, manually supply paper sheet by
sheet (Select heavy paper).
Paper type Plain paper, pre-printed paper (excluding back print
paper), recycled paper, letter head, pre-punched
paper, colored paper, heavy paper 1, heavy paper 2,
thin paper, label paper, OHP, tab paper, envelope.
* Users can set up all of these paper types.
Paper size
detection
AB auto
detect
A3W, A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R,
A5R, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11, 11 x 17
Inch auto
detect
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11,
8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5R, 7.25 x 10.5R,
A3, B4, A4, B5
For China
(AB auto
detect)
A3W, A3, A4, A4R, B5R, A5R, 8K,
16K, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11
For China
(Inch auto
detect)
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11,
8.5 x 11R, 7.25 x 10.5R, 5.5 x 8.5R,
A3, B4, A4, B5
Detection of
remaining paper
Yes or No only
Method Non-Stack
Paper size A3W, A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 8K, 16K,
16KR, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13,
8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 7.25 x 10.5R, 5.5 x 8.5R
Paper weight
(for duplex operation)
Plain paper: 60-105g/m
2
(16-28 lbs)
Heavy paper 1: 106-209g/m
2
(28-56 lbs)
Logo paper support For paper such as letterhead paper with front-
back attributes, the engine control must be cared
for printing side.
Exit location/method Face down in the main unit
Exit capacity 250 sheets (A4 or 8.5 x 11 (color recommended
paper))
Exit paper size/type All feedable paper
Exit tray full
detection
Yes
Form Exit tray unit
Transport standard Center standard
Ejecting location/
method
External ejection from the right face of the main unit
/ face-down ejection
Tray capacity 100 sheets (A4 or 8.5 x 11 (color recommended
paper))
Ejected paper size/
type
Any feedable paper except heavy paper 2 (210
256g/m
2
(56 68 lbs)), envelope and tab paper.
Full tray detection Yes (Detection on the main unit)
Installation Installation by service personnel.
Scan
resolution (dpi)
Copy mode
Black and white Color
Original
Cover
600 x 600dpi
600 x 300dpi
(Default)
600 x 600dpi
(Default)
DSPF 600 x 600dpi
600 x 300dpi
(Default)
600 x 600dpi
(Default)
Transmission
resolution (dpi)
Image
process
(Scanner)
100 x 100dpi / 200 x 200dpi / 300 x 300dpi
/ 400 x 400dpi / 600 x 600dpi
(Internet Fax)
200 x 100dpi (Half tone not allowed) /
200 x 200dpi / 200 x 400dpi /
400 x 400dpi / 600 x 600dpi
(Fax)
Standard (203.2 x 97.8dpi) (Half tone not
allowed) / Fine (203.2 x 195.6dpi) /
Super fine (203.2 x 391dpi) /
Ultra fine (406.4 x 391dpi)
PC-Fax/
PC-Internet
Fax
200 x 100dpi / 200 x 200dpi / 200 x 400dpi
/ 400 x 400dpi / 600 x 600dpi
Network
TWAIN
75dpi / 100dpi / 150dpi / 200dpi / 300dpi /
400dpi / 600dpi or custom: 50-9600dpi
Exposure lamp Xenon
Scan levels 10bits
Output levels Fax mode: 1bit
Internet Fax mode: 1bit
Scanner mode:
Black and white: 1bit
Gray scale: 8bit
Full color: Each color RGB 8bit
Scan range 297 x 432mm (12 x 17)
Original cover
standard
location
Left back as standard
Detection Yes
Detection size Auto detect
Inch-1 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5
Inch-2 11 x 17, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5
AB-1 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5
AB-2 A3, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 8.5 x 13
AB-3 B4, A4, A4R, A5, 8K, 16K, 16KR
Manual
detection size
Yes
Heater
(Scanner part)
Service parts
Form DSPF (Duplex single pass feeder)
Scan speed Black and white
(A4/8.5 x 11)
Color
(A4/8.5 x 11)
Copy 1-sided: 65 sheets/min
(600 x 300dpi, 1bit)
2-sided: 65 pages/min
(600 x 300dpi, 1bit)
1-sided:
35 sheets/min
(600 x 600dpi,
4bit)
2-sided:
35 pages/min
(600 x 600dpi,
4bit)
Fax 1-sided: 65 sheets/min
(203.2 x 97.8dpi
(Standard), 1bit)
(203.2 x 97.8dpi
(Standard), 1bit)
Scanner 1-sided: 65 sheets/min

(200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
1-sided:
35 sheets/min
(200 x 200dpi,
8bit)
(when in full color)
2-sided:
35 pages/min
(200 x 200dpi,
8bit)
Internet
Fax
1-sided: 65 sheets/min
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
Document set
orientation
Up standard
D. Fuser section
(1) Type
2. Functional specifications
A. Specifications of copy functions
(1) Copy speed (Continuous copy speed) (cpm)
a. Tray 1 - 4, LCC (Reduction/Normal/Enlargement)
b. Large LCC (Reduction/Normal/Enlargement)
* 8K and 16K are for China only.
c. Manual feed (Reduction/Normal/Enlargement)
*1: Switched by the service simulation setting
(2) First copy time
* Feeding A4/8.5 x 11 paper from the main unit tray 2
* Polygon in rotation
* Auto Color Selection OFF/Auto Color for color OFF
* Document tray lift-up complete state when the DSPF is used.
Document standard
location
Center standard (Rear one-side standard for
random feeding)
Document
transportation method
Seat through method
Document sizes Inch-1 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11,
8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5, A3, A4
Inch-2 11 x 17, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11,
8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5, A3, A4
AB-1 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5,
11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11
AB-2 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5,
11 x 17, 8.5 x 11, 216 x 330
AB-3 A3, B4, A4, A4R, A5, 8K, 16K,
16KR, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 11, 216 x
330
Long
paper
800mm (31-1/2)
(Black and white 2 levels only)
Mixed feeding (same type / same width)
possible
Random feeding (feeding of different types /
different widths)
Only the following combinations of 2 size types
are allowed: A3 and B4; B4 and A4R; A4 and
B5; B5 and A5; and 11-inch and 8.5-inch.
Document
weights
1-side Thin
paper
35 49g/m
2
(9 13 lbs)
Plain
paper
50 128g/m
2
(13 34 lbs)
2-side 50 128 g/m
2
(13 34 lbs)
Document carrying
capacity
Maximum: 150 sheets (80g/m
2
, 21lbs), or
Maximum thickness: 19.5 mm, 3/4 inch or less
Types of document that
may not be transported
The following documents are NOT allowed:
OHP, second original drawing, tracing paper,
carbon paper, thermal paper, wrinkled / broken
/ torn document, document with cuts and
pastes, documents printed by an ink ribbon,
and perforated document (Perforated
document by punch unit is allowed.)
Paper detection Yes
Paper detection size Auto detection (Switching one type of detection
unit through system setting)
Inch-1 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11,
8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5, A3, A4
Inch-2 11 x 17, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11,
8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5, A3, A4
AB-1 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5,
11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11
AB-2 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5,
11 x 17, 8.5 x 11, 216 x 330
AB-3 A3, B4, A4, A4R, A5, 8K, 16K,
16KR, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 11, 216 x
330
Paper feeding direction Right hand feeding
Simultaneous double-
sided scanning
Enable for either of B/W (black and white) and
color.
System Heat roller attachment system
Paper size
Black and white
Color
MX-5500N MX-6200N MX-7000N
A3W, 12 x 18 29 31 37 18
A3, 11 x 17, 8K 30 33 38 19
B4, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13 35 38 44 22
A4, A5R, B5, 8.5 x 11,
5.5 x 8.5R, 16K
55 62 70 41
A4R, B5R, 8.5 x 11R,
7.25 x 10.5R, 16KR
40 44 51 26
Extra 30 31 37 18
Paper size
Black and white
Color
MX-5500N MX-6200N MX-7000N
A3W, 12 x 18 29 31 37 18
A3, 11 x 17, 8K 30 33 38 19
B4, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13 35 38 44 22
A4, A5R, B5, 8.5 x 11,
5.5 x 8.5R, 16K
55 62 70 41
A4R, B5R, 8.5 x 11R,
7.25 x 10.5R, 16KR
40 44 51 26
Paper size
Black and white
Color
MX-5500N MX-6200N MX-7000N
A3W, 12 x 18 29 30 35 13
A3, 11 x 17, 8K 30 32 37 14
B4, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13, 8K 35 36 42 15
A4, A5R, B5, 8.5 x 11,
5.5 x 8.5R, 16K
55 62 70 27
A4R, B5R, 8.5 x 11R,
7.25 x 10.5R, 16KR
40 42 49 17
OHP (A4, 8.5 x 11) 23 23 23 19
OHP (A4R, 8.5 x 11R) 18 18 18 12
OHP (Other) 13 13 13 9
Extra 29 30 35 13
Envelope 29 30 35 13
Heavy paper
(B5, A4, A5R, 8.5 x 11,
8.5 x 5.5R, 16K)
23 23 23 19
Heavy paper
(Postcard HIGH) *
1
23 23 23 19
Heavy paper
(Postcard LOW) *
1
13 13 13 9
Heavy paper (A4R, B5R,
8.5 x 11R/8.5 x 5.5R/
16KR)
18 18 18 12
Heavy paper
(Other sizes)
13 13 13 9
Platen
/
DSPF
MX-5500N MX-6200N MX-7000N
Black
and
white
Color
Black
and
white
Color
Black
and
white
Color
Platen 4.5 sec 8.4 sec 4.5 sec 8.4 sec 4.0 sec 8.4 sec
DSPF 9.0 sec 15.5
sec
9.0 sec 15.5
sec
9.0 sec 15.0
sec
(3) Job speed
a. Document changing speed (in copy mode)
* The copy speed in combination of the main unit and the auto
document feed user is defined.
* S to S: A4/8.5 x 11 document, 11 pages and 1 copy (not includ-
ing the first copy)
Black and white: 600 x 300dpi
Color: 600 x 600dpi (default)
(4) Continuous copy
(5) Resolution
(6) Copy document
(7) Copy magnification ratio
(8) Density, copy image quality processing
(9) Color copy mode
(10) Color adjustment
(11) Copy functions
MX-5500N MX-6200N MX-7000N
Black
and
white
Color
Black
and
white
Color
Black
and
white
Color
S to S 55cpm
(100%)
35cpm
(85.4%)
62cpm
(100%)
35cpm
(85.4%)
65cpm
(92.9%)
35cpm
(85.4%)
Multi max. number 999 sheets
Scan resolution 600 x 600dpi
Writing resolution 600 x 600dpi
Document Max. A3 (11 x 17)
Document type Sheet/Book original
Copy
magnification ratio
Normal: 1:10.8%
AB series: 25%, 50%, 70%, 81%, 86%, 100%,
115%, 122%, 141%, 200%, 400%
Inch series: 25%, 50%, 64%, 77%, 100%, 121%,
129% , 200%, 400%
Zoom 25 400% (25 200% for DSPF)
Preset
magnification ratio
4
XY zoom Yes
Exposure mode Automatic (Color: Auto Color, Black and white:
Character AE)
Text,Text/Printed Photo, Print photo, Text/Photo,
Photo, Map, Pale-color document.
Copy document
mode
Effective for Text, Text/Printed photo, Printed photo
mode.
Color emphasis Effective for Text, Text/Printed photo, Printed photo,
Text/Photo, Photo, Map mode.
Manual steps 9 steps
Toner save mode Black and white: Yes
Color: Yes
Off on printed photo, photo or copy document
Auto Color
selection copy
Copy mode automatically discerning color/black and
white.
Full color mode Enforced full color mode
2-color mode Red-black mode (Change red point in document into
other color)
Mode to select black and another color from R/G/B/
C/M/Y
Single color mode Mode to select one color from R/G/B/C/M/Y
Black and white
copy mode
Enforced black and white copy mode
RGB adjustment Yes
Color balance Yes
Saturation adjustment Yes
Brightness adjustment Yes
Contrast adjustment No
Sharpness adjustment Yes
Background removal Yes
Auto color calibration Allowed by system setting
Registration adjustment Allowed by system setting
Function Automatic paper
selection
Yes (Mixed/random size feeding
supported)
Automatic
magnification selection
Yes
Paper type select Yes
(Type setting allowed)
Auto tray switching Yes
Rotated copy Yes
Large rotated copy exceeding A4
supported
Electronic sort Yes
Job reservation Yes
Program call/
registration
Yes (Program name registration to
be examined)
Preheat function Yes
Conditions set up by system setting
Auto power shutoff Yes
Conditions set up by system setting
User authentication 1000
Indeterminate
document paper size
input
Yes
Indeterminate paper
size input
Yes
2-sided copy direction
switch
Yes
Special
function
Margin shift Yes
Edge/center erase Yes
Dual page copy Yes
Tandem copy Yes
Cover/insertion Yes
Tab paper insertion Yes (Insertion only. Tab copy not
allowed. Staple/Punch not allowed.)
OHP insertion Yes
Tab copy Yes
Centering Yes
2in1/4in1 Yes
Pamphlet Yes
Card shot Yes
Book copy Yes
Large capacity
document mode
Yes
Black-white inversion Yes (Only black-white copy allowed/
color copy not allowed upon setup
Not ready)
Multi-page
Enlargement
Yes
Mirror image Yes
Photo repeat Yes
Date print Yes
Character print Yes
Stamp Yes
Page printing Yes
Proof copy Yes
Mixed document
feeder
Yes (Random + MIX)
Document control Yes (with Data Security Kit
equipped)
B. Image send function
(1) Mode
(2) Image send function
(Push send from the main unit)
a. Support system
b. Support image
c. Image processing
d. Specification of Addresses
Scanner Scan to E-mail
Scan to Desktop
Scan to FTP
Scan to Folder(SMB)
Scan to USB memory
Scan to E-mail with Meta
Scan to Desktop with Meta
Scan to FTP with Meta
Scan to SMB with Meta
Fax Fax to Fax (manual)
Fax to E-mail (inbound routing)
Fax to / FTP/Desktop/SMB/E-mail (Document Admin)
Internet
Fax
Internet Fax to Internet Fax (manual)
Internet Fax to E-mail (inbound routing)
Internet Fax to FTP/Desktop/SMB/E-mail (Document Admin)
* Full mode supported (including Simple mode)
Item Scanner Internet Fax
Corresponding
server/protocol
SMTP
FTP(TCP/IP)
SMB
POP server
SMTP server
ESMTP server
Item Scanner Internet Fax Fax
File format Black and white:
TIFF, PDF, Encrypted
PDF
Color: Gray scale, color
TIFF, JPEG, PDF,
Encrypted PDF
Black and white:
TIFF-FX
(TIFF-F, TIFF-S)
---
Compression
method
[Black and white]
Non-compression
G3 (1-dimensional)
= MH (Modified
Huffman)
G4
= MMR (Modified
MR)
[Color/Gray scale]
JPEG (High, middle,
low)
MH, MMR MH, MR,
MMR,
JBIG
Specified pages
per size (number
of page(s)
specification
allowed)
Yes --- ---
Original
scanning
color
Full color, gray
scale, black and
white
black and white
Auto color
selection
Color start key:
Auto
(judge as color:
Full color, judge
as black and
white:
Monochrome/gray
scale)
Full color black and
white start key:
Monochrome
Gray scale
---
Halftone
reproduction
Equivalent of 256 steps
Density
adjustment
Auto + 5 steps
(The image quaity of
"Auto" is the same
as that of "Manual =
3" when selecting
full color/gray scale.)
Auto + 5 steps
Black and white
enabled
Auto
Manual
Color key enabled
When selecting
"Auto":
Text/printed photo
Text/photo
Text
When selecting
"Manual":
Text/printed photo
Text/Photo
Text
Photo
Printed photo
Map
---
Selection of
image quality
--- Half tone (Black and white only)
ON/OFF
Resolution
(depends on
file format/
transmission
method)
100 x 100 dpi 200 x 100dpi
(Half tone
not allowed)
Standard
(203.2 x 97.8dpi)
(middle tone not
allowed)
200 x 200 dpi 200 x 200dpi Fine
(203.2 x 195.6 dpi)
300 x 300 dpi 200 x 400dpi Super
(203.2 x 391dpi)
400 x 400 dpi 400 x 400dpi Ultra
(406.4 x 391 dpi)
600 x 600 dpi 600 x 600dpi ---
Moire
reduction
mode
Yes ---
DSPF duplex
simultaneous
scanning
Yes (Black and white)
Yes (Color) ---
Notes'
security
feature
Yes Yes ---
Address
specification
Specification by one-touch/group/direct address entry.
Entry from soft keyboard. (Scanner/Internet Fax)
Entry from 10-key. (Fax)
Selection from LDAP server
Input from the externally connected keyboard
Setting of default
address *
1
Yes ---
Number of One-
touch address
key registration
Total (number of key): Maximum 999
Number of
Group (1 key)
address
registtation
Number of Group (1 key) address registration :
maximum 500
Number of Group key registration : 5000 (Total
address number included in /999 key)
Program 48
Direct entry of
addresses
Input from the soft keyboard and
the externally connected keyboard
Entry by 10-key,
# key, * key
Chain dial --- Yes (pause key)
Resend Call up nearest 8 addresses which are specified as a
single destination. *
2
Shortcut for
address
selection (quick
key)
Use the 10-key to call up registered numbers of
addresses.
CC/BCC sending Yes ---
*1: The scanner mode allows setting the default address.
To transmit data, users only have to set the original and press
the start key.
*2: Except for FTP, Desktop, SMB, USB memory and Broadcast.
*3: Function to set up a text message that will be added
automatically to the message body upon mail transmission.
Editing upon transmission is not allowed.
e. Specification of Multiple Addresses
* Broadcast transmission by Scanner, Internet Fax and Fax is
allowed. (Black and white (2 value))
f. Transmission function
g. Reception function
Subjet Selective/direct entry from the list ---
File name Selective/direct entry from the list
Return mail
address
Selective/direct
entry from the
list/selection
from LDAP
server
---
(1 default
address fixed
as sender
name)
---
Transmission
message
(message body)
Selective/direct entry from the list.
(Number of characters: Maximum
of 1800 half-size characters (900
full size characters))
---
Mail footer
preset *
3
Yes ---
Inhibition of
address
registration from
the main unit
Yes
Inhibition of
address
registration from
a Web screen
Yes
Inhibition of
registration from
the network
scanner tool
Yes
Inhibition of
"Resend" in the
FAX/image send
mode
Yes
Inhibition of
selection from an
address book
Yes
Inhibition of
direct input
Yes
Inhibition of send
from the PC
Internet Fax
Yes
Inhibition of send
of PC-Fax
Yes
Broadcast Yes (500 destinations)
(E-mail/FTP/Desktop
allowed)
Yes (500 destinations)
Memory
transmission
94 destinations in all
On-hook --- Yes
Quick online
transmission
--- Yes
Direct transmission --- Yes
(Switching:
Memory
transmission
Direct
transmission)
Automatically-
reduced
transmission
--- Yes
Rotated
transmission
--- Yes
Scaled transmission Yes
Enlargement/reduction is allowed only from a fixed
size to another. Reduction may be done on the
receiver side with Internet Fax sending.
Recall
mode
Busy --- --- Yes
--- --- Number/time
to be set up
through
system setup
Long original
transmission
Yes
Maximum of 800mm (single side only/black and
white 2 values only)
Change of the
number of pages for
each file
Yes ---
Restriction on
transmission size
Yes ---
Large capacity
original mode
Yes
Scanning of thin
paper
Yes
Mixed originals
feeder
Yes (Random + MIX)
Default date sender
transmission
--- Yes (ON only)
Item Internet Fax Fax
Automatic reception Yes
Manual reception Yes Yes
Switching from manual
reception to automatic
reception. (France only)
Memory reception Yes
Fixed size reduced
reception
Yes
Rotated reception Yes
Setting of received data
print condition
--- Equal size print
(partition not allowed)
Equal size print
(partition allowed)
Equal or reduced size
print
2-sided reception Condition setting through system setting
Automatic reduction
setting upon receiving
A3
Yes
(North America only)
Yes
(North America,
Philippine only)
Automatic reduction
setting upon receiving
letter
Yes
(except North
America only)
Yes
(except North America,
Philippine only)
Address/Domain-
specified reception
allowed
Yes (50 domains) ---
Address/Domain-
specified reception not
allowed. (To be
rejected)
Yes (50 domains) ---
Reception from a
specific number not
allowed. (To be
rejected)
--- Specified numbers only
(50 numbers /20 digits)
External phone
connection remote
--- Yes
Received data bypass
output
Yes
Reception confirmation
cycle setting
Setting by 0-8 hours
(Each minute)
---
POP3 communications
timeout setting
Setting by 30-300
seconds (Every 30
seconds)
---
Body text print select
setting
Yes ---
Transfer function upon
disabling of output.
Yes (1 receiver (of transfer) registration)
h. Report/list function
i. Other Functions
* E-mail address can be set for the F-code relay broadcast.
j. Transmission method
k. Record size
l. F code communication
m. Registration-related settings
Rooting function
Internet Fax/
Fax to E-mail (Transfer
of Internet Fax/Fax
reception data to
E-mail, inbound routing)
Yes
Exit tray setting Yes
Setting set of received
data
--- Yes
Staple function of
received data
--- Yes
Auto wake up print Yes
Received data print
hold function
Yes
Image sending
activity report
Yes
Time-specified output
Output with memory full
* Maximum of 200 times including both
transmission and reception
Transaction report Yes
Address/phone
number table
Yes
Group table Yes
Program table Yes
Memory box table
(F code)
--- Yes
Communication
original contents print
--- Always print/Upon error/no print
List of rejected
reception numbers
--- Yes
List of addresses
allowed or not
allowed for reception
--- Yes ---
Inbound routing table
list
No Yes
Document Admin list Yes
Time
specification
Yes
Polling reception --- Yes
Bulletin board
transmission
--- Yes
Up to 100
registrations allowed
with bulletin board,
confidential and
relay broadcast all
combined. (Free
area: 1 registration)
Setting of the
number of
transmission: 1 / no
limit.
Own number
sending
--- Yes
Own name select --- Yes
Page number
print
--- Yes
Date print --- Yes (Date can be expressed
alternatively)
Polling protection
function
--- Yes
Page partition
transmission
Yes
Confidential
(receiver unit)
--- Yes
(F code method)
Relay broadcast
instructions
--- Yes
(F code method)
Fax to E-mail
(F code) *
--- Yes
Edge erase Yes
Center erase Yes
2 in 1 No
(Allowed for
Fax /Internet
Fax broadcast)
Yes
Background
removal
Yes
(Only color
and gray
scale)
---
Card scan Yes (Equivalent or enlargement up to the paper width.
The maximum enlargement is not allowed to exceed
200%)
Confirm
transmission
--- Yes
Timeout time
Setting for 1
minute 240
hours/each
minute
---
Forward data
transmission/
reception
Yes
Item Fax
Transmission time 2 seconds level (Super G3 / JBIG)
6 seconds level (G3 ECM)
Modem speed Automatic fall-back : 33.6kbps 2.4kbps
Intercommunication Super G3 / G3
Communication
line
General membership telephone line (PSTN),
independent business line (PBX), F net.
R-key for PBX setting: Germany, France
Maximum number
of lines
1 line only
ECM Yes
Maximum record width 293mm (11-17/32)
Record size A3 A5 (11 x 17 5.5 x 8.5)
Item Fax
Sub-address Yes (20 digits)
Password Yes (20 digits)
Item Scanner Internet
Fax
Fax
One-touch/group *
1
E-mail
FTP
Desktop
SMB
Internet Fax
Fax
999 destinations (Max. 200 items for FTP, Desktop,
and SMB)
Use of LDAP allowed
Up to 500 registered addresses for each group dial.
Registered name in 18 full-size character (36 half-
size characters)
Fax only:
One-touch dial receiver number registration: within
64 digits for receiver number + sub-address +
passcode (including /).
Default address
setup
Yes ---
Desktop
registration
Yes
Registration by
using Web or
NST (network
scanner tool)
---
Program Registration of addresses (groups), settings
(density, image quality) and special functions in one
set is allowed. (48 of them)
*1: Since Scanner/Internet Fax/Fax uses the common address
book, the number of addresses allowed for registration is the
sum total of all modes.
*2: The book for address selection is used when a scan sender is
selected.
*3: Quick key is the function to select an address based on the
registered number of each address within the book for address
selection. Users should be able to select a quick key number.
n. Telephone functions
o. Sound settings
*1: Large/middle/small. Setup by the system settings.
*2: 14 levels and no sound. Setup by the system settings.
*3: PATTERN 1/2/3/4. Setup by the system settings.
Different sound should be selectable for each of reception /
transmission success/transmission and reception error.
*4: Setup by the system settings. 5 steps of 2.0 - 4.0 seconds.
*5: Setup by the system settings. 2-steps setting for every 0.3 or
0.7 second.
p. Others
C. PC-Fax functions
(1) PC-Fax/PC-Internet Fax operating environment
(2) PC-Fax/PC-Internet Fax functions
Number of memory
boxes
--- Total 100 can be
registered
including bulletin
board /
confidential / relay
broadcast.
Registration
name: 9 full-size
characters (18
half-size
characters)
Reply-To
registration
1000 (user
registration
from Web) *
2
E-mail only
---
Number of sender
registration
--- 1 (20
characters)
1 (default) with
20 characters
Number of sender
selection
registration
--- Total: 18
registrations (20
characters)
(Sender selection:
In addition to
default, 18
registrations
allowed)
Registration of
polling approval
number
--- 10 numbers / 20
digits
Quick key (short
cut registration) *
3
Yes (001 999)
Retrieving/
scanning of
registered data to
other model
Yes (By address book conversion utility)
Import/export of
address book
Yes (By storage backup)
Item Fax
On-hook function Yes
Setting of pause time Yes (1-15 seconds)
Telephone transmission
during power outage
No (External telephone transmission
allowed)
Tone pulse switching Availability of setting (10 / 20 / TONE /
auto detection) and their default values
are different depending on destination.
On-hook sound Sound volume
setting
--- Yes *
1
Sound volume
for calling
Sound volume
setting
--- Yes *
2
Line monitor
sound
Sound volume
setting
--- Yes *
2
Reception
sound
Sound volume
setting
--- Yes *
1
Yes *
2
Sound pattern --- Yes *
3
Transmission
success sound
Sound volume
setting
--- Yes *
2
3
Time setting for
communication
ending sound
--- Yes *
4
Item Scanner Internet
Fax
Fax
Transmission
and reception
error sound
Sound volume
setting
--- Yes *
2
3
Time setting for
communication
ending sound
--- Yes *
5
Communication
error sound
Sound volume
setting
--- Yes *
2
---
Sound setting
for end of
original reading
(image send)
Sound volume
setting
Yes *
1
PC-Fax --- Yes
PC-Internet Fax --- Yes ---
FAST --- Yes
(U.S.A only)
Distinctive ring
detection
--- Setting for
each
destination
Trial mode Scanner: Yes
(Standard)
Meta data: Yes
No ---
OS Windows 98
Windows Me
Windows NT4.0 Workstation (Service Pack5)
IE4.0 or more
Windows 2000
Windows XP Home Edition
Windows XP Professional
Windows Server 2003
PC IBM PC/AT compatible machine
CPU Pentium II 300MHz or more
Monitor 640x480 Pixels or more of screen resolution
256 or more of colors
Memory 64MB or more
HDD Free space of 50MB or more
Interface USB2.0
10/100BASE-TX
Communications
protocol
LPR/lp, Port9100(RAW), IPP, USB2.0
PC-Fax Send Yes (with Fax equipped)
Maximim of 64 digits for Fax number (including
sub-address and passcode)
PC-Internet Fax Send Yes (Necessary options: Internet Fax
expansion kit)
Maximum of 64 digits for Internet Fax address
Resolution 200 x 100 dpi/200 x 200 dpi/
200 x 400 dpi/400 x 400 dpi
Transmission original
sizes
A3/B4/A4/A5/B5/11 x 17/8.5 x 14/8.5 x 13/
8.5 x 11/5.5 x 8.5/8K/16K
Compression method MH/MMR
Braodcast transmission Yes (Fax, Internet Fax mixture possible.
Maximum of 500)
D. Remote PC Functions (Network TWAIN)
Pull scan (TWAIN) specification
E. Printer function
(1) Platform
(2) Support OS
*1: The driver for Windows NT is not bundled in the CD-ROM
included in the package.
(3) Command system
(4) Installed fonts
(5) Support print channel
(6) Command compatibility
F code transmission Yes Sub-address Yes maximum of
20 digits
Passcode Yes maximum of
20 digits
Phone book
registration/
transmission function
Yes
Attach a cover sheet
function
Yes (Not allowed for bradcast transmission)
Create cover sheets
function
Yes
Own number send Yes (Always printed)
Preview function Yes
Transmission
confirmation (Notice to
PC by NJR)
Yes
Document filing function Filing Yes
Quick File Yes
PC-Fax Transmission
log
Yes (Re-transmission not allowed)
User authentication Yes
R-KEY (Germany/
France only)
Yes
Interfaces LAN Yes
USB No
OS's Windows 98/Me/2000/XP/2003 Server
WHQL validated OS's Windows 2000/XP
Hardware environment System: Must satisfy the operational conditions
for each OS.
HDD: 10MB or more: 100MB or more
recommended.
Monitor: 800 x 600 dots or more; 256 or more of
colors must be available.
Other: Network port
2-sided scan Yes
Color modes Mono 2 gradation/Mono Diffusion/Gray scale/
Full Color
Resolutions 75dpi/100dpi/150dpi/200dpi/300dpi/400dpi/
600dpi or custom: 50-9600dpi
Scanning ranges A3/A4/A4R/A5/A5R/B4/B5/B5R/11 x 17/
8.5 x 14/8.5 x 13/8.5 x 11/8.5 x 11R/7.25 x 10.5/
7.25 x 10.5R/5.5 x 8.5/5.5 x 8.5R/8K/16K/
16KR/Auto/Auto(Mixed size)/Custom
* "Auto" includes the same width (Mix).
"Auto (Mixed size)" means random.
Preview function Yes
Zoom preview function Yes
Rotated scan Yes (90-degree/ 180-degree/ 270-degree)
Brightness/contrast
adjustment
Auto/manual (-100 +100)
Gamma adjustment Yes
Color matching None/For Printer/For CRT/For LCD/ICM
Edge emphasis None/Normal/Sharp/Blur
Black-white inversion Yes
Selection of illuminant
color
Yes (Red/Green/Blue/White)
Selection of threshold
value
Auto/manual (1 254)
Addition of void area Allowed (4 sides; 2.5mm for each)
Save of setup contents Yes
Save of preview image Yes
Display unit of
scanning range
Pixel/mm/inch
Notes's security
function
Yes
Image acquision
method from the main
unit
Non-compression
IBM PC/AT compatible machine
Macintosh
Custom
PCL5c/6
Windows 98/Me
Windows NT 4.0 SP5 or later *
1
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Windows Server 2003
Custom
PS
Windows 98/Me
1
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Windows Server 2003
PPD Windows 98/Me
1
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Windows Server 2003
MacOS 9.0-9.2.2, x 10.1.5, x 10.2.8, x 10.3.3 10.3.9, x 10.4
PCL5c compatible Standard
PCL6 compatible
BMLinkS No
PS3 compatible Option (PS3 expansion kit: MX-PKX1)
Fiery controller Adobe
PostScript3
Option (Fiery print controller: MX-PEX2)
Standard PCL5c/PCL6 Roman outline fonts = 80 types
Line printer font (Bitmap) = 1 type
Option PCL5c/PCL6 Bar code fonts = 28 types (Can be provided
by the flash ROM kit as well)
PS3 Roman outline fonts = 136 types
USB USB 1.1: Windows 98/Me/2000/Server 2003/XP only
USB 2.0 (High speed): Windows 2000/XP only
PSERVER/
RPRINT for
NetWare
environment
Print channel in PSERVER/PRINT mode to be used in
netware environment
LPR UNIX LPR/LPD command-compatible print channel
IPP Print channel in compliance with IPP1.0
PAP:
EtherTalk
(AppleTalk)
Print channel to be used for Machintosh environment
FTP Equipped with the function to print data received via
built-in FTP server
NetBEUI Microsoft NetBEUI compatible print channel
Port9100 9100 TCP port (Raw Port) supported
HTTP Web Submit Print supported
POP3 E-Mail To Print supported
PCL5c
compatibility
PCL5c must be compatible with HP Color Laser Jet
4600.
PCL XL
compatibility
PCL XL must be compatible with HP Color Laser Jet
4200.
PCL CXL must be compatible with HP Color Laser Jet.
PostScript3
compatibility
Must be compatible with Adobe PS3.
(7) Environmental settings
(8) Print functions
Setting item Overview
Initial setting Basic settings for printer use such as number of copies
or printing direction.
PCL seting Setting of PCL symbols and fonts
PS setting Whether or not printing is allowed upon PS error is to
be set up.
Function Content PCL6/5c PS (Option)
Multiple Pamphlet Binds multiple pamphlet outputs into a single booklet. Yes Yes
Bar code font JetCAPS BarDIMM emulation Yes No
Network tandem print Two units connected via network can be used simultaneously for a printout. Yes Yes (Windows
only)
Windows Cluster Print When a Windows server breaks down, a mirror server takes over and executes the suspended
print job.
* There may be color differences between machine types
Yes Yes (Windows
only)
Encryption PDF/PDF/TIFF/
JPEG direct print
PDF/TIFF/JPEG file can be printed without printer driver.
1) Printing of e-mail attachment file
2) Printing from FTP server
3) Printing from setup file on Web page
4) USB memory
Yes (No for
encrypted
PDF/PDF)
Yes
E-Mail To Print Direct printing of an attached file upon receipt of the e-mail. Yes Yes
Pull print from front panel Browsing of FTP server from front panel and pull-printing of a specified file (direct printing). Yes Yes
FTP push print Performs direct print by data transfer from the client PC to the MFP server. Yes Yes
Print by file setup on Web
page [Web Submit Print]
Setting and direct printing of a file on network through Web page. Yes Yes
Continuous print function The function executes multiple print jobs continuously as if they are one single job even if the
unit receives an end of job command, in order to support print from the application assuming
printout on continuous pages.
Yes Yes
ROPM The function enables the printout of a multiple number of copies in one RIP processing. Yes Yes
Multi-access RIP processing must be allowed during printing. Printing must also be allowed during scanning. Yes Yes
Paper direction setting for
2-sided printing of
letterhead paper and pre-
punched paper.
Pages with front-back attribute such letterhead or punch paper are to be printed correctly in
front-back page order for 2-sided printing.
Yes Yes
Enable detection of
selected paper type in
bypass tray
For setting of bypass tray, even if the setup values on the main unit side do not match with
those on the driver side, the printing will be executed in the setting of the driver regardless of
the setup values on the main unit side.
Yes Yes
Setting environmental
control under terminal
server control
Print setting of each client is memorized under meta frame environment (auto print create
environment). (Setup for each log-in can be skipped.)
Yes Yes
Driver delivery function PAU4.0 allows the administrator to deliver a driver to clients. Yes Yes
Form overlay The function downloads a form to the main unit beforehand, sends the contained data only, and
inserts the data into the form in the main unit for printout.
Yes
(PCL5c only)
No
Planet Press Object Lune Corporation's Planet Press (Software to execute the mapping of forms (DL
beforehand) and variable data in the printer interior)
Yes Yes
Management of password
by hidden Web page
The purpose is to prevent the access even if the hidden Web page address becomes known. Yes Yes
Expansion font list In self-print of a font list, ESC command information is needed for BITMAP font. Yes
(PCL5c only)
Yes
Bonjour for Macintosh
environment
This technology detects and connects peripheral equipment on the network automatically.
The dynamic network connection (computer, peripheral equipment and software) is possible
without user setting.
No Yes
Document control print When printing, the unique pattern for prevention against unauthorized copy is embedded in
printing.
Yes (Option) Yes (Option)
Object judgement (screen
change/color change)
In the printer color mode output, object of image data (area of photograph/graphic text) is
judged. Print screen (resolution) and profile (color) are changed automatically.
PCL6: Yes
PCL5c: No
Yes
CMYK Simulation Choice of CMYK simulation is as follows.
1) Default
2) Custom
Default is defined depending on the destination of service simulation.
1. Japan = Japan Color
2. North America, China, Other abroad inch type = SWOP
3. Europe, Other abroad AB type = Euroscale
Custom profile can upload by Web setting. Notation of driver is Custom.
Example: Use DIC authorization profile. Use SWOP profile in Japan.
No Yes
(9) Windows driver function
PS: Option (Installation of the PS3 expansion kit (MX-PKX1) are
required.)
a. Image Quality
*1: Cannot be specified with the black and white mode.
*2: Cannot be used in Windows NT.
*3: Can be specified only with the black and white mode.
*4: Cannot be used in PCL5c.
b. Image Layout
*1: Pamphlet processing by MFP/Printer firmware.
*2: Margin Shift processing by MFP/Printer firmware.
ICC Profile <Source Profile>
Choice of source profile is as follows.
1) sRGB
2) AppleRGB
3) Custom
Custom profile can upload by Web setting. (The attached ICC profile on devices is available.)
<Output Profile>
There is no user selection for output profile. Sharp provides Custom profile. Upload of profile
supported by service. The tool can be set on the Web (service setting). The concrete method of
profile making is to be considered separately.
Yes Yes
Pantone color For Pantone color support, the profile upload can be made by Web setting. No Yes
Function Content PCL6/5c PS (Option)
Function
PCL6/
PCL5c
PS
Resolution 1200x600dpi (black and white
only)
No Yes
600x600dpi Yes Yes
300x300dpi Yes No
Color Mode Auto Yes Yes
Color (CMYK)
Monochrome (K only)
ICM Method *
1
OFF Yes Yes
System (Windows ICM).
Effective only when Color
Options is Custom.
Yes *
2
Yes *
2
Printer Yes Yes
Rendering Intent *
1
When ICM Method is anything
other than Custom: Default
Default
Yes Yes
When ICM Method is Custom:
Perceptual matching
Relative colorimetric
Saturation matching
Absolute colorimetric
ICC Profile
Selection *
1
Source Profile (Monitor Profile) Yes Yes
When Windows ICM is off:
None
sRGB
Apple RGB
Custom
When Windows ICM is on:
Monitor Profile installed in PC
Print Priority *
1
1 bit Yes Yes
4 bit Yes Yes
Contrast 0-100 Yes Yes
Brightness 0-100 Yes Yes
Saturation *
1
0-100 Yes Yes
Color Balance
(RGB) *
1
0-100 Yes Yes
Text To Black *
3
On / Off Yes Yes
Vector To Black *
3
On / Off Yes Yes
Toner Save (1bit
only)
On / Off Yes Yes
Screen Setting *
1
Default Yes Yes
Photo
Text & Graphic
Pure Black Print *
1
On / Off No Yes
Black Over Print *
1
On / Off No Yes
CMYK Simulation *
1
On (Default/Custom) / Off No Yes
Bitmap
Compression
None
Very High Quality
High Quality
Medium Quality
Draft
Yes *
4
Yes
Image Type Standard / Graphics / Photo /
CAD / Custom
Yes Yes
Neutral Grays *
1
Black Only
4-Color
Yes Yes
Function
PCL6/
PCL5c
PS
Paper Size A2 (Fit To Page) Yes *
3
No
A3 Wide / 12 x 18 /A3 / A4 /
A5 / B4 / B5 / 11 x 17 /
8.5 x 11 / 8.5 x 14 /
7.25 x 10.5 / 8.5 x 13 /
5.5 x 8.5 / 8K / 16K / DL / C5 /
COM10 / Monarch /
Custom Paper
Yes Yes
Orientation Portrait / Landscape Yes Yes
Rotate 180 degrees On / Off Yes Yes
N-Up Printing 1-Up / 2-Up / 4-Up / 6-Up /
8-Up / 9-Up / 16-Up
Yes Yes
Black N-Up Border On / Off Yes Yes
N-Up Order [2-Up]:
Left to Right / Right to Left
Yes Yes
[4, 6, 8, 9, 16-Up]:
Right, and Down /
Down, and Right
Left, and Down /
Down, and Left
Fit To Page A3 Wide / 12 x 18 /A3 / A4 /
A5 / B4 / B5 / 11 x 17 /
8.5 x 11 / 8.5 x 14 /
7.25 x 10.5 / 8.5 x 13 /
5.5 x 8.5 / 8K / 16K / DL / C5 /
COM10 /Monarch /
Custom Paper
Yes Yes
Poster 2x2 Yes *
3
Yes
3x3 Yes *
3
Yes
4x4 Yes *
3
Yes
Poster Dash Border On / Off Yes *
3
Yes
Poster Overlap On / Off Yes *
3
Yes
Duplex 2-Sided (Book) Yes Yes
2-Sided (Tablet)
Pamphlet *
1
2-Up Pamphlet Yes Yes
Tiled Pamphlet
Multiple 2-Up Pamphlet
Multiple Tiled Pamphlet
Margin Shift *
2
None / 10mm (0.4inch) /
20mm (0.8inch) /
30mm (1.2inch)
Yes Yes
Zoom 25 % - 400 % Yes Yes
X-Y Zoom No Yes
Mirror Image No Mirror Image No Yes
Vertical
Horizontal
c. Watermark / Overlay
d. Paper Control
e. Finishing
f. Copies
*1: Copy processing by MFP/Printer firmware
g. Object Control
h. Job Handling
i. Configuration
(10) Windows PPD, Macintosh driver functions
a. Image Quality
Function
PCL6/
PCL5c
PS
Watermark Transparent Text Yes Yes
Overwrite Text Yes Yes
Outline Text Yes Yes
Image Stamp Yes *
1
Yes
Overlay Create Overlay Yes Yes
Load Overlay
Delete
Query Page Overlay
Function
PCL6/
PCL5c
PS
Paper Selection Paper Source Yes Yes
Paper Type
Tray Status Yes Yes
Different Paper Cover Page Yes Yes
Last Page Yes Yes
Other Page Yes Yes
Transparency
Inserts
Blank / Printed Yes Yes
Tab Printing Image Shift Yes Yes
Tab Paper Printing Yes *
1
No
Output Tray Center Tray
Right Tray
Offset Tray
Saddle Stitch Tray
Yes Yes
Function
PCL6/
PCL5c
PS
Staple None
1-Staple
2-Staples
Yes Yes
Punch Yes
No
Yes Yes
Binding Edge Top
Left
Right
Yes Yes
No Offset On / Off Yes Yes
Function
PCL6/
PCL5c
PS
Copies *
1
1-999 Yes Yes
Collate On / Off Yes Yes
Carbon Copy Top Copy
Carbon Copy
Yes Yes
Function
PCL6/
PCL5c
PS
Font Source Resident Font
Download Font
Yes Yes
Download Font
Type
TrueType(Type 42) Yes Yes
Bitmap(Type 3) Yes Yes
Adobe(Type 1) No Yes
As Graphics Yes No
Graphics Mode Vector
Raster
Yes No
PS Pass Through On / Off No Yes
PS Error Printing On / Off No Yes
Job Compression None / Fastest / Fast /
Medium / Best Compression
No Yes
Function
PCL6/
PCL5c
PS
Retention Hold Only
Hold After Print
Sample Print
Password
Yes Yes
Document Filing Quick File
Main Folder
Custom Folder
Yes Yes
User Authentication Login Name
Password
Yes Yes
Job ID User Name
Job Name
Yes Yes
Notify Job End On / Off Yes Yes
Auto Job Control
Review
On / Off Yes Yes
Tandem Print On / Off Yes Yes
Function
PCL6/
PCL5c
PS
Auto Configuration Yes Yes
Set Tray Status Set Paper Size
Set Paper Type
Yes Yes
Paper Type Name
(USER TYPE 1 - 7)
Display Name Yes Yes
Font Substitution No Yes
Set Tandem Print IP Address (Slave Machine) Yes Yes
Input Tray Options Four Trays Yes Yes
Large Capacity
Tray
Large Capacity Tray
(A3W/12x18)
Large Capacity Tray
(A4/8.5x11)
Yes Yes
Output Tray
Options
None
Finisher
Saddle Stitch Finisher
Yes Yes
Punch Module None / 2 Holes / 3 Holes /
4 Holes / 4 Holes (Wide)
Yes Yes
Right Tray On / Off Yes Yes
Function
Windows
PPD
Macintosh PPD
Mac
OS9
Mac
OSX
10.1
Mac
OSX
10.2/3
Resolution 600x600 dpi Yes Yes Yes Yes
Color Mode Auto
Color(CMYK)
Monochrome(K only)
Yes Yes Yes Yes
ICM Method
ColorSync *
1
OFF Yes Yes No Yes
System Yes *
2
Yes No Yes
*3
Printer Yes Yes Yes Yes
Rendering
Intent *
1
[Mac OS]
Perceptual matching
Relative colorimetric
Saturation matching
Absolute colorimetric
[Windows]
Graphics
Pictures
Proof
Match
Yes Yes Yes Yes
ICC Profile
Selection *
1
Source Profile
(Monitor Profile)
sRGB
Apple RGB
Custom
Yes Yes No Yes
*3
Print Priority 1 bit Yes Yes Yes Yes
4 bit Yes Yes Yes Yes
Brightness *
4
0-100 No No No Yes
Saturation *
4
0-100 No No No Yes
*1: Specification depending on OS.
*3: Can be used in MacOSX 10.3.
*4: Some OS may not allow one-number-to-next specification for
setup values.
b. Image Layout
*1: Some OS may not support a custom size setting.
*4: Windows 9x: 1-Up / 2-Up / 4-Up.
*5: Pamphlet processing by MFP/Printer firmware.
c. Watermark
* Specification depending on OS.
d. Paper Control
e. Finishing
f. Copies
g. Object Control
h. Job Handling
Toner Save
(1bit only)
On / Off Yes Yes Yes Yes
Screen Setting Default
Photo
Text & Graphic
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Pure Black
Print
Black Over
Print
CMYK
Simulation
Off
Default
Custom
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Image Type Standard / Graphic /
Photo / CAD / Custom
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Neutral Grays Black Only
4-Color
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Function
Windows
PPD
Macintosh PPD
Mac
OS9
Mac
OSX
10.1
Mac
OSX
10.2/3
Paper Size
Setting *
1
A3 Wide / 12 x 18 / A3
/ A4 / A5 / B4 / B5 /
11 x 17 / 8.5 x 11 /
8.5 x 14 / 7.25 x 10.5 /
8.5 x 13 / 5.5 x 8.5 /
8K / 16K / DL / C5 /
COM10 / Monarch /
Custom Paper
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Orientation Portrait
Landscape
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Rotate 180
degrees
(Landscape
only)
On / Off Yes Yes No Yes
N-Up Printing
*
2
1-Up / 2-Up / 4-Up /
6-Up / 9-Up / 16-Up
Yes *
3

*
4
Yes Yes Yes
Black N-Up
Border *
2
On / Off No Yes Yes Yes
N-Up Order *
2
[2-Up]:
Left to Right
Right to Left
[4, 6, 8, 9, 16-Up]:
Right, and Down
Down, and Right
Left, and Down
Down, and Left
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Duplex 2-Sided (Long)
2-Sided (Short)
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Pamphlet *
5
Tiled Pamphlet
Multiple Tiled
Pamphlet
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Margin Shift None / 10mm / 20mm /
30mm
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Zoom 25 % - 400 % Yes Yes Yes Yes
Mirror *
2
None
Vertical
Horizontal
Yes Yes No No
Function
Windows
PPD
Macintosh PPD
Mac
OS9
Mac
OSX
10.1
Mac
OSX
10.2/3
Function
Windows
PPD
Macintosh PPD
Mac
OS9
Mac
OSX
10.1
Mac
OSX
10.2/3
Transparent Text Yes Yes Yes Yes
Overwrite Text Yes Yes Yes Yes
Outline Text Yes Yes Yes Yes
Function
Windows
PPD
Macintosh PPD
Mac
OS9
Mac
OSX
10.1
Mac
OSX
10.2/3
Paper
Selection
Auto Select
Paper Source
Paper Type
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Different Paper Cover Page No Yes Yes Yes
Transparency
Inserts
Blank / Printed Yes Yes Yes Yes
Output Tray Center Tray
Right Tray
Offset Tray
Saddle Stitch Tray
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Function
Windows
PPD
Macintosh PPD
Mac
OS9
Mac
OSX
10.1
Mac
OSX
10.2/3
Staple None
1-Staple
2-Staples
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Punch Yes
No
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Binding Edge Top
Left
Right
No Yes No Yes
No Offset On / Off Yes Yes Yes Yes
Function
Windows
PPD
Macintosh PPD
Mac
OS9
Mac
OSX
10.1
Mac
OSX
10.2/3
Copies *
1
1-999 Yes Yes Yes Yes
Collate On / Off Yes Yes Yes Yes
Function
Windows
PPD
Macintosh PPD
Mac
OS9
Mac
OSX
10.1
Mac
OSX
10.2/3
Download Font Type *
1
Yes Yes No No
PS Error
Printing
Function
Windows
PPD
Macintosh PPD
Mac
OS9
Mac
OSX
10.1
Mac
OSX
10.2/3
Retention Hold Only
Hold After Print
Sample Print
Pass Code
No Yes No Yes
Document
Filing
Quick File
Main Folder
Custom Folder
No No No Yes
i. Configuration
*1: Can be used in MacOSX 10.3.
F. Document filing function
(1) Basic function
(2) Data saving for each function
G. Safety and environmental protection
standards
(1) Safety standards
(2) Environmental Readiness
International Energy Star Program MFP (EPA)
The Eco Mark Program
Environmental Choice Program (ECP)
New Blue Angel
Nordic Swan
European ROHS regulations
Chinese ROHS
WEEE
Taiwan green mark
3. Ambient conditions
A. Environmental conditions for use of the main
unit
Temperature: 10C to 35C, Humidity: 20 to 85%RH
Air pressure: 590 to 1013hPa (height: 0 to 2000m)
User
Authentication
Login Name
Password
No No No Yes
Job ID User Name
Job Name
No No No Yes
Tandem Print On / Off No No No Yes
Function
Windows
PPD
Macintosh PPD
Mac
OS9
Mac
OSX
10.1
Mac
OSX
10.2/3
Auto Configuration No Yes No Yes
*
1
Set Tandem
Print
IP Address
(Slave Machine)
No No No Yes
Input Tray
Options
Four Trays Yes Yes No Yes
Large Capacity
Tray
Large Capacity Tray
(A3W/12x18)
Large Capacity Tray
(A4/8.5x11)
Yes Yes No Yes
Output Tray
Options
None
Finisher
Saddle Stitch Finisher
Yes Yes No Yes
Punch Module None / 2 Holes /
3 Holes / 4 Holes /
4 Holes(Wide)
Yes Yes No Yes
Right Tray On / Off Yes Yes No Yes
Capacity for document
filing
Main folder
Custom folder
30GB
Quick file
folder
10GB
Pages or files for
allowed for filing
Main folder
Custom folder
4,200 pages or 3,000 files
(SHARP standard document)
Quick file
folder
1,400 pages or 1,000 files
(SHARP standard document)
Maximum number of
user folder
Maximum of 500 folders
Number of users
allowed for registration
Depends on the number of user registrations.
(Maximum of 1000 users)
Job
Quick File Folder Main/Custom Folder
Shared
storage
Confidential
storage
Shared
storage
Confidential
storage
Copy Yes No Yes Yes
Printer Yes Yes Yes
Direct print (FTP) Yes No No
Direct print (e-mail) Yes Yes No
Direct print (Web) Yes No No
Scan to e-mail/FTP Yes Yes No
Scan to SMB Yes Yes No
Scan to USB
memory
No No No
Fax reception No No No
Fax transmission Yes Yes No
Internet Fax
reception
No No No
Internet Fax
transmission
Yes Yes No
PC-Fax/PC-Internet
Fax transmisson
Yes Yes Yes
Scan to HDD No Yes Yes
Function
Windows
PPD
Macintosh PPD
Mac
OS9
Mac
OSX
10.1
Mac
OSX
10.2/3
100V type 200V type
Safety
standard
UL60950, 21CFR (Laser)
CSA C22.2 No.60950
CNS14336 (Taiwan)
EN60950-1
IEC60825 (Laser)
GB4943 (China)
EMC VCCI Class A
FCC Class Part 15 Class A
ICES-003 Class A
(Canada)
CNS 13438 Class B
(Taiwan)
EN55022 Class A
CISPR22 Class A
(SABS: Class B)
EN61000-3-2
EN61000-3-3
EN55024
AS/NZS CISPR 22 Class A
(Australia)
GB9254, GB17625.1, GB/
T17618 Class A (China)
Line
standard
(for Fax
expansion)
FCC part 68
ICCS-03
PSTN01 (Taiwan)
TS 103 021, EG 201 120,
EG 201 121 (Europe)
AS/ACIF S002 (Australia)
GB/T 3382.1-2003,
GB/T 3382.2-2003,
YD/T 514-1998,
YD/T 589-1996,
YD/T 703-1993,
YD/T 965-1998,
YD/T 993-1998 (China)
(Humidity)
(Temperature)
85%
60%
20%
B. Environmental conditions for transit of the
main unit
20C to 45C (No condensation)
C. Standard environmental conditions for
supplies
Valid use period under the environmental conditions of use
1) Photoconductor drum kit
36 months from the production month
2) Photoconductor drum unit
3) Toner (K)/Color toner (C/M/Y)
D. Environmental conditions for use of supplies
E. Environmental conditions for transit of
supplied
F. Environmental conditions for store of supplies
(sealed)
(Humidity)
90%
60%
20%
(Temperature)
(Humidity)
(Temperature)
85%
60%
20%
MX-7000N CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 1
MX-7000N
Sv` Huuuu!

[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS
1. Supply system table
A. USA/Canada/South and Central America
*1: The toner life may vary depending on the document density and temperature and humidity.
B. Europe/East Europe/Russia/Australia/New Zealand
C. Asia/Hong Kong
D. Middle East/Taiwan/Africa/Israel/Philippines
No. Item Content Life Model name Remarks
1 Toner cartridge (Black) Toner cartridge (Black) with IC chip x 1 42K *1 MX-70NTBA Life: A4/Letter size at area
coverage 5%
2 Toner cartridge (Cyan) Toner cartridge (Cyan) with IC chip x 1 32K *1 MX-70NTCA Life: A4/Letter size at area
coverage 5%
3 Toner cartridge (Magenta) Toner cartridge (Magenta) with IC
chip
x 1 32K *1 MX-70NTMA Life: A4/Letter size at area
coverage 5%
4 Toner cartridge (Yellow) Toner cartridge (Yellow) with IC chip x 1 32K *1 MX-70NTYA Life: A4/Letter size at area
coverage 5%
5 Developer (Black) Developer (Black) x 1 300K MX-70NVBA
6 Developer (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow) Developer (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow) x 1 100K MX-70NVSA
7 Drum (Black) |80mm OPC drum x 1 300K MX-70NRBA
8 Drum (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow) |30mm OPC drum x 1 100K (Color) MX-27NRSA
1 Toner cartridge (Black) Toner cartridge (Black) with IC chip x 1 42K *1 MX-70GTBA Life: A4/Letter size at area
coverage 5%
2 Toner cartridge (Cyan) Toner cartridge (Cyan) with IC chip x 1 32K *1 MX-70GTCA Life: A4/Letter size at area
coverage 5%
chip
x 1 32K *1 MX-70GTMA Life: A4/Letter size at area
coverage 5%
4 Toner cartridge (Yellow) Toner cartridge (Yellow) with IC chip x 1 32K *1 MX-70GTYA Life: A4/Letter size at area
coverage 5%
5 Developer (Black) Developer (Black) x 1 300K MX-70GVBA
6 Developer (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow) Developer (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow) x 1 100K MX-70GVSA
7 Drum (Black) |80mm OPC drum x 1 300K MX-70GRBA
8 Drum (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow) |30mm OPC drum x 1 100K (Color) MX-27GRSA
1 Toner cartridge (Black) Toner cartridge (Black) with IC chip x 1 42K *1 MX-70ATBA Life: A4/Letter size at area
coverage 5%
2 Toner cartridge (Cyan) Toner cartridge (Cyan) with IC chip x 1 32K *1 MX-70ATCA Life: A4/Letter size at area
coverage 5%
chip
x 1 32K *1 MX-70ATMA Life: A4/Letter size at area
coverage 5%
4 Toner cartridge (Yellow) Toner cartridge (Yellow) with IC chip x 1 32K *1 MX-70ATYA Life: A4/Letter size at area
coverage 5%
5 Developer (Black) Developer (Black) x 1 300K MX-70AVBA
6 Developer (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow) Developer (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow) x 1 100K MX-70AVSA
7 Drum (Black) |80mm OPC drum x 1 300K MX-70ARBA
8 Drum (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow) |30mm OPC drum x 1 100K (Color) MX-27ARSA
1 Toner cartridge (Black) Toner cartridge (Black) with IC chip x 1 42K *1 MX-70FTBA Life: A4/Letter size at area
coverage 5%
2 Toner cartridge (Cyan) Toner cartridge (Cyan) with IC chip x 1 32K *1 MX-70FTCA Life: A4/Letter size at area
coverage 5%
chip
x 1 32K *1 MX-70FTMA Life: A4/Letter size at area
coverage 5%
4 Toner cartridge (Yellow) Toner cartridge (Yellow) with IC chip x 1 32K *1 MX-70FTYA Life: A4/Letter size at area
coverage 5%
5 Developer (Black) Developer (Black) x 1 300K MX-70FVBA
6 Developer (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow) Developer (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow) x 1 100K MX-70FVSA
7 Drum (Black) |80mm OPC drum x 1 300K MX-70FRBA
8 Drum (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow) |30mm OPC drum x 1 100K (Color) MX-27FRSA
E. China
2. Maintenance parts list
A. U.S.A/Canada/South and Central America/Asia/Middle East/Agencies
1 Toner cartridge (Black) Toner cartridge (Black) with IC chip x 1 42K *1 MX-70CTBA Life: A4/Letter size at area
coverage 5%
2 Toner cartridge (Cyan) Toner cartridge (Cyan) with IC chip x 1 32K *1 MX-70CTCA Life: A4/Letter size at area
coverage 5%
chip
x 1 32K *1 MX-70CTMA Life: A4/Letter size at area
coverage 5%
4 Toner cartridge (Yellow) Toner cartridge (Yellow) with IC chip x 1 32K *1 MX-70CTYA Life: A4/Letter size at area
coverage 5%
5 Developer (Black) Developer (Black) x 1 300K MX-70CVBA
6 Developer (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow) Developer (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow) x 1 100K MX-70CVSA
7 Drum (Black) |80mm OPC drum x 1 300K MX-70CRBA
8 Drum (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow) |30mm OPC drum x 1 100K (Color) MX-27CRSA
1 Heat roller kit Upper separation pawl x 6 300K MX-700HK
Upper thermistor sub x 1
Lower heat roller unit x 1
Lower separation pawl x 4
Separation pawl/spring x 4
Upper thermistor x 1
Lower thermistor x 1
2 Upper heat roller kit Upper heat roller unit x 1 200K MX-700UH
3 Primary transfer kit Intermediate transfer belt x 1 300K MX-700Y1
Primary transfer blade x 1
PS paper dust removal unit x 1
Primary transfer roller x 4
Belt drive gear x 1
Charger wire PTC x 1
Charger cleaner x 1
Charger cleaner B x 1
4 Secondary transfer kit Secondary transfer belt x 1 300K MX-700Y2
Secondary transfer roller x 1
Secondary transfer idle gear x 1
5 Filter kit Ozone filter x 2 300K MX-700FL For North America/South
and Central America Paper exit filter x 1
Toner filter (Main unit) x 1
6 Filter kit Ozone filter x 2 300K MX-700FLN For Asia/Agencies
7 Web cleaning kit Web unit x 1 200K MX-700WC
8 External heating unit External heating unit x 1 300K MX-700EF
9 Waste toner box kit Waste toner box unit x 1 100K MX-700HB Each color 5% coverage,
color ratios 30%
10 DV seal kit
(For monochrome)
DV seal x 1 300K MX-700DL
DV side seal F/R x 1
Toner filter x 1
11 DV seal kit
(For color)
DV seal x 3 100K MX-270DS
Toner filter x 3
12 Main charger kit
(For monochrome)
Main charger unit x 1 300K MX-700MC
Drum cleaning blade x 1
Sub blade x 1
13 Main charger kit
(For color)
Main charger unit x 1 100K MX-700MK
Toner stirring sheet x 1
14 Staple cartridge Staple cartridge x 3 5000 times x 3 AR-SC2 For staple section
15 Staple cartridge Staple cartridge x 3 2000 times x 3 AR-SC3 For saddle section
16 Primary transfer belt unit Primary transfer belt unit (For service rotation) x 1 MX-700U1 Product for service rotation
17 Secondary transfer belt unit Secondary transfer belt unit (For service rotation) x 1 MX-700U2 Product for service rotation
18 Fusing unit Fusing unit (For service rotation) (Heater lamp 120V) x 1 MX-700FU1 Product for service rotation
Fusing unit (For service rotation) (Heater lamp 230V) x 1 MX-700FU Product for service rotation
B. Europe/UK/Australia/New Zealand
2 Upper thermistor kit Upper separation pawl x 6 300K MX-700UR
3 Lower heat roller kit Lower heat roller unit x 1 300K MX-700LH
4 Primary transfer belt kit Intermediate transfer belt x 1 300K MX-700B1
PS paper dust removal cleaner x 1
Charger cleaner x 1
5 Primary transfer roller kit Primary transfer roller x 4 300K MX-700X1
Belt drive gear x 1
6 Secondary transfer belt kit Secondary transfer belt x 1 300K MX-270B2
7 Secondary transfer roller kit Secondary transfer roller x 1 300K MX-700X2
8 Filter kit Ozone filter x 2 300K MX-700FL For Europe/Oceania
Paper exit filter x 1
color ratios 30%
12 DV seal kit
(For monochrome)
Toner filter x 1
13 DV seal kit
(For color)
Toner filter x 3
14 Main charger kit
(For monochrome)
Sub blade x 1
15 Main charger kit
(For color)
20 Fusing unit Fusing unit (For service rotation) (Heater lamp 230V) x 1 MX-700FU Product for service rotation
Fusing unit (For service rotation) (Heater lamp 100V) x 1 MX-700FU2 Product for service rotation
C. Hong Kong
1 Heat roller kit Upper separation pawl x 6 300K MX-700HK
Lower heat roller unit x 1
3 Primary transfer kit Intermediate transfer belt x 1 300K MX-700Y1
PS paper dust removal unit x 1
Primary transfer roller x 4
Belt drive gear x 1
Charger cleaner x 1
4 Secondary transfer kit Secondary transfer belt x 1 300K MX-700Y2
Secondary transfer roller x 1
5 Filter kit Ozone filter x 2 300K MX-700FLN For Asia/Agencies
color ratios 30%
9 DV seal kit
(For monochrome)
Toner filter x 1
10 DV seal kit
(For color)
Toner filter x 3
11 Main charger kit
(For monochrome)
Sub blade x 1
12 Main charger kit
(For color)
17 Fusing unit Fusing unit (For service rotation) (Heater lamp 230V) x 1 MX-700FU Product for service rotation
3. Production number identification
A. Photoconductor drum
(1) Photoconductor drum (black)
The lot number is in 10 digits. Each digit indicates the following
content.
This number is printed on the inside wall of the tube.
1: Number
2 for this mode.
2: Alphabet
Indicates the model code. It is C for this model.
3: Number
Indicates the end digit of the production year.
4: Number or X, Y, or Z
Indicates the production month.
X means October, Y November, and Z December.
5/6: Number
Indicates the production day.
Indicates the packing month.
8/9: Number
Indicates the packing day.
10: Alphabet
Production place code.
(2) Photoconductor drum (color)
The lot number is in 10 digits. Each digit indicates the following
content.
This number is printed on the flange in the front side.
1: Number
2 for this mode.
2: Alphabet
Indicates the model code. H for this model.
3: Number
Indicates the end digit of the production year.
5/6: Number
Indicates the packing month.
8/9: Number
Indicates the packing day.
10: Alphabet
Production place code.
B. Developer
The lot number is in 8 digits, and each digit indicates the following
content.
This number is printed on the right lower section of the back sur-
face of the developer bag.
1: Alphabet
Indicates the production factory.
2: Number
Indicates the production year.
3/4: Number
5/6: Number
7: Hyphen
8: Number
Indicates the production lot.
C. Toner cartridge
The label with the management number on it is attached to the side
of the toner cartridge.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
BK
C. M .Y
Part name
Toner color
Production site
Serial production number
Production year, month, day
Version
Destination
(Example) Produced on March 7th, 2006, 974th item.
A1MX70JTBA
BK
H 20060307
00974 B
19
4. The indication of remaining toner amount and the status of toner cartridge
A. Black toner
(1) Change in the indication of remaining toner amount in case Bk1 is used first and Bk2 remains full.
* The above chart shows the toner amount in case an originally packaged black toner cartridge is inserted into Bk1. (It can be inserted into
Bk2.)
(2) Changes in the indication of remaining toner amount in case Bk1 is depleted and Bk2 is in use.
B. Color Toner
* The icon for applicable color toner (Y/M/C) will go to ( ) in the table above.
Definition
Indication of remaining toner amount Message
1st (Bk1) 2nd (Bk2) Pop-up message UI
100-75% 100-75%
75-50% 100-75%
50-25% 100-75%
Close to Near End 25-0% 100-75% Toner supply is low. (Bk1) Ready to scan for copy.
Toner supply is low. (Bk1)
Near End 0% 100-75% Change the toner cartridge. (Bk1) Ready to scan for copy.
Change the toner cartridge. (Bk1)
Definition
Indication of remaining toner amount Message
1st (Bk1) 2nd (Bk2) Pop-up message UI
0% 100-75% Change the toner cartridge. (Bk1) Ready to scan for copy.
Close to Near End 0% 25-0% Toner supply is low. (Bk2)
Ready to scan for copy.
Toner End 0% 0% Change the toner cartridge. (Bk1)
Definition Indication of remaining toner amount
Message
Pop-up message UI
100-75%
75-50%
50-25%
Close to Near End 25-0% Toner supply is low. () Ready to scan for copy.
Toner supply is low. ()
Near End 0% Change the toner cartridge. () Ready to scan for copy.
Change the toner cartridge. ()
Toner End 0% Change the toner cartridge. ()
MX-7000N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 5 1
MX-7000N
Sv` Huuuu!

[5] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE
1. Identification of each section and functions
A. External view
No. Name Function/Operation Remark
1 Finisher / saddle stitch finisher This can be used to staple output. The saddle stitch finisher can automatically staple
output at the center line and fold the pages to create a pamphlet.
Option
2 Punch module This is used to punch holes in output. Option
3 Inserter Paper loaded in the inserter can be inserted into output from the machine as covers and
inserts.
Option
4 Automatic document feeder This automatically feeds and scans multiple originals. Both sides of 2-sided originals
can be automatically scanned.
5 Upper front cover Open this to replace a toner cartridge or clear a paper misfeed from the paper pass unit. When a paper pass
unit (option) installed.
6 Front cover (lower) Open this to switch the main power on and off.
7 Operation panel This is used to select functions and enter the number of copies.
8 Right Tray Output can be delivered to this tray.
9 Output tray (center tray) Output is delivered to this tray.
10 Toner cover Open this to replace a toner cartridge.
11 Tray 1 (left side) This holds paper. Up to 1200 sheets of paper can be loaded.
12 Tray 2 (right side) This holds paper. Up to 800 sheets of paper can be loaded.
13 Tray 3 This holds paper. Transparency film, tab paper, and other special media can also be
loaded. Up to 500 sheets of paper can be loaded.
14 Tray 4 This holds paper. Up to 500 sheets of paper can be loaded.
15 Tray 5 (when a large capacity tray
(MX-LCX2) is installed)
This holds paper. 8-1/2" x 11" or A4 paper can be loaded. Up to 3500 sheets of paper
can be loaded.
Option
16 Tray 5 (when a large capacity tray
(MX-LCX3) is installed)
This holds paper. 8-1/2" x 11" to 12" x 18" (B5 to A3W) paper can be loaded. Up to 3000
sheets of paper can be loaded.
Option
1
11 12 13 14 15 16
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10
When a finisher
is installed
When a finisher /
saddle stitch finisher
is not installed
B. Internal structure
No. Name Function/Operation Remark
1 Paper pass unit This transfers output to the finisher or saddle stitch finisher. Option
2 Toner cartridges These contain toner for printing. When the toner runs out in a
cartridge, the cartridge of the color that ran out must be
replaced.
3 Fusing unit Heat is applied here to fuse the transferred image onto the
paper.
The fusing unit is hot. Take care not to burn
yourself when removing a paper misfeed.
4 Transfer belt During full color printing, the toner images of each of the four
colors on each of the photoconductive drums are combined
together on the transfer belt.
During black and white printing, only the black toner image is
transferred onto the transfer belt.
Do not touch or damage the transfer belt. This
may cause a defective image.
5 Right side cover Open this cover to operate the fusing unit pressure adjusting
lever and to remove a misfeed.
6 Paper reversing section cover This is used when 2-sided printing is performed. Open this
cover to remove a paper misfeed.
7 Bypass tray Use this tray to feed paper manually.
When loading paper larger than 8-1/2" x 11"R or A4R, be sure
to pull out the bypass tray extension.
8 Main power switch This is used to power on the machine.
When using the fax or Internet fax functions, keep this switch in
the "on" position.
9 Waste toner box This collects excess toner that remains after printing. Your service technician will collect the waste
toner box.
10 Waste toner box compartment cover Open this to remove a paper misfeed from trays 1 to 4, or to
replace the waste toner box.
11 Right side cover release lever To remove a paper misfeed, pull and hold this lever up to open
the right side cover.
1
8 9 10 11
2 3 4 5 6 7
When a finisher /
saddle stitch finisher
is not installed
C. Auto document feeder and document cover
D. Connectors
No. Name Function/Operation
1 Document feeding area cover Open to remove a misfeed original.
2 Original guides These help ensure that the original is scanned correctly. Adjust the guides to the width of the original.
3 Document feeder tray Place originals in this tray. 1-sided originals must be placed face up.
4 Original exit tray Originals are delivered to this tray after scanning.
5 Scanning area Originals placed in the document feeder tray are scanned here.
6 Original size detector This detects the size of an original placed on the document glass.
7 Document glass Use this to scan a book or other thick original that cannot be fed through the automatic document feeder.
1 USB connector (A type) This is used to connect a USB device such as USB memory to the machine.
For the USB cable, use a shielded cable.
2 USB connector (B type) A computer can be connected to this connector to use the machine as a printer.
For the USB cable, use a shielded cable.
3 LAN connector Connect the LAN cable to this connector when the machine is used on a network.
For the LAN cable, use a shielded type cable.
4 Service-only connector Important note for service technicians:
The cable connected to the service connector must be less than 118" (3 m) in length.
5 Power plug
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1
2
3
4
5
E. Operation panel
1 Touch panel Messages and keys appear in the touch panel display.
Touch the displayed keys to perform a variety of operations.
When a key is touched, a beep sounds and the selected item is highlighted. This provides confirmation as you perform
an operation.
2 [HOME] key Touch this key to display the home screen. Frequently used settings can be registered in the home screen to enable
quick and easy operation of the machine.
3 [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key Press this key to display the system settings menu screen. The system settings are used to configure paper tray
settings, store addresses for transmission operations, and adjust parameters to make the machine easier to use.
4 Numeric keys These are used to enter the number of copies, fax numbers, and other numerical values.
5 [CLEAR] key Press this key to return the number of copies to "0".
6 PRINT mode indicators READY indicator
Print jobs can be received when this indicator is lit.
DATA indicator
This blinks while print data is being received and lights steadily while printing is taking place.
7 IMAGE SEND mode indicators LINE indicator
This lights up during transmission or reception of a fax or Internet fax. This also lights during transmission of an image
in scan mode.
DATA indicator
This blinks when a received fax or Internet fax cannot be printed because of a problem such as out of paper. This
lights up when there is a transmission job that has not been sent.
8 [JOB STATUS] key Press this key to display the job status screen. The job status screen is used to check information on jobs and to cancel
jobs.
9 [LOGOUT] key Press this key to log out after you have logged in and used the machine. When using the fax function, this key can also
be pressed to send tone signals on a pulse dial line.
10 [#/P] key When using the copy function, press this key to use a job program. When using the fax function, this key can be used
when dialing.
11 [CLEAR ALL] key Press this key to return to the initial operation state.
Use this key when you wish to cancel all settings that have been selected and start operation from the initial state.
12 [STOP] key Press this key to stop a copy job or scanning of an original.
13 [BLACK & WHITE START] key Press this key to copy or scan an original in black and white. This key is also used to send a fax in fax mode.
14 [COLOR START] key Press this key to copy or scan an original in color.
This key cannot be used for fax or Internet fax.
15 [POWER SAVE] key / indicator Use this key to put the machine into auto power shut-off mode to save energy.
The [POWER SAVE] key blinks when the machine is in auto power shut-off mode.
16 [POWER] key Use this key to turn the machine power on and off.
17 Main power indicator This lights up when the machine's main power switch is in the "on" position.
LOGOUT
LINE
PRINT
IMAGE SEND
DATA
DATA
READY
SYSTEM
SETTINGS
HOME
JOB STATUS
1 2 3 4 5
6 14 17 16 15 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
F. Print and send status (Job status)
1 Mode select tabs Use these tabs to select print mode, scan mode, fax mode, or Internet fax mode.
The [Print Job] tab shows copy, print, received fax, received Internet fax, and self print jobs.
The [Scan to] tab shows transmission jobs that use the scanner function.
The [Fax Job] tab shows transmission (and reception) jobs that use the fax and PC-Fax functions.
The [Internet Fax] tab shows transmission (and reception) jobs that use the Internet fax and PC Internet Fax functions.
2 Job list This shows jobs that are reserved and in progress (job queue), and jobs that have been completed.
When the [Print Job] tab is touched in the mode select tabs, the job status screen selector key changes and the
"Spool" list appears.
A brief description of each job and its status appears in the list.
The "Spool" screen shows spooled print jobs and encrypted PDF jobs waiting for password entry. To move an
encrypted PDF job from the spool list to the job queue, touch the key of the job and enter the job password.
3 Job status screen selector key This switches the job list display between spooled jobs, the job queue, and completed jobs.
"Spool": This shows spooled print jobs and encrypted PDF jobs waiting for password entry. "Spool" appears when print
jobs are displayed.
"Job Queue": This shows reserved jobs and the job in progress.
"Complete": This shows completed jobs.
4 "Paper Empty" display Add paper.
When the status is "Paper Empty", the specified size of paper for the job is not loaded in any of the trays. In this case, the
job will be held until the required size of paper is loaded. Other jobs that are waiting will be printed (if possible) ahead of
the held job. (However, other jobs will not be printed if the paper ran out while printing was in progress.)
If you need to change the paper size because the specified paper size is not available, touch the key of the job in the job
list (2) to select it, touch the [Detail] key described in (6), and select a different paper size.
5 [+] [|] keys These change the page of the displayed job list.
6 [Detail] key This shows detailed information on a selected job.
When a job has been stored using Quick File or File in document filing mode, or when a broadcast transmission has
been performed in image send mode, the job appears as a key in the completed jobs screen. You can touch the [Detail]
key to show details on the completed job, and you can also touch the [Call] key to reprint or resend the job.
7 [Priority] key A reserved job in the "Job Queue" screen can be printed ahead of all other reserved jobs by selecting the job and then
touching this key.
In the print job queue, select the print or copy job to which you wish to give priority and touch this key. The job in progress
stops and printing of the selected job begins. When the selected job is completed, the interrupted job resumes.
8 [Stop/Delete] key Use this key to cancel the job currently in progress or a selected reserved job. Note that printing of received faxes and
received Internet faxes cannot be canceled.
9 [Call] key A job that appears in the completed jobs screen as a key can be touched followed by the [Call] key to reprint or resend
the job. This is the same [Call] key that appears when the [Detail] key is touched.
Spool
Complete
Job Queue
Detail
Call
Detail
Spool
Complete
Stop/Delete
2
3
4
002 / 000
Computer01 002 / 000
0312345678 001 / 000
Print Job
Job Queue Sets / Progress Status
Scan to Fax Job Internet Fax
Priority
1
1
Job Queue
1 020 / 001
Paper Empty
Waiting
Waiting
Copying
Copy
Copy
"Complete"
job screen
1
3
4
5
6
7
8 9
2
G. Sensors
Signal
name
Name Type Function/Operation Active condition Note
APPD1 ADU transport path detection 1 Photo interrupter Detects the duplex (ADU) upstream
paper pass.
APPD2 ADU transport path detection 2 Photo interrupter Detects the duplex (ADU) midstream
paper pass.
C3LUD Tray 3 upper limit detection
(Lift HP detection)
Photo interrupter Tray 3 upper limit detection
C3PED Tray 3 paper empty detection Photo interrupter Tray 3 paper empty detection
C3PFD Tray 3 paper entry detection Reflection type Tray 3 paper pass detection
C3PWD Tray 3 width detection Volume resistor Tray 3 paper width detection
C3SPD Tray 3 remaining quantity
detection
Photo interrupter Tray 3 paper remaining quantity
detection
C3SS1 Tray 3 rear edge detection 1 Tact switch Either of rear edge 1 - 4 of tray 3 is
detected to detect tray insertion.
The paper size of tray 3 is detected.
PWB unit
C3SS2 Tray 3 rear edge detection 2 Tact switch
T1SPD
T2SPD
MHPS
HTCS_Y HTCS_M
DHPD_Y
TCS_Y
TH2
TCS_M TCS_C
DHPD_C
C4SPD
TNFD
TBBOX
C3SPD
C4LUD
C4PFD
TCS_K
PPD1
C3SS2
C3SS1
C3SS3
C4SS1
C4SS3
C3SS4
C4SS2
C4SS4
T1PPD1
T1PPD2
DHPD_K
PCS_CL/
PCS_K/
REG_F/
REG_R
POD1
APPD1
DSW_ADU
HTCS_K
DHPD_M
HTCS_C
TBLTC
PPD2
APPD2
PTCM_HP THPS
CCMD
CCHP
T1LUD/T1PED
T2LUD/T2PED
C3PWD
DSW_D
MPED
MPWS
MTOP2
MPLD1
MTOP1
HUD_M/
TH_M
MPFD
LPPD
C3PED
C4PED
C3LUD
C3PFD
T2
T2PPD
TBLTB
OCSW
TFD POD2
PO_TMP
TFD_R
POD3
TANSET
VTOD
TH1
WEB_END
SPPD2
SPPD3
SPPD4
SOCD
SLCOV
SPPD5
SPOD
SPED2
STLD
SPPD1
SCOV
SPRDMD
STUD
SPED1
SPWS
SPLS1
SPLS2
WEB_INL
C4LUD Tray 4 upper limit detection (Lift
HP detection)
Photo interrupter Tray 4 upper limit detection
C4PED Tray 4 paper empty detection Photo interrupter Tray 4 paper empty detection
C4PFD Tray 4 paper entry detection Reflection type Tray 4 paper pass detection
detection
Photo interrupter Tray 4 paper remaining quantity
detection
C4SS1 Tray 4 rear edge detection 1 Tact switch Either of rear edge 1 - 4 of tray 4 is
detected to detect tray insertion.
The paper size of tray 4 is detected.
PWB unit
CCHP Charger cleaner HP detection Photo interrupter Charger cleaner position detection (in
the process unit)
CCMD CCM rotation detection Photo interrupter Detects rotation of the charger
cleaner motor.
DHPD_C C phase detection Photo interrupter C phase detection PWB unit
DHPD_K K phase detection Photo interrupter K phase detection PWB unit
DHPD_M M phase detection Photo interrupter M phase detection PWB unit
DHPD_Y Y phase detection Photo interrupter Y phase detection PWB unit
DSW_ADU ADU transport open/close
detection
Photo interrupter Detects the duplex (ADU) cover open/
close.
DSW_D Right lower door open/close
sensor
Photo interrupter Detects open/close of the right lower
door.
HTCS_C Hopper remaining quantity sensor
C
Vibration sensor
HTCS_K Hopper remaining quantity sensor
K
Vibration sensor
HTCS_M Hopper remaining quantity sensor
M
Vibration sensor
HTCS_Y Hopper remaining quantity sensor
Y
Vibration sensor
HUD_M/
TH_M
Temperature/humidity sensor Temperature/
humidity sensor
Detects temperature and humidity.
LPPD LCC paper entry sensor Reflection type Detects paper entry from LCC.
MHPS Scanner home position sensor Photo interrupter Detects the scanner home position.
MPED Manual paper feed paper empty
detection
Photo interrupter Detects the manual paper feed paper
empty.
MPFD Manual paper feed paper entry
detection
Photo interrupter Manual paper feed tray paper entry
detection
MPLD1 Manual feed paper length detector Photo interrupter Detects the manual paper feed tray
paper length.
MPWS Manual paper feed tray paper
width detector
Volume resistor Detects the manual paper feed tray
paper width.
PWB unit
MTOP1 Manual paper feed tray pull-out
position detector 1
Photo interrupter Detects the manual paper feed tray
paper pull-out position (storing
position).
MTOP2 Manual paper feed tray pull-out
position detector 2
Photo interrupter Detects the manual paper feed tray
paper pull-out position (pull-out
position).
OCSW Original cover SW Photo interrupter Document size detection trigger.
PCS_CL/
PCS_K
Process control sensor PWB Toner density
sensor
Toner patch density detection
PO_TMP Paper exit temperature detection Temperature
sensor
Detects temperature.
POD1 Fusing after-detection Photo interrupter Detects paper from the fusing section.
POD2 Paper exit detection Photo interrupter Detects the paper from paper exit.
POD3 Right tray paper exit detection Photo interrupter Detects the paper exit to right tray.
PPD1 Registration pre-detection (PPD1) Photo interrupter Detects paper in front of the resist
roller.
PPD2 Registration detection (PPD2) Reflection type Detects paper in front of the resist
roller.
PTCM_HP Sensor inside of the PTC unit Leaf switch Detects PTC cleaner HP
REG R Resist sensor PWB R Reflection type Detects toner patch (R side) PWB unit
REG_F Resist sensor PWB F Reflection type Detects toner patch (F side) PWB unit
SCOV DSPF upper door open/close
sensor
Transmission type Detects open/close of the upper door. L when the upper door is open.
SLCOV DSPF lower door open/close
sensor
Micro switch Detects open/close of the lower door. L when the lower door is open.
SOCD DSPF open/close sensor Transmission type Detects open/close of the DSPF unit. L when the DSPF unit is open.
SPED1 DSPF document upper limit
sensor
Transmission type Detects the upper limit of the DSPF
document.
L when paper is detected.
SPED2 DSPF document empty sensor Transmission type Detects document empty in the paper
feed tray.
Signal
name
SPLS1 DSPF document length detection
short sensor
Transmission type Detects the document length of the
paper feed tray upper.
H when paper is detected.
SPLS2 DSPF document length detection
long sensor
Transmission type Detects the document length of the
H when paper is detected.
SPOD DSPF paper exit sensor Transmission type Detects paper exit of the document. L when paper is detected.
SPPD1 DSPF paper pass sensor 1 Transmission type Detects pass of the paper. L when paper is detected.
SPRDMD DSPF document random sensor Transmission type Detects the paper size in random
paper feed.
SPWS DSPF document width sensor Volume resistor Detects the document width of the
STLD DSPF paper feed tray lower limit
sensor
Transmission type Detects the lower limit of the paper
feed tray.
H when the lower limit of the
paper feed tray is detected.
STUD DSPF paper feed tray upper limit
sensor
Transmission type Detects the upper limit of the paper
feed tray.
L when the upper limit of the
paper feed tray is detected.
T1LUD/
T1PED
Tandem tray 1 sensor Photo interrupter Tandem tray 1 lift-up and paper
presence detection
T1PPD1 Tandem tray 1 transport sensor 1 Reflection type Tandem tray 1 paper entry detection Immediately
after T1
paper feed
T1PPD2 Tandem tray 1 transport sensor 1 Reflection type Detects Tandem tray 1 paper pass at
the transport roller.
Immediately
before T2
interflow
T1SPD Tandem tray 1 paper remaining
quantity detector
Photo interrupter Tandem tray 1 paper remaining
quantity detection
T2LUD/
T2PED
Tandem tray 2 sensor Photo interrupter Tandem tray 2 lift-up and paper
presence detection
T2PPD Tandem tray 2 transport detection Reflection type Detects paper pass from tandem tray
2.
T2SPD Tandem tray 2 paper remaining
quantity detector
Photo interrupter Tandem tray 2 paper remaining
quantity detection
TANSET Tandem tray installation detection Photo interrupter Tandem tray insertion/removal
detection
TBBOX Waste toner box sensor Photo interrupter Waste toner box installation detection
TBLTB Transfer belt separation sensor BK Photo interrupter Transfer belt separation BK detection
TBLTC Transfer belt separation sensor CL Photo interrupter Transfer belt separation CL detection
TCS_C Toner density detection C (ATC) Permeable sensor Detects the toner density (C).
TCS_K Toner density detection K (ATC) Permeable sensor Detects the toner density (K).
TCS_M Toner density detection M (ATC) Permeable sensor Detects the toner density (M).
TCS_Y Toner density detection Y (ATC) Permeable sensor Detects the toner density (Y).
TFD Main unit paper exit full detection Photo interrupter Detects face-down paper exit tray full.
TFD_R Right tray paper exit full detection Photo interrupter Detects right tray paper exit full.
TH1 LSU thermistor 1 Temperature
sensor
Detects the LSU temperature.
TH2 LSU thermistor 2 Temperature
sensor
Detects the LSU temperature.
THPS Secondary transfer separation
drive sensor
Photo interrupter Secondary transfer separation
detection
TNFD Waste toner full detection Photo interrupter Waste toner full detection
VTOD Right transfer unit open/close
sensor
Photo interrupter Detects open/close of the right
transfer unit.
WEB_END Web end detection sensor Mechanical switch Detects the web end.
WEB_INL Web presence detection Mechanical switch Detects presence of web.
Signal
name
H. Switches
Signal name Name Type Function/Operation
DSW-FD Front door upper open/close switch Micro switch Detects front door upper open/close.
DSW-FL Front door lower open/close switch Micro switch Detects front door lower open/close.
DSW-R Right door open/close switch Micro switch Detects right door open/close.
MSW Main SW Seesaw switch Turns ON/OFF the main DC power source.
PWRSW Operation panel power switch Push switch Outputs the ON/OFF control signal of the DC power source.
PWRSW
DSW-R
DSW-FD
MSW
DSW-FL
I. Clutches and solenoids
Signal
name
Name Type Function/Operation
ADUGS ADU gate solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Controls the ADU gate.
BLTCL Belt separation clutch (normal) Electromagnetic clutch Controls separation of the primary transfer belt.
BLTCL_R Belt separation clutch (reverse) Electromagnetic clutch Controls separation of the primary transfer belt.
C3PFC Tray 3 paper feed clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper feed roller in the tray 3 paper feed section.
C3PUS Paper pickup solenoid (Tray 3) Electromagnetic solenoid Paper pickup solenoid (Tray 3)
C4PFC Tray 4 paper feed clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper feed roller in the tray 4 paper feed section.
C4PUS Paper pickup solenoid (Tray 4) Electromagnetic solenoid Paper pickup solenoid (Tray 4)
LPFC LCC transport clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the transport roller in the LCC transport section.
LSS_BK LSU shutter solenoid BK Electromagnetic solenoid Opens/closes the LSU (BK) shutter.
LSS_CL LSU shutter solenoid CL Electromagnetic solenoid Opens/closes the LSU (CL) shutter.
MPFS Paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper feed) Electromagnetic solenoid Paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper feed)
MPGS Manual paper feed gate solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Controls open/close of the manual paper feed gate.
MPUC Manual paper feed clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper feed roller in the manual paper feed
section.
PCSS Process control shutter solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Controls open/close of the shutter of the process control register sensor.
RRC PS clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of resist roller.
RRC2 PS clutch 2 Electromagnetic clutch Performs braking of resist roller.
SPFC DSPF paper feed clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the rollers in the paper feed section.
SRRBC DSPF No. 2 resist roller brake clutch Electromagnetic clutch Performs braking of No. 2 resist roller.
SRRC DSPF No. 2 resist roller clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of No. 2 resist roller.
STRC DSPF transport roller clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the transport roller 1.
STRRBC DSPF No. 1 resist roller brake clutch Electromagnetic clutch Performs braking of No. 1 resist roller.
STRRC DSPF No. 1 resist roller clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of No. 1 resist roller.
T1PFC Tandem tray 1 paper feed clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper feed roller in the tandem tray 1 paper feed
section.
T1PUS Paper pickup solenoid (Tandem tray 1) Electromagnetic solenoid Paper pickup solenoid (Tandem tray 1)
T2PFC Tandem tray 2 paper feed clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper feed roller in the tandem tray 2 paper feed
section.
T2PUS Paper pickup solenoid (Tandem tray 2) Electromagnetic solenoid Paper pickup solenoid (Tandem tray 2)
TANCL Tandem tray transport clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper transfer roller in the tandem tray section.
TRC1 Vertical transport clutch upper Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the vertical transfer roller.
TRC2 Vertical transport clutch lower Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the vertical transfer roller.
ADUGS
LSS_CL
BLTCL
PCSS
RRC2
RRC
BLTCL_R
LSS_BK
T1PUS
T2PUS
TRC1
C4PFC
C3PFC
C3PUS
TRC2
C4PUS
T2PFC
T1PFC
MPGS
MPFS
LPFC
MPUC
TANCL
SRRC
SPFC
STRRC
SRRBC
STRRBC
STRC
J. Drive motors
Signal
name
ADUH ADU motor upper Stepping motor Drives the right door section.
ADUL ADU motor lower Stepping motor Drives the right door section.
BTM Transfer drive motor Stepping motor Drives the transfer belt.
C3LUM Paper tray lift-up motor (Tray 3) Brush motor Drives the lift of the paper feed tray.
C4LUM Paper tray lift-up motor (Tray 4) Brush motor Drives the lift of the paper feed tray.
CCM Charger cleaner motor Brush motor Cleans the main charger.
CPFM Paper feed motor DC brushless motor Drives the paper feed section.
DM_C Drum motor (C) Stepping motor Drives the cyan OPC drum unit.
DM_K Drum motor (K) Stepping motor Drives the black OPC drum unit.
DM_M Drum motor (M) Stepping motor Drives the magenta OPC drum unit.
DM_Y Drum motor (Y) Stepping motor Drives the yellow OPC drum unit.
DVCM Developing drive motor (CL) DC brushless motor Drives the developing section (CL).
DVKM Developing drive motor (K) DC brushless motor Drives the developing section (K) and the primary transfer belt separation
operation.
FEXM External variable motor Stepping motor Separates the external heating roller in the fusing unit.
FUM Fusing motor DC brushless motor Drives the fusing unit.
HTM_C Hopper motor C Synchronous motor Transports toner.
HTM_K Hopper motor K Synchronous motor Transports toner.
HTM_M Hopper motor M Synchronous motor Transports toner.
HTM_Y Hopper motor Y Synchronous motor Transports toner.
LCCM LCC transport motor Stepping motor Drives the LCC transport roller.
MIM Scanner motor Stepping motor Scanner (reading) section
PFM PS front transport motor Stepping motor Drives the transport roller.
POLYM Polygon motor DC brushless motor Scans the laser beams.
POM Paper exit motor Stepping motor Drives the paper exit roller.
PTCCM PTC cleaner motor Brush motor Cleans the PTC.
PTMH_1 Intermediate hopper motor Synchronous motor Transports toner.
PTMH_2 Stirring motor Synchronous motor Stirs toner.
RRM PS motor DC brushless motor Drives the transport roller.
SLUM DSPF lift motor PM step motor Lifts up or moves down the paper feed tray.
T1LUM
SPUM
SPFM
DM_K
DVKM
DM_C
POLYM
DVCM
DM_M
DM_Y
HTM_Y
TM_Y
TM_M
HTM_M
TM_C
HTM_C
LCCM
CPFM
PTMH_1
MIM
TM_K1
WEBM
SLUM
POM
ADUH
BTM
PTCCM
TURM
CCM
ADUL
PFM
RRM
WTM
T2LUM
C3LUM
C4LUM
SPOM
HTM_K
TM_K2
FUM
FEXM
PTMH_2
K. Lamps
SPFM DSPF transport motor Hybrid step motor Drives the transport roller.
SPOM DSPF paper exit motor PM step motor Drives the paper exit roller.
SPUM DSPF paper feed motor Hybrid step motor Drives the rollers, transport rollers and transport rollers in the paper feed
section.
T1LUM Paper tray lift-up motor (Tandem tray 1) Brush motor Drives the lift of the paper feed tray.
T2LUM Paper tray lift-up motor (Tandem tray 2) Brush motor Drives the lift of the paper feed tray.
TM_C Toner motor C Synchronous motor Transports toner from the toner cartridge to the developing unit.
TM_K1 Toner motor K1 Synchronous motor Transports toner from the toner cartridge to the developing unit.
TM_K2 Toner motor K2 Synchronous motor Transports toner from the toner cartridge to the developing unit.
TM_M Toner motor M Synchronous motor Transports toner from the toner cartridge to the developing unit.
TM_Y Toner motor Y Synchronous motor Transports toner from the toner cartridge to the developing unit.
TURM Secondary transfer separation drive motor Brush motor Separates the secondary transfer.
WEBM Fusing web cleaning motor Synchronous motor Drives fusing web cleaning paper.
WTM Waste toner drive motor DC brushless motor Transports waste toner.
CLI Scanner lamp Xenon lamp Radiates light onto a document for the CCD to scan the document image.
DL_C Discharge lamp (C) LED Discharges the photoconductor.
DL_K Discharge lamp (K) Sub miniatua lamp Discharges the photoconductor.
DL_M Discharge lamp (M) LED Discharges the photoconductor.
DL_Y Discharge lamp (Y) LED Discharges the photoconductor.
DSPF COPY LUMP DSPF copy lamp Xenon lamp Radiates light onto a document to allow the CCD to scan document images.
HL_EX Heater lamp external Halogen lamp Heats the external roller.
HL_LM Lower heater roller Halogen lamp Heats the lower heat roller.
HL_UM Heater lamp upper main Halogen lamp Heats the upper heat roller. (main)
HL_US Heater lamp upper sub Halogen lamp Heats the upper heat roller. (sub)
Signal
name
HL_US
DL_C
DL_M
DL_Y
HL_LM
DL_K
HL_UM
HL_EX
CLI
DSPF COPY
LUMP
L. Fans and filters
CFM Charger suction fan motor Sirocco fan Supplies air to the charging unit of the OPC drum unit (BK).
CONFM MFP cooling fan motor Axial-flow fan Cools the MFP PWB.
DTBFM Bottle cooling fan motor Sirocco fan Cools the toner bottle.
FCFM Fusing cooling fan Sirocco fan Cools the fusing unit.
FUFM_R Fusing exhaust fan Axial-flow fan Cools the fusing unit.
HDDFM HDD cooling fan motor Axial-flow fan Cools the HDD.
LSUFM LSU cooling fan motor Axial-flow fan Cools the polygon motor.
OZFM1 Ozone fan motor 1 Sirocco fan Exhausts ozone.
OZFM2 Ozone fan motor 2 Sirocco fan Exhausts ozone.
OZFM3 Ozone fan motor 3 (Individual control) Sirocco fan Exhausts ozone.
POFM_F Paper exit cooling fan motor (F side) Axial-flow fan Cools the fusing unit.
POFM_U Paper exit cooling fan motor (center) Axial-flow fan Cools the fusing unit.
PSFM Power cooling fan motor Axial-flow fan Cools the power unit.
SPFFAN DSPF cooling fan motor Axial-flow fan Cools the motors and the clutches.
VFM_C Main inside ventilation fan motor (center) Axial-flow fan Discharges air from the machine.
VFM_R Machine ventilation fan motor (right) Sirocco fan Discharges air from the machine.
1 Toner filter (CL) Prevents dispersing of toner.
2 Ozone filter Absorbs ozone generated in the image process section.
3 Toner filter (BK) Prevents dispersing of toner.
4 Dust filter Absorbs dusts in sucked air.
5 Paper exit filter Deodorizes odor generated in the fusing unit.
2
HDDFM
OZFM3
OZFM1
OZFM2
LSUFM
SPFFAN
VFM_R
1
PSFM
VFM_C
POFM_F
POFM_U
5
4
FUFM_R
CFM
CONFM
3
FCFM
DTBFM
M. PWB
No. Name Function/Operation Note
1 DSPF CCD PWB Scans document images.
2 DSPF flash PWB Program ROM PWB for DSPF
3 DSPF control PWB Control PWB for DSPF
4 DSPF driver PWB Driver PWB for DSPF
5 DSPF CL inverter PWB Drives the copy lamp.
6 RD I/F PWB Detects each sensor in the right door unit.
7 CCD PWB Scans the document images.
8 Document detection light receiving PWB Outputs the document size detection signal.
9 Power_SW_PWB Outputs the ON/OFF control signal of the DC power source.
10 MFP OPE-JPWB Outputs the key operation signal.
11 CL inverter PWB Drives the xenon lamp.
12 Document detection light emitting PWB Emits the document size detection LED lights.
13 DSPF memory PWB Temporary storage of back surface image data
14 Scanner control PWB Controls the scanner section.
15 1TC PWB Outputs the primary transfer voltage.
16 HL PWB Controls the heater lamp.
17 PCU PWB Controls the engine section.
18 DRIVER PWB Drives the motor and related sections.
19 MC PWB Generates a high voltage for the main charger and the developing bias
voltage.
20 DOCC PWB Recognizes the document control pattern.
21 Mother PWB Interfaces the MFPcnt PWB and other PWB.
22 MFP cnt PWB Controls images and the whole machine.
23 AC power source PWB Controls the power source on the primary side.
24 SUB power source PWB Supplies the power of the controller.
25 C3SS PWB The paper size of tray 3 is detected.
26 C4SS PWB The paper size of tray 4 is detected.
27 DC power source PWB Outputs the secondary side voltage.
28 2TC PWB Outputs the secondary transfer voltage.
Drum
LSU
6
9
7
40
16
20
21
22
10
39
28
37
38
13
11
2
3
1
5
14
15
17
18
19
36
41
23
25
24 26
29
35
30
31
32
33
34
27
12 4 8
DV (BK)
42
N. Gate
29 LSU CNT PWB Controls the LSU.
30 LD PWB1 Controls laser lighting. (1 beam)
31 LD PWB2 Controls laser lighting. (2 beams)
32 Thermistor PWB 2 Detects the temperature in the LSU.
33 Thermistor PWB 1 Detects the temperature in the LSU.
34 BD PWB Detects the laser sync signal.
35 Drum phase detection PWB Detects the phase of each color drum.
36 Tandem sensor PWB Detects the tandem tray YES/NO and detects paper.
37 LVDS PWB Outputs the LCD display signal. MFP cnt is the source of output.
38 LCD INV PWB Drives the LCD backlight.
39 PTC PWB Outputs the pre-transfer voltage.
40 Paper exit temperature detection PWB Detects the temperature of the paper exit unit.
41 Memory PWB
42 DVK DRIVER PWB Controls the toner mixing motor.
1 ADU reverse gate Selects the paper route among the path to the inner tray and the path to the right tray and the path to the
duplex (ADU) section.
2 Right paper exit gate Selects the paper route between the path to the duplex (ADU) section and the path to the right tray.
2
1
O. Fuse/Thermostat
No. Signal name Name Specifications Function/Operation Section
1 TS_EX External thermostat sub Prevention against overheating of the external heat roller Fusing unit
2 TS_EX External thermostat main Prevention against overheating of the external heat roller Fusing unit
3 TS_LM Lower thermostat Prevention against overheating of the lower heat roller Fusing unit
4 TS_UM Upper thermostat main Prevention against overheating of the upper heat roller main Fusing unit
5 TS_US Upper thermostat sub Prevention against overheating of the upper heat roller sub Fusing unit
6 F1 Fuse 20A 125V AC power source PWB
7 F2 Fuse 20A 125V AC power source PWB
8 F3 Fuse T2AH250V AC power source PWB
9 F4 Fuse T2AH250V AC power source PWB
10 F1 Fuse 1.25A 250V CL inverter PWB
11 F208 Fuse 250V 6.3A DC power source PWB
20 F3 Fuse 250V 5A DC power source PWB
22 F61 Fuse 250V 2A SUB power source PWB
11
5
3
4
1
2
8
9
200V
120V
6
22
23
24
7
16
17
18
13
14
15
10
12
21
19
20
15
26
28
25
27
17
18
12
16
P. Rollers
1 Pickup roller Picks up a document and feeds it to the paper feed roller.
2 Paper feed roller Performs the paper feed operation of documents.
3 Separation roller Separate a document to prevent against double-feed.
4 No. 1 resist roller (Drive) Performs resist of document transport.
5 No. 1 resist roller (Idle) Applied a pressure to paper and the resist roller, and provides transport power
of the resist roller to paper.
6 Transport roller 1 (Drive) Transports paper from No. 1 resist roller to No. 2 resist roller.
7 Transport roller 1 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide a transport force
of the transport roller to paper.
8 No. 2 resist roller (Drive) Make synchronization between the lead edge of a document and the scan start
position.
9 No. 2 resist roller (Idle) Applied a pressure to paper and the resist roller, and provides transport power
of the resist roller to paper.
10 Platen roller Applies a pressure to paper to prevent against fluctuations on operation of
paper.
11 Transport roller 2 (Drive) Transports paper from the platen roller to the transport roller 3.
13 Transport roller 3 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 2 to the paper exit roller.
46
48
47
70
71
66
67
64
65
62
59
63
72
73
68
69
43
44
41
39 42
40
38 37 1 5 7
2
15 3 4
13 11
16
57
58
60
61
56
55
45
54
52
50
51
49
53
25
26
27
28
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
14
12
10
8
9
6
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
15 Paper exit roller (Drive) Discharges paper.
16 Paper exit roller (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide a transport force
of the paper exit roller to paper.
17 Transport roller 8 (Drive) Transports paper to the resist roller. After P5
After P5
Before P5
20 Transport roller 7 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 6 and the transport roller 13 to the
transport roller 8.
Before P5
21 Transport roller 13 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 12 to the transport roller 7. Tandem 2-2
Tandem 2-2
23 Transport roller 12 (Drive) Transports paper from the tandem tray 2 to the transport roller 13. Tandem 2-1
Tandem 2-1
25 Paper feed roller (Tandem No. 1 paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
26 Paper pickup roller (Tandem No. 1 paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper feed roller.
27 Separation roller (Tandem No. 1 paper feed tray) Separates paper to prevents against double feed.
28 Paper pickup roller (Tandem No. 2 paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper feed roller.
29 Paper feed roller (Tandem No. 2 paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
30 Separation roller (Tandem No. 2 paper feed tray) Separates paper to prevents against double feed.
31 Paper feed roller (No. 3 paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
32 Paper pickup roller (No. 3 paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper feed roller.
33 Separation roller (No. 3 paper feed tray) Separates paper to prevents against double feed.
34 Paper feed roller (No. 4 paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
35 Paper pickup roller (No. 4 paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper feed roller.
36 Separation roller (No. 4 paper feed tray) Separates paper to prevents against double feed.
37 Paper exit roller 1 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the paper exit roller to provide a transport force
Paper exit
38 Paper exit roller 1 (Drive) Discharges paper. /Transports paper to the right paper exit tray. / Transports
paper to the duplex (ADU) section.
Paper exit
After fusing
ADU paper entry
41 Transport roller 17 (Drive) Transports paper from the paper exit roller 1 to the paper exit roller 2. /
Transports paper to the duplex (ADU) section.
ADU paper entry
42 Transport roller 9 (Drive) Transports paper from the upper/lower heat roller to the paper exit roller 1. After fusing
43 Paper exit roller 2 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide a transport force
Right paper exit
44 Paper exit roller 2 (Drive) Discharges paper. Right paper exit
45 Upper heat roller Heats and presses toner on the paper to fuse paper. Fusing
46 Transport roller 10 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 17 to the transport roller 11. ADU1
ADU1
48 Lower heat roller Applies a pressure to the upper heat roller. Fusing
49 Resist roller (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the resist roller to provide a transport force of
the transport roller to paper.
PS
50 Resist roller (Drive) Transports paper to the transfer section. / Controls transport timing of paper and
adjust the relative relations between images and paper.
PS
After manual feed
ADU2
53 Transport roller 11 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 10 to the transport roller 16. ADU2
54 Transport roller 16 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 11 to the transport roller 7. /
Transports paper from the manual feed tray to the transport roller 7.
After manual feed
LCC2
56 Paper feed roller (Manual paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
57 Paper pickup roller (Manual paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper feed roller.
58 Separation roller (Manual paper feed tray) Separates paper to prevents against double feed.
LCC1
60 Transport roller 14 (Drive) Transports paper from LCC to the transport roller 15. LCC1
61 Transport roller 15 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 14 to the transport roller 8. LCC2
Tandem 2,
Casette 3, 4
63 Transport roller 6 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 5 and the tandem tray 2 to the
transport roller 7.
Tandem 2,
Casette 3, 4
Cassette 3, 4-2
65 Transport roller 5 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 4 to the transport roller 6. Cassette 3, 4-2
Cassette 3, 4-1
67 Transport roller 4 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 2 and 3 to the transport roller 5. Cassette 3, 4-1
68 Transport roller 3 (Drive) Transports paper from the paper feed tray 3 to the transport roller 4. Cassette 3
Cassette 3
Cassette 4-2
71 Transport roller 2 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 1 to the transport roller 4. Cassette 4-2
72 Transport roller 1 (Drive) Transports paper from the paper feed tray 4 to the transport roller 2. Cassette 4-1
Cassette 4-1
MX-7000N ADJUSTMENTS 6 1
MX-7000N
Sv` Huuuu!

[6] ADJUSTMENTS
1. General
Each adjustment item in the adjustment item list is associated with
a specific Job number. Perform the adjustment procedures in the
sequence of Job numbers from the smallest to the greatest.
However, there is no need to perform all the adjustment items. Per-
form only the necessary adjustments according to the need.
Unnecessary adjustments can be omitted. Even in this case, how-
ever, the sequence from the smallest to the greatest Job number
must be observed.
If the above precaution should be neglected, the adjustment would
not complete normally or trouble may occur.
2. Adjustment item list
Job No. Adjustment item list Simulation
ADJ 1 Developing doctor gap adjustment (For color)
ADJ 2 Developing roller main pole position adjustment (For color)
ADJ 3 Developing doctor gap adjustment (For black)
ADJ 4 Developing roller main pole position adjustment (For black)
ADJ 5 Toner density control reference value setting 25-2
ADJ 6 High voltage adjustments 6A Main charger grid voltage adjustment 8-2
6B Developing bias voltage adjustment 8-1
6C Transfer voltage adjustment 8-6
ADJ 7 Image density sensor, image
registration sensor adjustment
7A Color image density sensor calibration 44-13
7B Color image density sensor, black image density sensor, image registration sensor
adjustment
44-2
ADJ 8 Image skew adjustment (LSU (writing) unit) 61-4
ADJ 9 OPC drum phase adjustment (Auto adjustment) 50-22
ADJ 10 Print engine image magnification ratio adjustment (BK) (Main scanning direction) (Print engine section) (Manual adjustment) 50-10
ADJ 11 Image off-center adjustment (Print engine section) 50-10
ADJ 12 Image registration adjustment
(Print engine section)
12A Image registration adjustment (Main scanning direction, sub scanning direction)
(Auto adjustment)
50-22
12B Image registration adjustment (Main scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) 50-20
12C Image registration adjustment (Sub scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) 50-21
ADJ 13 Scan image distortion adjustment 13A Scanner (reading) unit parallelism adjustment
13B Scan image (sub scanning direction) distortion adjustment
13C Scan image (main scanning direction) distortion adjustment
13D Scan image distortion adjustment (Whole scanner)
ADJ 14 Scan image focus adjustment
(CCD unit position adjustment)
14A Scan image focus adjustment (Document table mode, DSPF front surface mode) 48-1
14B Scan image focus adjustment (DSPF back surface mode)
ADJ 15 DSPF parallelism adjustment 15A DSPF levelness adjustment
15B DSPF skew adjustment (Front surface mode) 64-1
15C DSPF skew adjustment (Back surface mode) 64-1
ADJ 16 Scan image magnification ratio
adjustment (Document table mode,
DSPF front surface mode)
16A Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Main scanning direction)
(Document table mode, DSPF front surface mode)
48-1
16B Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Sub scanning direction)
(Document table mode, DSPF front surface mode)
48-1
adjustment (DSPF back surface mode)
17A Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Main scanning direction)
(DSPF back surface mode)
48-1
17B Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Sub scanning direction)
48-1/48-5
ADJ 18 Scan image off-center adjustment 18A Scan image off-center adjustment (Document table mode, DSPF front surface mode) 50-12
18B Scan image off-center adjustment (DSPF back surface mode) 50-12
ADJ 19 Print area (Void area) adjustment (Print engine section) 50-10/50-1
ADJ 20 Copy image position, image loss
adjustment
20A Copy image position, image loss adjustment (Document table mode) 50-1 (50-2)
20B Original scan position adjustment 53-8
20C Copy image position, image loss adjustment (DSPF mode) 50-6 (50-7)
ADJ 21 Print lead edge image position adjustment (Printer mode) (Print engine section) 50-5
ADJ 22 Copy color balance/density adjustment 22A CCD gamma adjustment (CCD calibration) (Normal document copy mode) 63-3 (63-5)
22B CCD gamma adjustment (CCD calibration) (DSPF document copy mode) 63-3
22C Copy color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment) 46-24/44-21/
44-26
22D Copy color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) 46-21/44-21/
44-26/63-7/
63-8
22E Copy density adjustment (Each color copy mode) (Whole adjustment)
(Normally unnecessary to adjust)
46-1
22F Copy density adjustment (Each monochrome copy mode) (Whole adjustment)
(Normally unnecessary to adjust)
46-2
22G Copy color balance adjustment (Color balance adjustment at each density level in
each color copy mode) (Normally not required)
46-10
22H Monochrome copy density adjustment (Density adjustment at each density level in
each monochrome copy mode) (Normally not required)
46-16
3. Details of adjustment

ADJ 1 Developing doctor gap
adjustment (For color)
This adjustment must be executed in the following cases:
* When the developing unit is disassembled.
* When the print image density is low.
* When there is a blur on the print image.
* When there is unevenness in the print image density.
* There is abnormally much toner dispersion.
1) Remove the developing unit from the main unit, and remove
the developing unit upper cover and the developing doctor
cover.
2) Loosen the developing doctor fixing screw.
3) Insert a thickness gauge of 0.40mm between 40mm 70mm
from the edge of the developing doctor.
4) Push the developing doctor in the arrow direction, and tighten
the fixing screw of the developing doctor. (Perform the similar
procedure for the front frame and the rear frame.)
ADJ 22 Copy color balance/density adjustment 22I Gamma/density adjustment in the text image edge section (Normally not required) 46-27
22J Copy color balance adjustment (Single color copy mode) (Normally not required) 46-25
22K Auto color balance adjustment by the user (Copy color balance auto adjustment
ENABLE setting and adjustment)
26-53
22L Background process condition setting in the color auto copy mode 46-33
22M Color document identification level (ACS operation) setting 46-33
ADJ 23 Printer color balance/density
adjustment
23A Printer color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment) 67-24/44-26
23B Printer color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) 67-25/44-26/
67-27/67-28
23C Auto color balance adjustment by the user (Printer color balance auto adjustment
26-54
ADJ 24 Fusing paper guide position adjustment
ADJ 25 Document size sensor adjustment 25A Document size sensor detection point adjustment 41-1
25B Document size sensor sensitivity adjustment 41-2
ADJ 26 Manual paper feed tray paper size (width) sensor adjustment 40-2
ADJ 27 DSPF paper feed tray paper size (width) sensor adjustment 53-6
ADJ 28 Touch panel coordinate setting 65-1
ADJ 29 Image loss, void area, image off-
center, image magnification ratio auto
adjustment with SIM50-28
29A Print image main scanning direction image magnification ratio automatic adjustment 50-28
29B Image off-center automatic adjustment 50-28
29C Copy lead edge image reference position adjustment, image off-center, sub scanning
direction image magnification ratio automatic adjustment
50-28
29D DSPF mode auto void adjustment (Service installation adjustment) 50-28
ADJ 30 Shading adjustment 63-2
Job No. Adjustment item list Simulation
40mm
70mm
40mm
70mm
5) Check that the doctor gaps at two positions in 40mm 70mm
from the both sides of the developing doctor are in the range of
0.40 0.05mm.
* When inserting a thickness gauge, be careful not to scratch the
developing doctor and the developing roller.

ADJ 2 Developing roller main pole
position adjustment (For color)
1) Remove the developing doctor cover, and place the develop-
ing unit on a flat surface.
2) Attach a thread to a needle or a pin.
3) Hold the thread and bring the needle near the developing
roller. (Do not use a paper clip because it will not provide a cor-
rect position.)
4) Mark the developing roller surface on the extension line of the
needle with the needle at 2 3mm from the developing roller
surface. (Never touch the needle tip with the developing roller.)
5) Measure the distance between the marking position and posi-
tion A of the developing unit frame, and check that it is 37.8
0.5mm.
If the distance is not within the above range, adjust the devel-
oping roller main pole position in the following procedures.
6) Remove the developing unit front cover, loosen the fixing
screw of the developing roller main pole adjustment plate, and
move the adjustment plate in the arrow direction to adjust.
Repeat procedures 3) 6) until the developing roller main pole
position comes to the specified range.
7) After completion of the adjustment of the developing roller
main pole position, fix the developing roller main pole adjust-
ment plate with the fixing screw.

ADJ 3 Developing doctor gap
adjustment (For black)
1) Remove the developing unit from the main unit, and remove
the developing unit upper cover and the developing doctor
cover.
2) Loosen the developing doctor fixing screw.
40mm
70mm
40mm
70mm
23mm
37.8
+
0.5mm
A
37.8
+
0.5mm
3) Insert a thickness gauge of 0.45mm between 40mm 70mm
from the edge of the developing doctor.
4) Push the developing doctor in the arrow direction, and tighten
the fixing screw of the developing doctor. (Perform the similar
procedure for the front frame and the rear frame.)
5) Check that the doctor gaps at two positions in 40mm 70mm
from the both sides of the developing doctor are in the range of
0.45 0.05mm.
* When inserting a thickness gauge, be careful not to scratch the
developing doctor and the developing roller.

ADJ 4 Developing roller main pole
position adjustment (For black)
1) Remove the developing doctor cover, and place the develop-
ing unit on a flat surface.
2) Attach a thread to a needle or a pin.
3) Hold the thread and bring the needle near the developing
roller. (Do not use a paper clip because it will not provide a cor-
rect position.)
4) Mark the developing roller surface on the extension line of the
needle with the needle at 2 3mm from the developing roller
surface. (Never touch the needle tip with the developing roller.)
5) Measure the distance between the marking position and posi-
tion A of the developing unit frame, and check that it is 62.1
0.5mm.
If the distance is not within the above range, adjust the devel-
oping roller main pole position in the following procedures.
6) Remove the developing unit front cover, loosen the fixing
screw of the developing roller main pole adjustment plate, and
move the adjustment plate in the arrow direction to adjust.
Repeat procedures 3) 6) until the developing roller main pole
position comes to the specified range.
7) After completion of the adjustment of the developing roller
main pole position, fix the developing roller main pole adjust-
ment plate with the fixing screw.
40mm
70mm
70mm
40mm
40mm
70mm
70mm
40mm
23mm
62.1 0.5mm
+
62.1 0.5mm
+
A

ADJ 5 Toner density control reference
value setting
* When developer is replaced.
NOTE: Be sure to execute this adjustment only when developer is
replaced. Never execute it in the other cases.
1) With the front cover (lower) open, enter SIM25-2.
2) Close the front cover (lower).
3) Select a developing unit to be adjusted.
4) When [EXECUTE] key it pressed, it is highlighted. The devel-
oping roller rotates, and the toner sensor detects toner density,
and the output value is displayed.
The above operation is executed for 3 minutes, and the aver-
age value of the toner density sensor detection level is set
(saved) as the reference toner density control value.
When the reference toner density control adjustment operation
is completed, [EXECUTE] key display return, to normal from
highlight. This makes you know whether the adjustment opera-
tion is completed or not.
The above operation is executed each of the lower speed
mode, the middle speed mode and the high speed mode, and
the reference toner density control value is set for each of
them.
NOTE: If the operation is interrupted within 3 minutes, the
adjustment result is not reflected (enabled).
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during rotation, the opera-
tion is stopped and [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal dis-
play.
If [EE-EU], [EE-EL], or [EE-EG] is displayed, setting of the ref-
erence toner density control value is not completed normally.
5) Use SIM24-5 to clear the developer counter.
6) Use SIM44-27 to clear the half-tone correction data.
NOTE:
1) When replacing developer, always replace all the three colors
of Yellow, Magenta, and Cyan.
If only one color is replaced, color balance may be adversely
affected. Black developer can be replaced individually.
2) After replacement of developer or the photoconductor, be sure
to execute SIM44-27 to clear the half-tone correction data.
If the above procedure is neglected, the half-tone correction
may not be performed correctly.

ADJ 6 High voltage adjustments

6-A Main charger grid voltage adjustment
* When the MC/DV high voltage power PWB is replaced.
* When U2 trouble occurs.
* When the PCU PWB is replaced.
* When EEPROM on the PCU PWB is replaced.
EXECUTE
M
K
Adjustment completed
EXECUTE
Abnormal end
Y C
AUTOMATIC DEVELOPER ADJUSTMENT
EXECUTE
TCD_K 45 :
1/1
SIMULATION NO.25-02
TEST
CLOSE
TCV_K 45 :
TCD_C 50 :
TCD_M 50 :
TCD_Y 45 :
TCV_C 50 :
TCV_M 50 :
TCV_Y 50 :
M K
M Y C K
EXECUTE
AT DEVE ADJ_L_K 128 : AT DEVEVO_L_Y 128 :
1/1
SIMULATION NO.25-02
TEST
CLOSE
AT DEVE ADJ_M_K 128 : AT DEVE VO_M_Y 128 :
AT DEVE ADJ_L_C 128 : AT DEVE VO_M_K 128 :
AT DEVE ADJ_L_M 128 : AT DEVE VO_M_C 128 :
AT DEVE ADJ_L_Y 128 : AT DEVE VO_M_M 128 :
AT DEVE ADJ_M_C 128 : AT DEVE VO_H_K 128 :
AT DEVE ADJ_M_M 128 :
AT DEVE ADJ_M_Y 128 :
AT DEVE ADJ_H_K 128 :
AT DEVEVO_L_K 128 :
AT DEVEVO_L_M 128 :
AT DEVEVO_L_C 128 :
or process interrupt
Y C
EXECUTE
TCD_K EE-EL :
1/1
SIMULATION NO.25-02
TEST
CLOSE
TCV_K :
TCD_C 50 :
TCD_M EE-EL :
TCD_Y 45 :
TCV_C :
TCV_M :
TCV_Y :
M K
M Y C K
EXECUTE
AT DEVE ADJ_L_K 185 : AT DEVEVO_L_Y 128 :
1/1
SIMULATION NO.25-02
TEST
CLOSE
: AT DEVE ADJ_L_Y 128 : AT DEVE VO_M_M 185
AT DEVEVO_L_K 185 :
AT DEVEVO_L_M 185 :
AT DEVEVO_L_C 128 :
Error
display
Error name Detail of error Remark
EE-EL EL
abnormality
(1) The sensor output level is less
than 0.5V in 1min after execution
of SIM25-02.
When either
of (1) or (2)
is satisfied.
(2) The sensor output level is less
than 1.5V after the adjustment for
each speed or the control voltage
exceeds 8.0V.
EE-EU EU
abnormality
(1) The sensor output level
exceeds 4.5V in 1min after
execution of SIM25-02.
When either
of (1) or (2)
is satisfied.
The sensor output level exceeds
3.45V after the adjustment for
each speed or the control voltage
is less than 2.0V.
EE-EC EC
abnormality
The sensor output level after the
adjustment for each speed is not
2.5V 0.2V.
1) Enter SIM8-2 mode.
2) Select an output mode to be adjusted with the mode key and the scroll key.
3) Enter the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle speed mode and press [OK] key.
Remark: By setting the default value, the specified voltage is
normally outputted.
The adjustment value of each color mode is specified on the label
attached to the MC/DV high voltage power PWB. Enter that value.
GBK:XXX GBC:XXX GBM:XXX GBY:XXX
When the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle speed
mode is set, the adjustment values of the other modes are auto-
matically set according to the middle speed mode setting in a cer-
tain relationship.
To adjust all the modes individually, first adjust the middle speed
mode, and then adjust the other mode.
If the middle speed mode is adjusted after adjustment of all the
modes individually, the adjustment values of the other modes are
automatically changed. Use care for that.
Therefore, unless there may be an abnormality in the output volt-
age, there is no need to check the output value.
If it must be checked that the normal voltage is outputted or if an
adjustment is required by referring to the output voltage, follow the
procedures below.
or after 30 sec.
10-key
A: 583 ; MIDDLE SPEED GB_K
B: 635 ; MIDDLE SPEED GB_C
C: 635 ; MIDDLE SPEED GB_M
D: 635 ; MIDDLE SPEED GB_Y
A:
SIMULATION NO.08-02
DV SETTING AND OUTPUT
XXX
230 850
OK
TEST
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
CLOSE
LOW/HIGH MIDDLE
A: 500 ; MIDDLE SPEED GB_K
B: 635 ; MIDDLE SPEED GB_C
C: 635 ; MIDDLE SPEED GB_M
D: 635 ; MIDDLE SPEED GB_Y
A:
SIMULATION NO.08-02
XXX
230 850
OK
TEST
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
CLOSE
LOW/HIGH MIDDLE
Item Mode
Adjustment value Monitor (MC/DV high voltage PWB)
Actual
voltage
Adjustment
range
Default value
Monitor voltage
(Specified value)
Connector
Pin
No.
MIDDLE A MIDDLE SPEED
GB_K
K Main charger grid voltage
(Middle speed mode)
230 850 583 54.1 1.62V CNMON 8 620V
B MIDDLE SPEED
GB_C
C Main charger grid voltage
(Middle speed mode)
230 850 635 55.5 1.67V CNMON 6 635V
C MIDDLE SPEED
GB_M
M Main charger grid voltage
(Middle speed mode)
230 850 635 55.5 1.67V CNMON 4 635V
D MIDDLE SPEED
GB_Y
Y Main charger grid voltage
(Middle speed mode)
230 850 635 55.5 1.67V CNMON 2 635V
LOW/
HIGH
A LOW SPEED
GB_K
(Low speed mode)
230 850 552 50.9 1.53V CNMON 8 585V
B LOW SPEED
GB_C
C Main charger grid voltage
(Low speed mode)
230 850 600 52.3 1.57V CNMON 6 600V
C LOW SPEED
GB_M
M Main charger grid voltage
(Low speed mode)
230 850 600 52.3 1.57V CNMON 4 600V
D LOW SPEED
GB_Y
Y Main charger grid voltage
(Low speed mode)
230 850 600 52.3 1.57V CNMON 2 600V
E HIGH SPEED
GB_K
(High speed mode)
230 850 604 (70-sheets machine)
598 (62/55-sheets
machine)
60.5 1.82V CNMON 8 690V
1) Remove the screw, and remove the main unit rear cover.
2) Open the PWB holder.
4) Select an output mode to be adjusted with the mode key and
the scroll key.
5) Check the relationship between the pin No. of the connector
CNMON on the MC/DV high voltage PWB and each adjust-
ment mode.
6) Apply a digital multi-meter to the connector CNMON pin on the
MC/DV high voltage PWB corresponding to the adjusted
mode.
7) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The main charger grid voltage is outputted for 30sec.
If this procedure is executed for a long time, the OPC drum
and the developing roller may be adversely affected. Use this
procedure as short as possible.
If possible, it is recommendable to use an unnecessary devel-
oping unit and an unnecessary OPC drum for this adjustment.
8) Check the monitor voltage with the digital multi-meter.
If the monitor voltage is not in the range of the specified values
shown in the table above, change the adjustment value and
adjust again. If the specified value voltage is not obtained even
though the adjustment value is changed, the following parts
may be defective.
MC/DV high voltage PWB
PCU PWB
Developing unit
OPC drum unit
High voltage circuit electrode

6-B Developing bias voltage adjustment
* When MC/DV high voltage power PWB is replaced.
* When PCU PWB is replaced.
the scroll key.
3) Enter the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle
speed mode and press [OK] key.
1
2
or after 30 sec.
10-key
A : 450 ; MIDDLE SPEED DVB_K
B : 450 ; MIDDLE SPEED DVB_C
C : 450 ; MIDDLE SPEED DVB_M
D: 450 ; MIDDLE SPEED DVB_Y
A:
SIMULATION NO.08-01
XXX
0 700
OK
TEST
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
CLOSE
LOW/HIGH MIDDLE
A : 500 ; MIDDLE SPEED DVB_K
B : 450 ; MIDDLE SPEED DVB_C
C : 450 ; MIDDLE SPEED DVB_M
D: 450 ; MIDDLE SPEED DVB_Y
A:
SIMULATION NO.08-01
XXX
0 700
OK
TEST
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
CLOSE
LOW/HIGH MIDDLE
Item Mode
Adjustment value Monitor (MC/DV high voltage PWB)
Actual
voltage
Adjustment
range
Default
value
Monitor voltage
(Specified value)
Connector
Pin
No.
MIDDLE A MIDDLE SPEED DVB_K K Developing bias voltage (Middle
speed mode)
0 700 450 12.0 0.36V CNMON 7 450V
B MIDDLE SPEED DVB_C C Developing bias voltage (Middle
speed mode)
0 700 450 12.0 0.36V CNMON 5 450V
C MIDDLE SPEED DVB_M M Developing bias voltage (Middle
speed mode)
0 700 450 12.0 0.36V CNMON 3 450V
D MIDDLE SPEED DVB_Y Y Developing bias voltage (Middle
speed mode)
0 700 450 12.0 0.36V CNMON 1 450V
LOW/
HIGH
A LOW SPEED DVB_K K Developing bias voltage (Low
speed mode)
0 700 420 11.1 0.33V CNMON 7 420V
B LOW SPEED DVB_C C Developing bias voltage (Low
speed mode)
0 700 420 11.1 0.33V CNMON 5 420V
C LOW SPEED DVB_M M Developing bias voltage (Low
speed mode)
0 700 420 11.1 0.33V CNMON 3 420V
D LOW SPEED DVB_Y Y Developing bias voltage (Low
speed mode)
0 700 420 11.1 0.33V CNMON 1 420V
E HIGH SPEED DVB_K K Developing bias voltage (High
speed mode)
0 700 450 12.0 0.36V CNMON 7 450V
Remark: By setting the default value, the specified voltage is
normally outputted.
The adjustment value of each color mode is specified on the label
attached to the MC/DV high voltage power PWB. Enter that value.
DVK:XXX DVC:XXX DVM:XXX DVY:XXX
When the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle speed
mode is set, the adjustment values of the other modes are auto-
matically set according to the middle speed mode setting in a cer-
tain relationship.
To adjust all the modes individually, first adjust the middle speed
mode, then adjust the other mode.
If the middle speed mode is adjusted after adjustment of all the
modes individually, the adjustment values of the other modes are
automatically changed. Use care for that.
Therefore, unless there may be an abnormality in the output volt-
age, there is no need to check the output value.
If it must be checked that the normal voltage is outputted or if an
adjustment is required by referring to the output voltage, follow the
procedures below.
1) Remove the screw, and remove the main unit rear cover.
2) Open the PWB frame.
the scroll key.
5) Check the relationship between the pin No. of the connector
CNMON on the MC/DV high voltage PWB and each adjust-
ment mode.
6) Apply a digital multi-meter to the connector CNMON pin on the
MC/DV high voltage PWB corresponding to the adjusted
mode.
The developing bias voltage is outputted for 30sec.
8) Check the monitor voltage with the digital multi-meter.
If the monitor voltage is not in the range of the specified values
shown in the table above, change the adjustment value and
adjust again. If the specified value voltage is not obtained even
though the adjustment value is changed, the following parts
may be defective.
MC/DV high voltage PWB
PCU PWB
Developing unit
OPC drum unit
High voltage circuit electrode

6-C Transfer voltage adjustment
* When the TC high voltage power PWB is replaced.
1
2
CNMON
1
or after 30 sec.
10-key
A: 78 ; TC1 LOW SPEED CL K
B: 78 ; TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL K
C: 68 ; TC1 LOW SPEED CL C
D: 68 ; TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL C
A:
SIMULATION NO.08-06
THV SETTING AND OUTPUT
XXX
0 255
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E: 68 ; TC1 LOW SPEED CL M
F : 68 ; TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL M
G: 68 ; TC1 LOW SPEED CL Y
H: 68 ; TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL Y
I : 78 ; TC1 LOW SPEED BW K
J : 78 ; TC1 MIDDLE SPEED BW K
K: 130 ; TC1 HIGH SPEED BW K
L : 132 ; TC2 PLAIN CL SPX
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
A:
SIMULATION NO.08-06
XXX
0 255
OK
TEST
CLOSE
F: 68 ; TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL M
L: 132 ; TC2 PLAIN CL SPX
EXECUTE
2) Select a mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
3) Enter an adjustment value (specified value) and press [OK] key.
By setting the default value (specified value), the specified voltage is outputted.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the transfer voltage is outputted.

ADJ 7 Image density sensor, image
registration sensor adjustment
There are some assembly variations in the image density sensor
section. Therefore, the absolute detection level differs in each
machine. To correct this, calibration is executed.
* When the image density sensor is replaced.
* When the image resist sensor is replaced.
The targets of the adjustment are the color image density sensor,
the black image density sensor, and the image registration sensor.
There are following adjustment methods.
* Color image density sensor adjustment (Calibration with the
adjustment jig) SIM44-13
* Color/black image density sensor and the image registration sen-
sor adjustment SIM44-2
NOTE:
Before executing this adjustment, check to confirm the following
items.
* Check to confirm that the color image density sensor, the black
image density sensor, and the image registration sensor are
clean.
* Check to confirm that the image density sensor calibration plate
is clean.
* Check to confirm that the transfer belt is clean and free from
scratches.
Item Display Content
Set
range
Default
value
Actual output
setting range
Actual output
value of the
initial value
A TC1 LOW SPEED CL K Primary
transfer bias
reference value
Color K Lower speed 0 - 255 78 2A - 100A 15A
B TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL K Middle speed 0 - 255 78 2A - 100A 15A
C TC1 LOW SPEED CL C C Lower speed 0 - 255 68 2A - 100A 10A
D TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL C Middle speed 0 - 255 68 2A - 100A 10A
E TC1 LOW SPEED CL M M Lower speed 0 - 255 68 2A - 100A 10A
F TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL M Middle speed 0 - 255 68 2A - 100A 10A
G TC1 LOW SPEED CL Y Y Lower speed 0 - 255 68 2A - 100A 10A
H TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL Y Middle speed 0 - 255 68 2A - 100A 10A
I TC1 LOW SPEED BW K Black and white K Lower speed 0 - 255 78 2A - 100A 15A
J TC1 MIDDLE SPEED BW K Middle speed 0 - 255 78 2A - 100A 15A
K TC1 HIGH SPEED BW K High speed 0 - 255 130 2A - 100A 40A
L TC2 PLAIN CL SPX Secondary
transfer bias
reference value
Color Normal
paper
Front surface 51 - 255 132 2A - 60A 25A
M TC2 PLAIN CL DPX Back surface 51 - 255 132 2A - 60A 25A
N TC2 PLAIN BW SPX Black and white Front surface 51 - 255 184 2A - 60A 40A
O TC2 PLAIN BW DPX Back surface 51 - 255 184 2A - 60A 40A
P TC2 HEAVY CL SPX Color Heavy
paper
Front surface 51 - 255 88 2A - 60A 12.5A
Q TC2 HEAVY CL DPX Back surface 51 - 255 88 2A - 60A 12.5A
R TC2 HEAVY BW SPX Black and white Front surface 51 - 255 79 2A - 60A 10A
S TC2 HEAVY BW DPX Back surface 51 - 255 79 2A - 60A 10A
T TC2 OHP CL Color OHP 51 - 255 72 2A - 60A 8A
U TC2 OHP BW Black and white 51 - 255 72 2A - 60A 8A
V TC2 ENVELOPE CL Color Envelope 51 - 255 149 2A - 60A 30A
W TC2 ENVELOPE BW Black and white 51 - 255 149 2A - 60A 30A
X TC2 CLEANING Cleaning process 51 - 255 72 2A - 60A 8A
Y TC2 CLEAN LOW SPD Secondary
transfer
cleaning bias
reference value
Printing at low speed 51 - 255 72 50V - 1500V 200V
Z TC2 CLEAN MIDDLE SPD Printing at middle speed 51 - 255 100 50V - 1500V 400V
AA TC2 CLEAN HIGH SPD Printing at high speed 51 - 255 114 50V - 1500V 500V
AB TC2 CLEAN CLEANING Cleaning 51 - 255 156 50V - 1500V 800V
AC PTC LOW SPEED CL PTC current
reference value
Color Lower speed 0 - 255 119 0/100A - 700A 300A
AD PTC MIDDLE SPEED CL Middle speed 0 - 255 119 0/100A - 700A 300A
AE PTC LOW SPEED BK Black and white Lower speed 0 - 255 119 0/100A - 700A 300A
AF PTC MIDDLE SPEED BK Middle speed 0 - 255 119 0/100A - 700A 300A
AG PTC HIGH SPEED BK High speed 0 - 255 119 0/100A - 700A 300A
AH VCASE LOW SPEED CL PTC case
voltage
reference value
Color Lower speed 0 - 255 0 0/200V - 1000V 0
AI VCASE MIDDLE SPEED CL Middle speed 0 - 255 0 0/200V - 1000V 0
AJ VCASE LOW SPEED BK Black and white Lower speed 0 - 255 0 0/200V - 1000V 0
AK VCASE MIDDLE SPEED BK Middle speed 0 - 255 0 0/200V - 1000V 0
AL VCASE HIGH SPEED BK High speed 0 - 255 0 0/200V - 1000V 0

7-A Color image density sensor calibration
1) Open the front cover (lower).
2) Turn to the transfer belt tension release cam and release the
primary transfer belt tension.
NOTE:
When the transfer belt tension of the primary transfer unit is
released manually, turn on the power again after completion of
the work. (Power OFF-ON) This procedure initializes the trans-
fer roller to return it to the home position.
3) Open the right cover unit (secondary transfer unit section).
4) Open the process front cover, loosen the screw, and pull out
the primary transfer belt unit.
5) Remove the developing unit (BK) and the OPC drum unit (BK).
6) Install the image density sensor calibration jig (UKOG-
0318FCZZ) to the sensor housing section.
Engage the pawl (A) in the sensor housing groove, and slide it
to the rear frame side.
7) Turn on the power and enter SIM44-13 mode.
8) Close the right cover unit (secondary transfer unit section).
Color image sensor calibration is automatically executed.
When the operation is completed, the adjustment result is dis-
played and [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display.
If the adjustment is not completed normally, "ERROR" is displayed.
In that case, check the following sections for any abnormality. If any
abnormality is found, repair and adjust again.
If an error occurs, the adjustment result is not revised.
* Color image density sensor
* PCU PWB
* Image sensor calibration jig (standard reflection sheet dirt,
scratch, discoloration)
NOTE: Store the image sensor calibration jig under low tempera-
ture, low humidity and dark place.
A
A
Display/Item Content
Adjustment
value range
Default
value
A PCS_CL
CARB OUT
Color image density sensor
LED current adjustment
target value
1 255 108
B PCS_CL
DARK
dark-voltage level
0 255 0
C PCS_CL
LED ADJ
LED current adjustment
target value (PCS CL CARB
OUT) registered LED current
level
1 255 21
or when the color sensor
adjustment is completed
SIMULATION NO.44-13
TEST
PATCH SEAL ADJUSTMENT
EXECUTE
PCS CL CARB OUT 108 :
PCS CL DARK 0 :
PCS CL LED ADJ 21 :
1/1
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-13
TEST
EXECUTE
PCS CL DARK 0 :
PCS CL LED ADJ 21 :
1/1
CLOSE
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
OK

7-B Color image density sensor, black image
density sensor, image registration sensor
adjustment
The color image density sensor, the black image density sen-
sor, and the image registration sensor are automatically
adjusted.
After completion of the adjustment, the adjustment result is
displayed and [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display.
If the adjustment is not completed normally, "ERROR" is dis-
played.
In that case, check the following sections for any abnormality.
If any abnormality is found, repair and adjust again.
If an error occurs, the adjustment result is not revised.
* Color image density sensor
* Black image density sensor
* Image registration sensor
* PCU PWB
* Transfer belt (dirt, scratch)
* Transfer belt cleaner
PROCON GAIN ADJUSTMENT
EXECUTE
PCS_CL LED ADJ 21 : PCS_K LED ADJ 21 :
1/2
SIMULATION NO.44-02
TEST
CLOSE
PCS_K BELT DIF 0 :
PCS_CL DARK 0 : PCS_K DARK 0 :
PCS_K GRND 0 :
PCS_K BELT MAX 0 : PCS_K BELT MIN 0 :
REG_F LED ADJ 27 : REG_R LED ADJ 27 :
REG_F DARK 0 : REG_R DARK 0 :
REG_F GRND 0 : REG_R GRND 0 :
REG_F BELT MAX 0 : REG_F BELT MIN 0 :
REG_F BELT DIF 0 : REG_R BELT MAX 0 :
REG_R BELT MIN 0 : REG_R BELT DIF 0 :
Display/Item Content Adjustment value range Default value
PROCON A PCS_CL LED ADJ Color image density sensor light emitting quantity adjustment value 1 255 21
B PCS _K LED ADJ Black image density sensor light emitting quantity adjustment value 1 255 21
C PCS_CL DARK Color image sensor dark voltage 0 255 0
D PCS_K DARK Black image density sensor dark voltage 0 255 0
E PCS_K GRND Belt base detection level when completion of Item B adjustment 0 255 0
F PCS_K BELT MAX Belt base detection level (Max.) 0 255 0
G PCS_K BELT MIN Belt base detection level (Min.) 0 255 0
H PCS_K BELT DIF Belt base detection level difference (Item E, Item F) 0 255 0
REGIST I REG_F LED ADJ Image registration sensor light emitting quantity adjustment value F 1 255 27
J REG_R LED ADJ Image registration sensor light emitting quantity adjustment value R 1 255 27
K REG_F DARK Image registration sensor dark voltage F 0 255 0
L REG_R DARK Image registration sensor dark voltage R 0 255 0
M REG_F GRND Belt base detection level when completion of Item I adjustment 0 255 0
N REG_R GRND Belt base detection level when completion of Item J adjustment 0 256 0
O REG_F BELTMAX Belt base detection level (Max.) F 0 255 0
P REG_F BELT MIN Belt base detection level (Min.) F 0 255 0
Q REG_F BELT DIF Belt base detection level difference (Item O, Item P) 0 255 0
R REG_R BELT MAX Belt base detection level (Max.) R 0 255 0
S REG_R BELT MIN Belt base detection level (Min.) R 0 255 0
T REG_R BELT DIF Belt base detection level difference (Item R, Item S) 0 255 0
U REG_F PATCH (K) Patch detection level F (K) 0 255 0
V REG_F PATCH (C) Patch detection level F (C) 0 255 0
W REG_F PATCH (M) Patch detection level F (M) 0 255 0
X REG_F PATCH (Y) Patch detection level F (Y) 0 255 0
Y REG_R PATCH (K) Patch detection level R (K) 0 255 0
Z REG_R PATCH (C) Patch detection level R (C) 0 255 0
AA REG_R PATCH (M) Patch detection level R (M) 0 255 0
AB REG_R PATCH (Y) Patch detection level R (Y) 0 255 0

ADJ 8 Image skew adjustment
(LSU (writing) unit)
* When the LSU (writing) unit is replaced.
* When the LSU (writing) unit is removed from the main unit.
* When a color image registration mistake occurs.
* When the unit is installed or when the installing site is changed.
(Required depending on the cases.)
* When there is an uneven density area or a difference in color
balance in the main scanning direction (back and forth).
* When the OPC drum drive unit is replaced.
* When the primary transfer unit is replaced.
* When the color phase is not matched by the color balance
adjustment.
2) Select the paper feed tray with A3 (11 x 17) paper in it by
changing the value of set item B.
The check pattern is printed out.
4) Check the printed black image for any skew (right angle).
Measure the right angle level by using the six cross patterns
printed in black.
There are following two methods of checking the black image
for any skew (right angle).
Method 1: Measure the length of the diagonal lines from the
cross point of the cross pattern. Check the difference in the
length of the diagonal lines for judgment of good or no good.
Method 2: Use the right angle sides of A3 or 11 x 8.5 paper for
judgment of good or no good.
NOTE:
IN the case of Method 2, the right angle of paper to be used
may not be exact. Be sure to check the right angle of paper to
be used in advance.
(Method 1)
a) Measure the length of the diagonal lines from the cross
point of the outside cross pattern.
b) Calculate the difference between the measured lengths C
and D of the diagonal lines.
c) Check to insure that the difference between C and D is in
the following range.
C D = 0.8mm
If the difference between C and D is in the above range,
there is no need to adjust.
(Method 2)
a) Fit the three cross points of the cross patterns in a row with
the side of A3 or 11 x 8.5 paper for checking for any skew
(right angle).
b) Measure the shortest distance between the cross pattern
on the extended line of the vertical line and the paper side.
If the above distance is 0.5mm or less, there is no need to
adjust.
If not, execute the following procedures.
5) Open the front cover (lower).
6) Loosen the LSU (writing) unit fixing screws (2 pcs.) and shift
the skew adjustment screw in the arrow direction to adjust the
LSU (writing) unit skew.
(When Method 1 is used to check the black image for any
skew (right angle) in procedure 4)
When the lengths of the diagonal line are C > D, shift the
adjustment screw in the direction of Y.
When the lengths of the diagonal line are C < D, shift the
adjustment screw in the direction of X.
A : 1 ; MULTICOUNT
B : 4 ; PAPER : CS3 A:
SIMULATION NO.61-04
LSU POSITION ADJUSTMENT (SELF PRINT)
XXX
1 999
OK
TEST
CLOSE
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
A : 2 ; MULTICOUNT
SIMULATION NO.61-04
XXX
1 999
OK
TEST
CLOSE
EXECUTE
or end of print
10-key
R
F
Diagonal line D
Diagonal line C
Direction A Direction B
R
F
Comparison line
A3 or 11 x 8.5 paper
The cross patterns in a row
Reference line
0.5 mm or less
(When Method 2 is used to check the black image for any
skew (right angle) in procedure 4)
If the image is skewed in the arrow direction of A, shift the
adjustment screw to X direction. If the image is skewed in the
arrow direction of B, shift the adjustment screw to Y direction.
8) Execute procedures 3) 4).
(Repeat procedures 5) 8) until a satisfactory result is
obtained.)
9) If the adjustment result reaches the satisfactory level, tighten
the adjustment screw.
(The black image skew adjustment is completed with the
above.)
10) In the above black image skew adjustment, check the color
image skew pattern printed when completion of the adjust-
ment.
In each Y/M/C color print pattern printed separately in the front
frame direction and in the rear frame direction, note the same
print color pattern and check to confirm that the difference in
the highest density sections is within 1 step.
(Compare the front and the rear frame positions of the same-
color print color patterns. All the highest density sections of all
the print color patterns may not be aligned on a line. Compare
only the same-color patterns.)
If the above condition is not satisfied, execute the procedures
below.
11) Turn the image skew adjustment screw of the target color to
adjust.
When each adjustment screw is turned, it clicks. Turn it by
5 6 clicks and the check pattern is changed by 1 step (1
dot size).
When the image skew pattern on the front frame side is
skewed in the arrow direction of A (to the smaller character)
from the rear frame side, turn the adjustment screw counter-
clockwise. When the image is skewed in the arrow direction of
B (to the larger character), turn the adjustment screw clock-
wise.
12) Print the check pattern.
13) Check the color image skew pattern.
Repeat procedures 11) 13) until a satisfactory result is obtained.
The image skew adjustment (LSU unit) is executed by changing
the parallelism of the LSU unit scan laser beam for the OPC drum.

ADJ 9 OPC drum phase adjustment
(Auto adjustment)
NOTE: This machine is provided with the manual photoconductor
phase adjustment function (SIM 44-31), which, however, is
rather difficult to perform. Therefore, it is advisable to use
SIM 50-22 to perform the automatic adjustment.
* When the OPC drum is replaced.
* When the OPC drum is removed from the main unit.
* When the OPC drum drive section is disassembled.
* When the OPC drum drive unit is replaced.
* When the PCU MAIN PWB is replaced.
* When EEPROM on the PCU MAIN PWB is replaced.
X Y
R
F
*A
*A: Rough adjustment pattern
*B
*B: Fine adjustment pattern
*B
Direction A Direction B
M
a
g
e
n
t
a
C
y
a
n
Y
e
l
l
o
w
C
Y M
2) Press [ALL] key.
(The machine enters the OPC drum phase adjustment mode/
image registration adjustment (auto adjustment) mode, and
both adjustments are executed simultaneously in this mode.)
The OPC drum phase adjustment and the image registration
adjustment can be individually executed by [REGIST] key and
[DRUM POS] key. Since, however, the image registration
adjustment must be executed when the OPC drum phase
adjustment is completed, both adjustment are executed in this
adjustment simultaneously.
The OPC drum phase adjustment and the image registration
adjustment are executed automatically.
* After completion of the adjustment, the drum motor stops and
[EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display and the adjustment
result is displayed.
MAIN, SUB: Image regist adjustment value is displayed.
( ) is the difference from the previous adjustment value.
Example: This time 105.0, previous time 103.0: 105.0 (+2)
PHASE: OPC drum phase adjustment value is displayed.
( ) is the previous adjustment value.
Example: This time 90, previous time 45: 3 (2)
* In case of an error, "ERROR" is displayed with the details.

ADJ 10 Print engine image
magnification ratio adjustment
(BK) (Main scanning direction)
(Print engine section) (Manual
adjustment)
2) Set A4 (11 x 8.5) paper in the paper feed tray.
3) Select the paper feed tray set in procedure 2) with the scroll
key.
The check pattern is printed.
Normal end
Abnormal end
SIMULATION NO.50-22
TEST
AUTO ADJUSTMENT OF REGISTRATION&DLUM POSITION
CLOSE
EXECUTE
NOW EXECUTING...
SIMULATION NO.50-22
TEST
CLOSE
EXECUTE
PRESS [EXECUTE] TO START
ERROR`TONNER EMPTY 01
SIMULATION NO.50-22
TEST
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
MAIN F MAIN R SUB
C 105.0(+0.2) 110.0(-0.1) 103.0(+0.4)
M 100.0(+0.0) 99.0(-0.2) 99.0(+0.2)
Y 98.0(+0.3) 98.0(+0.1) 105(+0.0)
1/1
CLOSE
REGIST DRUM POS ALL
START POINT AMP
CL 1(2) 0(1)
PHASE
M 1(2) 0.0(0.1)
K 1(2) 0(1)
C 1(2)
AMP
0.0(0.1)
Y 0.0(0.1)
A : 100 ; BK-MAG
B : 50 ; MFT
C : 50 ; CS1
D : 50 ; CS2
A:
SIMULATION NO.50-10
PAPER CENTER OFFSET SETUP
XXX
XXX
60 140
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 50 ; CS3
F : 50 ; CS4
G : 50 ; LCC
H : 50 ; ADU
I : 1 ; MULTICOUNT
J : 2 ; PAPER : CS1
K : 1 ; DUPLEX : NO
EXECUTE
A : 50 ; BK-MAG
B : 50 ; MFT
C : 50 ; CS1
D : 50 ; CS2
A:
SIMULATION NO.50-10
60 140
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 50 ; CS3
F : 50 ; CS4
G : 50 ; LCC
H : 50 ; ADU
I : 1 ; MULTICOUNT
J : 2 ; PAPER : CS1
K : 1 ; DUPLEX : NO
EXECUTE
end of print
EXECUTE
10-key
EXECUTE
5) Check that the inside dimension of the printed half tone is 240
0.5mm.
If the above condition is not satisfied, execute the procedures
below.
6) Change the set value of set item A.
When the set value is changed by 1, the dimension is changed
by 0.1mm.
When the set value is increased, the BK image magnification
ratio in the main scanning direction is increased. When the set
value is decreased, the BK image magnification ratio in the
main scanning direction is decreased.
Repeat procedures 2) 6) until a satisfactory result is obtained.

ADJ 11 Image off-center adjustment
* When the LSU is replaced or removed.
* When ADJ 10 Print engine image magnification ratio adjustment
(BK) (Main scanning direction) (Print engine section) (Manual
adjustment) is performed.
* When a paper tray is replaced.
* When the paper tray section is disassembled.
* When the manual feed tray is replaced.
* When the manual feed tray is disassembled.
* When the duplex section is disassembled.
* When the duplex section is installed or replaced.
* When the large capacity paper feed tray is installed or replaced.
* When the large capacity paper feed tray section is disassembled.
* When the regist roller section is disassembled.
(Caution)
Before execution of this adjustment, check the following item.
* Check to insure that the Print engine image magnification ratio
adjustment (BK) (Main scanning direction) (Print engine section)
(Manual adjustment) has been properly adjusted.
2) Select set item J with the scroll key and enter the value corre-
sponding to the paper feed tray to be adjusted.
Set
range
Default
value
A BK-MAG Main scan print
magnification ratio BK
60 140 100
B MFT Print off-center adjustment
value (Manual feed tray)
1 99 50
C CS1 Print off-center adjustment
value (Paper feed tray 1)
1 99 50
D CS2 Print off-center adjustment
1 99 50
E CS3 Print off-center adjustment
1 99 50
F CS4 Print off-center adjustment
1 99 50
G LCC Print off-center adjustment
value (LCC)
1 99 50
H ADU Print off-center adjustment
value (ADU)
Note: Before execution of
this adjustment, check to
insure that the adjustment
items A G have been
properly adjusted. If not,
this adjustment cannot be
made properly.
1 99 50
I MULTI COUNT Print quantity 1 999 1
A : 100 ; BK-MAG
B : 50 ; MFT
C : 50 ; CS1
D : 50 ; CS2
A:
SIMULATION NO.50-10
XXX
XXX
60 140
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 50 ; CS3
F : 50 ; CS4
G : 50 ; LCC
H : 50 ; ADU
I : 1 ; MULTICOUNT
J : 2 ; PAPER : CS1
K : 1 ; DUPLEX : NO
EXECUTE
A : 50 ; BK-MAG
B : 50 ; MFT
C : 50 ; CS1
D : 50 ; CS2
A:
SIMULATION NO.50-10
60 140
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 50 ; CS3
F : 50 ; CS4
G : 50 ; LCC
H : 50 ; ADU
I : 1 ; MULTICOUNT
J : 2 ; PAPER : CS1
K : 1 ; DUPLEX : NO
EXECUTE
End of print
EXECUTE
10-key
EXECUTE
3) Set A4 (11 x 8.5) paper in the paper feed tray selected in pro-
cedure 2).
The adjustment pattern is printed.
5) Check the adjustment pattern image position.
Measure the dimension of the void area in the front and the
rear frame direction of the adjustment pattern, and check that
all the following conditions are satisfied.
RV: REAR VOID AREA
FV: FRONT VOID AREA
RV + FV s 4.0mm
RV = 2.0 2.0mm
FV = 2.0 2.0mm
If the above conditions are not satisfied, execute the proce-
dures below.
6) Select the paper feed mode adjustment item (B H) to be
adjusted with the scroll key.
7) Change the adjustment value.
Enter the adjustment value and press [OK] or [EXECUTE] key.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
printed.
When the adjustment value is increased, the adjustment pat-
tern is shifted to the front frame side. When it is decreased, the
adjustment pattern is shifted to the rear frame side.
When the set value is changed by 1, the shift distance is
changed by about 0.1mm.
Repeat procedures 3) 7) until the conditions of procedure 5)
are satisfied.
In case a satisfactory result cannot be obtained by repeating
the above procedures, perform the following procedure.
8) Loosen the paper feed tray off-center adjustment screws (2
pcs.) at the center section of the lift plate of the paper feed tray,
and change the gear unit position in the front/back frame direc-
tion. Repeat the adjustment procedures from 4).

* When the LSU (writing) unit is removed from the main unit.
* When the color image registration mistake in the main scanning
direction occurs.
* When the color image registration mistake in the sub scanning
direction occurs.
* When the unit is installed or when the installing place is changed.
* When maintenance is executed. (Replacement of the OPC drum,
the OPC cartridge, the transfer unit, the transfer belt, etc.)
* When ADJ 10 Print engine image magnification ratio adjustment
(BK) (Main scanning direction) (Print engine section) (Manual
adjustment) is performed.
Note before adjustment
(Before execution of this adjustment, all the following adjustments
must have been completed.)
* Image skew adjustment (LSU (writing) unit)
* ADJ 10 Print engine image magnification ratio adjustment (BK)
(Main scanning direction) (Print engine section) (Manual adjust-
ment)
J PAPER MFT Paper feed
tray select
Manual paper
feed tray
1 6 1 2 (CS 1)
CS 1 Paper feed
tray 1
2
CS 2 Paper feed
tray 2
3
CS 3 Paper feed
tray 3
4
CS 4 Paper feed
tray 4
5
LCC LCC 6
K DUPLEX YES Duplex
print select
Selected 0 1 0 1 (NO)
Set
range
Default
value

12-A Image registration adjustment (Main
scanning direction, sub scanning direction)
(Auto adjustment)
In this adjustment, the image registration adjustment in the main
scanning direction and that in the sub scanning direction are exe-
cuted simultaneously and automatically.
2) Press [REGIST] key to select the image registration adjust-
ment auto adjustment mode.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted and the image registration auto
adjustment is started. After completion of the adjustment,
[EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display and the adjust-
ment result is displayed.
It takes about 40 sec to complete the adjustment.
MAIN, SUB: The entered value after adjustment is displayed.
( ): Difference from the previous value.
Example: This time 105, previous time 103: 105 (+2)
* In case of an error, "ERROR" is displayed with the details.
To check the auto adjustment result, use the manual image
registration adjustment mode below.
* Image registration adjustment (Main scanning direction) (Manual
adjustment) (SIM50-20)
* Image registration adjustment (Sub scanning direction) (Manual
adjustment) (SIM50-21)

12-B Image registration adjustment (Main
scanning direction) (Manual adjustment)
Adjustment
value range
Default
value
REGIST MAIN
F
C Image registration
adjustment value (Main
scanning direction)
(Cyan) (F side)
1.0 199.0 100
M Image registration
scanning direction)
(Magenta) (F side)
1.0 199.0 100
Y Image registration
scanning direction)
(Yellow) (F side)
1.0 199.0 100
Normal end
Abnormal end
SIMULATION NO.50-22
TEST
CLOSE
EXECUTE
NOW EXECUTING...
SIMULATION NO.50-22
TEST
CLOSE
EXECUTE
ERROR`TONNER EMPTY 01
SIMULATION NO.50-22
TEST
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
MAIN F MAIN R SUB
C 105.0(+0.2) 110.0(-0.1) 103.0(+0.4)
M 100.0(+0.0) 99.0(-0.2) 99.0(+0.2)
Y 98.0(+0.3) 98.0(+0.1) 105(+0.0)
1/1
CLOSE
REGIST DRUM POS ALL
START POINT AMP
CL 1(2) 0(1)
PHASE
M 1(2) 0.0(0.1)
K 1(2) 0(1)
C 1(2)
AMP
0.0(0.1)
Y 0.0(0.1)
REGIST MAIN
R
C Image registration
scanning direction)
(Cyan) (R side)
1.0 199.0 100
scanning direction)
(Magenta) (R side)
1.0 199.0 100
scanning direction)
(Yellow) (R side)
1.0 199.0 100
SUB C Image registration
adjustment value (Sub
scanning direction)
(Cyan)
1.0 199.0 100
scanning direction)
(Magenta)
1.0 199.0 100
scanning direction)
(Yellow)
1.0 199.0 100
Adjustment
value range
Default
value
A : 100 ; CYAN(FRONT)
B : 100 ; CYAN(REAR)
C : 100 ; MAGENTA(FRONT)
D : 100 ; MAGENTA(REAR)
A:
SIMULATION NO.50-20
REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT : FRONT-REAR DIRECTION
XXX
XXX
1 199
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 100 ; YELLOW(FRONT)
F : 100 ; YELLOW(REAR)
G : 1 ; MULTICOUNT
H : 4 ; PAPER : CS3
I : 1 ; DUPLEX : NO
EXECUTE
A:
SIMULATION NO.50-20
1 199
OK
TEST
CLOSE
G : 1 ; MULTICOUNT
H : 4 ; PAPER : CS3
I : 1 ; DUPLEX : NO
EXECUTE
End of print
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
10-key
2) Select the paper feed tray with A3 (11 x 17) paper in it by
changing the value of set item H.
The image registration adjustment pattern in the main scan-
ning direction is printed.
A: Rough adjustment pattern
B: Fine adjustment pattern
C: Adjustment range (0 1)
4) Check the rough adjustment and the fine adjustment print pat-
tern positions of each color in the front frame and the rear
frame sides.
Use the visually highest color density section as the center,
and measure the shift amount.
The front frame registration and the rear frame registration are
adjusted independently.
To check the image registration, therefore, check the front
frame side and the rear frame side individually.
(If the fine adjustment print pattern is located in the range of 0
1 from the fine adjustment reference pattern scale, the
adjustment is not required.)
If the above condition is not satisfied, select the color mode
adjustment item A F to be adjusted with the scroll key and
change the adjustment value to adjust.
Repeat procedures 3) 4) until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
For measurement of the shift amount and the calculation of the
adjustment value, refer to the table below.
P

c
l
d
e

m
a
r
k
A
P

c
l
d
e

m
a
r
k
A
A
A
A
A
C C
C C
C C
B B
Rough adjustment
print pattern check:
Check that the rough adjustment print pattern is at
the center for the rough adjustment reference
pattern.
Fine adjustment
Check that the fine adjustment print pattern is at the
center for the fine adjustment reference pattern.
Adjustment
value range
Default
value
A CYAN
(FRONT)
Image registration adjustment
value (Main scanning
direction) (Cyan) (F side)
1 199 100
B CYAN
(REAR)
direction) (Cyan) (R side)
1 199 100
C MAGENTA
(FRONT)
direction) (Magenta) (F side)
1 199 100
D MAGENTA
(REAR)
direction) (Magenta) (R side)
1 199 100
E YELLOW
(FRONT)
direction) (Yellow) (F side)
1 199 100
F YELLOW
(REAR)
direction) (Yellow) (R side)
1 199 100
(Measurement of the shift amount and the calculation of
the adjustment value)
a) Measurement of the shift amount
* Measurement of the fine adjustment pattern
The visually highest color density section is regarded as
the center, and used as the measurement value.
(Example)
The measurement value of the figure is "7."
* Measurement of the rough adjustment pattern
Check that the color line is positioned in the plus direc-
tion or in the minus direction and judge the polarity from
that.
The center black line is scaled as 0, the first line mark
as 20, the second line mark as 40, the third line mark as
60. The interval between the rough adjustment marks
corresponds to 20.
(Example)
In the case of the figure, it is between 20 40 of the
plus polarity, and the measurement is "20."
* The actual shift amount is the sum of the rough adjust-
ment reference shift amount and the fine adjustment
shift amount.
Shift amount (correction value) = Rough adjustment
shift amount + Fine adjustment shift amount
When calculating, be careful of the plus polarity and the
minus polarity.
(Example)
In the case of the figure, the total shift amount is 27.
Measurement value: 27 (= 20 + 7)
Measurement value: 27 (= 20 7)
The shift amount from the adjustment reference position
is calculated for each of six kinds of adjustment items A
F.
b) Adjustment value calculation
Add or subtract the shift amount calculated above to or
from the current adjustment value, and the result value is
used as the new adjustment value.
Adjustment value = Current adjustment value + Shift
amount (correction value)
(When the shift amount (correction value) is plus)
Adjustment value = Current adjustment value Shift
amount (correction value)
(When the shift amount (correction value) is minus)
~6O 6O
18
~18
14
~14
16
~16
16
~16
17
~17
18
20
~18
19
~19
O O
1
~1
2
~2
8
~8
4
~4
6
~6
6
~6
7
~7
8
~8
9
~9
12
~12
11
~11
~6O 6O
18
~18
14
~14
16
~16
16
~16
17
~17
18
-20
~18
19
~19
O O
1
~1
2
~2
8
~8
4
~4
6
~6
6
~6
7
~7
8
~8
9
~9
12
~12
11
~11
~6O 6O
18
~18
14
~14
16
~16
16
~16
17
~17
18
~18
19
~19
O O
1
~1
2
~2
8
~8
4
~4
6
~6
6
~6
7
~7
8
~8
9
~9
12
~12
11
~11
~6O 6O
18
~18
14
~14
16
~16
16
~16
17
~17
18
~18
19
~19
O O
1
~1
2
~2
8
~8
4
~4
6
~6
6
~6
7
~7
8
~8
9
~9
12
~12
11
~11
~6O 6O
18
~18
14
~14
16
~16
16
~16
17
~17
18
~18
19
~19
O O
1
~1
2
~2
8
~8
4
~4
6
~6
6
~6
7
~7
8
~8
9
~9
12
~12
11
~11
~6O 6O
18
~18
14
~14
16
~16
16
~16
17
~17
18
~18
19
~19
O O
1
~1
2
~2
8
~8
4
~4
6
~6
6
~6
7
~7
8
~8
9
~9
12
~12
11
~11
~6O 6O
18
~18
14
~14
16
~16
16
~16
17
~17
18
~18
19
~19
O O
1
~1
2
~2
8
~8
4
~4
6
~6
6
~6
7
~7
8
~8
9
~9
12
~12
11
~11
~6O 6O
18
~18
14
~14
16
~16
16
~16
17
~17
18
~18
19
~19
O O
1
~1
2
~2
8
~8
4
~4
6
~6
6
~6
7
~7
8
~8
9
~9
12
~12
11
~11
E F
Yellow
C D
Magenta
A B
Cyan
(Example)
NOTE: If either of front or rear adjustment value is changed, the
other adjustment print pattern position may be varied. Be
careful of that.

12-C Image registration adjustment (Sub
scanning direction) (Manual adjustment)
2) Select the paper feed tray with A4 (11 x 8.5) or A3 (11 x 17)
paper in it by changing the value of set item H.
The sub scanning direction image registration adjustment pat-
tern is printed.
C: Adjustment range
Previous value before adjustment New adjustment value
A: 100 A: 93 (= 100 7)
B: 112 B: 100 (= 112 12)
C: 95 C: 96 (= 95 + 1)
D: 98 D: 109 (= 98 + 11)
E: 102 E: 109 (= 102 + 7)
F: 96 F: 118 (= 96 + 22)
A : 100 ; CYAN
B : 100 ; MAGENTA
C : 100 ; YELLOW
D : 1 ; MULTICOUNT
A:
SIMULATION NO.50-21
REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT : SCANNING DIRECTION
XXX
1 199
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 2 ; PAPER : CS1
F : 1 ; DUPLEX : NO
EXECUTE
A : 150 ; CYAN
B : 100 ; MAGENTA
C : 100 ; YELLOW
D : 1 ; MULTICOUNT
A:
SIMULATION NO.50-21
XXX
1 199
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 2 ; PAPER : CS1
F : 1 ; DUPLEX : NO
EXECUTE
or end of print
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
10-key
B C
A
4) Check the rough adjustment and the fine adjustment print pat-
tern positions of each color.
The visually highest color density section is regarded as the
center, and used as the measurement value.
(If the fine adjustment print pattern is positioned in the range of
0 1 for the fine adjustment reference pattern scale, the
adjustment is not required.)
If the above condition is not satisfied, select the color mode
adjustment item A C to be adjusted with the scroll key, and
change the adjustment value to adjust.
Repeat procedures 3) 4) until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
For measurement of the shift amount and calculation of the
adjustment value, refer to the table below.
(Measurement of the shift amount and calculation of the
adjustment value)
a) Measurement of the shift amount
* Measurement of the fine adjustment pattern
The visually highest color density section is regarded as
the center, and used as the measurement value of the
shift amount.
(Example)
The measurement value of the figure is "7."
* Measurement of the rough adjustment pattern
Check that the color line is positioned in the plus direc-
tion or in the minus direction and judge the polarity from
that.
The center black line mark is scaled as 0, the first line
mark as 20, the second line mark as 40, the third line
mark as 60. The interval between the rough adjustment
marks corresponds to 20.
(Example)
In the case of the figure, it is between 20 40 of the
plus polarity, and the measurement is "20."
C: Adjustment range
The shift amount is calculated from the adjustment ref-
erence position for each of the three adjustment items A
C.
Measurement value: 27 (= 20 7)
Measurement value: 27 (= 20 + 7)
Rough adjustment
Check that the rough adjustment print pattern is at
the center for the rough adjustment reference
pattern.
Fine adjustment
Check that the fine adjustment print pattern is at the
center for the fine adjustment reference pattern.
Adjustment
value range
Default
value
A CYAN Image registration adjustment
value (Sub scanning
direction) (Cyan)
1 199 100
B MAGENTA Image registration adjustment
value (Sub scanning
direction) (Magenta)
1 199 100
C YELLOW Image registration adjustment
value (Sub scanning
direction) (Yellow)
1 199 100
-20
C
A
B
~6O
6O
18
~18
14
~14
16
~16
16
~16
17
~17
18
~18
19
~19
O O
1
~1
2
~2
8
~8
4
~4
6
~6
6
~6
7
~7
8
~8
9
~9
12
~12
11
~11
20
C
A
B
~6O
6O
18
~18
14
~14
16
~16
16
~16
17
~17
18
~18
19
~19
O O
1
~1
2
~2
8
~8
4
~4
6
~6
6
~6
7
~7
8
~8
9
~9
12
~12
11
~11
b) Adjustment value calculation
Add or subtract the shift amount calculated above to or from the current adjustment value, and the result value is used as the new
adjustment value.
Adjustment value = Current adjustment value + Shift amount (correction value)
(When the shift amount (correction value) is plus)
Adjustment value = Current adjustment value Shift amount (correction value)
(When the shift amount (correction value) is minus)

ADJ 13 Scan image distortion
adjustment
This adjustment is required in the following cases:
* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
* When the copy image is distorted.

13-A Scanner (reading) unit parallelism
adjustment
Before execution of this adjustment, remove the document table
glass. (For details, refer to Chapter [D]-3.)
1) Loosen the fixing screws of the scanner unit A and the drive
wire, and remove the scanner unit A from the drive wire.
A
~6O
6O
18
~18
14
~14
16
~16
16
~16
17
~17
18
~18
19
~19
O O
1
~1
2
~2
8
~8
4
~4
6
~6
6
~6
7
~7
8
~8
9
~9
12
~12
11
~11
B
~6O
6O
18
~18
14
~14
16
~16
16
~16
17
~17
18
~18
19
~19
O O
1
~1
2
~2
8
~8
4
~4
6
~6
6
~6
7
~7
8
~8
9
~9
12
~12
11
~11
C
~6O
6O
18
~18
14
~14
16
~16
16
~16
17
~17
18
~18
19
~19
O O
1
~1
2
~2
8
~8
4
~4
6
~6
6
~6
7
~7
8
~8
9
~9
12
~12
11
~11
Previous adjustment value New adjustment value
A: 100 A: 73 (= 100 27)
B: 112 B: 119 (= 112 + 7)
C: 95 C: 110 (= 95 + 15)
2) Turn the scanner drive pulley manually and shift the scanner
unit B to bring it into contact with the stopper.
When the scanner unit B is in contact with the two stoppers on
the front and the rear frames simultaneously, the parallelism is
proper.
If not, perform the following procedures.
3) Loosen the fixing screw of the pulley angle on the front frame
side of the scanner unit B.
4) Adjust the position of the pulley angle on the front frame side
of the scanner unit B so that it is in contact with two stoppers
simultaneously.
5) Fix the pulley angle on the front frame side of the scanner unit
B.
If a satisfactory result is not obtained from the above proce-
dures, perform the following procedures.
Loosen the fixing screw of the scanner unit drive pulley which
is not in contact.
Without moving the scanner unit drive shaft, turn the scanner
unit drive pulley manually and adjust so that the scanner unit B
is in contact with both stoppers on the front frame and the rear
frame simultaneously. (Change the relative position of the
scanner unit drive pulley and the drive shaft.) Fix the scanner
unit drive pulley fixing screw.
6) With the scanner unit B in contact with both stoppers, fit the
edge of the scanner unit A with the right edge of the frame (the
top surface of the mylar), and fix the scanner unit A with the fix-
ing screw.

13-B Scan image (sub scanning direction)
distortion adjustment
1) Make a test chart with A3 (11" x 17") paper as shown below.
(Draw a rectangular with four right angles.)
L
L
L = 10mm
L
L
2) Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the docu-
ment table. (Shift the test chart edge 30mm from the reference
position as shown below.) With the document cover open,
make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper.
3) Check for distortion in the sub scanning direction.
If La = Lb, there is no distortion.
If there is any distortion in the sub scanning direction, perform
the following procedures.
4) Loosen either one of the fixing screws of the scanner unit drive
pulley. (Either one on the front frame or on the rear frame will
do.)
5) Without moving the scanner unit drive shaft, manually turn the
scanner unit drive pulley to change the parallelism of the scan-
ner unit A and B. (Change the relative position of the scanner
unit drive pulley and the drive shaft.)
6) Tighten the scanner unit drive pulley fixing screw.
Repeat the procedures 2) 6) until the condition of the procedure
3) is satisfied.
If the distortion in the sub scanning direction cannot be deleted with
the above procedures, perform ADJ 13D Scan image distortion
adjustment (Whole scanner).

13-C Scan image (main scanning direction)
distortion adjustment
1) Make a test chart on A3 (11" x 17") paper. (Draw a rectangular
with four right angles.)
2) Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the docu-
ment table, and make a copy on A3 (11"x 17") paper.
3) Check for distortion in the main scanning direction.
If the four angles of the copy image are right angles, there is
no distortion. (Completion of the adjustment)
If there is any distortion in the main scanning direction, perform
the following procedure.
4) Check the difference (distortion balance) between the image
distortions on the right and the left.
If Lc = Ld, there is no difference between the right and the left
image distortions.
If the above condition is satisfied, go to the procedure 6).
If not, perform the following procedures.
La Lb
L
L
L = 10mm
L
L
Lc
Ld
Copy A
Lc
Ld
Copy B
There is no difference
between the distortion on
the right and that on the left.
Lc = Ld
There is some difference
between the distortion on
the right and that on the left.
Lc Ld
5) Change the height balance of the scanner rail on the front
frame side.
Remove the lower cabinet of the operation panel. Loosen the
scanner rail fixing screw to change the balance between the
right and the left heights of the scanner rail.
Repeat the procedures 2) 5) until the difference between the
image distortions (distortion balance) is deleted.
6) Without changing the balance of the scanner rail on the front
frame side, change the overall height.
7) Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) and make a
copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper. Check that the distortion in the
main scanning direction is within the specified range.
Repeat the procedures 6) and 7) until the distortion in the main
scanning direction is in the specified range.
If the distortion in the sub scanning direction cannot be deleted
with the above procedures, perform ADJ 13D Scan image dis-
tortion adjustment (Whole scanner).

13-D Scan image distortion adjustment (Whole
scanner)
This adjustment is executed when scan image distortion cannot be
adjusted with ADJ 13A, ADJ 13B, and ADJ 13C related to the scan
image distortion adjustment.
Change the upper and lower positions of the scanner unit distortion
adjustment plate on the left edge of the scanner unit so that the
scan image distortion is minimized. By adjusting the mechanical
distortion of the whole scanner unit, the scan image distortion is
adjusted.
1) Loosen the fixing screw (A).
2) Adjust the scanner unit distortion adjustment plate.

ADJ 14 Scan image focus adjustment
(CCD unit position adjustment)

14-A Scan image focus adjustment (Document
table mode, DSPF front surface mode)
* When the CCD unit is removed from the machine.
* When the CCD unit is replaced.
* When the copy image focus is not properly adjusted.
* When the copy magnification ratio in the copy image main scan-
ning direction is not properly adjusted.
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
1) Enter the simulation 48-1 mode.
2) Set the adjustment item CCD (MAIN) to 50 (default value).
Select the adjustment item with the scroll key, and enter the
adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
3) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure
below.
4) Make a normal copy on A4 paper.
Press [CLOSE] key to shift from the simulation mode to the
copy mode, and make a copy.
5) Compare the scale length with the scale image length on the
copy paper.
6) Obtain the copy magnification ratio correction ratio in the main
scanning direction from the following formula.
Main scanning direction copy magnification ratio correction
ratio = (Original size Copy image size) / Original size x 100%
Example: Compare the scale of 10mm with the scale of 10mm
on the copy image.
Main scanning direction copy magnification ratio correction
ratio = (100 99) / 100 x 100 = 1
A
A
A
A
A : 50 ; CCD(MAIN)
B : 50 ; CCD(SUB)
C : 50 ; SPF(MAIN)
D : 50 ; SPF(SUB)
A:
SIMULATION NO.48-01
MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT
XX
1 99
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 50 ; SPFB(MAIN)
F : 50 ; SPFB(SUB)
1
0
2
0
3
0
4
0
5
0
6
0
7
0
8
0
9
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
2
0
1
3
0
1
4
0
1
5
0
If the copy magnification ratio is not satisfactory, perform the
following procedures.
7) Remove the document table glass.
8) Remove the dark box cover.
9) To prevent against shift of the CCD unit optical axis, mark the
CCD unit base as shown below.
* This procedure must be executed also when the CCD unit is
replaced.
10) Loosen the CCD unit fixing screws.
* Never loosen the screws marked with .
If any one of these screws is loosened, the position and the
angle of the CCD unit base may be changed to cause a
problem, which cannot be adjusted in the market. In that
case, the whole scanner unit must be replaced.
11) Slide the CCD unit in the arrow direction (CCD sub scanning
direction) to change the installing position.
When the copy image is longer than the original scale, shift the
CCD unit in the direction B. When the copy image is shorter
than the original scale, shift the CCD unit in the direction A.
One scale of mark-off line corresponds to 0.2%.
At that time, fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the
scale on the front and the rear side of the CCD unit base.
* Fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the line marked
in procedure 9).
12) Make a copy and check the copy magnification ratio again.
If the copy magnification ratio is not in the range of 100 1%,
repeat the procedures of 9) 11) until the condition is satisfied.
NOTE: By changing the CCD unit fixing position with the simula-
tion 48-1 adjustment value at 50, the copy magnification
ratio is adjusted within the specified range (100 1.0%)
and the specified resolution is obtained based on the opti-
cal system structure.

14-B Scan image focus adjustment (DSPF back
surface mode)
* When the DSPF CCD unit is replaced.
* When the DSPF CCD unit is replaced.
* When the COPY/SCAN/FAX image focus is not properly
adjusted.
* When the DSPF unit is removed.
* When the DSPF unit is replaced.
1) Make a duplex copy in DSPF mode.
2) Make sure that the copied image on the back side of the paper
is satisfactorily focused.
If the image is not satisfactorily focused, do the following
steps.
3) Open the door. Remove the screws, and remove the transport
PG upper.
10 20 90 100 110
10 20 90 100 110
1.0mm
100mm scale
(Original)
Copy image
(1mm (1%)
shorter than
the original)
B
A
4) To prevent against shift of the CCD unit optical axis, mark the
CCD unit base as shown below.
5) Loosen the CCD unit fixing screws (4 pcs.).
* Never loosen the screws marked with .
Loosening these screws could possibly change the CCD
unit base optical axis. Once the optical axis has been
changed, it cannot be corrected through on-site adjust-
ments. Solving such a problem requires the replacement of
the entire scanner unit.
6) Slide the CCD unit in the arrow direction (CCD sub scanning
direction) to change the installing position.
When the copy image is longer than the original scale, shift the
CCD unit in the direction B. When the copy image is shorter
than the original scale, shift the CCD unit in the direction A.
One scale of mark-off line corresponds to 0.2%.
At that time, fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the
scale on the front and the rear side of the CCD unit base.
* Fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the line marked
in procedure 4).
7) Make a copy and check the copy magnification ratio again.
If the copy magnification ratio is not in the range of 100 1%,
repeat the procedures of 4) 6) until the condition is satisfied.
NOTE: By changing the CCD unit fixing position with the simula-
tion 48-1 adjustment value at 50, the copy magnification
ratio is adjusted within the specified range (100 1.0%)
and the specified resolution is obtained based on the opti-
cal system structure.

ADJ 15 DSPF parallelism adjustment

15-A DSPF levelness adjustment
This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
* The DSPF section has been disassembled.
* The DSPF unit has been replaced.
1) Close the DSPF unit and check the clearance between the
projections in the front side and the rear side and the SPF
glass holding resin surface.
2) Visually check to insure that the clearance A is 1mm or less
and the clearance B is 0mm (in contact).
If the above requirement is not met, do step 3.
3) Turn the height adjustment screw to adjust the DSPF front/rear
frame horizontal level.
When the front frame side is higher (there is a clearance in B):
Turn the height adjustment screw R of the DSPF rear frame
clockwise.
When the rear frame side is higher (clearance A is more than
1mm): Turn the height adjustment screw L of the DSPF rear
frame counterclockwise.
Repeat steps 2 to 3 until an acceptable result is obtained.
A
B
A
B
0mm
1mm
or less
R
L
4) After adjustments of A and B, check to insure that the projec-
tion on the front right side is in contact with the glass surface of
the main unit.

15-B DSPF skew adjustment (Front surface
mode)
* When replacing the DSPF unit.
* The DSPF unit generates skewed scanned images.
1) Create an adjustment chart by printing in duplex mode the self-
print pattern 1 (grid pattern) specified in Simulation 64-1.
Make sure that the print grid pattern is almost in parallel with
the paper edges, and apply position marks 'A', 'B', 'C' and 'D' to
the leading and trailing edges of the paper for both front and
back sides of the paper.
2) Copy the adjustment chart (created in step 1) to A3 (11" x 17")
paper in DSPF duplex mode, and then check the image for
skews (Set in the DSPF feed tray so that the mark on the
adjustment chart is at the edge).
Check with one of the following methods.
[Check Method 1]
[Check Method 2]
Check that the squareness of the main scanning direction
print line for the longitudinal direction of paper is within
1.0mm.
If the front surface copy image is as shown above and the
back surface copy is not as shown above, go to the step 3)
of "ADJ 15C DSPF skew adjustment (Back surface mode)."
If the above requirement is not met for the paper's front side,
then do step 3.
3) Loosen the hinge screws and lower the two attachments.
4) Open the DSPF and loosen the screw.
5) Adjust by turning the DSPF skew adjusting screw on the right
side of the DSPF rear frame.
A
B
Paper pass direction
A
B
a b
C
D
c d
(Front side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |a-b| 1 mm
(Back side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |c-d| 1 mm
A
0 - 1.0mm
1
2
[When the main scanning direction print line is shifted to the
left]
If a < b, then turn counterclockwise the DSPF skew
adjusting screw.
right]
If a > b, then turn clockwise the DSPF skew adjusting screw.

15-C DSPF skew adjustment (Back surface
mode)
* When replacing the DSPF unit.
* The DSPF unit generates skewed scanned images.
1) Create an adjustment chart by printing in duplex mode the self-
print pattern 1 (grid pattern) specified in Simulation 64-1.
Make sure that the print grid pattern is almost in parallel with
the paper edges, and apply position marks 'A', 'B', 'C' and 'D' to
the leading and trailing edges of the paper for both front and
back sides of the paper.
2) Copy the adjustment chart (created in step 1) to A3 (11" x 17")
paper in DSPF duplex mode, and then check the image for
skews (Set in the DSPF feed tray so that the mark on the
adjustment chart is at the edge).
Check with one of the following methods.
[Check Method 1]
[Check Method 2]
Check that the squareness of the main scanning direction
print line for the longitudinal direction of paper is within
1.0mm.
If the back surface copy image is as shown above and the
front surface copy is not as shown above, go to the step 3)
of "ADJ 15B DSPF skew adjustment (Front surface mode)."
If the back surface copy is not as shown above, perform the
procedures of step 3) or later.
3) Open the upper door, and remove the adjustment cover.
4) Turn the DSPF skew adjustment screw on the CCD unit to
adjust.
* When the adjustment screw is turned 180 degrees, a change
of about 0.5mm is made.
left]
If c < d, turn the DSPF skew adjustment screw A
counterclockwise, or turn the adjustment screw B clockwise.
right]
If c > d, turn the DSPF skew adjustment screw A clockwise,
or turn the adjustment screw B counterclockwise.
A
B
A
B
a b
C
D
c d
(Front side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |a-b| 1 mm
(Back side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |c-d| 1 mm
A
0 - 1.0mm
A
B
* The adjustment screws A and B must be turned in proper
balance. For example, if the trouble is not removed by turn-
ing the adjustment screw A 180 degrees clockwise, do not
turn the adjustment screw A furthermore, but turn the adjust-
ment screw B 180 degrees counterclockwise.
NOTE: Since turning the adjustment screw too much may cause
the optical axis trouble, turn in less than one turn clockwise
or counterclockwise.

adjustment (Document table
mode, DSPF front surface
mode)
* When the copy image magnification ration in the sub scanning
direction is not properly adjusted.
* When the scanner motor is replaced.
* When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
Before this adjustment, the focus adjustment (CCD unit installing
position adjustment) must have been completed.

16-A Scan image magnification ratio adjustment
(Main scanning direction) (Document table
mode, DSPF front surface mode)
below.
3) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio.
Press [CLOSE] key and shift from the simulation mode to the
copy mode and make a copy.
4) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified
range (100 1.0%).
If the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100
1.0%), the adjustment is completed. If the copy magnification
ratio is not within the specified range, perform the following
procedure.
5) Change the CCD (MAIN) adjustment value of Simulation 48-1.
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy magnifica-
tion ratio in the sub scanning direction is increased.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the copy magnifi-
cation ratio is changed by about 0.02%.
Repeat the procedures 3) 5) until the copy magnification
ratio is within the specified range (100 1.0%).

16-B Scan image magnification ratio adjustment
(Sub scanning direction) (Document table
mode, DSPF front surface mode)
below.
3) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio.
Press [CLOSE] key and shift from the simulation mode to the
4) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified
range (100 1.0%).
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
A : 50 ; CCD(MAIN)
B : 50 ; CCD(SUB)
C : 50 ; SPF(MAIN)
D : 50 ; SPF(SUB)
A:
SIMULATION NO.48-01
XX
1 99
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 50 ; SPFB(MAIN)
F : 50 ; SPFB(SUB)
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
A : 50 ; CCD(MAIN)
B : 50 ; CCD(SUB)
C : 50 ; SPF(MAIN)
D : 50 ; SPF(SUB)
A:
SIMULATION NO.48-01
XX
1 99
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 50 ; SPFB(MAIN)
F : 50 ; SPFB(SUB)
10 20 90 100 110
10 20 90 100 110
10 20 90 100 110
Copy magnification ratio
(Original dimension Copy dimension)
Original dimension
=
x 100 [%]
(Example 1)
Copy A
(Shorter than
the original)
Scale
(Original)
(Example 2)
Copy B
(Longer than
the original)
If the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100
1.0%), the adjustment is completed. If the copy magnification
ratio is not within the specified range, perform the following
procedure.
5) Change the CCD (SUB) adjustment value of Simulation 48-1.
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy magnifica-
tion ratio in the sub scanning direction is increased.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the copy magnifi-
cation ratio is changed by about 0.1%.
Repeat the procedures 3) 5) until the copy magnification ratio is
within the specified range (100 1.0%).

adjustment (DSPF back surface
mode)

17-A Scan image magnification ratio adjustment
(Main scanning direction) (DSPF back
surface mode)
* The MFP control PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM on the MFP control PWB has been replaced.
* The scan control PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM on the scan control PWB has been replaced.
* Images are not correctly magnified in the main scanning direc-
tion.
1) On the DSPF original tray, place such an original as illustrated
below.
2) Make a normal duplex copy on A4 paper.
3) Measure the lengths of the copied image (back surface) and
the original image.
4) Determine the image magnification factor using the following
formula:
Image magnification factor (%) = Copy dimension / original
dimension x 100
Image magnification factor (%) = 99 / 100 x 100 = 99
If the image magnification factor is within the spec (100
0.8%), no adjustment is required; otherwise, do the following
steps.
6) Select the SPFB(MAIN) with scroll key.
7) Enter the image magnification adjustment value with the 10-
key.
8) Press [OK] key.
Pressing the [OK] key starts copy operation as well as applying
the adjustment value.
Repeat the above adjustments until an acceptable result is
obtained.

17-B Scan image magnification ratio adjustment
(Sub scanning direction) (DSPF back
surface mode)
* Images are not correctly magnified in the sub-scanning direction.
below.
2) Make a normal copy on A4 paper.
3) Measure the lengths of the copied image and the original
image.
A4 size
(both sides)
10mm 10mm
original
10 50 100 150 200 250
copy
10 50 100 150 200 250
A : 50 ; CCD(MAIN)
B : 50 ; CCD(SUB)
C : 50 ; SPF(MAIN)
D : 50 ; SPF(SUB)
A:
SIMULATION NO.48-01
XX
1 99
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 50 ; SPFB(MAIN)
F : 50 ; SPFB(SUB)
A4 size
10mm
10mm
original
copy
1
0
5
0
1
0
0
1
5
0
2
0
0
1
0
5
0
1
0
0
1
5
0
2
0
0
4) Determine the image magnification factor using the following
formula:
Image magnification factor (%) = Copy dimension / original
dimension x 100
Image magnification factor (%) = 99 / 100 x 100 = 99
If the image magnification factor is within the spec (100
0.8%), no adjustment is required; otherwise, do the following
steps.
6) Select the SPFB(SUB) with scroll key.
This adjustment items is intended to adjust the image magnifi-
cation in the sub-scanning direction in DSPF mode. (SPFB
(SUB))
key.
8) Press [OK] key.
obtained.
NOTE: After adjusting the image magnification in the sub-scanning
direction through Simulation 48-1, do the following steps if
making a copy at a different magnification factor fails to
produce a correctly scaled copy.
2) Select the item corresponding to be adjusted with scroll key.
key.
Make adjustments by changing the adjustment value for high
revolution mode if the copy magnification is not correct for
microcopies; or the adjustment value for low revolution mode if
the copy magnification is not correct for blowbacks.
4) Press [OK] key.
This applies the adjustment value.

ADJ 18 Scan image off-center
adjustment
* When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.
* When the DSPF section is disassembled.
* When the DSPF unit is installed.
* When the DSPF unit is replaced.

18-A Scan image off-center adjustment
(Document table mode, DSPF front surface
mode)
1) Make a copy of the adjustment chart (made by your self) in the
adjustment mode (document table or DSPF).
2) Check the copy image center position.
If A B = 1.0mm, the adjustment is not required.
If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following
procedures.
A : 50 ; CCD(MAIN)
B : 50 ; CCD(SUB)
C : 50 ; SPF(MAIN)
D : 50 ; SPF(SUB)
A:
SIMULATION NO.48-01
XX
1 99
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 50 ; SPFB(MAIN)
F : 50 ; SPFB(SUB)
A : 50 ; MR(HI)
B : 50 ; MR(MID)
C : 50 ; MR(LO)
D : 50 ; DSPF(HI)
A:
SIMULATION NO.48-05
MOTOR SPEED ADJUSTMENT
XX
1 99
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 50 ; DSPF(MID)
F : 50 ; DSPF(LO)
B
A = B
A
B'
A' - B' = 1.0mm
A'
(100%)
A : 50 ; OC
B : 50 ; SPF(SIDE1)
C : 50 ; SPF(SIDE2)
A:
SIMULATION NO.50-12
ORIGINAL CENTER OFFSET SETUP
XX
1 99
OK
TEST
CLOSE
4) Select the adjustment mode OC with the scroll key.
5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
The entered value is set.
When the set value is increased, the main scanning print posi-
tion is shifted to the front side by 0.1mm.
6) Press [CLOSE] key and shift from the simulation mode to the
Repeat the procedures of 2) 6) until the above condition is
satisfied.

18-B Scan image off-center adjustment (DSPF
back surface mode)
* The scanner (reading) section has been disassembled.
* The scanner (reading) unit has been replaced.
(Adjustment mode selection)
(UNIT: 0.1mm/STEP When the value is increased, the image is
shifted to the front side.)
2) Using the scroll key, select the adjustment item SPF(SIDE2),
which is intended to adjust the off-center in DSPF back surface
mode.
3) Press [OK] key.
(Scan off-center adjustment)
below.
2) Press [START] key.
Since the front side and back side images are copied onto sep-
arate sheets, check the off-center of the back side image.
If the off-center is 0 2.7 mm, no adjustment is required.
If the above requirement is not met, do the following steps.
3) Enter the scanned image off-center position adjustment value
with the 10-key.
(The adjustment value should be changed in steps of 0.1mm.)
(When the adjustment is increased, the print image is shifted
to the front side.)
4) Press [OK] key.
5) Check the off-center of the printed image.
obtained.

ADJ 19 Print area (Void area)
adjustment (Print engine
section)
* When the paper tray is replaced.
* When the paper tray section is disassembled.
* When the manual paper feed tray is replace.
* When the manual paper feed tray is disassembled.
* When the duplex section is disassembled.
* When the duplex section is installed or replaced.
* When the large capacity paper feed tray is installed or replace.
* When the large capacity paper feed tray section is disassembled.
* When the resist roller section is disassembled.
* When the EEPROM on the PCU PWB is replaced.
(Caution)
Before executing this adjustment, be sure to execute ADJ 10 Print
engine image magnification ratio adjustment (BK) (Main scanning
direction) (Print engine section) (Manual adjustment) in advance.
Item Set range Default
A OC OC mode adjustment 0 99 50
B SPF(SIDE1) DSPF front surface adjustment
C SPF(SIDE2) DSPF back surface adjustment
A : 50 ; OC
B : 50 ; SPF(SIDE1)
C : 50 ; SPF(SIDE2)
A:
SIMULATION NO.50-12
XX
1 99
OK
TEST
CLOSE
original copy
a
b
A : 100 ; BK-MAG
B : 50 ; MFT
C : 50 ; CS1
D : 50 ; CS2
A:
SIMULATION NO.50-10
XXX
XXX
60 140
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 50 ; CS3
F : 50 ; CS4
G : 50 ; LCC
H : 50 ; ADU
I : 1 ; MULTICOUNT
J : 2 ; PAPER : CS1
K : 1 ; DUPLEX : NO
EXECUTE
A : 50 ; BK-MAG
B : 50 ; MFT
C : 50 ; CS1
D : 50 ; CS2
A:
SIMULATION NO.50-10
60 140
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 50 ; CS3
F : 50 ; CS4
G : 50 ; LCC
H : 50 ; ADU
I : 1 ; MULTICOUNT
J : 2 ; PAPER : CS1
K : 1 ; DUPLEX : NO
EXECUTE
End of print
EXECUTE
10-key
EXECUTE
2) Set A4 (11 x 8.5) paper to all the trays, and select the set item
J with the scroll key. Enter the value corresponding to the
adjustment target paper feed tray.
4) Check the adjustment pattern to confirm that the items below
are in the range of the standard values.
If the above condition is not satisfied, or if it is set to a desired
condition, execute the simulation 50-1.
(Note) Feed paper from all the paper feed trays to confirm.
6) Select the adjustment item with the scroll key, and enter the
adjustment value and press [OK] key.
When the adjustment value is increased, the void area is
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the void
area is decreased. When the adjustment value is changed by
1, the void area is changed by 0.1mm.
(Note)
The adjustment value and the actual void area are related as
follows:
Adjustment value/10 = Actual void area
After execution of the above, perform procedures 1) 4) to
check that the void area is within the specified range.
Though the lead edge void area adjustment value is proper, if
the lead edge void area is not within the specified range,
change the adjustment value of RRCB-XXX of SIM 50-1.
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained.

ADJ 20 Copy image position, image
loss adjustment

20-A Copy image position, image loss
adjustment (Document table mode)
* When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.
NOTE: Before executing this adjustment, be sure to confirm that
the ADJ 19 Print area (Void area) adjustment (Print engine
section) has been completed normally.
Content Standard adjustment value
X Lead edge void area 3.0 1.0mm
Y Rear edge void area 2.0 1.0mm
Z1/Z2 FRONT/REAR void area 2.0 2.0mm
X
Y
Z2
2.02.0mm
3.01.0mm
2.01.0mm
Z1
2.02.0mm
A : 50 ; RRCA
B : 50 ; RRCB-CS12
C : 50 ; RRCB-CS34
D : 50 ; RRCB-LCC
A:
SIMULATION NO.50-01
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT VALUE
XX
0 99
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 50 ; RRCB-MFT
F : 50 ; RRCB-ADU
G : 30 ; LEAD
H : 20 ; SIDE
I : 30 ; DENA
J : 20 ; DENB
K : 20 ; FRONT/REAR
A : 60 ; RRCA
B : 50 ; RRCB-CS12
C : 50 ; RRCB-CS34
D : 50 ; RRCB-LCC
A:
SIMULATION NO.50-01
XX
0 99
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 50 ; RRCB-MFT
F : 50 ; RRCB-ADU
G : 30 ; LEAD
H : 20 ; SIDE
I : 30 ; DENA
J : 20 ; DENB
K : 20 ; FRONT/REAR
OK
10-key
Display/
Item
Content
Adjustment
range
Default
value
Standard
adjustment
value
DENA Void are
amount
adjustment
Lead edge
void area
adjustment
1 99 30 3.0
1.0mm
DENB Rear edge
void area
adjustment
1 99 20 2.0
1.0mm
FRONT/
REAR
FRONT/
REAR void
area
adjustment
1 99 20 2.0
2.0mm
Display
item
Content
Adjustment
range
Default
value
RRCB-
CS12
Image lead
edge
position
adjustment
value
Resist
motor ON
timing
adjustment
Standard
cassette
1 99 50
RRCB-
CS34
1 99 50
RRCB-
LCC
LCC 1 99 50
RRCB-
MFT
Manual
feed
1 99 50
RRCB-
ADU
ADU 1 99 50
below.
Place a scale so that it is in parallel with the scanning direction
and that its lead edge is in contact with the document guide
plate.
Place white paper on the document table so that the scale lead
edge can be seen.
3) Set RRCA, LEAD, and SIDE to the default values.
4) Perform the image lead edge reference position adjustment.
Press [CLOSE] key, and shift from the simulation mode to the
copy mode and make a copy in 100% mode and in 200%
mode.
When the adjustment value of RRCA is proper, the lead edge
image from 3.0mm is not copied in either of 100% and 200%
copy scale.
If not, change and adjust the RRCA value.
(Adjust so that the lead edge image from 3.0mm is not copied
in either of different copy magnification ratios.)
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
A : 50 ; RRCA
B : 50 ; RRCB-CS12
C : 50 ; RRCB-CS34
D : 50 ; RRCB-LCC
A:
SIMULATION NO.50-01
XX
0 99
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 50 ; RRCB-MFT
F : 50 ; RRCB-ADU
G : 30 ; LEAD
H : 20 ; SIDE
I : 30 ; DENA
J : 20 ; DENB
K : 20 ; FRONT/REAR
A : 60 ; RRCA
B : 50 ; RRCB-CS12
C : 50 ; RRCB-CS34
D : 50 ; RRCB-LCC
A:
SIMULATION NO.50-01
XX
0 99
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 50 ; RRCB-MFT
F : 50 ; RRCB-ADU
G : 30 ; LEAD
H : 20 ; SIDE
I : 30 ; DENA
J : 20 ; DENB
K : 20 ; FRONT/REAR
OK
10-key
Item Display item Content Adjustment range Default value
A RRCA Image lead edge position
adjustment value
Document lead edge reference position (OC) 0 99 50
B RRCB-CS12 Resist motor ON timing
adjustment
Standard cassette 1 99 50
C RRCB-CS34 1 99 50
D RRCB-LCC LCC 1 99 50
E RRCB-MFT Manual feed 1 99 50
F RRCB-ADU ADU 1 99 50
G LEAD Image loss adjustment Lead edge image loss adjustment 0 99 30
H SIDE Side image loss adjustment 0 99 20
I DENA Void area amount adjustment Lead edge void area adjustment 1 99 30
J DENB Rear edge void area adjustment 1 99 20
K FRONT/REAR FRONT/REAR void area adjustment 1 99 20

100%
200%
5mm 10mm
5mm 10mm
Paper lead
edge
Scale image 3.0mm position
5) Image loss adjustment
When the adjustment item of the image loss below is set to the
default value, it is adjusted to the standard state.
If it is not in the above standard state, or when it is set to a
desired value, change these adjustment items.
Void area: 3.0mm, Image loss: 3.0mm
When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss is
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the
image loss is decreased.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the image loss is
changed by 0.1mm.

20-B Original scan position adjustment
This adjustment is intended to adjust the scanner read position in
DSPF mode front face scan.
An incorrect adjustment would deviate the scanner stop position
from the required position, thus possibly causing a shadow of the
original table to appear at the leading edge of an image generated
by DSPF (front surface) mode scan.
1) Make a copy in DSPF (front surface) mode, and make sure
that the printed image at the leading edge of the copied image
is free from shadows.
If the printed image at the leading edge of the copied image
contains a shadow of the original table, then do the following
steps.
3) Enter the adjustment value and press the [OK] key.
obtained.

20-C Copy image position, image loss
adjustment (DSPF mode)
Display/
Item
Content
Adjustment
range
Default
value
Standard
adjustment
value
LEAD Image loss
adjustment
value
Lead edge
image loss
adjustment
0 99 30 3.0
1.0mm
SIDE Side image
loss
adjustment
0 99 20 2.0
1.0mm
5mm 10mm
4 3 2 1
Paper lead edge
Copy area
Maginification ratio: 400%
Image area
Papar lead edge
Shadow image of SPF
A:
A : 50 ; ADJUST VALUE
SIMULATION NO.53-08
SPF SCANNING POSITION ADJUSTMENT
XX
1 99
OK
TEST
CLOSE
Image loss (LIL)
LIL = 1.5 mm
LV = 3.5 mm
TV = 3.5 mm
FV+RV= 7.0 mm
Papar lead edge Papar tail edge
10 20
No Image
No Image
No Image
No Image
Void (TV)
Void (LV)
Void (FV)
Void (RV)
A : 50 ; SIDE1
B : 50 ; SIDE2
C : 20 ; LEAD_EDGE (SIDE1)
D : 20 ; FRONT_REAR (SIDE1)
A:
SIMULATION NO.50-06
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT VALUE(SPF)
XX
1 99
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 30 ; TRAIL_EDGE (SIDE1)
F : 30 ; LEAD_EDGE (SIDE2)
G : 20 ; FRONT_REAR (SIDE2)
H : 20 ; TRAIL_EDGE (SIDE2)
(Leading edge image loss adjustment)
1) Set the adjustment values for leading edge image loss (LEAD_
EDGE) for the front and back sides as follows:
(Standard setting)
C: LEAD_EDGE (SIDE1): 15
F: LEAD_EDGE (SIDE2): 15
* Set the adjustment value for "C: LEAD_EDGE (SIDE1)" and
"F: LEAD_EDGE (SIDE2)" to 15 by entering "15" into the
(LEAD_EDGE) adjustment value field and then pressing the
[OK] key.
2) In DSPF mode, make a duplex copy at 100% magnification,
and make sure that the leading edge image loss is 1.5 mm for
both the front and back sides. (Select duplex mode from the
paper selection mode as described in Simulation 50-6).
If an acceptable result is not obtained, do the following steps.
3) Repeat the process of changing the SIDE1 & SIDE2 adjust-
ment values and then pressing the [OK] key until attaining an
acceptable level.
SIDE1: Adjustment value for the position at which to read the
leading edge of the original in DSPF front side mode.
SIDE2: Adjustment value for the position at which to read the
leading edge of the original in DSPF back side mode.
(The adjustment value should be changed in steps of 0.1 mm.)
(The timing in which to start reading the image should be
determined based on the timing in which detector SPPD4
detects the leading edge of the original.)
(Trailing edge image loss adjustment)
1) In DSPF mode, make a duplex copy at 100% magnification,
and make sure that the trailing edge image loss is 1.5 mm for
both the front and back sides. (Select duplex mode from the
paper selection mode as described in Simulation 50-6).
If an acceptable result is not obtained, do the following steps.
2) Repeat the process of changing the TRAIL_EDGE adjustment
value and then pressing the [OK] key until attaining an accept-
able level.
obtained.
(Front/rear frame direction image loss adjustment)
Set the front surface/back surface (FRONT_REAR) adjustment
value to 20 by entering "20" into the FRONT_REAR adjustment
value field and then pressing the [OK] key.
Note that changing this adjustment value shifts the image position
in the front/rear frame direction.

ADJ 21 Print lead edge image position
adjustment (Printer mode)
(Caution)
This adjustment is performed by the user to increase the lead edge
void area to greater than the standard value (3mm) in the printer
mode.
Item Default
A SIDE1 Front surface document
scan start position
adjustment (CCD)
50
B SIDE2 Back surface document
scan start position
adjustment (CCD)
50
C Image loss
amount
setting:
SIDE1
LEAD_EDGE
(SIDE1)
Front surface lead edge
image loss amount setting
20
D FRONT_REAR
(SIDE1)
Front surface side image
loss amount setting
20
E TRAIL_EDGE
(SIDE1)
Front surface rear edge
30
F Image loss
amount
setting:
SIDE2
LEAD_EDGE
(SIDE2)
Back surface lead edge
30
G FRONT_REAR
(SIDE2)
Back surface side image
loss amount setting
20
H TRAIL_EDGE
(SIDE2)
Back surface rear edge
20
Papar lead edge
TIL = 1.5 mm
TV = 3.5 mm
Image area
Void (TV)
Image loss (TIL)
No Image
Papar trail edge
TIL = 1.5 mm
TV = 3.5 mm
Image area
Void (TV)
Image loss (TIL)
No Image
2) Select the set item E with the scroll key, and enter the value
corresponding to the paper feed tray with A4 (11 x 8.5) paper
in it.
4) Measure the distance from the paper lead edge the adjustment
pattern to the image lead edge, and check to confirm that it is
in the standard adjustment value range.
Standard adjustment value: 3.0 2.0mm
If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following
procedures.
5) Select the adjustment target of the paper feed mode adjust-
ment item DENC with the scroll key.
6) Change the adjustment value.
Enter the adjustment value and press [OK] or [EXECUTE] key.
printed.
When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the
paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When
the adjustment value is decreased, the distanced is
decreased.
When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed
by about 0.1mm.
Repeat the procedures 4) 6) until the condition of 4) is satisfied.
A : 30 ; DEN-C
B : 20 ; DEN-B
C : 20 ; FRONT/REAR
D : 1 ; MULTI COUNT
A:
SIMULATION NO.50-05
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT VALUE (PRINTER)
XX
1 99
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 2 ; PAPER : CS1
F : 1 ; DUPLEX : NO
EXECUTE
A : 40 ; DEN-C
B : 20 ; DEN-B
C : 20 ; FRONT/REAR
D : 1 ; MULTI COUNT
A:
SIMULATION NO.50-05
XX
1 99
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 2 ; PAPER : CS1
F : 1 ; DUPLEX : NO
EXECUTE
End of print
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
Display/Item Content Adjustment range Default value Standard adjustment value
A DEN-C Printer print image lead edge adjustment 1 99 30 3.0 2.0mm
D MULTI COUNT Print quantity 1 999 1
E PAPER MFT Cassette select Manual feed 1 6 1 2 (CS1)
CS1 Cassette 1 2
CS2 Cassette 2 3
CS3 Cassette 3 4
CS4 Cassette 4 5
LCC LCC 6
F DUPLEX YES Duplex print select Select 0 1 0 1 (NO)
3.02.0mm

ADJ 22 Copy color balance/density
adjustment
(1) Note before execution of the copy color balance/density
adjustment
* After completion of this adjustment, the printer color balance/
density adjustment must be executed.
* Requisite conditions before execution of the copy color balance/
density adjustment
Before execution of the copy color balance/density adjustment,
check to insure that the adjustments which affect the copy color
balance/density adjustment have been completed.
The importance levels of them are shown below.
(The following items affect the copy color balance/density
adjustment, and must be checked and adjusted before execu-
tion of the image quality adjustments.)
1) The following adjustment items must be adjusted properly.
2) The set values of the following simulations must be set to the
default values.
3) The following items (correction functions) of SIM 44-1 must be
set to ENABLE (default).
Job
No
Adjustment item
Simulation
to be used
ADJ
7
Image density
sensor, image
registration
sensor
adjustment
7A Color image density sensor
calibration
44-13
7B Color image density sensor,
black image density sensor,
image registration sensor
adjustment
44-2
ADJ
8
Image skew adjustment (LSU (writing) unit) 61-4
ADJ
9
OPC drum phase adjustment (Auto adjustment) 50-22
ADJ
12
Image
registration
adjustment
(Print engine
section)
12A Image registration adjustment
(Main scanning direction, sub
scanning direction) (Auto
adjustment)
50-22
12B Image registration adjustment
(Main scanning direction)
(Manual adjustment)
50-20
12C Image registration adjustment
(Sub scanning direction)
(Manual adjustment)
50-21
SIM No Adjustment/setting item Default value
46-1 A U 50
46-2 A L 50
46-10 A O 500
46-16 A O 500
Display Content Set range
Default
value
HV Normal operation high-density
process control YES/NO setting
Normal
(Inhibit: 1:
NO)
Highlighted
(Allow: 0:
YES)
Allow
HT Normal operation half-tone
process control YES/NO setting
Allow
TC Transfer output correction YES/
NO setting
Allow
MD VG Membrane decrease grid voltage
correction YES/NO setting
Allow
MD LD Membrane decrease laser power
voltage correction YES/NO
setting
Inhibit
MD EV Membrane decrease
environment grid voltage
Allow
MD DL Membrane decrease discharge
light quantity correction YES/NO
setting
Allow
MD DL EV Membrane decrease
environment discharge light
quantity correction YES/NO
setting
Inhibit
TN_HUM Toner density humidity correction
YES/NO setting
Allow
TN_AREA Toner density area correction
YES/NO setting
Allow
TN_LIFE Toner density life correction
YES/NO setting
Allow
TN_COV Toner density print rate
Allow
TN_PROCON Toner density process control
Allow
TN_ENV Toner density environment
Allow
TN_DRIP Toner density correction,
unconditional supply YES/NO
setting
Allow
TN_SPEND Toner compulsory consumption
mode YES/NO setting
Allow
PHT 1Pixel half-tone process control
Inhibit
AR_AUTO Auto resist adjustment YES/NO
setting
Allow
AR_ERROR Error check YES/NO setting
during auto resist adjustment
Allow
DM_PHASE Drum phase alignment YES/NO
setting
Allow
SENSITIVITY Toner density correction YES/NO
setting
Inhibit
PRT_HT Half tone process control printer
correction feedback Enable/
Disable setting
Allow
(The following items affect the copy color balance/density
adjustment, but it is not required to adjust them frequently.
When, however, a trouble occurs, check and adjust them.)
1) The following items must be adjusted properly.
(Relationship between the servicing job contents and the copy
color balance/density adjustment)
Note that the preliminary jobs before execution of the copy color
balance/density adjustment depend on the machine status and the
servicing conditions.
Follow the flowchart of the copy color balance/density adjustment
procedures depending on the actual conditions.
There are following four, major cases.
1) When installing the machine.
2) When the periodic maintenance is performed.
3) When a repair, an inspection, or a maintenance is performed.
(When a consumable part is replaced.)
4) When a repair, an inspection, or a maintenance is performed.
(Without replacement of a consumable part)
(2) Flowchart of the copy color balance/density adjustment procedures
Job
No
Adjustment item
Simulation
to be used
ADJ
1
Developing doctor gap adjustment (For color)
ADJ
2
Developing roller main pole position adjustment (For
color)
ADJ
6
High voltage
adjustment
6A Main charger grid voltage
adjustment
8-2
6B Developing bias voltage
adjustment
8-1
6C Transfer voltage adjustment 8-6
ADJ
14
Scan image
focus
adjustment
(CCD unit
position
adjustment)
14A Scan image focus adjustment
(Document table mode,
DSPF front surface mode)
48-1
14B Scan image focus adjustment
The necessary work items for each condition are marked with " ."
START
Process correction is forcibly

performed. (SIM 44-6)
Execute the half tone image
correction. (SIM 44-26)
Check the copy color balance/density.
(Manual operation) Text/Printed photo mode
(Test chart UKOG-0016FCZZ/
UKOG-0317FCZZ/11 is used.)
Are the copy
color balance and density
at satisfactory
levels?
No
Is the CCD replaced?
Yes
Set the ST chart
(UKOG-0280FCZZ) on
the original table.
Perform ADJ 22A
CCD gamma adjustment.
SIM 63-3 (Normal document mode)
Enter the SIM 63-03
mode and press the
EXECUTE key.
Check the copy color balance/density.
(Manual operation) Text/Printed photo mode
(Test chart UKOG-0016FCZZ/
UKOG-0317FCZZ/11 is used.)
(to Next page)
No
Yes
(to Next page)
: Standard adjustment flow
After
replacing
OPC drum
After
replacing
developer
drum
After
replacing
transfer belt
After
replacement
of the image
density sensor
After cleaning
scanner
(reading)
section
When in
install/repair/check
(without replacing
consumable parts)
OPC drum counter clear 24-7
Developer counter clear 24-5
ADJ 7A Color image density sensor
calibration
44-13
ADJ 9
OPC drum phase adjustment
(Auto adjustment)
50-22
ADJ 8 Image skew adjustment
(LSU (writing) unit)
61-4
50-22 (50-20/
50-21)
Simulation Work item JOB No
When in repair, check/maintenance (with replacing consumable parts)

4
Change the color balance/density
adjustment factory targets.
(SIM 63-11)
Make the factory color balance target
(when adjusting the copy color
balance/density with SIM 46-24) same
as the service color balance target and
the color balance target when adjusting
the density. (SIM63-8)
No
Can the
copy color balance and
density be adjusted to satisfactory
levels with the fine
adjustment?
Perform the manual adjustment of ADJ 22D
copy color balance, density adjustment. (SIM 46-21)
Perform ADJ 22C copy color balance/
density auto adjustment. (SIM 46-24)
Enter the SIM 46-24 mode and select
A3 (11 x 17) paper. (Auto selection)
(from Previous page) (from Previous page)
Perform the initial setup of half tone
image correction. (SIM 44-21)
Execute the half tone image correction.
(Forcible execution) (SIM 44-26)
Check the copy color balance and the density.
(Check in the (Manual operation)
Text/Printed photo mode.)
(Use the test chart UKOG-0317FCZZ/11.)
Are the copy
at satisfactory
levels?
Were the
copy color balance and
density
customized?
Yes
Yes
No
No
1
*1
The number of
times is limited
to 3 times
Press the EXECUTE key.
(The adjustment pattern is printed.)
Press the REPEAT key.
Set the adjustment pattern
on the original table, select
the FACTORY mode, and
press the EXECUTE key.
Set the adjustment pattern
on the original table, and
press the EXECUTE key.
Press the OK key. (The initial
setup of half tone image correction
is automatically performed.)
Cancel SIM 46-24.
3
Use SIM 46-21 to
print the color
balance check
sheet, and check
the patch color
balance of process
black.
/Check the copy
color balance and
density.
Check in the
(Manual operation)
Text/Printed photo
mode. (Use the
test chart
UKOG-0317FCZZ/
11.)
Are the
color balance
and density at the
satisfactory
levels?
Were all
the three kinds of
color balance/density adjustment
targets changed?
(SIM 63-11)
Is the
automatic adjustment
repeated?
No
No
4
Yes
No
3
Auto color balance adjustment
service target is set.
Enter the SIM 63-7 mode.
Press the SETUP key.
Set the color patch image (adjustment
pattern) printed in the copy color balance/
density adjustment on the original table,
and press the EXECUTE key.
Press the OK key.
Cancel SIM 63-7.
Is the color balance/
density adjustment performed
for each copy mode ?
(Does the user request
that ?)
The copy color
balance and
density adjustment
completed.
Perform the initial setup of half tone
image correction. (SIM 44-21)
Check the copy color balance and density.
Check in the (Manual operation)
Text/Printed photo mode.
(Use the test chart UKOG-0317FCZZ/11.)
Are the
copy color
balance and the density
in the specified
level ?
Yes
No
*1
The number of
times is limited to
3 times
1
Perform ADJ 22G copy color
balance/density adjustment
for each copy mode separately.
(SIM 46-10)
Yes
No
Perform the printer color balance
adjustment.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Were
the three kinds of
color balance/density adjustment
targets changed?
(SIM 63-11)
Yes
No
*1: If a satisfactory result in the copy color balance or the density
cannot be obtained by repetition of this loop of procedures
3 times or more, there may be a problem in the machine conditions.
Check the cause, repair the trouble section, and execute all the
adjustment from the beginning again.
Can be
repeated
max. 3 times.
(3) Copy color balance and density check
(Note)
Before checking the coy color balance and density, be sure to exe-
cute the following jobs.
* Execute the high density image correction (Process correction)
forcibly. (SIM 44-6)
* Execute the half-tone image correction forcibly. (SIM 44-26)
(Method)
Make a copy of the gray test chart (UKOG-0016FCZZ) and a copy
of the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/11), and check
that they are proper.
a. Note for execution of the color balance and density check in the
color copy mode
To check the copy color balance and density, use the gray test
chart (UKOG-0016FCZZ) and the servicing color test chart
(UKOG-0317FCZZ/11). Set the copy density level to "3" in the
Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual), and make a copy.
At that time, all the color balance adjustments in the user
adjustment mode must be set to the default (center).
In addition, be sure to use the specified paper for color.
b. Note for checking the monochrome copy mode density
To check the density, use the gray chart (UKOG-0016FCZZ).
Set the copy density level to "Manual 3" in the Text/Printed
Photo mode (Manual).
In addition, all the color balance adjustments in the user
adjustment mode must be set to the default (center).
[Check with the gray test chart (UKOG-0016FCZZ)]
In the copy density check with the gray test chart, check to insure
the following conditions.
NOTE: For the color (gray) balance, use the servicing color test
chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/11) to check.
[Check with the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/11)]
In the copy color balance check with the servicing color test chart,
check to insure the following conditions.

22-A CCD gamma adjustment (CCD calibration)
(Normal document copy mode)
(1) Note before adjustment
1) Check that the table glass, No. 1, 2, 3 mirrors, and the lens
surface are free from dirt and dust. (If there is some dust and
dirt, wipe and clean with alcohol.)
2) Check to confirm that the patches in BK1 and BK2 arrays of
the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) are
free from dirt and scratches.
If they are dirty, clean them.
If they are scratched or streaked, replace with new one.
(2) Adjustment procedures
1) Set the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) to
the reference position on the left rear frame side of the docu-
ment table.
Set the chart so that the lighter density side of the patch is on
the left side.
If the SIT chart is not available, execute SIM 63-5 to set the
CCD gamma to the default. In this case, however, the adjust-
ment accuracy is lower when compared with the adjustment
method using the SIT chart.
NOTE:
Check to insure that the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or
UKOG-0280FCZ1) is in close contact with the document
table.
UKOG-0280FCZZ is equivalent to UKOG-0280FCZ1.
2) Enter the SIM 63-03 mode and press [EXECUTE] key.
The automatic adjustment is started. During the adjustment,
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. After completion of the adjust-
ment, [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W
SHARP GRAY CHART
(Color copy)
Patch 1 is
slightly copied.
Patch 2 is copied.
SHARP gray chart
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W
SHARP GRAY CHART
(Black-and-white copy)
Patch 2 is
slightly copied.
Patch 3 is copied.
Patch 1 is not copied.
SHARP gray chart
(Color copy)
Serviceman chart (Color patch section)
The densities of patches 1 6 of
each color are properly balanced.
Patch 7 is slightly
copied or not copied.
CLOSE
OC
SIMULATION NO.63-03
TEST
SCANNER COLOR BALANCE AUTO ADJUSUTMENT
OC #1:197, #2:185, #3:165, #4:148, #5:117, #6:110,
#7: 88, #8: 75, #9: 55, #10: 45, #11: 38, #12: 29,
#19: 5, #20: 4, #22: 2, #:24: 2
#13: 27, #14: 21, #15: 18, #:16: 15, #17: 10, #18: 8,
1/2 DSPF
B G R
C#2:180, C#6:141, C#12: 89 R#2:166, R#6: 43, R#12: 4
M#2:180, M#6:141, M#12: 89 G#2:166, G#6: 43, G#12: 4
Y#2:180, Y#6: 141, Y#12: 89 B#2:166, B#6: 43, B#12: 4
NOTE:
Since the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ) is easily discolored by
sunlight (especially ultraviolet rays) and humidity and tempera-
ture, put it in a bag such as a clear file) and store in a dark
place of low temperature and low humidity.

22-B CCD gamma adjustment (CCD calibration)
(DSPF document copy mode)
(1) Note before adjustment
1) Check to insure that there is no dirt or dust on the SPF scan-
ning glass, the mirror, and the lens surface. (If there is, clean it
with alcohol.)
2) Check to confirm that the patches in BK1 and BK2 arrays of
the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) are
free from dirt and scratches.
If they are dirty, clean them.
If they are scratched or streaked, replace with new one.
NOTE:
Since the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ) is easily discolored by
sunlight (especially ultraviolet rays) and humidity and tempera-
ture, put it in a bag such as a clear file) and store in a dark
place of low temperature and low humidity.
(2) Adjustment procedures
1) Set the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1)
face-down in the DSPF paper feed tray.
If the SIT chart is not available, execute SIM 63-5 to set the
CCD gamma to the default. In this case, however, the adjust-
ment accuracy is lower when compared with the adjustment
method using the SIT chart.
NOTE: UKOG-0280FCZZ is equivalent to UKOG-0280FCZ1.
2) Enter the SIM 63-03 mode.
3) When a color key is selected, the adjustment value of the
selected color is displayed.
4) When [DSPF] key is pressed, it is highlighted, and the color
automatic adjustment execution screen is displayed.
5) Press [EXECUTE] key and it is highlighted and the color auto
adjustment is executed.
* When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during the automatic
adjustment, the automatic adjustment is interrupted.
CLOSE
OC
SIMULATION NO.63-03
TEST
OC #1:197, #2:185, #3:165, #4:148, #5:117, #6:110,
#7: 88, #8: 75, #9: 55, #10: 45, #11: 38, #12: 29,
#19: 5, #20: 4, #22: 2, #:24: 2
#13: 27, #14: 21, #15: 18, #:16: 15, #17: 10, #18: 8,
1/2 DSPF
B G R
C#2:180, C#6:141, C#12: 89 R#2:166, R#6: 43, R#12: 4
M#2:180, M#6:141, M#12: 89 G#2:166, G#6: 43, G#12: 4
Y#2:180, Y#6: 141, Y#12: 89 B#2:166, B#6: 43, B#12: 4
CLOSE
OC
SIMULATION NO.63-03
TEST
OC #1:197, #2:185, #3:165, #4:148, #5:117, #6:110,
#7: 88, #8: 75, #9: 55, #10: 45, #11: 38, #12: 29,
#19: 5, #20: 4, #22: 2, #:24: 2
#13: 27, #14: 21, #15: 18, #:16: 15, #17: 10, #18: 8,
1/2 DSPF
B G R
C#2:180, C#6:141, C#12: 89 R#2:166, R#6: 43, R#12: 4
M#2:180, C#6:141, C#12: 89 G#2:166, R#6: 43, R#12: 4
Y#2:180, C#6:141, C#12: 89 B#2:166, R#6: 43, R#12: 4
SIMULATION NO.63-03
TEST
SET THE CHART ON DSPF AND TOUCH [EXECUTE]
1/1
CLOSE
EXECUTE
SIMULATION NO.63-03
TEST
NOW CHART PATCH READING...
1/1
CLOSE
EXECUTE
6) After normal completion, the result of calculation is displayed
in the initial screen.
* When an error occurs in execution, the following screen is dis-
played.
When [CA] key is pressed, the simulation is terminated. When
[SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed, the display returns to the
sub number entry screen.
* When an error occurs in the automatic adjustment, all the error
patch numbers are displayed.
When [RESULT] key is pressed, the display returns to the initial
screen. (The previous value is displayed)
* When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is dis-
played. When [RESULT] key is pressed, the display returns to
the initial screen. (The calculation result of normal completion is
displayed.)

22-C Copy color balance adjustment (Auto
adjustment)
* When a consumable part (developer, OPC drum, transfer belt) is
replaced.
* When the MFP PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
a. General
The color balance adjustment (auto adjustment) is used to adjust
the copy density of Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and Black with SIM 46-
24 or the user program automatically.
(When this adjustment is executed, the color balance adjustments
of all the copy modes are revised.)
There are following two modes in the auto color balance adjust-
ment.
1) Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman (SIM 46-24
is used.)
2) Auto color balance adjustment by the user (The user program
mode is used.) (The color balance target is the service target.)
The auto color balance adjustment by the user is provided to
reduce the number of service calls.
If the copy color balance is lost for some reasons, the user can
use this color balance adjustment to recover the balance.
When, however, the machine has a fatal problem or when the
machine environment is greatly changed, this function does
not work effectively.
On the other hand, the auto color balance adjustment by the
serviceman functions to recover the normal color balance
though the machine environment is greatly changed. If the
machine has a fatal problem, repair and adjust it for obtaining
the normal color balance.
To perform the adjustment, the above difference must be fully
understood.
b. Note for executing the color balance adjustment (Auto
adjustment)
1) The print engine section must have been adjusted properly.
2) The CCD gamma adjustment must have been adjusted prop-
erly.
3) Be sure to use the specified paper for color.
4) Before execution of the image quality check and the image
quality adjustment, be sure to execute the following correc-
tions forcibly to set the image forming section to the optimum
state.
* Execute the high density image correction (Process correc-
tion) forcibly. (SIM44-6)
* Execute the half tone image correction forcibly. (SIM 44-26)
c. Adjustment procedure
(Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman)
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A3 or 11" x 17" paper is automatically
selected.)
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
SIMULATION NO.63-03
TEST
SCANNER MOTOR IS NOT READY
1/1
CLOSE
EXECUTE
SIMULATION NO.63-03
TEST
SAMPRING DATA UNFIT
#1, #2, #3, #4, #5, #6, #7, #8, #9, #10, #11, #12, #13, #14, #15,
PLEASE CHECK THE CHART AND PLATEN GLASS
#16, #17, #18, #19, #20, #22, #24
RESULT
B G R
1/1
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.63-03
TEST
COMPLETE
RESULT
B G R
1/1
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-24
TEST
ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT
EXECUTE
CLOSE
PRESS [EXECUTE] TO PROCON EXECUTIONAND PRINT THE TEST PATCH.
(PLEASE USE SPECIFIED TYPE OF A3 OR 11" 17" SIZE PAPER
FOR THIS ADJUSTMENT)
3) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper printed in
procedure 2) on the document table.
Place the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper
so that the thin lines on the paper are on the left side. Place 5
sheets of white paper on the printed color patch image (adjust-
ment pattern) paper.
4) Press [FACTORY] key, and press [EXECUTE] key.
When the color balance is customized with the manual color
balance adjustment (SIM 46-21) according to the user's
request and the color balance is registered as the service tar-
get with SIM 63-7, if the color balance is adjusted to that color
balance, select the service target.
The copy color balance adjustment is automatically executed
to print the color balance check patch image. Wait until the
operation panel shown in the next procedure is displayed.
NOTE:
Check the printed color balance check patch image to insure
that the color balance adjustment result is satisfactory to deter-
mine how many times the procedures 5) - 8) must be repeated.
If the color balance adjustment result is not satisfactory and if
the procedure 5) is satisfactory, go to the procedure 9).
The procedures 5) - 8) can be repeated max. 3 times.
When this procedure is repeated, the color balance adjustment
accuracy is improved, especially the color balance adjustment
accuracy in the low density area is improved. Note that the
color balance adjustment accuracy, however, varies depend-
ing on the machine status.
Remark:
(Descriptions on FACTORY key and SERVICE key in the color
balance auto adjustment menu.)
There are two kinds of the gamma target for the color balance
auto adjustment; Factory and Service.
FACTORY key and SERVICE key are used to select one of the
above two.
Factory target color balance: Standard color balance (It can be
selected from the three kinds of fixed color balances with SIM
63-11.)
Service target color balance: The color balance can be cus-
tomized according to the user's request. (Variable)
When shipping, the service target gamma data and the factory
target gamma data are the same. Both are set to the standard
color balance when shipping.
For the service target, the customized color balance gamma
can be registered with SIM 63-7.
5) Press [REPEAT] key.
The operation panel is changed and [EXECUTE] key is dis-
played.
7) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the
procedure same as the procedure 3) on the document table.
The copy color balance adjustment is automatically performed,
and the color balance check patch image is printed out.
9) Press [OK] key.
After pressing [OK] key, the initial setting of the half tone image
correction is started. During the operation, "NOW REGISTER-
ING THE NEW TARGET OF HALFTONE PROCON." is dis-
played. This operation takes several minutes.
After completion of the operation, "PLEASE QUIT THIS
MODE" is displayed.
NOTE:
Do not cancel the simulation until "PLEASE QUIT THIS
MODE" is displayed.
SIMULATION NO.46-24
TEST
PLEASE SELECT THE MODE (FACTORY) OR (SERVICE) AND PLACE
THE PRINTED TEST PATCH ON DOCUMENT GLASS THEN PRESS [EXECUTE].
*LIGHT AREA AT LEFT SIDE ON DOCUMENT GLASS.
,
SERVICE FACTORY EXECUTE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-24
TEST
OK
CONFIRM THE ADJUSTED PATCH AND PRESS [OK] TO REGISTER THIS PATCH DATA
, PRESS [REPEAT] TO CONTINUE THIS PROCEDURE.
REPEAT
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-24
TEST
EXECUTE
CLOSE
PRESS [EXECUTE] TO PRINT THE TEST PATCH
FOR THIS ADJUSTMENT
SIMULATION NO. 46-24
TEST
OK
,PRESS [REPEAT] TO CONTINUE THIS PROCEDURE.
REPEAT
CLOSE
TEST
CLOSE
COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE.
PLEASE QUIT THIS MODE.
10) Check the color balance and density.
There are three methods to check the color balance and the
density.
(Method 1)
Check to insure that the printed color balance check patch
image is within the following specifications.
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter
level to the darker level. The density changing direction must
not be reversed.
The density level of each color must be almost at the same
level.
Patch B may not be copied.
Patch A must not be copied.
(Method 2)
By printing the color balance adjustment sheet with SIM 46-21
and comparing each process (CMY) black patch color balance
with the black patch, the color balance adjustment can be
checked more precisely.
(Method 3)
Use the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/11) in the
Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual) to check the copy color bal-
ance and density. (Refer to the item of the copy color balance
and density check.)
When satisfactory color balance and density are not obtained
from the automatic adjustment by selecting the factory target in
procedure 4), change the factory color balance target with SIM
63-11 and repeat the procedures from 1).
If a satisfactory result is not obtained with the above proce-
dure, perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ
22D).
Also when the service target is selected in procedure 4) to exe-
cute the automatic adjustment and a satisfactory result is not
obtained, perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ
22D).
11) Use SIM 44-26 to execute the half tone image correction.
(Forcible execution)
Enter the SIM 44-26 mode and press [EXECUTE] key.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted and the operation is started.
It takes several minutes to complete the operation. After com-
pletion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
(Normal end (Auto transition))
(Abnormal end (Auto transition))
After completion of the operation, the simulation is canceled.
12) Use the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/11) in the
Text/Photo mode (Manual) to check the copy color balance/
density. (Refer to the item of the copy color balance/density
check.)
If the copy color balance and density are not satisfactory, per-
form the following procedures.
13) Execute the initial setting of the half tone image correction.
(SIM 44-21)
14) Execute the half tone image correction. (Forcible execution)
(SIM44-26)
15) Use the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/11) in the
Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual) to check the copy color bal-
ance/density. (Refer to the item of the copy color balance/den-
sity check.)
Repeat the procedures 13) 15) until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
However, the number of times of repeat is limited to 3 times. If the
copy color balance and density are not adjusted to the specified
level by repeating the procedures 3 times, there may be another
cause.
Troubleshoot the cause and repair or perform proper treatments,
and try all the procedures of the print image adjustment from the
beginning.
If the automatic adjustment cannot obtain satisfactory results of the
copy color balance and density, use SIM 46-21 (ADJ 22D) (Manual
adjustment).
C
Y
Max A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
M
Bk
Fig. 1 PG image
Low density High density
1) The max. density
section is not blurred.
Patch A of each of Y, M,
C, and BK are not copied.
2) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M,
and BK is very slightly copied.
3) Patch for each of C, M, Y, BK
The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed.
The patch density is changed gradually.
C
Y
M
Bk
CMY
mixed
color
1) The max. density
2) Patch A of each of Y, M,
SIMULATION NO.44-26
TEST
HALF TONE DENSITY CORRECT EXECUTION
EXECUTE
CLOSE
TOUCH [EXECUTE] THEN EXECUTION START.
K M Y C
SIMULATION NO.44-26
TEST
[S_VALUE]
#1: 907, #2: 902, #3: 909, #4:921, #5:936
#6: 347, #7:992, #8:1047, #9:1081, #10:1137
#11:1183, #12:1222, #13:1261, #14:1283,#15:1260
1/1 EXECUTE
CLOSE
K M Y C
SIMULATION NO.44-26
TEST
[S_VALUE]
#1: ERR, #2: ERR, #3: ERR, #4: ERR, #5: ERR
#11: ERR, #12: ERR, #13: ERR, #14: ERR,#15: ERR
1/1 EXECUTE
CLOSE

22-D Copy color balance adjustment (Manual
adjustment)
* When a consumable part (developer, OPC drum, transfer belt) is
replaced.
* When the CCD is replaced.
a. General
The color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) is used to
adjust the copy density (15 pts for each color) of CMYK according
to a request from the user for changing (customizing) the color bal-
ance because the automatic adjustment stated above is resulted in
an unsatisfactory result or a fine adjustment is required.
In this manual adjustment, adjust only the color patch which could
not adjusted properly in the automatic adjustment.
If the color balance is improper, execute the automatic color bal-
ance adjustment in advance, and execute this adjustment for better
efficiency.
b. Note for the color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment)
1) The print engine section must have been adjusted properly.
2) The CCD gamma adjustment must have been adjusted prop-
erly.
3) Set the color patch image adjustment patter on the document
table, and place 5 sheet of white paper on it.
5) Before execution of the image quality check and adjustment,
be sure to execute the following corrections to set the image
forming section to the optimum state.
* Execute the high density image correction (process correc-
tion) forcibly. (SIM 44-6)
selected.)
The color balance adjustment pattern is printed.
3) Check that the following specification is satisfied or the color
balance is satisfactory.
If not, execute the following procedures.
not be reversed.
level.
When, however, the color balance is adjusted according to a
request from the user, there is no need to set to the standard
color balance stated above.
4) Select the color to be adjusted with the color select key, and
select the adjustment point with the scroll key.
5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
The adjustment value is set in the range of 245 755 (1
999). When SIM 46-24 is used to adjust the automatic color
balance and density, all the set values of this simulation are set
to 500.
To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To
decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value.
Repeat procedures of 2) 5) until the condition of 3) is satis-
fied.
When the overall density is low, or when the density is high
and patch A is copied, use the arrow key to adjust all the
adjustment values of A O to a same level collectively.
Then, adjust each patch density individually. This is an efficient
way of adjustment.
Referring to the black and gray patches, adjust so that each
process (CMY) black/gray patch color balance of A O
approaches the black/gray patch level as far as possible.
6) Make a copy of the servicing color test chart (UKOG-
0317FCZZ/11) and a user's document according to necessity
in the normal copy mode, the text/Printed Photo mode (Man-
ual) to check the adjustment result. (Refer to the item of the
copy color balance/density check.)
7) Execute SIM 44-21. (Execute the initial setting of the half tone
image correction.)
A : 500 ; POINT1
B : 500 ; POINT2
C : 500 ; POINT3
D : 500 ; POINT4
A:
SIMULATION NO.46-21
ENGINE COLOR BALANCE MANUAL ADJUSTMENT [ALL(COLOR)]
XXX
245 755
OK
TEST CLOSE
E : 500 ; POINT5
F : 500 ; POINT6
G : 500 ; POINT7
H : 500 ; POINT8
I : 500 ; POINT9
J : 500 ; POINT10
K : 500 ; POINT11
L : 500 ; POINT12
EXECUTE
K C M Y
A : 400 ; POINT1
B : 500 ; POINT2
C : 500 ; POINT3
D : 500 ; POINT4
A:
SIMULATION NO.46-21
XXX
245 755
OK
TEST CLOSE
E : 500 ; POINT5
F : 500 ; POINT6
G : 500 ; POINT7
H : 500 ; POINT8
I : 500 ; POINT9
J : 500 ; POINT10
K : 500 ; POINT11
L : 500 ; POINT12
EXECUTE
K C M Y
10-key
or self print end
C
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
C
M
Y
Bk
1) The max. density
CMY
mixed
color
SIMULATION NO.44-21
TEST
HALF TONE PROCON STANDARD VALUE REGISTER
EXECUTE
CLOSE
After completion of the operation, cancel the simulation.
This procedure is to save the copy color balance adjustment
data as the reference data for the half tone correction.
Immediately after execution of ADJ 22D (Color balance adjust-
ment, Manual) with SIM 46-21, be sure to execute this proce-
dure.
When ADJ 22C (Color balance adjustment, Auto) is executed
with SIM 46-24, this procedure is automatically executed.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and the
operation is started.
8) Execute SIM 44-26 to perform the half tone image correction.
(Forcible execution)
It takes several minute to complete the operation. After com-
After completion of the operation, cancel the simulation.
9) Make a copy of the servicing color test chart (UKOG-
0317FCZZ/11) and a user's document according to necessity
in the Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual) and check the adjust-
ment result again. (Refer to the item of the copy color balance/
density check.)
If the copy color balance and density are not in the specified
level, repeat procedures of 7) 9) until they are in the speci-
fied range.
The number of repeat is, however, limited to 3 times.
If the copy color balance and density are not adjusted to the
specified level by repeating the procedures 3 times, there may
be another cause.
Troubleshoot the cause, and repair or perform proper treat-
ments, and try all the procedures of the print image adjustment
from the beginning.
(NOTE)
If the color balance is customized, use SIM 63-7 to register the
color balance as the service target.
If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not
required.
If the customized color balance is registered as the service tar-
get, the automatic color balance adjustment can be made in
the next color balance adjustment.
In the next color balance adjustment, select the service target
color balance in the automatic color balance adjustment mode
to make an adjustment to the similar color balance as the reg-
istered color balance.
(Auto color balance adjustment target gamma setting)
a. General
When the automatic color balance adjustment is executed, a cer-
tain color balance (gamma) is used as the target.
There are following three kinds of the target.
Factory color balance (gamma) target
Service color balance (gamma) target
User color balance (gamma) target
In the above three, only the service color balance target can be set
to a desired level.
* When the copy color balance/density adjustment (manual adjust-
ment) is executed with SIM 46-21).
* When the user requests for customizing the color balance.
* When the service color balance target gamma is judged as
improper.
SIMULATION NO.44-21
TEST
EXECUTE
CLOSE
RESULT
COMPLETE
RESULT
SIMULATION NO.44-21
TEST
EXECUTE
CLOSE
RESULT
ERROR:K,C,M,Y
RESULT
SIMULATION NO.44-26
TEST
EXECUTE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-26
TEST
EXECUTE
CLOSE
RESULT
COMPLETE
RESULT
SIMULATION NO.44-26
TEST
EXECUTE
CLOSE
RESULT
ERROR:K,C,M,Y
RESULT
Each color balance target for the copy color balance adjustment
Relationship between the factory target and the service target and the color balance target for the user color balance adjustment in the copy
color balance adjustment (SIM 46-24)
Kind Descriptions
A Factory color
balance
(gamma) target
There are three kinds of the color balance target,
and each of them is specified according to the
machine design. Use SIM 63-11 to select one of
them as the factory target. The default setting
(factory setting) is the color balance (DEF1) which
emphasizes color reproduction.
B Service color
balance
(gamma) target
This target is used when the user requests to
customize the color balance to users desired level.
In advance, the users unique color balance must
be registered as the service color balance target.
The above registration (setting) is made by the
serviceman with SIM 46-21 to adjust the color
balance and with SIM 63-7 to register it.
This color balance target is used when the user
executes the color balance adjustment.
When, therefore, the service color balance target is
changed, the color balance target of the users
color balance adjustment is also changed. When,
however, SIM 63-8 is executed, the color balance
is set to the factory color balance target set with
SIM 63-11.
The default setting (factory setting) of the color
balance is same as the factory color balance
target. (Emphasized on color reproduction (DEF1))
If the user does not request for customizing the
color balance, be sure to use SIM 63-8 to set the
color balance to the factory color balance target.
C User color
balance
(gamma) target
Same color balance as the service color balance
(gamma) target
When the service color balance target is changed,
this color balance target is also changed
accordingly.
Factory color balance
target (DEF2)
target (DEF1)
target (DEF3)
target (DEF1)
Service color balance
target
=
target (one of DEF1 3)
target
=
target (Unique)
Use SIM 46-21 to adjust the

optional color balance, and
use SIM 63-7 to register it.
Execute SIM 63-8.
(The service color balance
target is the same as the
factory color balance target.)
Factory setting
Color balance target for
the user color balance
adjustment
target
=
Use SIM 63-11 to select
one of the three kinds of
color balance targets.
Color balance target in the copy color balance
automatic adjustment (SIM 46-24)
Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment
Factory target in the copy color balance adjustment (SIM 46-24)
By use of SIM 63-11, one of the following color balances can be set as the factory color balance target.
Each of the three color balances cannot be changed. (Fixed)
Service color balance target in the copy color balance adjust-
ment (SIM 45-24).
For the service color balance target, an optional color balance
can be adjusted with SIM 46-21 and registered with SIM 63-7.
When, however, SIM 63-8 is executed, the color balance is set to
the same balance as the factory color balance target set with
SIM 63-11.
This color balance is same as the service color balance target in
the copy color balance adjustment (SIM 46-24). When, therefore,
the service color balance target is changed, this target is also
changed accordingly.
(Meaning of the service color balance target gamma data and
the purpose of registration)
This procedure must be executed only when the color balance is
customized with SIM 46-21.
required.
After completion of the customized color balance adjustment (Man-
ual) with SIM 46-21 according to the user's request, use SIM 63-7
to register the service color balance target data by use of the
printed adjustment pattern.
By this procedure, the service color balance target is revised.
It is recommendable to keep the printed adjustment pattern with
SIM 46-21. This adjustment pattern can be used to register the
same color balance target to another machine.
It is also useful to register the service color balance target data.
Do not fold it and keep it under the circumstances which protect it
from discoloration and dirt.
The service color balance target data are basically registered
immediately after the color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM
46-21.
If a considerable time has passed after completion of the color bal-
ance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 46-21, the color balance of the
adjustment pattern at the time of adjustment differs from the color
balance of the adjustment pattern printed after a considerable time.
Never use such a pattern for the adjustment.
The correctness of the service color balance target data can be
judges as follows.
Select the service color balance target with SIM 46-24 and execute
the color valance adjustment (Auto), and check the adjustment
result. When the result is unsatisfactory or abnormal, the registered
service target data for the color balance adjustment (Auto) may be
improper.
This may be caused when an improper or abnormal color balance
adjustment pattern was used to register the service color balance
target data for the color balance adjustment with SIM 63-7.
The color balance adjustment pattern used in registration was
made and printed by the color balance adjustment (Manual) with
SIM 46-21. This procedure may have been executed erroneously.
b. Setting procedure
(Setting procedure of an optional color balance (gamma) as
the service color balance target)
1) Use SIM 46-21 (Copy color balance adjustment (manual
adjustment) mode) to print two sheets of the color patch image
(adjustment pattern).
If the color balance is shifted from the standard, an adjustment
is required. If not, an adjustment is not required. When an
optional color balance is requested by the user, make an
adjustment.
+b* Direction of Yellow
+a*
Direction
of Red
Direction
of Green
Direction of Blue
Factory color balance target (DEF2) =
Service color balance target/Color balance
target for the user color balance adjustment
Factory color
balance target
(DEF1)
SIM63-8
SIM63-8
Factory color balance target
(DEF1) = Service color balance
target/Color balance target for the
user color balance adjustment
DEF1
DEF2
Color balance with emphasis on color
reproduction (factory setting)
Color balance with slightly strong Cyan
DEF3 Color balance with emphasis on Cyan
Default
Hue
Factory color balance target (DEF3)
SIM63-8
3) Press [SETUP] key.
4) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) correctly
adjusted and printed in the copy color balance adjustment
(Manual adjustment) (SIM 46-21) (ADJ 22D) on the document
table.
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed with SIM
64-2 can be used instead. In this case, however, check that the
printed pattern is normal.
(When the color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed by
SIM 64-2, set the item B (PROC ADJ) to "0 (YES)" and press
[EXECUTE] key to print.)
A color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed by another
machine can be used.
Set the pattern so that the light density side is on the left side.
Place 5 sheets of white paper on the color patch image
If the color balance could not be adjusted satisfactorily with
SIM 46-21 (Color balance adjustment (Manual)), do not exe-
cute SIM 63-7 to register the service color balance target data.
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is read.
6) Press [REPEAT] key, set the second color patch image
(adjustment pattern), and execute the procedure 5) again.
The color balance (gamma) target set level of each color
(KCMY) can be checked with K/C/M/Y keys.
Check that the set level is increased in the sequence of B O.
If there is no variation or variation is reversed, it is judged as
abnormal.
In case of an abnormality, settle the problem and try again.
7) Press [OK] key.
The color balance (gamma) of the color patch image (adjust-
ment pattern) used in the procedure 5) is set as the service tar-
get.
(Procedures to set the service color balance target and the
color balance target for the user color balance adjustment to
the same color balance as the factory color balance target)
This procedure must not be executed when the copy color balance
was adjusted with SIM 46-21 to a unique color balance requested
by the user and it was registered as the service color balance tar-
get with SIM 63-7.
* When the factory color balance target is changed with SIM 63-11,
be sure to execute this procedure.
3) Press [YES] key.
The service color balance target and the color balance target for
the user color balance adjustment are set to the same color bal-
ance as the factory color balance target.

22-E Copy density adjustment (Each color copy
mode) (Whole adjustment) (Normally
unnecessary to adjust)
This adjustment is required in the following cases.
The density is adjusted in each copy mode individually. Normally
individual adjustments are not required. When there is a request
from the user, execute this adjustment.
K C M Y
SETUP
SIMULATION NO.63-07
TEST
SCANNER TARGET OF COLOR CALIB SETUP:SERVICE
#B: 91, #C 2944, #D: 3227, #E: 5822, #F: 8600
#G: 28935, #H: 54344, #I: 86968, #J: 122678, #K: 151198
#L: 169731, #M: 195950, #N: 201249, #:O: 207112
1/1
CLOSE
TEST
SCANNER TARGET OF PRINTER COLOR CALIB SETUP` SERVICE
EXECUTE
CLOSE
SET THE CHART ON PLATEN AND TOUCH [EXECUTE].
TEST
SCANNER TARGET OF PRINTER COLOR CALIB SETUP: SERVICE
EXECUTE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.63-08
TEST
STANDARD SCANNER TARGET SETTING:SERVICE
CLOSE
EXECUTE
ARE YOU SURE? YES NO
A : 50 ; AUTO
B : 50 ; TEXT
C : 50 ; TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
D : 50 ; TEXT/PHOTO
A:
SIMULATION NO.46-01
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT(COLOR)[COPY]
XX
1 99
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 50 ; PRINTED PHOTO
F : 50 ; PHOTOGRAPH
G : 50 ; MAP
H : 50 ; LIGHT
I : 50 ; TEXT (COPY TO COPY)
J : 50 ; TEX/PRINTED PHOTO (COPY TO COPY)
K : 50 ; PRINTED PHOTO (COPY TO COPY)
L : 50 ; TEXT (COLOR TONE ENHANCEMENT)
A : 45 ; AUTO
B : 50 ; TEXT
D : 50 ; TEXT/PHOTO
A:
SIMULATION NO.46-01
XX
1 99
OK
TEST
CLOSE
F : 50 ; PHOTOGRAPH
G : 50 ; MAP
H : 50 ; LIGHT
OK
10-key
M X - 7 0 0 0 N A D J U S T M E N T S 6 5 3
2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
4) Press [CLOSE] key in this simulation mode to jump to the nor-
mal copy mode. Make a copy and check the adjustment result.
Switch the simulation mode and the normal copy mode alter-
nately, and adjust and check the adjustment result.
Repeat switching the adjustment mode (SIM 46-1) and the
normal copy mode and changing the adjustment value and
checking the adjustment result until a satisfactory result is
obtained.

22-F Copy density adjustment (Each
monochrome copy mode) (Whole
adjustment) (Normally unnecessary to
adjust)
The density is adjusted in each copy mode individually. Normally
individual adjustments are not required. This adjustment is exe-
cuted when there is a request from the user.
2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
4) Press [CLOSE] key in this simulation mode to jump to the nor-
mal copy mode. Make a copy and check the adjustment result.
Switch the simulation mode and the normal copy mode alter-
nately, and adjust and check the adjustment result.
Repeat switching the adjustment mode (SIM 46-1) and the
normal copy mode and changing the adjustment value and
checking the adjustment result until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
Display/Item (Copy mode)
Adjustment
value range
Default
value
A AUTO Auto 1 99 50
B TEXT Text 1 99 50
C TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO
Text/Printed Photo 1 99 50
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 99 50
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 99 50
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 99 50
G MAP Map 1 99 50
H LIGHT Light document 1 99 50
I TEXT (COPY TO
COPY)
Text (Copy
document)
1 99 50
J TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO (COPY TO
COPY)
Text/Printed Photo
(Copy document)
1 99 50
K PRINTED PHOTO
(COPY TO COPY)
Printed Photo
(Copy document)
1 99 50
L TEXT (COLOR
TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
Text (Color tone
enhancement)
1 99 50
M TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO (COLOR
TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
Text/Printed Photo
(Color tone
enhancement)
1 99 50
N TEXT/PHOTO
(COLOR TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
Text/Photograph
(Color tone
enhancement)
1 99 50
O PRINTED PHOTO
(COLOR TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
Printed Photo
(Color tone
enhancement)
1 99 50
P PHOTOGRAPH
(COLOR TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
Photograph (Color
tone enhancement)
1 99 50
Q MAP (COLOR TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
Map (Color tone
enhancement)
1 99 50
R SINGLE COLOR Single color 1 99 50
S SINGLE COLOR
(COPY TO COPY)
Single color (Copy
document)
1 99 50
T TWO COLOR Two-color (Red/
Black) copy
1 99 50
U TWO COLOR
(COPY TO COPY)
Two-color (Red/
Black) copy (Copy
document)
1 99 50
Display/Item (Copy mode)
Adjustment
value range
Default
value
A AUTO1 Auto 1 1 99 50
B AUTO2 Auto 2 1 99 50
C TEXT Text 1 99 50
D TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO
Text/Printed Photo 1 99 50
E TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 99 50
F PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 99 50
G PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 99 50
H MAP Map 1 99 50
I TEXT (COPY TO
COPY)
Text (Copy
document)
1 99 50
J TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO (COPY TO
COPY)
Test/Printed Photo
(Copy document)
1 99 50
K PRINTED PHOTO
(COPY TO COPY)
Printed Photo
(Copy document)
1 99 50
L LIGHT Light density
document
1 99 50
A : 50 ; AUTO1
B : 50 ; AUTO2
C : 50 ; TEXT
D : 50 ; TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
A:
SIMULATION NO.46-02
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT(B/W)[COPY]
XX
1 99
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 50 ; TEXT/PHOTO
F : 50 ; PRINTED PHOTO
G : 50 ; PHOTOGRAPH
H : 50 ; MAP
L : 50 ; LIGHT
A : 45 ; AUTO1
B : 50 ; AUTO2
C : 50 ; TEXT
A:
SIMULATION NO.46-02
XX
1 99
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 50 ; TEXT/PHOTO
G : 50 ; PHOTOGRAPH
H : 50 ; MAP
L : 50 ; LIGHT
OK
10-key

22-G Copy color balance adjustment (Color
balance adjustment at each density level in
each color copy mode) (Normally not
required)
This is to adjust the color balance at each density level in each
color copy mode.
Normally individual adjustments are not required. This adjustment
is executed when there is a request from the user.
2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the mode key.
3) Select a color to change the adjustment value with the color
key.
4) Select the density level (point) to be adjusted with the scroll
key.
When the adjustment value is increased, the density is
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the den-
sity is decreased.
When the arrow key is pressed, the color densities selected
with the color keys are collectively adjusted. That is, all the
density levels (points) from the low density point to the high
density point can be adjusted collectively.
printed out.
The color balance at each density level (point) and the density
can be checked by referring to this printed adjustment pattern.
However, it is more practically to make a cop and check it.

22-H Monochrome copy density adjustment
(Density adjustment at each density level in
each monochrome copy mode) (Normally
not required)
This is to adjust each density level in each monochrome copy
mode.
Normally individual adjustments are not required. This adjustment
is executed when there is a request from the user.
10-key
OK
C
TEXT
SIMULATION NO.46-10
TEST
ENGINE COLOR BALANCE MANUAL ADJUSTMENT
EXECUTE
1/1
TEXT TEXT/PRT PHOTO PRINTED PHOTO PHOTO+TEXT/PHOTO
CLOSE
MAP LIGHT COPY ORG
A: 500 ` POINT1
B: 500 ` POINT2
C: 500 ` POINT3
D: 500 ` POINT4
A:
SIMULATION NO.46-10
XXX
245 755
OK
TEST CLOSE
E: 500 ` POINT5
F : 500 ` POINT6
G: 500 ` POINT7
H: 500 ` POINT8
I : 500 ` POINT9
J : 500 ` POINT
K: 500 ` POINT11
L : 500 ` POINT12
EXECUTE
K C M Y
A: 300 ` POINT1
B: 500 ` POINT2
C: 500 ` POINT3
D: 500 ` POINT4
A:
SIMULATION NO.46-10
XXX
245 755
OK
TEST CLOSE
E: 500 ` POINT5
F : 500 ` POINT6
G: 500 ` POINT7
H: 500 ` POINT8
I : 500 ` POINT9
J : 500 ` POINT
K: 500 ` POINT11
L : 500 ` POINT12
EXECUTE
K C M Y
A: 300 ` POINT1
B: 500 ` POINT2
C: 500 ` POINT3
D: 500 ` POINT4
A:
SIMULATION NO.46-10
XXX
245 755
OK
TEST CLOSE
E: 500 ` POINT5
F : 500 ` POINT6
G: 500 ` POINT7
H: 500 ` POINT8
I : 500 ` POINT9
J : 500 ` POINT
K: 500 ` POINT11
L : 500 ` POINT12
EXECUTE
K C M Y
EXECUTE EXECUTE
or end of print
[SYSTEM SETTINGS] key
Item/Display
Density level
(Point)
Adjustment
value range
Default value
A POINT1 Point 1 245 755 500
B POINT2 Point 2 245 755 500
C POINT3 Point 3 245 755 500
D POINT4 Point 4 245 755 500
E POINT5 Point 5 245 755 500
F POINT6 Point 6 245 755 500
G POINT7 Point 7 245 755 500
H POINT8 Point 8 245 755 500
I POINT9 Point 9 245 755 500
J POINT10 Point 10 245 755 500
K POINT11 Point 11 245 755 500
L POINT12 Point 12 245 755 500
M POINT13 Point 13 245 755 500
N POINT14 Point 14 245 755 500
O POINT15 Point 15 245 755 500
2) Select the density level (point) to be adjusted with the scroll
key.
When the adjustment value is increased, the density is
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the den-
sity is decreased.
When the arrow key is pressed, the selected are collectively
adjusted. That is, all the density levels (points) from the low
density point to the high density point can be adjusted collec-
tively.
printed out.
The density at each density level (point) can be checked by
referring to this printed adjustment pattern. However, it is more
practically to make a cop and check it.

22-I Gamma/density adjustment in the text
image edge section (Normally not required)
This adjustment is used to change the reproduction level of text
and outline to an optional level by changing the gamma and the
density at the edge section of text image. The thickness of fine text
and fine lines is changed by this adjustment.
The black text edge/color text edge adjustment is enabled only in
the Text/Printed Photo mode and the Text/Photograph copy mode.
The error diffusion edge adjustment is enabled only in the 2-color
copy mode.
When the default adjustment value is changed, this adjustment is
required in the following cases.
2) Select an adjustment item with the scroll key.
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
When the adjustment value of item A, C, or E is changed, the
gamma at the edge area of text and lines is changed.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image contrast at
the edge area of text and lines is increased. When the adjust-
ment value is decreased, the contrast is decreased.
When the adjustment value of item B, D, or F is increased, the
image density at the edge area of text and lines is increased.
When the value is decreased, the density is decreased.
4) Press [OK] key.
5) Press [CLOSE] key to exit from the simulation.
A : 500 ; POINT1
B : 500 ; POINT2
C : 500 ; POINT3
D : 500 ; POINT4
A:
SIMULATION NO.46-16
ENGINE COLOR BALANCE MANUAL ADJUSTMENT [ALL(B/W)]:PG
XXX
373 627
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 500 ; POINT5
F : 500 ; POINT6
G : 500 ; POINT7
H : 500 ; POINT8
I : 500 ; POINT9
J : 500 ; POINT10
K : 500 ; POINT11
L : 500 ; POINT12
EXECUTE
A : 450 ; POINT1
B : 500 ; POINT2
C : 500 ; POINT3
D : 500 ; POINT4
A:
SIMULATION NO.46-16
XXX
373 627
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 500 ; POINT5
F : 500 ; POINT6
G : 500 ; POINT7
H : 500 ; POINT8
I : 500 ; POINT9
J : 500 ; POINT10
K : 500 ; POINT11
L : 500 ; POINT12
EXECUTE
or self print end
10-key
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
Display/Item
(Copy mode)
Content
Adjustment
range
Default
value
A BLACK TEXT
(SLOPE)
Black text edge area
engine curve calculation
coefficient (slope) setting
1 99 50
B BLACK TEXT
(INTERCEPT)
Black text edge area
coefficient (density) setting
1 99 50
C COLOR TEXT
(SLOPE)
Color text edge area
1 99 50
D COLOR TEXT
(INTERCEPT)
Color text edge area
1 99 50
E ED TEXT
(SLOPE)
Error diffusion edge area
1 99 50
F ED TEXT
(INTERCEPT)
Error diffusion edge area
1 99 50
A : 50 ; BLACK TEXT (SLOPE)
B : 50 ; BLACK TEXT (INTERCEPTE)
C : 50 ; COLOR TEXT (SLOPE)
D : 50 ; COLOR TEXT (INTERCEPTE)
A:
SIMULATION NO.46-27
COEFFICIENT OF GAMMA SETUP
XX
1 99
OK
TEST
E : 50 ; ED TEXT (SLOPE)
F : 50 ; ED TEXT (INTERCEPT)
CLOSE
A:
SIMULATION NO.46-27
XX
1 99
OK
TEST
CLOSE
OK
10-key
6) Make a copy in the TEXT/Printed Photo copy mode (Manual),
and check the copy.
Use a document with fine text and line images for copying and
checking.
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-27
mode and change the adjustment value.
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is
obtained.

22-J Copy color balance adjustment (Single
color copy mode) (Normally not required)
This adjustment is used to set the color balance and the density in
the single color copy mode to the user's request.
The adjustment is made by changing YMC components of each
color.
This adjustment is not required normally, but executed when there
is a request from the user.
When the default adjustment value is changed, this adjustment is
required in the following cases.
a. Adjustment procedures
2) Select the color to be adjusted with the scroll key.
3) Select the color (YMC) to be adjusted with the color key.
5) Press [OK] key.
6) Press [CLOSE] key to exit from the simulation.
7) Make a copy in the single color copy mode and check the
copy.
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-25 mode
and change the adjustment value. Repeat the above procedures
until a satisfactory result is obtained.

22-K Auto color balance adjustment by the user
(Copy color balance auto adjustment
a. General
In the user program mode, the user can execute the auto color cal-
ibration (auto adjustment of the copy color balance and density).
This adjustment is to set Enable/Disable of the above user opera-
tion with SIM 26-53.
NOTE: This setting must be set to ENABLE only when the user's
understanding on the automatic adjustment of the copy
color balance and density and the user's operational ability
are judged enough to execute the adjustment.
When set to ENABLE, give enough explanations on the
operating procedures, notes, and operations to the user.
Display/Item
Adjustment
value
Default value
C M Y
A RED 0 255 0 255 255
B GREEN 0 255 255 0 255
C BLUE 0 255 255 255 0
D YELLOW 0 255 0 0 255
E MAGENTA 0 255 0 255 0
F CYAN 0 255 255 0 0
A : 0 ; RED
B : 255 ; GREEN
C : 255 ; BLUE
D : 0 ; YELLOW
A:
SIMULATION NO.46-25
SINGLE COLOR MODE COLOR BALANCE SETUP
XXX
0 255
C M Y
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 0 ; MAGENTA
F : 255 ; CYAN
A : 255 ; RED
B : 255 ; GREEN
C : 255 ; BLUE
D : 0 ; YELLOW
A:
SIMULATION NO.46-25
XXX
0 255
C M Y
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 0 ; MAGENTA
F : 255 ; CYAN
OK
10-key
A : 1 ; (1:YES 0:NO)
A:
SIMULATION NO.26-53
ENAIBLING OF AUTOMATIC COLOR CALIBRATION
X
0 1
OK
TEST
CLOSE
A : 0 ; (1:YES 0:NO)
A:
SIMULATION NO.26-53
X
0 1
OK
TEST
CLOSE
OK
10-key
2) Select ENABLE or DISABLE with 10-key.
When disabling, set to "0" (NO).
When enabling, set to "1" (Yes).
3) Press [OK] key.
When set to DISABLE, the menu of the user auto color calibration
(automatic adjustment of copy color balance and density) is not dis-
played in the user program mode.
(Auto color calibration by the user (Auto color balance adjust-
ment))
Remark: This adjustment is based on the service target color bal-
ance set with SIM 63-7 and SIM 63-8. If, therefore, the above set-
tings are not properly performed, this adjustment cannot be made
properly.
1) Enter the system setting mode.
2) Enter the copy setting mode.
3) Press the auto color calibration key.
5) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in pro-
cedure 4) on the document table. Set the patch image so that
the light density area is on the left side.
At that time, place 5 sheets of white paper on the above color
patch image (adjustment pattern).
6) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the copy color balance adjustment
is executed automatically. After completion of the adjustment,
the display returns to the original operation screen.

22-L Background process condition setting in
the color auto copy mode
When the adjustment value is changed from the default adjustment
value, this adjustment is required in the following cases.
* When the user request for the adjustment.
This adjustment is used to set the condition for inhibiting copy of
the background depending on the document image kind and state.
The setting is applied to the color auto copy mode.
2) Select COLOR AE mode with [NEXT] and [BACK] key.
3) Select the setting mode with the scroll key.
System settings
Yellow Black
Red
Blue
Adjustment
range
Default
value
COLOR
AE
A SW_
MODE1
ON Auto mode: Text
document
background
detection
0 1 1
OFF
B SW_
MODE2
ON Auto mode: Text
mesh document
background
detection
0 1 1
OFF
C SW_
MODE3
ON Auto mode: Text-
on-mesh
document
background
detection
0 1 1
OFF
D SW_
MODE4
ON Auto mode: Mesh
document
background
detection
0 1 0
OFF
E SW_
MODE5
ON Auto mode: Photo
document
background
detection
0 1 0
OFF
F SW_
MODE6
ON Auto mode: text
document
background
detection
0 1 0
OFF
G SW_
MODE7
ON Auto mode: Other
document
background
detection
0 1 0
OFF
H TH_MAX_
MONO
Monochrome
background
detection
threshold value
0 32 17
I TH_MAX_
COLOR
Color background
detection
threshold value
0 32 17
J SW_NEWS Newspaper
background
forcible delete
switch
0 1 0
K SW_MODE_
SCR1
Mesh area
background
judgment switch
1 3 3
L SW_MODE_
SCR2
Mesh area
background delete
select switch
0 1 0
M SW_MODE_
MIX
Auto other
document
background
detection switch
1 2 2
OK BACK NEXT
A : 7 ; THCLMK_1
B : 2 ; THCLBK_1
C : 0 ; ACSMSK_1
D : 7 ; THCLMK_2
A:
SIMULATION NO.46-33
COLOR AUTO MODE ADJUSTMENT(ACS 4DIGIT UNDER)
X
0 9
TEST
CLOSE
E : 2 ; THCLBK_2
F : 0 ; ACSMSK_2
G : 7 ; THCLMK_3
H : 2 ; THCLBK_3
I : 0 ; ACSMSK_3
J : 7 ; THCLMK_4
K : 2 ; THCLBK_4
Set item A (SW MODE1) G (SW MODE7):
Used to set Enable/Disable of the background delete function
for various kinds of documents.
When the value of the set item corresponding to the document
kind is set to 1, the background delete function of the docu-
ment kind is enabled.
To reproduce the document colors directly, set this setting to
OFF (0).
After entering the set value, press [OK] key to save the entered
value to the memory.
Set item H (TH_MAX_MONO):
Used to set the density level at which the background delete
function is enabled for monochrome background documents.
Set to the range of 0 16.
To delete the background of light-density documents: Increase
the set value.
To delete the background of dark-density documents:
Decrease the set value.
After entering the set value, press [OK] key to save the set
Set item I (TH_MAX_COLOR):
Used to set the density level at which the background delete
function is enabled for color background documents.
Set to the range of 0 16.
To delete the background of light-density documents: Increase
the set value.
To delete the background of dark-density documents:
Set item J (SW_NEWS):
Used to set Enable/Disable of the newspaper (monochrome)
background delete function.
It is not affected by the set item H.
For newspapers of color background, this setting is invalid.
Set item A (TH_MODE_SCR):
Used to set the mesh are level at which the background delete
function is enabled for printed documents with mesh images.
To delete background of documents with much mesh area:
Increase the set value.
To delete background of documents with less mesh area:
Select TH_MODE_SCR, enter the set value, and press [SET]
key to save the entered value to the memory.
(NOTE)
Enable/Disable of the background delete operation is determined
by AND condition of A (SW MODE1) G (SW MODE7), H (TH_
MAX_MONO), I (TH_MAX_COLOR), and A (TH_MODE_SCR).
For newspapers documents, however, it is determined by the set
item J (SW_NEWS) only.
Except for the above set items, do not change the setting in the
market. Set them to the default values.

22-M Color document identification level (ACS
operation) setting
When the machine is used with some adjustment values changed
from the default values, this adjustment is required in the following
cases.
* When the user requests for the adjustment.
This setting is used to set the recognition level of a color image in a
document.
The actual ACS operation is executed according to the combination
of the judgment reference value in the color auto mode set by the
device and this setting.
When a monochrome document cannot be judged as a mono-
chrome document or when a color document cannot be judged as a
color document, change this setting. This setting is applied to the
color auto copy mode.
2) Select the ACS mode with [NEXT] key and [BACK] key.
3) Select the setting mode of "P/SIM LEVEL" with the scroll key.
When a monochrome document is not recognized as a mono-
chrome document, increase the set value.
When a color document is not recognized as a color docu-
ment, decrease the set value.
The figure in the table indicates the ACS setting level in the
device setting.
COLOR
AE
N SW_HOSEI Correction table
correction
0 8
(4 +4)
4
O AE
COLOR
TABLE
ON Selection of color
correction table in
color AE
0 1 1
OFF
P BG_REMOVE_
LEVEL (OC)
Background
removal level
change (OC)
1 7 4
Q BG_REMOVE_
LEVEL (RSPF)
Background
removal level
change (RSPF)
1 7 4
R BG_REMOVE_
LEVEL (DSPF
SIDE1)
Background
removal level
change (DSPF
front surface)
1 7 4
S BG_REMOVE_
LEVEL (DSPF
SIDE2)
Background
removal level
change (DSPF
back surface)
1 7 4
T BG_REMOVE_
ADJ
Background
judgment
correction value
0 100 0
A TH_MODE_
SCR
Mesh ratio
threshold value
0 10000 3000
B TH_SITAJI_
SCR
Background mesh
threshold value
0 10000 3000
Adjustment
range
Default
value
OK BACK NEXT
A : 7 ; THCLMK_1
B : 2 ; THCLBK_1
C : 0 ; ACSMSK_1
D : 7 ; THCLMK_2
A:
SIMULATION NO.46-33
X
0 9
TEST
CLOSE
E : 2 ; THCLBK_2
F : 0 ; ACSMSK_2
G : 7 ; THCLMK_3
H : 2 ; THCLBK_3
I : 0 ; ACSMSK_3
J : 7 ; THCLMK_4
K : 2 ; THCLBK_4
The ACS setting level of the device setting (the judgment refer-
ence value in the color auto mode) is changed with the setting
of SIM 46-33 ACS/P/SIM LEVEL.
The left and the upper area from the cross point of the device
setting on the table and the ACS/P/SIM LEVEL setting serves
as the ACS operation condition.
Device setting ACS setting level (Judgment reference set
value in the color auto mode) (5 steps)
[Monochrome] 1 2 3 4 5 [Color]
SIM 46-33 ACS/P/SIM LEVEL (3 steps)
Weak hue [Monochrome] [Color] Strong hue
XC XB XA
* Adjustment in 3 steps of device setting
(Example) When the ASC setting level of device setting (judgment
reference set value in the color auto mode) is 2 and SIM 46-33
ACS/P/SIM LEVEL is set to 3, the following area serves as the
ACS operating condition.
(NOTE) Though the judgment reference in the color auto mode of
device setting is set to "5: Monochrome," if a monochrome docu-
ment is not recognized as a monochrome document, increase the
set value of the set item A TH ACS5 ENLARGE (area level 5).
After entering the set value, press [OK] key to save the set value to
the memory.
Except for the above set item, do not change the setting in the mar-
ket. Set it to the default value.
Area level 5 Area level 4 Area level 3 Area level 2 Area level 1 ACS color judgment setting
Large hue area Small hue area
Hue level 1
Hue level 2
Hue level 3
Hue level 4
Hue level 5
Hue area (Device setting ACS setting level
(Judgment reference set value in the color auto mode))
Hue level
(SIM LEVEL)
Weak hue
Strong hue
Can be set optionally.
(30000 pixel or more)
About 10mm 5mm
(30000 pixel)
About 5mm 5mm
(15000 pixel)
About 3mm 4mm
(7000 pixel)
About 1mm 3mm
(1875 pixel)
C
B
A
C
B
A
C
C
B
A B C
A B
A
Area level 5 Area level 4 Area level 3 Area level 2 Area level 1 ACS color judgment setting
Large hue area Small hue area
Hue level 1
Hue level 2
Hue level 3
Hue level 4
Hue level 5
Hue area (Device setting ACS setting level
(Judgment reference set value in the color auto mode))
Hue level
(SIM LEVEL)
Weak hue
Strong hue
Can be set optionally.
(30000 pixel or more)
About 10mm 5mm
(30000 pixel)
About 5mm 5mm
(15000 pixel)
About 3mm 4mm
(7000 pixel)
About 1mm 3mm
(1875 pixel)

ADJ 23 Printer color balance/density
adjustment
(1) Note before execution of the printer color balance/density
adjustment
(Requisite condition before execution of the printer color balance/
density adjustment)
Before execution of the printer color balance/density adjustment,
the copy color balance/density adjustment must have been com-
pleted properly.
(This adjustment is required in the following cases.)
* Basically same as when the copy color balance/density adjust-
ment is required. Refer to the page of the ADJ 22 Copy color
balance/density adjustment.
* After the copy color balance/density adjustment.
(2) Flow of printer color balance/density adjustment procedures
START
Process correction is forcibly
performed. (SIM 44-6)
Execute the half tone image
correction. (SIM 44-26)
Check the printer color balance/density.
(Check the test pattern of SIM 64-5.)
Are the copy
at satisfactory
levels?
No
(to Next page)
Yes
(to Next page)
Is PCL mode
supported?
Yes
No
Use SIM 67-25 to the color balance
check sheet, and check the patch
color balance of process black.
Printer color balance/density adjustment
4
Change the color balance/
density adjustment factory
targets. (SIM 67-26)
Make the factory printer balance target
(when adjusting the printer color
balance/density with SIM 67-24) same
as the service color balance target and
the color balance target when adjusting
the density. (SIM67-28)
No
Can the
printer color balance and
density be adjusted to satisfactory
levels with the fine
adjustment?
Perform the manual adjustment of ADJ 23B
printer color balance, density adjustment. (SIM 67-25)
Perform ADJ 23A printer color balance/
density auto adjustment. (SIM 67-24)
Enter the SIM 67-24 mode and select
A3 (11 x 17) paper. (Auto selection)
(from Previous page) (from Previous page)
Use SIM 67-25 to print the color balance
check sheet, and check the patch color
balance of process black.
Use SIM 67-25 to print the color balance
check sheet, and check the patch color
balance of process black./Check the
printer color balance and density.
(Check the test pattern of SIM 64-5)
Are the printer
at satisfactory
levels?
Were the
printer color balance
and density
customized?
Yes
Yes
No
No
Set the adjustment pattern on the
original table, select the FACTORY
mode, and press the EXECUTE key.
3
Use SIM 67-25 to print
the color balance
check sheet, and
check the patch color
balance of process
black./Check the
printer color balance
and density.
(Check the test pattern
of SIM 64-5)
Are
the color
balance and density at
the satisfactory
levels?
Were
all the three kinds
of color balance/density
adjustment targets
changed?
(SIM 67-26)
No
4
Yes
No
3
Auto color balance adjustment
service target is set.
Enter the SIM 67-27 mode.
Press the SETUP key.
Set the color patch image (adjustment
pattern) printed in the printer color
balance/density adjustment on the original
table, and press the EXECUTE key.
Press the OK key.
Cancel SIM 67-27.
The printer color
balance and density
adjustment completed.
Check the printer color balance/density.
(Check the test pattern of SIM 64-5)
Are the
printer color
balance and the density
in the specified
level ?
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Were
the three kinds of
color balance/density
adjustment targets
changed?
(SIM 67-26)
No
Yes
Is PCL mode
supported?
No
Yes
Use SIM 67-25 to print
the color balance
check sheet, and
check the patch color
balance of process
black.
Is PCL mode
supported?
No
Yes
Is PCL mode
supported?
No
Yes
Is the printer
color balance density
adjustment performed
with SIM67-25?
Yes
No
Set the adjustment pattern on the
original table, and press the
EXECUTE key.
Press the OK key. (The initial
setup of half tone image correction
is automatically performed.)
Cancel SIM 67-24.
Can be
repeated
max. 3 times.
Is the
repeated?
No
Yes
(3) Printer color balance/density check
(Note)
Before checking the copy color balance and the density, be sure to
execute the following procedures in advance.
* Execute the high density image correction (process correction)
forcibly. (SIM 44-6)
(Procedure)
a. When the PCL mode is supported:
Execute SIM 64-5 to print the print test pattern.
Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key. The
print test pattern is printed.
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter level
to the darker level. The density changing direction must not be
reversed. The density level of each color must be almost at the
same level.
b. When the PCL mode is not supported: (In the case of GDI
model)
Use SIM 67-25 to print the color balance adjustment sheet and
compare each process (CMY) black patch color balance and the
black patch to check the color balance.
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter level
to the darker level. The density changing direction must not be
reversed.
The density level of each color must be almost at the same level.

23-A Printer color balance adjustment (Auto
adjustment)
a. General
The color balance adjustment (auto adjustment) is used to adjust
the print density of each color (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black) auto-
matically with SIM 67-24 or the user program.
(When this adjustment is executed, the color balance adjustments
of all the print modes are revised.)
There are following two modes of the automatic color balance
adjustment.
1) Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman) (SIM 67-24
I used.)
2) Auto color balance adjustment by the user (The user program
is used.) (The color balance target becomes the service tar-
get.)
The auto color balance adjustment by the user is provided to
reduce the number of service calls.
If the print color balance is lost for some reasons, the user can
use this color balance adjustment to recover the balance.
When, however, the machine has a fatal problem or when the
machine environment is greatly changed, this function does
not work effectively.
On the other hand, the auto color balance adjustment by the
serviceman functions to recover the normal color balance
though the machine environment is greatly changed. If the
machine has a fatal problem, repair and adjust it for obtaining
the normal color balance.
To perform the adjustment, the above difference must be fully
understood.
b. Note for execution of the color balance adjustment (Auto
adjustment)
1) The copy color balance adjustment must have been completed
properly.
state.
(Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman)
selected.)
C
M
Y
Bk
PRINTER CALIBRATION
High density Low density
Fig. 1 PG image
1) The max. density
SIMULATION NO.67-24
TEST
PRINTER ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT MODE
EXECUTE
CLOSE
PRESS [EXECUTE] TO PROCON EXECUTION AND PRINT THE TEST PATCH.
3) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper printed
on the document table.
Place the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper
so that the thin lines on the paper are on the left side. Place 5
sheets of white paper on the printed color patch image (adjust-
ment pattern) paper.
4) Press [FACTORY] key, and press [EXECUTE] key.
When the color balance is customized with the manual color
balance adjustment (SIM 67-25) according to the user's
request and the color balance is registered as the service tar-
get with SIM 67-27, if the color balance is adjusted to that color
balance, select the service target.
The copy color balance adjustment is automatically executed
to print the color balance check patch image. Wait until the
operation panel shown in the next procedure is displayed.
NOTE:
Check the printed color balance check patch image to insure
that the color balance adjustment result is satisfactory to deter-
mine how many times the procedures 5) - 8) must be repeated.
If the color balance adjustment result is not satisfactory and if
the procedure 5) is satisfactory, go to the procedure 9).
The procedures 5) - 8) can be repeated max. 3 times.
When this procedure is repeated, the color balance adjustment
accuracy is improved, especially the color balance adjustment
accuracy in the low density area is improved. Note that the
color balance adjustment accuracy, however, varies depend-
ing on the machine status.
Remark:
(Descriptions on FACTORY key and SERVICE key in the color
balance auto adjustment menu.)
There are two kinds of the gamma target for the color balance
auto adjustment; Factory and Service.
FACTORY key and SERVICE key are used to select one of the
above two.
Factory target color balance: Standard color balance (It can be
selected from the three kinds of fixed color balances with SIM
67-26.)
Service target color balance: The color balance can be cus-
tomized according to the user's request. (Variable)
When shipping, the service target gamma data and the factory
target gamma data are the same.
Both are set to the standard color balance when shipping.
For the service target, the customized color balance gamma
can be registered with SIM 67-27.
5) Press [REPEAT] key.
The operation panel is changed and [EXECUTE] key is dis-
played.
7) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the
procedure same as the procedure 3) on the document table.
The print color balance adjustment is automatically performed,
and the color balance check patch image is printed out.
9) Press [OK] key.
NOTE:
Do not cancel the simulation until "PLEASE QUIT THIS
MODE" is displayed.
PRINTER CALIBRATION
SIMULATION NO.67-24
TEST
,
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-24
TEST
OK
PRESS [REPEAT] TO CONTINUE THIS PROCEDURE.
REPEAT
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-24
TEST
EXECUTE
CLOSE
(PLEASE USE SPECIFIED TYPE OF A3 OR 11" x 17" SIZE PAPER
CLOSE SIMULATION NO.67-24
TEST
OK
PRESS [REPEAT] TO CONTINUE THIS PROCEDURE.
REPEAT
SIMULATION NO.67-24
TEST
CLOSE
COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE.
PLEASE QUIT THIS MODE.
10) Check the color balance and density.
There are two methods.
(Method 1)
Check to insure that the printed color balance check patch
image is within the following specifications.
not be reversed.
level.
(Method 2)
By printing the color balance adjustment sheet with SIM 67-25
and comparing each process (CMY) black patch color balance
with the black patch, the color balance adjustment can be
checked more precisely.
(Method 3)
(This method cannot be used when the machine supports only
the GDI mode.)
When the PCL mode is supported, use SIM 64-5 to print the
print test pattern.
Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key,
and the print test pattern is printed out.
not be reversed. The density level of each color must be
almost at the same level.
When the factory target is selected in the procedure 4) and the
auto adjustment is executed but a satisfactory result is not
obtained on the color balance and the density, use SIM 67-26
to change the factory color balance target and repeat the pro-
cedures from 1).
If a satisfactory result is not obtained with the above proce-
dures, execute the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ
23B).
When the service target is selected in the procedure 4) and the
auto adjustment is executed but a satisfactory result is not
obtained, execute the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ
23B).
11) Cancel SIM 67-25.
(For the machine which supports only the GDI mode, the
adjustment is completed.)
12) Use SIM 44-26 to execute the half tone image correction (forc-
ible execution).
Enter the SIM 44-26 mode, and press [EXECUTE] key.
13) After completion of the operation, cancel SIM 44-26.
14) Use SIM 64-5 to print the print test pattern and check the print
color balance and the density again.
Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key. The
print test pattern is printed out.
If a satisfactory result on the print color balance and the density is
not obtained with the automatic adjustment, execute the manual
adjustment (SIM 67-25) (ADJ 23B).
C
M
Y
Bk
PRINTER CALIBRATION
Fig. 1 PG image
1) The max. density
C
M
Y
Bk
PRINTER CALIBRATION
CMY
mixed
color
1) The max. density
SIMULATION NO.44-26
TEST
EXECUTE
CLOSE
K M Y C
SIMULATION NO.44-26
TEST
[S_VALUE]
#1: 907, #2: 902, #3: 909, #4:921, #5:936
#6: 347, #7:992, #8:1047, #9:1081, #10:1137
#11:1183, #12:1222, #13:1261, #14:1283,#15:1260
1/1 EXECUTE
CLOSE
K M Y C
SIMULATION NO.44-26
TEST
[S_VALUE]
1/1 EXECUTE
CLOSE

23-B Printer color balance adjustment (Manual
adjustment)
* When the copy color balance/density adjustment is required.
Refer to the page of the ADJ 22 Copy color balance/density
adjustment.
* After execution of the copy color balance/density adjustment.
a. General
The color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) is used to
adjust the copy density (15 points for each color) of each color
(CMYK) manually when the automatic adjustment cannot obtain
the specified result or when a fine adjustment is required or when
the user requests to change (customize) the color balance.
In this adjustment, only the patch of each color is adjusted in the
above case where the automatic adjustment cannot obtain the
specified result.
When the color balance is lost, execute the automatic color bal-
ance adjustment in advance and execute this adjustment for better
efficiency.
b. Note for execution of the color balance adjustment (Manual
adjustment)
1) The copy color balance adjustment must have been completed
properly.
2) When setting the color patch image adjustment pattern on the
document table, place 5 sheets of white paper on the color
patch image adjustment pattern.
state.
selected.)
The color balance adjustment pattern is printed.
A : 50 ; POINT1
B : 50 ; POINT2
C : 50 ; POINT3
D : 50 ; POINT4
A:
SIMULATION NO.67-25
PRINTER ENGINE COLOR BALANCE MANUAL ADJUSTMENT: PG
XX
1 99
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 50 ; POINT5
F : 50 ; POINT6
G : 50 ; POINT7
H: 50 ; POINT8
I : 50 ; POINT9
J : 50 ; POINT10
K : 50 ; POINT11
L : 50 ; POINT12
EXECUTE
K C M Y
A : 67 ; POINT1
B : 50 ; POINT2
C : 50 ; POINT3
D : 50 ; POINT4
A:
SIMULATION NO.67-25
XX
1 99
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 50 ; POINT5
F : 50 ; POINT6
G : 50 ; POINT7
H: 50 ; POINT8
I : 50 ; POINT9
J : 50 ; POINT10
K : 50 ; POINT11
L : 50 ; POINT12
EXECUTE
K C M Y
A : 67 ; POINT1
B : 50 ; POINT2
C : 50 ; POINT3
D : 50 ; POINT4
A:
SIMULATION NO.67-25
XX
1 99
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 50 ; POINT5
F : 50 ; POINT6
G : 50 ; POINT7
H: 50 ; POINT8
I : 50 ; POINT9
J : 50 ; POINT10
K : 50 ; POINT11
L : 50 ; POINT12
EXECUTE
K C M Y
OK
10-key
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
or self print end
3) Check that the following specification is satisfied or the desired
color balance is obtained.
If the above specification is not satisfied, perform the following
procedures.
not be reversed.
level.
When, however, the color balance is adjusted according to a
request from the user, there is no need to set to the standard
color balance stated above.
4) Select the color to be adjusted with the color select key, and
select the adjustment point with the scroll key.
The adjustment value is set in the range of 1 99 (1 255).
When SIM 67-24 is used to adjust the automatic color balance
and density, all the set values of this simulation are set to 50.
Repeat procedures of 2) 5) until the condition of 3) is satis-
fied.
When the overall density is low, or when the density is high
and patch A is copied, use the arrow key to adjust all the
adjustment values of A O to a same level collectively.
Then, adjust each patch density individually. This is an efficient
way of adjustment.
Referring to the black and gray patches, adjust so that each
process (CMY) black/gray patch color balance of A O
approaches the black/gray patch level as far as possible.
6) Cancel SIM 67-25.
(For the machine which supports only the GDI mode, the
adjustment is completed.)
7) Use SIM 64-5 to print the print test pattern.
NOTE: Only for the machine which support the PCL mode.
(For the machine which supports only the GDI mode, this pro-
cedure cannot be used.)
Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key.
The print test pattern is printed out.
8) Use SIM 44-26 to execute the half tone image correction (forc-
ible execution).
9) After completion of the operation, cancel SIM 44-26.
10) Use SIM 64-5 to print the print test pattern again.
Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key.
The print test pattern is printed out.
(NOTE)
If the color balance is customized, use SIM 67-27 to register
the color balance as the service target.
required.
If the customized color balance is registered as the service tar-
get, the automatic color balance adjustment can be made in
the next color balance adjustment.
In the next color balance adjustment, select the service target
color balance in the automatic color balance adjustment mode
to make an adjustment to the similar color balance as the reg-
istered color balance.
C
M
Y
Bk
PRINTER CALIBRATION
CMY
mixed
color
1) The max. density
SIMULATION NO.44-26
TEST
EXECUTE
CLOSE
K M Y C
SIMULATION NO.44-26
TEST
[S_VALUE]
#1: 907, #2: 902, #3: 909, #4:921, #5:936
#6: 347, #7:992, #8:1047, #9:1081, #10:1137
#11:1183, #12:1222, #13:1261, #14:1283,#15:1260
1/1 EXECUTE
CLOSE
K M Y C
SIMULATION NO.44-26
TEST
[S_VALUE]
1/1 EXECUTE
CLOSE
(Auto color balance adjustment service color balance target
gamma setting)
a. General
When the automatic color balance adjustment is executed, a cer-
tain color balance (gamma) is used as the target.
There are following three kinds of the target.
Factory color balance (gamma) target
Service color balance (gamma) target
User color balance (gamma) target
In the above three, only the service color balance target can be set
to a desired level.
* When the copy color balance/density adjustment (manual adjust-
ment) is executed with SIM 67-25.
* When the user requests for customizing the color balance.
* When the service color balance target gamma is judged as
improper.
Color balance target for the printer color balance adjustment
Relationship between the factory target and the service target and the color balance target for the user color balance adjustment in the
printer color balance adjustment (SIM 67-24)
Kind Descriptions
A Factory color
balance (gamma)
target
There are three kinds of the color balance target,
and each of them is specified according to the
machine design. Use SIM 67-26 to select one of
them as the factory target. The default setting
(factory setting) is the color balance (DEF1)
which emphasizes color reproduction.
B Service color
balance (gamma)
target
This target is used when the user requests to
customize the color balance to users desired
level. In advance, the users unique color
balance must be registered as the service color
balance target.
The above registration (setting) is made by the
serviceman with SIM 67-25 to adjust the color
balance and with SIM 67-27 to register it.
This color balance target is used when the user
executes the color balance adjustment.
When, therefore, the service color balance target
is changed, the color balance target of the users
color balance adjustment is also changed.
When, however, SIM 67-28 is executed, the color
balance is set to the factory color balance target
set with SIM 67-26.
The default setting (factory setting) of the color
balance is same as the factory color balance
target. (Emphasized on color reproduction
(DEF1))
If the user does not request for customizing the
color balance, be sure to use SIM 67-28 to set
the color balance to the factory color balance
target.
C User color
balance (gamma)
target
Same color balance as the service color balance
(gamma) target
When the service color balance target is
changed, this color balance target is also
target (DEF2)
target (DEF1)
target (DEF3)
target (DEF1)
target
=
target
=
target (Unique)
Use SIM 67-25 to adjust the

optional color balance, and
use SIM 67-27 to register it.
Execute SIM 67-28.
(The service color balance
target is the same as the
factory color balance target.)
Factory setting
Color balance target for
the user color balance
adjustment
target
=
Use SIM 67-26 to select
one of the three kinds of
color balance targets.
Color balance target in the printer color balance
automatic adjustment (SIM 67-24)
Factory target in the printer color balance adjustment (SIM 67-24)
By use of SIM 67-26, one of the following color balances can be set as the factory color balance target.
Each of the three color balances cannot be changed. (Fixed)
Service color balance target in the printer color balance adjust-
ment (SIM 67-28).
For the service color balance target, an optional color balance
can be adjusted with SIM 67-25 and registered with SIM 67-27.
When, however, SIM 67-28 is executed, the color balance is set
to the same balance as the factory color balance target set with
SIM 67-26.
This color balance is same as the service color balance target in
the copy color balance adjustment (SIM 67-24). When, therefore,
the service color balance target is changed, this target is also
(Meaning of the service color balance target gamma data and
the purpose of registration)
This procedure must be executed only when the color balance is
customized with SIM 67-25.
required.
After completion of the customized color balance adjustment (Man-
ual) with SIM 67-25 according to the user's request, use SIM 67-27
to register the service color balance target data by use of the
printed adjustment pattern.
By this procedure, the service color balance target is revised.
It is recommendable to keep the printed adjustment pattern with
SIM 67-25. This adjustment pattern can be used to register the
same color balance target to another machine.
It is also useful to register the service color balance target data.
Do not fold it and keep it under the circumstances which protect it
from discoloration and dirt.
The service color balance target data are basically registered
immediately after the color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM
67-25.
If a considerable time has passed after completion of the color bal-
ance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 67-25, the color balance of the
adjustment pattern at the time of adjustment differs from the color
balance of the adjustment pattern printed after a considerable time.
Never use such a pattern for the adjustment.
The correctness of the service color balance target data can be
judges as follows.
Select the service color balance target with SIM 67-24 and execute
the color valance adjustment (Auto), and check the adjustment
result. When the result is unsatisfactory or abnormal, the registered
service target data for the color balance adjustment (Auto) may be
improper.
This may be caused when an improper or abnormal color balance
adjustment pattern was used to register the service color balance
target data for the color balance adjustment with SIM 67-27.
The color balance adjustment pattern used in registration was
made and printed by the color balance adjustment (Manual) with
SIM 67-25. This procedure may have been executed erroneously.
(Setting procedure of an optional color balance (gamma) as
the service color balance target)
1) Use SIM 67-25 (Printer color balance adjustment (manual
adjustment) mode) to print two sheets of the color patch image
If the color balance is shifted from the standard, an adjustment
is required. If not, an adjustment is not required. When an
optional color balance is requested by the user, make an
adjustment.
4) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) correctly
adjusted and printed in the printer color balance adjustment
(Manual adjustment) (SIM 67-25) (ADJ 23B) on the document
table.
(A)
SIM67-28
+b* Direction of Yellow
Hue
+a*
Direction
of Red
D
ir
e
c
t
io
n
o
f
G
r
e
e
n
Direction of Blue
Factory color
balance target
(DEF1)
SIM67-28
Factory color balance target
(DEF1) = Service color balance
target/Color balance target for the
user color balance adjustment
DEF1
DEF2
Color balance with emphasis on color
reproduction (factory setting)
Color balance with slightly strong Cyan
DEF3 Color balance with emphasis on Cyan
Default
SIM67-28
K C M Y SETUP
SIMULATION NO.67-27
TEST
#B: 91, #C 2944, #D: 3227, #E: 5822, #F: 8600
#G: 28935, #H: 54344, #I: 86968, #J: 122678, #K: 151198
#L: 169731, #M: 195950, #N: 201249, #:O: 207112
1/1
CLOSE
A color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed by another
machine can be used.
Set the pattern so that the light density side is on the left side.
Place 5 sheets of white paper on the color patch image
If the color balance could not be adjusted satisfactorily with
SIM 67-25 (Color balance adjustment (Manual)), do not exe-
cute SIM 67-27 to register the service color balance target
data.
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is read.
6) Press [REPEAT] key, set the second color patch image
(adjustment pattern), and execute the procedure 5) again.
The color balance (gamma) target set level of each color
(KCMY) can be checked with K/C/M/Y keys.
Check that the set level is increased in the sequence of B O.
If there is no variation or variation is reversed, it is judged as
abnormal.
In case of an abnormality, settle the problem and try again.
7) Press [OK] key.
The color balance (gamma) of the color patch image (adjust-
ment pattern) used in the procedure 5) is set as the service tar-
get.
(Procedures to set the service color balance target and the
color balance target for the user color balance adjustment to
the same color balance as the factory color balance target)
This procedure must not be executed when the copy color balance
was adjusted with SIM 67-25 to a unique color balance requested
by the user and it was registered as the service color balance tar-
get with SIM 67-27.
* When the factory color balance target is changed with SIM 67-
26, be sure to execute this procedure.
3) Press [YES] key.
The service color balance target and the color balance target for
the user color balance adjustment are set to the same color bal-
ance as the factory color balance target.

23-C Auto color balance adjustment by the user
(Printer color balance auto adjustment
a. General
In the user program mode, the user can execute the auto color cal-
ibration (auto adjustment of the printer color balance and density).
This adjustment is to set Enable/Disable of the above user opera-
tion with SIM 26-54.
NOTE: This setting must be set to ENABLE only when the user's
understanding on the automatic adjustment of the printer
color balance and density and the user's operational ability
are judged enough to execute the adjustment.
When set to ENABLE, give enough explanations on the
operating procedures, notes, and operations to the user.
2) Select ENABLE or DISABLE with 10-key.
When disabling, set to "0" (NO).
When enabling, set to "1" (Yes).
3) Press [OK] key.
When set to DISABLE, the menu of the user auto color calibration
(automatic adjustment of printer color balance and density) is not
displayed in the user program mode.
(Auto color calibration by the user (Auto color balance adjust-
ment))
Remark:
This adjustment is based on the service target color balance set
with SIM 67-27 or SIM 67-28. If, therefore, the above settings are
not properly performed, this adjustment cannot be made properly.
1) Enter the system setting mode.
2) Enter the printer setting mode.
3) Press the auto color calibration key.
SIMULATION NO.67-27
TEST
EXECUTE
CLOSE
K C M Y OK
SIMULATION NO.67-27
TEST
BASE:8800
#B: 227, #C: 624, #D: 908, #E: 1249, #F: 2074
#G: 3298, #H: 18951, #I: 76117, #J: 128495, #K: 165225
#L: 184155, #M: 189254, #N: 194377, #:O: 197276
1/1
CLOSE
REPEAT
SIMULATION NO.67-28
TEST
STANDARD SCANNER TARGET OF PRINTER COLOR CALIB: SERVICE
CLOSE
EXECUTE ARE YOU SURE? YES NO
A : 1 ; (1:YES 0:NO)
A:
SIMULATION NO.26-54
ENAIBLING OF AUTOMATIC COLOR CALIBRATION OF PRINTER
X
0 1
OK
TEST
CLOSE
5) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in pro-
cedure 4) on the document table. Set the patch image so that
the light density area is on the left side.
At that time, place 5 sheets of white paper on the above color
patch image (adjustment pattern).
6) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the printer color balance adjust-
ment is executed automatically. After completion of the adjust-
ment, the display returns to the original operation screen.

ADJ 24 Fusing paper guide position
adjustment
* When the fusing section is disassembled.
* When a paper jam occurs in the fusing section.
* When a wrinkle is made on paper in the fusing section.
* When an image deflection or image blur occurs in the paper rear
edge section.
1) Loosen the fixing screw C.
2) Shift the fusing paper guide in the arrow direction A or B (up
and down direction).
The standard fixing position is the center of the marking scale.
Change the position depending on the situation.
* When a wrinkle is formed on paper, change the position
upward (in the arrow direction A).
* When an image deflection or image blur occurs in the paper
rear edge section, shift the position downward (in the arrow
direction B).

ADJ 25 Document size sensor
adjustment
* When the document size sensor section is disassembled.
* When the document size sensor section is replaced.

25-A Document size sensor detection point
adjustment
Slowly tilt the document detection arm unit in the arrow direc-
tion. Loosen the original cover switch actuator adjustment
screw so that the display OCSW is returned to the normal dis-
play when the height of the arm unit top from the table glass is
32 0.5mm. Slide the actuator position and adjust. (If the ON
timing of the original cover switch is shifted, the document
detection function may malfunction.)
System settings
Yellow Black
Red
Blue
A
B
A
B
C C
1.5mm 1.5mm
PD SENSOR CHECK
TEST
1/1
OCSW PD1 PD2 PD3
PD4 PD5 PD6 PD7
32 0.5mm
+
-

25-B Document size sensor sensitivity
adjustment
1) Enter the SIM41-2 mode.
2) Execute the sensor adjustment without document.
With the document cover open, without placing a document on
the table glass, press [EXECUTE] key.
3) Place A3 (11" x 17") paper on the document table and press
[EXECUTE] key.
If the adjustment is completed normally, "DOCUMENT SIZE
PHOTO-SENSOR LEVEL IS ADJUESTED" is displayed.

ADJ 26 Manual paper feed tray paper
size (width) sensor adjustment
* When the manual paper feed tray section is disassembled.
* When the manual paper feed tray unit is replaced.
2) Set the manual paper feed guide to the maximum width posi-
tion.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal
display.
The maximum width position detection level of the manual
paper feed guide is recognized.
4) Set the manual paper feed guide to the A4 size.
display.
The A4 size width position detection level of the manual paper
feed guide is recognized.
6) Set the manual paper feed guide to the A4R size width.
EXECUTE
SIMULATION NO.41-02
TEST
DOCUMENT SIZE PHOTO-SENSOR SETUP
EXECUTE
CLOSE
WITH THE ORIGINAL COVER OPENED, TURN ON THE EXECUTE
KEY WITH THE ORIGINAL ON THE ORIGINAL TABLE.
SIMULATION NO.41-02
TEST
EXECUTE
CLOSE
SET AN A3-SIZE(11 17) COPY PAPER ON THE ORIGINAL TABLE,
AND WITH THE OC OPEND, TURN ON THE EXECUTE KEY.
Adjustment completed
SIMULATION NO.41-02
TEST
EXECUTE
CLOSE
DOCUMENT SIZE PHOTO- SENSOR LEVEL IS ADJUSTED.
SIMULATION NO.41-02
TEST
EXECUTE
CLOSE
PHOTO-SENSOR ERROR POSITION
PD1 ,---,---,---,---,---,---,---
Adjustment failed
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
Repeat the above procedure to adjust
the A4R width MIN POSITION.
SIMULATION NO.40-02
TEST
BYPASS TRAY ADJUSTMENT
CLOSE
EXECUTE
MAXPOSITION ADJUSTMENT.
SIMULATION NO.40-02
TEST
CLOSE
EXECUTE
MAXPOSITION ADJUSTMENTE.
EXECUTING
SIMULATION NO.40-02
TEST
CLOSE
EXECUTE
P1(A4)POSITION ADJUSTMENT.
SIMULATION NO.40-02
TEST
CLOSE
EXECUTE
. COMPLETE
display.
The A4R size width position detection level of the manual
8) Set the manual paper feed guide to the minimum width posi-
tion.
display.
The minimum width position detection level of the manual
If the above operation is not completed normally, "ERROR"
display is highlighted.
When the operation is completed normally, the above data are
saved to the memory and "COMPLETE" is displayed.

ADJ 27 DSPF paper feed tray paper
size (width) sensor adjustment
* The paper feed tray section has been disassembled.
* The paper feed tray unit has been replaced.
* The scanner PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM on the scanner PWB has been replaced.
2) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the maximum width posi-
tion.
The maximum width detection level is recognized.
4) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the width for the A4R size.
The A4R width detection level is recognized.
6) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the width for the A5R size.
8) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the minimum width posi-
tion.
The minimum width detection level is recognized.
* When each of the above operations has been completed, the
"COMPLETE" message appears; when any of the operations
has failed, the "ERROR" message appears.

ADJ 28 Touch panel coordinate setting
* When the operation panel is replaced.
2) Precisely press the cross mark points (4 positions).
When the cross mark is pressed precisely, a buzzer sounds
and the display is reversed. When all the four points are
pressed and the touch panel adjustment is completed, the dis-
play returns to the simulation sub number entry screen.
In case of an error, the display returns to the entry screen
again.
Check to confirm that there is no shift between the display
frame and the detection position when the touch panel is
pressed.
* When pressing the touch panel, never use a sharp tip (such
as a needle or a pin).
SIMULATION NO.53-06
TEST
SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT
CLOSE
EXECUTE
TRAYVOLMAX TRAY ADJUSTMENT.

ADJ 29 Image loss, void area, image
off-center, image magnification
ratio auto adjustment with
SIM50-28
The following adjustment items can be executed automatically with
SIM50-28.
* ADJ 10 Print engine image magnification ratio adjustment (BK)
(Main scanning direction) (Print engine section) (Manual adjust-
ment)
* ADJ 11 Image off-center adjustment (Print engine section)
* ADJ 16/17 Scan image magnification ratio adjustment
* ADJ 18 Scan image off-center adjustment
* ADJ 19 Print area (void area) adjustment (Print engine section)
* ADJ 20 Copy image position, image loss adjustment
(Menu in SIM50-28 mode)

29-A Print image main scanning direction image
magnification ratio automatic adjustment
2) Select [BK-MAG ADJ] with the touch panel key.
3) Select the paper feed tray with paper in it with the touch panel
key. (Any paper size will do.)
The adjustment pattern is printed out.
5) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. (Any direc-
tion)
Note: Fit the adjustment pattern correctly with the document
guide.
The following item is automatically adjustment.
* Print image main scanning direction image magnification
ratio
7) Press [OK] key.
The adjustment result becomes valid.

29-B Image off-center automatic adjustment
2) Select [SETUP/PRINT ADJ] with the touch panel key.
3) Select [ALL] with the touch panel key.
OC ADJ Image loss off-center sub scanning direction image
magnification ratio adjustment (Document table mode)
BK-MAG ADJ Main scanning direction image magnification ratio
adjustment
SPF ADJ Image loss off-center sub scanning direction image
magnification ratio adjustment (DSPF mode)
SETUP/PRINT
ADJ
Print lead edge adjustment, image off-center (each
paper feed tray, duplex mode) adjustment
RESULT Adjustment result display
DATA Display of data used when an adjustment is executed
SIMULATION NO.50-28
TEST
AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT : SERVICE
OC ADJ BK-MAG ADJ
SPF ADJ SETUP/PRINT ADJ
RESULT DATA
1/1
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-28
TEST
EXECUTE
1/1
MFT CS1
CS4
CS2 CS3
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-28
TEST
AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENTSERVICE
CLOSE
EXECUTE
PLEASE WAIT
NOW EXECUTING
REPRINT
SIMULATION NO.50-28
TEST
CLOSE
BK-MAG )
RETRY RESCAN REPRINT OK DATA
SIMULATION NO.50-28
TEST
OC ADJ BK-MAG ADJ
RESULT DATA
1/1
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-28
TEST
LEAD OFFSET
ALL
1/1
CLOSE
(NOTE)
By pressing [LEAD] or [OFFSET] key, the following items can
be executed individually.
* [LEAD]: Print image lead edge image position adjustment
* [OFFSET]: Print image off-center adjustment
When [ALL] is selected, both of the above two items are
executed simultaneously.
4) Select a paper feed tray to be adjusted.
tion)
guide.
The following items are automatically adjusted.
* Print image lead edge image position adjustment
* Print image off-center adjustment
8) Press [OK] key.
Perform procedures 4) to 7) for each paper feed tray.

29-C Copy lead edge image reference position
adjustment, image off-center, sub scanning
direction image magnification ratio
2) Select [OC ADJ] with the touch panel key.
3) Select the paper feed tray with paper in it with the touch panel
key. (Any paper size will do.)
tion)
guide.
The following items are automatically adjusted.
* Copy lead edge image reference position adjustment, image
off-center, sub scanning direction image magnification ratio
7) Press [OK] key.
SIMULATION NO.50-28
TEST
EXECUTE
1/1
MFT CS CS2 ADU
CLOSE
CS3 CS4 LCC
SIMULATION NO.50-28
TEST
OC ADJ BK-MAG ADJ
RESULT DATA
1/1
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-28
TEST
EXECUTE
1/1
MFT CS1
CS4
CS2 CS3
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-28
TEST
AUTO IMAGEPOSITION ADJUSTMENT: SERVICE
CLOSE
EXECUTE
PLEASE SET THE PRINTER PATTERN PAPER ON THE OC
THEN PRESS [EXECUTE] TO START
REPRINT
SIMULATION NO.50-28
TEST
AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT` SERVICE
CLOSE
OC : LEAD: ** (**) OFFSET: **(**) SUB**: (**)
RESCAN REPRINT
OK
RETRY DATA

29-D DSPF mode auto void adjustment (Service
installation adjustment)
This adjustment is used to adjust the DSPF (front/back) document
lead edge, off-center, sub operation magnification ratio.
1) Enter the simulation mode 50-28 to select [SPF ADJ].
2) Select an adjustment item (front, back, both).
3) The display shows the tray select screen for printing the SPF
adjustment pattern. Select a tray for SPF adjustment printing.
4) Self-print of the SPF adjustment pattern is performed.
5) After completion of printing, the SPF adjustment start screen is
displayed.
6) Load the SPF adjustment pattern on the DSPF.
7) Press [EXECUTE] key, and scanning of the SPF adjustment
pattern selected in step 2) is started.
8) When [ALL] is selected, load the SPF adjustment pattern on
the DSPF again, and perform the adjustment of the back sur-
face in the similar procedures.
9) The adjustment result screen is displayed.
The value of this time is displayed, and the value of the last
time is displayed in the parenthesis ( ).
<List of adjustment items>
Item Content
SIDE1 SPF adjustment front surface
SIDE2 SPF adjustment back surface
ALL SPF adjustment front/back surface
SIMULATION NO.50-28
TEST
OC ADJ BK-MAG ADJ
RESULT DATA
1/1
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-28
TEST
SIDE1 SIDE2
ALL
1/1
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-28
TEST
EXECUTE
1/1
MFT CS1 CS2
CLOSE
CS3
CS4
SIMULATION NO.50-28
TEST
CLOSE
EXECUTE
NOW EXECUTING...
SIMULATION NO.50-28
TEST
CLOSE
EXECUTE
PLEASE SET THE PRINTER PATTERN PAPER ON THE SPF
THEN PRESS [EXECUTE] TO START
REPRINT
SIMULATION NO.50-28
TEST
CLOSE
EXECUTE
PLEASE WAIT
NOW EXECUTING
REPRINT
SIMULATION NO.50-28
TEST
CLOSE
SPF (SIDE1) LEAD** (**) OFFSET: ** (**) SUB: ** (**)
SPF (SIDE2) LEAD** (**) OFFSET: ** (**) SUB: ** (**)
RETRY RESCAN REPRINT OK DATA
* When [REPRINT] key is pressed, the display returns to the
cassette select screen to allow self-print of the SPF adjust-
ment pattern (front, back) again.
* When [RESCAN] key is pressed, the SPF adjustment pat-
tern (front, back) is scanned again.
* When [RETRY] key is pressed, the adjustment value is not
saved in EEPROM and RAM and shifted to the top menu
screen.
* When [DATA] key is pressed, the data used in execution of
the adjustment are displayed.
10) When [OK] key is pressed, the adjustment value is saved in
EEPROM and RAM and the display is shifted to the end
screen.

ADJ 30 Shading adjustment
1) Open the lower door, and insert the white reference sheet
DSPF (PSHEP5668FCZZ). Close the lower door.
* When inserting the white reference sheet DSPF, insert it
straight along the rear edge frame so that the rear edge of
the white reference sheet DSPF comes at the root of the
actuator as shown in the mark .
3) Select, [DSPF SHADING].
4) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and shading
is started.
* When the operation is executed, the document is trans-
ported by about 25mm, and shading data are obtained dur-
ing transport.
* During execution, "SHADING EXECUTING..." is displayed.
* When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during execution, the
operation is interrupted.
* When shading is completed normally, [EXECUTE] key
returns to the normal display and "COMPLETED" is dis-
played.
* When [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed during other
than printing, the display returns to the sub number entry
screen.
<Descriptions of keys>
<Result display>
SIMULATION NO.50-28
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION COMPLETE
PLEASE PUSH CA KEY
1/1
Display Content
OC
SHADING
OC analog correction level correction, and shading
correction data making (Document table mode)
DSPF
SHADING
DSPF analog correction level correction, and shading
correction data making (SPF mode)
Display Content
COMPLETE Normal completion
ERROR Abnormal completion
INCOMPLETE Incomplete, interruption
SIMULATION NO.63-02
TEST
SHADING EXECUTION
EXECUTE
CLOSE
SELECT OC SHADING/DSPF SHADING, AND PRESS EXECUTE
DSPF SHADING OC SHADING
MX-7000N SIMULATION 7 1
MX-7000N
Sv` Huuuu!

[7] SIMULATION
1. General
There are the following simulation functions for grasping the
machine operating conditions, troubleshooting, early detection of
trouble causes, speedy setting and adjustments, and improve-
ments in servicing.
1) Various adjustments
2) Setting of the specifications and functions
3) Canceling troubles
4) Operation check
5) Counters check, setting, clear
6) Machine operating conditions (operation hysteresis), data
check, clear
7) Various (adjustments, setting, operation, counters, etc.) data
transfer
The operating procedures and displays depend on the form of the
operation panel of the machine.
A. Basic operation
(1) Starting the simulation
* Entering the simulation mode
1) Copy mode key ON Program key ON Asterisk (*) key ON
CLEAR key ON Asterisk (*) key ON (Ready for input of a
main code of simulation)
2) Entering a main code with the 10-key START key ON
3) Entering a sub code with the 10-key START key ON
4) Select an item with the scroll key and the item key.
5) The machine enters the mode corresponding to the selected
item.
Press START key or EXECUTE key to start the simulation
operation.
To cancel the current simulation mode or to change the main
code and the sub code, press the user setup key.
* Canceling the simulation mode to return to the normal mode
1) Press CA key.
(Note for the simulation mode)
Do not turn OFF the power switch on the operation panel when
the machine is in the simulation mode.
If the power switch should be turned OFF in the simulation mode,
a malfunction may be resulted. In this case, turn OFF/ON the
main power source.
Before entering the simulation mode, check to insure that neither
print data nor FAX data are receiving.
YES
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
NO
NO
NO YES
NO
YES
YES
NO
NO
YES
YES
NO
Standby for entry of SIM
sub code
Enter SIM sub code with
the 10-key.
Press the START button.
The display is made according
to the selected mode and the item.
START (Copy mode)
Press the Program key.
Press the asterisk (*) key.
Press the clear key.
Press the Program key.
Standby for entry of
SIM code.
Enter the main code of
SIM with the 10-key.
The main code of SIM
is displayed.
Press the START button.
Is there a sub code ?
Select the mode and the
item with the scroll key
and the item key.
Operation check ?
Operating conditions
check ?
Data clear ?
Adjustments
or setting (counter data
change) ?
Do you
want to change the
content ?
Enter the new setting and
adjustment values.
Press the SYSTEM
SETTINGS key
Press the SYSTEM
SETTINGS key
Press the EXECUTE button
and OK button.
Operation is made according
to the selected mode and item.
and OK button.
and OK button.
The display is made according to
the selected some and the item.
and OK button.
Is it the same
simulation main
code?
Do you want
to perform another
simulation ?
Do you
want to end the
simulation ?
The changed content
is stored.
The simulation mode
is canceled.
Press the clear all key.
Operation is made according
to the selected mode and the item.
(Other modes)
The selected mode and
the item are cleared.
<Exclusion type>
You have to exit
simulation mode
before entering into
this mode for self
printing type.
In the power OFF/ON type
simulation, OFF/ON
message is
displayed by the
SYSTEM
SETTINGS key.
If there is no item.
2. List of simulation codes
Main Sub Function (Purpose) Purpose Section
1 1 Used to check the operations of the scanner (read) unit and its control
circuit.
Operation test/Check Optical (Image scanning)
2 Used to check the operation of sensor in the scanning (read) section and the
related circuit.
5 Used to check the operations of the scanner (read) unit and its control
circuit.
2 1 Used to check the operations of the automatic document feeder unit and the
control circuit.
Operation test/Check DSPF
2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the automatic
document feeder unit and the control circuits.
3 Used to check the operations of the loads in the automatic document feeder
unit and the control circuits.
3 2 Used to check the operation of sensor and detector in the finisher and the
control circuits.
Operation test/Check Finisher
3 Used to check the operation of the load in the finisher and the control circuit. Operation test/Check Finisher
10 Used to adjust the finisher. Adjustment Finisher
30 Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the inserter
and the control circuits.
Operation test/Check Inserter
31 Used to check the operations of the loads in the inserter and the control
circuit.
Operation test/Check Inserter
32 Used to set the adjustment value of the inserter paper width detection level. Setting (Adjustment) Inserter
4 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the large
capacity tray (LCC) and the control circuit.
Operation test/Check Large capacity tray (LCC)
3 Used to check the operations of the loads in the large capacity tray (LCC)
and the control circuit.
5 Used to check the operations of the clutch (LTRC) in the LCC and the
monitor.
5 1 Used to check the operation of the display, LCD in the operation panel, and
control circuit.
Operation test/Check Operation panel
2 Used to check the operation of the heater lamp and the control circuit. Operation test/Check Fusing
3 Used to check the operation of the copy lamp and the control circuit. Operation test/Check Optical (Image scanning)
4 Used to check the operation of the discharge lamp and the control circuit. Operation test/Check Process
6 1 Used to check the operations of the loads (clutches and solenoids) in the
paper transport system and the control circuits.
Operation test/Check Paper transport/paper exit
2 Used to check the operations of each fan motor and its control circuit. Operation test/Check Other
3 Used to check the operations of the primary transfer unit and the control
circuit.
Operation test/Check Process (Transfer)
4 Used to check the operations of the PTC and the MC cleaner. Operation test/Check
7 1 Used to set the operating conditions of aging. Setting Other
6 Used to set the intermittent aging cycle. Setting
8 Used to display the warm-up time. Operation display
9 Used to set a color in the color mode printing. (Used to check the print in the
color mode.)
Operation test/Check
8 1 Used to check and adjust the operations of the developing voltage in each
print mode and the control circuit.
* When the middle speed is adjusted, the high speed and the low speed are
also adjusted simultaneously.
Operation test/Check/Adjustment Process (Developing)
2 Used to check and adjust the operations of the main charger grid voltage in
each printer mode and the control circuit.
* When the middle speed is adjusted, the high speed and the low speed are
also adjusted simultaneously.
Operation test/Check/Adjustment Process (Charging)
6 Used to check and adjust the operation of the transfer voltage and the
control circuit.
Operation test/Check/Adjustment Process (Transfer)
9 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the duplex
section and its control circuit.
Operation test/Check Duplex
3 Used to check the operations of the loads in the duplex section and the
control circuits.
Operation test/Check Duplex
10 1 Used to check the operation of the load (motor) in the process section and
the related circuits.
* This check must be performed with no toner bottle installed.
Operation test/Check Process (Developing)
2 Used to check the operations of the toner remaining quantity sensor and the
control circuit.
Operation test/Check Process (Developing)
13 - Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble. Clear/cancel (Trouble etc.)
14 - Used to cancel excluding the self-diag "U1/U2/LCC/PF" troubles. Clear/cancel (Trouble etc.)
15 - Used to cancel the self-diag "U6-09, F3-12, F3-22 (large capacity paper feed
tray, paper feed tray 1, 2)" trouble.
Clear/cancel (Trouble etc.) LCC
16 - Used to cancel the self-diag "U2" trouble. Clear/cancel (Trouble etc.) MFPcnt PWB /
PCU PWB / SCU PWB
17 - Used to cancel the self-diag "PF" trouble. Clear/cancel (Trouble etc.)
21 1 Used to set the maintenance cycle. Setting
22 1 Used to check the print count value in each section and operation mode.
(Used to check the maintenance timing.)
Adjustment/Setting/Operation data
output/Check
2 Used to check the total numbers of misfeed and troubles. (When the number
of total jam is considerably great, it is judged as necessary for repair.)
check
3 Used to check the misfeed positions and the number of misfeed at each
position.
* The trouble position can be troubleshooted according to this data.
check
4 Used to check the trouble (self diag) history. Adjustment/Setting/Operation data
check
5 Used to check the ROM version of each unit (section). Other
6 Used to output the list of the setting and adjustment data (simulations, FAX
soft switch, counters).
check
8 Used to check the counter value of the finisher, the DSPF, and the scan
(reading).
check
9 Used to check the number of use (print quantity) of each paper feed section. Adjustment/Setting/Operation data
check
Paper feed, ADU, LCC
10 Used to check the system configuration (option, internal hardware). Adjustment/Setting/Operation data
check
11 Used to check the use frequency of FAX (send/receive). (Only when FAX is
installed.)
check
FAX
12 Used to check the misfeed position in the DSPF and the number of misfeed
of each position. (If the number of misfeed is considerably great, it may lead
to the decision for repair.)
check
DSPF
13 Used to check the running time of the process section. (OPC drum, DV unit,
toner bottle).
check
19 Used to check each counter value related the network scanner. Adjustment/Setting/Operation data
check
90 Used to output the list of various set data. Adjustment/Setting/Operation data
check
23 2 Used to check the trouble history of paper jam and misfeed. (If the number of
misfeed and troubles is considerably great, it may be judged as necessary to
repair.)
check
80 Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the paper feed
and transport section.
Operation test/Check Paper feed, transport
24 1 Used to clear the jam counter, and the trouble counter. (The counters are
cleared after completion of maintenance.)
Data clear
2 Used to clear the number of use (the number of prints) of each paper feed
section.
Data clear
3 Used to clear the counter value of the finisher, the DSPF, and scan
(reading).
Data clear
4 The maintenance counter and the print counters of the transfer unit and the
fusing unit are cleared. (After completion of maintenance, the counters are
cleared.)
Data clear
5 Used to clear the developer counter. (After replacement of developer, this
counter is cleared.)
Data clear
6 Used to clear the copy counter value. Data clear
7 Used to clear the OPC drum counter value. (After replacement of the OPC
drum, this counter is cleared.)
Data clear
9 Used to clear the printer mode print counter and the self print mode print
counter.
Data clear
10 Used to clear the FAX counter value. (Only when FAX is installed.) Data clear
15 Used to clear various counters in the scan mode related to image send. Data clear
30 Used to initialize the administrator password. Data clear
31 Used to initialize the service mode password. Data clear
25 1 Used to check the operations of the developing section. Operation test/Check Process (Developing
section)
2 Used to make the initial setting of the toner density when replacing
developer. (Automatic adjustment)
Setting Process (Photoconductor/
Developing/Transfer/
Cleaning)
26 2 Used to set the paper size of the large capacity tray (LCC). (When the paper
size is changed, this simulation must be executed to change the paper size
in software.)
Setting Paper feed
3 Used to set the auditor setting mode. (Setting must be made according to
the auditor use conditions.)
Setting Auditor
5 Used to set the count mode of the total counter and the maintenance
counter.
Setting
6 Used to set the specifications according to the destination. (Paper, fixed
magnification ratios, etc.)
Setting
10 Used to set the trial mode of the network scanner. Setting
18 Used to set Disable/Enable of the toner save mode operation. (For the
Japan and the UK versions.)
Setting
30 Used to set the operation mode corresponding to the CE mark (Europe
safety standards). (For slow start to drive the fusing heater lamp)
Setting
26 35 Used to set the display mode of SIM 22-4 trouble history when a same
trouble occurred repeatedly. There are two display modes: display as one
trouble and display as several series of troubles.
Setting
38 Used to set whether printing is continued or stopped when the developer life
is expired or when the fusing wed ends.
Setting
41 Used to set Enable/Disable of the magnification ratio automatic select
function (AMS) in the center binding mode.
Setting
49 Used to set the copy speed mode of postcards. Setting
50 Used to set Enable/Disable of the black and white highlight function and the
2-color/Single display function.
Setting
52 Used to set whether non-print paper (insertion paper, cover, etc.) is counted
or not.
Setting
53 Used to set YES/NO of the auto color calibration. Setting
54 Used to set the printer calibration YES/NO. Setting
65 Used to set the finisher alarm mode. Setting
67 Used to set the summer time timing and the time zone. Setting
69 Used to set the display of spare toner preparation and near end when the
toner quantity reaches 25%.
Setting
27 1 Used to set non-detection of communication error (U7-00) with RIC Setting
2 Used to set the FSS function (sender registration number, host server
telephone number).
Setting
4 Used to set the FSS function (initial, call, toner order automatic send). Setting
5 Used to set the machine tag No. (This function allows the host computer to
check the machine tag No.)
Setting Communication (RIC/
MODEM)
6 Used to set the FSS function (manual service call). Setting
7 Used to set the FSS function (enable, alert call). Setting
9 Paper transport time between sensors / Gain adjustment retry number
setting
Setting
10 Used to clear the history information of trouble prediction Data clear
11 Used to check the serial communication retry number history and the
scanner gain adjustment retry number history.
Other
12 Used to check the error history of high density, half tone process control,
and automatic registration adjustment.
Other
13 Used to check the history of paper transport time between sensors. Other
14 Used to set the FSS function connection mode. (Only "Disable Enable" is
allowed.)
Setting
30 1 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in other than
the paper feed section and the control circuits.
2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the paper
feed section and the control circuits.
33 1 Used to check the operations of the card reader sensor and the control
circuit.
40 2 Manual paper feed tray paper width detector detection level adjustment Adjustment/Setting Paper feed
7 Used to adjust the manual paper feed tray width detection level. Adjustment/Setting Paper feed
12 Used to perform the tray 3 paper width detection level adjustment. Adjustment/Setting Paper feed
41 1 Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and the control
circuit.
2 Used to adjust the document size sensor detection level. Adjustment
3 Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and the control
circuit.
43 1 Used to set the fusing temperature in each mode. Setting
4 Used to perform the fusing temperature setup 2 in each operation mode.
(Continued from SIM 43-1.)
Setting
20 Used to set the environmental correction under low temperature and low
humidity (L/L) for the fusing temperature setting in each mode (SIM 43-1).
Adjustment/Setting
21 Used to set the environment correction under high temperature and high
humidity (H/H) for the fusing temperature setting (SIM 43-1) in each paper
mode.
Adjustment/Setting
22 Used to set the environment correction under low temperature and low
humidity (L/L) for the fusing temperature setting (SIM 43-4) in each paper
mode.
Adjustment/Setting
23 Used to set the environment correction under high temperature and high
humidity (H/H) for the fusing temperature setting (SIM 43-4) in each paper
mode.
Adjustment/Setting
24 Used to set the correction of the temperature adjustment value of SIM 43-1
and 43-4.
Adjustment/Setting
31 Used to check the operation of the fusing web cleaning motor and the
control circuit.
32 Used to set the compulsory operation of fusing web cleaning at job end. Adjustment/Setting
44 1 Used to set each correction operation function in the image forming
(process) section.
Setting Process (Photoconductor/
Cleaning)
2 Image density sensor gain adjustment Adjustment/Setting Process
4 Used to set the target density level in the image density correction. (Do not use this function unless
specially required.)
6 Used to execute the high density process correction compulsorily. Adjustment
9 Used to check data of correction results in the image forming section. (Do not use in the market.) Process (Photoconductor/
Cleaning)
12 Used to check the sampling toner image patch density data in the image
density correction.
(Do not use in the market.) Image process
(Photoconductor/
Developing)
13 Used to adjust the color image sensor. Adjustment/Setting
14 Used to check the output level of the temperature/humidity sensor. Adjustment, setting, operation data
check
Image process
(Photoconductor/
Developing)
16 Used to check the toner density control data. (Do not use in the market.)
21 Used to set the half tone process control. Adjustment/Setting Process
22 Used to check the toner patch image density level of each color in half tone
image forming section correction (process correction).
(Do not use in the market.)
24 Used to display the process control result. (Do not use in the market.)
25 Used to set the initial conditions of the process control half tone correction. (Do not use in the market.)
26 Used to execute the half tone process control compulsorily. Adjustment/Setting Process
27 Used to clear the half tone process correction value. Data clear
28 Used to set the process control execution timing. Adjustment/Setting
29 Used to select the half tone correction during a job. (Do not use in the market.)
31 Used to adjust the phase of the photoconductor. Adjustment/Setting Process
37 Used to perform the image density correction setting. Adjustment/Setting
43 Used to check installation of the developing unit and the current state. (Do not use in the market.)
52 Used to check the image density level of each color toner patch in 1-pixel
half tone correction.
(This simulation should not be
executed unless specially required.)
54 The 1-pixel half tone correction result is displayed. (This simulation should not be
56 The 1-pixel half tone correction is executed compulsorily. (This simulation should not be
57 The 1-pixel half tone correction value is cleared. (This simulation should not be
46 1 Used to adjust the copy density in the copy mode. Adjustment (Color copy mode)
2 Used to adjust the copy density in the copy mode. Adjustment (Monochrome copy
mode)
4 Used to adjust the density in the scanner mode. Adjustment (Color scanner mode)
5 Used to adjust the density in the scanner mode. Adjustment (Monochrome scanner
mode)
8 Used to adjust the scanner color balance RGB. Adjustment (Color scanner mode)
9 Used to adjust the copy density in the copy mode. Adjustment (DSPF mode)
10 Used to adjust the engine color balance manually. Adjustment
16 Used to perform the engine color balance manual adjustment (monochrome,
all modes).
Adjustment
19 Used to set the monochrome auto exposure mode. Setting
21 Used to perform the engine color balance manual adjustment (color, all
modes).
Adjustment
23 Used to perform the half tone highest density correction. Adjustment/Setting
24 Used to perform the engine half tone auto density adjustment. Adjustment
25 Used to perform the color balance adjustment in the single color mode. Adjustment
26 Used to perform the default setting of color balance in the single color mode. Adjustment
27 Used to perform the engine/gamma calculation formula coefficient setting. Adjustment/Setting
28 Used to check Auto exposure/Document auto recognition/Line number
recognition (color mode).
(This simulation should not be used
unless specially required.)
33 Used to perform the color auto mode adjustment. Adjustment/Setting
36 2-color (red/black) copy adjustment Adjustment/Setting
37 Used to perform the black/white image generation adjustment. Adjustment/Setting
39 Used to perform the image send sharpness adjustment. Adjustment/Setting
40 Used to perform the collective adjustment of all the FAX exposure modes. Adjustment/Setting
41 Used to perform the FAX exposure adjustment (normal character). Adjustment/Setting
42 Used to perform the FAX exposure adjustment (small character). Adjustment/Setting
43 Used to perform the FAX exposure adjustment (fine). Adjustment/Setting
44 Used to perform the FAX exposure adjustment. (Super fine) Adjustment/Setting
45 Used to perform the FAX exposure adjustment (600dpi). Adjustment/Setting
47 Used to perform the JPEG compression rate setting in copying and
scanning.
Adjustment/Setting
48 1 Used to perform the copy magnification ratio (main scanning, sub scanning
direction) adjustment.
Adjustment
5 Used to perform the copy magnification ratio adjustment (sub scanning
direction). When the sub scanning direction image magnification ratio is
adjusted with SIM 48-1 and a satisfactory copy image is not obtained when
copying by specifying a different copy magnification ratio, perform this
adjustment.
Adjustment Scanner section
6 Used to perform the rotation speed adjustment of each motor. Adjustment
49 1 Used to perform the firmware update.
3 Used to update the operation manual in the HDD. Adjustment
50 1 Used to adjust the copy image position on print paper and the void area
(image loss) in the copy mode. (The similar adjustment can be performed
also with SIM 50-5 and SIM 50-2 (simple method). (Document table mode))
2 Used to adjust the copy image position on print paper and the void area
(image loss) in the copy mode. (The similar adjustment can be performed
also with SIM 50-1. This simulation. However, is simpler.)
Adjustment
5 Printer print lead edge adjustment Adjustment
6 Used to adjust the DSPF document lead edge, and to adjust the copy image
position and the void area (image loss) on the print paper in the copy mode.
(The similar adjustment can be performed with SIM 50-7 (simple method).)
(DSPF mode)
Adjustment DSPF
7 Used to adjust the DSPF document lead edge, and to adjust the copy image
position and the void area (image loss) on the print paper in the copy mode.
(The similar adjustment can be performed with SIM 50-7 (simple method).)
(DSPF mode)
Adjustment DSPF
10 Used to adjust the print image off-center position. (Adjustment is made
separately for each paper feed section.)
Adjustment
12 Used to perform the scan image off-center position adjustment. (The
adjustment is made separately for each scan mode.)
Adjustment
20 Used to perform the main scanning direction manual registration adjustment. Adjustment
21 Used to perform the sub scanning direction manual registration adjustment. Adjustment
22 Used to perform the main/sub scanning auto registration adjustment. Adjustment
24 Used to display the auto registration adjustment result (SIM 50-22). (Do not use in the market.)
27 Used to perform the image loss adjustment of the scanned image in the
FAX or scanner mode
Adjustment
28 Used to perform the OC adjustment, the BK main scanning direction
magnification ration correction, the DSPF adjustment, and the print position
adjustment.
Adjustment
51 1 Used to perform the transfer voltage and the separation bias voltage ON/OF
timing adjustment.
Adjustment/Setting
2 Used to perform the paper contact pressure adjustment for each section
resist roller (main unit, each paper feed, duplex paper fed, DSPF paper
feed). (When there is a considerable fluctuation in the print image position
on print paper or a paper jam occurs, this adjustment is required.)
Adjustment/Setting
53 6 Used to perform the DSPF size width detection level adjustment. Adjustment
7 Used to perform the DSPF size width adjustment value setting. Adjustment/Setting
8 Used to perform the DSPF document scanning start position adjustment. Adjustment
55 1 Used to perform the engine control operation specification setting. (Do not use this function unless
2 Used to perform the scanner control operation specification setting. (Do not use this function unless
3 Used to perform the controller operation specification setting. (Do not use this function unless
56 1 Data transfer (Used in repairing the PWB.) Backup
2 Used to backup the data (user authentication data, address book, etc.) in the
EEPROM, the SRAM, and the HDD of the main unit into the USB memory
and to transfer the data.
Backup
60 1 Used to check the operations (read/write) of the MFP control (SDRAM). Operation test/Check
2 Used to set the onboard SDRAM. (Do not use in the market.)
61 1 Used to check the polygon motor rotation and the BD signal detection. Operation test/Check LSU
2 Used to set the laser power. (for printer FIERY) Adjustment/Setting
3 Used to set the laser power. Adjustment/Setting
4 Used to perform self printing of the LSU position adjustment pattern. Adjustment
62 1 Used to format the hard disk. (Excluding the operation manual area.)
2 Used to check read/write of the hard disk (partial). Operation test/Check
3 Used to check read/write of the hard disk (all areas). Operation test/Check
6 Used to perform the self diagnostics of the hard disk. Operation test/Check
7 Used to print the hard disk self diagnostics error log. Operation test/Check
8 Used to format the hard disk. (Excluding the system area and the operation
manual area)
10 Used to delete the job log data. Data clear
11 Used to delete the document filing data. Data clear
12 Used to set Enable/Disable of auto format in a hard disk trouble. Setting
13 Used to format the hard disk. (only the operation manual area)
63 1 Used to check the shading correction result. Adjustment/Setting/Operation data
check
Scanner
2 Used to perform shading. Adjustment
3 Used to perform scanner color balance and color coefficient auto
adjustment.
Adjustment/Setting Scanner
5 Used to perform the scanner color balance and the color coefficient auto
adjustment.
Adjustment/Setting
6 Used to perform the engine color balance auto adjustment pattern setting. Adjustment/Setting
7 Used to perform the auto density setting of the engine auto adjustment
scanner target value. (Servicing)
Adjustment/Setting
8 Used to perform the initial value reset of the engine auto adjustment scanner
target value. (Servicing)
Adjustment/Setting
11 Used to set the reference scanner target value for the engine auto density
adjustment.
Adjustment/Setting
64 1 Used to perform the self print. (Color mode) Operation test/Check
2 Used to print the density adjustment pattern. Operation test/Check
3 Used to perform self print (monochrome mode). Operation test/Check
4 Used to perform the printer self print.
* When FIERY is supported, SIM is not displayed.
5 Used to perform the printer self print (PCL).
6 Used to perform the printer self print (PS).
65 1 Used to perform the touch panel (LCD display) detection position
adjustment.
Adjustment Operation panel section
2 Used to check the touch panel (LCD display) detection position adjustment
result.
Operation check/test
5 Used to check the operation panel key input. Operation check/test
66 1 Used to change and check the soft switch setting. Setting
2 Used to clear the soft switch and set the default value. Data clear
3 Used to check the operation (read/write) of the FAX PWB memory. Operation test, check FAX
4 Used to check the output operation (MODEM operation) of data signal in
each data output mode of FAX. Send level: MAX
Operation check, test FAX
5 Used to check the output operation (MODEM operation) of data signal in
each data output mode of FAX. Send level: Soft switch setting
Operation test, check FAX
6 Used to print the confidential pass code. User data output, check FAX
7 Used to output the image memory data (memory send and receive).
* The confidential receive contents are also outputted.
User data output, check FAX
8 Used to check the output operation (audio output IC operation check) of the
various audio signals of FAX. Send level: MAX
9 Used to check the output operation (audio output IC operation) of various
audio signals of FAX. Send level: Soft switch setting
10 Used to clear all the data (memory receive and send) of the image memory.
* The confidential receive data are cleared simultaneously.
Data clear FAX
11 Used to check the output operation (MODEM operation) in the FAX G3
mode 300bps. Send level: MAX
12 Used to check the output operation (MODEM operation) in the FAX G3
mode 300bps. Send level: Set with the soft switch.
13 Used to set the number for the FAX dial signal output test. (In the dial signal
output test with SIM66-14 - 16, the dial number set with this simulation is
outputted.)
Setting FAX
14 Used to set the make time in the FAX pulse dial mode (10PPS) and to
execute the dial signal output test. (The signal of the dial number set with
SIM66-13 is outputted.)
Setting/Operation test, check FAX
15 Used to set the make time in the FAX pulse dial mode (20PPS) and to
execute the dial signal output test. (The signal of the dial number set with
SIM 66-13 is outputted.)
16 Used to perform the dial signal (DTMF) output test in the FAX tone dial
mode. (The signal of the dial number set with SIM 66-13 is outputted.)
The send level can be set to an optional level.
mode. Send level: MAX
mode. Send level: Set with the soft switch.
19 Used to backup the address book data stored in the HDD. (Backup to the
Flash ROM)
Backup
20 Used to transfer the address book data stored in the Flash ROM. (Transfer
to HDD)
Data transfer
21 Used to print information abut FAX (various registrations, communication
management, file management, system errors, protocols).
Adjustment, setting, operation data
check
FAX
24 Used to clear the FAST memory data. Clear FAX
25 Used to register a FAX number for MODEM dial-in. Setting FAX
26 Used to register an external telephone number for MODEM dial-in. Setting FAX
66 29 Used to clear the data related to the address book (one-touch registration,
FTP/ Desktop extension, group extension, program registration, interface
memory box, meta data, Inbound Routing, Document Admin table).
Data clear
30 Used to check a change in the TEL/LIU status. Operation test, check FAX
31 Used to set the TEL/LIU output port. Operation check FAX
32 Used to check the received data (fixed data) from the line. Operation test, check FAX
33 Used to detect the line signals (BUSY TONE/CNG/CED/FNET/DTMF). Operation test, check FAX
34 Used to measure the communication time of the send test image data. Operation test, check FAX
36 Used to perform the interface check between the MFP controller and the
MDMC. (Data line or command line check)
39 Used to set the destination. Setting FAX
42 Used to rewrite the power control program again to the FAX BOX. Setting FAX
43 Used to write the adjustment value of the power control program to the FAX
BOX.
Setting FAX
67 17 Used to set the printer controller memory clear and default value. Setting
24 Used to perform the printer setting of auto color calibration.
Adjustment/Setting
25 Used to perform the manual correction setting of the printer engine color
balance.
Adjustment/Setting
26 Used to perform the reference scanner target value setting of the printer
engine auto density adjustment.
Adjustment/Setting
27 Used to perform the scanner target value registration of the printer engine
auto density adjustment.
Adjustment/Setting
28 Used to perform the scanner target value registration of the printer engine
auto adjustment.
Adjustment/Setting
30 Used to perform delivery setting of the main unit calibration data and the
process correction data to a client PC. (for GDI printer)
Adjustment/Setting
31 Used to clear the printer calibration value.
Data clear
32 Used to perform the screen/color select function setting for each object.
Adjustment/Setting
33 Used to perform the gamma correction (for PCL) between printer screens.
Adjustment/Setting
33 Used to perform gamma correction (for GDI) between printer screens.
Adjustment/Setting
3. Details of simulation

1

1-1
Purpose Operation test/Check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the scan-
ner (read) unit and its control circuit.
Section Optical (Image scanning)
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the operation mode and the magnification ratio with the
touch panel key.
The scanner performs scanning at the speed corresponding to
the operation mode.

1-2
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of sensor in
the scanning (read) section and the related
circuit.
Operation/Procedure
The operating status of the sensor is displayed.
* When "MHPS" is highlighted, the scanner unit is in the home
position.

1-5
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the scan-
ner (read) unit and its control circuit.
Operation/Procedure
touch panel key.
The scanner performs scanning at the speed corresponding to
the operation mode.

2

2-1
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the auto-
matic document feeder unit and the control
circuit.
Section DSPF
Operation/Procedure
touch panel key.
The DSPF repeats paper feed, transport, and paper exit oper-
ations according to the operation mode.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
Key
display
Scan
magnification ratio
Selectable magnification
ratios
Default
value
50 50% Color: 50%, 100%, 200%
Black and white (High speed):
100%, 200%
Black and white (Low speed):
50%, 100%, 200%
100%
100 100%
200 200%
CLOSE
BLACK(SLOW)
SIMULATION NO.01-01
SCANNER CHECK
TEST
EXECUTE
150 200
ZOOM
100
BLACK(FAST) COLOR
25
50
100
300
400
SCANNER SENSOR CHECK
TEST
1/1
MHPS
Key
display
Scan
magnification ratio
ratios
Default
value
50 50% Color: 50%, 100%, 200%
100%, 200%
50%, 100%, 200%
100%
100 100%
200 200%
Key
display
Scan
magnification ratio
ratios
Default
value
50 50% Color: 50%, 100%, 200%
100%, 200%
50%, 100%, 200%
100%
100 100%
200 200%
CLOSE
BLACK(SLOW)
SIMULATION NO.01-05
SCANNER CHECK
TEST
EXECUTE
150 200
ZOOM
100
%
BLACK(FAST) COLOR
25
50
100
300
400
CLOSE
BLACK(SLOW)
SIMULATION NO.02-01
DSPF AGING
TEST
EXECUTE
150 200
ZOOM
100
%
BLACK(FAST) COLOR
25
50
100
300
400

2-2
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
sors and detectors in the automatic docu-
ment feeder unit and the control circuits.
Section DSPF
Operation/Procedure
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
played.
Sensors and detectors which are turned on are highlighted.
NOTE: SWD_LEN and SWD_AD are not ON/OFF display.

2-3
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the loads
in the automatic document feeder unit and
the control circuits.
Section DSPF
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target of the operation check with the touch panel.
The selected load is operated.
When [EXECUTE] is pressed, the operation is stopped.

3

3-2
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of sensor and
detector in the finisher and the control cir-
cuits.
Section Finisher
Operation/Procedure
played.
<4K finisher>
SSET DSPF installation detection
SOCD DSPF open/close detection
SCOV DSPF cover SW
SLCOV DSPF lower door open/close detection
SPED1 DSPF document empty detection
SPED2 DSPF document detection
SPPD1 DSPF document pass detection 1
SPOD DSPF paper exit detection
SPRDMD DSPF random feed paper size detection
SPLS1 DSPF document length detection short
SPLS2 DSPF document length detection long
STLD DSPF document tray lower limit detection
STUD DSPF document tray upper limit detection
STMPU DSPF stamp unit installation detection
SWD_LEN DSPF guide plate position
SWD_AD DSPF document detection volume output
SPUM DSPF paper feed motor
SPFM DSPF transport motor
SPOM DSPF paper exit motor
SLUM DSPF lift motor
SPFFAN DSPF fan motor
SPFC DSPF paper feed clutch
SRRC DSPF resist roller clutch
SRRBC DSPF resist roller break clutch
DSPF SENSOR CHECK SWD_LEN : **** SWD_AD : ***
TEST
1/1
SSET SOCD SCOV SLCOV
SPED1 SPED2 SPPD1 SPPD2
SPPD3 SPPD4 SPPD5 SPOD
SPRDMD SPLS1 SPLS2 STLD
STUD STMPU
STRRC DSPF No. 1 resist roller clutch
STRRBC DSPF No. 1 resist roller break clutch
STRC DSPF transport clutch
STMPS Stamp solenoid (only when installed)
FJPID Interface transport unit entry port detection
FJPOD Interface transport unit exit port detection
FJPDD Interface transport unit cover detection
FED Entry port paper detection
FAED1 Tray 1 area detection 1
FFJHPD Alignment plate HP detection front
FRJHPD Alignment plate HP detection rear
FBED1 Tray 1 paper detection
FBED2 Tray 2 paper detection
FCCD Tray approaching detection
FSLD1 Tray 1 paper surface detection
FPDD1 Paper exit detection
FSLD2 Tray 2 paper surface detection
FASHPD Rear edge assist HP detection
FSWHPD Oscillation guide HP detection
FSWOPD Oscillation guide open detection
FSTPD Staple tray paper detection
FSHPD Staple drive HP detection
FSTHPD Staple shift HP detection
FSD Staple empty detection
FSTD Needle lead edge position detection
FFANLK Fan motor lock detection
FSJOGD Stapler alignment interference detection
FSAD Staple safety SW
FSSUC Saddle staple unit detection
FSHTD Shutter open detection
FCD Upper door open detection
FFDD Front cover open detection
F24V 24V output interruption detection
FPSW1 PUSHSW1 detection
SIMULATION NO.02-03
TEST
DSPF OUTPUT CHECK
1/1
CLOSE
SPUM SPFM
SPOM SLUM
SPFFAN SPFC
SRRC SRRBC
STRRC STRRBC
STRC
EXECUTE
STMPS
<4K finisher DIPSW>
<4K saddle finisher>
<4K saddle finisher DIPSW>
<4K finisher/4K saddle finisher punch unit>

3-3
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the load in
the finisher and the control circuit.
Section Finisher
Operation/Procedure
<4K finisher>
<4K saddle finisher saddle section>
<External punch unit>
FDSW1 DIPSW1 detection
FSPIND Saddle entry port paper detection
FSPDD Saddle paper exit detection
FSDTPD Saddle tray paper detection
FS1PD Saddle paper detection 1
FSLGE Paper pushing plate motor lock detection
FSLGHPD Paper pushing plate HP detection
FSLGTD Paper pushing plate lead edge position detection
FSFOE Paper folding motor lock detection
FSFOHPD Paper folding HP detection
FSPPHPD Paper positioning plate HP detection
FSPPPD Paper positioning plate paper detection
FSAHPD Alignment plate HP detection
FSSIND Stitcher storage detection
FSVPPD Vertical path paper detection
FSCRPD Semi-circular roller phase detection
FSGHPD Guide HP detection
FSSHP1 Stitch operation HP detection 1
FSSHP2 Stitch operation HP detection 2
FSSD1 Saddle needle presence detection 1
FSSD2 Saddle needle presence detection 2
FSAHPC Alignment HP sensor connector connection detection
FSFOHPC Paper folding HP sensor connector connection detection
FSEJDC Paper exit door sensor connector connection detection
FSFDC Front door open/close sensor connector connection
detection
FSPPHPC Paper positioning plate HP sensor connector connection
detection
FSLGTC Paper pushing plate lead edge sensor connector
connection detection
FSINDD Inlet port cover open detection
FSEJDD Paper exit cover open detection
FSINDSW Saddle inlet port door detection
FSFDSW Front door open detection SW
FSEJDSW Paper exit door open detection SW
FSPSW1 S-PUSHSW detection
FSBHPC Paper pushing plate HP sensor connector connection
detection
FSDSW1 S-DIPSW1 detection
FPE Punch motor lock detection
FPUC Punch unit connection detection
FPHPD Punch HP detection
FPSHPD Punch horizontal resist HP detection
FPFDD Punch front door open detection
FPDD Punch dust detection
FPUDSW Punch upper cover open/close detection SW
FINRPS Entry port reverse path solenoid
FJPM Interface transport motor
FJFM Interface transport fan motor
FFM Entry port transport motor
FAM Bundle paper exit motor
FFJM Alignment motor front
FRJM Alignment motor rear
FSM Staple shift motor
FTLM1 Tray 1 lift motor
FTLM2 Tray 2 lift motor
FFSM Staple motor
FSWM Oscillation motor
FASM Rear edge assist motor
FINRRS Inlet port roller separation solenoid
FBRRS Buffer roller separation solenoid
FFDRRS Paper exit roller separation solenoid
FBES Buffer rear edge holding solenoid
FSHC Shutter open/close clutch
FAORC Bundle exit lower roller clutch
FSIFM Saddle entry port transport motor
FSFM Saddle transport motor
FSFOM Paper folding motor
FSGM Guide motor
FSJM Saddle alignment motor
FSFSTM Stitch motor front
FSRSTM Stitch motor motor rear
FSLGM Paper holding motor
FSFS Saddle flapper solenoid
FS1DFS Paper deflection plate 1 solenoid
FS2DFS Paper deflection plate 2 solenoid
FSFCS Transport plate contact solenoid
FPPM Paper positioning motor
FPNM Punch motor
FPSM Punch horizontal resist motor
FIN SENSOR CHECK
TEST
1/1
FJPID FJPOD FJPDD FED
FAED1 FAED2 FAED3 FFJHPD
FSTHPD FSD FSTD FFANLK
FRJHPD FBED1 FBED2 FCCD
FSLD1 FPDD1 FSLD2 FASHPD
FSWHPD FSWOPD FSTPD FSHPD
FSJOGD FSAD FSSUC FSHTD
FCD FFDD F24V FPSW1
FPSW2 FPSW3 FAED21 FAED22
FAED23

3-10
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the finisher.
Section Finisher
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item corresponding to the adjustment content with
[|] and [+] keys on the touch panel.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
<4K finisher>
<4K saddle finisher>

3-30
sors and detectors in the inserter and the
control circuits.
Section Inserter
Operation/Procedure
played.

3-31
in the inserter and the control circuit.
Section Inserter
Operation/Procedure
Item Display Item
Set
range
Default
value
A FRONT
ADJUST
Alignment position
adjustment (front)
0 - 20 10
B STAPLE
REAR
Staple binding position
adjustment (one position
at the rear)
94 - 106 100
C STAPLE
FRONT
in front)
94 - 106 100
D PUNCH
CENTER
Punch center adjustment 30 - 70 50
E PUNCH HOLE Punch hole position
adjustment
46 - 52 50
Item Display Item
Set
range
Default
value
A SADDLE
POSITION
Saddle binding position
adjustment
197 - 203 200
B FOLDING
POSITION
Saddle folding position
adjustment
192 - 208 200
C FRONT
ADJUST
Alignment position
adjustment (front)
0 - 20 10
D STAPLE
REAR
at the rear)
94 - 106 100
E STAPLE
FRONT
in front)
94 - 106 100
F PUNCH
CENTER
Punch center adjustment 30 - 70 50
G PUNCH HOLE Punch hole position
adjustment
46 - 52 50
SIMULATION NO.03-03
TEST
FIN LOAD CHECK
EXECUTE
1/1
CLOSE
FINRPS FJPM FJFM FFM
FAM FFJM FRJM FSM
FTLM1 FTLM2 FFSM FSWM
FASM FINRRS FBRRS FFDRRS
FBES FSHC FAORC
TH_SEN Inserter sub tray pull-out detection
TS_SEN Inserter sub tray storage detection
T_SEN Inserter tray paper length detection
EMP_SEN Inserter tray empty detection
REG_SEN Inserter resist detection
TIM_SEN Inserter timing detection
JCK_SEN Inserter JAM cover open/close detection
H_SEN Inserter reverse detection
HI_SEN Inserter paper exit detection
HYK_SEN Inserter reverse unit open/close detection
P_ST_SW Inserter start SW
P_MO_SW Inserter staple mode select SW
P_PN_SW Inserter punch select SW
SET_SW Inserter set SW
K_MOT Inserter paper feed motor
Y_MOT Inserter horizontal transport motor
H_MOT Inserter reverse motor
F_SOL Inserter flapper solenoid
A: 10 ; FRONT ADJUST
B : 100 ; STAPLE REAR
C : 100 ; STAPLE FRONT
D: 50 ; PUNCH CENTER
A:
SIMULATION NO.03-10
FINISHER ADJUSTMENT
10
0 20
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 50 ; PUNCH HOLE
FIN SENSOR CHECK
TEST
1/1
TH_SEN TS_SEN T_SEN EMP_SEN
REG_SEN TIM_SEN JCK_SEN H_SEN
HI_SEN HYK_SEN P_ST_SW P_MO_SW
P_PN_SW SET_SW

3-32
Purpose Setting (Adjustment)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the adjustment value of the
inserter paper width detection level.
Section Inserter
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item corresponding to the adjustment content with
[|] and [+] keys on the touch panel.

4

4-2
sors and detectors in the large capacity tray
(LCC) and the control circuit.
Section Large capacity tray (LCC)
Operation/Procedure
played.
<A4 LCC>
<A3 LCC>

4-3
in the large capacity tray (LCC) and the
control circuit.
Operation/Procedure
<A4 LCC>
R_CL Inserter resist clutch
P_LED Inserter operation panel upper LED
Item Display Item
Set
range
A MAX. POSITION Inserter tray width detection
adjustment value (Max. width)
0 - 1023
B POSITION 1 Inserter tray width detection
adjustment value (Adjustment
position 1)
0 - 1023
C POSITION 2 Inserter tray width detection
adjustment value (Adjustment
position 2)
0 - 1023
D MIN. POSOTION Inserter tray width detection
adjustment value (Min. width)
0 - 1023
SIMULATION NO.03-31
TEST
INSERTER LOAD CHECK
1/1
CLOSE
K_MOT Y_MOT
H_MOT F_SOL
R_CL P_LED
EXECUTE
A : 72 ; MAX. POSITION
B : 200 ; POSITION1
C : 10 ; POSITION2
D: 100 ; MIN. POSITION
A:
SIMULATION NO.03-32
INSERTER TRAY VALUE SETTING
72
0 1023
OK
TEST
CLOSE
LPFD LCC transport sensor
LUD LCC tray upper limit detection
LDD LCC tray lower limit detection
LPED LCC tray paper empty detection
LCD LCC tray insertion detection
LDSW LCC upper open/close detection SW
LRE LCC lift motor encoder detection
L24VM LCC 24V power monitor
LLSW LCC upper limit SW
LTOD LCC main unit connection detection
LPFD LCC transport sensor
LUD LCC tray upper limit detection
LDD LCC tray lower limit detection
LPED LCC tray paper empty detection
LCD LCC tray insertion detection
LDSW LCC upper open/close detection SW
LRE LCC lift motor encoder detection
L24VM LCC 24V power monitor
LLSW LCC upper limit SW
LPUSW LCC paper upper surface detection SW
LRRSW LCC reverse winding detection SW
LTLSW LCC tray lift SW
LTLD LCC tray lock sensor
LIPSW LCC illegal paper detection SW
LTOD LCC main unit connection sensor
LPFM LCC transport motor
LLM LCC lift motor
LPFC LCC paper feed clutch
LPFS LCC paper feed solenoid
LTRC LCC transport clutch
LCC SENSOR CHECK
TEST
1/1
LPFD LUD LDD LPED
LCD LDSW LRE L24VM
LLSW LTOD
<A3 LCC>

4-5
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the clutch
(LTRC) in the LCC and the monitor.
Operation/Procedure
1) Press LTRC key to check the sync signal.
When normal: ON When abnormal: OFF
2) Press the highlighted LTRC key to check the sync signal.
When normal: OFF When abnormal: ON

5

5-1
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the display,
LCD in the operation panel, and control cir-
cuit.
Section Operation panel
Operation/Procedure
The LCD is changed as shown below.
The contrast changes every 2sec from the current level to Max.
Min. the current level. During this period, each LED is lighted.

5-2
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the heater
lamp and the control circuit.
Section Fusing
Operation/Procedure
The selected heater lamp performs ON/OFF operation.
LPFM LCC transport motor
LLM LCC lift motor
LPFS LCC paper feed solenoid
LTRC LCC transport clutch
LTLED LCC tray LED lamp
LTLC LCC tray lock clutch
LFAN LCC separation auxiliary fan
SIMULATION NO.04-03
TEST
LCC LOAD CHECK
EXECUTE
1/1
CLOSE
LPFM LLM LPFC LPFS
LTRC
SIMULATION NO.04-05
TEST
LCC SYNCRONIZING SIGNAL CHECK
LTRC LTRC OFF :
1/1
CLOSE
HL_UM Heater lamp upper main
HL_US Heater lamp upper sub
HL_LM Heater lamp lower main
HL_EX Heater lamp external EX1
Heater lamp external EX2
HL_ALL All heater lamps ON
SIMULATION NO.05-01
TEST
SIMULATION NO.05-01
TEST
After 6.0sec
1/1
SIMULATION NO.05-02
TEST
HEATER LAMP LOAD SETUP
CLOSE
HL_UM HL_US
HL_LM HL_EX
EXECUTE
HL_ALL

5-3
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the copy
lamp and the control circuit.
Operation/Procedure
The target lamp is lighted for 10 sec.

5-4
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the dis-
charge lamp and the control circuit.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
The target lamp is lighted for 30 sec.

6

6-1
(clutches and solenoids) in the paper trans-
port system and the control circuits.
Section Paper transport/paper exit
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target for the operation check with [|] and [+] keys.
OC COPY LAMP OC copy lamp
DSPF COPY LAMP DSPF copy lamp
DL_K Discharge lamp K
DL_C Discharge lamp C
Same control DL_M Discharge lamp M
DL_Y Discharge lamp Y
SIMULATION NO.05-03
TEST
COPY LAMP CHECK
OC COPY LAMP
1/1
EXECUTE
CLOSE
DSPF COPY LAMP
SIMULATION NO.05-04
TEST
DISCHARGE LAMP CHECK
EXECUTE
1/1
CLOSE
DL_K DL_C DL_M DL_Y
CPFM Paper feed motor
LCCM LCC transport motor
PFM PS front motor
RRM Resist motor
FPCM Pressure change motor
FUM Fusing motor
POMF Paper exit motor normal rotation
POMR Paper exit motor reverse rotation
WTM Waste toner drive motor
TRC1 Vertical transport clutch upper
TRC2 Vertical transport clutch lower
TANCL Tandem transport clutch
LPFC LCC transport clutch
RRC PS clutch
RRC2 PS clutch 2
PCSS Process control shutter solenoid
MPUC Manual paper feed clutch
MPFS Manual paper feed take-up solenoid
MPGS Manual paper feed gate solenoid
T1PUS Tandem tray 1 pick-up solenoid
T2PUS Tandem tray 2 pick-up solenoid
C3PUS Cassette 3 pick-up solenoid
C4PUS Cassette 4 pick-up solenoid
T1PFC Tandem tray 1 paper feed clutch
T2PFC Tandem tray 2 paper feed clutch
C3PFC Cassette 3 paper feed clutch
C4PFC Cassette 4 paper feed clutch
T1LUM Tandem tray 1 lift-up motor
T2LUM Tandem tray 2 lift-up motor
C3LUM Cassette 3 lift-up motor
C4LUM Cassette 4 lift-up motor
LSS_BK LSU shutter solenoid BK
LSS_CL LSU shutter solenoid CL
TEST
FEED OUTPUT CHECK
EXECUTE
1/2
CPFM LCCM PFM RRM
FPCM FUM POMF POMR
WTM TRC1 TRC2 TANCL
LPFC RRC RRC2 PCSS
MPUC MPFS MPGS T1PUS
T2PUS C3PUS C4PUS T1PFC
T2PFC C3PFC C4PFC T1LUM
T2LUM C3LUM C4LUM LSS_BK

6-2
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of each fan
motor and its control circuit.
Section Other
Operation/Procedure

6-3
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the primary
transfer unit and the control circuit.
Section Process (Transfer)
Operation/Procedure
Select [NORMAL] or [REVERSE] and press [EXECUTE] key.
The load operation is started. (Separation operation is changed in
the sequence of BLACK COLOR FREE, and the operation is
halted for 5 sec at each position. For REVERSE. However, the
operation is reversed.)
During this period, the current position is displayed.

6-4
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the PTC
and the MC cleaner.
Section
Operation/Procedure

7

7-1
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of
aging.
Section Other
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target to be set with the touch panel key.
The machine is rebooted in the aging mode.
Afterward, the operation mode is kept until the power is tuned
off or resetting is made.
POFM
Paper exit cooling fan motor 1
Paper exit cooling fan motor 2
OZFM
Ozone exhaust fan motor 1
PSFM
Power cooling fan motor 1
Power cooling fan motor 2
LSUFM LSU cooling fan motor
FUFM
Fusing exhaust fan motor
Fusing fan cooling motor
CFM Charger cooling fan motor
CONFM Controller cooling fan motor / HDD cooling fan motor
VFM_C Main inside ventilation fan motor (center)
VFM_R Main inside ventilation fan motor (right)
NORMAL
BLACK Black mode
position
COLOR Color mode
position
FREE Drum
separation
position
REVERSE
BLACK Black mode
position
FREE Drum
separation
position
COLOR Color mode
position
SIMULATION NO.06-02
TEST
FAN LOAD SETUP
CLOSE
EXECUTE
1/1
POFM OZFM
PSFM LSUFM
FUFM CFM
VFM_C CONFM
VFM_R
ALL
Black mode position
Color mode position
Drum separation position
The operation
is repeated.
Black mode position
Drum separation position
Color mode position
The operation
is repeated.
AGING Aging operation setup
INTERVAL Intermittent setup
MISFEED DISABLE JAM detection enable/disable setup
FUSING DISABLE Fusing operation enable/disable setup
WARMUP DISABLE Warm-up disable setup
DV CHECK DISABLE DV unit detection enable/disable setup
SHADING DISABLE Shading disable setup
CCD GAIN FREE CCD gain adjustment free setup
SIMULATION NO.06-03
TEST
TRANSFER LOAD CHECK
EXECUTE
POSITION :
1/1
CLOSE
REVERSE NORMAL
SIMULATION NO.06-04
TEST
PTC/MC CLEANING
CLOSE
MC COUNT : 0
EXECUTE PTC MC ALL
PTC COUNT : 0
SIMULATION NO.07-01
TEST
AGING TEST SETTING
AGING INTERVAL
MISFEED DISABLE FUSING DISABLE
WARMUP DISABLE DV CHECK DISABLE
1/1
EXECUTE
SHADING DISABLE CCD GAIN FREE
CLOSE

7-6
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the intermittent aging cycle.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the intermittent aging cycle (unit: sec) with 10-key.
2) Press [OK] key.
The time entered in procedure 1) is set.
* The interval time can be set in the range of 1 to 900sec.

7-8
Purpose Operation display
Function (Purpose) Used to display the warm-up time.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Press [EXECUTE] key.
Counting of the warm-up time is started.
* Interruption of counting by pressing [EXECUTE] key is inhibited.

7-9
Function (Purpose) Used to set a color in the color mode print-
ing. (Used to check the print in the color
mode.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a color for print with the touch panel.
Printing is started in the selected color.
* If no color is specified, printing is made in all colors.

8

8-1
Purpose Operation test/Check/Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operations of
the developing voltage in each print mode
and the control circuit.
* When the middle speed is adjusted, the
high speed and the low speed are also
adjusted simultaneously.
Section Process (Developing)
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a speed with [MIDDLE] and [LOW] key on the touch
panel.
2) Select an adjustment item with [|] and [+] keys.
* When or key is pressed, the set value of each item is
increased or decreased by 1 collectively.
The voltage entered in step 2 is outputted for 30sec and the
set value is saved.
When [EXECUTE] is pressed, the output is interrupted.
K Setup/cancel of black
C Setup/cancel of cyan
M Setup/cancel of magenta
Y Setup/cancel of yellow
A: 1 ; CYCLE TIME(SEC)
A:
SIMULATION NO.07-06
INTERVAL AGING CYCLE TIME SETUP
1
1 900
OK
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.07-08
TEST
WARM UP TIME DISPLAY SETTING
CLOSE
EXECUTE
0 SECONDS
Key Item Display Content
Set
range
Default
value
MIDDLE A MIDDLE
SPEED
DVB_K
K developing bias
set value at middle
speed
0 - 700 450
B MIDDLE
SPEED
DVB_C
C developing bias
set value at middle
speed
0 - 700 450
C MIDDLE
SPEED
DVB_M
M developing bias
set value at middle
speed
0 - 700 450
D MIDDLE
SPEED
DVB_Y
Y developing bias
set value at middle
speed
0 - 700 450
LOW/
HIGH
A LOW
SPEED
DVB_K
K developing bias
set value at low
speed
0 - 700 420
B LOW
SPEED
DVB_C
C developing bias
set value at low
speed
0 - 700 420
C LOW
SPEED
DVB_M
M developing bias
set value at low
speed
0 - 700 420
D LOW
SPEED
DVB_Y
Y developing bias
set value at low
speed
0 - 700 420
E HIGH
SPEED
DVB_K
K developing bias
set value at high
speed
0 - 700 450
CLOSE
K
SIMULATION NO.07-09
TEST
PRINTING COLOR SELECT(COLOR MODE)
C M Y
1/1
EXECUTE

8-2
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operations of
the main charger grid voltage in each
printer mode and the control circuit.
* When the middle speed is adjusted, the
high speed and the low speed are also
adjusted simultaneously.
Section Process (Charging)
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a speed with [MIDDLE] and [LOW] key on the touch
panel.
The voltage entered in step 3 is outputted for 30sec and the
set value is saved.
* 65/55-sheets machine

8-6
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operation of
the transfer voltage and the control circuit.
Section Process (Transfer)
Operation/Procedure
The current set voltage is outputted for 30 sec, and the set
value is saved.
Key Item Display Content
Set
range
Default
value
MIDDLE A MIDDLE
SPEED
GB_K
K charging/grid
bias set value at
middle speed
230 - 850 583
B MIDDLE
SPEED
GB_C
C charging/grid
bias set value at
middle speed
230 - 850 635
C MIDDLE
SPEED
GB_M
M charging/grid
bias set value at
middle speed
230 - 850 635
D MIDDLE
SPEED
GB_Y
Y charging/grid
bias set value at
middle speed
230 - 850 635
LOW/
HIGH
A LOW
SPEED
GB_K
K charging/grid
bias set value at
low speed
230 - 850 552
B LOW
SPEED
GB_C
C charging/grid
bias set value at
low speed
230 - 850 600
C LOW
SPEED
GB_M
M charging/grid
bias set value at
low speed
230 - 850 600
D LOW
SPEED
GB_Y
Y charging/grid
bias set value at
low speed
230 - 850 600
E HIGH
SPEED
GB_K
K charging/grid
bias set value at
high speed
230 - 850 604
598*
A450 ` MIDDLE SPEED DVB_K
B450 ` MIDDLE SPEED DVB_C
C450 ` MIDDLE SPEED DVB_M
D450 ` MIDDLE SPEED DVB_Y
A:
SIMULATION NO.08-01
450
0 700
OK
TEST
EXECUTE
CLOSE
LOW/HIGH MIDDLE
A` 583 ` MIDDLE SPEED GB_K
B` 635 ` MIDDLE SPEED GB_C
C` 635 ` MIDDLE SPEED GB_M
D` 635 ` MIDDLE SPEED GB_Y
A:
SIMULATION NO.08-02
MHV/GRID SETTING AND OUTPUT
583
230 850
OK
TEST
EXECUTE
CLOSE
LOW/HIGH MIDDLE

9

9-2
sors and detectors in the duplex section
and its control circuit.
Section Duplex
Operation/Procedure
played.
Set
range
Default
value
Actual output
setting range
Actual output
value of the
initial value
A TC1 LOW SPEED CL K
Primary
transfer bias
reference value
Color
K
Lower speed 0 - 255 78 2A - 100A 15A
B TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL K Medium speed 0 - 255 78 2A - 100A 15A
C TC1 LOW SPEED CL C
C
Lower speed 0 - 255 68 2A - 100A 10A
D TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL C Medium speed 0 - 255 68 2A - 100A 10A
E TC1 LOW SPEED CL M
M
Lower speed 0 - 255 68 2A - 100A 10A
F TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL M Medium speed 0 - 255 68 2A - 100A 10A
G TC1 LOW SPEED CL Y
Y
Lower speed 0 - 255 68 2A - 100A 10A
H TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL Y Medium speed 0 - 255 68 2A - 100A 10A
I TC1 LOW SPEED BW K
Black and
white
K
Lower speed 0 - 255 78 2A - 100A 15A
J TC1 MIDDLE SPEED BW K Medium speed 0 - 255 78 2A - 100A 15A
K TC1 HIGH SPEED BW K High speed 0 - 255 130 2A - 100A 40A
L TC2 PLAIN CL SPX
Secondary
transfer bias
reference value
Color
Normal
paper
M TC2 PLAIN CL DPX Back surface 51 - 255 132 2A - 60A 25A
N TC2 PLAIN BW SPX Black and
white
O TC2 PLAIN BW DPX Back surface 51 - 255 184 2A - 60A 40A
P TC2 HEAVY CL SPX
Color
Heavy
paper
Front surface 51 - 255 88 2A - 60A 12.5A
Q TC2 HEAVY CL DPX Back surface 51 - 255 88 2A - 60A 12.5A
R TC2 HEAVY BW SPX Black and
white
S TC2 HEAVY BW DPX Back surface 51 - 255 79 2A - 60A 10A
T TC2 OHP CL Color
OHP
51 - 255 72 2A - 60A 8A
U TC2 OHP BW Black and
white
51 - 255 72 2A - 60A 8A
V TC2 ENVELOPE CL Color
Envelope
51 - 255 149 2A - 60A 30A
W TC2 ENVELOPE BW Black and
white
51 - 255 149 2A - 60A 30A
X TC2 CLEANING Cleaning process 51 - 255 72 2A - 60A 8A
Y TC2 CLEAN LOW SPD
Secondary
transfer
cleaning bias
reference value
Printing at low speed 51 - 255 72 -50V - -1500V -200V
Z TC2 CLEAN MIDDLE SPD Printing at middle speed 51 - 255 100 -50V - -1500V -400V
AA TC2 CLEAN HIGH SPD Printing at high speed 51 - 255 114 -50V - -1500V -500V
AB TC2 CLEAN CLEANING Cleaning 51 - 255 156 -50V - -1500V -800V
AC PTC LOW SPEED CL
PTC current
reference value
Color
Lower speed 0 - 255 119 0/-100A - -700A -300A
AD PTC MIDDLE SPEED CL Medium speed 0 - 255 119 0/-100A - -700A -300A
AE PTC LOW SPEED BK
Black and white
Lower speed 0 - 255 119 0/-100A - -700A -300A
AF PTC MIDDLE SPEED BK Medium speed 0 - 255 119 0/-100A - -700A -300A
AG PTC HIGH SPEED BK High speed 0 - 255 119 0/-100A - -700A -300A
AH VCASE LOW SPEED CL
PTC case
voltage
reference value
Color
Lower speed 0 - 255 0 0/-200V - -1000V 0
AI VCASE MIDDLE SPEED CL Medium speed 0 - 255 0 0/-200V - -1000V 0
AJ VCASE LOW SPEED BK
Black and white
Lower speed 0 - 255 0 0/-200V - -1000V 0
AK VCASE MIDDLE SPEED BK Medium speed 0 - 255 0 0/-200V - -1000V 0
AL VCASE HIGH SPEED BK High speed 0 - 255 0 0/-200V - -1000V 0
A:
SIMULATION NO.08-06
78
0 255
OK
TEST
CLOSE
F : 68 ; TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL M
L : 132 ; TC2 PLAIN CL SPX
EXECUTE
DSW_ADU ADU transport open/close detection
APPD1 ADU transport path detection 1
APPD2 ADU transport path detection 2

9-3
in the duplex section and the control cir-
cuits.
Section Duplex
Operation/Procedure

10

10-1
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the load
(motor) in the process section and the
related circuits.
* This check must be performed with no
toner bottle installed.
Operation/Procedure
The selected load is operated for 10 sec.
This key operates both the hopper motor K and the intermediate
hopper stirring motor.

10-2
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the toner
remaining quantity sensor and the control
circuit.
Operation/Procedure
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the toner motor is driven for 10
sec and the toner remaining quantity in the toner hopper is dis-
played.
No toner remaining: Normal display
Toner remaining: Highlighted display

13

13--
Purpose Clear/cancel (Trouble etc.)
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble.
Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.
ADMH ADU 1 motor (H)
ADML ADU 2 motor (L)
ADUGS Gate solenoid
TM_K1 Toner motor K1
TM_C Toner motor C
TM_M Toner motor M
TM_Y Toner motor Y
FIN SENSOR CHECK
TEST
1/1
DSW_ADU APPD1 APPD2
SIMULATION NO.09-03
TEST
ADU LOAD CHECK
1/1
ADMH ADML ADUGS
CLOSE
EXECUTE
PHTM_K Vertical transport motor K
HTM_K* Hopper motor K
HTM_C Hopper motor C
HTM_M Hopper motor M
HTM_Y Hopper motor Y
HTCS_K Hopper remaining quantity sensor K
HTCS_C Hopper remaining quantity sensor C
HTCS_M Hopper remaining quantity sensor M
HTCS_Y Hopper remaining quantity sensor Y
SIMULATION NO.10-01
TEST
TONER MOTOR ACTIVATION
EXECUTE
1/1
TM_K1 TM_C TM_M TM_Y
CLOSE
TM_K2 PHTM_K HTM_K HTM_C
HTM_M HTM_Y
ALL
TONER HOPPER SENSOR CEHCK
TEST
1/1
HTCS_K HTCS_C HTCS_M HTCS_Y
EXECUTE

14

14--
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel excluding the self-diag "U1/
U2/LCC/PF" troubles.
Section
Operation/Procedure

15

15--
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U6-09, F3-12,
F3-22 (large capacity paper feed tray,
paper feed tray 1, 2)" trouble.
Section LCC
Operation/Procedure

16

16--
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U2" trouble.
Section MFPcnt PWB / PCU PWB / SCU PWB
Operation/Procedure

17

17--
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "PF" trouble.
Section
Operation/Procedure

21

21-1
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the maintenance cycle.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with [|] and [+] keys on the touch
panel.
SIMULATION NO.13
TEST
U1 TROUBLE CANCELLATION
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.14
TEST
TROUBLE CANCELLATION(OTHER)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.15
TEST
LCC TROUBLE CANCELLATION
CLOSE
Maintenance timing display Default value
A MAINTENANCE
COUNTER (TOTAL)
Maintenance
counter (Total)
300K
B MAINTENANCE
COUNTER (COLOR)
Maintenance
counter (Color)
100K
SIMULATION NO.16
TEST
U2 TROUBLE CANCELLATION
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.17
TEST
PF TROUBLE CANCELLATION
CLOSE
A ; 300 ` MAINTENANCE COUNTERTOTAL)
B ; 100 ` MAINTENANCE COUNTERCOLOR) A:
SIMULATION NO.21-01
MAINTENANCE CYCLE SETUP
300
0 999
OK
TEST
CLOSE

22

22-1
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data output/
Check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the print count value in each
section and operation mode. (Used to
check the maintenance timing.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
Select a display with [|] and [+] keys on the touch panel.
Press [COLOR] or [BLACK & WHITE] key to print.

22-2
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the total numbers of misfeed
and troubles. (When the number of total
jam is considerably great, it is judged as
necessary for repair.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
The paper jam, trouble counter value is displayed.

22-3
Function (Purpose) Used to check the misfeed positions and
the number of misfeed at each position.
* The trouble position can be trouble-
shooted according to this data.
Section
Operation/Procedure
The paper jam and misfeed history is displayed from the latest one
up to 50 items. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.)
* For the list of the jam codes, refer to "2. Paper jam codes" in [12]
OTTERS.
TOTAL OUT(BW) Total output quantity of black and white
TOTAL OUT(COL) Total output quantity of color
TOTAL(BW) Total use quantity of black and white
TOTAL(COL) Total use quantity of color
TOTAL(2COL) Total use quantity of 2-color
TOTAL(SGL_COL) Total use quantity of single color
COPY(BW) Black and white copy counter
COPY(COL) Color copy counter
COPY(2COL) 2-color copy counter
COPY(SGL_COL) Single color copy counter
PRINT(BW) Black and white print counter
PRINT(COL) Color print counter
DOC FIL(BW) Black and white document filing print counter
DOC FIL(COL) Color document filing print counter
DOC FIL(2COL) 2-color document filing print counter
DOC FIL(SGL COL) Single-color document filing print counter
OTHER(BW) Black and white other counter
OTHER(COL) Color other counter
MAINTENANCE ALL Maintenance counter (Total)
MAINTENANCE COL Maintenance counter (Color)
TC1 BELT Primary transfer unit print counter
TC1 BELT RANGE Primary transfer unit accumulated traveling
distance (cm)
TC1 BELT DAY Use day of primary transfer unit (Day)
TC2 BELT Secondary transfer unit print counter
TC2 BELT RANGE Secondary transfer unit accumulated traveling
distance (cm)
TC2 BELT DAY Secondary transfer unit use day (Day)
FUSER UNIT(U) Fusing unit print counter (Heat roller upper)
FUSER UNIT(E&L) Fusing unit print counter
(Heat roller external and lower)
FUSER DAY(U) Fusing unit use day (Heat roller upper)
FUSER DAY(E&L) Fusing unit use day
(Heat roller external and lower)
FUSER WEB SEND Fuser web cleaning send counter
FUSER WEB UNIT Fusing web print counter
FUSER WEB DAY Use day of fuser web unit (Day)
DRUM LIFE(K) Accumulated number of drum rotations (K)
DRUM LIFE(C) Accumulated number of drum rotations (C)
DRUM LIFE(M) Accumulated number of drum rotations (M)
DRUM LIFE(Y) Accumulated number of drum rotations (Y)
DEVE LIFE(K) Accumulated number of developer rotations (K)
DEVE LIFE(C) Accumulated number of developer rotations (C)
DEVE LIFE(M) Accumulated number of developer rotations (M)
DEVE LIFE(Y) Accumulated number of developer rotations (Y)
SIMULATION NO.22-01
TEST
COUNTER DISPLAY
CLOSE
TOTAL OUT (BW) 00000000 : DOC FIL (COL) 00000000 :
1/2
TOTAL OUT (COL) 00000000 : DOC FIL (2COL) 00000000 :
TOTAL (BW) 00000000 : DOC FIL (SGL COL) 00000000 :
TOTAL (COL) 00000000 : OTHER (BW) 00000000 :
TOTAL (2COL) 00000000 : OTHER (COL) 00000000 :
TOTAL (SGL_COL) 00000000 : MAINTENANCE ALL 00000000 :
COPY (BW) 00000000 : MAINTENANCE COL 00000000 :
COPY (COL) 00000000 : TC1 BELT 00000000 :
COPY (2COL) 00000000 : TC1 BELT RANGE 00000000 :
COPY (SGL_COL) 00000000 : TC1 BELT DAY 000 :
PRINT (BW 00000000 : TC2 BELT 00000000 :
DOC FIL (BW) 00000000 : TC2 BELT DAY 000/740 :
PRINT (COL) 00000000 : TC2 BELT RANGE 00000000 :
MACHINE JAM
SIMULATION NO.22-02
TEST
JAM/TROUBLE COUNTER DISPLAY
CLOSE
00000000 :
DSPF JAM 00000000 :
TROUBLE 00000000 :
1/1
CLOSE
JAM HISTORY DATA DISPLAY
SIMULATION NO.22-03
TEST
1/1
TRAY2 MFT MFT CPID2_S2
PPD2_N1 CPFD2_S2 MFT TRAY3
PPD2_N1 CPFD2_S2 APPD3_S DPFD2_S4
LCC PPD2_PRI CPID2_S2 CPID2_S2
CPFD1_N1 PPD2_PRI TRAY3 APPD3_S
PPD2_N1 PPD2_N1 MFT APPD3_S
TRAY2 TRAY3 TRAY3 CPID2_S2
TRAY2 TRAY3

22-4
Function (Purpose) Used to check the trouble (self diag) his-
tory.
Section
Operation/Procedure
The trouble history is displayed from the latest one up to 30 items.
(The old ones are deleted sequentially.)
* For the list of the trouble codes, refer to "2. Trouble code list" in
[8] SELF DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLE CODES.

22-5
Purpose Other
Function (Purpose) Used to check the ROM version of each
unit (section).
Section
Operation/Procedure
The ROM version of the installed unit in each section is displayed.
When there is any trouble in the software, use this simulation to
check the ROM version, and upgrade the version if necessary.

22-6
Function (Purpose) Used to output the list of the setting and
adjustment data (simulations, FAX soft
switch, counters).
Section
Operation/Procedure
* When installing or servicing, this simulation is executed to print
the adjustment data and set data for use in the next servicing.
(Memory trouble, PWB replacement, etc.)
1) Select the print mode with 10-key.
1. List print 2. Lit print (Sim 50-24)
2) Press [EXECUTE] key to start printing the list selected in step
1.

22-8
Function (Purpose) Used to check the counter value of the fin-
isher, the DSPF, and the scan (reading).
Section
Operation/Procedure
The counter values of the finisher, the DSPF, and the scanner
related counters are displayed.
S/N Serial No.
ICU(MAIN) ICU (Main section)
ICU(BOOT) ICU (Boot section)
LANGUAGE Language support data version
GRAPHIC Graphic data for LCD
IMG DATA ROM ImageASIC FlashROM data
COLOR PROFILE Color profile
PCU PCU
SCU SCU
SPF SPF
FAX(MAIN) FAX (main section)
LCC Side LCC
FINISHER Finisher
SADDLE Saddle unit
PUNCH Punch unit
INSERTER Inserter
NIC NIC
FIERY FIERY option
POWER-CON Power controller
E-MANUAL Operation manual (HDD storage)
CLOSE
TROUBLE CODE DATA DISPLAY
SIMULATION NO.22-04
TEST
1/1
L4-31 L8-02 L8-02 L4-02
E7-23 F9-20 F2-39 L4-31
F1-50 L4-02 F2-39 F1-50
F1-50 L4-02 F1-61 F1-50
F1-50 F2-39 H5-01 PF-00
U5-12 F2-39 L1-00 F9-20
PF-00 PC- F2-81 E7-23
U2-22 F2-39
DSPF Document feed quantity
SCAN Number of scans
STAPLER Staple counter
PUNCHER Puncher counter
STAMP Stamp counter
SADDLE STAPLER Saddle staple counter
OC_OPEN OC open/close counter
DSPF_OPEN DSPF open/close counter
INSERTER Inserter counter
INSERTER OFFLINE Inserter offline counter
OC LAMP TIME Overall lighting time of the lamp in the OC section
(Hour, minute)
DSPF LAMP TIME Overall lighting time of the lamp in the DSPF
section (Hour, minute)
SIMULATION NO.22-05
TEST
S/N : **********
CLOSE
ICU(MAIN) 00.00.00 : SADDLE 00.00.00 :
FINISHER 00.00.00 :
1/1
ICU(BOOT) 00.00.00 : PUNCH 00.00.00 :
LANGUAGE 00.00.00 : INSERTER 00.00.00 :
GRAPHIC 00.00.00 : NIC 00.00.00 :
IMG DATA ROM 00.00.00 : FIERY 00.00.00 :
COLOR PROFILE: 00.00.00 POWER-CON 00.00.00 :
PCU 00.00.00 : E-MANUAL 00.00.00 :
SCU 00.00.00 :
SPF NONE :
FAX(MAIN) NONE :
LCC 00.00.00 :
A: 1 ; DATA PATTERN
A:
SIMULATION NO.22-06
DATA PRINT MODE
1
1 2
OK
TEST
CLOSE
EXECUTE

22-9
Function (Purpose) Used to check the number of use (print
quantity) of each paper feed section.
Section Paper feed, ADU, LCC
Operation/Procedure
The counter values related to paper feed are displayed.

22-10
Function (Purpose) Used to check the system configuration
(option, internal hardware).
Section
Operation/Procedure
The system configuration is displayed. (The model names of the
installed devices and the options are displayed.)

22-11
Function (Purpose) Used to check the use frequency of FAX
(send/receive). (Only when FAX is
installed.)
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
The counter values of FAX send and receive are displayed.
TRAY1 Tray 1 paper feed counter
MFT TOTAL Manual paper feed counter (Total)
MFT HEAVY Manual paper feed counter (Heavy paper)
MFT OHP Manual paper feed counter (OHP)
MFT ENV Manual paper feed counter (Envelope)
LCC Side LCC paper feed counter (A4 or A3 LCC)
ADU ADU paper feed counter
SIMULATION NO.22-08
TEST
ORG./STAPLE COUNTER DISPLAY
CLOSE
1/1
DSPF 00000000 :
SCAN 00000000 :
STAPLER 00000000 :
PUNCHER 00000000 :
STAMP 00000000 :
SADDLE STAPLER 00000000 :
OC_OPEN 00000000 :
DSPF_OPEN 00000000 :
INSERTER 00000000 :
INSERTER OFFLINE 00000000 :
OC LAMP TIME 00000000 :
DSPF LAMP TIME 00000000 :
SIMULATION NO.22-09
TEST
PAPER FEED COUNTER DISPLAY
CLOSE
1/1
TRAY 1 00000000 :
TRAY 2 00000000 :
TRAY 3 00000000 :
TRAY 4 00000000 :
MFT TOTAL 00000000 :
MFT HEAVY 00000000 :
MFT OHP 00000000 :
MFT ENV 00000000 :
LCC 00000000 :
ADU 00000000 :
MACHINE
MX-5500N
Main unit MX-6200N
MX-7000N
DSPF MX-RPX1 Document feed unit
STAMP AR-SU1 Finish stamp
LCC
MX-LCX2
Large capacity tray (LCC)
MX-LCX3
PUNCHER
MX-PNX2A
Punch unit
MX-PNX2B
MX-PNX2C
MX-PNX2D
FINISHER
MX-FNX3
Finisher
MX-FNX4
INSERTER MX-CFX1 Inserter
FAX1 MX-FXX1 FAX kit
FAX MEMORY MX-MMX1 FAX extension memory
PS MX-PKX1 PS3 expansion kit
SECURITY
MX-FRX3U Security kit (DSK) commercial version
MX-FRX3 Security kit (DSK) authentication
version
AIM MX-AMX1 Application expansion module
SDRAM (SYS) *****MB SDRAM capacity
SDRAM (ICU) *****MB SDRAM capacity
HDD *****MB Hard disk capacity
NIC STANDARD NIC
BARCODE AR-PF1 Barcode font
FONT AR-PF3 Kanji font (Japan only)
INTERNET-
FAX
MX-FWX1 Internet Fax expansion kit
FIERY MX-PEX2 Fiery print controller
ACM MX-AMX2 Application communication module
EAM MX-AMX3 External account module
FAX OUTPUT FAX print quantity counter
FAX SEND FAX send counter
FAX RECEIVED FAX receive counter
SEND IMAGES FAX send quantity counter
SEND TIME FAX send time
RECEIVED TIME FAX receive time
ACR SEND Number of carrier prefix attached communications
SIMULATION NO.22-10
TEST
MACHINE SYSTEM
CLOSE
1/1
MACHINE MX-5500N : SDRAM(ICU) 0MB :
DSPF MX-RPX1 : HDD 0MB :
STAMP AR-SU1 : NIC STANDARD :
LCC NONE : BARCODE AR-PF1 :
PUNCHER MX-PNX2A : FONT AR-PF3 :
FINISHER MX-FNX3 : INTERNET-FAX MX-FWX1 :
INSERTER MX-CFX1 : FIERY MX-PEX2 :
FAX MEMORY MX-MMX1 :
PS MX-PKX1 :
SECURITY MX-FRX3U :
AIM MX-AMX1 :
FAX1 MX-FXX1 :
SDRAM(SYS) 0MB :

22-12
Function (Purpose) Used to check the misfeed position in the
DSPF and the number of misfeed of each
position. (If the number of misfeed is con-
siderably great, it may lead to the decision
for repair.)
Section DSPF
Operation/Procedure
The paper jam and misfeed history is displayed from the latest one
up to 50 items. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.)
* For the list of the jam codes, refer to "2. Paper jam codes" in [12]
OTTERS.

22-13
Function (Purpose) Used to check the running time of the pro-
cess section. (OPC drum, DV unit, toner
bottle).
Section
Operation/Procedure
The rotating time of the process section and the print quantity are
displayed.

22-19
Function (Purpose) Used to check each counter value related
the network scanner.
Section
Operation/Procedure
The counter value related to the network scanner is displayed.
Select the display with [|] and [+] keys on the touch panel.
DRUM CTRG K Drum cartridge print counter (K)
DRUM CTRG C Drum cartridge print counter (C)
DRUM CTRG M Drum cartridge print counter (M)
DRUM CTRG Y Drum cartridge print counter (Y)
DRUM RANGE K Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance
(cm) (K)
DRUM RANGE C Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance
(cm) (C)
SIMULATION NO.22-11
TEST
FAX COUNTER DISPLAY
CLOSE
1/1
FAX OUTPUT 00000000 :
FAX SEND 00000000 :
FAX RECEIVED 00000000 :
SEND IMAGES 00000000 :
SEND TIME 00000000:00:0 :
RECEIVED TIME 00000000:00:0 :
ACR SEND 00000000 :
SIMULATION NO.22-12
TEST
SPF JAM HISTORY DATA DISPLAY
CLOSE
1/1
DRUM RANGE M Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance
(cm) (M)
DRUM RANGE Y Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance
(cm) (Y)
DEVE CTRG K Developer cartridge print counter (K)
DEVE CTRG C Developer cartridge print counter (C)
DEVE CTRG M Developer cartridge print counter (M)
DEVE CTRG Y Developer cartridge print counter (Y)
DEVE RANGE K Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance
(cm) (K)
DEVE RANGE C Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance
(cm) (C)
DEVE RANGE M Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance
(cm) (M)
DEVE RANGE Y Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance
(cm) (Y)
TONER MOTOR K Toner motor print counter (K)
TONER MOTOR
K2
Toner motor print counter (K2)
TONER MOTOR C Toner motor print counter (C)
TONER MOTOR M Toner motor print counter (M)
TONER MOTOR Y Toner motor print counter (Y)
TONER TURN K Toner motor accumulated rotating time (sec) (K)
TONER TURN K2 Toner motor accumulated rotating time (sec) (K2)
TONER TURN C Toner motor accumulated rotating time (sec) (C)
TONER TURN M Toner motor accumulated rotating time (sec) (M)
TONER TURN Y Toner motor accumulated rotating time (sec) (Y)
NET SCN ORG_B/W Network scanner document read quantity
counter (Black and white scan job)
NET SCN ORG_CL Network scanner document read quantity
counter (Color scan job)
NET SCN ORG_2CL Network scanner document read quantity
counter (2-color scan job)
NET SCN ORG_SGL Network scanner document read quantity
counter (Single scan job)
INTERNET FAX OUTPUT Internet FAX output quantity
INTERNET FAX SEND
OUTPUT
Internet FAX send quantity
INTERNET FAX RECEIVE Number of internet FAX receive
INTERNET FAX SEND Number of internet FAX send
MAIL COUNTER Number of E-Mail send
FTP COUNTER Number of FTP send
SMB SEND Numeric SMB send
SIMULATION NO.22-13
TEST
PROCESS CARTRIDGE DISPLAY
CLOSE
1/2
DRUM CTRG K 00000000 : DEVE RANGE K 00000000 :
DRUM CTRG C 00000000 : DEVE RANGE C 00000000 :
DRUM CTRG M 00000000 : DEVE RANGE M 00000000 :
DRUM CTRG Y 00000000 : DEVE RANGE Y 00000000 :
DRUM RANGE K 00000000 : TONER MOTOR K 00000000 :
DRUM RANGE C 00000000 : TONER MOTOR K2 00000000 :
DRUM RANGE M 00000000 : TONER MOTOR C 00000000 :
DRUM RANGE Y 00000000 : TONER MOTOR M 00000000 :
DEVE CTRG K 00000000 : TONER MOTOR Y 00000000 :
DEVE CTRG C 00000000 : TONER TURN K 00000000 :
DEVE CTRG M 00000000 : TONER TURN K2 00000000 :
: DEVE CTRG Y 00000000 TONER TURN C 00000000 :

22-90
Function (Purpose) Used to output the list of various set data.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the display with [|] and [+] keys on the touch panel.
2) Select a list to be printed.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key to start self printing.
(*): Disabled when the data list print inhibit setting is enabled in a
DSK support model.

23

23-2
Function (Purpose) Used to check the trouble history of paper
jam and misfeed. (If the number of misfeed
and troubles is considerably great, it may
be judged as necessary to repair.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
Press [EXECUTE] key to start printing.

23-80
sors and detectors in the paper feed and
transport section.
Section Paper feed, transport
Operation/Procedure
Press [EXECUTE] key to start list printing.
USB CNT Number of USB save
TRIAL MODE_B/C Trial mode counter (Black and white, color
scan job)
SCAN TO HDD_B/W Scan to HDD record quantity (Black and
white)
SCAN TO HDD_CL Scan to HDD record quantity (Color)
SCAN TO HDD_2CL Scan to HDD record quantity (2-color)
SCAN TO HDD_SGL Scan to HDD record quantity (Single color)
All setting list ALL CUSTOM SETTING LIST
Printer test page PCL SYMBOL SET LIST
PCL INTERNAL FONT LIST
PCL EXTENDED FONT LIST
PS FONT LIST
PS KANJI FONT LIST
PS EXTENDED FONT LIST
NIC PAGE
Destination registration list
(*)
INDIVIDUAL LIST
GROUP LIST
PROGRAM LIST
MEMORY BOX LIST
ALL SENDING ADDRESS LIST
Document filing list DOCUMENT FILING FOLDER LIST
System setting list ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (COPY)
ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (PRINT)
ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (IMAGE SEND)
ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (DOC FILING)
ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (SECURITY)
ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (COMMON)
ALL ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS LIST
Receive rejection number
table
ANTI JUNK FAX NUMBER LIST
Receive rejection address/
domain table
ANTI JUNK MAIL/DOMAIN NAME LIST
Table list of transfer to
email
INBOUND ROUTING LIST
Transfer list to
administrator
DOCUMENT ADMIN LIST
WEB setting list WEB SETTING LIST
Meta data set list METADATA SET LIST
NET SCN ORG_2CL 00000000 :
SIMULATION NO.22-19
TEST
NETWORK SCANNER COUNTER DISPLAY
1/2
NET SCN ORG_B/W 00000000 :
NET SCN ORG_CL 00000000 :
NET SCN ORG_SGL 00000000 :
INTERNET FAX OUTPUT 00000000 :
INTERNET FAX SEND 00000000 :
INTERNET FAX SEND OUTPUT 00000000 :
INTERNET FAX RECEIVE 00000000 :
MAIL COUNTER 00000000 :
FTP COUNTER 00000000 :
SMB SEND 00000000 :
TRIAL MODE_B&C 00000000 :
USB CNT 00000000 :
CLOSE
EXECUTE
SIMULATION NO.22-90
TEST
LIST PRINT
1/2
CLOSE
ALL CUSTOM SETTING PCL SYMBOL SET LIST
PCL INTERNAL FONT LIST PCL EXTENDED FONT LIST
PS KANJI FONT LIST
PS EXTENDED FONT NIC PAGE
INDIVIDUAL LIST GROUP LIST
PROGRAM LIST MEMORY BOX LIST
ALL SENDING ADDRESS LIST DOCUMENT FILING FOLDER LIST
ADMIN. SETTING LIST (COPY) ADMIN. SETTING LIST (PRINT)
ADMIN. SETTING LIST (IMAGE SEND) ADMIN. SETTING LIST (DOC FILING)
ADMIN. SETTING LIST (SECURITY) ADMIN. SETTING LIST (COMMON)
ALL ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS LIST ANTI JUNK FAX NUMBER LIST
PS FONT LIST
SIMULATION NO.23-02
TEST
JAM/TROUBLE DATA PRINT MODE
EXECUTE
CLOSE
PRESS [EXECUTE] TO PRINT THE JAM/TROUBLE PRINT
SIMULATION NO.23-80
TEST
DATA PRINT MODE (PAPER FEED)
PAPER FEED TIME LIST
1/1
EXECUTE
CLOSE

24

24-1
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the jam counter, and the trou-
ble counter. (The counters are cleared after
completion of maintenance.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target to be cleared with the touch panel key.
3) Press [YES] key.
The target counter is cleared.

24-2
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the number of use (the num-
ber of prints) of each paper feed section.
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [YES] key.

24-3
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the counter value of the fin-
isher, the DSPF, and scan (reading).
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [YES] key.

24-4
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) The maintenance counter and the print
counters of the transfer unit and the fusing
unit are cleared. (After completion of main-
tenance, the counters are cleared.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [YES] key.
MACHINE Machine JAM counter
DSPF DSPF JAM counter
TROUBLE Trouble counter
MFT TOTAL Manual paper feed counter (Total)
MFT HEAVY Manual paper feed counter (Heavy paper)
MFT OHP Manual paper feed counter (OHP)
MFT ENV Manual paper feed counter (Envelope)
LCC Side LCC paper feed counter (A4 or A3 LCC)
ADU ADU paper feed counter
SIMULATION NO.24-01
TEST
JAM/TROUBLE COUNTER DATA CLEAR
1/1
CLOSE
MACHINE DSPF TROUBLE
ARE YOU SURE?
YES NO
EXECUTE
TRAY1 TRAY2 TRAY3 TRAY4
MFT TOTAL MFT HEAVY MFT OHP MFT ENV
LCC ADU
ARE YOU SURE?
YES NO
EXECUTE
SIMULATION NO.24-02
TEST
PAPER FEED COUNTER CLEAR
1/1
CLOSE
DSPF DSPF counter
SCAN Scan counter
STAPLER Staple counter
PUNCHER Puncher counter
STAMP Stamp counter
SADDLE STAPLER Saddle staple counter
INSERTER Inserter counter
INSERTER OFFLINE Inserter offline counter
OC_OPEN OC open/close counter
DSPF_OPEN DSPF open/close counter
OC LAMP TIME OC section lamp total lighting time
DSPF LAMP TIME DSPF section lamp total lighting time
MAINTENANCE ALL Maintenance counter (Total)
MAINTENANCE COL Maintenance counter (Color)
TC1 BELT Primary transfer unit print counter
TC1 BELT RANGE Primary transfer unit accumulated traveling
distance (cm)
TC1 BELT DAY Use day of primary transfer unit (Day)
TC2 BELT Secondary transfer unit print counter
TC2 BELT RANGE Secondary transfer unit accumulated traveling
distance (cm)
TC2 BELT DAY Secondary transfer unit use day (Day)
FUSER UNIT (U) Fusing unit print counter (Heat roller upper)
FUSER UNIT (E&L) Fusing unit print counter (Heat roller external and
lower)
FUSER DAY (U) Fusing unit use day (Heat roller upper)
FUSER DAY (E&L) Fusing unit use day (Heat roller external and
lower)
FUSER WEB SEND Fusing web send counter
ARE YOU SURE?
YES NO
EXECUTE
SIMULATION NO.24-03
TEST
ORG./OUTPUT COUNTER DATA CLEAR
1/1
CLOSE
DSPF SCAN STAPLER PUNCHER
STAMP SADDLE STAPLER INSERTER INSERTER OFFLINE
OC_OPEN DSPF_OPEN OC LAMP TIME DSPF LAMP TIME

24-5
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the developer counter.
(After replacement of developer, this
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [YES] key.

24-6
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the copy counter value.
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [YES] key.

24-7
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the OPC drum counter value.
(After replacement of the OPC drum, this
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [YES] key.

24-9
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the printer mode print counter
and the self print mode print counter.
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [YES] key.
FUSER WEB Fusing web print counter
FUSER WEB DAY Fusing web unit use day
MC CLEANER MC cleaner cleaning operation counter
PTC CLEANER PTC cleaner cleaning operation counter
K
Developer cartridge print counter (K)
Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (K)
C
Developer cartridge print counter (C)
Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (C)
M
Developer cartridge print counter (M)
Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (M)
Y
Developer cartridge print counter (Y)
Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (Y)
COPY BW Copy counter (Black and white)
COPY COL Copy counter (Color)
SINGLE COLOR Single color
2COLOR 2-color
ARE YOU SURE?
YES NO
SIMULATION NO.24-04
TEST
MAINTENANCE COUNTER CLEAR
EXECUTE
1/1
CLOSE
MAINTENANCE ALL MAINTENANCE COL TC1 BELT TC1 BELT RANGE
TC1 BELT DAY TC2 BELT TC2 BELT RANGE TC2 BELT DAY
FUSER DAY (U) FUSER UNIT (U) FUSER UNIT (E&L) FUSER DAY (E&L)
FUSER WEB DAY MC CLEANER FUSER WEB SEND
PTC CLEANER
FUSER WEB
SIMULATION NO.24-05
TEST
DEVELOPER COUNTER DATA CLEAR
EXECUTE
K C M Y
1/1
CLOSE
K
Drum cartridge print counter (K)
Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (K)
C
Drum cartridge print counter (C)
Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (C)
M
Drum cartridge print counter (M)
Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (M)
Y
Drum cartridge print counter (Y)
Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (Y)
PRINT BW Printer counter (Black and white)
PRINT COL Printer counter (Color)
OTHER BW Other counter (Black and white)
OTHER COL Other counter (Color)
ARE YOU SURE?
YES NO
EXECUTE
SIMULATION NO.24-06
TEST
COPY COUNTER DATA CLEAR
1/1
COPY BW COPY COL SINGLE COLOR
CLOSE
2 COLOR
ARE YOU SURE?
YES NO
EXECUTE
SIMULATION NO.24-07
TEST
DRUM CTRG COUNTER CLEAR
1/1
K C M Y
CLOSE

24-10
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the FAX counter value. (Only
when FAX is installed.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [YES] key.

24-15
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear various counters in the scan
mode related to image send.
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [YES] key.

24-30
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to initialize the administrator pass-
word.
Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key.
The administrator password is initialized.

24-31
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to initialize the service mode pass-
word.
Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key.
The service mode password is initialized.
FAX OUTPUT FAX print quantity counter
FAX SEND FAX send counter
FAX RECEIVED FAX receive counter
SEND IMAGES FAX send quantity counter
SEND TIME FAX send time
RECEIVED TIME FAX receive time
ACR SEND Number of carrier prefix attached communications
NET SCN ORG_B/W Network scanner document read
quantity counter (Black and white
scan job)
NET SCN ORG_CL Network scanner document read
quantity counter (Color scan job)
NET SCN ORG_2CL Network scanner document read
quantity counter (2-color scan job)
ARE YOU SURE?
YES NO
EXECUTE
SIMULATION NO.24-09
TEST
PRINT/OTHER COUNTER CLEAR
1/1
PRINT BW PRINT COL OTHER BW OTHER COL
CLOSE
ARE YOU SURE?
YES NO
EXECUTE
SIMULATION NO.24-10
TEST
FAX COUNTER DATA CLEAR
1/1
FAX OUTPUT
CLOSE
FAX SEND FAX RECEIVED SEND IMAGES
SEND TIME RECEIVED TIME ACR SEND
NET SCN ORG_SGL Network scanner document read
quantity counter (Single scan job)
INTERNET FAX OUTPUT Internet FAX output quantity
INTERNET FAX SEND OUTPUT Internet FAX send quantity
INTERNET FAX RECEIVE Number of internet FAX receive
INTERNET FAX SEND Number of internet FAX send
MAIL COUNTER Number of E-Mail send
FTP COUNTER Number of FTP send
SMB SEND Numeric SMB send
USB CNT Number of USB save
TRIAL MODE_B&C Trial mode counter (Black and white,
color scan job)
SCAN TO HDD_B/W Scan to HDD record quantity (Black
and white)
SCAN TO HDD_CL Scan to HDD record quantity (Color)
SCAN TO HDD_2CL Scan to HDD record quantity (2-color)
SCAN TO HDD_SGL Scan to HDD record quantity (Single
color)
ARE YOU SURE?
YES NO
EXECUTE
SIMULATION NO.24-15
TEST
NETWORK SCANNER COUTNER DATA CLEAR
1/1
CLOSE
NET SCN ORG_B/W NET SCN ORG_CL
NET SCN ORG_2CL NET SCN ORG_SGL
INTERNET FAX OUTPUT INTERNET FAX SEND OUTPUT
INTERNET FAX RECEIVE INTERNET FAX SEND
MAIL COUNTER FTP COUNTER
SMB SEND USB CNT
TRIAL MODE_B&C SCAN TO HDD_B/W
SCAN TO HDD_CL SCAN TO HDD_2CL
SCAN TO HDD_SGL
SIMULATION NO.24-30
TEST
ADMIN PASSWORD INITIALIZE
CLOSE
EXECUTE

25

25-1
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the devel-
oping section.
Section Process (Developing section)
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the process speed with [MIDDLE], [LOW] or [HIGH]
keys.
The developing motor and the OPC drum motor rotate for 3
min and the detection level of the toner density sensor is dis-
played.

25-2
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to make the initial setting of the toner
density when replacing developer. (Auto-
matic adjustment)
Section Process (Photoconductor/Developing/
Transfer/Cleaning)
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a color to be adjusted with the touch panel.
The developing motor rotates for 3 minutes, and the toner den-
sity sensor makes sampling of the toner density. The detected
level is displayed.
When the developer motor stops, the average value of the
toner density sampling result is set as the reference toner den-
sity control level.
NOTE: When the above operation is interrupted on the way, the
reference toner concentration level is not set. Also when
error code of EE-EC, EE-EL or EE-EU is displayed, the ref-
erence toner density level is not set normally.
(Default value: 128)

26

26-2
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the paper size of the large
capacity tray (LCC). (When the paper size
is changed, this simulation must be exe-
cuted to change the paper size in software.)
Section Paper feed
Operation/Procedure
Select a paper size to be changed with the touch panel.
TCS_K Toner density sensor K
TCS_C Toner density sensor C
TCS_M Toner density sensor M
TCS_Y Toner density sensor Y
TCV_K Toner density control voltage K
TCV_C Toner density control voltage C
TCV_M Toner density control voltage M
TCV_Y Toner density control voltage Y
SIMULATION NO.24-31
TEST
SERVICE PASSWORD INITIALIZE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.25-01
TEST
TONER SENSOR OUTPUT MONITOR
TCS_K
:
TCV_K
:
TCS_C :
TCV_C :
TCS_M :
TCV_M :
TCS_Y :
TCV_Y
:
1/1
CLOSE
EXECUTE LOW MIDDLE HIGH
Automatic developer adjustment value at low
speed
AT DEVE ADJ_L_K
AT DEVE ADJ_L_C
AT DEVE ADJ_L_M
AT DEVE ADJ_L_Y
Automatic developer adjustment value at middle
speed
AT DEVE ADJ_M_K
AT DEVE ADJ_M_C
AT DEVE ADJ_M_M
AT DEVE ADJ_M_Y
Automatic developer adjustment value at high
speed
AT DEVE ADJ_H_K
Automatic developer adjustment control voltage at
low speed
AT DEVE VO_L_K
AT DEVE VO_L_C
AT DEVE VO_L_M
AT DEVE VO_L_Y
middle speed
AT DEVE VO_M_K
AT DEVE VO_M_C
AT DEVE VO_M_M
AT DEVE VO_M_Y
high speed
AT DEVE VO_H_K
M Y C K
EXECUTE
AT DEVE ADJ_L_K 128 : AT DEVE VO_L_Y 128 :
1/1
SIMULATION NO.25-02
TEST
CLOSE
: AT DEVE ADJ_L_Y 128 : AT DEVE VO_M_M 128
AT DEVE VO_L_K 128 :
AT DEVE VO_L_M 128 :
AT DEVE VO_L_C 128 :
1/1
SIMULATION NO.26-02
TEST
SIZE SETUP
TRAY1 : 8.5x11 A4
CLOSE
B5
LCC : 8.5x11 A4 B5
G/LBS SET : GRAM LBS

26-3
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the auditor setting mode. (Set-
ting must be made according to the auditor
use conditions.)
Section Auditor
Operation/Procedure
Select an item to be set with the touch panel.
(*) Details of the vendor mode
Operation 1: Standby during setting time of auto clear.
Default is 60 sec, which can be changed in the
system setting.
Operation 2: Auto clear is not made.
Operation 3: The display is shifted to the initial screen.

26-5
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the count mode of the total
counter and the maintenance counter.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with [|] and [+] keys.
1 = Count up by 1 2 = Count up by 2
3) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 2 is saved.

26-6
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications according to
the destination. (Paper, fixed magnification
ratios, etc.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with the touch panel.
The selected set content is saved.
BUILT-IN
AUDITOR
P10 Built-in auditor mode (standard mode)
operation (Default)
EC1 EC1 mode operation
OUTSIDE
AUDITOR
NONE Normal operation (Default)
P VENDOR1 Old coin vendor mode (Copy mode
management)
P OTHER Vendor mode for an external auditor
connected to the coin vendor I/F
DOC ADJ ON Document filing function enabled
OFF Document filing function disabled (Default)
PF ADJ ON Continuous paper feed is performed.
OFF Continuous paper feed is not performed.
(Default)
VENDOR
MODE (*)
MODE1 Vendor mode 1
MODE2 Vendor mode 2
MODE3 Vendor mode 3 (Default)
COUNTUP
TIMING
FUSER_IN When the paper lead edge passes the
fusing rear sensor.
FUSER_OUT When the paper rear edge passes the
fusing rear sensor.
EXIT_OUT When the paper rear edge passes the
paper exit sensor in the main unit, the right
tray, and the after process unit. (Default)
Completion
of the
specified
quantity
(money
remaining)
Insufficient money during
copy job
Completion
of the
specified
quantity
(no money
remaining)
Black and
white or color
(no money
remaining)
Color
(money
remaining)
Condition 1 Condition 2 Condition 3 Condition 4
MODE1 Operation 1 Operation 2 Operation 2 Operation 1
COUNTUP TIMING FUSER_IN FUSER_OUT EXIT_OUT
SIMULATION NO.26-03
TEST
AUDITOR SETUP
P10 BUILT-IN AUDITOR EC1 :
:
:
:
:
:
CLOSE
1/1
P OTHER OUTSIDE AUDITOR NONE P VENDOR1
ON OFF DOC ADJ
ON OFF PF ADJ
MODE1 MODE3 VENDOR MODE MODE2
A TOTAL (B/W) Total counter (Black and white)
B TOTAL (COL) Total counter (Color)
C MAINTENANCE (B/W) Maintenance counter (Black and white)
D MAINTENANCE (COL) Maintenance counter (Color)
E DEV (B/W) Developer counter (Black and white)
F DEV (COL) Developer counter (Color)
U.S.A. United States of America
CANADA Canada
INCH Inch series, other destinations
JAPAN Japan
AB_B AB series (B5 detection), other destinations
EUROPE Europe
U.K. United Kingdom
AUS. Australia
AB_A AB series (A5 detection), other destinations
CHINA China
A: 2 ;
;
;
;
;
;
TOTAL(B/W)
B: 2 TOTAL(COL)
C: 2 MAINTENANCE(B/W)
D: 2 MAINTENANCE(COL)
A:
SIMULATION NO.26-05
A3(11x17) COUNTUP
2
1 2
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E: 2
2
DEV(B/W)
F: DEV(COL)
SIMULATION NO.26-06
TEST
DESTINATION SETUP
EXECUTE
1/1
U.S.A CANADA INCH JAPAN
AB_B EUROPE U.K. AUS
AB_A CHINA
CLOSE

26-10
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the trial mode of the network
scanner.
Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [OK] key.

26-18
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set Disable/Enable of the toner
save mode operation. (For the Japan and
the UK versions.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [OK] key.

26-30
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operation mode corre-
sponding to the CE mark (Europe safety
standards). (For slow start to drive the fus-
ing heater lamp)
Section
Operation/Procedure
0: Control allowed 1: Control inhibited
2) Press [OK] key.

26-35
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the display mode of SIM 22-4
trouble history when a same trouble
occurred repeatedly. There are two display
modes: display as one trouble and display
as several series of troubles.
Section
Operation/Procedure
0: Display as one trouble
1: Display as series of several troubles
2) Press [OK] key.
TRIAL MODE
(0: YES 1: NO)
0: Trial mode setting
1: Trial mode cancel (Default)
A COPY 0: Copy toner save mode is inhibited. (Default)
1: Copy toner save mode is allowed
B PRINTER 0: Printer toner save mode is inhibited. (Default)
1: Printer toner save mode is allowed.
A:
A: 1 ; TRIAL MODE(0:YES 1:NO)
SIMULATION NO.26-10
NETWORK SCANNER TRIAL MODE SETUP
1
0 1
OK
TEST
CLOSE
A : 0 ; COPY (1:YES 0:NO)
B : 0 ; PRINTER (1:YES 0:NO) A:
SIMULATION NO.26-18
TONER SAVE MODE SETUP
0
0 1
OK
TEST
CLOSE
U.S.A 1 (CE not supported) EUROPE 0 (CE supported)
CANADA 1 (CE not supported) U.K. 0 (CE supported)
INCH 1 (CE not supported) AUS. 0 (CE supported)
JAPAN 1 (CE not supported) AB_A 0 (CE supported)
AB_B 1 (CE not supported) CHINA 0 (CE supported)
A : 1 ; (0:YES 1:NO)
A:
SIMULATION NO.26-30
CE MARK CONTROL SETTING
1
0 1
OK
TEST
CLOSE
A : 0 ; (0:ONCE 1:ANY)
A:
SIMULATION NO.26-35
TROUBLE MEMORY MODE SETUP
0
0 1
OK
TEST
CLOSE

26-38
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set whether printing is continued or
stopped when the developer life is expired
or when the fusing wed ends.
Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [OK] key.

26-41
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set Enable/Disable of the magnifi-
cation ratio automatic select function (AMS)
in the center binding mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
0: AMS Disable 1: AMS Enable
2) Press [OK] key.

26-49
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the copy speed mode of post-
cards.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Select the copy speed mode with the touch panel. (Default: LOW)

26-50
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set Enable/Disable of the black and
white highlight function and the 2-color/Sin-
gle display function.
Section
Operation/Procedure
panel.
(*1) B COLOR MODE
OFF: Displayed ON: Not displayed
A: MAINTENANCE LIFE OVER 0: Print continue
1: Print stop
B: FUSER WEB END 0: Print continue
1: Print stop
U.S.A 0 (Disable) EUROPE 1 (Enable)
CANADA 0 (Disable) U.K. 1 (Enable)
INCH 0 (Disable) AUS. 0 (Disable)
JAPAN 0 (Disable) AB_A 0 (Disable)
AB_B 0 (Disable) CHINA 0 (Disable)
A : 0 ; MAINTENANCE LIFE OVER(0:CONTINUE 1:STOP)
B : 1 ; FUSER WEB END(0:CONTINUE 1:STOP) A:
SIMULATION NO.26-38
ENGINE LIFE OVER SETTING
0
0 1
OK
TEST
CLOSE
A : 1 ; (1:YES 0:NO)
A:
SIMULATION NO.26-41
PAMPHLET MODE AMS SETTING.
1
0 1
OK
TEST
CLOSE
A BW REVERSE
(0: NO 1: YES)
0: Black and white reverse inhibited
1: Black and white reverse allowed
B COLOR MODE (*1) 0 - 7 Refer to the table below.
Set value
Mode inhibit 2-color/Single
counter disable Single 2-color
0 OFF OFF OFF
1 OFF ON OFF
2 ON OFF OFF
3 ON ON OFF
4 OFF OFF ON
5 OFF ON ON
6 ON OFF ON
7 ON ON ON
SIMULATION NO.26-49
TEST
COPY SPEED MODE SETUP
POSTCARD : LOW HIGH
CLOSE
1/1
A : 1 ; BW REVERSE : YES
B : 0 ; COLOR MODE A:
SIMULATION NO.26-50
FUNCTION SETTING
1
0 1
OK
TEST
CLOSE

26-52
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set whether non-print paper (inser-
tion paper, cover, etc.) is counted or not.
Section
Operation/Procedure
0: Counts up. 1: Does not count up.
2) Press [OK] key.

26-53
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set YES/NO of the auto color cali-
bration.
Section
Operation/Procedure
0: NO 1: YES (Default)
2) Press [OK] key.

26-54
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the printer calibration YES/NO.
Section
Operation/Procedure
0: NO 1: YES (Default)
2) Press [OK] key.

26-65
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the finisher alarm mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Select an item to be set with the touch panel.

26-67
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the summer time timing and the
time zone.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a mode to be set with the touch panel.
[TIME ZONE] [SUMMER TIME]
4) Press [OK] key.
A : 1 ; (0:YES 1:NO)
A:
SIMULATION NO.26-52
A BLANK PAPER COUNT MODE SETUP
1
0 1
OK
TEST
CLOSE
A : 1 ; (1:YES 0:NO)
A:
SIMULATION NO.26-53
1
0 1
OK
TEST
CLOSE
LIMIT COPIES ON Staple limit copies ON (Default)
OFF Staple limit copies OFF
A : 1 ; (1:YES 0:NO)
A:
SIMULATION NO.26-54
ENAIBLING OF AUTOMATIC COLOR CALIBRATION OF PRINTER
1
0 1
OK
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-65
TEST
FINISHER ALARM MODE SETUP (STAPLE LIMIT)
CLOSE
1/1
LIMIT COPIES : ON OFF

26-69
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the display of spare toner prep-
aration and near end when the toner quan-
tity reaches 25%.
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [OK] key.
*1: Enable when the set item B is set to "0." The numbers of
printable quantity on the table above are estimated with A4
paper and the print rate of 5%.
The toner near end message is displayed. When the printing
quantity set in item D is reached, it is judged as "Toner end."
During this operation, insufficient density, thin spot, or improper
color balance may occur depending on the user's status of use.
To avoid this symptom, set the set item D to "1."
*2: The output quantity in items D and E are based on A4 paper
with print ratio of 5%.
TIME
ZONE
A GMT 0 +
1
B GMT HOUR 0 - 13 GMT hour
C GMT MINUTE 0 - 59 GMT minute
D INTERNET 0 Internet clock YES
1 Internet clock NO
SUMMER
TIME
A AUTO SUMMER
TIME ADJ
0 Automatic summer time
adjustment ON
1 Automatic summer time
adjustment OFF
B ADJ TIME HOUR 0 - 23 Adjustment time: Hour
C ADJ TIME
MINUTE
0 - 59 Adjustment time: Minute
D START TIME
MONTH
1 - 12 Start time: Month
E START TIME DAY 1 - 31 Start time: Day
F START TIME
WEEK
1 - 5 Start time: Week
G START TIME A
DAY OF THE
WEEK
1 MONDAY
2 TUESDAY
3 WEDNESDAY
4 THURSDAY
5 FRIDAY
6 SATURDAY
7 SUNDAY
H START TIME
HOUR
0 - 23 Start time: Hour
I START TIME
MINUTE
0 - 59 Start time: Minute
J START MODE 0 DAY
1 WEEK & A DAY OF THE
WEEK
K START UTC 0 YES
1 NO
L END TIME
MONTH
1 - 12 End time: Month
M END TIME DAY 1 - 31 End time: Day
N END TIME WEEK 1 - 5 End time: Week
O END TIME A DAY
OF THE WEEK
1 MONDAY
2 TUESDAY
3 WEDNESDAY
4 THURSDAY
5 FRIDAY
6 SATURDAY
7 SUNDAY
P END TIME HOUR 0 - 23 End time: Hour
Q END TIME
MINUTE
0 - 59 End time: Minute
R END MODE 0 DAY
1 WEEK & A DAY OF THE
WEEK
S END UTC 0 YES
1 NO
A : 1 ; AUTO SUMMER TIME ADJ : OFF
B : 9 ; AUTO TIME HOUR
C : 0 ; AUTO TIME MINUTE
D : 1 ; START TIME MONTH : YES
A:
SIMULATION NO.26-67
SUMMER TIME&TIME ZONE ADJUSTMENT
1
0 1
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 1 ; START TIME DAY
F : 1 ; START TIME WEEK
G : 1 ; START TIME A DAY OF THE WEEK : MONDAY
H: 1 ; START TIME HOUR
I : 0 ; START TIME MINUTE
J : 0 ; START MODE : DAY
K : 0 ; START UTC : YES
L : 0 ; END TIME MONTH
EXECUTE TIME ZONE SUMMER TIME
A TONER
PREPARATION
0: Toner ready message, icon display
(Default)
1: The toner preparation message is not
displayed.
B TONER NEAR
END
0: Toner near end message display (Default)
1: The toner near end message is not
displayed.
C TONER END 1: Cartridge motor operation enabled at
NEAR END (Setting disable)
2: Cartridge motor operation disabled at
NEAR END (Setting disable)
3: Cartridge motor operation disabled at
NEAR END
D TH COUNT (CL) *2 1: Toner end detection in 0 sheet after toner
near end
2: Toner end detection in 25 sheets after
toner near end *1
3: Toner end detection in 50 sheet after toner
near end *1
toner near end *1
toner near end *1
E CONTINUOUS TH
COUNT (BK) *2
1: Cover open detection (recognition) in
120sec after toner cover open
A: 0 ; TONER PREPARATION(0:YES 1:NO)
B: 0 ; TONER NEAR END (0:YES 1:NO)
C: 3 ; NEAR END
A:
SIMULATION NO.26-69
TONER NEAR END SETTING
0
0 1
OK
TEST
CLOSE
D: 3 ; TH COUNTER(CL)
E: 3 ; CONTINUOUS TH COUNT(BK)

27

27-1
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set non-detection of communica-
tion error (U7-00) with RIC
Section
Operation/Procedure
0: Non-detection 1: Detection
2) Press [OK] key.

27-2
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS function (sender regis-
tration number, host server telephone num-
ber).
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with touch panel.
[USER FAX NO] [SERVA TEL NO]
3) Press [SET] key.

27-4
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS function (initial, call,
toner order automatic send).
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [OK] key.

27-5
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the machine tag No. (This func-
tion allows the host computer to check the
machine tag No.)
Section Communication (RIC/MODEM)
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the set value (max. 8 digits) with 10-key. The set value is
displayed in NEW.
2) Press [SET] key.
USER FAX_NO. Sender registration number (Max. 16 digits)
SERVA TEL_NO. Host server telephone number (Max. 16 digits)
A : 0 ; DISABLE : YES
A:
SIMULATION NO.27-01
DISABLING OF U7-00 TROUBLE
0
0 1
OK
TEST
CLOSE
USER FAX_NO. SERVA TEL_NO.
SIMULATION NO.27-02
TEST
FSS FUNCTION SETUP (INPUT)
1/1
0000000000000001 :
:
PRESENT
NEW
SET
CLOSE
PAUSE
A FSS MODE 0: Exclusive for send in the NE-B mode
1: For send and receive in the NE-F
mode (Default)
B RETRY 0 - 15 : Resend number (2: default)
C TIMER (MINUTE) 1 - 15 : Resend timer (min) (3: default)
D TONER ORDER
TIMING (K)
Toner order automatic
send time (K)
5: 100% - 75%
4: 74% - 50%
3: 49% - 25% (Default)
2: 25% or less
1: Near end
0: Empty
E TONER ORDER
TIMING (C)
send time (C)
5: 100% - 75%
4: 74% - 50%
3: 49% - 25% (Default)
2: 25% or less
1: Near end
0: Empty
F TONER ORDER
TIMING (M)
send time (K)
5: 100% - 75%
4: 74% - 50%
3: 49% - 25% (Default)
2: 25% or less
1: Near end
0: Empty
G TONER ORDER
TIMING (Y)
send time (K)
5: 100% - 75%
4: 74% - 50%
3: 49% - 25% (Default)
2: 25% or less
1: Near end
0: Empty
A : 1 ; FSS MODE: NEB2
B : 2 ; RETRY
C : 3 ; TIMER (MINUTE)
D : 3 ; TONER ORDER TIMING (K): 3 (49% - 25%)
A:
SIMULATION NO.27-04
FSS FUNCTION SETUP
1
0 3
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 3 ; TONER ORDER TIMING (C): 3 (49% - 25%)
F : 3 ; TONER ORDER TIMING (M): 3 (49% - 25%)
G : 3 ; TONER ORDER TIMING (Y): 3 (49% - 25%)
SIMULATION NO.27-05
TEST
TAG# SETTING
11111111 PRESENT :
NEW :
CLOSE

27-6
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS function (manual ser-
vice call).
Section
Operation/Procedure
0: YES (Default) 1: NO
2) Press [OK] key.

27-7
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS function (enable, alert
call).
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [OK] key.
*1: The FSS function setting can be changed only from Disable to
Enable. (Cannot be changed from Enable to Disable.)
*2: Alert send timing

27-9
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Paper transport time between sensors /
Gain adjustment retry number setting
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [OK] key.

27-10
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the history information of
trouble prediction
Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key.
The history information of trouble prediction is cleared.
A FUNCTION 0: FSS function enable
1: FSS function disable (*1) (Default)
B ALERT 0: Alert call enable (*2) (Default)
1: Alert call disable
No alert cause Initial state / Trouble / Continuous JAM alert
Maintenance When the maintenance timing is reached.
Service call When pressing Service call.
Toner send request When the toner order automatic send setting is
reached.
Toner collection
request
Revision of the toner installation date (only for a
new product)
A : 0 ; 0:YES, 1:NO
A:
SIMULATION NO.27-06
MANUAL SERVICE CALL SETUP
0
0 1
OK
TEST
CLOSE
A : 1 ; FUNCTION(0:YES 1:NO)
B : 0 ; ALERT(0:YES 1:NO) A:
SIMULATION NO.27-07
FSS FUNCTION SETUP (FUNCTION)
1
0 1
OK
TEST
CLOSE
A FEED TIME 1 0 - 100: Threshold value of the paper
transport time between sensors
(Main unit) (50: Default)
B FEED TIME 2 0 - 100: Threshold value of the paper
transport time between sensors
(DSPF) (50: Default)
C GAIN ADJUSTMENT
RETRY
1 - 100: Threshold value of the gain
adjustment retry number (50:
Default)
D JAM ALERT 1 - 100: Threshold value of the continuous
JAM alert judgment (10: Default)
Target history Serial communication retry number history
High density process control error history
Medium density process control error history
Automatic registration adjustment error history
Gain adjustment retry history
Paper transport time between sensors
A : 50 ; FEED TIME1
B : 50 ; FEED TIME2
C : 50 ; GAIN ADJUSTMENT RETRY
D : 10 ; JAM ALERT
A:
SIMULATION NO.27-09
FSS FUNCTION ADJUSTMENT
50
0 100
OK
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.27-10
TEST
TROUBLE PRECOGNITION HISTORY CLEAR
CLOSE
EXECUTE

27-11
Purpose Other
Function (Purpose) Used to check the serial communication
retry number history and the scanner gain
adjustment retry number history.
Section
Operation/Procedure
The serial communication retry number history and the scanner
gain adjustment retry number history are displayed.

27-12
Purpose Other
Function (Purpose) Used to check the error history of high den-
sity, half tone process control, and auto-
matic registration adjustment.
Section
Operation/Procedure
The high density error history, the half tone error history, and the
automatic registration adjustment error history are displayed.

27-13
Purpose Other
Function (Purpose) Used to check the history of paper transport
time between sensors.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Select the display with [|] and [+] keys.
Serial communication retry number
history display
LSU1
LSU2
DESK1
DESK2
INSERTER1
INSERTER2
FINISHER1
FINISHER2
DSPF1
DSPF2
Scanner gain adjustment retry history
display
SCAN GAIN ADJ1
SCAN GAIN ADJ2
SCAN GAIN ADJ3
SCAN GAIN ADJ4
SCAN GAIN ADJ5
DSPF gain adjustment retry history
display
DSPF GAIN ADJ1
DSPF GAIN ADJ2
DSPF GAIN ADJ3
DSPF GAIN ADJ4
DSPF GAIN ADJ5
HV_ERR1 High density error history 1
H_TONE ERR1 Half tone error history 1
SIMULATION NO.27-11
TEST
TROUBLE PRECOGNITION RESULT
CLOSE
DATE RETRY
LSU1 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999999
LSU2 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999999
DESK1 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999999
DESK2 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999999
INSERTER1 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999999
INSERTER2 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999999
FINISHER1 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999999
FINISHER2 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999999
DSPF1 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999999
DESK2 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999999
SCAN GAIN ADJ1 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999999
SCAN GAIN ADJ2 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999999
SCAN GAIN ADJ3 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999999
SCAN GAIN ADJ4 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999999
SCAN GAIN ADJ5 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999999
DSPF GAIN ADJ1 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999999
DSPF GAIN ADJ2 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999999
1/2
AUTO REG ADJ1 Automatic registration adjustment error history 1
FEED TIME1 History 1 of paper transport time between
sensors (ms)
sensors (ms)
sensors (ms)
sensors (ms)
sensors (ms)
sensors (ms)
sensors (ms)
sensors (ms)
sensors (ms)
sensors (ms)
FEED TIME1(DSPF) History 1 of paper transport time between DSPF
sensors (ms)
sensors (ms)
sensors (ms)
sensors (ms)
sensors (ms)
sensors (ms)
sensors (ms)
sensors (ms)
sensors (ms)
sensors (ms)
SIMULATION NO.27-12
TEST
TROUBLE PRECOGNITION RESULT(ADJUSTMENT_ERROR)
CLOSE
DATE ERROR CODE
1/1
HV_ERR1 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 9999
HV_ERR2 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 9999
HV_ERR3 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 9999
HV_ERR4 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 9999
HV_ERR5 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 9999
H_TONE ERR1 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 9999
H_TONE ERR2 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 9999
H_TONE ERR3 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 9999
H_TONE ERR4 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 9999
H_TONE ERR5 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 9999
AUTO REG ADJ1 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 9999
AUTO REG ADJ2 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 9999
AUTO REG ADJ3 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 9999
AUTO REG ADJ4 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 9999
AUTO REG ADJ5 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 9999
<Cord between sensors>
* Sensor A and sensor B On On : Possibly caused by slip in
paper transport.
Off Off: The sensor actuator response trouble can be
detected.

27-14
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS function connection
mode. (Only "Disable Enable" is
allowed.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
0: Disable (Default) 1: Enable
2) Press [OK] key.

30

30-1
sors and the detectors in other than the
paper feed section and the control circuits.
Section
Operation/Procedure
played.
Sensors A Sensors B Status
Cord between sensors
Bk Color Heavy
paper
PPD1 PPD2 On On 0 40 80
Off Off 1 41 81
PPD2 POD1 On On 2 42 82
Off Off 3 43 83
POD1 POD2 On On 4 44 84
Off Off 5 45 85
POM
reverse
rotation
POD3 On On 6 46 86
APPD1 APPD2 On On 0E 4E 8E
Off Off 0F 4F 8F
APPD2 PPD1 On On 10 50 90
Off Off 11 51 91
CPUC1 CPFD1 On On 12 52 92
CPFD1 PPD1 On On 14 54 94
Off Off 15 55 95
CPUC2 CPFD2 On On 16 56 96
CPFD2 CPFD1 On On 18 58 98
Off Off 19 59 99
MPUC PPD1 On On 1A 5A 9A
SPPD2 SPPD3 On On C4
Off Off C5
Off Off C7
Off Off C9
SPPD5 SPOD On On CA
Off Off CB
SIMULATION NO.27-13
TEST
TROUBLE PRECOGNITION RESULT(FEED TIME)
CLOSE
DATE SENSOR CODE PASS TIME STANDARD TIME
FEED TIME1 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999 99999 99999
FEED TIME2 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999 99999 99999
FEED TIME3 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999 99999 99999
FEED TIME4 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999 99999 99999
FEED TIME5 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999 99999 99999
FEED TIME6 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999 99999 99999
FEED TIME7 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999 99999 99999
FEED TIME8 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999 99999 99999
FEED TIME9 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999 99999 99999
FEED TIME10 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999 99999 99999
FEED TIME1(SPF) : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999 99999 99999
FEED TIME2(SPF) : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999 99999 99999
FEED TIME3(SPF) : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999 99999 99999
FEED TIME4(SPF) : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999 99999 99999
FEED TIME5(SPF) : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999 99999 99999
FEED TIME6(SPF) : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999 99999 99999
FEED TIME7(SPF) : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999 99999 99999
1/2
PPD1 Registration pre-detection
PPD2 Registration detection
POD1 Fusing after-detection
POD2 Main unit paper exit detection
POD3 Right tray paper exit detection
TFD Main unit paper exit full detection
TFD_R Right tray paper exit full detection
DSW_R Right door open/close detection
DSW_D Front cover open/close detection D
DSW_FU Front cover open/close detection U
DSW_FL Front cover open/close detection L
VTOD Vertical transport path open/close detection
DHPD_K K phase detection
DHPD_C C phase detection
DHPD_M M phase detection
DHPD_Y Y phase detection
TNFD Waste toner full detection
TBBOX Waste toner installation detection
CCHP Charger cleaner HP detection
CCM_ROT Charger cleaner rotation detection
LPPD LCC transport sensor
T2PPD Tray 2 transport detection
T1PPD1 Tray 1 transport detection 1
T1PPD2 Tray 1 transport detection 2
FUEXD Fusing external variation sensor
WEB_INL Fusing web initial detection
WEB_END Fusing web end detection
PTCM_HP PTC cleaner HP detection
TBLTC Transfer belt separation sensor CL
TBLTB Transfer belt separation sensor BK
THPS Secondary transfer separation home position sensor 1
A:
A : 0 ; CONNECTION TEST MODE(1:ON 0:OFF)
SIMULATION NO.27-14
FSS TEST MODE SETUP
0
0 1
OK
TEST
CLOSE

30-2
sors and the detectors in the paper feed
section and the control circuits.
Section
Operation/Procedure
played.

33

33-1
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the card
reader sensor and the control circuit.
Section
Operation/Procedure
played.

40

40-2
Purpose Adjustment/Setting
Function (Purpose) Manual paper feed tray paper width detec-
tor detection level adjustment
Section Paper feed
Operation/Procedure
1) Set the manual paper feed guide to the maximum width
(MAX).
The maximum width (MAX) detection level is recognized.
3) Set the manual paper feed guide to the P1 width (A4).
The P1 width (A4) detection level is recognized.
5) Set the manual paper feed guide to the P2 width (A4R).
The P2 width (A4R) detection level is recognized.
7) Set the manual paper feed guide to the minimum width (MIN).
The minimum width (MIN) detection level is recognized.
If the above procedures are not properly performed, "ERROR" is
displayed. If properly performed, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
MPED Manual paper feed paper empty detection
MPLD1 Manual feed paper length detection 1
MTOP1 Manual feed tray reduction detection
MTOP2 Manual feed tray extension detection
MPFD Manual paper feed paper entry detection
TANSET Tandem tray installation detection
T1SPD Tandem tray 1 paper remaining quantity detector
T1LUD Tandem tray 1 upper limit detector
T1PED Tandem tray 1 paper presence
T2SPD Tandem tray 2 paper remaining quantity detector
T2LUD Tandem tray 2 upper limit detector
T2PED Tandem tray 2 paper presence
C3SS1 Tray 3 rear edge detection 1
C3PFD Tray 3 paper entry detection
C3LUD Tray 3 lift HP detection
C3PED Tray 3 paper empty detection
C3SPD Tray 3 paper remaining quantity detection
C4PFD Tray 4 paper entry detection
C4LUD Tray 4 lift HP detection
C4PED Tray 4 paper empty detection
C4SPD Tray 4 paper remaining quantity detection
TRAY3 LEN Tray 3 guide plate position
TRAY3 AD Tray 3 paper width detection volume output
FIN SENSOR CHECK
TEST
1/1
PPD1 PPD2 POD1 POD2
POD3 TFD TFD_R DSW_R
TNFD TBBOX CCHP COM LOT
DSW_D DSW_FU DSW_FL VTOD
DHPD_K DHPD_C DHPD_M DHPD_Y
LPPD T2PPD T1PPD1 T1PPD2
FUEXD WEB_INL WEB_END PTCM_HP
TBLTC TBLTB THPS
TRAY SENSOR CHECK(MAIN) TRAY3_LEN: **** TRAY3_AD: ***
TEST
1/1
C3PFD C3LUD C3PED C3SPD
MPED MPLD1 MTOP1 MTOP2
MPFD TANSET T1SPD T1LUD
T1PED T2SPD T2LUD T2PED
C3SS1 C3SS2 C3SS3 C3SS4
C4SS1 C4SS2 C4SS3 C4SS4
C4PFD C4LUD C4PED C4SPD
CARD Card presence detection
DATA Card number signal detection
CLOCK Reference clock signal detection
MAX POSITION Manual feed maximum width
P1 (A4) POSITION Manual feed P1 position width (A4)
P2 (A4R) POSITION Manual feed P2 position width
MIN POSITION Manual feed minimum width
CARD READER SENSOR CHECK
TEST
1/1
CARD DATA CLOCK

40-7
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the manual paper feed tray
width detection level.
Section Paper feed
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [OK] key.

40-12
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the tray 3 paper width
detection level adjustment.
Section Paper feed
Operation/Procedure
1) Set the tray 3 paper guide to the maximum width (MAX).
2) Close the tray 3.
The maximum width (MAX) detection level is recognized.
4) Set the tray 3 paper guide to the minimum width (MIN).
5) Close the tray 3.
The minimum width (MIN) detection level is recognized.
If the above procedures are not properly performed, "ERROR" is
displayed. If properly performed, "COMPLETE" is displayed.

41

41-1
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the docu-
ment size sensor and the control circuit.
Section
Operation/Procedure
played.

41-2
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document size sensor
detection level.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Open the document cover, and press [EXECUTE] key without
any document on the document table.
The sensor level without document is recognized.
2) Set an A3 (11 x 17) paper on the document table, and press
[EXECUTE] key.
The sensor level with a document is recognized.
When the above operation is completed, it is displayed.
Item
Default
value
A MAX POSITION Manual feed maximum width 241
B P1 (A4) POSITION Manual feed P1 position width
(A4)
231
C P2 (A4R) POSITION Manual feed P2 position width 140
D MIN POSITION Manual feed minimum width 19
SIMULATION NO.40-02
TEST
CLOSE
EXECUTE
A : 241 ; MAX POSITION
B : 231 ; P1(A4) POSITION
C : 140 ; P2(A4R) POSITION
D : 19 ; MIN POSITION
A:
SIMULATION NO.40-07
BYPASS TRAY VALUE SETTING
241
0 255
OK
TEST
CLOSE
OCSW Document cover status Open: Normal display
Close: Highlighted
PD1 - 7 Document detection
sensor status
No document: Normal display
Document present: Highlighted
SIMULATION NO.40-12
TEST
TRAY3 ADJUSTMENT
CLOSE
EXECUTE
PD SENSOR CHECK
TEST
1/1
OCSW PD1 PD2 PD3
PD4 PD5 PD6 PD7
SIMULATION NO.41-02
TEST
EXECUTE
CLOSE
WITH THE ORIGINAL COVER OPENED, TURN ON THE EXECUTE
KEY WITH THE ORIGINAL ON THE ORIGINAL TABLE.

41-3
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the docu-
ment size sensor and the control circuit.
Section
Operation/Procedure
The detection output levels (A/D value) of OCSW and the docu-
ment detection sensors (PD1 to PD7) are displayed in real time.
The range of PD1 to PD7 light reception (A/D value) is 1 to 255.
(128: Default)

43

43-1
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the fusing temperature in each
mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [OK] key.
Item
Default value
55/62-
sheet
machine
70-sheet
machine
A HL_UM READY Upper thermistor main
set value when ready
standby
180 185
B HL_LM READY Lower thermistor main
set value when ready
standby
135 140
C HL_US READY Upper thermistor sub set
value when ready
standby
165 165
D HL_EX READY External thermistor set
value when ready
standby
205 205
E HL_UM PLAIN
PAPER BW
Black and white plain
paper upper thermistor
main set value
185 190
F HL_LM PLAIN
PAPER BW
paper lower thermistor
main set value
150 155
G HL_US PLAIN
PAPER BW
sub set value
175 180
H HL_EX PLAIN
PAPER BW
paper external
thermistor set value
220 220
SIMULATION NO.41-03
TEST
PD SENSOR DISPLAY
OCSW 1 :
1/1
PD1[ ] :
PD2[ ] :
PD3[ ] :
PD4[ ] :
PD5[ ] :
PD6[ ] :
PD7[ ] :
CLOSE
I HL_UM PLAIN
PAPER CL
Color plain paper upper
thermistor main set
value
175 175
J HL_LM PLAIN
PAPER CL
Color plain paper lower
thermistor main set
value
120 120
K HL_US PLAIN
PAPER CL
Color plain paper upper
thermistor sub set value
175 175
L HL_EX PLAIN
PAPER CL
Color plain paper
external thermistor set
value
205 205
M WARMUP
FUMON HL_EX
TEMP
Fusing motor front
rotation start external
170 175
N WARMUP
FUMOFF TIME
Fusing motor front
rotation continuation
time thermistor set value
10 5
O WARM UP END
TIME
Warm up completion
time
250 250
P HL_UM
HEAVY1
PAPER BW
Black and white heavy
paper 1 upper thermistor
main set value
185 185
Q HL_LM HEAVY1
PAPER BW
paper 1 lower thermistor
main set value
130 130
R HL_US HEAVY1
PAPER BW
sub set value
175 175
S HL_EX HEAVY1
PAPER BW
paper 1 external
220 220
T HL_UM
HEAVY1
PAPER CL
Color heavy paper 1
upper thermistor main
set value
185 185
U HL_LM HEAVY
1 PAPER CL
Color heavy paper 1
lower thermistor main
set value
130 130
V HL_US HEAVY1
PAPER CL
Color heavy paper 1
upper thermistor sub set
value
175 175
W HL_EX HEAVY1
PAPER CL
Color heavy paper 1
value
205 205
X HL_UM
HEAVY2
PAPER BW
main set value
185 185
Y HL_LM HEAVY2
PAPER BW
paper 2 lower thermistor
main set value
140 140
Z HL_US HEAVY2
PAPER BW
sub set value
185 185
AA HL_EX HEAVY2
PAPER BW
paper 2 external
220 220
AB HL_UM
HEAVY2
PAPER CL
Color heavy paper 2
set value
185 185
AC HL_LM HEAVY2
PAPER CL
Color heavy paper 2
set value
140 140
AD HL_US HEAVY2
PAPER CL
Color heavy paper 2
value
185 185
AE HL_EX HEAVY2
PAPER CL
Color heavy paper 2
value
210 210
AF HL_UM OHP
PAPER
OHP upper thermistor
main set value
180 180
AG HL_LM OHP
PAPER
OHP lower thermistor
main set value
130 130
AH HL_US OHP
PAPER
OHP upper thermistor
sub set value
180 180
Item
Default value
55/62-
sheet
machine
70-sheet
machine

43-4
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the fusing temperature
setup 2 in each operation mode. (Contin-
ued from SIM 43-1.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [OK] key.
AI HL_EX OHP
PAPER
OHP external thermistor
set value
220 220
AJ HL_UM ENV
PAPER
Envelope upper
thermistor main set
value
190 190
AK HL_LM ENV
PAPER
Envelope lower
thermistor main set
value
150 150
AL HL_US ENV
PAPER
Envelope upper
190 190
AM HL_EX ENV
PAPER
Envelope external
220 220
AN HL_UM E-STAR Upper thermistor main
set value when
preheating
173 178
AO HL_US E-STAR Preheating upper
163 165
AP HL_EX E-STAR Preheating external
180 195
AQ HL_UM PRE-
JOB
Upper thermistor main
set value when
recovering from
preheating
180 185
AR HL UM THIN
PAPER BW
Black and white thin
main set value
165 165
AS HL LM THIN
PAPER BW
main set value
130 130
AT HL US THIN
PAPER BW
sub set value
165 165
AU HL EX THIN
PAPER BW
Black and white external
195 195
AV HL UM THIN
PAPER CL
Color thin paper upper
thermistor main set
value
165 165
A
W
HL LM THIN
PAPER CL
Color thin paper lower
thermistor main set
value
120 120
AX HL US THIN
PAPER CL
Color thin paper upper
165 165
AY HL EX THIN
PAPER CL
Color thin paper external
195 195
AZ HL UM THIN
PAPER READY
Thin paper ready upper
thermistor main set
value
165 170
BA HL UM REC
PAPER BW
Black and white recycled
main set value
175 180
BB HL LM REC
PAPER BW
main set value
140 145
BC HL US REC
PAPER BW
sub set value
165 170
BD HL EX REC
PAPER BW
paper external
thermistor main set
value
220 220
BE HL UM REC
PAPER CL
Color recycled paper
set value
165 165
BF HL LM REC
PAPER CL
set value
130 130
BG HL US REC
PAPER CL
value
165 165
BH HL EX REC
PAPER CL
value
195 195
Item
Default value
55/62-
sheet
machine
70-sheet
machine
BI HL UM REC
PAPER READY
Recycled paper reed
temperature value
175 180
BJ COOL DOWN
CTRL
Cool down YES/NO 1 1
Item
Default value
55/62-
sheet
machine
70-sheet
machine
A HL_UM PLAIN
PAPER BW DUP
paper duplex upper
thermistor main set
value
185 190
B HL_LM PLAIN
PAPER BW DUP
paper duplex lower
thermistor main set
value
150 155
C HL_US PLAIN
PAPER BW DUP
paper duplex upper
175 180
D HL_EX PLAIN
PAPER BW DUP
paper duplex external
220 220
E PLAIN PAPER
BW DUP APP
CNT
1 1
F HL_UM PLAIN
PAPER CL DUP
Color plain paper
duplex upper thermistor
main set value
170 170
G HL_LM PLAIN
PAPER CL DUP
Color plain paper
duplex lower thermistor
main set value
140 140
H HL_US PLAIN
PAPER CL DUP
Color plain paper
sub set value
165 165
Item
Default value
55/62-
sheet
machine
70-sheet
machine
A : 180 ; HL_UM READY
B : 135 ; HL_LM READY
C : 165 ; HL_US READY
D : 205 ; HL_EX READY
A:
SIMULATION NO.43-01
FUSER TEMP SETUP FOR PAPER
180
70 230
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 185 ; HL_UM PLAIN PAPER BW
F : 150 ; HL_LM PLAIN PAPER BW
G : 175 ; HL_US PLAIN PAPER BW
H: 220 ; HL_EX PLAIN PAPER BW
I : 175 ; HL_UM PLAIN PAPER CL
J : 120 ; HL_LM PLAIN PAPER CL
K : 175 ; HL_US PLAIN PAPER CL
L : 205 ; HL_EX PLAIN PAPER CL

43-20
Function (Purpose) Used to set the environmental correction
under low temperature and low humidity (L/
L) for the fusing temperature setting in each
mode (SIM 43-1).
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [OK] key.
Correction value: -49 to +49, 1 count = 1C change
I HL_EX PLAIN
PAPER CL DUP
Color plain paper
duplex external
205 205
J PLAIN PAPER CL
DUP APP CNT
Color plain paper
duplex applicable
number of sheets
0 0
K HL_UM HEAVY
PAPER BW DUP
paper duplex upper
thermistor main set
value
180 180
L HL_LM HEAVY
PAPER BW DUP
paper duplex lower
thermistor main set
value
130 130
M HL_US HEAVY
PAPER BW DUP
paper duplex upper
180 180
N HL_EX HEAVY
PAPER BW DUP
220 220
O HEAVY PAPER
BW DUP APP
CNT
paper duplex applicable
number of sheets
1 1
P HL_UM HEAVY
PAPER CL DUP
Color heavy paper
main set value
170 170
Q HL_LM HEAVY
PAPER CL DUP
Color heavy paper
duplex lower thermistor
main set value
120 120
R HL_US HEAVY
PAPER CL DUP
Color heavy paper
sub set value
170 170
S HL_EX HEAVY
PAPER CL DUP
Color heavy paper
duplex external
200 200
T HEAVY PAPER
CL DUP APP CNT
Color heavy paper
duplex applicable
number of sheets.
1 1
Item
Default value
55/62-
sheet
machine
70-sheet
machine
A :185 ` HL_UM PLAIN PAPER BW DUP
B : 150 ` HL_LM PLAIN PAPER BW DUP
C : 175 ` HL_US PLAIN PAPER BW DUP
D: 220 ` HL_EX PLAIN PAPER BW DUP
A:
SIMULATION NO.43-04
FUSER TEMP SETUP FOR PAPER
185
70 230
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 1 ` PLAIN PAPER BW DUP APP CNT
F : 170 ` HL_UM PLAIN PAPER CL DUP
G: 140 ` HL_LM PLAIN PAPER CL DUP
H: 165 ` HL_US PLAIN PAPER CL DUP
I : 205 ` HL_E PLAIN PAPER CL DUP
J : 0 ` PLAIN PAPER CL DUP APP CNT
K: 180 ` HL_UM HEAVY PAPER BW DUP
L : 130 ` HL_LM HEAVY PAPER BW DUP
Item
Default
value
A HL_UM READY
LL
Correction value for upper thermistor
main set value when ready under LL
environment
65
B HL_LM READY
LL
Correction value for LL environment
ready standby lower thermistor main
set value
65
C HL_US READY
LL
sub set value when ready under LL
environment
65
D HL_EX READY
LL
Correction value for external
thermistor set value when ready
under LL environment
60
E HL_UM PLAIN
BW LL
Correction value for black and white
plain paper upper thermistor main set
value under LL environment
65
F HL_LM PLAIN
BW LL
black and white plain paper lower
thermistor main set value
65
G HL_US PLAIN
BW LL
plain paper upper thermistor sub set
65
H HL_EX PLAIN
BW LL
plain paper external thermistor set
50
I HL_UM PLAIN
CL LL
Correction value for color plain paper
upper thermistor main set value
60
J HL_LM PLAIN CL
LL
color plain paper lower thermistor
main set value
60
K HL_US PLAIN CL
LL
upper thermistor sub set value under
LL environment
60
L HL_EX PLAIN CL
LL
external thermistor set value under
LL environment
50
M WARMUP
FUMON HL_EX
TEMP LL
fusing motor front rotation start
external thermistor set value
40
N WARMUP
FUMOFF TIME
LL
fusing motor front rotation
continuation time
80
O WARMUP END
TIME LL
Correction value for warm-up
completion time under LL
environment
75
P HL_UM HEAVY1
BW LL
black and white heavy paper 1 upper
65
Q HL_LM HEAVY1
BW LL
black and white heavy paper 1 lower
65
R HL_US HEAVY1
BW LL
65
S HL_EX HEAVY1
BW LL
black and white heavy paper 1
50
T HL UM HEAVY1
CL LL
heavy paper 1 upper thermistor main
set value
60
U HL LM HEAVY1
CL LL
color heavy paper 1 lower thermistor
main set value
65
V HL US HEAVY1
CL LL
heavy paper 1 upper thermistor sub
set value
60
W HL EX HEAVY1
CL LL
color heavy paper 1 external
65

43-21
Function (Purpose) Used to set the environment correction
under high temperature and high humidity
(H/H) for the fusing temperature setting
(SIM 43-1) in each paper mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
X HL UM HEAVY2
BW LL
65
Y HL LM HEAVY2
BW LL
65
Z HL US HEAVY2
BW LL
65
AA HL EX HEAVY2
BW LL
50
AB HL UM HEAVY2
CL LL
set value
65
AC HL LM HEAVY2
CL LL
main set value
65
AD HL US HEAVY2
CL LL
set value
65
AE HL EX HEAVY2
CL LL
60
AF HL_UM OHP LL Correction value for OHP upper
thermistor main set value under LL
environment
65
AG HL_LM OHP LL Correction value for LL environment
OHP lower thermistor mains et value
65
AH HL_US OHP LL Correction value for OHP upper
thermistor sub set value under LL
environment
65
AI HL_EX OHP LL Correction value for OHP external
thermistor set value under LL
environment
50
AJ HL_UM
ENVELOPE LL
Correction value for envelope upper
thermistor main set value under LL
environment
60
AK HL_LM
ENVELOPE LL
envelope lower thermistor main set
value
60
AL HL_US
ENVELOPE LL
Correction value for envelope upper
thermistor sub set value under LL
environment
60
AM HL_EX
ENVELOPE LL
Correction value for envelope
LL environment
50
AN HL_UM E-STAR
LL
main set value when preheating
60
AO HL_US E-STAR
LL
preheating upper thermistor sub set
value
60
AP HL_EX E-STAR
LL
preheating external thermistor set
value
55
AQ HL_UM PRE-
JOB LL
main set value when recovering from
preheating under LL environment
60
AR HL UM THIN
PAPER BW LL
black and white thin paper upper
55
AS HL LM THIN
PAPER BW LL
black and white thin paper lower
55
AT HL US THIN
PAPER BW LL
55
AU HL EX THIN
PAPER BW LL
black and white thin paper external
50
AV HL UM THIN
PAPER CL LL
color thin paper upper thermistor
main set value
55
Item
Default
value
A
W
HL LM THIN
PAPER CL LL
color thin paper lower thermistor
main set value
55
AX HL US THIN
PAPER CL LL
color thin paper upper thermistor sub
set value
55
AY HL EX THIN
PAPER CL LL
color thin paper external thermistor
set value
50
AZ HL UM THIN
PAPER READY
LL
thin paper ready upper thermistor
main temperature value
55
BA HL UM REC
PAPER BW LL
black and white recycled paper upper
55
BB HL LM REC
PAPER BW LL
black and white recycled paper lower
55
BC HL US REC
PAPER BW LL
55
BD HL EX REC
PAPER BW LL
black and white recycled paper
50
BE HL UM REC
PAPER CL LL
color recycled paper upper
55
BF HL LM REC
PAPER CL LL
color recycled paper lower thermistor
main set value
55
BG HL US REC
PAPER CL LL
55
BH HL EX REC
PAPER CL LL
color recycled paper external
50
BI HL UM REC
PAPER READY
LL
recycled paper ready upper
thermistor main temperature value
55
Item
Default
value
A : 65 ` HL_UM READY LL
B : 65 ` HL_LM READY LL
C : 65 ` HL_US READY LL
D : 60 ` HL_EX READY LL
A:
SIMULATION NO.43-20
FUSER TEMP ADJUSTMENT (LL)
65
1 99
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 65 ` HL_UM PLAIN BW LL
F : 65 ` HL_LM PLAIN BW LL
G : 65 ` HL_US PLAIN BW LL
H: 50 ` HL_EX PLAIN BW LL
I : 60 ` HL_UM PLAIN CL LL
J : 60 ` HL_LM PLAIN CL LL
K : 60 ` HL_US PLAIN CL LL
L : 50 ` HL_EX PLAIN CL LL
3) Press [OK] key.
Item
Default
value
A HL_UM READY
HH
main set value when ready standby
under HH environment
50
B HL_LM READY
HH
Correction value for HH environment
ready standby lower thermistor main
set value
50
C HL_US READY
HH
sub set value when ready standby
50
D HL_EX READY
HH
Correction value for external
thermistor set value when ready
50
E HL_UM PLAIN
BW HH
plain paper upper thermistor main set
value under HH environment
50
F HL_LM PLAIN
BW HH
black and white plain paper lower
50
G HL_US PLAIN
BW HH
plain paper upper thermistor sub set
50
H HL_EX PLAIN
BW HH
plain paper external thermistor set
50
I HL_UM PLAIN
CL HH
upper thermistor main set value
50
J HL_LM PLAIN
CL HH
color plain paper lower thermistor
main set value
50
K HL_US PLAIN
CL HH
HH environment
50
L HL_EX PLAIN CL
HH
HH environment
50
M WARMUP
FUMON HL_UM
T HH
Correction value for fusing motor
previous rotation start external
thermistor set value under HH
environment
50
N WARMUP
FUMOFF HL_EX
TEMP HH
fusing motor front rotation
continuation time
50
O WARMUP END
TIME HH
Correction value for warm-up
completion time under HH
environment
50
P HL_UM HEAVY1
BW HH
50
Q HL_LM HEAVY1
BW HH
50
R HL_US HEAVY1
BW HH
50
S HL_EX HEAVY1
BW HH
50
T HL UM HEAVY1
CL HH
set value
50
U HL LM HEAVY1
CL HH
main set value
50
V HL US HEAVY1
CL HH
set value
50
W HL EX HEAVY1
CL HH
50
X HL UM HEAVY2
BW HH
50
Y HL LM HEAVY2
BW HH
50
Z HL US HEAVY2
BW HH
50
AA HL EX HEAVY2
BW HH
50
AB HL UM HEAVY2
CL HH
set value
50
AC HL LM HEAVY2
CL HH
main set value
50
AD HL US HEAVY2
CL HH
set value
50
AE HL EX HEAVY2
CL HH
50
AF HL_UM OHP HH Correction value for OHP upper
thermistor main set value under HH
environment
50
AG HL_LM OHP HH Correction value for HH environment
OHP lower thermistor mains et value
50
AH HL_US OHP HH Correction value for OHP upper
thermistor sub set value under HH
environment
50
AI HL_EX OHP HH Correction value for OHP external
environment
50
AJ HL_UM
ENVELOPE HH
Correction value for enveloper upper
thermistor main set value under HH
environment
50
AK HL_LM
ENVELOPE HH
envelope lower thermistor main set
value
50
AL HL_US
ENVELOPE HH
Correction value for enveloper upper
thermistor sub set value under HH
environment
50
AM HL_EX
ENVELOPE HH
Correction value for envelope
HH environment
50
AN HL_UM E-STAR
HH
main set value when preheating
50
AO HL US E-STAR
HH
preheating upper thermistor sub set
value
50
AP HL EX E-STAR
HH
preheating external thermistor set
value
50
AQ HL_UM PRE-
JOB HH
main set value when recovering from
preheating under HH environment
50
AR HL UM THIN
PAPER BW HH
45
AS HL LM THIN
PAPER BW HH
black and white thin paper lower
45
AT HL US THIN
PAPER BW HH
45
AU HL EX THIN
PAPER BW HH
black and white thin paper external
45
AV HL UM THIN
PAPER CL HH
color thin paper upper thermistor
main set value
45
Item
Default
value

43-22
under low temperature and low humidity (L/
L) for the fusing temperature setting (SIM
43-4) in each paper mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [OK] key.
A
W
HL LM THIN
PAPER CL HH
color thin paper lower thermistor
main set value
45
AX HL US THIN
PAPER CL HH
color thin paper upper thermistor sub
set value
45
AY HL EX THIN
PAPER CL HH
color thin paper external thermistor
set value
45
AZ HL UM THIN
PAPER READY
HH
thin paper ready upper thermistor
main temperature value
45
BA HL UM REC
PAPER BW HH
45
BB HL LM REC
PAPER BW HH
black and white recycled paper lower
45
BC HL US REC
PAPER BW HH
45
BD HL EX REC
PAPER BW HH
black and white recycled paper
45
BE HL UM REC
PAPER CL HH
45
BF HL LM REC
PAPER CL HH
color recycled paper lower thermistor
main set value
45
BG HL US REC
PAPER CL HH
45
BH HL EX REC
PAPER CL HH
color recycled paper external
45
BI HL UM REC
PAPER READY
HH
recycled paper ready upper
thermistor main temperature value
45
Item
Default
value
A : 50 ; HL_UM READY HH
B : 50 ; HL_LM READY HH
C : 50 ; HL_US READY HH
D : 50 ; HL_EX READY HH
A:
SIMULATION NO.43-21
FUSER TEMP ADJUSTMENT (HH)
50
1 99
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 50 ; HL_UM PLAIN BW HH
F : 50 ; HL_LM PLAIN BW HH
G : 50 ; HL_US PLAIN BW HH
H : 50 ; HL_EX PLAIN BW HH
I : 50 ; HL_UM PLAIN CL HH
J : 50 ; HL_LM PLAIN CL HH
K: 50 ; HL_US PLAIN CL HH
L: 50 ; HL_EX PLAIN CL HH
Item
Default
value
A HL_UM PLAIN
BW DUP LL
plain paper duplex upper thermistor
main set value under LL environment
60
B HL_LM PLAIN
BW DUP LL
black and white plain paper duplex
lower thermistor main set value
60
C HL_US PLAIN
BW DUP LL
plain paper duplex upper thermistor
sub set value under LL environment
60
D HL_EX PLAIN
BW DUP LL
plain paper duplex external thermistor
set value under LL environment
50
E PLAIN BW DUP
APP CNT LL
plain paper duplex applicable number
of sheets under LL environment
50
F HL_UM PLAIN
CL DUP LL
duplex upper thermistor main set value
55
G HL_LM PLAIN
CL DUP LL
color plain paper duplex lower
55
H HL_US PLAIN
CL DUP LL
duplex upper thermistor sub set value
55
I HL_EX PLAIN
CL DUP LL
duplex external thermistor set value
50
J PLAIN CL DUP
APP CNT LL
duplex applicable number of sheets
50
K HL_UM HEAVY
BW DUP LL
heavy paper duplex upper thermistor
main set value under LL environment
60
L HL_LM HEAVY
BW DUP LL
black and white duplex lower thermistor
main set value
60
M HL_US HEAVY
BW DUP LL
sub set value under LL environment
60
N HL_EX HEAVY
BW DUP LL
heavy paper duplex external thermistor
set value under LL environment
50
O HEAVY BW
DUP APP CNT
LL
heavy paper duplex applicable number
of sheets under LL environment
50
P HL_UM HEAVY
CL DUP LL
Correction value for color heavy paper
duplex upper thermistor main set value
65
Q HL_LM HEAVY
CL DUP LL
black and white heavy paper duplex
65
R HL_US HEAVY
CL DUP LL
65
S HL_EX HEAVY
CL DUP LL
65
T HEAVY CL DUP
APP CNT LL
50

43-23
under high temperature and high humidity
(H/H) for the fusing temperature setting
(SIM 43-4) in each paper mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [OK] key.

43-24
Function (Purpose) Used to set the correction of the tempera-
ture adjustment value of SIM 43-1 and 43-
4.
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [OK] key.
Item
Default
value
A HL_UM PLAIN
BW DUP HH
upper thermistor main set value under
HH environment
50
B HL_LM PLAIN
BW DUP HH
black and white plain paper duplex
50
C HL_US PLAIN
BW DUP HH
HH environment
50
D HL_EX PLAIN
BW DUP HH
plain paper duplex external thermistor
set value under HH environment
50
E PLAIN BW DUP
APP CNT HH
plain paper duplex applicable number
of sheets under HH environment
50
F HL_UM PLAIN
CL DUP HH
duplex upper thermistor main set
50
G HL_LM PLAIN CL
DUP HH
color plain paper duplex lower
50
H HL_US PLAIN CL
DUP HH
50
I HL_EX PLAIN CL
DUP HH
50
J PLAIN CL DUP
APP CNT HH
50
K HL_UM HEAVY
BW DUP HH
main set value under HH environment
50
L HL_LM HEAVY
BW DUP HH
black and white duplex lower
50
A : 60 ; HL_UM PLAIN BW DUP LL
B : 60 ; HL_LM PLAIN BW DUP LL
C : 60 ; HL_US PLAIN BW DUP LL
D : 50 ; HL_EX PLAIN BW DUP LL
A:
SIMULATION NO.43-22
FUSER TEMP ADJUSTMENT (LL:DUP)
60
1 99
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 50 ; PLAIN BW DUP APP CNT LL
F : 55 ; HL_UM PLAIN CL DUP LL
G : 55 ; HL_LM PLAIN CL DUP LL
H : 55 ; HL_US PLAIN CL DUP LL
I : 50 ; HL_EX PLAIN CL DUP LL
J : 50 ; PLAIN CL DUP APP CNT LL
K : 60 ; HL_UM HEAVY BW DUP LL
L : 60 ; HL_LM HEAVY BW DUP LL
M HL_US HEAVY
BW DUP HH
sub set value under HH environment
50
N HL_EX HEAVY
BW DUP HH
heavy paper duplex external
environment
50
O HEAVY BW DUP
APP CNT HH
heavy paper duplex applicable
number of sheets under HH
environment
50
P HL_UM HEAVY
CL DUP HH
duplex upper thermistor main set
50
Q HL_LM HEAVY
CL DUP HH
black and white heavy paper duplex
50
R HL_US HEAVY
CL DUP HH
50
S HL_EX HEAVY
CL DUP HH
50
T HEAVY CL DUP
APP CNT HH
50
Item
Default
value
A : 50 ; HL_UM PLAIN BW DUP HH
B : 50 ; HL_LM PLAIN BW DUP HH
C : 50 ; HL_US PLAIN BW DUP HH
D: 50 ; HL_EX PLAIN BW DUP HH
A:
SIMULATION NO.43-23
FUSER TEMP ADJUSTMENT (HH: DUP)
50
1 99
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 50 ; PLAIN BW DUP APP CNT HH
F : 50 ; HL_UM PLAIN CL DUP HH
G` 50 ; HL_LM PLAIN CL DUP HH
H` 50 ; HL_US PLAIN CL DUP HH
I : 50 ; HL_EX PLAIN CL DUP HH
J : 50 ; PLAIN CL DUP APP CNT HH
K: 50 ; HL_UM HEAVY BW DUP HH
L : 50 ; HL_LM HEAVY BW DUP HH
Item
Default value
100V series 200V series
55/62-
sheet
machine
70-sheet
machine
55/62-
sheet
machine
70-sheet
machine
A NN_120_
WUP_HL_UM&HL_US
Warm-up completion
temperature correction
value
When power
booting at lower
than 120C under
NN environment
Upper heater lamp main/
sub
60 55 60 55
B NN_120_ WUP_HL_LM Lower heater lamp main 60 55 60 55
C NN_120_WUP_HL_EX External heater lamp main 50 50 50 50
D LL_120_
WUP_HL_UM&HL_US
When power
booting at lower
than 120C under
LL environment
sub
60 60 60 60
E LL_120_ WUP_HL_LM Lower heater lamp main 60 60 60 60
F LL_120_WUP_HL_EX External heater lamp 45 45 45 45
G HH_120_
WUP_HL_UM&HL_US
When power
booting at lower
than 120C under
HH environment
Upper heater lamp main 60 55 60 55
H HH_120_ WUP_HL_LM Lower heater lamp main 60 55 60 55
I HH_120_WUP_HL_EX External heater lamp 50 50 50 50
J ON_120_WUP_HL_UM Temperature
correction value during
temperature correction
immediately after
completion of warm-up
When power
booting at lower
than 120C
K ON_120_WUP_HL_US Lower heater lamp 50 50 50 50
L ON_120_WUP_HL_EX External heater lamp 50 50 50 50
M NN_120_
FUS_DUP_HL_UM&HL_US
Fusing temperature
correction value
When power
booting at lower
than 120C under
NN environment
N NN_120_
FUS_DUP_HL_LM
Lower heater lamp main 50 50 50 50
O NN_120_FUS_DUP_HL_EX External heater lamp 50 50 50 50
P LL_120_
FUS_DUP_HL_UM&HL_US
When power
booting at lower
than 120C under
LL environment
sub
55 55 55 55
Q LL_120_ FUS_DUP_HL_LM Lower heater lamp main 50 50 50 50
R LL_120_FUS_DUP_HL_EX External heater lamp 50 50 50 50
S HH_120_
FUS_DUP_HL_UM&HL_US
When power
booting at lower
than 120C under
HH environment
sub
50 50 50 50
T HH_120_
FUS_DUP_HL_LM
Lower heater lamp main 50 50 50 50
U HH_120_FUS_DUP_HL_EX External heater lamp 50 50 50 50
V NN_120_ FUS_DUP_CNT Fusing duplex paper
exit count
Under NN environment 0 0 0 0
W LL_120_ FUS_DUP_CNT Under LL environment 0 0 0 0
X HH_120_ FUS_DUP_CNT Under HH environment 0 0 0 0
Y COOL_DOWN_HEAVY Cool-down time Heavy paper 15 15 15 15
Z COOL_DOWN_OHP OHP 30 30 30 30
AA COOL_DOWN_DEVELOP Envelope 40 40 40 40
AB WUP DUP TIME Temperature correction duration time immediately after completion of
warm-up
1 1 1 1
AC FUS MOTOR Fusing web motor operation interval 6 6 6 6
AD BW JOB TH_UM TEMP Upper thermistor main contact judgment temperature set value when
starting a BW job
80 80 80 80
AE CL JOB TH_UM TEMP Upper thermistor main contact judgment temperature set value when
starting a BW job
50 50 50 50
AF ACS (COL-BW) FUN TH
TEMP
FUM racing continuation upper thermistor main judgment temperature set
value when ACS (COL BW)
45 45 45 45
AG ACS (BW-COL) FUN TH
TEMP
FUM racing continuation upper thermistor main judgment temperature set
value when ACS (BW COL)
65 65 65 65
AH ACS (BW-COL) UN TH
TEMP
Upper thermistor main judgment temperature set value when ACS (shifting
BW COL)
45 45 45 45
AI TH_EX CORRELATION
(TH_UM)
Relative control of external thermistor for upper thermistor main
0: NO, 1: YES
1 1 1 1
AJ TH_EX CORRELATION
(TH_US)
Relative control of external thermistor for upper thermistor sub
0: NO, 1: YES
0 0 0 0
AK BW JOB ELECTRICITY SET Compulsory conduction when starting a BW job. 0: No, 1: Yes 1 1 1 1
AL COL JOB ELECTRICITY
SET
Compulsory conduction when starting a COL job. 0: No, 1: Yes
0 0 0 0
AM JOB ELECTRICITY TEMP Correction value of temperature for executing compulsory conduction
when starting a job
40 40 40 40
AN POWER SET Power voltage setting 1: 100V 4 4 8 8
2: 110V
3: 115V
4: 120V
5: 127V
6: 210V
7: 220V
8: 230V
9: 240V
AO TH_EX TWO_WAY SET External thermistor reciprocating control 0 0 1 1

43-31
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the fusing
web cleaning motor and the control circuit.
Section
Operation/Procedure
The fusing web cleaning motor is operated.
* Remove the fusing unit, and check the rotation of the motor with
the door open.

43-32
Function (Purpose) Used to set the compulsory operation of
fusing web cleaning at job end.
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [OK] key.

44

44-1
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set each correction operation func-
tion in the image forming (process) section.
Transfer/Cleaning)
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with the touch panel. (The selected
item is highlighted.)
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.)
AP TH_EX TWO_WAY MIN Lower temperature limit width for external thermistor reciprocating control 45 45 40 40
AQ TH_EX TWO_WAY MAX Upper temperature limit width for external thermistor reciprocating control 50 50 50 50
AR READY ROTATION SET Slow rotation execution when ready, 0: NO, 1: YES 1 1 1 1
AS BPP SET BPP control, 1: NO, 1:YES 1 1 0 0
AT HL_LM CYCLE Lower heater lamp main compulsory lighting cycle (sec) 6 6 4 4
AU HL_LM TIME Lower heater lamp main compulsory lighting time (100msec) 6 6 10 10
AV LL INTERVAL SET Intermittent drive interval setting in LL (0: No drive, in sec, rotation time
5sec)
0 0 0 0
Item
Default value
100V series 200V series
55/62-
sheet
machine
70-sheet
machine
55/62-
sheet
machine
70-sheet
machine
A` 60 ` NN_120_WUP_HL_UM&HL_US
B` 60 ` NN_120_WUP_HL_LM
C` 50 ` NN_120_WUP_HL_EX
D` 60 ` LL_120_WUP_HL_UM&HL_US
A:
SIMULATION NO.43-24
FUSER TEMP RESET
60
1 99
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E` 60 ` LL_120_WUP_HL_LM
F ` 45 ` LL_120_WUP_HL_EX
G` 60 ` HH_120_WUP_HL_UM&HL_US
H` 60 ` HH_120_WUP_HL_LM
I ` 50 ` HH_120_WUP_HL_EX
J ` 50 ` ON_120_WUP_HL_UM
K` 50 ` ON_120_WUP_HL_US
L ` 50 ` ON_120_WUP_HL_EX
SIMULATION NO.43-31
TEST
FUSER WEB CLEANING CHECK
1/1
CLOSE
EXECUTE
A JOB END COMP
ACT CHECK
Fusing web motor
compulsory operation
conditions
0: Allow
1: Inhibit
(Default)
B JOB END COMP
ACT INTERVAL
Print quantity interval of
fusing web motor compulsory
operation
1 - 230
(100: Default)
C JOB END COMP
ACT CNT
Number of fusing web motor
compulsory operations
1 - 20
(1: Default)
Item
Default
value
HV High-density process control of normal
operation
Allow
HT Half tone process control of normal
operation
Allow
TC Transfer output, transfer high voltage
output voltage correction
Allow
MD VG Membrane decrease grid voltage
correction
Allow
MD LD Membrane decrease grid voltage
correction
Inhibit
MD EV Membrane decrease environment grid
voltage correction
Allow
MD DL Membrane decrease discharge light
quantity correction
Allow
MD DL EV membrane decrease environment
discharge light quantity correction
Inhibit
TN_HUM Toner density humidity correction Allow
TN_AREA Toner density area correction Allow
TN_LIFE Toner density life correction Allow
A : 1 ; JOB END COMP ACT CHECK
B : 100 ; JOB END COMP ACT INTERVAL
C : 1 ; JOB END COMP ACT CNT
A:
SIMULATION NO.43-32
JOB END WEB CLEANING COMPULSORY CHECK
1
0 1
OK
TEST
CLOSE
*1: Not displayed when an option FIERY is installed.

44-2
Function (Purpose) Image density sensor gain adjustment
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment is executed auto-
matically.
After completion of the adjustment, the adjustment result is dis-
played.
If the adjustment is not executed normally, "ERROR" is displayed.

44-4
Purpose (Do not use this function unless specially
required.)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the target density level in the
image density correction.
Section
Operation/Procedure
TN_COV Toner density print rate correction Allow
TN_PROCON Toner density process control correction Allow
TN_ENV Toner density environment correction Allow
TN_DRIP Toner density correction unconditional
supply
Allow
TN_SPEND Toner compulsory consumption mode Allow
PHT 1-pixel half tone process control correction Inhibit
AR_AUTO Automatic registration adjustment Allow
AR_ERROR Error check during execution of automatic
registration adjustment
Allow
DM_PHASE Drum phase alignment Allow
TN_SENSITIVITY Toner sensitivity correction Inhibit
AR_PHASE Phase between colors and motor
modulation readjustment when resist
adjustment automatic execution after
turning on the power
Allow
PRT_HT Half tone process control printer correction
feedback *1
Allow
Item
Default
value
A PCS_CL LED ADJ Color sensor light emitting quantity
adjustment value
21
B PCS_K LED ADJ Black sensor light emitting quantity
adjustment value
21
C PCS_CL DARK Color dark voltage 0
D PCS_K DARK Black dark voltage 0
E PCS_K GRND Belt surface when the item B
0
F PCS_K BELT MAX Belt surface input max. value 0
G PCS_K BELT MIN Belt surface input min. value 0
H PCS_K BELT DIF Belt surface input difference (Item
E, Item F)
0
I REG_F LED ADJ Resist sensor light emitting
quantity adjustment value F
27
J REG_R LED ADJ Resist sensor light emitting
quantity adjustment value R
27
K REG_F DARK Resist sensor dark voltage F 0
L REG_R DARK Resist sensor dark voltage R 0
Item
Default
value
SIMULATION NO.44-01
TEST
MODE SETTING
EXECUTE
1/1
CLOSE
HV HT TC MD VG
MD LD MD EV MD DL MD DL EV
TN_HUM TN_AREA TN_LIFE TN_COV
PHT AR_AUTO AR_ERROR DM_PHASE
TN_SENSITIVITY PRT_HTY
TN_PROCON TN_ENV TN_DRIP TN_SPEND
AR_PHASE
M REG_F GRND Belt surface when the item I
0
N REG_R GRND Belt surface when the item J
0
O REG_F BELTMAX Belt surface input max. value (F
side)
0
P REG_F BELT MIN Belt surface input min. value (F
side)
0
Q REG_F BELT DIF Belt surface input difference (Item
O, Item P)
0
R REG_R BELT MAX Belt surface input max. value (R
side)
0
S REG_R BELT MIN Belt surface input min. value (R
side)
0
T REG_R BELT DIF Belt surface input difference (Item
R, Item S)
0
U REG_F PATCH(K) Patch light reception potential F (K) 0
V REG_F PATCH(C) Patch light reception potential F (C) 0
W REG_F PATCH(M) Patch light reception potential F
(M)
0
X REG_F PATCH(Y) Patch light reception potential F (Y) 0
Y REG_R PATCH(K) Patch light reception potential R
(K)
0
Z REG_R PATCH(C) Patch light reception potential R
(C)
0
AA REG_R PATCH(M) Patch light reception potential R
(M)
0
AB REG_R PATCH(Y) Patch light reception potential R
(Y)
0
Item
Default
value
A PCS_CL TARGET Color sensor target value 98
B PCS_K TARGET Black sensor target value 155
C LED_CL OUTPUT Color sensor light emitting
quantity
21
D LED_K OUTPUT Black sensor light emitting
quantity
21
E PCS ADJSTMENT
LIMIT
Sensor adjustment target limit
value
4
F BELT GROUND DIF Effective difference between
upper/loser values of belt one-
round surface
255
Item
Default
value
PROCON GAIN ADJUSTMENT
EXECUTE
PCS_CL LED ADJ 21 : PCS_K LED ADJ 21 :
1/2
SIMULATION NO.44-02
TEST
CLOSE
PCS_K BELT DIF 0 :
PCS_CL DARK 0 : PCS_K DARK 0 :
PCS_K GRND 0 :
PCS_K BELT MAX 0 : PCS_K BELT MIN 0 :
REG_F LED ADJ 27 : REG_R LED ADJ 27 :
REG_F DARK 0 : REG_R DARK 0 :
REG_F GRND 0 : REG_R GRND 0 :
REG_F BELT MAX 0 : REG_F BELT MIN 0 :
REG_F BELT DIF 0 : REG_R BELT MAX 0 :
REG_R BELT MIN 0 : REG_R BELT DIF 0 :

44-6
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the high density process
correction compulsorily.
Section
Operation/Procedure
In case of a normal completion, the result is saved.
In case of an abnormal completion, "ERROR" is displayed. (Refer
to the table below.)

44-9
Purpose (Do not use in the market.)
Function (Purpose) Used to check data of correction results in
the image forming section.
Transfer/Cleaning)
Operation/Procedure
G BIAS_CL
STANDARD DIF
Bias (for color) reference
calculation difference
0
H BIAS_BK
STANDARD DIF
Bias (for black) reference
calculation difference
0
I BIAS_BW
STANDARD DIF
Reference calculation difference
in high speed mode
0
J BIAS PATCH
INTERVAL
Patch bias output interval 60
K BIAS_PATCH BW
INTERVAL
BW patch bias output interval 45
L Y_PAT TARGET ID Patch density standard value
(yellow)
115
M M_PAT TARGET ID Patch density standard value
(magenta)
130
N C_PAT TARGET ID Patch density standard value
(cyan)
120
O K_PAT TARGET ID Patch density standard value
(black)
7
P BW_PAT TARGET
ID
BW process control execution BK
target
7
Q HV BK_GROUND
LIMIT
Surface light reception effective
area value at the patch position
29
CL_SEN_ADJ_ERR Color sensor adjustment abnormality
BK_SEN_ADJ_ERR Black sensor adjustment abnormality
K_HV_ERR K high density process control abnormality
C_HV_ERR C high density process control abnormality
M_HV_ERR M high density process control abnormality
Y_HV_ERR Y high density process control abnormality
TIMEOUT_ERR Time out
Item
Default
value
A : 98 ; PCS_CL TARGET
B : 155 ; PCS_K TARGET
C : 21 ; LED_CL OUTPUT
D : 21 ; LED_K OUTPUT
A:
SIMULATION NO.44-04
PROCON INITIAL DENSITY SETUP
98
1 255
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 4 ; POS ADJUSTMENT LIMIT
F : 255 ; BELT GROUND DIF
G : 0 ; BIAS_CL STANDARD DIF
H : 0 ; BIAS_BK STANDARD DIF
I : 0 ; BIAS_BW STANDARD DIF
J : 60 ; BIAS PATCH INTERVAL
K : 45 ; BIAS_PATCH BW INTERVAL
L : 115 ; Y_PAT TARGET ID
SIMULATION NO.44-06
TEST
PROCON COMPULSORY EXECUTION
EXECUTE
CLOSE
Mode Item
Default
value
CPY/
PRN
BLACK_P: GB ***/***
DV ***/***
High density process
control
GB/DV data
GB: 620 (K)
635 (CMY)
DV: 450 CYAN_P: GB ***/***
DV ***/***
MAGENTA_P: GB ***/***
DV ***/***
YELLOW_P: GB ***/***
DV ***/***
CPY/
PRN
BLACK_N: GB ***/***
DV ***/***
High density normal
(Medium speed)
GB/DV data
GB: 620 (K)
635 (CMY)
DV: 450 CYAN_N: GB ***/***
DV ***/***
MAGENTA_N: GB ***/***
DV ***/***
YELLOW_N: GB ***/***
DV ***/***
BLACK_L: GB ***/***
DV ***/***
High density normal
(Low speed)
GB/DV data
GB: 585 (K)
600 (CMY)
DV: 420
CYAN_L: GB ***/***
DV ***/***
MAGENTA_L: GB ***/***
DV ***/***
YELLOW_L: GB ***/***
DV ***/***
BLACK_H: GB ***/***
DV ***/***
High density normal
(High speed)
GB/DV data
GB: 690
DV: 450
OTHER TN HUD AREA Toner concentration
humidity area
9
TN HUD DATA Toner concentration
humidity AD value
0
TC TMP AREA Transfer temperature
area
4
TC TMP DATA Transfer temperature
AD value
0
TC HUD AREA Transfer humidity
area
4
TC HUD DATA Transfer humidity AD
value
0
MD HUD AREA Membrane decrease
humidity area
9
MD HUD DATA Membrane decrease
humidity AD value
0
MD K STEP Drum membrane
decrease correction
STEP
0
MD C STEP
MD M STEP
MD Y STEP
MD K DRUM COUNTER Drum travelling
distance
0
MD C DRUM COUNTER
MD M DRUM COUNTER
MD Y DRUM COUNTER
MD K REVISE(VG):
L *** M *** H***
Drum membrane
decrease grid voltage
correction
0
MD C REVISE(VG):
L *** M ***
MD M REVISE(VG):
L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(VG):
L *** M ***

44-12
Function (Purpose) Used to check the sampling toner image
patch density data in the image density cor-
rection.
Section Image process (Photoconductor/Develop-
ing)
Operation/Procedure

44-13
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the color image sensor.
Section
Operation/Procedure
For details of the procedures, refer to [ADJ 7A] in [6] ADJUST-
MENTS.
OTHER MD K REVISE(LD):
L *** M *** H ***
Drum membrane
decrease laser power
voltage correction
0
MD C REVISE(LD):
L *** M ***
MD M REVISE(LD):
L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(LD):
L *** M ***
MD K REVISE(HV):
L *** M *** H ***
High density
membrane decrease
environment GB
correction
0
MD C REVISE(HV):
L *** M ***
MD M REVISE(HV):
L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(HV):
L *** M ***
MD K REVISE(CP):
L *** M *** H ***
Drum membrane
decrease
environment grid
voltage correction
0
MD C REVISE(CP):
L *** M ***
MD M REVISE(CP):
L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(CP):
L *** M ***
MD K REVISE COL (DL):
L *** M ***
Drum membrane
decrease discharge
light quantity
correction
70
MD C REVISE COL (DL):
L *** M ***
MD M REVISE COL (DL):
L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE COL (DL):
L *** M ***
MD K REVISE BW (DL):
L *** M *** H ***
80
MD K REVISE COL
(DL EV): L *** M ***
Drum membrane
decrease
environment
discharge light
quantity correction
0
MD C REVISE COL
(DL EV): L *** M ***
MD M REVISE COL
(DL EV): L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE COL
(DL EV): L *** M ***
MD K REVISE BW
(DL EV): L *** M *** H ***
DESTINATION Main unit side
destination
MODEL TYPE Main unit model type 0
CRUM DEST_K CRUM destination
CRUM DEST_C
CRUM DEST_M
CRUM DEST_Y
CRUM DEST_K2
PROCON COUNT HV High density process
control execution
number
0
PROCON COUNT HT Half tone process
control execution
number
0
Mode Item
Default
value
Item
Default
value
CARB DATA Calibration plate sensor value 108
SEAL ADJ DATA Jig patch seal sensor value 108
ADK_SL(K) Developing characteristics gradient
coefficient
0
ADK_INT(K) Developing characteristics intercept
coefficient
0
ID(K) Sensor target value set value 0
ID(CMY) Color sensor target set value 0
Item
Default
value
A PCS_CL CARB OUT Calibration plate sensor value 108
B PCS_CL DARK Color dark voltage 0
C PCS_CL LED ADJ Color sensor light emitting
quantity adjustment value
21
OTHER
SIMULATION NO.44-09
TEST
PROCON DATA DISP (PROCON / NORMAL(M) / NORMAL(L) / NORMAL(H))
CLOSE
BLACK_P : GB_ 230/630 DV_ 0/620
CYAN_P : GB_ 230/630 DV_ 0/635
MAGENTA_P : GB_ 230/630 DV_ 0/635
YELLOW_P : GB_ 230/630 DV_ 0/635
1/1 CPY/PRN
BLACK_N : GB_ 230/600 DV_ 0/620
BLACK_L : GB_ 230/600 DV_ 0/585
CYAN_N : GB_ 230/600 DV_ 0/635
MAGENTA_N : GB_ 230/600 DV_ 0/635
YELLOW_N : GB_ 230/600 DV_ 0/635
CYAN_L : GB_ 230/600 DV_ 0/600
MAGENTA_L : GB_ 230/600 DV_ 0/600
YELLOW_L : GB_ 230/600 DV_ 0/600
BLACK_H : GB_ 230/600 DV_ 0/600
PATCH TARGET
SIMULATION NO.44-12
TEST
PATCH/TARGET DATA DISPLAY
CLOSE
SEAL ADJ DATA : 108
ADK_SL(K) : 0.00
ADK_INT(K) : 0.0
CARB DATA : 108
1/1
TARGET(K) : 0.00
TARGET(C) : 0.00
TARGET(M) : 0.00
TARGET(Y) : 0.00
C: Standard value 60 10 after adjustment

44-14
Purpose Adjustment, setting, operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the output level of the tem-
perature/humidity sensor.
Section Image process (Photoconductor/Develop-
ing)
Operation/Procedure
The output levels of the fusing temperature sensor, the machine
temperature sensor, and the humidity sensor are displayed.

44-16
Function (Purpose) Used to check the toner density control
data.
Section
Operation/Procedure
TH_UM Fusing upper thermistor main A/D value (differential)
(temperature C)
TH_UM_AD1 Fusing upper thermistor main compensation sensor
temperature value/AD value (compensation)
(temperature C)
TH_UM_AD2 Fusing upper thermistor main sensor AD value
(detection)
TH_LM Fusing lower thermistor main A/D value (temperature
C)
TH_US Fusing upper thermistor sub A/D value (temperature C)
TH_EX1 Fusing external thermistor A/D value (temperature C)
TH_EX2 Fusing external thermistor 2 A/D value (temperature C)
TH_M Manual feed temperature sensor A/D value
(temperature C)
HUD_M Manual feed humidity sensor A/D value (humidity %)
TH1_LSU LSU thermistor 1 A/D value (temperature C)
DV_HUM Developing tank humidity detection
DV_TH Developing tank temperature detection
SIMULATION NO.44-13
TEST
EXECUTE
PCS CL DARK 0 :
PCS CL LED ADJ 21
OK
:
1/1
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-14
TEST
SENSOR DATA DISPLAY MONITOR
1/1
TH_UM 255deg / XXX :
TH_LM 255deg / XXX :
TH_US 255deg / XXX :
TH_UM_AD1 255.0deg / XXX :
TH_UM_AD2 XXX :
TH_EX1 255deg / XXX :
: TH_EX2 255deg / XXX
TH_M 60.0deg / XXX :
HUD_M 90.0% / XX :
TH1_LSU 60.0deg / XX
90.0% / XXX
60.0deg / XX
:
DV_HUM :
DV_TH :
CLOSE
Item
Default
value
TONER DEN_LT
(M)
Medium speed toner density sensor
output value (final value) (KCMY)
129
TONER DEN_ST
(M)
Medium speed toner density reference
value (including the correction value)
(KCMY)
128
TONER DEN_LT
(L)
Low speed toner density sensor output
value (final value) (KCMY)
129
TONER DEN_ST
(L)
Low speed toner density reference value
(including the correction value) (KCMY)
128
TONER DEN_LT
(H)
High speed toner density sensor output
value (final value) (K)
129
TONER DEN_ST
(H)
High speed toner density reference value
(including the correction value) (K)
128
AUTO DEVE (M) Automatic development adjustment value
(middle speed)
128
ALL (M) All correction reference value (middle
speed) for automatic development
adjustment value (KCMY)
AUTO DEVE (L) Automatic development adjustment value
(low speed)
ALL (L) All correction reference value (low
speed) for automatic development
AUTO DEVE (H) Automatic development adjustment value
(high speed)
ALL (H) All correction reference value (high
speed) for the automatic development
AREA Correction value for environment area
(KCMY)
0
HUD Correction value for humidity change
(KCMY)
PRINT RATE Correction value for document print ratio
(KCMY)
PROCON Correction value for high density process
control result (KCMY)
LIFE Correction value for developer life
(KCMY)
SENSITIVITY Correction for toner density sensor
sensitivity
500
AUTO DEVE VO
(M)
Automatic development adjustment
control voltage value (middle speed)
128
ALL VO (M) Control voltage correction reference
value (middle speed) (KCMY) for
automatic development adjustment value
AUTO DEVE VO
(L)
control voltage adjustment (low speed)
ALL VO (L) Control voltage correction reference
value (low speed) (KCMY) for the
automatic development adjustment value
AUTO DEVE VO
(H)
control voltage value (high speed)
ALL VO (H) Control voltage correction reference
value (high speed) (K) for the automatic
development adjustment value
AREA VO Control voltage correction value for the
environment area
0
HUD VO Humidity change control voltage
correction value (KCMY)
PRINT RATE VO Control voltage correction value (KCMY)
for the document print rate
PROCON VO Control voltage correction value (KCMY)
for the high density process control result
LIFE VO Control voltage correction voltage
(KCMY) for the developer life
SENSITIVITY VO Control voltage correction value (KCMY)
for the toner density sensor sensitivity
500
ENV VO Control voltage correction value (KCMY)
under high humidity environment
0
AUTO DEVE
AREA
Humidity change (KCMY) in automatic
development adjustment
8
AREA Current humidity display (KCMY)

44-21
Function (Purpose) Used to set the half tone process control.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
The process control reference value is registered.
In case of a normal completion, the result is saved.

44-22
Function (Purpose) Used to check the toner patch image den-
sity level of each color in half tone image
forming section correction (process correc-
tion).
Section
Operation/Procedure

44-24
Function (Purpose) Used to display the process control result.
Section
Operation/Procedure

44-25
Function (Purpose) Used to set the initial conditions of the pro-
cess control half tone correction.
Section
Operation/Procedure

44-26
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the half tone process con-
trol compulsorily.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
The process control is started compulsorily.
For the result of the process control compulsory execution, refer to
the table below.
SIMULATION NO.44-16
TEST
TONER CONTROL DATA DISPLAY
NEXT
TONER DEN_LT(M) 129 :
TONER DEN_ST(M) 128 :
TONER DEN_LT(L) 129 :
TONER DEN_ST(L) 128 :
1/1
K M Y C
CLOSE
TONER DEN_LT(H) 129 :
TONER DEN_ST(H) 128 :
SIMULATION NO.44-21
TEST
EXECUTE
CLOSE
2ND STEP 1ST STEP
SIMULATION NO.44-22
TEST
HALF TONE CORRECT RESULT
CLOSE
1/1
PTK/BASE PTC PTM PTY
ID 1 : 255/255 255 255 255
ID 2 : 255/255 255 255 255
ID 3 : 255/255 255 255 255
ID 4 : 255/255 255 255 255
ID 5 : 255/255 255 255 255
Item
Default
value
A 1ST PATCH Half tone process control 1ST step No. 1
patch print gradation
40
B 2ND PATCH Half tone process control 1ST step No. 2
60
C 3RD PATCH Half tone process control 1ST step No. 3
80
D 4TH PATCH Half tone process control 1ST step No. 4
100
E 5TH PATCH Half tone process control 1ST step No. 5
255
COMPLETE Normal completion
INTERRUPTION Compulsory interruption
CL_SEN_ADJ_ERR Color sensor adjustment abnormality
BK_SEN_ADJ_ERR Black sensor adjustment abnormality
[YMCK] High density process control [YMCK] abnormality
CONNECTION_ERR Communication abnormality
K M Y C
SIMULATION NO.44-24
TEST
HALF TONE PROCON RESULT DISPLAY
CLOSE
[RIZE] 16 [SATURATE] 109 [STEP] 9.3
[EX-LOW] A: 0.0 , B: 100.0
[LOW] A: -0.013 , B: -0.569 , C: 107.444
[CONNECT] A: 0.0 , B: 0.0
1/1 NEXT
[MID] A: 0.014 , B: -2.598 , C: 139.245
[HIGH] A: -0.120 , B: -35.708
[CONNECT POINT] #1:100, #2: 86, #3: 86, #4: 25
A : 40 ; 1ST PATCH
B : 60 ; 2ND PATCH
C : 80 ; 3RD PATCH
D : 100 ; 4TH PATCH
A:
SIMULATION NO.44-25
HALF TONE PROCON INITIAL VALUE DISPLAY
40
0 255
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 255 ; 5TH PATCH
K C M Y

44-27
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the half tone process correc-
tion value.
Section
Operation/Procedure

44-28
Function (Purpose) Used to set the process control execution
timing.
Section
Operation/Procedure
panel.
SIMULATION NO.44-26
TEST
EXECUTE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-27
TEST
HALF TONE PROCON ADJUSTMENT DATA CLEAR
CLOSE
EXECUTE
Item
Default
value
A SW ON When the power is supplied (when sleep is canceled.) 0: Allow 0
1: Inhibit
B 24H When 24 hours or more passed with READY (sleep setting) 0: Allow 0
1: Inhibit
C HUM When a change in temperature/humidity for each Item I is
greater than item K when compared with the previous
process control execution
0: Allow 0
1: Inhibit
D REV1 When the accumulated traveling distance of BK or M
photoconductor has passed for a certain time after supplying
the power.
0: Allow 0
1: Inhibit
E REC2 When the accumulated traveling distance of BK or M
photoconductor has passed for a certain time after execution
of the previous density correction
0: Allow 0
1: Inhibit
F INITIAL Warm-up after clearing counter of photoconductor and
developer unit
0: Allow 0
1: Inhibit
G PIX When the toner consumption counter reaches the specified
accumulated count.
0: Allow 1
1: Inhibit
H HUM_LIMIT The setting condition of item C is added to items A to G. 0: Allow 1
1: Inhibit
I BK ONLY Monochrome print continuation BK process control execution
inhibit/allow setting and number of repetitions
0: Allow: Five times 5
1: Allow: Once
2: Allow: Twice
3: Allow: Three times
4: Allow: Four times
5: Allow: Five times
6: Inhibit
J BW_HV Monochrome speed high density process control execution
setting
0: BKpr allow/BWpr allow, BW process control execution
when a certain condition is satisfied
5
3: BKpr allow/BWpr allow, BK process control execution,
continuous BW process control execution
4: BKpr allow/BWpr allow, 4-color process control
execution, continuous BW process control execution
6: BKpr inhibit/BWpr allow, only BK process control inhibit
7: BKpr allow/BWpr inhibit, only BW process control inhibit
K HUM HOUR Item C temperature/humidity monitor monitoring time interval
(h: hour)
1 - 24 2
L HUM_DIF Item C area difference specified value 1 - 9 2
M BK_RATIO Item E BK photoconductor specified accumulated rotation
distance value
Intermittent print for every 3
1 - 999 20
10: Equivalent to every 80

44-29
Function (Purpose) Used to select the half tone correction dur-
ing a job.
Section
Operation/Procedure

44-31
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the phase of the photocon-
ductor.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
NOTE: Since it is rather difficult to perform the manual photocon-
ductor phase adjustment with this simulation, use SIM 50-
22 to perform the automatic adjustment.
N M_RATIO Item E M photoconductor specified accumulated rotation
distance value
Intermittent print for every 3
1 - 999 20
O PIX_RATIO Item G toner consumption count specified accumulated value 1 - 999 100
P COLOR BORDER M photoconductor traveling distance upper limit when
executing BK process control
1 - 999 20
Q HT_DIF HT process control execution judgment bias change value
difference value
1 - 255 40
R BW_RATIO BW process control BK photoconductor traveling distance
magnification ratio setting (%)
1 - 999 20
S 2TRAN_CLEAN_
TIME1
Secondary transfer cleaning process time judgment
threshold value 1 (Unit: Sheet of paper)
1 - 999 200
T 2TRAN_CLEAN_
TIME2
1 - 999 300
U 2TRAN_CLEAN_
TIME3
1 - 999 500
Item
Default
value
Item
Default
value
A COPY Copier 0 - 4 0: No execution 4
B PRINTER Printer 1: HV only 2
C FAX FAX 2: HV PHT 2
D SELF PRINT Self print 3: HV HT 4
4: HV PHT HT
A : 0 ; SW ON : YES
B : 0 ; 24H : YES
C : 0 ; HUM : YES
D : 0 ; REV1 : YES
A:
SIMULATION NO.44-28
PROCON TIMING ADJUSTMENT
0
0 1
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 0 ; REV2 : YES
F : 0 ; INITIAL : YES
G : 1 ; PIX : NO
H : 1 ; HUM_LIMIT : NO
I : 5 ; BK ONLY
J : 5 ; BW_HV
K : 2 ; HUM HOUR
L : 2 ; HUM_DIF
A : 4 ; COPY : HV PHT
B : 2 ; PRINTER : HV PHT HT
C : 2 ; FAX : HV PHT
D : 4 ; SELF PRINT : HV PHT HT
A:
SIMULATION NO.44-29
HALF TONE SETTING
4
0 4
OK
TEST
CLOSE
Item
Default
value
A PRINT
MODE
Print mode 1: Deflection
check pattern
print for every
45 (8-sheet
print)
3
2: Deflection
check pattern
print for every
90 (4-sheet
print)
3: Check pattern
print at the set
value (1-sheet
print)
B BASE
COLOR
Print color select 1: BK 1
2: C
3: M
4: Y
C PHASE (C) C tandem phase
setting
Y sensor reference C
phase state is
changed up to 355 for
every 5.
0: 0 0
1: 5
:
:
70: 350
71: 355
D PHASE (M) M tandem phase
setting
Y sensor reference M
phase state is
changed up to 355 for
every 5.
0: 0 0
1: 5
:
:
70: 350
71: 355
E START
POINT (CL)
Color modulation
timing delay setting
Y sensor reference
color modulation start
timing is changed up
to 355 for every 5.
0: 0 0
1: 5
:
:
70: 350
71: 355
F AMPLITUDE
(CL)
Color modulation
amplitude correction
value setting
0 - 15 0

44-37
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the image density correc-
tion setting.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target color for setting with touch panel.
2) Select a target item with [|] and [+] keys.
G START
POINT (BK)
BK modulation timing
delay setting
BK sensor reference
BK modulation start
timing is changed up
to 355 for every 5.
0: 0 0
1: 5
:
:
70: 350
71: 355
H AMPLITUDE
(BK)
BK modulation
amplitude correction
value setting
0 - 15 0
I PAPER Tray selection 1: Manual feed 4
2: Tray 1
3: Tray 2
4: Tray 3
5: Tray 4
6: LCC
J MULTI
COUNT
Print quantity 1 - 999 1
K PAPER
TYPE
Paper type 1: Normal paper 1
2: Heavy paper
3: OHP
4: Envelope
Item
Default
value
A : 3 ; PRINT MODE : SET VALUE
B : 1 ; BASE COLOR : K
C : 0 ; PHASE(C) : 0DEG
D : 0 ; PHASE(M) : 0DEG
A:
SIMULATION NO.44-31
DRUM POSITION SETTING
3
1 3
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 0 ; START POINT (CL) : 0DEG
F : 0
; START POINT(BK) : 0DEG
H : 0
I : 4
J : 1
K : 1 ; PAPER TYPE : PLAIN
EXECUTE
; AMPLITUDE (CL)
G : 0
; AMPLITUDE (BK)
; PAPER : CS1
; MULTI COUNT
Button Item
Default
value
K A DV_ADJ_CL_K_L_DATA_1 Color print developing bias correction data 1 (low speed) 2
B DV_ADJ_CL_K_L_DATA_2 Color print developing bias correction data 2 (low speed) 3
C DV_ADJ_CL_K_L_DATA_3 Color print developing bias correction data 3 (low speed) 4
D DV_ADJ_CL_K_M_DATA_1 Color print developing bias correction data 1 (Medium speed) 2
E DV_ADJ_CL_K_M_DATA_2 Color print developing bias correction data 2 (Medium speed) 3
F DV_ADJ_CL_K_M_DATA_3 Color print developing bias correction data 3 (Medium speed) 4
G DV_ADJ_BK_H_DATA_1 Black and white print developing bias correction data 1 (High speed) 2
H DV_ADJ_BK_H_DATA_2 Black and white print developing bias correction data 2 (High speed) 3
I DV_ADJ_BK_H_DATA_3 Black and white print developing bias correction data 3 (High speed) 4
J DV_ADJ_START_CL_K_L_1 Color print developing bias correction start position data 1 (less than 10[s] low speed) 4
K DV_ADJ_START_CL_K_L_2 Color print developing bias correction start position data 2 (more than 10[s], less than 60 [s] low
speed)
3
L DV_ADJ_START_CL_K_L_3 Color print developing bias correction start position data 3 (more than 60[s], less than 240 [s] low
speed)
1
M DV_ADJ_START_CL_K_L_4 Color print developing bias correction start position data 4 (less than 240 [s] low speed) 1
N DV_ADJ_START_CL_K_M_1 Color print developing bias correction start position data 1 (less than 10 [s] middle speed) 4
O DV_ADJ_START_CL_K_M_2 Color print developing bias correction start position data 2 (more than 10 [s] less than 60 [s] middle
speed)
3
P DV_ADJ_START_CL_K_M_3 Color print developing bias correction start position data 3 (more than 60 [s] less than 240 [s] middle
speed)
1
Q DV_ADJ_START_CL_K_M_4 Color print developing bias correction start position data 4 (more than 240 [s] middle speed) 1
R DV_ADJ_START_BK_H_1 Black and white print developing bias correction start position data 1 (less than 10 [s] high speed) 4
S DV_ADJ_START_BK_H_2 Black and white print developing bias correction start position data 2 (more than 10 [s] less than 60
[s] high speed)
3
T DV_ADJ_START_BK_H_3 Black and white print developing bias correction start position data 3 (more than 60 [s] less than 240
[s] high speed)
1
U DV_ADJ_START_BK_H_4 Black and white print developing bias correction start position data 4 (more than 240 [s] high speed) 1

44-43
Function (Purpose) Used to check installation of the developing
unit and the current state.
Section
Operation/Procedure
C A DV_ADJ_CL_C_L_DATA_1 Developing bias correction data 1 (low speed) 2
B DV_ADJ_CL_C_L_DATA_2 Developing bias correction data 2 (low speed) 3
C DV_ADJ_CL_C_L_DATA_3 Developing bias correction data 3 (low speed) 4
D DV_ADJ_CL_C_M_DATA_1 Developing bias correction data 1 (middle speed) 2
E DV_ADJ_CL_C_M_DATA_2 Developing bias correction data 2 (middle speed) 3
F DV_ADJ_CL_C_M_DATA_3 Developing bias correction data 3 (middle speed) 4
G DV_ADJ_START_CL_C_L_1 Developing bias correction start position data 1 (less than 10 [s] low speed) 4
H DV_ADJ_START_CL_C_L_2 Developing bias correction start position data 2 (more than 10 [s] less than 60 [s] low speed) 3
I DV_ADJ_START_CL_C_L_3 Developing bias correction start position data 3 (more than 60 [s] less than 240 [s] low speed) 1
J DV_ADJ_START_CL_C_L_4 Developing bias correction start position data 4 (more than 240 [s] low speed) 1
K DV_ADJ_START_CL_C_M_1 Developing bias correction start position data (less than 10 [s] middle speed) 4
L DV_ADJ_START_CL_C_M_2 Developing bias correction start position data (more than 10 [s] less than 60 [s] middle speed) 3
M DV_ADJ_START_CL_C_M_3 Developing bias correction start position data (more than 60 [s] less than 240 [s] middle speed) 1
N DV_ADJ_START_CL_C_M_4 Developing bias correction start position data (more than 240 [s] middle speed) 1
M A DV_ADJ_CL_M_L_DATA_1 Developing bias correction data 1 (low speed) 2
B DV_ADJ_CL_M_L_DATA_2 Developing bias correction data 2 (low speed) 3
C DV_ADJ_CL_M_L_DATA_3 Developing bias correction data 3 (low speed) 4
D DV_ADJ_CL_M_M_DATA_1 Developing bias correction data 1 (middle speed) 2
E DV_ADJ_CL_M_M_DATA_2 Developing bias correction data 2 (middle speed) 3
F DV_ADJ_CL_M_M_DATA_3 Developing bias correction data 3 (middle speed) 4
G DV_ADJ_START_CL_M_L_1 Developing bias correction start position data 1 (less than 10 [s] low speed) 4
H DV_ADJ_START_CL_M_L_2 Developing bias correction start position data 2 (more than 10 [s] less than 60 [s] low speed) 3
I DV_ADJ_START_CL_M_L_3 Developing bias correction start position data 3 (more than 60 [s] less than 240 [s] low speed) 1
J DV_ADJ_START_CL_M_L_4 Developing bias correction start position data 4 (more than 240 [s] low speed) 1
K DV_ADJ_START_CL_M_M_
1
Developing bias correction start position data 1 (less than 10 [s] middle speed) 4
L DV_ADJ_START_CL_M_M_
2
Developing bias correction start position data 2 (more than 10 [s] less than 60 [s] middle speed) 3
M DV_ADJ_START_CL_M_M_
3
Developing bias correction start position data 3 (more than 60 [s] less than 240 [s] middle speed) 1
N DV_ADJ_START_CL_M_M_
4
Developing bias correction start position data 4 (more than 240 [s] middle speed) 1
Y A DV_ADJ_CL_Y_L_DATA_1 Developing bias correction data 1 (low speed) 2
B DV_ADJ_CL_Y_L_DATA_2 Developing bias correction data 2 (low speed) 3
C DV_ADJ_CL_Y_L_DATA_3 Developing bias correction data 3 (low speed) 4
D DV_ADJ_CL_Y_M_DATA_1 Developing bias correction data 1 (middle speed) 2
E DV_ADJ_CL_Y_M_DATA_2 Developing bias correction data 2 (middle speed) 3
F DV_ADJ_CL_Y_M_DATA_3 Developing bias correction data 3 (middle speed) 4
G DV_ADJ_START_CL_Y_L_1 Developing bias correction start position data 1 (less than 10 [s] low speed) 4
H DV_ADJ_START_CL_Y_L_2 Developing bias correction start position data 2 (more than 10 [s] less than 60 [s] low speed) 3
I DV_ADJ_START_CL_Y_L_3 Developing bias correction start position data 3 (more than 60 [s] less than 240 [s] low speed) 1
J DV_ADJ_START_CL_Y_L_4 Developing bias correction start position data 4 (more than 240 [s] low speed) 1
K DV_ADJ_START_CL_Y_M_1 Developing bias correction start position data 1 (less than 10 [s] middle speed) 4
L DV_ADJ_START_CL_Y_M_2 Developing bias correction start position data 2 (more than 10 [s] less than 60 [s] middle speed) 3
M DV_ADJ_START_CL_Y_M_3 Developing bias correction start position data 3 (more than 60 [s] less than 240 [s] middle speed) 1
N DV_ADJ_START_CL_Y_M_4 Developing bias correction start position data 4 (more than 240 [s] middle speed) 1
Button Item
Default
value
A : 2 ; DV_ADJ_CL_K_L_DATA_1
B : 3 ; DV_ADJ_CL_K_L_DATA_2
C : 4 ; DV_ADJ_CL_K_L_DATA_3
D : 2 ; DV_ADJ_CL_K_M_DATA_1
A:
SIMULATION NO.44-37
IMAGE DENSITY(DVB) ADJUSTMENT SETTING
2
0 5
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 3 ; DV_ADJ_CL_K_M_DATA_2
F : 4 ; DV_ADJ_CL_K_M_DATA_3
G : 2 ; DV_ADJ_BK_H_DATA_1
H : 3 ; DV_ADJ_BK_H_DATA_2
I : 4 ; DV_ADJ_BK_H_DATA_3
J : 4 ; DV_ADJ_START_CL_K_L_1
K : 3 ; DV_ADJ_START_CL_K_L_2
L : 1 ; DV_ADJ_START_CL_K_L_3
K C M Y
A DVCH KIND K K color developing tank kind
B DVCH KIND C C color developing tank kind
C DVCH KIND M M color developing tank kind
D DVCH KIND Y Y color developing tank kind
E DVCH_AD_K K color developing tank AD value
F DVCH_AD_C C color developing tank AD value
G DVCH_AD_M M color developing tank AD value
H DVCH_AD_Y Y color developing tank AD value

44-52
Purpose (This simulation should not be executed
Function (Purpose) Used to check the image density level of
each color toner patch in 1-pixel half tone
correction.
Section
Operation/Procedure

44-54
Function (Purpose) The 1-pixel half tone correction result is dis-
played.
Section
Operation/Procedure

44-56
Function (Purpose) The 1-pixel half tone correction is executed
compulsorily.
Section
Operation/Procedure

44-57
Function (Purpose) The 1-pixel half tone correction value is
cleared.
Section
Operation/Procedure

46

46-1
Purpose Adjustment (Color copy mode)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy density in the copy
mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item of the adjustment with [|] and [+] keys on
the touch panel.
SIMULATION NO.44-43
TEST
DEVELOPER UNIT AD MONITOR
DVCH KIND K :
1/1
DVCH KIND C :
DVCH KIND M :
DVCH KIND Y :
DVCH AD K :
DVCH AD C :
DVCH AD M :
DVCH AD Y :
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-52
TEST
1 PIXEL HALF TONE CORRECT RESULT
CLOSE
1/1
PTK PTC PTM PTY PTK PTC PTM PTY
ID 12 : 255 255 255 255 ID 1 : 255 255 255 255
ID 13 : 255 255 255 255 ID 2 : 255 255 255 255
ID 3 : 255 255 255 255 ID 14 : 255 255 255 255
ID 15 : 255 255 255 255 ID 4 : 255 255 255 255
ID 16 : 255 255 255 255 ID 5 : 255 255 255 255
ID 6 : 255 255 255 255
ID 7 : 255 255 255 255
ID 8 : 255 255 255 255
ID 9 : 255 255 255 255
ID 11 : 255 255 255 255
ID 10 : 255 255 255 255
M Y C K
1 PIXEL HALF TONE RESULT DISPLAY
EXECUTE
[EX-LOW] A: 01.000 , B: 100.000
1/1
SIMULATION NO.44-54
TEST
[HIGH] A: 05.000 , B: 150.000
[LOW] A: -10.000 , B: -200.000 , C: 200.000
[CONNECT] A: 10.000 , B: -150.000
[MID] A: 05.000 , B: 200.000 , C: 150.000
[CONNECT SENSOR] #1: 255, #2: 255, #3: 255, #4: 255
Item
Default
value
A AUTO Automatic 50
B TEXT Text 50
C TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO Text/Print 50
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 50
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed photo 50
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 50
G MAP Map 50
H LIGHT Light document 50
I TEXT (COPY TO COPY) Text (Copy document) 50
J TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
(COPY TO COPY)
Text/Print (Copy
document)
50
K PRINTED PHOTO (COPY
TO COPY)
Print photo (Copy
document)
50
SIMULATION NO.44-56
TEST
1 PIXEL HALF TONE DENSITY CORRECT EXECUTION
EXECUTE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-57
TEST
1 PIXEL HALF TONE ADJUSTMENT DATA CLEAR
CLOSE
EXECUTE

46-2
Purpose Adjustment (Monochrome copy mode)
mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
the touch panel.

46-4
Purpose Adjustment (Color scanner mode)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the scanner
mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
the touch panel.

46-5
Purpose Adjustment (Monochrome scanner mode)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the scanner
mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
the touch panel.
L TEXT (COLOR TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
Text (Color enhancement) 50
M TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
(COLOR TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
Text/Print (Color
enhancement)
50
N TEXT/PHOTO (COLOR
TONE ENHANCEMENT)
Text/Photograph (Color
enhancement)
50
O PRINTED PHOTO (COLOR
TONE ENHANCEMENT)
Printed photo (Color
enhancement)
50
P PHOTOGRAPH (COLOR
TONE ENHANCEMENT)
Photo (Color
enhancement)
50
Q MAP (COLOR TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
Map (Color enhancement) 50
R SINGLE COLOR Single color 50
S SINGLE COLOR (COPY TO
COPY)
Single color (Copy
document)
50
T TWO COLOR 2-color (red/black) copy 50
U TWO COLOR (COPY TO
COPY)
2-color (red/black) copy
(copy document)
50
Item
Default
value
A AUTO1 Automatic 1 50
B AUTO2 Automatic 2 50
C TEXT Text 50
D TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO Text/Print 50
E TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 50
F PRINTED PHOTO Printed photo 50
G PHOTOGRAPH Photo 50
H MAP Map 50
I TEXT (COPY TO COPY) Text (Copy document) 50
J TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
(COPY TO COPY)
Text/Print (Copy document) 50
K PRINTED PHOTO (COPY
TO COPY)
Print photo (Copy
document)
50
L LIGHT Light document 50
Item
Default
value
A : 50 ; AUTO
B : 50 ; TEXT
D : 50 ; TEXT/PHOTO
A:
SIMULATION NO.46-01
50
1 99
OK
TEST
CLOSE
F : 50 ; PHOTOGRAPH
G : 50 ; MAP
H : 50 ; LIGHT
Item Default value
A TEXT Text 50
B TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO Text/Print 50
C TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 50
D PRINTED PHOTO Printed photo 50
E PHOTOGRAPH Photo 50
F MAP Map 50
A : 50 ; AUTO1
B : 50 ; AUTO2
C : 50 ; TEXT
A:
SIMULATION NO.46-02
50
1 99
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 50 ; TEXT/PHOTO
G : 50 ; PHOTOGRAPH
H : 50 ; MAP
L : 50 ; LIGHT
OK
A : 50 ; TEXT
B : 50 ; EXT/PRINTED PHOTO
C : 50 ; TEXT/PHOTO
D : 50 ; PTINTED PHOTO
A:
SIMULATION NO.46-04
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT(COLOR)[SCANNER]
50
1 99
TEST
CLOSE
E : 50 ; PHOTOGRAPH
F : 50 ; MAP

46-8
Purpose Adjustment (Color scanner mode)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the scanner color balance
RGB.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target with [R] [G] [B] keys on the touch
panel.
the touch panel.

46-9
Purpose Adjustment (DSPF mode)
mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target mode with [ON] and [DSPF] keys
on the touch panel.
the touch panel.
Item
Default
value
A AUTO TEXT Automatic/Text 50
B AUTO TEXT/PRINT PHOTO Automatic/Text/Print 50
C AUTO TEXT/PHOTO Automatic/Text/
Photograph
50
D TEXT Text 50
E TEXT/PRINT PHOTO Text/Print 50
F TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 50
G PRINTED PHOTO Printed photo 50
H PHOTOGRAPH Photo 50
I MAP Map 50
Item
Default
value
A LOW DENSITY POINT Low density correction amount 50
B HIGH DENSITY POINT High density correction amount 50
OK
A : 50 ; AUTO TEXT
B : 50 ; AUTO EXT/PRINTED PHOTO
C : 50 ; AUTO TEXT/PHOTO
D : 50 ; TEXT
A:
SIMULATION NO.46-05
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT(B/W)[SCANNER]
50
1 99
TEST
CLOSE
E : 50 ; TEXT/PRINT PHOTO
F : 50 ; TEXT/PHOTO
G : 50 ; PRINTED PHOTO
H : 50 ; PHOTOGRAPH
I : 50 ; MAP
A : 50 ; LOW DENSITY POINT
B : 50 ; HIGH DENSITY POINT A:
SIMULATION NO.46-08
SCANNER COLOR BALANCE ADJUSTMENT (COLOR SCANNER MODE)
50
1 99
B G R
OK
TEST
CLOSE
Item
Default
value
A OC COPY SIDEA: LOW DSPF copy mode
exposure adjustment (low
density)
42
B SCAN SIDEA: LOW DSPF scanner mode
density)
42
C FAX SIDEA: LOW DSPF FAX mode
density)
42
D COPY SIDEA: HIGH DSPF copy mode
exposure adjustment
(high density)
53
E SCAN SIDEA: HIGH DSPF scanner mode
exposure adjustment
(high density)
53
F FAX SIDEA: HIGH DSPF FAX mode
exposure adjustment
(high density)
53
A DSPF COPY SIDEB: LOW DSPF copy mode
density)
45
B SCAN SIDEB: LOW DSPF scanner mode
density)
45
C FAX SIDEB: LOW DSPF FAX mode
density)
45
D COPY SIDEB: HIGH DSPF copy mode
exposure adjustment
(high density)
50
E SCAN SIDEB: HIGH DSPF scanner mode
exposure adjustment
(high density)
50
F FAX SIDEB: HIGH DSPF FAX mode
exposure adjustment
(high density)
50
G BALANCE SIDEB: R DSPF color balance R 50
H BALANCE SIDEB: G DSPF color balance G 50
I BALANCE SIDEB: B DSPF color balance B 50
OK
A : 42 ; COPY SIDEA : LOW
B : 42 ; SCAN SIDEA : LOW
C : 42 ; FAX SIDEA : LOW
D : 53 ; COPY SIDEA : HIGH
A:
SIMULATION NO.46-09
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT(SPF)
42
1 99
TEST
CLOSE
E : 53 ; SCAN SIDEA : HIGH
F : 53 ; FAX SIDEA : HIGH
DSPF OC

46-10
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the engine color balance
manually.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target mode with the touch panel key.
2) Select an adjustment target color with [K][C][M][Y] keys on the
touch panel.
the touch panel.

46-16
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the engine color balance
manual adjustment (monochrome, all
modes).
Section
Operation/Procedure
the touch panel.

46-19
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the monochrome auto expo-
sure mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Select an item to be set with touch panel.
When an item is selected, it is highlighted and the setting change is
saved.
TEXT Text
TEXT/PRT PHOTO Text/Printed Photo
PRINTED PHOTO Printed photo
PHOTO{TEXT/PHOTO Photograph + Text/Printed Photo
MAP Map
LIGHT Light document
COPY ORG Copy document
A - O POINT1 - 15 500: Default value
SIMULATION NO.46-10
TEST
EXECUTE
1/1
TEXT TEXT/PRT PHOTO PRINTED PHOTO PHOTO+TEXT/PHOTO
CLOSE
MAP LIGHT COPY ORG
A: 500 ; POINT1
B: 500 ; POINT2
C: 500 ; POINT3
D: 500 ; POINT4
A:
SIMULATION NO.46-10
500
245 755
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E: 500 ; POINT5
F : 500 ; POINT6
G: 500 ; POINT7
H: 500 ; POINT8
I : 500 ; POINT9
J : 500 ; POINT10
K: 500 ; POINT11
L : 500 ; POINT12
EXECUTE
K C M Y
Item
Default
value
AE_MODE Auto exposure mode MODE1,
MODE2
MODE1
AE_STOP_COPY Auto exposure Stop
(for copy)
ON/OFF ON
AE_STOP_FAX Auto exposure Stop
(for FAX)
ON/OFF ON
AE_STOP_SCAN Auto exposure Stop
(for scanner)
ON/OFF ON
AE_FILTER Auto exposure filter
setting
SOFT NORMAL
NORMAL
SHARP
AE_WIDTH AE exposure width FULL FULL
PART
A : 500 ; POINT1
B : 500 ; POINT2
C : 500 ; POINT3
D : 500 ; POINT4
A:
SIMULATION NO.46-16
500
373 627
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 500 ; POINT5
F : 500 ; POINT6
G : 500 ; POINT7
H : 500 ; POINT8
I : 500 ; POINT9
J : 500 ; POINT10
K : 500 ; POINT11
L : 500 ; POINT12
EXECUTE
MODE1
ON
SIMULATION NO.46-19
TEST
EXPOSURE MODE SETUP (B/W-AE)
1/1
AE_MODE MODE2
OFF
ON
AE_STOP COPY
AE_STOP FAX
AE_STOP SCAN
:
:
:
: OFF
ON OFF
NORMAL AE_FILTER : SOFT SHARP
PART AE_WIDTH : FULL

46-21
Purpose Adjustment
manual adjustment (color, all modes).
Section
Operation/Procedure
touch panel.
the touch panel.

46-23
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the half tone highest den-
sity correction.
Section
Operation/Procedure
0: Allow 1: Inhibit

46-24
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the engine half tone auto
density adjustment.
Section
Operation/Procedure
The half tone auto density adjustment is performed and self
print is outputted.
2) Place the outputted self print patch on the glass table, and
select a process mode with [FACTORY] and [SERVICE] on
the touch panel.
The patch is scanned and the 16-patch self print is outputted.
4) Press [OK] key.
The correction value is saved and the reference value is regis-
tered.

46-25
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the color balance adjust-
ment in the single color mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target color with [C][M][Y] keys on the
touch panel.
the touch panel.
A : 500 ; POINT1
B : 500 ; POINT2
C : 500 ; POINT3
D : 500 ; POINT4
A:
SIMULATION NO.46-21
500
245 755
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 500 ; POINT5
F : 500 ; POINT6
G : 500 ; POINT7
H : 500 ; POINT8
I : 500 ; POINT9
J : 500 ; POINT10
K : 500 ; POINT11
L : 500 ; POINT12
EXECUTE
K C M Y
A : 0 ; (0:ENABLE 1:DISABLE)
A:
SIMULATION NO.46-23
ENGINE MAXIMUM DENSITY ADJUSTMENT MODE
0
0 1
OK
TEST
CLOSE
Item
Default value
C M Y
A RED 0 255 255
B GREEN 255 0 255
C BLUE 255 255 0
D YELLOW 0 0 255
E MAGENTA 0 255 0
F CYAN 255 0 0
SIMULATION NO.46-24
TEST
EXECUTE
CLOSE
TEST
,
CLOSE
A : 0 ; RED
B : 255 ; GREEN
C : 255 ; BLUE
D : 0 ; YELLOW
A:
SIMULATION NO.46-25
0
0 255
C M Y
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 0 ; MAGENTA
F : 255 ; CYAN

46-26
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the default setting of color
balance in the single color mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key.
The color balance setting in the single color mode is returned
to the default value.

46-27
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the engine/gamma calcu-
lation formula coefficient setting.
Section
Operation/Procedure
panel.

46-28
Purpose (This simulation should not be used unless
Function (Purpose) Used to check Auto exposure/Document
auto recognition/Line number recognition
(color mode).
Section
Operation/Procedure
TEST
SINGLE COLOR MODE STANDARD RATE SETUP
CLOSE
EXECUTE ARE YOU SURE?
YES NO
Item
Default
value
A BLACK TEXT
(SLOPE)
Black text edge area engine gamma
curve calculation coefficient (slope)
50
B BLACK TEXT
(INTERCEPT)
Black text edge area engine gamma
curve calculation coefficient (intercept)
50
C COLOR TEXT
(SLOPE)
Color text edge area engine gamma
50
D COLOR TEXT
(INTERCEPT)
Color text edge area engine gamma
50
E ED TEXT
(SLOPE)
Error diffusion edge area engine gamma
50
F ED TEXT
(INTERCEPT)
Error diffusion edge area engine gamma
50
A:
SIMULATION NO.46-27
50
1 99
OK
TEST
CLOSE
ACS (color document/
monochrome document
auto RESULT (judgment
result)
RESULT (judgment
result)
COL/MONO Document type Color
Black and white
STATISTICS ACSCONT ACS judgment counter value
COLOR AE (color auto
exposure)
RESULT (judgment
result)
SITAJI_JUDGE Background division detection result
STATISTICS (image
process statistic amount)
RATE_SCR Dot ratio
SHITAJI Background number judgment result
BEAT_JUDGE Background judgment result
SUM_SITAJI_SCR Background area dot number
ORG RECOG
(document type auto
judgment)
RESULT (judgment
result)
ORIGINAL TXT Document Auto text
TXT/HT Auto text dot
HT Auto dot
TXT/PIC Auto text photo
PIC Auto photo
TXT ON HT Text on auto dot
OHT Auto other
BACKGROUND Background None
GR Gray
WH White
NE Newspaper
WH_GR White gray
WH_NE White newspaper
WH_CO White color
CO Color
IM Image
MESH Dot No dot
IMAGE Image dot
BASE Background dot (non-image dot)
HTFE HIGH Line type High line number
LOW Low line number
ORG RECOG
(document type auto
judgment)
STATISTICS
(Image process statistic
amount)
HTCNT Dot counter value
PHOTOCNT Photographic paper counter value
STRCNT Text counter value
FLATCNT Background counter value
PREHTCNT Document judgment dot counter value
HTXTCNT Text-on-dot counter value
SUMF Average dot counter value
SUMM_L Gross of max. reverse rotation number (lower 32bit)
SUMM_H Gross of max. reverse rotation number (upper 4 bit)
SUMFM_L Gross of flat part max. reverse rotation number (lower 32bit)
SUMFM_H Gross of flat part max. reverse rotation number (upper 4 bit)
FHSTDR Background pixel histogram value (RED)
FHSTDG Background pixel histogram value (GREEN)
FHSTDB Background pixel histogram value (BLUE)
HTHSTDR Dot pixel histogram value (RED)
HTHSTDG Dot pixel histogram value (GREEN)
HTHSTDB Dot pixel histogram value (BLUE)
LHSTD Other-than-dot L component histogram value
MDHSTD Other-than-dot max. difference histogram value
OHSTDR Other-than-dot pixel histogram value (RED)
OHSTDG Other-than-dot pixel histogram value (GREEN)
OHSTDB Other-than-dot pixel histogram value (BLUE)
SUM_BETA_RGB Number of all divisions of background pixel histogram high level
number
EREA_BETA RGB Number of areas (backgrounds) of background pixel histogram high
level number
SUM_BETA_PHOTORGB Number of areas (photographic paper) of background pixel
histogram high level number
RATE_BETA Background ratio
SHITAJI Background number judgment result
BETA_JUDGE Background judgment result
RATE_SCR Dot ratio
RATE_SCR2 Dot judgment ratio
RATE_TSCR Text-on-dot ratio
HTFE_JUDGE Line number judgment result
SCR_HIST_JUDGE Dot histogram judgment result
SCR_CNT_JUDGE Dot counter value judgment result
TSCR_JUDGE Text-on-dot counter value judgment result
SCR_JUDGE Dot judgment result
RATE_OTHER Other ratio
TEXT_JUDGE Test judgment result
PHOTO_CNT_JUDGE Photographic paper pixel counter value judgment result
OTHER_JUDGE Other pixel counter value judgment result
PHOTO_JUDGE Photographic paper judgment result
TH_BETAQ Background pixel histogram high level number division detection
threshold value
TH_BETA_PHT2 Background pixel histogram high level number division detection
threshold value (Photographic paper)
TH_SCR2 Dot high level number threshold value
TH_SCR_CNT2 Threshold value for the dot counter value
TH_TSCR_CNT2 Threshold value for the text-on-dot counter value
TH_TEXT2 Text judgment threshold value
TH_PHOTO2 Photographic paper judgment threshold value
ALLCNT Total number of pixels of the judgment area
SCR RECOG (dot line
number recognition)
RESULT (judgment
result)
HTFE RESULT HIGH2 Dot line number High line number 2 (htfe_out=3)
HIGH1 High line number 1 (htfe_out=2)
LOW1 Low line number 1 (htfe_out=1)
LOW2 Low line number 2 (htfe_out=0)
STATISTICS (image
process statistic amount)
REVERSE AVE Max. reverse rotation average
REVERSE AVE (FLAT) Flat part max. reverse rotation average
FLAT SELECT Flat part dot pixel
comparison
flatr>Thflatr
Other than flatrTHflatr>
SIMULATION NO.46-28
TEST
AUTO EXPOSURE/ ORG AUTO RECOG/MESH LINE RECOG OF CONFIRM
PRESS [EXECUTE] TO SCAN START
CLOSE
EXECUTE

46-33
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the color auto mode
adjustment.
Section
Operation/Procedure
NOTE: Unless otherwise specified, the other items than the follow-
ing items should be set to default values. Only for the fol-
lowing items, change the set value according to necessity.
COLOR AE (SW MODE1 - 7 / TH MAX MONO /
TH MAX COLOR / SW NEWS / TH MODE SCR)
ACS (SIM LEVEL)
1) Select a target category to be set with [NEXT] [BACK] keys on
the touch panel.
2) Select a target item with [|] and [+] keys on the touch panel.
Category Item
Default
value
ACS Setting 4th digit and below A THCLMK_1 Pixel judgment threshold value (1) 7
B THCLBK_1 Final pixel judgment threshold value (1) 2
C ACSMSK_1 ACS mask size select (1) 0
D THCLMK_2 Pixel judgment threshold value (2) 7
E THCLBK_2 Final pixel judgment threshold value (2) 2
F ACSMSK_2 ACS mask size select (2) 0
G THCLMK_3 Pixel judgment threshold value (3) 7
H THCLBK_3 Final pixel judgment threshold value (3) 2
I ACSMSK_3 ACS mask size select (3) 0
J THCLMK_4 Pixel judgment threshold value (4) 7
K THCLBK_4 Final pixel judgment threshold value (4) 2
L ACSMSK_4 ACS mask size select (4) 0
M THCLMK_5 Pixel judgment threshold value (5) 7
N THCLBK_5 Final pixel judgment threshold value (5) 2
O ACSMSK_5 ACS mask size select (5) 0
P SIM_LEVEL ACS judgment select switch (density difference) 2
Q TH_ACS5_RT TH_ACS5: Reduction threshold value calculation ratio 50
Setting 5th digit and above A TH_ACS5 ENLARGE ACS judgment threshold value 5 (For enlargement) 30000
COLOR AE Setting 4th digit and below A SW_MODE1 Auto text document background
detection
1: ON 1
0: OFF
B SW_MODE2 Auto text dot document
background detection
1: ON 1
0: OFF
C SW_MODE3 Auto text-on-dot document
1: ON 1
0: OFF
D SW_MODE4 Auto dot document background
detection
1: ON 0
0: OFF
E SW_MODE5 Auto photo document background
detection
1: ON 0
0: OFF
F SW_MODE6 Auto text photo document
1: ON 0
0: OFF
G SW_MODE7 Auto other document background
detection
1: ON 0
0: OFF
H TH_MAX_MONO Monochrome background detection threshold value 17
I TH_MAX_COLOR Color background detection threshold value 17
J SW_NEWS Newspaper background compulsory removal switch 0
K SW_MODE_SCR1 Dot area background judgment switch 3
L SW_MODE_SCR2 Dot area background removal select switch 0
M SW_MODE_MIX Auto other document background detection switch 2
N SW_HOSEI Correction table correction 4
O AE COLOR TABLE Selection of color correction table
in color AE
1: ON 1
0: OFF
P BG_REMOVE_LEVEL
(OC)
Background removal level change (OC) 4
Q BG_REMOVE_LEVEL
(RSPF)
Background removal level change (RSPF) 4
R BG_REMOVE_LEVEL
(DSPF SIDE1)
Background removal level change (DSPF front surface) 4
S BG_REMOVE_LEVEL
(DSPF SIDE2)
Background removal level change (DSPF back surface) 4
T BG_REMOVE_ADJ Background judgment correction value 0
Setting 5th digit and above A TH_MODE_SCR Dot ratio threshold value 3000
B TH_SITAJI_SCR Background dot threshold value 3000
ORG RECOG Setting 4th digit and below A MVSTRSEL REDUCE Text pixel judgment result select register (reduction) 0
B MVSTRSEL ENLARGE Text pixel judgment result select register (enlargement) 0
C PSEL1 REDUCE Photographic paper judgment result select register (reduction) 0
D PSEL1 ENLARGE Photographic paper judgment result select register
(enlargement)
0
E PSEL2 REDUCE Photographic paper pixel judgment result select register
(reduction)
0
F PSEL2 ENLARGE Photographic paper pixel judgment result select register
(enlargement)
0
G BUSYSEL REDUCE Complication level comparison value select register (reduction) 1
H BUSYSEL ENLARGE Complication level comparison value select register
(enlargement)
1
I HTSEL REDUCE Dot judgment select (reduction) 0: AREA 1
1: ORG
J HTSEL ENLARGE Dot judgment select (enlargement) 0: AREA 1
1: ORG
K ASEL REDUCE Overall judgment priority level select register (reduction) 16
L ASEL ENLARGE Overall judgment priority level select register (enlargement) 16
M HSTSEL REDUCE Histogram division fluctuation register (reduction) 0
N HSTSEL ENLARGE Histogram division fluctuation register (enlargement) 0
O HSTSEL2 REDUCE Max. density difference histogram division fluctuation register
(reduction)
3
P HSTSEL2 ENLARGE Max. density difference histogram division fluctuation register
(enlargement)
3
Q TH_SUM_BETARGB Threshold value of total number of divisions of background high
label number (background)
7
R TH_BETA_SUB Monochrome background judgment threshold value 6
S TH_WHITE_BETA White background number judgment threshold value 27
T TH_GRAY_BETA1 Gray background judgment threshold value 1 18
U TH_GRAY_BETA2 Gray background judgment threshold value 2 25
V TH_NOISE REDUCE Dot noise threshold value (reduction) 10
W TH_NOISE ENLARGE Dot noise threshold value (enlargement) 10
X SW_SCR1 Dot ratio judgment switch 0
Y SW_SCR2 Dot judgment switch 0
Z TH_HTFE High line number threshed value 0
AA SW_TSCR Text-on-dot judgment switch 1
AB TH_SUM_PHOTO_RGB Threshold value of total number of divisions of background high
level number (photographic paper)
15
AC TH_BETA_RT TH_BETA: Reduction threshold value calculation ratio 50
AD TH_SCR_RT TH_SCR: Reduction threshold value calculation ratio 50
AE TH_SCR_CNT_RT TH_SCR_CNT: Reduction threshold value calculation ratio 50
AF TH_TSCR_ CNT_RT TH_TSCR_CNT: Reduction threshold value calculation ratio 50
AG TH_TEXT_RT TH_TEXT: Reduction threshold value calculation ratio 50
AH TH_PHOTO_RT TH_PHOTO: Reduction threshold value calculation ratio 50
AI TH_BETA_PHT_RT TH_BETA_PHT: Reduction threshold value calculation ratio 50
Setting 5th digit and above A TH_BETA ENLARGE Background pixel histogram high level number division
detection value (background) (enlargement)
1000000
B TH_SCR ENLARGE Dot high level number threshold value (enlargement) 20000
C TH_SCR_RATE Threshold value related to dot ratio 4500
D TH_SCR_CNT EL Threshold value for dot counter value (enlargement) 800000
E TH_MANSEN_RATE Ten-thousand line/print area judgment threshold value 1500
F TH_TSCR_RATE Threshold value for text-on-dot ratio 300
G TH_TSCR_CNT EL Threshold value for the text-on-dot counter value
(enlargement)
10000
H TH_TEXT ENLARGE Text judgment threshold value (enlargement) 50000
I TH_PHOTO ENLARGE Photographic paper judgment threshold value (enlargement) 50000
J TH_BETA_RATE Background ratio threshold value 3000
K TH_BETA_PHT_EL Background pixel histogram high level number division
detection value (photographic paper) (enlargement)
100000
L TH_OTHER Other judgment threshold value 7000
SCR RECOG Setting 4th digit and below A THBAVEM1 REDUCE Threshold value 1 with 13 x 7 mask average value (reduction) 170
B THBAVEM1 ENLARGE Threshold value 1 with 13 x 7 mask average value
(enlargement)
170
C THBAVEM2 REDUCE Threshold value 2 with 13 x 7 mask average value (reduction) 105
D THBAVEM2 ENLARGE Threshold value 2 with 13 x 7 mask average value
(enlargement)
105
E THBAVEM3 REDUCE Threshold value 3 with 13 x 7 mask average value (reduction) 50
F THBAVEM3 ENLARGE Threshold value 3 with 13 x 7 mask average value
(enlargement)
50
G CMSUB1 REDUCE 13 x 7 mask average value adjustment value 1 (reduction) 55
H CMSUB1 ENLARGE 13 x 7 mask average value adjustment value 1 (enlargement) 55
Category Item
Default
value
SCR RECOG Setting 4th digit and below I CMSUB2 REDUCE 13 x 7 mask average value adjustment value 2 (reduction) 0
J CMSUB2 ENLARGE 13 x 7 mask average value adjustment value 2 (enlargement) 0
K MREVSEL REDUCE High line number judgment method select (reduction) 0
L MREVSEL ENLARGE High line number judgment method select (enlargement) 0
M MSDSEL REDUCE When MREVSEL=3, output select (reduction) 0
N MSDSEL ENLARGE When MREVSEL=3, output select (enlargement) 0
O THAVEFM1 REDUCE THAVEFM1 reduction 65
P THAVEFM1 ENLARGE THAVEFM1 enlargement 96
Q THAVEFM2 REDUCE THAVEFM2 reduction 54
R THAVEFM2 ENLARGE THAVEFM2 enlargement 80
S THAVEFM3 REDUCE THAVEFM3 reduction 48
T THAVEFM3 ENLARGE THAVEFM3 enlargement 70
U THAVEM1 REDUCE THAVEM1 reduction 65
V THAVEM1 ENLARGE THAVEM1 enlargement 96
W THAVEM2 REDUCE THAVEM2 reduction 54
X THAVEM2 ENLARGE THAVEM2 enlargement 80
Y THAVEM3 REDUCE THAVEM3 reduction 48
Z THAVEM3 ENLARGE THAVEM3 enlargement 70
SEGMENT Setting 4th
digit and
below
Text-on-dot ON/
OFF (auto/
manual mode)
A MESH_TXT ON HT (Auto) Text-on-dot 0: THROUGH 0
B MESH_TXT/HT1 (Auto) text dot (low 1, line 1) 1: OFF
C MESH_TXT/HT2 (Auto) text dot (low 2, line 1) 2: ON1
D MESH_TXT/PR (Manual) Text print 3: ON2
Print document
text detection
level
E PR_TXT ON HT (Auto) Text-on-dot 0: THROUGH 0
F PR_TXT/HT1 (Auto) Text dot (low 1, line 1/2) 1: ON1
G PR_TXT/HT2 (Auto) Text dot (low 2, line 1/2) 2: ON2
H PR_TXT/PR (Manual) Text print 3: ON3
I PR_CHECK1 Check button for consideration
((Auto) text-on-dot)
1: ON 0
0: OFF
J PR_CHECK2 Check button for consideration
((Auto) Text dot (low 1, line 1/2))
1: ON 0
0: OFF
K PR_CHECK3 Check button for consideration
((Auto) Text dot (low 2, line 1/2))
1: ON 0
0: OFF
L PR_CHECK4 Check button for consideration
((Manual) text print)
1: ON 0
0: OFF
M THWMAX THWMIN (Print document text detection level) 220
N THWMIN THWMIN (Print document text detection level) 153
Chromatic/
achromatic
judgment level
O COLOR_PRINT MODE Print system mode 0: THROUGH 0
1: OFF
P COLOR_PHOTO MODE Photographic paper system mode 2: ON1
3: ON2
Q COLOR_CHECK1 Check button for consideration
(print system mode)
1: ON 0
0: OFF
R COLOR_CHECK2 Check button for consideration
(photographic paper system mode)
1: ON 0
0: OFF
S THILVC THILVC (Chromatic/achromatic judgment level print system
mode)
166
T THACOLL THACOLL (Chromatic/achromatic judgment level print system
mode)
21
U THACOLH THACOLH (Chromatic/achromatic judgment level print system
mode)
18
V THILVG THILVG (Chromatic/achromatic judgment level print system
mode)
118
W THAGRYL THAGRYL (Chromatic/achromatic judgment level print system
mode)
14
X THAGRYH THAGRYH (Chromatic/achromatic judgment level print system
mode)
20
Color auto
document
recognition filter
enhancement
setting
Y SCREEN FILTER
LEVEL
Filter enhancement setting 1: H (High enhancement) 2
2: L (Low enhancement)
3: AUTO (Auto)
Specified mode
area separation
ON/OFF setting
Z SEG_ACT_A_OTR (Auto) Other mode 1: ON 1
0: OFF
AA SEG_ACT_M_PRT1 (Manual) Print document mode
(Text)
1: ON 1
0: OFF
AB SEG_ACT_M_PRT2 (Manual) Print document mode
(Text/Print)
1: ON 1
0: OFF
Category Item
Default
value

46-36
Function (Purpose) 2-color (red/black) copy adjustment
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target category for the adjustment with [RANGE] and
[COEFFICIENT] keys on the touch panel.
the touch panel.
SEGMENT Setting 4th
digit and
below
INDEX direct
specification
AC SEG_DS_A_TOH (Auto) Text-on-dot 0
AD SEG_DS_M_TPP (Manual) Text print 0
Detection
amount
adjustment
AE SEG_ADJ_TPP_BK1 Text print system Black text 1 10
AF SEG_ADJ_TPP_BK2 Text print system Black text 2 10
AG SEG_ADJ_TPP_CL Text print system Color text 13
AH SEG_ADJ_TPP_PR Text print system Chromatic/achromatic 12
AI SEG_ADJ_TPP_MESH Text print system Dot 10
AJ SEG_ADJ_TXT_BK1 Text system Black text 1 10
AK SEG_ADJ_TXT_BK2 Text system Black text 2 10
AL SEG_ADJ_TXT_CL Text system Color text 13
AM SEG_ADJ_TXT_PR Text system Chromatic/achromatic 12
AN SEG_ADJ_TXT_MESH Text system Dot 10
AO SEG_ADJ_OTR_BK1 Other Black text 1 10
AP SEG_ADJ_OTR_BK2 Other Black text 2 10
AQ SEG_ADJ_OTR_CL Other Color text 13
AR SEG_ADJ_OTR_PR Other Chromatic/achromatic 12
AS SEG_ADJ_OTR_MESH Other Dot 10
Text-on-dot blur
adjustment
AT BKUCR_ACTM
(- 99%)
- 99% 0: THROUGH 0
1: OFF
2: ON
AU BKUCR_ACTM
(100% - 199%)
100% - 199% 0: THROUGH 0
1: OFF
2: ON
AV BKUCR_ACTM
(200% -)
200% - 0: THROUGH 0
1: OFF
2: ON
AW BKUCR_ACTA
(- 99%)
- 99% 0: THROUGH 0
1: OFF
2: ON
AX BKUCR_ACTA
(100% - 199%)
100% - 199% 0: THROUGH 0
1: OFF
2: ON
AY BKUCR_ACTA
(200% -)
200% - 0: THROUGH 0
1: OFF
2: ON
AZ WBGLV_TPP Text print, Text system 256
BA WBGLV_TP Text Photographic paper system 256
BB WBGLV_OTR Other system 256
Setting 5th
digit and
above
Text-on-dot ON/
OFF (auto/
manual mode)
A MESH_CHECK1 Check button for consideration
((Auto) text-on-dot)
1: ON 0
0: OFF
B MESH_CHECK2 Check button for consideration
((Auto) Text dot (low 1, line 1))
1: ON 0
0: OFF
C MESH_CHECK3 Check button for consideration
((Auto) Text dot (low 2, line 1))
1: ON 0
0: OFF
D MESH_CHECK4 Check button for consideration
((Auto) Text print)
1: ON 0
0: OFF
E THED3A THED3A (Text-on-dot ON/OFF) 1000
F THED3B THED3B (Text-on-dot ON/OFF) 1000
Category Item
Default
value
OK BACK NEXT
A : 7 ; THCLMK_1
B : 2 ; THCLBK_1
C : 0 ; ACSMSK_1
D : 7 ; THCLMK_2
A:
SIMULATION NO.46-33
7
0 9
TEST
CLOSE
E : 2 ; THCLBK_2
F : 0 ; ACSMSK_2
G : 7 ; THCLMK_3
H : 2 ; THCLBK_3
I : 0 ; ACSMSK_3
J : 7 ; THCLMK_4
K : 2 ; THCLBK_4

46-37
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the black/white image gen-
eration adjustment.
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [YES] key. (The set value is saved.)

46-39
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the image send sharpness
adjustment.
Section
Operation/Procedure

46-40
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the collective adjustment
of all the FAX exposure modes.
Section
Operation/Procedure
The set value is saved and the adjustment print is outputted.
Item
Default value
C M Y
RANGE (red judgment range) A PARAMETER O Red adjustment coefficient O 3
B PARAMETER M Red adjustment coefficient M 3
C PARAMETER INTENSITY Chromatic enhancement coefficient 3
COEFFICIENT (output color coefficient) A RED R output color 0 255 255
B GREEN G output color 255 0 255
C BLUE B output color 255 255 0
D CYAN C output color 255 0 0
E MAGENTA M output color 0 255 0
F YELLOW Y output color 0 0 255
Item Default value
A R/G Gray generation setting (R/G) 35
B B/G Gray generation setting (B/G) 0
Item
Default
value
A 200 x 100 [DPI] OFF 200 x 100 half tone OFF 1
B 200 x 200 [DPI] OFF 200 x 200 half tone OFF 1
C 200 x 200 [DPI] ON 200 x 200 half tone ON 1
A:
A : 3
B : 3
C : 3
; PARAMETER O
; PARAMETER M
; PARAMETER INTENSITY
SIMULATION NO.46-36
RED/BLACK COLOR COPY ADJUSTMENT
3
0 6
OK
TEST
CLOSE
RANGE COEFFICIENT
ARE YOU SURE?
YES NO
A:
A : 35
B : 0
; R/G
; B/G
SIMULATION NO.46-37
B&W IMAGE CREATE ADJUSTMENT
35
0 99
TEST
EXECUTE DEFAULT
CLOSE
D 200 x 400 [DPI] OFF 200 x 400 half tone OFF 1
E 200 x 400 [DPI] ON 200 x 400 half tone ON 1
F 400 x 400 [DPI] OFF 400 x 400 half tone OFF 1
G 400 x 400 [DPI] ON 400 x 400 half tone ON 1
H 600 x 600 [DPI] OFF 600 x 600 half tone OFF 1
I 600 x 600 [DPI] ON 600 x 600 half tone ON 1
Item
Default
value
A EXPOSURE LEVEL(ALL) Exposure data value
(collective)
50
Item
Default
value
A : 1 ; 200x100 [DPI] OFF
B : 1 ; 200x200 [DPI] OFF
C : 1 ; 200x200 [DPI] ON
D : 1 ; 200x400 [DPI] OFF
A:
SIMULATION NO.46-39
IMAGE SEND SHARPNESS ADJUSTMENT
1
0 2
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 1 ; 200x400 [DPI] ON
F : 1 ; 400x400 [DPI] OFF
G : 1 ; 400x400 [DPI] ON
H : 1 ; 600x600 [DPI] OFF
I : 1 ; 600x600 [DPI] ON
A : 50 ; EXPOSURE LEVEL(ALL)
A:
SIMULATION NO.46-40
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT(FAX : ALL)
50
1 99
OK
TEST
CLOSE
EXECUTE

46-41
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the FAX exposure adjust-
ment (normal character).
Section
Operation/Procedure

46-42
ment (small character).
Section
Operation/Procedure

46-43
ment (fine).
Section
Operation/Procedure
Item
Default
value
A AUTO Automatic 50
B EXPOSURE1 Exposure 1 50
C EXPOSURE2 Exposure 2 50
D EXPOSURE3 Exposure 3 50
E EXPOSURE4 Exposure 4 50
F EXPOSURE5 Exposure 5 50
G EXECUTE MODE Print mode 1: AUTO 1
2: EXP1
3: EXP2
4: EXP3
5: EXP4
6: EXP5
Item
Default
value
A AUTO Small character/Automatic 50
B EXPOSURE1 Small character/Exposure 1 50
C EXPOSURE2 Small character/Exposure 2 50
D EXPOSURE3 Small character/Exposure 3 50
E EXPOSURE4 Small character/Exposure 4 50
F EXPOSURE5 Small character/Exposure 5 50
G AUTO H_TONE Small character/Automatic/half
tone
50
H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE Small character/Exposure 1/
Half tone
50
I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE Small character/Exposure 2/
Half tone
50
J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE Small character/Exposure 3/
Half tone
50
A : 50 ; AUTO
B : 50 ; EXPOSURE1
C : 50 ; EXPOSURE2
D : 50 ; EXPOSURE3
A:
SIMULATION NO.46-41
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT(FAX : NORMAL)
50
1 99
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 50 ; EXPOSURE4
F : 50 ; EXPOSURE5
G : 1 ; EXECUTE MODE : AUTO
EXECUTE
K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE Small character/Exposure 4/
Half tone
50
L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE Small character/Exposure 5/
Half tone
50
M EXECUTE
MODE
AUTO Print
mode
1: Small character/
Automatic
1
EXP1 2: Small character/
Exposure 1
Exposure 2
Exposure 3
Exposure 4
Exposure 5
AUTO
H_TONE
7: Small character/
Automatic/half tone
EXP1
H_TONE
8: Small character/
Exposure 1/Half tone
EXP2
H_TONE
9: Small character/
EXP3
H_TONE
10: Small character/
EXP4
H_TONE
EXP5
H_TONE
Item
Default
value
A AUTO Fine/Automatic 50
B EXPOSURE1 Fine/Exposure 1 50
C EXPOSURE2 Fine/Exposure 2 50
D EXPOSURE3 Fine/Exposure 3 50
E EXPOSURE4 Fine/Exposure 4 50
F EXPOSURE5 Fine/Exposure 5 50
G AUTO H_TONE Fine/Automatic/Half tone 50
H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 1/Half tone 50
I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 2/Half tone 50
Item
Default
value
A : 50 ; AUTO
B : 50 ; EXPOSURE1
C : 50 ; EXPOSURE2
D : 50 ; EXPOSURE3
A:
SIMULATION NO.46-42
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT(FAX : FINE)
50
1 99
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 50 ; EXPOSURE4
F : 50 ; EXPOSURE5
G : 50 ; AUTO H_TONE
H : 50 ; EXPOSURE1 H_TONE
I : 50 ; EXPOSURE2 H_TONE
J : 50 ; EXPOSURE3 H_TONE
K : 50 ; EXPOSURE4 H_TONE
L : 50 ; EXPOSURE5 H_TONE
EXECUTE

46-44
ment. (Super fine)
Section
Operation/Procedure

46-45
ment (600dpi).
Section
Operation/Procedure
4) The set value is saved and the adjustment print is outputted.
J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 3/Half tone 50
K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 4/Half tone 50
L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 5/Half tone 50
M EXECUTE
MODE
AUTO Print
mode
1: Fine/Automatic 1
EXP1 2: Fine/Exposure 1
AUTO
H_TONE
7: Fine/Automatic/
Half tone
EXP1
H_TONE
8: Fine/Exposure 1/
Half tone
EXP2
H_TONE
9: Fine/Exposure 2/
Half tone
EXP3
H_TONE
10: Fine/Exposure 3/
Half tone
EXP4
H_TONE
Half tone
EXP5
H_TONE
Half tone
Item
Default
value
A AUTO Super fine/Automatic 50
B EXPOSURE1 Super fine/Exposure 1 50
C EXPOSURE2 Super fine/Exposure 2 50
D EXPOSURE3 Super fine/Exposure 3 50
E EXPOSURE4 Super fine/Exposure 4 50
F EXPOSURE5 Super fine/Exposure 5 50
G AUTO H_TONE Super fine/Automatic/Half tone 50
H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE Super fine/Exposure 1/Half
tone
50
I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE Super fine/Exposure 2/Half
tone
50
J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE Super fine/Exposure 3/Half
tone
50
K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE Super fine/Exposure 4/Half
tone
50
Item
Default
value
A : 50 ; AUTO
B : 50 ; EXPOSURE1
C : 50 ; EXPOSURE2
D : 50 ; EXPOSURE3
A:
SIMULATION NO.46-43
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT(FAX : SUPER FINE)
50
1 99
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 50 ; EXPOSURE4
F : 50 ; EXPOSURE5
EXECUTE
L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE Super fine/Exposure 5/Half
tone
50
M EXECUTE
MODE
AUTO Print
mode
1: Super fine/
Automatic
1
EXP1 2: Super fine/
Exposure 1
EXP2 3: Super fine/
Exposure 2
EXP3 4: Super fine/
Exposure 3
EXP4 5: Super fine/
Exposure 4
EXP5 6: Super fine/
Exposure 5
AUTO
H_TONE
7: Super fine/Auto/
Half tone
EXP1
H_TONE
8: Super fine/
EXP2
H_TONE
9: Super fine/
EXP3
H_TONE
10: Super fine/
EXP4
H_TONE
11: Super fine/
EXP5
H_TONE
12: Super fine/
Item
Default
value
A AUTO 600 dpi/Automatic 50
B EXPOSURE1 600 dpi/Exposure 1 50
C EXPOSURE2 600 dpi/Exposure 2 50
D EXPOSURE3 600 dpi/Exposure 3 50
E EXPOSURE4 600 dpi/Exposure 4 50
F EXPOSURE5 600 dpi/Exposure 5 50
G AUTO H_TONE 600 dpi/Automatic/Half tone 50
H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE 600 dpi/Exposure 1/Half tone 50
I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE 600 dpi/Exposure 2 /Half tone 50
J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE 600 dpi/Exposure 3 /Half tone 50
Item
Default
value
A : 50 ; AUTO
B : 50 ; EXPOSURE1
C : 50 ; EXPOSURE2
D : 50 ; EXPOSURE3
A:
SIMULATION NO.46-44
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT(FAX : ULTRA FINE)
50
1 99
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 50 ; EXPOSURE4
F : 50 ; EXPOSURE5
EXECUTE

46-47
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the JPEG compression
rate setting in copying and scanning.
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [OK] key.
4) The set value is saved.

48

48-1
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the copy magnification
ratio (main scanning, sub scanning direc-
tion) adjustment.
Section
Operation/Procedure
the touch panel.
3) Press [OK] key.
The set value is saved.
K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE 600 dpi/Exposure 4 /Half tone 50
L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE 600 dpi/Exposure 5 /Half tone 50
M EXECUTE
MODE
AUTO Print
mode
600 dpi/Automatic 1
EXP1 600 dpi/Exposure 1
AUTO
H_TONE
600 dpi/Auto/Half
tone
EXP1
H_TONE
600 dpi/Exposure 1/
Half tone
EXP2
H_TONE
600 dpi/Exposure 2/
Half tone
EXP3
H_TONE
600 dpi/Exposure 3/
Half tone
EXP4
H_TONE
600 dpi/Exposure 4 /
Half tone
EXP5
H_TONE
600 dpi/Exposure 5 /
Half tone
Item
Default
value
A COPY (C)
color
0: LOW Low compression 0
1: MIDDLE Medium compression
2: HIGH High compression
B COPY (G)
gray
0: LOW Low compression 0
1: MIDDLE Medium compression
2: HIGH High compression
C SCAN (C)
color
0: MIDDLE1 Medium compression mode 1
compression, Q table for
decompression
0
decompression
decompression
Item
Default
value
A : 50 ; AUTO
B: 50 ; EXPOSURE1
K EXPOSURE3
C: 50 ; EXPOSURE2
D: 50 ;
A:
SIMULATION NO.46-45
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT(FAX: 600DPI)
50
1 99
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E: 50 ; EXPOSURE4
F: 50 ; EXPOSURE5
G: 50 ; AUTO H_TONE
H: 50 ; EXPOSURE1 H_TONE
K: 50 ; EXPOSURE4 H_TONE
EXECUTE
D SCAN (G)
gray
decompression
0
decompression
decompression
Item
Default
value
A CCD(MAIN) SCAN main scan magnification ratio
adjustment (CCD)
50
B CCD(SUB) SCAN sub scan magnification ratio
adjustment (CCD)
50
C SPF(MAIN) DSPF document front surface
magnification ratio adjustment (main scan)
50
D SPF(SUB) DSPF document front surface
magnification ratio adjustment (sub scan)
50
E SPFB(MAIN) DSPF document back surface
magnification ratio adjustment (main scan)
50
F SPFB(SUB) DSPF document back surface
magnification ratio adjustment (sub scan)
50
Item
Default
value
A : 0 ; COPY(C) : LOW
B : 0 ; COPY(G) : LOW
C : 0 ; SCAN(C) : MIDDLE 1
D : 0 ; SCAN(G) : MIDDLE 1
A:
SIMULATION NO.46-47
COPY SCAN COMPRESS RATE ADJUSTMENT
0
0 2
OK
TEST
CLOSE
A : 50 ; CCD(MAIN)
B : 50 ; CCD(SUB)
C : 50 ; SPF(MAIN)
D : 50 ; SPF(SUB)
A:
SIMULATION NO.48-01
50
1 99
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 50 ; SPFB(MAIN)
F : 50 ; SPFB(SUB)

48-5
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the copy magnification
ratio adjustment (sub scanning direction).
When the sub scanning direction image
magnification ratio is adjusted with SIM 48-
1 and a satisfactory copy image is not
obtained when copying by specifying a dif-
ferent copy magnification ratio, perform this
adjustment.
Section Scanner section
Operation/Procedure
the touch panel.
3) Press [OK] key.

48-6
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the rotation speed adjust-
ment of each motor.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target mode to be set with [COLOR], [MONO], and
[HEAVY] keys on the touch p panel.
3) Press [OK] key.
Item
Default
value
A MR (HI) Scanner motor (High speed) 50
B MR (MID) Scanner motor (Reference speed) 50
C MR (LO) Scanner motor (Low speed) 50
D DSPF (HI) DSPF motor (High speed) 50
E DSPF (MID) DSPF motor (Reference speed) 50
F DSPF (LO) DSPF motor (Low speed) 50
A : 50 ; MR(HI)
B : 50 ; MR(MID)
C : 50 ; MR(LO)
D : 50 ; DSPF(HI)
A:
SIMULATION NO.48-05
MOTOR SPEED ADJUSTMENT
50
1 99
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 50 ; DSPF(MID)
F : 50 ; DSPF(LO)
Item Default value
Color Monochrome Heavy paper
A A A RRM Resist motor correction value Color COLOR 50
Monochrome MONO 50
Heavy paper HEAVY 51
B B B BLTM Belt motor correction value Color COLOR 54
Monochrome MONO 54
C C C DMBK Drum K motor correction value Color COLOR 51
Monochrome MONO 51
D D DMCMY Drum CL motor correction value Color COLOR 51
E D E DVMK Developing K motor correction value Color COLOR 50
Monochrome MONO 50
F E F DVMC Developing CL motor correction value Color COLOR 50
Monochrome MONO 50
G F G FUM Fusing motor correction value Color COLOR 35
Monochrome MONO 35
H - - LCCM LCC motor correction value COLOR 50
I G H PFM PS front motor correction value Color COLOR 55
Monochrome MONO 55
J - - CPFM Paper feed motor correction value COLOR 50
K - - POM Paper exit motor correction value COLOR 50
L H I FUSER SETTING Fusing speed select timing Color COLOR 50
Monochrome MONO 60

49

49-1
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the firmware update.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Save the firmware to a USB memory.
2) Insert the USB memory to the machine.
3) Select the target firmware to be updated with the touch panel.
4) Select the target model for the firmware update.
6) Press [YES] key.
The selected firmware is updated.
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
<Error display for abnormal completion>

49-3
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to update the operation manual in the
HDD.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Save the operation manual data to a USB memory.
3) Select the update target data of the operation manual with the
touch panel.
5) Press [YES] key.
The selected data of the operation manual is updated.
CONFIG Configuration data
ICU (MAIN) ICU main
ICU (BOOTM) ICU boot section main
ICU (BOOTS) ICU boot section sub
LANGUAGE Language data program
GRAPHIC Graphic data for L-LCD
SLIST SLIST data for L-LCD
PCU (BOOT) PCU BOOT
PCU (MAIN) PCU main
A4LCC (BOOT) LCC (A4) BOOT
A4LCC (MAIN) LCC (A4) main
FIN (BOOT) Inner finisher BOOT
FIN (MAIN) Inner finisher main
SADDLE (BOOT) Saddle unit boot section
SADDLE (MAIN) Saddle unit main section
4KFIN (BOOT) 4K finisher BOOT
4KFIN (MAIN) 4K finisher main
A3LCC (BOOT) LCC(A3) BOOT
A3LCC (MAIN) LCC (A3) main
SCU (BOOT) SCU BOOT
SCU(MAIN) SCU main
DSPF (BOOT) DSPF BOOT
DSPF (MAIN) DSPF main
FAX (BOOT) FAX1 BOOT
FAX (MAIN) FAX1 main
FAX OPTION (BOOT) FAX2 BOOT
FAX OPTION (MAIN) FAX2 main
ESCP_FONT ESC/P font
PDL_FONT PDL font
ANIMATION Animation data
IMAGE_DATA Image ASIC data
COLOR PROFILE Color profile
A: 50 ; RRM
B : 54 ; BLTM
C : 51 ; DMBK
D : 51 ; DMCMY
A:
SIMULATION NO.48-06
VELOCITY ADJUSTMENT
50
1 99
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 50 ; DVMK
F : 50 ; DVMC
G : 35
:
; FUM
H: 50 ; LCCM
I 55 ; PFM
J : 50 ; CPFM
K : 50 ; POM
COLOR MONO HEAVY
Display Content
CONF Configuration data
ICUM ICU main
ICUBM ICU boot section main
ICUBS ICU boot section sub
LANG Language data program
GRAPH Graphic data for L-LCD
SLIST SLIST data for L-LCD
PCUB PCU BOOT
PCUM PCU main
LCC4B LCC(A4) BOOT
LCC4M LCC (A4) main
FINB Inner finisher BOOT
FINM Inner finisher main
SDLB Saddle unit boot section
SDLM Saddle unit main section
FIN4B 4K finisher BOOT
FIN4M 4K finisher main
LCC3B LCC (A3) BOOT
LCC3M LCC (A3) main
SCUB SCU BOOT
SCUM SCU main
DSPFB DSPF BOOT
DSPFM DSPF main
FAXB FAX1 BOOT
FAXM FAX1 main
FXOPB FAX2 BOOT
FXOPM FAX2 main
ESCP ESC/P font
PDL PDL font
ANIME Animation data
IMGDT Image ASIC data
SIMULATION NO.49-01
TEST
FIRMWARE UPDATE/usbbd00
<DIR> FOLDER1 FILE1
FILE2 <DIR> FOLDER2
1/1
CLOSE
..

50

50-1
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy image position on
print paper and the void area (image loss)
in the copy mode. (The similar adjustment
can be performed also with SIM 50-5 and
SIM 50-2 (simple method). (Document
table mode))
Section
Operation/Procedure
the touch panel.

50-2
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy image position on
print paper and the void area (image loss)
in the copy mode. (The similar adjustment
can be performed also with SIM 50-1. This
simulation. However, is simpler.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
Be sure to perform the sub scanning direction magnification ratio
(SIM 48-1) in advance.
1) Set L1 of item A and L2 of item B to 0.
3) Place a ruler on the left edge of the document table, and make
a black and white copy at the magnification ratio of 400%.
4) Measure the distance L1 and L2 in the copied image in the unit
of 0.1mm. (Refer to the figure below.) Multiple the measure
values (in the unit of 0.1mm) with 10, and input the products.
Be sure to input both of L1 and L2 as a set.
L1: Distance from the copy image lead edge to the scale of
10mm.
L2: Distance from the paper lead edge to the copy image lead
edge
6) Make a copy at the magnification ratio of 100%, and adjust the
rear edge void.
Item
Default
value
A Lead edge
adjustment
RRCA Document lead edge
reference position (OC)
50
B RRCB-CS12 Resist
motor ON
timing
adjustment
Standard
cassette
50
C RRCB-CS34 50
D RRCB-LCC LCC 50
E RRCB-MFT Manual feed 50
F RRCB-ADU ADU 50
G Image loss
amount set
value
LEAD Lead edge image loss
amount setting
30
H SIDE Side image loss amount
setting
20
I Void
amount
setting
DENA Print lead edge adjustment 30
J DENB Sub scanning direction print
range adjustment
20
K FRONT/
REAR
FRONT/ REAR void amount
adjustment
20
SIMULATION NO.49-03
TEST
E-MANUAL UPDATE/usbbd00
<DIR> FOLDER1 <DIR> FOLDER2
1/1
CLOSE
<DIR> FOLDER3 <DIR> MANUAL1
..
A : 50 ; RRCA
B : 50 ; RRCB-CS12
C : 50 ; RRCB-CS34
D : 50 ; RRCB-LCC
A:
SIMULATION NO.50-01
50
0 99
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 50 ; RRCB-MFT
F : 50 ; RRCB-ADU
G : 30 ; LEAD
H : 20 ; SIDE
I : 30 ; DENA
J : 20 ; DENB
K : 20 ; FRONT/REAR
Item
Default
value
A Actual
measurement
value
L1 Distance from the image
lead edge to 10mm (platen
400%, 0.1mm unit)
B L2 Distance from the paper

lead edge to the image
lead edge (0.1mm unit)
C Image loss
amount set value
LEAD Lead edge image loss 30
D SIDE Side image loss 20
E Void amount
setting
DENA Print lead edge adjustment 30
F DENB Sub scanning direction
print range adjustment
20
G FRONT/
REAR
FRONT/ REAR void
amount adjustment
20
L1
L2
Paper lead
edge
400% enlargement copy
A : 60 ; L1
B : 0 ; L2
C : 30 ; LEAD
D : 20 ; SIDE
A:
SIMULATION NO.50-02
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT VALUE(CALC)
60
0 999
TEST
E : 30 ; DENA
F : 20 ; DENB
G : 20 ; FRONT/REAR
CLOSE
EXECUTE

50-5
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Printer print lead edge adjustment
Section
Operation/Procedure
the touch panel.
4) Used to measure the void area size on the printed adjustment
pattern in the right and the left frame directions, and to check
to confirm that the sizes are as shown below.
If DEN-C=4.0 2.0mm or DEN-B=4.0 2.0mm, there is no
need to adjust. If not, go to the procedure 5.
5) Change the adjustment value of the adjustment item A (DEN-
C) and the adjustment item B (DEN-B).
When the adjustment value of the adjustment item A (DEN-C)
is decreased by 1, the print star position in the sub scanning
direction is shifted to the paper lead edge by 0.1mm.
When the adjustment value of the adjustment item B (DEN-B)
is decreased by 1, the print range in the paper transport direc-
tion is increased toward the rear edge side by 0.1mm.
6) Repeat procedures 1 - 5 until the condition of procedure 4 is
satisfied.

50-6
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the DSPF document lead
edge, and to adjust the copy image position
and the void area (image loss) on the print
paper in the copy mode. (The similar
adjustment can be performed with SIM 50-
7 (simple method).) (DSPF mode)
Section DSPF
Operation/Procedure
the touch panel.

50-7
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the DSPF document lead
edge, and to adjust the copy image position
and the void area (image loss) on the print
paper in the copy mode. (The similar
adjustment can be performed with SIM 50-
7 (simple method).) (DSPF mode)
Section DSPF
Operation/Procedure
Be sure to perform the sub scanning direction magnification ratio
(SIM 48-1) in advance.
the touch panel.
Item
Default
value
A DEN-C Printer print lead edge adjustment 30
B DEN-B Sub scanning direction print range
adjustment (paper rear edge void
amount)
20
C FRONT/REAR FRONT/ REAR void amount adjustment 20
D MULTI
COUNT
Print quantity 1
E PAPER MFT 1: Manual feed 2
CS1 2: Cassette 1
CS2 3: Cassette 2
CS3 4: Cassette 3
CS4 5: Cassette 4
LCC 6: LCC
F DUPLEX Duplex print
select
0: Select 1
1: Not selected
A : 30 ; DEN-C
B : 20 ; DEN-B
C : 20 ; FRONT/REAR
D : 1 ; MULTI COUNT
A:
SIMULATION NO.50-05
30
1 99
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 2 ; PAPER: CS1
F : 1 ; DUPLEX: NO
EXECUTE
Item
Default
value
A SIDE 1 Front surface document
scan start position
adjustment (CCD)
50
B SIDE 2 Back surface document
scan start position
adjustment (CCD)
50
C Image loss
amount
setting
SIDE 1
LEAD_EDGE
(SIDE1)
Front surface lead edge
20
D FRONT_REAR
(SIDE1)
Front surface side image
loss amount setting
20
E TRAIL_EDGE
(SIDE1)
Front surface rear edge
30
F Image loss
amount
setting
SIDE 2
LEAD_EDGE
(SIDE2)
Back surface lead edge
30
G FRONT_REAR
(SIDE2)
Back surface side image
loss amount setting
20
H TRAIL_EDGE
(SIDE2)
Back surface rear edge
20
A : 50 ; SIDE1
B : 50 ; SIDE2
A:
SIMULATION NO.50-06
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT VALUE(SPF)
50
1 99
OK
TEST
CLOSE
2) Set item A (L4) and item B (L5) to 0.
3) Set the magnification ratio to 200%, and press [COLOR] and
[BW] key to make a print.
4) Measure the printed image, and input the distance a (DSPF) to
L4 and L5 in the unit of 0.1mm.
L4: Distance a (DSPF surface: 200%) (Unit: 0.1mm)
L5: Distance a (DSPF back surface: 200%) (Unit: 0.1mm)

50-10
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the print image off-center
position. (Adjustment is made separately
for each paper feed section.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
the touch panel.

50-12
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the scan image off-center
position adjustment. (The adjustment is
made separately for each scan mode.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
the touch panel.
Item
Default
value
A L4 Distance of up to 10mm from
the front surface image lead
edge (200%, 0.1mm unit)
-
B L5 Distance of up to 10mm from
the back surface image lead
edge (200%, 0.1mm unit)
-
C LEAD_EDGE (SIDE1) Image loss amount setting
SIDE 1
20
D FRONT_REAR (SIDE1) 20
E TRAIL_EDGE (SIDE1) 30
F LEAD_EDGE (SIDE2) Image loss amount setting
SIDE 2
30
G FRONT_REAR (SIDE2) 20
H TRAIL_EDGE (SIDE2) 20
[DSPF front surface] [DSPF back surface]
Distance a
Distance a
A : 0 ; L4
B : 0 ; L5
A:
SIMULATION NO.50-07
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT (SPF CALC.).
0
0 999
TEST
EXECUTE
CLOSE
Item
Default
value
A BK-MAG Main scan print magnification ratio BK 100
B MFT Print off-center adjustment value
(manual feed)
50
C CS1 Print off-center adjustment value
(Cassette 1)
50
D CS2 Print off-center adjustment value
(Cassette 2)
50
E CS3 Print off-center adjustment value
(Cassette 3)
50
F CS4 Print off-center adjustment value
(Cassette 4)
50
G LCC Print off-center adjustment value (LCC) 50
H ADU Print off-center adjustment value
(ADU)
50
I MULTI COUNT Print quantity 1
J PAPER MFT Cassette
selection
1: Manual feed 2
CS1 2: Cassette 1
CS2 3: Cassette 2
CS3 4: Cassette 3
CS4 5: Cassette 4
LCC 6: LCC
K DUPLEX YES Duplex print
select
0: Select 1
NO 1: Not selected
Item
Default
value
A OC OC document off-center adjustment 50
B SPF (SIDE1) DSPF front surface document off-center
adjustment
50
C SPF (SIDE2) DSPF back surface document off-center
adjustment
50
A : 100 ; BK-MAG
B : 50 ; MFT
C : 50 ; CS1
D : 50 ; CS2
A:
SIMULATION NO.50-10
100
60 140
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 50 ; CS3
F : 50 ; CS4
G : 50 ; LCC
H : 50 ; ADU
I : 1 ; MULTICOUNT
J : 2 ; PAPER : CS1
K : 1 ; DUPLEX : NO
EXECUTE

50-20
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the main scanning direc-
tion manual registration adjustment.
Section
Operation/Procedure
the touch panel.

50-21
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the sub scanning direction
manual registration adjustment.
Section
Operation/Procedure
the touch panel.

50-22
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the main/sub scanning
auto registration adjustment.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item for the adjustment with [REGIST], [DRUM
POS], and [ALL] keys on the touch panel.
All the drum motors are operated to start the adjustment.
Item
Default
value
A CYAN (FRONT) Registration adjustment value main
scanning direction F side (Cyan)
100
B CYAN (REAR) Registration adjustment value main
scanning direction R side (Cyan)
100
C MAGENTA
(FRONT)
Registration adjustment value main
scanning direction F side (Magenta)
100
D MAGENTA (REAR) Registration adjustment value main
scanning direction R side Magenta)
100
E YELLOW (FRONT) Registration adjustment value main
scanning direction F side (Yellow)
100
F YELLOW (REAR) Registration adjustment value main
scanning direction R side (Yellow)
100
G MULTICOUNT Print quantity 1
H PAPER MFT Cassette
selection
1: Manual feed 4
CS1 2: Cassette 1
CS2 3: Cassette 2
CS3 4: Cassette 3
CS4 5: Cassette 4
LCC 6: LCC
I DUPLEX YES Duplex print
select
0: Select 1
NO 1: Not selected
A : 50 ; OC
B : 50 ; SPF(SIDE1)
C : 50 ; SPF(SIDE2)
A:
SIMULATION NO.50-12
50
1 99
OK
TEST
CLOSE
A:
SIMULATION NO.50-20
100
1 199
OK
TEST
CLOSE
G : 1 ; MULTICOUNT
H : 4 ; PAPER : CS3
I : 1 ; DUPLEX : NO
EXECUTE
Item
Default
value
A CYAN Registration adjustment value sub
scanning direction CYAN
100
B MAGENTA Registration adjustment value sub
scanning direction MAGENTA
100
C YELLOW Registration adjustment value sub
scanning direction YELLOW
100
D MULTICOUNT Print quantity 1
E PAPER MFT Cassette
selection
Manual feed 2
CS1 Cassette 1
CS2 Cassette 2
CS3 Cassette 3
CS4 Cassette 4
LCC LCC
F DUPLEX YES Duplex print
select
Select 1
NO Not select
A : 100 ; CYAN
B : 100 ; MAGENTA
C : 100 ; YELLOW
D : 1 ; MULTICOUNT
A:
SIMULATION NO.50-21
100
1 199
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 2 ; PAPER : CS1
F : 1 ; DUPLEX : NO
EXECUTE
<Error display for abnormal completion>
Item
Default
value
ALL (Auto
registration
adjustment,
auto phase
adjustment)
REGIST (Auto
registration
adjustment
execution)
MAIN F C Registration adjustment value main scanning direction (Cyan F side) 100
M Registration adjustment value main scanning direction (Magenta F side) 100
Y Registration adjustment value main scanning direction (Yellow F side) 100
MAIN R C Registration adjustment value main scanning direction (Cyan R side) 100
M Registration adjustment value main scanning direction (Magenta R side) 100
Y Registration adjustment value main scanning direction (Yellow R side) 100
SUB C Registration adjustment value sub scanning direction (Cyan drum Black drum) 100
M Registration adjustment value sub scanning direction (Magenta drum Cyan drum) 100
Y Registration adjustment value sub scanning direction (Yellow drum Magenta drum) 100
DRUM POS (Auto
phase adjustment
execution)
START
POINT
K Pulse modulation start timing
Changes up to 355 in the increment of 5.
0 - 71
0: 0 0
1: 5
:
:
70: 350
71: 355
CL Pulse modulation start timing
0 - 71
0: 0 0
1: 5
:
:
70: 350
71: 355
AMP K Pulse modulation deflection amount 0
CL Pulse modulation deflection amount (C/M/Y average value of linearity deflection
amount)
0
PHASE C Phase adjustment C Y
0 - 71
0: 0 0
1: 5
:
:
70: 350
71: 355
M Phase adjustment M Y
0 - 71
0: 0 0
1: 5
:
:
70: 350
71: 355
AMP C Linearity deflection amount 0
M Linearity deflection amount 0
Y Linearity deflection amount 0
Error
code
Error display Error content
Compulsory
end error
SUSPENDED Door open during operation
SUSPENDED CA button push during
operation
Unconfirmed operation during
operation (power OFF)
Basic error 1 TONNER
EMPTY 01
BK or all color toner EMPTY
detection
2 BEFORE
BEHAVIOR 02
Other conditions
4 SENSOR
CALIBRATION
04
After 3-time retries of F or R,
the target is not reached.
5 TIME OVER 05 Data is not acquired for 90sec
from the latest data
acquisition.
7 PROCESS
CONTROL 07
Process control error detection
Sub
scanning
adjustment
error
10 SUB BLACK
FRONT 10
The pitch data number is not
the specified number.
11 SUB BLACK
FRONT 11
The pitch data is not in the
specified allowable range.
15 SUB BLACK
REAR 15
The pitch data number is not in
the specified allowable range.
16 SUB BLACK
REAR 16
20 SUB CYAN
FRONT 20
21 SUB CYAN
FRONT 21
Sub
scanning
adjustment
error
22 SUB CYAN
FRONT 22
The calculation result value is
not in the specified allowable
range.
23 SUB CYAN
FRONT 23
The amount of change in the
calculation result value is not
in the specified allowable
range.
25 SUB CYAN
REAR 25
26 SUB CYAN
REAR 26
27 SUB CYAN
REAR 27
range.
28 SUB CYAN
REAR 28
range.
30 SUB MAGENTA
FRONT 30
31 SUB MAGENTA
FRONT 31
32 SUB MAGENTA
FRONT 32
range.
33 SUB MAGENTA
FRONT 33
range.
Error
code
Sub
scanning
adjustment
error
35 SUB MAGENTA
REAR 35
36 SUB MAGENTA
REAR 36
37 SUB MAGENTA
REAR 37
range.
38 SUB MAGENTA
REAR 38
range.
40 SUB YELLOW
FRONT 40
41 SUB YELLOW
FRONT 41
42 SUB YELLOW
FRONT 42
range.
43 SUB YELLOW
FRONT 43
range.
45 SUB YELLOW
REAR 45
46 SUB YELLOW
REAR 46
47 SUB YELLOW
REAR 47
range.
Main
scanning
adjustment
error
48 SUB YELLOW
REAR 48
range.
50 MAIN BLACK
FRONT 50
51 MAIN BLACK
FRONT 51
55 MAIN BLACK
REAR 55
The pitch data number is not in
the specified allowable range.
56 MAIN BLACK
REAR 56
60 MAIN CYAN
FRONT 60
61 MAIN CYAN
FRONT 61
62 MAIN CYAN
FRONT 62
range.
63 MAIN CYAN
FRONT 63
range.
65 MAIN CYAN
REAR 65
66 MAIN CYAN
REAR 66
67 MAIN CYAN
REAR 67
range.
68 MAIN CYAN
REAR 68
range.
70 MAIN MAGENTA
FRONT 70
71 MAIN MAGENTA
FRONT 71
72 MAIN MAGENTA
FRONT 72
range.
73 MAIN MAGENTA
FRONT 73
range.
Error
code
Main
scanning
adjustment
error
75 MAIN MAGENTA
REAR 75
76 MAIN MAGENTA
REAR 76
77 MAIN MAGENTA
REAR 77
range.
78 MAIN MAGENTA
REAR 78
range.
80 MAIN YELLOW
FRONT 80
81 MAIN YELLOW
FRONT 81
82 MAIN YELLOW
FRONT 82
range.
83 MAIN YELLOW
FRONT 83
range.
85 MAIN YELLOW
REAR 85
86 MAIN YELLOW
REAR 86
87 MAIN YELLOW
REAR 87
range.
88 MAIN YELLOW
REAR 88
range.
91 RIB BLACK 91 The rib cannot be detected
either in the phase pattern or
in the sub pattern.
92 RIB CYAN 92 The rib cannot be detected
in the sub pattern.
93 RIB MAGENTA
93
The rib cannot be detected
in the sub pattern.
94 RIB YELLOW 94 The rib cannot be detected
in the sub pattern.
Other errors 99 OTHER 99 Other errors
Phase
adjustment
error
110 PHASE BLACK
FRONT 110
Phase number error
111 PHASE BLACK
FRONT 111
Phase pitch error
115 PHASE BLACK
REAR 115
Phase number error
116 PHASE BLACK
REAR 116
Phase pitch error
120 PHASE CYAN
FRONT 120
Phase number error
121 PHASE CYAN
FRONT 121
Phase pitch error
125 PHASE CYAN
REAR 125
Phase number error
126 PHASE CYAN
REAR 126
Phase pitch error
130 PHASE
MAGENTA
FRONT 130
Phase number error
131 PHASE
MAGENTA
FRONT131
Phase pitch error
135 PHASE
MAGENTA
REAR 135
Phase number error
136 PHASE
MAGENTA
REAR 136
Phase pitch error
Error
code

50-24
Function (Purpose) Used to display the auto registration adjust-
ment result (SIM 50-22).
Section
Operation/Procedure

50-27
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the image loss adjustment
of the scanned image in the FAX or scan-
ner mode
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target mode for the adjustment with [FAX] and
[SCANNER] key on the touch panel.
the touch panel.
Phase
adjustment
error
140 PHASE YELLOW
FRONT 140
Phase number error
141 PHASE YELLOW
FRONT 141
Phase pitch error
145 PHASE YELLOW
REAR 145
Phase number error
146 PHASE YELLOW
REAR 146
Phase pitch error
Error
code
SIMULATION NO.50-22
TEST
EXECUTE
MAIN F MAIN R SUB
C 105.0(+0.2) 110.0(-0.1) 103.0(+0.4)
M 100.0(+0.0) 99.0(-0.2) 99.0(+0.2)
Y 98.0(+0.3) 98.0(+0.1) 105(+0.0)
1/1
CLOSE
REGIST DRUM POS ALL
START POINT AMP
CL 1(2) 0(1)
PHASE AMP
M 1(2) 0.0(0.1)
K 1(2) 0(1)
C 1(2) 0.0(0.1)
Y 0.0(0.1)
K C M Y NEXT
TEST
AUTO REGISTRATION DATA DISPLAY
MAIN F MAIN R SUB
C 000.0 ( ) 000.0 ( ) 000.0 ( )
Y 000.0 ( ) 000.0 ( ) 000.0 ( )
M 000.0 ( ) 000.0 ( ) 000.0 ( )
1/1
CLOSE
BACK
START POINT AMP
K 0 ( ) 00.0 ( )
CL 0 ( ) 00.0 ( )
PHASE AMP
C 00 ( ) 00.0 ( )
M 00 ( ) 00.0 ( )
Y 00.0 ( )
Item
Default
value
FAX
mode
A Image loss
amount
setting OC
LEAD_
EDGE (OC)
OC lead edge
image loss
amount
30
(3mm)
B FRONT_
REAR (OC)
OC side image
loss amount
20
(2mm)
C TRAIL_EDGE
(OC)
OC rear edge
image loss
amount
20
(2mm)
D Image loss
amount
setting
SPF
SIDE1
LEAD_EDGE
(SPF_SIDE1)
Front surface
lead edge image
loss amount
20
(2mm)
E FRONT_
REAR
(SPF_SIDE1)
Front surface
side image loss
amount
20
(2mm)
F TRAIL_EDGE
(SPF_SIDE1)
Front surface
rear edge image
loss amount
30
(3mm)
G Image loss
amount
setting
SPF
SIDE2
LEAD_EDGE
(SPF_SIDE2)
Back surface
lead edge image
loss amount
30
(3mm)
H FRONT_
REAR
(SPF_SIDE2)
Back surface
side image loss
amount
20
(2mm)
I TRAIL_EDGE
(SPF_SIDE2)
Back surface
rear edge image
loss amount
20
(2mm)
Scanner
mode
A Image loss
amount
setting OC
LEAD_EDGE
(OC)
OC lead edge
image loss
amount
0
B FRONT_
REAR (OC)
OC side image
loss amount
0
C TRAIL_EDGE
(OC)
OC rear edge
image loss
amount
0
D Image loss
amount
setting
SPF
SIDE1
LEAD_EDGE
(SPF_SIDE1)
Front surface
lead edge image
loss amount
0
E FRONT_
REAR
(SPF_SIDE1)
Front surface
side image loss
amount
0
F TRAIL_EDGE
(SPF_SIDE1)
Front surface
rear edge image
loss amount
0
G Image loss
amount
setting
SPF
SIDE2
LEAD_EDGE
(SPF_SIDE2)
Back surface
lead edge image
loss amount
0
H FRONT_
REAR
(SPF_SIDE2)
Back surface
side image loss
amount
0
I TRAIL_EDGE
(SPF_SIDE2)
Back surface
rear edge image
loss amount
0
A : 30 ; LEAD_EDGE(OC)
B : 20 ; FRONT_REAR(OC)
C : 20 ; TRAIL_EDGE(OC)
D : 20 ; LEAD_EDGE(SPF_SIDE1)
A:
SIMULATION NO.50-27
SCANNER/FAX-SENDALL EDGEADJUSTMENT VALUE
30
0 100
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 20 ; FRONT_REAR(SPF_SIDE1)
F : 30 ; TRAIL_EDGE(SPF_SIDE1)
G : 30 ; LEAD_EDGE(SPF_SIDE2)
H : 20 ; FRONT_REAR(SPF_SIDE2)
I : 20 ; TRAIL_EDGE(SPF_SIDE2)
FAX SCANNER

50-28
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the OC adjustment, the BK
main scanning direction magnification
ration correction, the DSPF adjustment,
and the print position adjustment.
Section
Operation/Procedure
<Adjustment item>
(1) OC document lead edge, off-center, sub scanning direc-
tion magnification ratio adjustment
1) Select [OC ADL] on the touch panel.
2) Select the tray for the OC adjustment pattern self print.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key to start self printing of the OC adjust-
ment pattern.
4) Set the OC adjustment pattern on the OC by the corner refer-
ence, and cover the OC adjustment pattern with the black
background chart.
* Set the adjustment pattern in landscape (A4). Check to con-
firm that there is no clearance between the adjustment pat-
tern and the document guide.
* Black chart kind and size
Prepare in 310 x 470, equivalent to cutting sheet No. 791
(black).
5) Press [EXECUTE] key to start scanning the OC adjustment
pattern.
6) When [OK] key is pressed, the adjustment value is saved.
(2) BK main scanning direction magnification ration adjust-
ment
1) Select [BK-MAG ADJ] on the touch panel.
2) Select the tray for printing the BK magnification ratio adjust-
ment pattern.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key to start self printing of the BK magnifi-
cation ratio adjustment pattern.
4) Set the BK magnification ratio adjustment pattern on the OC.
5) Press [EXECUTE] key to start scanning of the BK magnifica-
tion ratio adjustment pattern.
(3) DSPF (front/back) document lead edge, off-center, sub
scanning direction magnification ration adjustment
1) Select [SPF ADJ] on the touch panel.
2) Press the key of the adjustment target item and select the tray
for self printing of the DSPF adjustment pattern.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key to start self printing of the DSPF
adjustment pattern.
4) Set the DSPF adjustment pattern on the DSPF.
5) Press [EXECUTE] key to start scanning of the DSPF adjust-
ment pattern.
(4) Print lead edge adjustment, all trays print off-center (each
paper feed tray, duplex unit) adjustment
1) Select [SETUP/PRINT ADJ] on the touch panel.
2) Press the key of the adjustment target item and select the tray
for self printing of the print position adjustment pattern.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key to start scanning of the print position
adjustment pattern.
4) Set the print position adjustment pattern on the OC.
5) Press [EXECUTE] key to start scanning of the print position
adjustment pattern.
(5) Adjustment result content display
(6) Data used in execution of the adjustment are displayed.

51

51-1
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the transfer voltage and
the separation bias voltage ON/OF timing
adjustment.
Section
Operation/Procedure
the touch panel.
Adjustment item General
(1) OC ADJ OC document lead edge, off-center, sub
scanning direction magnification ratio
adjustment
(2) BK-MAG ADJ BK main scanning direction magnification
ration adjustment
(3) SPF ADJ DSPF (front/back) document lead edge, off-
center, sub scanning direction magnification
ration adjustment
(4) SETUP/PRINT ADJ Print lead edge adjustment, all trays print off-
center (each paper feed tray, duplex unit)
adjustment
(5) RESULT Adjustment result content display
(6) DATA Data used in execution of the adjustment are
displayed.
Item
Default
value
A TC2 ON TIMING Secondary transfer voltage ON timing
setting
40
B TC2 OFF TIMING Secondary transfer voltage OFF
timing setting
60
SIMULATION NO.50-28
TEST
OC ADJ BK-MAG ADJ
RESULT DATA
1/1
CLOSE
A : 40 ; TC2 ON TIMING
B : 50 ; TC2 OFF TIMING A:
SIMULATION NO.51-01
TRANSCRIPTION TIMING SETUP
40
1 99
OK
TEST
CLOSE

51-2
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the paper contact pressure
adjustment for each section resist roller
(main unit, each paper feed, duplex paper
fed, DSPF paper feed). (When there is a
considerable fluctuation in the print image
position on print paper or a paper jam
occurs, this adjustment is required.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target mode with [REGI1] and [REGI2]
keys on the touch panel.
Item
Item content (mode,
document, paper feed speed)
Default
value
REGI1 A NORMAL_
PLAIN_HIGH
DSPF warp adjustment value 1
(normal, plain paper, HIGH)
50
B NORMAL_
PLAIN_MID
(normal, plain paper, MID)
50
C NORMAL_
PLAIN_LOW
(normal, plain paper, LOW)
50
D NORMAL_
THIN_HIGH
(normal, thin paper, HIGH)
50
E NORMAL_
THIN_MID
(normal, thin paper, MID)
50
F NORMAL_
THIN_LOW
(normal, thin paper, LOW)
50
G RANDOM_
PLAIN_HIGH
(random, plain paper, HIGH)
50
H RANDOM_
PLAIN_MID
(random, plain paper, MID)
50
I RANDOM_
PLAIN_LOW
(random, plain paper, LOW)
50
J RANDOM_
THIN_HIGH
(random, thin paper, HIGH)
50
K RANDOM_
THIN_MID
(random, thin paper, MID)
50
L RANDOM_
THIN_LOW
(random, thin paper, LOW)
50
REGI2 A NORMAL_
PLAIN_HIGH
(normal, plain paper, HIGH)
50
B NORMAL_
PLAIN_MID
(normal, plain paper, MID)
50
C NORMAL_
PLAIN_LOW
(normal, plain paper, LOW)
50
D NORMAL_
THIN_HIGH
(normal, thin paper, HIGH)
50
E NORMAL_
THIN_MID
(normal, thin paper, MID)
50
F NORMAL_
THIN_LOW
(normal, thin paper, LOW)
50
G RANDOM_
PLAIN_HIGH
(random, plain paper, HIGH)
50
H RANDOM_
PLAIN_MID
(random, plain paper, MID)
50
I RANDOM_
PLAIN_LOW
(random, plain paper, LOW)
50
J RANDOM_
THIN_HIGH
50
K RANDOM_
THIN_MID
(random, thin paper, MID)
50
L RANDOM_
THIN_LOW
(random, thin paper, LOW)
50
ENGIN A TRAY1 (S) DSPF warp adjustment value 1
40
B TRAY2 (S) DSPF warp adjustment value 2
40
C TRAY3 PLAIN
PAPER (S)
Main unit tray 3, warp
adjustment value (plain paper,
small size)
40
D TRAY3 PLAIN
PAPER (L)
large size)
40
E TRAY3
HEAVY
PAPER (S)
adjustment value (heavy paper,
small size)
25
F TRAY3
HEAVY
PAPER (L)
large size)
25
G TRAY4 PLAIN
PAPER (S)
small size)
40
H TRAY4 PLAIN
PAPER (L)
large size)
40
I TRAY4
HEAVY
PAPER (S)
small size)
25
J TRAY4
HEAVY
PAPER (L)
large size)
25
K MANUAL
PLAIN PAPER
(S)
Manual feed tray, warp
small size)
40
L MANUAL
PLAIN PAPER
(L)
large size)
40
M MANUAL
HEAVY
PAPER (S)
small size)
25
N MANUAL
HEAVY
PAPER (L)
large size)
25
O MANUAL OHP Manual feed tray, warp
adjustment value (OHP)
25
P MANUAL ENV Manual feed tray, warp
adjustment value (envelope)
40
Q ADU PLAIN
PAPER (S)
ADU, warp adjustment value
(plain paper, small size)
40
R ADU PLAIN
PAPER (L)
(plain paper, large size)
40
S ADU HEAVY
PAPER (S)
(heavy paper, small size)
30
T ADU HEAVY
PAPER (L)
(heavy paper, large size)
30
U A4LCC A4LCC, warp adjustment value 40
V A3LCC (S) A3LCC warp adjustment value
(plain paper, small size)
40
W A3LCC (L) A3LCC warp adjustment value
(plain paper, large size)
40
X A3LCC
HEAVY
PAPER (S)
A3LCC warp adjustment value
(heavy paper, small size)
25
Y A3LCC
HEAVY
PAPER (L)
A3LCC warp adjustment value
(heavy paper, large size)
25
Item
Item content (mode,
document, paper feed speed)
Default
value

53

53-6
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the DSPF size width
detection level adjustment.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Set the DSPF paper feed guide to the maximum width.
The maximum width detection level is recognized.
3) Set the DSPF paper feed guide to A4R width.
5) Set the DSPF paper feed guide to A5R width.
7) Set the DSPF paper feed guide to the minimum width.
The minimum width detection level is recognized.
When the above operation is nor performed normally, "ERROR" is
displayed and. When the above operation is completed normally,
"COMPLETE" is displayed.

53-7
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the DSPF size width
adjustment value setting.
Section
Operation/Procedure
the touch panel.

53-8
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the DSPF document scan-
ning start position adjustment.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1 TRAYVOLMAX Tray size volume maximum value
2 TRAYVOLA4R Tray volume A4R size adjustment value
3 TRAYVOLA5R Tray volume A5R size adjustment value
4 TRAYVOLMIN Tray size volume A4R size adjustment value
A : 50 ; NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH
B : 50 ; NORMAL_PLAIN_MID
C : 50 ; NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW
D : 50 ; NORMAL_THIN_HIGH
A:
SIMULATION NO.51-02
REGIST ROLLER ADJUSTMENT
50
1 99
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 50 ; NORMAL_THIN_MID
F : 50 ; NORMAL_THIN_LOW
G : 50 ; RANDOM_PLAIN_HIGH
H : 50 ; RANDOM_PLAIN_MID
I : 50 ; RANDOM_PLAIN_LOW
J : 50 ; RANDOM_THIN_HIGH
K : 50 ; NORMAL_THIN_MID
L : 50 ; RANDOM_THIN_LOW
REGI1 REGI2 ENGIN
SIMULATION NO.53-06
TEST
SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT
CLOSE
EXECUTE
TRAYVOLMAX TRAY ADJUSTMENT.
Item Default value
A AD_MAX Max. width position 66
B AD_P1 A4R width position 438
C AD_P2 A5R width position 699
D AD_MIN Min. width position 893
Item
Default
value
A ADJUST VALUE DSPF scanning position adjustment 50
A : 66 ; AD_MAX
B : 438 ; AD_P1
C : 699 ; AD_P2
D : 893 ; AD_MIN
A:
SIMULATION NO.53-07
TRANSCRIPTION TIMING SETUP
66
0 1023
OK
TEST
CLOSE
A:
A : 50 ; ADJUST VALUE
SIMULATION NO.53-08
SPF SCANNING POSITION ADJUSTMENT
50
1 99
OK
TEST
CLOSE

55

55-1
required.)
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the engine control opera-
tion specification setting.
Section
Operation/Procedure

55-2
required.)
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the scanner control opera-
tion specification setting.
Section
Operation/Procedure

55-3
required.)
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the controller operation
specification setting.
Section
Operation/Procedure

56

56-1
Purpose Backup
Function (Purpose) Data transfer (Used in repairing the PWB.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target content of data transfer.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key and press [YES] key.
Data transfer of the item selected in procedure 1 is executed.

56-2
Purpose Backup
Function (Purpose) Used to backup the data (user authentica-
tion data, address book, etc.) in the
EEPROM, the SRAM, and the HDD of the
main unit into the USB memory and to
transfer the data.
Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Select a target item for transfer with the touch panel.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key and press [YES] key.
Data transfer of the item selected in procedure 2 is executed.
SIMULATION NO.55-01
TEST
ENGINE SOFT SW. SETTING.
CLOSE
EXECUTE
SW NO. (SW No.1-16)
DATA
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
:
:
SIMULATION NO.55-02
TEST
SCANNER SOFT SW. SETTING.
CLOSE
EXECUTE
SW NO. (SW No.1-16)
DATA
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
:
:
SIMULATION NO.55-03
TEST
MFP SOFT SW. SETTING.
CLOSE
EXECUTE
SW NO. (SW No.1-16)
DATA
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
:
:
ALL HDD All the memory contents are transferred to the HDD.
HDD ALL The HDD contents are transferred to all the
memories.
EEPROM HDD Transfer from EEPROM to HDD
HDD EEPROM Transfer from HDD to EEPROM
SRAM HDD Transfer from SRAM or HDD (including the FAX
memory)
HDD SRAM Transfer from HDD to SRAM (including the FAX
memory)
ARE YOU SURE?
YES NO
SIMULATION NO.56-01
TEST
COPY DATA
EXECUTE
ALL HDD ENABLE :
HDD ALL DISABLE :
EEPROM HDD DISABLE :
HDD EEPROM : DISABLE
1/1
CLOSE
SRAM HDD : DISABLE
HDD SRAM : DISABLE
SIMULATION NO.56-02
TEST
EXPORT/IMPORT FILING DATA
HDD EXPORT HDD IMPORT
EEPROM&SRAM EXPORT EEPROM&SRAM IMPORT
1/1
CLOSE

60

60-1
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations (read/write)
of the MFP control (SDRAM).
Section
Operation/Procedure
The test is started.

60-2
Function (Purpose) Used to set the onboard SDRAM.
Section
Operation/Procedure

61

61-1
Function (Purpose) Used to check the polygon motor rotation
and the BD signal detection.
Section LSU
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target mode for check with [COLOR] and [MONO] key
on the touch panel.
When the operation is completed normally, [OK] is displayed.
In case of an abnormal end, [NG] is displayed.

61-2
Function (Purpose) Used to set the laser power. (for printer
FIERY)
Section
Operation/Procedure
the touch panel.
Item Default value
A SETTING ENABLE 0
B NUMBER OF ROW 2
C NUMBER OF COLUMN 2
D TWR SETTING VALUE 1
E TRAS SETTING VALUE 2
F TRC SETTING VALUE 3
G TRCD SETTING VALUE 1
H TRP SETTING VALUE 1
I TFRC SETTING VALUE 3
J CAS LATENCY 1
K TOTAL NUMBER OF MBYTES ONBOARD DDR 1
L NUMBER OF ONBOARD-DDR CS-BANK 1
SIMULATION NO.60-01
TEST
SDRAM READ/WRITE TEST
CLOSE
EXECUTE
A : 0 ; SETTING ENABLE : DISABLE
B : 2 ; NUMBER OF ROW : 13BIT
C : 2 ; NUMBER OF COLUMN : 10BIT
D : 1 ; TWR SETTING VALUE : 3CLOCK
A:
SIMULATION NO.60-02
SDRAM SETTING
0
0 1
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 2 ; TRAS SETTING VALUE : 6CLOCK
F : 3 ; TRC SETTING VALUE : 9CLOCK
G : 1 ; TRCD SETTING VALUE : 3CLOCK
H : 1 ; TRP SETTING VALUE : 3CLOCK
I : 3 ; TFRP SETTING VALUE : 10CLOCK
J : 1 ; TRCD ABSOLUTE VALUE : CL=2.5
K : 1 ; TOTAL NUMBER OF MBYTES ONBOARD DDR : 128MBYTE
L : 1 ; NUMBER OF ONBOARD-DDR CS-BANK : 1CHIP SELECT
LSU TESTRESULT NG: PG CL LSU check polygon mirror abnormality
LSU TESTRESULT NG: PG
BW
LSU TESTRESULT NG: K CL LSU check K color LD light emitting
abnormality LSU TESTRESULT NG: K BW
LSU TESTRESULT NG: CL LSU check C color LD light emitting
abnormality
Item
Default value
55/62-
sheet
machine
70-sheet
machine
A LASER POWER
MIDDLE FIERY (K)
Laser power setting
middle speed, black
118 118
B LASER POWER
MIDDLE FIERY (C)
Laser power setting
middle speed, cyan
118 118
C LASER POWER
MIDDLE FIERY (M)
Laser power setting
middle speed, magenta
118 118
D LASER POWER
MIDDLE FIERY (Y)
Laser power setting
middle speed, yellow
118 118
E LASER POWER
LOW FIERY (K)
Laser power setting
low speed, black
77 77
F LASER POWER
LOW FIERY (C)
Laser power setting
low speed, cyan
77 77
G LASER POWER
LOW FIERY (M)
Laser power setting
low speed, magenta
77 77
H LASER POWER
LOW FIERY (Y)
Laser power setting
low speed, yellow
77 77
I LASER POWER
HIGH FIERY (B/W)
Laser power setting
high speed, B/W
96 107
J LASER POWER
MIDDLE FIERY (B/W)
Laser power setting
middle speed, B/W
118 118
K LASER POWER
LOW FIERY (B/W)
Laser power setting
low speed, B/W
77 77
L LASER LUT MIDDLE
FIERY (K)
Laser LUT select
middle speed, black
0 0
M LASER LUT MIDDLE
FIERY (C)
Laser LUT select
middle speed, cyan
0 0
EXECUTE
SIMULATION NO.61-01
TEST
LSU TEST
1/1
CLOSE
MONO COLOR

61-3
Function (Purpose) Used to set the laser power.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target mode for adjustment with [COPY] and [PRINT/
FAX] on the touch panel.
the touch panel.
N LASER LUT MIDDLE
FIERY (M)
Laser LUT select
middle speed, magenta
0 0
O LASER LUT MIDDLE
FIERY (Y)
Laser LUT select
middle speed, yellow
0 0
P LASER LUT LOW
FIERY (K)
Laser LUT select low
speed, black
0 0
Q LASER LUT LOW
FIERY (C)
speed, cyan
0 0
R LASER LUT LOW
FIERY (M)
speed, magenta
0 0
S LASER LUT LOW
FIERY (Y)
speed, yellow
0 0
T LASER LUT HIGH
FIERY (B/W)
Laser LUT select high
speed, B/W
0 0
U LASER LUT MIDDLE
FIERY (B/W)
Laser LUT select
middle speed, B/W
0 0
V LASER LUT LOW
FIERY (B/W)
speed, B/W
0 0
Item
Default value
55/62-
sheet
machine
70-sheet
machine
A LASER POWER
MIDDLE (K)
Laser power setting middle
speed, black
118 118
B LASER POWER
MIDDLE (C)
speed, cyan
118 118
C LASER POWER
MIDDLE (M)
speed, magenta
118 118
D LASER POWER
MIDDLE (Y)
speed, yellow
118 118
E LASER POWER
LOW (K)
Laser power setting low
speed, black
77 77
F LASER POWER
LOW (C)
speed, cyan
77 77
G LASER POWER
LOW (M)
speed, magenta
77 77
Item
Default value
55/62-
sheet
machine
70-sheet
machine
A : 118 ` LASER POWER MIDDLE FIERY (K)
B : 118 ` LASER POWER MIDDLE FIERY (C)
C : 118 ` LASER POWER MIDDLE FIERY (M)
D: 118 ` LASER POWER MIDDLE FIERY (Y)
A:
SIMULATION NO.61-02
LASER POWER AUTO SETUP[FIERY]
110
58 236
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 77 ` LASER POWER LOW FIERY (K)
F : 77 ` LASER POWER LOW FIERY (C)
G: 77 ` LASER POWER LOW FIERY (M)
H: 77 ` LASER POWER LOW FIERY (Y)
I : 96 ` LASER POWER HIGH FIERY (B/W)
J : 118 ` LASER POWER MIDDLE FIERY (B/W)
K: 77 ` LASER POWER LOW FIERY (B/W)
L : 0 ` LASER LUT MIDDLE FIERY (K)
H LASER POWER
LOW (Y)
speed, yellow
77 77
I LASER POWER
HIGH (B/W)
Laser power setting high
speed, B/W
96 107
J LASER POWER
MIDDLE (B/W)
speed, B/W
118 118
K LASER POWER
LOW (B/W)
speed, B/W
77 77
L LASER POWER
DIFF (K2)
K2 beam difference value
K (Difference for K1 beam)
50 50
M LASER LUT
MIDDLE (K)
Laser LUT select middle
speed, black
0 0
N LASER LUT
MIDDLE (C)
speed, cyan
0 0
O LASER LUT
MIDDLE (M)
speed, magenta
0 0
P LASER LUT
MIDDLE (Y)
speed, yellow
0 0
Q LASER LUT LOW
(K)
speed, black
0 0
R LASER LUT LOW
(C)
speed, cyan
0 0
S LASER LUT LOW
(M)
speed, magenta
0 0
T LASER LUT LOW
(Y)
speed, yellow
0 0
U LASER LUT HIGH
(BW)
Laser LUT select high
speed, B/W
0 0
V LASER LUT
MIDDLE (BW)
speed, B/W
0 0
W LASER LUT
LOW(BW)
speed, B/W
0 0
A LASER POWER
PRINTER
MIDDLE (K)
Laser power setting (for
printer) middle speed,
black
118 118
B LASER POWER
PRINTER
MIDDLE (C)
cyan
118 118
C LASER POWER
PRINTER
MIDDLE (M)
magenta
118 118
D LASER POWER
PRINTER
MIDDLE (Y)
yellow
118 118
E LASER POWER
PRINTER LOW
(K)
printer) low speed, black
77 77
F LASER POWER
PRINTER LOW
(C)
printer) low speed, cyan
77 77
G LASER POWER
PRINTER LOW
(M)
printer) low speed,
magenta
77 77
H LASER POWER
PRINTER LOW
(Y)
printer) low speed, yellow
77 77
I LASER POWER
PRINTER HIGH
(B/W)
printer) high speed, B/W
96 107
J LASER POWER
PRINTER
MIDDLE (B/W)
printer) middle speed, B/W
118 118
K LASER POWER
PRINTER LOW
(B/W)
printer) low speed, B/W
77 77
L LASER PRINTER
LUT MIDDLE (K)
Laser LUT select (for
black
0 0
M LASER PRINTER
LUT MIDDLE (C)
cyan
0 0
Item
Default value
55/62-
sheet
machine
70-sheet
machine

61-4
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform self printing of the LSU
position adjustment pattern.
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. Printing is started.

62

62-1
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk. (Excluding
the operation manual area.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key.
Formatting the hard disk is started.

62-2
Function (Purpose) Used to check read/write of the hard disk
(partial).
Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key.
Read/write is executed.

62-3
Function (Purpose) Used to check read/write of the hard disk
(all areas).
Section
N LASER PRINTER
LUT MIDDLE (M)
magenta
0 0
O LASER PRINTER
LUT MIDDLE (Y)
yellow
0 0
P LASER PRINTER
LUT LOW (K)
printer) low speed, black
0 0
Q LASER PRINTER
LUT LOW (C)
printer) low speed, cyan
0 0
R LASER PRINTER
LUT LOW (M)
printer) low speed,
magenta
0 0
S LASER PRINTER
LUT LOW (Y)
printer) low speed, yellow
0 0
T LASER PRINTER
LUT HIGH (BW)
printer) high speed, B/W
0 0
U LASER PRINTER
LUT MIDDLE
(BW)
printer) middle speed, B/W
0 0
V LASER PRINTER
LUT LOW (BW)
printer) low speed, B/W
0 0
Item Default value
A MULTICOUNT Print quantity 1
B PAPER MFT Cassette
selection
1: Manual feed 4
CS1 2: Cassette 1
CS2 3: Cassette 2
CS3 4: Cassette 3
CS4 5: Cassette 4
LCC 6: LCC
Item
Default value
55/62-
sheet
machine
70-sheet
machine
A : 118 ; LASER POWER MIDDLE (K)
B : 118 ; LASER POWER MIDDLE (C)
C : 118 ; LASER POWER MIDDLE (M)
D : 118 ; LASER POWER MIDDLE (Y)
A:
SIMULATION NO.61-03
LASER POWER AUTO SETUP
118
58 236
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 77 ; LASER POWER LOW (K)
F : 77 ; LASER POWER LOW (C)
G : 77 ; LASER POWER LOW (M)
H: 77 ; LASER POWER LOW (Y)
I : 96 ; LASER POWER HIGH (B/W)
J : 118 ; LASER POWER MIDDLE (B/W)
K : 77 ; LASER POWER LOW (B/W)
L : 50 ; LASER POWER DIFF (K2)
COPY PRINT/FAX
A : 1 ; MULTICOUNT
SIMULATION NO.61-04
1
1 999
OK
TEST
CLOSE
EXECUTE
SIMULATION NO.62-01
TEST
HDD FORMAT
CLOSE
EXECUTE
SIMULATION NO.62-02
TEST
HDD R/W TEST(PART)
CLOSE
EXECUTE
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key.
Read/write is executed.

62-6
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the self diagnostics of the
hard disk.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item of the self diagnostics.
The self diagnostics is started.

62-7
Function (Purpose) Used to print the hard disk self diagnostics
error log.
Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Printing the error log is started.

62-8
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk. (Excluding
the system area and the operation manual
area)
Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key.

62-10
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to delete the job log data.
Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key.
Delete of the job log data is started.

62-11
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to delete the document filing data.
Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key.
Delete of the document filing data is executed.

62-12
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set Enable/Disable of auto format
in a hard disk trouble.
Section
Operation/Procedure
SHORT S.T Partial check
EXTENDED S.T All areas check
SIMULATION NO.62-03
TEST
HDD R/W TEST(ALL)
CLOSE
EXECUTE
SIMULATION NO.62-06
TEST
SMART OFFLINE TEST
EXECUTE
SHORT S.T ENABLE :
1/1
CLOSE
EXTENDED S.T DISABLE :
SIMULATION NO.62-07
TEST
SMART ERROR LOG PRINT OUT
EXECUTE
CLOSE
PRESS [EXECUTE] TO PRINT THE SMART ERROR PRINT
A 0: Enable
1: Disable (Default)
SIMULATION NO.62-08
TEST
HDD FORMAT(EXCEPT SYSTEM AREA)
CLOSE
EXECUTE
SIMULATION NO.62-10
TEST
JOB COMPLETE DATA CLEAR(WITH JOB LOG DATA)
CLOSE
EXECUTE
SIMULATION NO.62-11
TEST
DOCUMENT FILING DATA CLEAR
CLOSE
EXECUTE

62-13
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk. (only the
operation manual area)
Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key.

63

63-1
Function (Purpose) Used to check the shading correction
result.
Section Scanner
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target color to display with [R] [G] [B] on the touch
panel.
2) Select the display target mode from [OC] and [DSPF].

63-2
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform shading.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target mode for execution with [OC SHADING] and
[DSPF SHADING] on the touch panel.
Shading is executed.

63-3
Function (Purpose) Used to perform scanner color balance and
color coefficient auto adjustment.
Section Scanner
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target with [R] [G] [B] on the touch panel.
2) Select a target mode with [OC] and [DSPF].
4) The color auto adjustment is executed.
OC GAIN ODD Gain adjustment value (odd number)
GAIN_EVEN Gain adjustment value (Even number)
OFFSET ODD Offset value (odd number)
OFFSET EVEN Offset value (even number)
SMP AVE ODD Reference plate sampling average
value (ODD)
SMP AVE EVEN Reference plate sampling average
value (EVEN)
TARGET VALUE Target value
BLACK LEVEL Black output level
ERROR CODE Error code
DSPF FACE WHITE
LEVEL 1ST
First scan DSPF front surface white
reference level
DSPF FACE WHITE
LEVEL 2ND
Second scan DSPF front surface
white reference level
A : 1 ; (0:YES 1:NO)
A:
SIMULATION NO.62-12
AUTO FORMAT SETTING (HDD TROUBLE)
1
0 1
OK
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.62-13
TEST
HDD FORMAT(MANUAL AREA ONLY)
CLOSE
EXECUTE
DSPF GAIN ODD Gain adjustment value (odd number)
GAIN_EVEN Gain adjustment value (Even number)
OFFSET ODD Offset value (odd number)
OFFSET EVEN Offset value (even number)
SMP AVE ODD Reference plate sampling average
value (ODD)
SMP AVE EVEN Reference plate sampling average
value (EVEN)
TARGET VALUE Target value
BLACK LEVEL Black output level
ERROR CODE Error code
DSPF BACK WHITE
LEVEL 1ST
First scan DSPF back surface white
reference level
DSPF BACK WHITE
LEVEL 2ND
Second scan DSPF back surface
white reference level
OC SHADING OC analog level correction and shading correction
data making (Document table mode)
DSPF SHADING DSPF analog level correction and shading correction
data making (DSPF mode)
OFFSET ODD 0 :
SIMULATION NO.63-01
TEST
SHADING DATA DISPLAY
CLOSE
GAIN ODD 147 :
GAIN EVEN 143 :
OFFSET EVEN 0 :
SMP AVE ODD 0 :
SMP AVE EVEN 0 :
TARGET VALUE 0 :
BLACK LEVEL 0 :
ERROR CODE 0 :
DSPF FACE WHITE LEVEL 1ST 0 :
1/1
DSPF
B G R
OC
DSPF FACE WHITE LEVEL 2ND 0 :
SIMULATION NO.63-02
TEST
SHADING EXECUTION
EXECUTE
CLOSE
SELECT OC SHADING/DSPF SHADING, AND PRESS EXECUTE
DSPF SHADING OC SHADING

63-5
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the scanner color balance
and the color coefficient auto adjustment.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target of the initial value reset with [SIDE A(OC)]
[SIDE B (DSPF)] on the touch panel.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [OK] key.
The initial value is saved.

63-6
auto adjustment pattern setting.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Place the chart self-printed with SIM 46-21 on the glass table.
3) The sampling value of each patch is displayed.

63-7
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the auto density setting of
the engine auto adjustment scanner target
value. (Servicing)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [SETUP] key on the touch panel.
Sampling is executed.
2) Place the chart self-printed with SIM 46-21 on the glass table.
Sampling of each patch is executed.
4) Press [OK] key.
The displayed sampling result is saved as the target value.

63-8
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the initial value reset of the
engine auto adjustment scanner target
value. (Servicing)
Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key.
The initial value reset of the engine auto adjustment scanner
target value is executed.
SIDE A
(OC)
Copy gamma correction 1 and color correction coefficient
TWAIN gamma correction 1 and color correction coefficient
Auto adjustment gamma correction 1 and color correction
coefficient
SIDE B
(DSPF)
Copy gamma correction 1 and color correction coefficient
TWAIN gamma correction 1 and color correction coefficient
CLOSE
OC
SIMULATION NO.63-03
TEST
OC #1:197, #2:185, #3:165, #4:148, #5:117, #6:110,
#7: 88, #8: 75, #9: 55, #10: 45, #11: 38, #12: 29,
#19: 5, #20: 4, #22: 2, #:24: 2
#13: 27, #14: 21, #15: 18, #:16: 15, #17: 10, #18: 8,
1/2 DSPF
B G R
C#2:180, C#6:141, C#12: 89 R#2:166, R#6: 43, R#12: 4
M#2:180, M#6:141, M#12: 89 G#2:166, G#6: 43, G#12: 4
Y#2:180, Y#6: 141, Y#12: 89 B#2:166, B#6: 43, B#12: 4
ARE YOU SURE?
YES NO
EXECUTE
SIMULATION NO.63-05
TEST
STANDARD SCANNER GAMMA SETUP
1/1
CLOSE
SIDE A(OC) SIDE B(DSPF)
B Point B target value
C Point C target value
D Point D target value
E Point E target value
F Point F target value
G Point G target value
H Point H target value
I Point I target value
J Point J target value
K Point K target value
L Point L target value
M Point M target value
N Point N target value
O Point O target value
BASE Background sampling value
SIMULATION NO.63-06
TEST
ENGINE COLOR BALANCE CHART READING
CLOSE
EXECUTE
SET THE CHART ON PLATEN AND TOUCH [EXECUTE]
K C M Y
SETUP
SIMULATION NO.63-07
TEST
SCANNER TARGET OF COLOR CALIB SETUP:SERVICE
#B: 91, #C 2944, #D: 3227, #E: 5822, #F: 8600
#G: 28935, #H: 54344, #I: 86968, #J: 122678, #K: 151198
#L: 169731, #M: 195950, #N: 201249, #:O: 207112
1/1
CLOSE

63-11
Function (Purpose) Used to set the reference scanner target
value for the engine auto density adjust-
ment.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Select a target item to be changed with the touch panel.

64

64-1
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the self print. (Color mode)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target color for self print with [K] [C] [M] [Y] on the
touch panel.
2) Select a target item to print with [|] and [+] keys.
Self printing is started.
*: HEAVY1 (Not Havy2)
Item Default value
Target value table
select
DEF1 DEF1 mode setting DEF 1
DEF2 DEF2 mode setting
SIMULATION NO.63-08
TEST
STANDARD SCANNER TARGET SETTING:SERVICE
CLOSE
EXECUTE
SIMULATION NO.63-11
TEST
STANDARD SCANNER TARGET SELECT OF ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT
TARGET TBL DEF1 DEF2
CLOSE
1/1
DEF3 :
Item Default value
A PRINT PATTERN (1, 2, 9 - 11, 14 - 19) Print pattern specification 1
B DOT1 (DOT1 >= 2 IF A: 2,11) Print dot number setting 1
C DOT2 (DOT2 >= 2 IF A: 2,11) Empty dot number setting 254
D DENSITY (FIXED "255" IF A: 9) Print gradation setting 255
E MULTI COUNT Print quantity 1
F EXPOSURE (2 - 8 IF A: 14 - 19) THROUGH Specification of the
exposure mode.
1: No process (through) 8
CHAR/PIC 2: Text/Printed Photo
CHAR/PRPIC 3: Text/Photograph
CHAR 4: Text
PRINT PIC 5: Printed photo
PRINT PAPER 6: Photograph
MAP 7: Map
STANDARD DITCH 8: Dither without correction
G PAPER MFT Tray selection 1: Manual feed 2
CS1 2: Tray 1
CS2 3: Tray 2
CS3 4: Tray 3
CS4 5: Tray 4
LCC 6: LCC
H DUPLEX YES Duplex print select 0: Select 1
NO 1: Not selected
I PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type 1: Normal paper 1
HEAVY * 2: Heavy paper
OHP 3: OHP
ENVELOPE 4: Envelope
<Item A print pattern>

64-2
Function (Purpose) Used to print the density adjustment pat-
tern.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Printing the pattern is started.

64-3
Function (Purpose) Used to perform self print (monochrome
mode).
Section
Operation/Procedure
4) Self printing is started.
Pattern
Pattern generating
section
Remark
1 Grid pattern LSU-ASIC For the print width of 100 or more, when all colors are selected, print is
made in three colors of CMY.
Print is started at 4mm from the paper lead edge.
2 Dot print
9 Each color 10% area (A4/A4R) density print Each interval is 41.86mm (989dot).
Print is black is started at 17mm from the paper lead edge.
10 8-color belt print
11 4-point dot print Each print is printed for /4 of the sub scan paper size.
14 256 gradations: Sub scan Input process
(IMG-ASIC
previous process)
When all colors are selected, print is made in CMY.
Printing is made in 255 gradations, then printing is made in 0 - 254
gradations.
15 16 gradations (center gradations only): Sub scan IMG-ASIC When all colors are selected, print is made in CMY.
16 16 gradations (center gradations only): Main scan In 16-gradation printing, the gradation is changed for every 256dot.
17 All background (half tone) Half tone
(IMG-ASIC after-
process)
When all colors are selected, print is made in CMY.
18 256 gradation pattern (Other dither) When all colors are selected, print is made in CMY.
19 256 gradation pattern (Text dither) Printing is made for 16 gradations in the main scanning direction. (16 x 16
patch print)
Printing is made in 255 gradations, then printing is made in 0 - 254
gradations.
Item
Default
value
A COPIES Print quantity 1
B PROC ADJ 0: Adding of the half tone process control
correction amount is made.
1
1: Adding of the half tone process control
correction amount is not made.
A : 1 ; PRINT PATTERN (1,2,9 11, 14 19)
B : 1 ; DOT1 (DOT1>= 2 IF A : 2,11)
C : 254 ; DOT2 (DOT2>= 2 IF A : 2,11)
D : 255 ; DENSITY (FIXED"255" IF A : 9)
A:
SIMULATION NO.64-01
SELF PRINT(COLOR) : SERVICE
1
1 20
OK
TEST
EXECUTE
CLOSE
E : 1 ; MULTI COUNT
F : 8 ; EXPOSURE:STANDARD DITCH (2 8 IF A : 14 19)
G : 2 ; PAPER : CS1
H : 1 ; DUPLEX : NO
I : 1 ; PAPER TYPE : PLAIN
K C M Y
A : 1 ; COPIES
B : 1 ; PROC ADJ:NO A:
SIMULATION NO.64-02
ENGINE COLOR BALANCE PATCH PRINT MODE
1
1 999
OK
TEST
CLOSE
EXECUTE
*: HEAVY1 (Not Havy2)

64-4
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the printer self print.
* When FIERY is supported, SIM is not dis-
played.
Section
Operation/Procedure
touch panel.
Item Default value
A PRINT PATTERN (1, 2, 9 - 11, 14 - 19) Print pattern specification 1
B DOT1 (DOT1 >= 2 IF A: 2,11) Print dot number setting 1
C DOT2 (DOT2 >= 2 IF A: 2,11) Empty dot number setting 254
D DENSITY (FIXED "255" IF A: 9) Print gradation setting 255
E MULTI COUNT Print quantity 1
F EXPOSURE (2 - 8 IF A: 14 - 19) THROUGH Specification of the
exposure mode.
1: No process (through) 8
CHAR/PIC 2: Text/Printed Photo
CHAR/PRPIC 3: Text/Photograph
CHAR 4: Text
PRINT PIC 5: Printed photo
PRINT PAPER 6: Photograph
MAP 7: Map
STANDARD DITCH 8: Dither without correction
G PAPER MFT Paper feed tray select 1: Manual feed 2
CS1 2: Tray 1
CS2 3: Tray 2
CS3 4: Tray 3
CS4 5: Tray 4
LCC 6: LCC
H DUPLEX YES Duplex print select 0: Select 1
NO 1: Not selected
I PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type select Normal paper 1
HEAVY * Heavy paper
OHP OHP
ENVELOPE Envelope
Pattern generating section
1 Grid pattern LSU-ASIC Print is started at 4mm from the paper lead edge.
2 Dot print
9 10% area (A4/A4R) density print Each interval is 41.86mm (989dot).
Print is black is started at 17mm from the paper lead edge.
10 8-color belt print
11 4-point dot print Printing is made for every 1/4 of the sub scan paper size.
14 256 gradations: Sub scan Input process
(IMG-ASIC
previous process)
Printing is made in 255 gradations, then printing is made in 0 - 254 gradations.
15 16 gradations (center gradations only): Sub scan IMG-ASIC In 16-gradation printing, the gradation is changed for every 256dot.
16 16 gradations (center gradations only): Main scan
17 All background (half tone) Half tone
(IMG-ASIC after-
process)
Printing is made for 16 gradations in the main scanning direction.
18 256 gradation pattern (Other dither) Print is started at 5mm from the paper lead edge.
19 256 gradation pattern (Text dither) Printing is made in 255 gradations, then printing is made in 0 - 254 gradations.
A : 1 ; PRINT PATTERN (1,2,9 11, 14 19)
B : 1 ; DOT1 (DOT1>= 2 IF A : 2,11)
C : 254 ; DOT2 (DOT2>= 2 IF A : 2,11)
D : 255 ; DENSITY (FIXED"255" IF A : 9)
A:
SIMULATION NO.64-03
SELF PRINT(BW) : SERVICE
1
1 20
OK
TEST
EXECUTE
CLOSE
E : 1 ; MULTI COUNT
F : 8 ; EXPOSURE:STANDARD DITCH (2 8 IF A : 14 19)
G : 2 ; PAPER : CS1
H : 1 ; DUPLEX : NO
I : 1 ; PAPER TYPE : PLAIN
Item
Default
value
A PRINT PATTERN Print pattern specification 3
B DENSITY Print gradation specification 128
C MULTI CONUT Print quantity 1
D PAPER MFT Paper feed
tray select
1: Manual
feed
2
CS1 2: Tray 1
CS2 3: Tray 2
CS3 4: Tray 3
CS4 5: Tray 4
LCC 6: LCC
E HALFTONE PHOTO Half tone 0: Photo 0
TEXT/
GRAPHICS
1: Text/
Image
CAD 2: Design
F BIT DEPTH 1BIT Number of
bits
0: 1bit 1
4BIT 1: 4bit
G DITHER STRAIGHT Dither
correction
specification
1: Straight 2
CALIB 2: Calibration

64-5
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the printer self print (PCL).
played.
Section
Operation/Procedure
touch panel.

64-6
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the printer self print (PS).
played.
Section
Operation/Procedure
touch panel.
1 256 gradation pattern
(COLOR)
Each monochrome/C&M/C&Y/ M&Y
2 256 gradation pattern (B/W) Black only
3 256 gradation pattern
(COLOR) (Y-M-C-K
continuous)
Four sheets of continuous print in
monochrome of Y, M, C, K.
4 Half tone pattern (Color) Each monochrome/C&M/C&Y/M&Y/
C&M&Y
5 Half tone pattern (B/W) Black only
Item
Default
value
A PRINT PATTERN Print pattern
specification
1: Used to
perform the PCL
inspection pattern
(COLOR).
3
2: PCL inspection
pattern (B/W)
3: PCL inspection
pattern (COLOR/
B/W continuous)
B DITHER
STRAIGHT Dither
correction
specification
1: Straight 2
D PAPER
MFT Paper feed
tray select
1: Manual feed 2
CS1 2: Tray 1
CS2 3: Tray 2
CS3 4: Tray 3
CS4 5: Tray 4
LCC 6: LCC
E HALFTONE
PHOTO Half tone 0: Photo 0
TEXT/
GRAPHICS
1: Text/Image
CAD 2: Design
F BIT DEPTH
1BIT Number of
bits
0: 1bit 1
4BIT 1: 4bit
A : 3 ; PRINT PATTERN
B : 128 ; DENSITY
C : 1 ; MULTI COUNT
D : 2 ; PAPER : CS2
A:
SIMULATION NO.64-04
PRINTER SELF PRINT
3
1 5
OK
TEST
EXECUTE
CLOSE
E : 0 ; HALFTONE
F : 1 ; BIT DEPTH
G : 2 ; DITHER
M Y C K
G INTENT
SHARP COLOR Rendering
intent
0: Sharp color 0
PERCEPTUAL 1: Perceptual
COLORIMETRIC 2: Color metric
SATURATION 3: Saturation
CAD 4: CAD
H GRAY COMPENSATION
K Gray
compensation
0: K only 0
KCMY 1: KCMY
I TONER SAVE MODE
ON Toner save
mode
0: ON 1
OFF 1: OFF
Item
Default
value
A PRINT PATTERN Print pattern
specification
1: PC inspection
pattern (COLOR)
1
2: PS inspection
pattern (B/W)
B DITHER
STRAIGHT Dither
correction
specification
1: Straight 2
D PAPER
MFT Paper feed
tray select
1: Manual feed 2
CS1 2: Tray 1
CS2 3: Tray 2
CS3 4: Tray 3
CS4 5: Tray 4
LCC 6: LCC
E HALFTONE
PHOTO Half tone Photo 0
TEXT/
GRAPHICS
Text/Image
CAD Design
Item
Default
value
CLOSE
B : 2 ; DITHER : CALIB
C : 1 ; MULTI COUNT
D : 2 ; PAPER : CS1
A:
SIMULATION NO.64-05
PRINTER SELF PRINT (PCL)
3
1 3
OK
TEST
EXECUTE
E : 0 ; HALFTONE : PHOTO
F : 1 ; BIT DEPTH : 4BIT
G : 0 ; INTENT : PERCEPTUAL
H : 0 ; GRAY COMPENSATION : K
I : 1 ; TONER SAVE MODE : OFF
M Y C K

65

65-1
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the touch panel (LCD dis-
play) detection position adjustment.
Section Operation panel section
Operation/Procedure
Touch the center of the cross mark at the four corners of the
screen.
When all the four points are touched and OK, the sampled correc-
tion value is saved.

65-2
Purpose Operation check/test
Function (Purpose) Used to check the touch panel (LCD dis-
play) detection position adjustment result.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Touch the touch panel.
The coordinates (X= horizontal, Y=Vertical) of the point being
touched are displayed in real time.

65-5
Purpose Operation check/test
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation panel key
input.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Press the keys displayed on the screen sequentially.

66

66-1
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to change and check the soft switch
setting.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [SW No.] key.
2) Enter the soft switch number to be checked or changed with
10-key.
3) Press [DATA] key.
The current setting status is displayed.
4) Enter the number corresponding to the bit to be changed with
10-key.
For details, refer to "4-A. Soft switches."
The setting content is saved.
F BIT DEPTH
1BIT Number of
bits
1bit 1
4BIT 4bit
G INTENT
SHARP COLOR Rendering
intent
Sharp color 0
PERCEPTUAL Perceptual
COLORIMETRIC Color metric
SATURATION Saturation
CAD CAD
H GRAY COMPENSATION
K Gray
compensation
K only 0
KCMY KCMY
I INK SIMULATION
OFF Ink simulation OFF 0
SWOP SWOP
EURO EURO
JAPAN COLOR JAPAN COLOR
Item
Default
value
CLOSE
B : 2 ; DITHER : CALIB
C : 1 ; MULTI COUNT
D : 2 ; PAPER : CS1
A:
SIMULATION NO.64-06
PRINTER SELF PRINT (PS)
1
1 2
OK
TEST
EXECUTE
E : 0 ; HALFTONE : PHOTO
F : 1 ; BIT DEPTH : 4BIT
G : 0 ; INTENT : PERCEPTUAL
H : 0 ; GRAY COMPENSATION : K
I : 0 ; INK SIMULATION : OFF
M Y C K
X : 0 Y : 0
20
40
40
40
440
120 220 320 420 520 620
600
40
600
440
130
240
350
460
20
PLEASE PUSH HOME KEY
SIMULATION NO.65-05
TEST
OPERATION PANEL KEY CHECK
CLOSE

66-2
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the FAX soft switch and set
the default value.
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the country code with 10-key.
* When [DEST CODE] key is pressed, the country code list is
displayed.
When [BACK] key is pressed on the destination code list
screen, the display returns to the destination code entry
screen.
2) Press [SET] key.
4) Press [YES] key.
Clearing the soft switch is executed.

66-3
Purpose Operation test, check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation (read/write) of
the FAX PWB memory.
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item of the memory operation check with the
touch panel.
The operation check of the selected memory is executed.
If "(once)" is selected, when check is completed normally,
"OK" is displayed. When there occurs an error, "NG" is dis-
played.
If "(repeat)" is selected, check is repeated until the result is
found "NG" or until [EXECUTE] key is pressed.

66-4
Purpose Operation check, test
Function (Purpose) Used to check the output operation
(MODEM operation) of data signal in each
data output mode of FAX. Send level: MAX
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the display screen with [|] and [+] keys.
2) Select an output target mode with the touch panel key.
A signal is outputted at the maximum send level.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the signal output can be
stopped.
JAPAN 00000000 NORWAY 10000010
U.S.A. 10110101 DENMARK 00110001
AUSTRALIA 00001001 NETHERLANDS 01111011
U.K. 10110100 ITALY 01011001
FRANCE 00111101 SWITZERLAND 10100110
GERMANY 00000100 AUSTRIA 00001010
SWEDEN 10100101 INDONESIA 01010100
NEWZEALAND 01111110 THAILAND 10101001
CHINA 00100110 MALAYSIA 01101100
SINGAPORE 10011100 INDIA 01010011
TW 11111110 PHILIPPINES 10001001
OTHER1 11111101 HONGKONG 01010000
OTHER2 11111100 RUSSIA 10111000
OTHER3 11111011 SOUTHAFRICA 10011111
FINLAND 00111100
SW No.
DATA
:
:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SIMLATION NO.66-01
TEST
FAX SOFT SW. SETTING.
CLOSE
EXECUTE
SIMULATION NO.66-02
TEST
FAX SOFT SW.CLEAR - JAPAN
CLOSE
PRESENT : 00000000
NEW : SET
DEST CODE ARE YOU SURE? YES NO
EXECUTE
1 All Memory Device Check (once) Check all the items once.
2 MFP SRAM (once) Check only once.
3 MFP SRAM (repeat) Repeat checking.
4 MFP FLASH + OP.FLASH (once) Check only once.
5 MFP FLASH + OP.FLASH(repeat) Repeat checking.
6 MODEM EEPROM<1>(once) Check only once.
7 MODEM EEPROM<1>(repeat) Repeat checking.
8 MODEM SDRAM<1>(once) Check only once.
9 MODEM SDRAM<1>(repeat) Repeat checking.
NOSIGNAL 33.6 V34 31.2 V34 28.8 V34
26.4 V34 24.0 V34 21.6 V34 19.2 V34
16.8 V34 14.4 V34 12.0 V34 9.6 V34
7.2 V34 4.8 V34 2.4 V34 14.4 V33
12.0 V33 14.4 V17 12.0 V17 9.6 V17
7.2 V17 9.6 V29 7.2 V29 4.8 V27t
2.4 V27t 0.3 FLG CED 2100 CNG 1100
0.3 V21 ANSam RINGER No RBT
DP MAKE DP BRK No MSG
SIMULATION NO.66-03
TEST
FAX PWB MEMORY CHECK
CLOSE
All Memory Device Check (once) MFP SRAM(once)
MFP SRAM (repeat) MFP FLASH + OP.FLASH(once)
MFP FLASH + OP.FLASH(repeat) MODEM EEPROM<1>(once)
MODEM EEPROM<1>(repeat) MODEM SDRAM<1>(once)
MODEM SDRAM<1>(repeat)

66-5
(MODEM operation) of data signal in each
data output mode of FAX. Send level: Soft
switch setting
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the display screen with [|] and [+] keys.
A signal is outputted at the send level set with the soft switch.
stopped.

66-6
Purpose User data output, check
Function (Purpose) Used to print the confidential pass code.
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
Press [EXECUTE] key to execute printing.
* If there is no confidential registration, no print is made.

66-7
Purpose User data output, check
Function (Purpose) Used to output the image memory data
(memory send and receive).
* The confidential receive contents are also
outputted.
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
Press [EXECUTE] key to execute printing.
* If there is no image memory, no output is made.

66-8
Function (Purpose) Used to check the output operation (audio
output IC operation check) of the various
audio signals of FAX. Send level: MAX
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an output target model with the touch panel key.
stopped.
NOSIGNAL 33.6 V34 31.2 V34 28.8 V34
26.4 V34 24.0 V34 21.6 V34 19.2 V34
16.8 V34 14.4 V34 12.0 V34 9.6 V34
7.2 V34 4.8 V34 2.4 V34 14.4 V33
12.0 V33 14.4 V17 12.0 V17 9.6 V17
7.2 V17 9.6 V29 7.2 V29 4.8 V27t
2.4 V27t 0.3 FLG CED 2100 CNG 1100
DP MAKE DP BRK No MSG
SIMULATION NO.66-04
TEST
SIGNAL OUTPUT CHECK. (LEVEL MAX)
EXECUTE
1/2
CLOSE
NOSIGNAL 33.6 V34 31.2 V34 28.8 V34
26.4 V34 24.0 V34 21.6 V34 19.2 V34
16.8 V34 14.4 V34 12.0 V34 9.6 V34
7.2 V34 4.8 V34 2.4 V34 14.4 V33
12.0 V33 14.4 V17 12.0 V17 9.6 V17
7.2 V17 9.6 V29 7.2 V29 4.8 V27t
2.4 V27t 0.3 FLG CED 2100 CNG 1100
SIMULATION NO.66-05
TEST
SIGNAL OUTPUT CHECK. (SOFT SW.)
EXECUTE
1/2
CLOSE
NOSIGNAL 33.6 V34 31.2 V34 28.8 V34
26.4 V34 24.0 V34 21.6 V34 19.2 V34
16.8 V34 14.4 V34 12.0 V34 9.6 V34
7.2 V34 4.8 V34 2.4 V34 14.4 V33
12.0 V33 14.4 V17 12.0 V17 9.6 V17
7.2 V17 9.6 V29 7.2 V29 4.8 V27t
2.4 V27t 0.3 FLG CED 2100 CNG 1100
NONE Mute
PAUSE Pause melody
MESSAGE1 Message 1
MESSAGE2 Message 2
MESSAGE3 Message 3
MESSAGE4 Message 4
MESSAGE5 Message 5
MESSAGE6 Message 6
ALARM Alarm
RINGER Ringer (Speaker)
EXT.TEL.RINGER External telephone ringer
SIMULATION NO.66-06
PASS CODE PRINT OUT.
TEST
EXECUTE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.66-07
IMAGE MEMORY PRINT OUT.
TEST
EXECUTE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.66-08
TEST
MESSAGE OUTPUT CHECK.(LEVEL MAX)
EXECUTE
CLOSE
NONE PAUSE MESSAGE1 MESSAGE2
MESSAGE3 MESSAGE4 MESSAGE5 MESSAGE6
ALARM RINGER EXT.TEL.RINGER

66-9
Function (Purpose) Used to check the output operation (audio
output IC operation) of various audio sig-
nals of FAX. Send level: Soft switch setting
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
stopped.

66-10
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear all the data (memory receive
and send) of the image memory.
* The confidential receive data are cleared
simultaneously.
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key.
The image memory is cleared.

66-11
(MODEM operation) in the FAX G3 mode
300bps. Send level: MAX
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
stopped.

66-12
(MODEM operation) in the FAX G3 mode
300bps. Send level: Set with the soft
switch.
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an output target mode with the touch panel.
stopped.

66-13
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the number for the FAX dial sig-
nal output test. (In the dial signal output test
with SIM66-14 - 16, the dial number set
with this simulation is outputted.)
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Enter with 10-key (0 - 9), [*] key, and [#] key. The upper limit is
20 digits.
2) Press [SET] key.
Setting is saved.
NONE Mute
PAUSE Pause melody
MESSAGE1 Message 1
MESSAGE2 Message 2
MESSAGE3 Message 3
MESSAGE4 Message 4
MESSAGE5 Message 5
MESSAGE6 Message 6
ALARM Alarm
RINGER Ringer (Speaker)
EXT.TEL.RINGER External telephone ringer
SIMULATION NO.66-09
TEST
MESSAGE OUTPUT CHECK.(SOFT SW.)
EXECUTE
CLOSE
NONE PAUSE MESSAGE1 MESSAGE2
MESSAGE3 MESSAGE4 MESSAGE5 MESSAGE6
ALARM RINGER EXT.TEL.RINGER
EXECUTE
SIMULATION NO.66-10
TEST
IMAGE MEMORY CLEAR.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.66-11
TEST
300bps SIGNAL OOUTPUT. (LEVEL MAX.)
EXECUTE
CLOSE
NO SIGNAL 11111 11110 00000
010101 00001
SIMULATION NO.66-12
TEST
300bps SIGNAL OOUTPUT. (SOFT SW.)
EXECUTE
CLOSE
NO SIGNAL 11111 11110 00000
010101 00001
SIMULATION NO.66-13
TEST
DIAL TEST NUMBER SETTING.
CLOSE
PRESENT : 0123456789#
NEW : SET

66-14
Purpose Setting/Operation test, check
Function (Purpose) Used to set the make time in the FAX pulse
dial mode (10PPS) and to execute the dial
signal output test. (The signal of the dial
number set with SIM66-13 is outputted.)
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the set value of make time with 10-key. (0 - 15)
The dial signal is outputted at the make time set with the above
procedure.
stopped.

66-15
Function (Purpose) Used to set the make time in the FAX pulse
dial mode (20PPS) and to execute the dial
signal output test. (The signal of the dial
number set with SIM 66-13 is outputted.)
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the set value of the make time with 10-key. (0 - 15)
The dial signal is outputted at the make time set in the above
procedure.
stopped.

66-16
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the dial signal (DTMF) out-
put test in the FAX tone dial mode. (The
signal of the dial number set with SIM 66-
13 is outputted.) The send level can be set
to an optional level.
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item to be set with [|] [+] keys.
2) Enter the set value of the send level with 10-key. (0 - 15)
The dial signal is outputted at the send level set in the above
procedure.
stopped.

66-17
put test in the FAX tone dial mode. Send
level: MAX
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
stopped.

66-18
put test in the FAX tone dial mode. Send
level: Set with the soft switch.
Section FAX
A : 4 ; MAKE TIME [+29ms]
A:
SIMULATION NO.66-14
DIAL TEST(10PPS)
4
0 15
OK
TEST
EXECUTE
CLOSE
A : 4 ; MAKE TIME [+9ms]
A:
SIMULATION NO.66-15
DIAL TEST(20PPS)
4
0 15
OK
TEST
EXECUTE
CLOSE
A: 4 ` HIGH(dB)
A:
SIMULATION NO.66-16
DIAL TEST(DTMF)
4
0 15 ]
OK
TEST
EXECUTE
CLOSE
B : 4 ` HIGH-LOW
SIMULATION NO.66-17
TEST
DTMF SIGNAL OUTPUT.(LEVEL MAX)
EXECUTE
CLOSE
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0 #
Operation/Procedure
stopped.

66-19
Purpose Backup
Function (Purpose) Used to backup the address book data
stored in the HDD. (Backup to the Flash
ROM)
Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key.
The address book data in the HDD are saved to the Flash
ROM.

66-20
Purpose Data transfer
Function (Purpose) Used to transfer the address book data
stored in the Flash ROM. (Transfer to HDD)
Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key.
The address book data are transferred from the Flash ROM to
the HDD.

66-21
Purpose Adjustment, setting, operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to print information abut FAX (various
registrations, communication manage-
ment, file management, system errors, pro-
tocols).
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a print target item with the touch panel key.
Printing is started.

66-24
Purpose Clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the FAST memory data.
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key.
The FAST memory data are cleared.

66-25
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to register a FAX number for MODEM
dial-in.
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter a MODEM dial-in FAX number (0 - 9, *, #) with 10-key.
The upper limit is 20 digits.
2) Press [SET] key.
The MODEM dial-in FAX number is registered.
SIMULATION NO.66-18
TEST
DTMF SIGNAL OUTPUT.(SOFT SW.)
EXECUTE
CLOSE
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0 #
ARE YOU SURE?
YES NO
EXECUTE
SIMULATION NO.66-19
TEST
ADDRESS DATA BACK UP. (WRITE TO FLASH ROM)
CLOSE
ARE YOU SURE?
YES NO
EXECUTE
SIMULATION NO.66-20
TEST
ADDRESS DATA BACK UP. (READ FROM FLASH ROM)
CLOSE
EXECUTE
SIMULATION NO.66-21
TEST
FAX INFORMATION PRINT OUT.
CLOSE
REGISTERED MANAGEMENT
FILE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM ERROR LINE
PROTOCOL LINE
ARE YOU SURE?
YES NO
EXECUTE
SIMULATION NO.66-24
TEST
FAST MEMORY CLEAR.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.66-25
TEST
CLOSE
PRESENT : --------------------
NEW : SET
M-D-IN FAX NUMBER SETTING. 0-9[0-9]. :[ ]:#:[#]

66-26
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to register an external telephone
number for MODEM dial-in.
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter a MODEM dial-in external telephone number (0 - 9, *, #)
with 10-key. The upper limit is 20 digits.
2) Press [SET] key.
The MODEM dial-in external telephone number is registered.

66-29
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the data related to the
address book (one-touch registration, FTP/
Desktop extension, group extension, pro-
gram registration, interface memory box,
meta data, Inbound Routing, Document
Admin table).
Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key.
The data related to the address book are cleared.

66-30
Function (Purpose) Used to check a change in the TEL/LIU sta-
tus.
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
The TEL/LIU status is displayed.
(Signal detected: Highlighted display, Signal not-detected: Normal
display)

66-31
Purpose Operation check
Function (Purpose) Used to set the TEL/LIU output port.
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the port to be turned ON with the touch panel key.
(ON: Highlighted display)
The setting is reflected.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation can be
stopped.

66-32
Function (Purpose) Used to check the received data (fixed
data) from the line.
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
The fixed data received from the line are checked.
2) When the check is completed normally, "OK" is displayed.
When an error occurs, "NG" is displayed.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation can be
stopped.

66-33
Function (Purpose) Used to detect the line signals (BUSY
TONE/CNG/CED/FNET/DTMF).
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
Select a target item for signal detection check with the touch panel
key.
The detected signal is highlighted.
HS1 Polarity reversal signal
HS2 Polarity reversal signal
RHS Handset hook SW
EXHS External telephone hook SW
SIMULATION NO.66-26
TEST
CLOSE
PRESENT : --------------------
NEW : SET
M-D-IN EXTEL NUMBER SETTING. 0-9[0-9]. :[ ]:#:[#]
ARE YOU SURE?
YES NO
EXECUTE
SIMULATION NO.66-29
TEST
FAX ADDRESS DATA CLEAR.
CLOSE
TEL/LIU SENSOR CHECK
TEST
HS1 HS2 RHS EXHS
SIMULATION NO.66-31
TEST
TEL/LIU SETTING.
EXECUTE
CLOSE
CION MR EC S.
RECEIVED DATA CHECK
TEST
CHECKING...
EXECUTE

66-34
Function (Purpose) Used to measure the communication time
of the send test image data.
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
The send test is performed and the send time is measures and dis-
played. (Unit: ms)

66-36
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the interface check
between the MFP controller and the
MDMC. (Data line or command line check)
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item for the operation check with the touch
panel key.
If "(once)" is selected, when check is completed normally,
"OK" is displayed. When there occurs an error, "NG" is dis-
played.
If "(repeat)" is selected, check is repeated until the result is
found "NG" or until [EXECUTE] key is pressed.

66-39
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the destination.
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
Select a destination with the touch panel key.

66-42
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to rewrite the power control program
again to the FAX BOX.
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key.
When writing the program is completed normally, "OK" is dis-
played. When writing is failed, "NG" is displayed.

66-43
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to write the adjustment value of the
power control program to the FAX BOX.
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item to be set with [|] [+] keys.
2) Enter a set value with 10-key.
When writing the adjustment value is completed normally,
"OK" is displayed. When it fails, "NG" is displayed.
MFP MDMC (DATA once) Data line once only
MFP MDMC (DATA once) Data line once only
MFP MDMC (DATA repeat) Data lien repeat
MFP MDMC (DATA repeat) Data line repeat
MFP MDMC (CMD once) Command line once only
MFP MDMC (CMD once) Command line once only
MFP MDMC (CMD repeat) Command line repeat
MFP MDMC (CMD repeat) Command line repeat
SIMULATION NO.66-33
TEST
SIGNAL DETECT CHECK.
CLOSE
FNET
BT/CNG/CED/DT
SIMULATION NO.66-34
TEST
COMMUNICATION TIME DISPLAY.
CLOSE
####[ms]
EXECUTE
SIMULATION NO.66-36
TEST
MFP-MDMC I/F CHECK.
CLOSE
MFP<-MDMC (DATA once) MFP->MDMC (DATA once)
MFP<-MDMC (DATA repeat) MFP->MDMC (DATA repeat)
MFP<-MDMC (CMD once) MFP->MDMC (CMD once)
MFP<-MDMC (CMD repeat) MFP->MDMC (CMD repeat)
Item Set range Default
A CI_LEVEL_JUDGE 2 - 15 3
B CI_CYCLE_MIN 1 - 254 10
C CI_CYCLE_MAX 2 - 255 142
D CI_COUNT 2 - 15 3
E POFF_LEVEL_JUDGE 2 - 15 15
F EXHS_LEVEL_JUDGE 2 - 255 240
G RHS_LEVEL_JUDGE 2 - 15 2
H SON_TIMEOUT 1 - 127 20
SIMULATION NO.66-39
TEST
FAX DESTINATION SETUP
CLOSE
JAPAN U.S.A/CANADA EUROPE AUSTRALIA
CHINA ASIA&OTHERS
ARE YOU SURE?
YES NO
EXECUTE
SIMULATION NO.66-42
TEST
POWER CONTROL PROGRAM RELOAD
CLOSE

67

67-17
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the printer controller memory
clear and default value.
Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key.
Used to clear the printer controller memory and to set the
default values.
If setting is not completed normally, "ERROR" is displayed.

67-24
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the printer setting of auto
color calibration.
played.
Section
Operation/Procedure
The high density process control operation is started to make
self print.
2) Place the outputted self print patch on the glass table, and
select a process mode with [FACTORY] and [SERVICE] on
the touch panel.
The patch is scanned and the 16-patch self print is outputted.
4) Press [OK] key.
The correction value is saved and the reference value is regis-
tered.

67-25
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the manual correction set-
ting of the printer engine color balance.
played.
Section
Operation/Procedure
touch panel.

67-26
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the reference scanner tar-
get value setting of the printer engine auto
density adjustment.
played.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Select a target item to be changed with the touch panel.
A: 3 ` CI_LEVEL_JUDGE
B` 10 ` CI_CYCLE_MIN
C` 142 ` CI_CYCLE_MAX
D` 3 ` CI_COUNT
A:
SIMULATION NO.66-43
POWER CONTROL ADJUSTMENT VALUE WRITING.
3
2 15
OK
TEST
EXECUTE
CLOSE
E` 15 ` POFF_LEVEL_JUDGE
F ` 240 ` EXHS_LEVEL_JUDGE
G` 2 ` RHS_LEVEL_JUDGE
H` 20 ` SON_TIMEOUT
SIMULATION NO.67-17
TEST
PRINTER CONTROLLER MEMORY CLEAR
CLOSE
EXECUTE
SIMULATION NO.67-24
TEST
EXECUTE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-24
TEST
,
CLOSE
A : 50 ; POINT1
B : 50 ; POINT2
C : 50 ; POINT3
D : 50 ; POINT4
A:
SIMULATION NO.67-25
50
1 99
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 50 ; POINT5
F : 50 ; POINT6
G : 50 ; POINT7
H: 50 ; POINT8
I : 50 ; POINT9
J : 50 ; POINT10
K : 50 ; POINT11
L : 50 ; POINT12
EXECUTE
K C M Y

67-27
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the scanner target value
registration of the printer engine auto den-
sity adjustment.
played.
Section
Operation/Procedure
touch panel.
3) Place the self print patch outputted with SIM 67-25 on the
glass table, and press [EXECUTE] key on the touch panel.
Sampling is started.
4) Press [OK] key.
The target value is saved.

67-28
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the scanner target value
registration of the printer engine auto
adjustment.
played.
Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key.
The initial value reset of the engine auto adjustment scanner
target value is executed.

67-30
Function (Purpose) Used to perform delivery setting of the main
unit calibration data and the process cor-
rection data to a client PC. (for GDI printer)
played.
Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [OK] key. (The setting content is saved.)

67-31
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the printer calibration value.
played.
Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key.
The printer calibration value is cleared.
Item Default value
Target value table
select
DEF1 DEF1 mode setting DEF1
B Point B target value
C Point C target value
D Point D target value
E Point E target value
F Point F target value
G Point G target value
H Point H target value
I Point I target value
J Point J target value
K Point K target value
L Point L target value
M Point M target value
N Point N target value
O Point O target value
BASE Background sampling value
SIMULATION NO.67-26
TEST
STANDARD SCANNER TARGET SELECT OF PRT ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJ
TARGET TBL : DEF1 DEF2
CLOSE
1/1
DEF3
K C M Y SETUP
SIMULATION NO.67-27
TEST
#B: 91, #C 2944, #D: 3227, #E: 5822, #F: 8600
#G: 28935, #H: 54344, #I: 86968, #J: 122678, #K: 151198
#L: 169731, #M: 195950, #N: 201249, #:O: 207112
1/1
CLOSE
Item Default value
A 0: Inhibit 1
1: Allow
SIMULATION NO.67-28
TEST
STANDARD SCANNER TARGET OF PRINTER COLOR CALIB: SERVICE
CLOSE
A : 1 ; (0:YES 1:NO)
A:
SIMULATION NO.67-30
BRATION DATA RELEASE ADJUSTMENT
1
0 1
OK
TEST
CLOSE

67-32
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the screen/color select
function setting for each object.
played.
Section
Operation/Procedure

67-33
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the gamma correction (for
PCL) between printer screens.
played.
Section
Operation/Procedure
touch panel.
2) Select a target item with [SCREEN] key.
<Items selectable with SCREEN>

67-33
Function (Purpose) Used to perform gamma correction (for
GDI) between printer screens.
played.
Section
Operation/Procedure
touch panel.
2) Select a target item with [SCREEN] key.
Item
Default
value
A SCREEN
(0: YES 1: NO)
Screen select for each object allow 0
Screen select for each object inhibit
B COLOR
(0: YES 1: NO)
Color select for each object allow 0
Color select for each object inhibit
Item
Default value
SCREEN1 - 9 SCREEN10, 11
(KCMY) (K)
A POINT1 Point 1 128 127
B POINT2 Point 2 128 125
C POINT3 Point 3 128 124
D POINT4 Point 4 128 124
E POINT5 Point 5 128 122
F POINT6 Point 6 128 120
G POINT7 Point 7 128 114
SIMULATION NO.67-31
TEST
PRINTER CALIBRATION DATA CLEAR
CLOSE
A : 0 ; SCREEN(0:YES 1:NO)
B : 0 ; COLOR(0:YES 1:NO) A:
SIMULATION NO.67-32
MODE SETTING (OBJECT)
0
0 1
OK
TEST
CLOSE
H POINT8 Point 8 128 105
I POINT9 Point 9 128 95
J POINT10 Point 10 128 82
K POINT11 Point 11 128 70
L POINT12 Point 12 128 64
M POINT13 Point 13 128 57
N POINT14 Point 14 128 62
O POINT15 Point 15 128 75
Color middle
speed
Monochrome
high speed
Content
41cpm 55
cpm
62
cpm
70
cpm
SCREEN1 4bit_LOW (photo)
SCREEN2 4bit_HIGH (Graphic)
SCREEN3 1bit_LOW (photo)
SCREEN4 1bit_HIGH (Graphic)
SCREEN5 4bit_CAD
SCREEN6 Mono (600 x 600)
SCREEN7 Mono (1200 x 600)
SCREEN8 Toner save
1bit_LOW (Photo)
SCREEN9 Toner save
1bit_HIGH (Graphic)
SCREEN10 Toner save Mono
(600 x 600)
SCREEN11 Toner save Mono
(1200 x 600)
Item
Default value
SCREEN
1, 3
SCREEN 2
K C M Y
A POINT1 Point 1 128 128 128 128 128
B POINT2 Point 2 128 128 128 128 127
C POINT3 Point 3 128 127 127 128 127
Item
Default value
SCREEN1 - 9 SCREEN10, 11
(KCMY) (K)
A : 128 ; POINT1
B : 128 ; POINT2
C : 128 ; POINT3
D: 128 ; POINT4
A:
SIMULATION NO.67-33
PPRINTER SCREEN GAMMA ADJUSTMENT (SCREEN1)
128
0 255
OK
TEST
CLOSE
E : 128 ; POINT5
F : 128 ; POINT6
G: 128 ; POINT7
H: 128 ; POINT8
I : 128 ; POINT9
J : 128 ; POINT10
K: 128 ; POINT11
L : 128 ; POINT12
SCREEN
K C M Y
4. Soft switch (Detail of SIM 66-1)
A. Soft switch list
D POINT4 Point 4 128 127 128 128 127
E POINT5 Point 5 128 127 127 126 126
F POINT6 Point 6 128 127 126 127 126
G POINT7 Point 7 128 123 124 124 123
H POINT8 Point 8 128 119 122 122 123
I POINT9 Point 9 128 111 116 117 121
J POINT10 Point 10 128 112 113 112 117
K POINT11 Point 11 128 106 108 115 116
L POINT12 Point 12 128 110 113 110 115
M POINT13 Point 13 128 120 112 117 118
N POINT14 Point 14 128 110 119 120 118
O POINT15 Point 15 128 110 119 121 116
SCREEN1 1bit Photo
SCREEN2 1bit Graphic
SCREEN3 1bit Mono
Item
Default value
SCREEN
1, 3
SCREEN 2
K C M Y
A: 128 ; POINT1
B : 128 ; POINT2
C : 128 ; POINT3
D: 128 ; POINT4
A:
SIMULATION NO.67-33
PPRINTER SCREEN GAMMA ADJUSTMENT (SCREEN1)
128
0 255
OK
TEST
E : 128 ; POINT5
F : 128 ; POINT6
G: 128 ; POINT7
H: 128 ; POINT8
I : 128 ; POINT9
J : 128 ; POINT10
K: 128 ; POINT11
L : 128 ; POINT12
SCREEN
K C M Y
SW
No.
Bit
No.
System
settings
Item SW selection and function Initial value Remarks
1 1 - 8 Country code 1 North America
* For codes of
the other
countries, refer
to the page of
SIM 66-2
setting.
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
2 1 Operation
settings
Change from the image
send screen to the copy
screen
1: Change over 0: Do not change over "1": Change over
(North America)
"0": Do not change
over (Other country)
2 - 5 Operation
settings
Image quality priority
selection (standard image
quality setting)
Ordinary lettering 0 0 0 0 0 Ordinary lettering
Small lettering 0 0 0 1 0
Fine 0 0 1 0 0
Very fine 0 0 1 1 0
Small lettering, medium
tone
0 1 0 1
Fine, medium tone 0 1 1 0
Very fine, medium tone 0 1 1 1
6 Operation
settings
Image quality setting when
saving (FAX)
1: Apply 0: Do not apply 0 Do not apply
7, 8 Not used 0
0
3 1 Operation
settings
Received data printing hold
(FAX/Internet Fax)
1: Hold 0: Do not hold 0 Do not hold
2, 3 FAX initial
setting
Tone/Pulse initial setting
(Dial call signal setting)
10PPS (Pulese) 0 0 1 TONE
20PPS 0 1 0
TONE 1 0
Same action as initial
value
1 1
4 FAX initial
setting
Auto startup mode 1: Release 0: Setting 0 Setting
5 - 8 FAX initial
setting
Pause time setting
(between dials)
Binary input
Setting range 1 to 15 seconds (1 second intervals)
"0100": 4 seconds
(South Africa)
"0010": 2 seconds
(Other country)
When set to "0000,"
the default value is
set.
4 1, 2 FAX initial
setting
Speaker volume when on-
hook (Speaker volume
during DTMF sending)
Small 0 1 1 Medium
Medium 1 0 0
Large 1 1
3, 4 FAX initial
setting
Call sound volume No sound 0 0 1 Medium
Small 0 1 0
Medium 1 0
Large 1 1
5, 6 FAX initial
setting
Line monitor volume setting No sound 0 0 "00": No sound
(U.K./France/
Germany/Rusia)
"10": Medium
(Other country)
Small 0 1
Medium 1 0
Large 1 1
7, 8 FAX initial
setting
Volume of the transmission
completion sound (Volume
of the successful
transmission sound)
No sound 0 0 1 Medium
Small 0 1 0
Medium 1 0
Large 1 1
5 1, 2 FAX initial
setting
Volume of the
communication error
of the transmission and
reception error sound)
Small 0 1 0
Medium 1 0
Large 1 1
3, 4 FAX initial
setting
Volume of the reception
of the reception completion
sound)
Small 0 1 0
Medium 1 0
Large 1 1
5, 6 FAX initial
setting
Tone of the successful
transmission sound
Pattern 1 (550Hz) 0 0 1 Pattern 3
(1000Hz)
Pattern 2 (750Hz) 0 1 0
Pattern 3 (1000Hz) 1 0
5 7, 8 FAX initial
setting
Tone of the transmission
error sound
Pattern 1 (550Hz) 0 0 1 Pattern 3
(1000Hz) Pattern 2 (750Hz) 0 1 0
6 1, 2 FAX initial
setting
Tone of the reception sound Pattern 1 (550Hz) 0 0 1 Pattern 3
(1000Hz) Pattern 2 (750Hz) 0 1 0
3 - 5 FAX initial
setting
Setting of the successful
transmission sound time
2.0 seconds 0 0 0 0 3.0 seconds
2.5 seconds 0 0 1 1
3.0 seconds 0 1 0 0
3.5 seconds 0 1 1
4.0 seconds 1 0 0
6 - 8 FAX initial
setting
Setting of the reception
sound time
2.0 seconds 0 0 0 0 3.0 seconds
2.5 seconds 0 0 1 1
3.0 seconds 0 1 0 0
3.5 seconds 0 1 1
4.0 seconds 1 0 0
7 1 FAX initial
setting
Setting of the time of the
transmission/reception error
sound
1: Every 0.7 seconds 0: Every 0.3 seconds 0 Every 0.3 seconds
2, 3 FAX initial
setting
Communication results
sheet print settings (for
ordinary transmission)
<FAX only>
Do not print 0 0 1 At times of
transmission
failure
Always print 0 1 0
At times of transmission
failure
1 0
4, 5 FAX initial
setting
Setting of the
communication results
sheet printing (at times of
broadcast transmission)
Do not print 0 0 0 Always print
Always print 0 1 1
Failed transmission
address
1 0
6, 7 FAX initial
setting
Communication results
sheet print setting (when
receiving) <FAX only>
Do not print 0 0 0 Do not print
Always print 0 1 0
At times of error 1 0
8 FAX initial
setting
Report output (when
receiving confidential
communications)
<FAX only>
1: Do not print 0: Print 0 Print
SW
No.
Bit
No.
System
settings
8 1, 2 FAX initial
setting
Print document contents
when transmitting (results
sheet) <FAX only>
Do not print 0 0 1 At times of error
Always print 0 1 0
At times of error 1 0
3 FAX initial
setting
Automatic printing of the
record sheet when memory
is full
1: Yes 0: No 0 No Trigger printing of
200 entries.
4 - 8 FAX initial
setting
Printing of the
communication record
sheet at a designated time
(hours)
Setting range
Binary input
00 to 23
2-digit input
0 0 hour For outside the set
range, the default
value is used.
0
0
0
0
9 1 - 6 FAX initial
setting
Printing of the
(minutes)
Setting range
Binary input
00 to 59
2-digit input
0 0 minute For outside the set
range, the default
value is used.
0
0
0
0
0
7 FAX initial
setting
Printing of the
1: Output 0: Do not output 0 Do not output
8 FAX initial
setting
ECM (valid except during
V.34: reflected in the V.21
DIS/DCS/DTC)
1: No 0: Yes 0 Yes ECM is on during
communication in
the V.34 mode.
10 1 - 8 FAX initial
setting
Remote changeover
number setting
Setting range
Binary input
Upper 4 bits 0 - F
Lower 4 bits 0 - F
*=A
#=B
0 5* When the value of
C - F is set, the
default value of "5"
is set.
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
setting
Distinctive ring (DRD
setting)
OFF 0 0 0 0 0 OFF
STANDARD 0 0 0 1 0
Pattern 1 1 0 0 0 0
Pattern 2 0 1 0 0 0
Pattern 3 1 1 0 0
Pattern 4 0 0 1 0
Pattern 5 1 0 1 0
ON (Australia) 0 1 1 0
ON (New Zealand) 1 1 1 0
ON (Hong Kong) 1 0 0 1
5 - 8 Not used 0
1
1
0
12 1, 2 Not used 0
0
3, 4 FAX initial
setting
PBX setting
(Germany and France only)
OFF 0 0 0 OFF
Flash 0 1 0
ID (number) 1 0
5 - 8 FAX initial
setting
ID (number) setting
<Input the 1st digit when
dial inputting and dialing>
Binary input
Setting range 0 to 15
When 10 -15 is selected, the default value of "0"
is set.
0 0 Enable when ID is
set in "PBX setting."
0
0
0
setting
ID (number) setting 2
<Input the 2nd digit when
Binary input
When 10 - 12, 14, 15 are designated, do not use
numbers with those digits.
"-" when 13 is set.
1 Not used Enable when ID is
set in "PBX setting." 1
0
1
5 - 8 FAX initial
setting
IID (number) setting 3
<Input the 3rd digit when
Binary input
When 10 - 12, 14, 15 are designated, do not use
numbers with those digits.
"-" when 13 is set.
1 Not used Enable when ID is
set in "PBX setting." 1
0
1
SW
No.
Bit
No.
System
settings
14 1 FAX initial
setting
External telephone
connection
1: Yes 0: No 1 Yes
2 - 8 Not used 0
1
0
0
0
0
0
15 1 - 8 Adjustment
value
Signal sending level Binary input
"00001010": -10dBm
(North America/China/
Singapore/Thailand/
Malaysia/Philippine/
Hong Kong/Middle
East/Other3)
"00001011": -11dBm
(Australia/New
Zealand/India/Taiwan/
Rusia)
"00001001": -9dBm
(Other country)
When set over the
max. send level, the
max. value of the
destination is used.
(For North America
and China, there is
no limitation on the
max. send level.)
When the set value is 27 - 255, it is regarded as 26.
The send level to the line is virtually the set value.
Max. send level limitation:
China: 0dBm
Australia, New Zealand, Taiwan: -10dBm (11 or
less)
Europe: -10dBm (9 or less)
Indonesia: -5 to -13dBm Singapore: -6dBm
India: -3dBm or less
Middle East, Slovakia, Other3: No limitation for the
standards
Rusia: -11dBm
16 1 - 8 Not used "00000000": North America/Taiwan/
Middle East/Other3
"00010000": China/Hong Kong
"00110000": India
"01010000": Indonesia/Thailand/Malaysia/
Philippine
"01100000": Singapore/South Africa
"10100000": Australia/Rusia
"10000000": Other country
17 1 FAX
transmission
setting
Automatic reduced
transmission
1: Normal 0: Reduction 0 Reduction
2 FAX
transmission
setting
Rotated transmission
selection (A4 A4R)
1: No 0: Yes 0 Yes Rotated
transmission or not
depending on
orientation of the
document.
17 3 FAX
transmission
setting
selection (B5R B5)
transmission or not
depending on
orientation of the
document.
(16K A4)
4 FAX
transmission
setting
selection (A5R A5)
transmission or not
depending on
orientation of the
document.
(INVOICE A5)
5 FAX
transmission
setting
selection
(8.5 x 11 8.5 x 11R)
transmission or not
depending on
orientation of the
document.
6 FAX
transmission
setting
selection (16K 16KR)
transmission or not
depending on
orientation of the
document.
(16K A4)
7 FAX
transmission
setting
selection
(5.5 x 8.5R 5.5 x 8.5)
transmission or not
depending on
orientation of the
document.
(INVOICE A5)
8 FAX
transmission
setting
Page number printing 1: No 0: Yes 0 Yes
SW
No.
Bit
No.
System
settings
=
=
=
=
18 1 FAX
transmission
setting
Designation of date and
source printing position
1: Upper side of a
document (in send data)
0: Outside of a
document (outside send
data)
0 Outside of a
document
2 FAX
transmission
setting
Quick online/Memory
transmission changeover
(quick online transmission)
1: Memory transmission 0: Quick online
transmission
0 Quick online
transmission
3 FAX
transmission
setting
Designation of date and
source printing
1: Not apply 0: Apply 0 Apply For North America,
the sender is
always specified.
4 FAX
transmission
setting
Re-call permitted when
busy
1: Re-call permitted
when busy
0: Re-call prohibited
when busy
1 Permitted
5 - 8 FAX
transmission
setting
Number of re-calls when
busy
Binary input
Setting range North America: 1 to 14
Australia/New Zealand/Singapore: 1 to 9
U.K./France/Germany/Sweden: 1 to 10
Indonesia: 1 to 5 China: 1 to 3
Other country: 1 to 15
Number of recalls Set value x once
0 2 times For outside the set
range, the default
value is used.
0
1
0
19 1 - 4 FAX
transmission
setting
Interval between re-calls
when busy
Binary input
Setting range Indonesia/Taiwan: 4 to 15
Re-call interval Set value x 1 minute
"0100": 4 minutes
(Indonesia/Taiwan)
"0011": 3 minutes
(Other country)
For outside the set
range, the default
value is used.
5 - 8 FAX
transmission
setting
Number of re-calls at times
of communication error
Binary input
Setting range
North America/Australia/New Zealand: Once only
U.K./France/Germany/Sweden/Indonesia: 1 to 5
China: 1 to 3 Malaysia/India: 1 to 9
Number of recalls Set value x once
"0010": 2 times
(China/Singapore/
Indonesia/Thailand/
Malaysia/India/
Philippine/Hong Kong/
Taiwan)
"0001": 1 time
(Other country)
For outside the set
range, the default
value is used.
20 1 - 4 FAX
transmission
setting
Re-call interval at times of
communication error
Binary input
Setting range
Indonesia: 4 to 15 minutes
Other country: 1 to 15 minutes
Re-call interval Set value x 1 minute
"0011": 3 minutes
(North America/
Australia/New
Zealand)
"0100": 4 minutes
(Indonesia)
"0001": 1 minute
(Other country)
For outside the set
range, the default
value is used.
5 FAX
transmission
setting
Re-call permitted at times of
communication error
1: Re-call permitted at
times of communication
error
0: Re-call prohibited at
times of communication
error
1 Permitted
20 6 FAX
reception
setting
Automatic reduced printing
to fixed sizes
1: Discard 0: Reduction 0 Reduction
7 FAX
reception
setting
Setting to reduce and
discard when printing
A3-11 x 17 (reduced
printing setting when
receiving A3)
1: Discard 0: Reduction 1 Discard When in reduction,
94% for all.
8 FAX
reception
setting
Reduced print setting when
receiving letters
1: Discard 0: Reduction 1 Discard
21 1 - 4 FAX
reception
setting
Setting of the number of
automatic reception calls
Binary input
Setting range
Europe/Indonesia/Thailand: 0 to 9 times
Australia/New Zealand: 2 to 4 times
Other country: 0 to 15 times
0 2 times If 0 is set, the call
sound will not be
sounded.
(However, this does
not include the
nighttime FAX
mode.)
0
1
0
5 FAX
reception
setting
Double-faced printing of
received data (double-faced
reception setting)
1: Double-faced printing
permitted
0: Double-faced printing
prohibited
0 Double-faced
printing prohibited
6, 7 FAX
reception
setting
Setting of received data
print conditions
Equal magnification/
Reduction permitted
0 0 0 Equal
magnification/
Reduction
permitted
Division prohibited/
Reduction prohibited
0 1 0
Division permitted
1 0
value
1 1
8 FAX
reception
setting
Designated number
reception refusal setting
(FAX)
1: Receipt of designated
number is refused (valid)
0: Receipt of designated
number is not refused
(invalid)
0 Receipt of
designated
number is not
refused (invalid)
SW
No.
Bit
No.
System
settings
22 1 FAX
reception
setting
FAX delivery tray setting
(without finisher attached)
1: Right tray 0: Center tray 0 Center tray
FAX delivery tray setting
(with finisher attached)
1: Right tray 0: Finisher tray Finisher tray
2 (*) FAX delivery tray setting
(Upper/lower setting when
the 4K finisher is installed)
1: Lower tray 0: Upper tray 0 Upper tray
3 Device
setting
Staple setting 1: Yes 0: No 0 No
4, 5 Device
setting
Staple position Rear 1 point 0 0 0 Rear 1 point
Front 1 point 0 1 0
Center 2 points 1 0
value
1 1
6, 7 FAX
reception
setting
Selection of delivered sheet
size
A4 or A3
(8.5 x 11 or 11 x 17)
0 0 0 A4 or A3 (8.5 x 11
or 11 x 17)
B5 or B4
(8.5 x 11 or 8.5 x 14)
0 1 0
A4 (8.5 x 11) 1 0
A4R (8.5 x 11R) 1 1
8 Valid/Invalid setting of FAX
A4, letter threshold
1: Invalid 0: Valid 0 Valid
23 1 FAX
reception
setting
Setting for changing over to
automatic reception during
manual reception
1: Permitted
(changeover)
0: Prohibited (do not
changeover)
0 Prohibited The number of calls
is set in "Setting of
the number of calls
for changing over
from manual to
automatic
reception."
2 - 6 FAX
reception
setting
Setting of the number of
calls for changing over from
manual to automatic
reception (Selection setting
from manual reception to
automatic reception)
Binary input 1 to 9 times
Setting range 1 time intervals
The number of calls for changing Set value + 1
0 9 times Function setting for
"Setting for
changing over to
automatic reception
during manual
reception"
For outside the set
range, the default
value is used.
Functions only in
France.
1
0
0
0
23 7 Polling
protection
setting
Polling protection 1: Do not protect 0: Protect 0 Protect
8 Switch to sorting in order of
numbers on the address list
1: Registered number
order
0: Search number order 0 Search number
order
24 1 Receiver off-hook (External
telephone)
1: Warns off-hook state
of the external
telephone.
0: Does not warn off-
hook state of the
external telephone.
"0": Does not warn off-
hook state of the
external telephone.
(North America/
Australia/New
Zealand/China/
Singapore/Indonesia/
Thailand/Malaysia/
India/Philippine/Hong
Kong/Taiwan/Middle
East/Other3)
"1": Warns off-hook
state of the external
telephone.
(Other country)
Limited by the TEL/
LIU PWB.
2 - 5 Not used 1
0
0
0
6 Scope of line sound monitor 1: All 0: Until NSF signal send/
receive
0 Until NSF signal
send/receive
7, 8 (*) Volume setting of call sound
(large)
Volume level 9 0 0 1 Volume level 13 Related to BZ
Calling sound/
Communication end
sound (Normal,
Error)
Volume level 11 0 1 0
Volume level 13 1 0
Volume level 15 1 1
SW
No.
Bit
No.
System
settings
25 1, 2 (*) Volume setting of call sound
(medium)
Volume level 3 0 0 0 Volume level 5 Related to BZ
Calling sound/
Communication end
sound (Normal,
Error)
Volume level 7 1 0
Volume level 9 1 1
3, 4 (*) Volume setting of call sound
(small)
Volume level 0
(no sound)
0 0 1 Volume level 2 Related to BZ
Calling sound/
Communication end
sound (Normal,
Error)
Volume level 2 1 0
Volume level 3 1 1
5, 6 (*) Volume setting of line
monitor sound (large)
Volume level 9 0 0 1 Volume level 15 Line Monitor sound
When on-hook
Receiver off-hook
warning sound
Volume level 13 1 0
Volume level 15 1 1
7, 8 (*) Volume setting of line
monitor sound (medium)
Volume level 5 0 0 1 Volume level11 Line Monitor sound
When on-hook
Receiver off-hook
warning sound
Volume level 9 1 0
Volume level11 1 1
26 1, 2 (*) Volume setting of line
monitor sound (small)
Volume level 1 0 0 1 Volume level 5 Line Monitor sound
When on-hook
Receiver off-hook
warning sound
Volume level 5 1 0
Volume level 7 1 1
3 Not used 0
4 Remote changeover
permitted
1: Changeover enable
for call-out/call-in
0: Changeover enable
only for call-in
0 Only for call-in North America: This
SW is ignored and
changeover is
enabled for call-out/
call-in.
5 - 7 Setting of call time (T0 timer
setting) in automatic
transmission
Setting range <Binary input>
(Rusia) 30 seconds to 35 seconds:
5 seconds intervals
(China) 30 seconds to 45 seconds
(Other country) 30 seconds to 60 seconds:
15 seconds intervals
"001": 35 seconds
(Rusia)
"001": 45 seconds
(Other country)
For outside the set
range, the default
value is used.
8 External telephone setting
when no sound is set
1: No sound priority 0: Priority on external
telephone send
0 Priority on
external telephone
send
SW
No.
Bit
No.
System
settings
27 1 - 8 External telephone off-hook
detection time
Setting range
Binary input
0ms to 2550ms
10ms intervals
0 300ms
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
28 1 - 8 Not used 0
29 1 - 8 Not used 0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
30 1 - 8 Not used 0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
SW
No.
Bit
No.
System
settings
31 1 - 4 Not used "1100": France/Germany
5 Document content print
when sending (PC-Fax
(Internet Fax) report table)
1: Print 0: Not print 0 Not print
6 - 8 Not used 1
0
1
32 1 - 4 T1 timer setting Setting range
Binary input
30 to 105 seconds
5 seconds intervals
0 40 seconds
0
1
0
5 - 8 Not used 0
0
0
0
33 1, 2 T4 timer setting
Timer during automatic
operation
3 seconds 0 0 0 3 seconds +1.5 seconds at
times of manual
operation
4 seconds 0 1 0
5 seconds 1 0
6 seconds 1 1
3 Not used 0
4 Selection of date and
transmission source print
language <Format>
1: North American
format
0: Follows the date
format setting.
0 Follows the date
format setting.
5 EOL detection timer 1: 25 seconds 0: 13 seconds 0 13 seconds
6 - 8 Not used "010": North America
"011": Taiwan
"100": Thailand/Rusia/South Africa
34 1, 2 Not used 0
0
3 - 6 Modem transmission speed
(Other than V.34) (DCS)
V.27ter 2400bps 0 0 0 0 1 V.17 14400bps Setting in
communication
other than V.34
V.29 9600bps 0 0 0 1 0
V.27ter 4800bps 0 0 1 0 0
V.29 7200bps 0 0 1 1 0
V.33 14400bps 0 1 0 0
V.17 14400bps 0 1 0 1
V.33 12000bps 0 1 1 0
V.17 14400bps 0 1 1 1
V.17 14400bps 1 0 0 0
V.17 9600bps 1 0 0 1
V.17 12000bps 1 0 1 0
V.17 7200bps 1 0 1 1
V.17 14400bps 1 1 0 0
V.17 14400bps 1 1 0 1
V.17 14400bps 1 1 1 0
V.17 14400bps 1 1 1 1
7, 8 Fixing of modem speed
during reception (Other than
V.34) (DIS)
Not fixed 0 0 0 Not fixed Setting in
communication
other than V.34
Max .speed in
reception
V.29-9600bps 0 1 0
V.27ter-4800bps 1 0
V.17-14400bps 1 1
35 1, 2 Coding capacity during
(V.34 communication)
(reflected in DIS/DCS/DTC)
JBIG/MMR/MR/MH 0 0 0 JBIG/MMR/MR/
MH MMR/MR/MH 0 1 0
MR/MH 1 0
MH 1 1
3, 4 Coding capacity during
(other than V.34
communication) (reflected
in DIS/DCS/DTC)
JBIG/MMR/MR/MH 0 0 0 JBIG/MMR/MR/
MH
MMR/MR/MH 0 1 0
MR/MH 1 0
MH 1 1
5, 6 Not used 1
1
7, 8 Image capacity when
polling (Reflected in DTC)
Very fine 0 0 0 Very fine
Fine 0 1 0
Small letters 1 0
Ordinary lettering 1 1
SW
No.
Bit
No.
System
settings
36 1 - 7 Not used 0
0
0
0
0
1
0
8 Confirmation of DIS
reception when sending
1: Twice 0: Once for NFS
reception, twice for DIS
reception
0 Once for NFS
reception, twice
for DIS reception
Enable for other
than V.34
37 1 - 8 Not used 0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
38 1, 2 Protocol monitor No 0 0 0 No
Yes 1 0 0
Only at times of error 1 1
3 Line monitor display 1: Yes 0: No 0 No
4 EEPROM access prohibited 1: Access prohibited 0: Access permitted 0 Access permitted
5 Not used 0
6 SDT signal detection 1: Yes 0: No 0 No
7, 8 Timer setting (V.21-FSK)
between flag-adrs
6 seconds 0 0 0 20 seconds Enable for other
than V.34
20 seconds 0 1 1
30 seconds 1 0
120 seconds 1 1
39 1 Echo countermeasure (CED
tone sending interval) when
receiving
1: 500ms 0: 75ms 0 75ms
2 Echo countermeasure
(setting of hold time
between DIS reception and
sending of signal) when
transmitting
1: 800ms 0: 500ms 0 500ms Enable for other
than V.34
3 - 6 Not used 0
0
0
1
7, 8 RTN sending line error rate 6line 0 0 1 60line Number of error
lines in the STD
standard
12line 0 1 0
60line 1 0
120line 1 1
40 1 CSI sending 1: No 0: Yes 0 Yes
2, 3 CED signal sending time 3 seconds 0 0 0 3 seconds Setting for the
ANSam signal is
performed using a
separate SW 51-7,
8 (V.8 mode
ANSam signal
sending time).
4 seconds 0 1 0
5 seconds 1 0
No 1 1
4 CED/ANSam detection time 1: 1000ms 0: 500ms 0 500ms
5, 6 Waiting time for start of
CED/ANSam sending
2.25 seconds 0 0 0 2.25 seconds
3 seconds 0 1 0
4 seconds 1 0
7, 8 Not used 0
0
41 1, 2 Start of CNG sending 0.5 seconds 0 0 "11": 2.0 seconds
(North America/
Taiwan/Middle East/
Other3/Rusia)
"00": 0.5 seconds
(Other country)
1.0 second 0 1
1.5 seconds 1 0
2.0 seconds 1 1
3 Time between DCS-TCF 1: 150ms 0: 75ms 0 75ms
4 - 8 Not used 0
1
0
0
0
SW
No.
Bit
No.
System
settings
42 1, 2 RCP sending count 3 times 0 0 0 3 times
6 times 0 1 0
9 times 1 0
12 times 1 1
3 RTC EOL sending count 1: 12 times 0: 6 times 0 6 times
4 F.A.S.T function 1: Yes 0: No 0 No Valid only in North
America.
5 - 8 Not used 0
1
1
1
43 1 V.34 mode function
(including polling when
calling)
1: V.34 invalid 0: V.34 valid 0 V.34 valid
2 V.34 mode function (on call
arrival)
3 V.34 mode function at times
of manual communication
4 Primary channel return
mode setting
1: PPh 0: Sh 1 PPh
5, 6 External telephone off-hook
detection time when
simulated voltage is applied
48ms 0 0 0 96ms
96ms 0 1 1
200ms 1 0
300ms 1 1
7 Reversion from the energy
saving state (excluding
preheat) when the external
telephone is off-hook
1: Revert 0: Do not revert 1 Revert
8 Not used 0
44 1 Echo suppressor tone
setting No. 1
1: Without V33 0: With V33 0 With V33
2 Echo suppressor tone
setting No. 2
setting No. 3
1: Without V29 0: With V29 1 Without V29
setting No. 4
5 - 8 Not used 0
1
1
1
45 1 Error handling when
transmission and receiving
RTN
1: Do not recognize error 0: Recognize errors 0 Recognize errors
2 Reception gain changeover
when receiving
1: EYE-Q check only 0: "0" Reception & EYE-
Q check
0 "0" Reception &
EYE-Q
3, 4 Transmission cable
amplitude equalizer
0dB 0 0 0 0dB
4dB 0 1 0
8dB 1 0
12dB 1 1
5 - 8 Not used 0
0
0
0
46 1 - 4 V.34 mode transmission
speed
Transmission speed = 2400(bps) x N
Example: 2400(bps) x 12 = 28800(bps)
2400 (bps) when N=0
33600 (bps) when N=15
1 33600(bps) When set to 2400
bps, "Symbol Rate"
for V.34 send must
be set to Disable.
1
1
0
5 - 8 V.34 mode receiving speed Receiving speed = 2400(bps) x N
Example: 2400(bps) x 12 = 28800(bps)
2400 (bps) when N=0
33600 (bps) when N=15
1 33600(bps) When set to 2400
bps, V.34 Symbol
Rate Mask (when
reception) must be
also changed.
1
1
0
SW
No.
Bit
No.
System
settings
47 1 3429 symbol rate
transmission enable during
V.34 transmission
0: disable 1: enable 1 enable
2 Symbol rate 3200 high
carrier transmission enable
during V.34 transmission
3 Symbol rate 3200 low
4 Symbol rate 3000 high
5 Symbol rate 3000 low
6 Not used 1
7 Symbol rate 2800 enable
8 Symbol rate 2743 enable
48 1 - 4 V.34 Symbol Rate Mask
(when receiving)
2400 0 0 0 0 0 3429/3200/3000/
2800/2400
For outside the set
range, the default
value is used.
2400 0 0 0 1 1
2800/2400 0 0 1 0 0
3000/2800/2400 0 0 1 1 1
3200/3000/2800/2400 0 1 0 0
3429/3200/3000/2800/
2400
0 1 0 1
5 - 8 Not used 0
1
0
0
49 1 - 5 Not used 0
1
0
1
0
49 6 PIN code correspondence 1: Correspond 0: Do not correspond 0 Do not correspond FAX address
display limit
(displayed up to the
16th digit from the
front)
7, 8 Dial call waiting time 3.5 seconds 0 0 "01": 4 seconds
(U.K./Finland/Norway/
Denmark/
Netherlands/Italy/New
Zealand/Slovakia/
South Africa/Spain/
Portuguese/
Luxemburg/Belgium/
Czech/Hungary/
Greece/Poland)
"00": 3.5 seconds
(Other country)
This only functions
when dial tone
detection is OFF.
4 seconds 0 1
5 seconds 1 0
6 seconds 1 1
50 1 - 7 Not used 1
0
1
0
0
1
1
8 Dial tone ON detection time
(during continuous
detection)
1: 1 second 0: 1.5 seconds 0 1.5 seconds
51 1 - 4 Time for prohibition of
waiting at both speeds after
sending CFR/MCF
Binary input 200ms intervals
Setting range 200 to 2800ms
1600ms when "0000" is set.
0ms when "1111" is set.
0 1600ms Enable for other
than V.34 0
0
0
5, 6 Not used 0
0
7, 8 V.8 mode ANSam signal
sending time
3 seconds 0 0 0 4 seconds
4 seconds 0 1 1
5 seconds 1 0
6 seconds 1 1
SW
No.
Bit
No.
System
settings
52 1 - 4 Lower limit of dial tone ON/
OFF detection time (during
intermittent detection)
Setting range 40ms to 490ms
40 + N x 30
"0010": 100ms (North
America/Australia/
New Zealand/China/
Thailand/Malaysia/
Kong/Taiwan/Middle
East/Other3)
"0001": 70ms
(Other country)
This is only valid
during intermittent
DT detection.
5 - 8 Upper limit of dial tone ON/
OFF detection time (during
intermittent detection)
Setting range 400ms to 1900ms
400 + N x 100
"0011": 700ms (North
America/Australia/
New Zealand/China/
Thailand/Malaysia/
Kong/Taiwan/Middle
East/Other3)
"1000": 1200ms
(Other country)
This is only valid
during intermittent
DT detection.
53 1, 2 Not used 0
0
3 Line current detection at
times of dial calling
1: No 0: Yes "1": No
(North America/
Taiwan/Middle East/
Other3/Rusia)
"0": Yes
(Other country)
4 Dial tone detection 1: Yes 0: No "0": No (Australia/
New Zealand/China/
Indonesia/Thailand/
Malaysia/India/
Philippine/Hong Kong/
Taiwan/Middle East/
Other3/Rusia)
"1": Yes
(Other country)
53 5 Dial tone monitoring time 1: 17 seconds 0: 10 seconds "1": 17 seconds
(Germany/
Switcherland/Austria)
"0": 10 seconds
(Other country)
6 CNG detection when calling
FAX
1: CNG detection ON 0: CNG detection OFF 0 OFF For collision
aversion
7, 8 DT/BT detection level -43dB 0 0 0 -43dB DT, BT common
-35dB 0 1 0
-33dB 1 0
-30dB 1 1
54 1, 2 DT/BT detection frequency
range setting
Modem fixed
(About 308Hz to 517Hz)
0 0 "00": Modem fixed
(Thailand/India)
"01": 420Hz to 680Hz
(China)
"10": 360Hz to 440Hz
(Indonesia/Malaysia/
Middle East/Other3/
Rusia)
"11": 245Hz to 650Hz
(Other country)
For CTR21: 245Hz
to 650Hz
420Hz to 680Hz 0 1
360Hz to 440Hz 1 0
245Hz to 650Hz 1 1
3 Busy tone detection 1: No 0: Yes 0 Yes
4, 5 Busy tone detection interval 2 pulse 0 0 "00": 2 pulse (North
America/Australia/
New Zealand/China/
Thailand/Malaysia/
India/Philippine/
Hong Kong/Taiwan/
Middle East/Other3)
"01": 3 pulse
(Other country)
3 pulse 0 1
4 pulse 1 0
6 pulse 1 1
6, 7 DP dial pulse count
handling
NORMAL
(Pulse=DIAL, 10=0)
0 0 "01": EXTEND
(Sweden)
"10": REVERSE
(New Zealand)
"00": NORMAL
(Other country)
EXTEND
(Pulse=DIAL+1)
0 1
REVERSE
(Pulse=10-DIAL)
1 0
8 Not used 0
SW
No.
Bit
No.
System
settings
55 1 - 8 Not used 0
56 1 - 4 Adjustment
value
Make time (10PPS) setting Setting range
Binary input
29 to 44ms
1ms intervals
"0100": 33ms
(Malaysia/Taiwan/
South Africa)
"0110": 35ms
(New Zealand/India)
"1000": 37ms
(Australia)
"1001": 38ms
(China/Singapore/
Thailand/Hong Kong)
"1011": 40ms
(Other country)
5 - 8 Adjustment
value
Break time setting (10PPS) Setting range
Binary input
56 to 71ms
1ms intervals
"0110": 62ms
(China/Singapore/
Thailand/Hong Kong)
"0111": 63ms
(Australia)
"1001": 65ms
(New Zealand/India)
"1011": 67ms
(Malaysia/Taiwan/
South Africa)
"0100": 60ms
(Other country)
57 1 - 4 Adjustment
value
Minimum pause time
(10PPS) setting
Setting range
Binary input
800ms to 950ms
10ms intervals
"0001": 810ms
(France)
"0000": 800ms
(Other country)
5 - 8 Adjustment
value
Minimum pause time
(20PPS) setting
Setting range
Binary input
450ms to 600ms
10ms intervals
0 450ms Functions only in
China and
Thailand.
0
0
0
SW
No.
Bit
No.
System
settings
58 1 - 4 Adjustment
value
Make time (20PPS) setting Setting range
Binary input
9 to 24ms
1ms intervals
"1010": 19ms (China/
Thailand/Hong Kong)
"1000": 17ms
(Other country)
Functions only in
China and
Thailand.
5 - 8 Adjustment
value
Break time setting (20PPS) Setting range
Binary input
26 to 41ms
1ms intervals
"0101": 31ms (China/
Thailand/Hong Kong)
"0111": 33ms
(Other country)
Functions only in
China and
Thailand.
59 1 - 4 Adjustment
value
Setting of DTMF send level
(high group)
Setting range
Binary input
0 to 15dB
1dB intervals
"0011": 3dB
(Other3/Rusia)
"0101": 5dB
(North America)
"0110": 6dB
(New Zealand/China/
Singapore/Thailand/
Philippine)
"1000": 8dB
(Australia/Indonesia/
Hong Kong/Middle
East/South Africa)
"1001": 9dB (India)
"0111": 7dB
(Other country)
5 - 8 Adjustment
value
Setting of DTMF send level
(low group)
High group - Low group:
level difference
-2.0dB 0 0 0 0 "1000": 2.0dB
(New Zealand/China/
Thailand/Malaysia/
Kong/Taiwan/Middle
East/Other3/Rusia/
South Africa)
"1001": 2.5dB
(North America)
"1010": 3.0dB
(Other country)
-1.5dB 0 0 0 1
-1.0dB 0 0 1 0
-0.5dB 0 0 1 1
0.0dB 0 1 0 0
0.5dB 0 1 0 1
1.0dB 0 1 1 0
1.5dB 0 1 1 1
2.0dB 1 0 0 0
2.5dB 1 0 0 1
3.0dB 1 0 1 0
3.5dB 1 0 1 1
4.0dB 1 1 0 0
4.5dB 1 1 0 1
5.0dB 1 1 1 0
5.5dB 1 1 1 1
SW
No.
Bit
No.
System
settings
60 1 - 8 Not used 0
61 1 - 8 Adjustment
value
Setting of DTMF minimum
pause time
Setting range
Binary input
50 to 255ms
1ms intervals
0 120ms
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
62 1 - 5 DTMF signal send time Setting range
Binary input
70 to 310ms
10ms intervals
0 110ms
1
0
1
1
6 Not used "0": North America/Australia/China/
Singapore/Indonesia/Thailand/Malaysia/
India/Philippine/Hong Kong/Taiwan/
Middle East/Other3/Rusia
"1": Other country
7 DPMUTE control 1: ON 0: OFF 0 OFF Functions only in
Australia, New
Zealand, U.K.,
France, Germany,
Sweden.
8 Busy tone OFF non-
detection time
1: 300ms 0: 100ms 0 100ms Make shorter than
the "busy tone OFF
detection time."
63 1, 2 Lower limit of busy tone ON
detection time
250ms 0 0 "00": 250ms (North
America/Australia/
New Zealand/China/
Thailand/Malaysia/
India/Philippine/
Hong Kong/Taiwan/
Middle East/Other3/
South Africa)
"01": 140ms
(Other country)
140ms 0 1
450ms 1 0
350ms 1 1
3, 4 Upper limit of busy tone ON
detection time
750ms 0 0 "10": 1000ms
(Australia/India)
"11": 2850ms
(Singapore/South
Africa)
"00": 750ms
(Other country)
650ms 0 1
1000ms 1 0
2850ms 1 1
5, 6 Lower limit of busy tone
OFF detection time
250ms 0 0 "00": 250ms (North
America/Australia/
New Zealand/China/
Thailand/Malaysia/
India/Philippine/
Hong Kong/Taiwan/
Middle East/Other3/
South Africa)
"01": 140ms
(Other country)
140ms 0 1
450ms 1 0
350ms 1 1
7, 8 Upper limit of busy tone
OFF detection time
750ms 0 0 "10": 1000ms
(Singapore/India/
South Africa)
"00": 750ms
(Other country)
650ms 0 1
1000ms 1 0
2850ms 1 1
64 1 - 4 Not used 0
0
0
0
5 - 8 Call signal OFF non-
detection time
Setting range
Binary input
0 to 1500ms
100ms intervals
"0110": 600ms (North
America/Australia/
Taiwan/Middle East/
Other3/Rusia)
"1010": 1000ms
(New Zealand)
"0100": 400ms
(Other country)
SW
No.
Bit
No.
System
settings
65 1 - 4 Lower limit of call signal ON
time
Setting range
Binary input
150ms to 300ms
10ms intervals
"0010": 170ms
(Australia)
"0000": 150ms
(Other country)
5 - 8 Upper limit of call signal ON
time
Setting range
Binary input
3000ms to 4500ms
100ms intervals
0 3000ms
0
0
0
66 1 - 4 Lower limit of call signal
OFF time
Setting range
Binary input
0 to 1500ms
100ms intervals
0 700ms When set to "0000,"
set.
1
1
1
5, 6 Upper limit of call signal
OFF time
6.5 seconds 0 0 "01": 10 seconds
(Sweden/Indonesia)
"00": 6.5 seconds
(Other country)
10 seconds 0 1
15 seconds 1 0
20 seconds 1 1
7, 8 Not used 0
0
67 1 - 8 Not used 0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
68 1 - 8 Not used 0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
69 1 - 8 Not used 0
70 1 - 4 Not used 0
0
0
0
5 Manual calibration setting
when sending
1: Not execute 0: Execute 0 Execute
6 Manual calibration setting
when a signal arrives
1: Not execute 0: Execute 0 Execute
7, 8 Not used 0
0
71 1, 2 Reception/
forwarding
setting
Reception mode setting Automatic reception 0 0 0 Automatic
reception
Setting can be
made even without
the external
telephone.
Manual reception 0 1 0
Answerphone
connection
1 0
3, 4 Image capacity when
receiving
(Reflect in DIS, Do not
reflect in DTC)
Very fine 0 0 0 Very fine
Fine 0 1 0
When small 1 0
Ordinary lettering 1 1
5, 6 Designation of reception
size (indicating the width of
reception capacity)
By loaded cassette 0 0 0 By loaded
cassette
A4 0 1 0
B4 (B4, A4) 1 0
A3 (A3, B4, A4) 1 1
7, 8 Not used 0
0
SW
No.
Bit
No.
System
settings
72 1 Report output (when
cancelled)
1: Output 0: Do not output 0 Do not output
2 Report output (when
refusing reception)
<FAX only>
1: Output 0: Do not output 0 Do not output Internet Fax is set
by means of
SW155-8.
Irrespective of
"Always print" and
"Error," the results
sheet is not printed.
3 Printing of transmitted
document contents at times
of F code communication
<FAX only>
1: Print 0: Do not print 0 Do not print The "Document
contents printing
(results sheet) at
times of
transmission"
setting takes
priority.
4 Not used 0
5 Designation of rotation
direction when printing on
both sides and the rear side
1: Vertical binding 0: Horizontal binding 0 Horizontal binding
6 Selection of error page
output when error occurs
during FAX reception
1: Do not output the
error page
0: Output the error page 0 Output the error
page
7 Selection of re-send page at
times of error
1: All pages 0: Error page and
onwards
0 Error page and
onwards
The F code is
compulsorily resent
to all pages.
8 Relay data output 1: No 0: Yes 0 Yes
73 1 Not used 0
2 F code communication error
handling
1: Do not re-send 0: Re-send 0 Re-send Only when the
remote machine
function is enable.
3 F code password
transmission setting when
the other party's machine
has no password capacity
1: Send with password 0: Disconnect with DCN 0 Disconnect with
DCN
4 Remaining receivable
memory
1: 64KB 0: 128KB 0 128KB
73 5 Setting of received
document output when
receiving
1: Output 1 page at a
time
0: Save and output en
masse following
completion of reception
0 Save and output
en masse
following
completion of
reception
6, 7 Not used 0
0
8 Rotated printing 1: Prohibited 0: Permitted 0 Permitted
74 1 - 4 Magnification setting in
automatic reduction
Setting range
Binary input
85% to 100%
N x 1% + 85%
0 90%
1
0
1
5 Determination of sub-scan
length (determination
setting when selecting the
page)
1: Priority to data width 0: Priority to data length 0 Priority to data
length
6 Setting of protocol monitor
print when setting offset
staple
1: Offset or staple 0: No offset or No staple 0 No offset or No
staple
7, 8 Not used 0
0
75 1 - 8 Not used 0
76 1 - 8 Not used 0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
SW
No.
Bit
No.
System
settings
77 1 Setting of the reception
width of 11 x 17 sheet
1: B4 width (B4, A4) 0: A3 width (A3, B4, A4) 0 A3 width
2 Not used 0
3 Operation
settings
Saving the setting contents
for a certain period after
completion of scanning
1: The set values are
saved
0: The set values are not
saved
0 The set values are
not saved
4 Setting of communication
error sound when there is
no response from the other
party in FAX reception
1: Error sound 0: No error sound 0 No error sound Valid in cases
except when the
communication
error completion
sound setting is
OFF.
5 Re-transmission at times of
no response from the other
party
1: Do not re-call 0: Re-call 0 Re-call
6 - 8 Not used 0
0
0
78 1 Setting to refuse reception
at times of manual
reception (FAX)
1: Specified number
reception rejection
0: Specified number
reception ignoring (OFF)
0 Specified number
reception ignoring
Only valid in cases
where the
designated number
reception refusal
setting (FAX) is
refused.
2 TSI judgment setting (no
signal or all space) when
refusing reception from
designated numbers
1: Reception will be
refused
permitted
0 Reception will be
permitted
Only valid in cases
where the
designated number
reception refusal
setting (FAX) is
refused.
3 TSI judgment setting (No
numbers and no space can
be used)
refused
permitted
0 Reception will be
permitted
Only valid in cases
where the
designated number
reception refusal
setting (FAX) is
refused.
4 Not used 0
5, 6 Number of dial call pages at
times of quick online
transmission
1 page 0 0 0 1 page
1 page 0 1 0
2 pages 1 0
3 pages 1 1
7 Paper selection when
reception printing (LTR/A4)
1: Priority on LTR 0: Priority on LTR/A4
reduction rate
0 Priority on LTR/A4
reduction rate
8 Not used 0
79
|
80
1 - 8 Not used 0
81 1 - 8 Not used 0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
82 1 - 8 Not used "00000100": North America/China/Thailand/
Malaysia/Philippine/Taiwan/Rusia
"00001000": Singapore/Indonesia/India/
Hong Kong/Middle East
"00100100": Other3
"00101000": New Zealand/South Africa
"01100100": Australia
83 1 - 8 Not used "00000000": North America/Australia/
New Zealand/China/Singapore/Indonesia/
Thailand/Malaysia/India/Philippine/Hong
Kong/Taiwan/Middle East/Rusia/South Africa
SW
No.
Bit
No.
System
settings
84 1 - 8 Not used 0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
85 1 - 5 Reception gain correction Setting range 0 (+6.0dBm) to 24 (-6.0dBm)
Binary input -0.5dBm intervals
0 0.0dBm
1
1
0
0
6 - 8 Not used 0
0
0
86 1 - 4 Not used 0
0
0
0
5 - 8 Flag detection byte count Setting range
Binary input
0 to 15byte
1byte intervals
0 4byte When set to "0000,"
set.
1
0
0
87 1, 2 Minimum flag count
between frames
2-flag 0 0 0 2-flag
3-flag 0 1 0
4-flag 1 0
5-flag 1 1
3 Not used 0
4 Ring detection signal select 1: Silicon DAA-RGDT
signal
0: Ring detection circuit 0 Ring detection
circuit
5 V.17 carrier frequency 1: 1700Hz 0: 1800Hz 0 1800Hz
6 V.33 carrier frequency 1: 1700Hz 0: 1800Hz 0 1800Hz
7, 8 V17/V33/V29/V27terTCF
reception judgment EQM
threshold values
0x20 0 0 1 0x58
0x40 0 1 0
0x58 1 0
0x7f 1 1
88 1, 2 Primary channel foul back
EQM threshold value at
times of V.34 reception
0x20 0 0 1 0x58
0x40 0 1 0
0x58 1 0
0x7f 1 1
3 - 8 Not used 1
1
0
1
0
0
89 1 - 4 Symbol speed selection
threshold 1 (Allowable
range for telephone line
characteristics distortion
level)
Setting range 0 (-6dBm) to 15 (+6dBm)
Binary input 0, 1, 2: -6dBm
3 to 13: 1dBm intervals
14: 5dBm 15: 6dBm
0 -3.0dBm
1
0
1
5 - 8 Symbol speed selection
threshold 2 (Minimum S/N
allowable range level)
Setting range 0 (-6dBm) to 15 (+6dBm)
Binary input 0, 1, 2: -6dBm
3 to 13: 1dBm intervals
14: 5dBm 15: 6dBm
1 0.0dBm
0
0
0
90 1 - 4 Primary channel
communication speed
selection threshold value
Setting range 0 (-8dB) to 15 (+7dB)
Binary input 1dBm intervals
1 0.0dBm
0
0
0
5 - 8 High speed CD OFF fixing
time
Setting range 0 (150ms) to 15 (1650ms)
Binary input 100ms intervals
"0000": 150ms
(North America/
Australia/Norway/
Switcherland/Austria/
New Zealand/China/
Thailand/Malaysia/
India/Philippine/
Hong Kong/Taiwan/
Middle East/Other3)
"0010": 350ms
(Other country)
SW
No.
Bit
No.
System
settings
91 1, 2 LVCS monitoring cycle 0ms (Do not monitor) 0 0 1 20ms
10ms 0 1 0
20ms 1 0
30ms 1 1
3 - 8 Not used 0
0
0
0
0
0
92 1 - 4 External connection volume Setting range 0: 0dBm
0 to 8: -3.0dBm intervals
15: (mute)
0 -12.0dBm Remote selection
sound 1
0
0
5 - 8 Not used 0
0
0
0
93
|
94
1 - 8 Not used 0
95 1 - 8 Not used 1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
96 1 - 8 Not used 0
97 1 - 8 Not used 0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
98 1 - 5 Not used 1
1
0
1
0
6 Setting of timeout
monitoring between frames
0: Monitor 1: Do not monitor 0 Monitor
SW
No.
Bit
No.
System
settings
98 7, 8 Modem lightning protection
measures
0 second 0 0 "00": 0 second
(North America/
New Zealand/China/
Thailand/Malaysia/
Kong/Taiwan/Middle
East/Other3/Rusia)
"01": 20 second
(Other country)
20 seconds 0 1
30 seconds 1 0
40 seconds 1 1
99 1 - 8 Not used 0
100 1 - 8 CNG detection completion
time
Setting range 0: Unlimited
1 to 255 seconds
0 45 seconds
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
101
|
108
1 - 8 Not used 0
SW
No.
Bit
No.
System
settings
109 1 - 8 Not used "10001010": U.K./France/Germany/Rusia
110 1 - 8 Not used 0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
111 1 - 8 Not used 1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
112 1 - 8 Not used 0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
113 1 - 8 Not used 1
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
114 1 - 8 Not used 0
115 1 - 8 Not used "10010000": South Africa
116 1 - 8 Not used 0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
117 1 - 8 Not used "00001010": North America/China/
Singapore/Thailand/Malaysia/Philippine/
Hong Kong/Middle East/Other3
"00001011": Australia/New Zealand/India/
Taiwan/Rusia
118 1 - 8 Not used "00000010": North America/Taiwan/
Middle East/Other3
"00010010": China/Hong Kong
"00110010": India
"01010010": Indonesia/Thailand/Malaysia/
Philippine
"01100010": Singapore/South Africa
"10100010": Australia/Rusia
119 1 - 8 Not used "00001011": North America/Indonesia/
Philippine/Taiwan/Middle East/Other3/Rusia
"00101011": Australia/New Zealand/China/
Singapore/Thailand/Malaysia/India/
Hong Kong
SW
No.
Bit
No.
System
settings
120 1 - 8 Not used 0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
121 1 - 8 Not used "00111000": Other3/Rusia
"01011001": North America
"01101000": New Zealand/China/Singapore/
Thailand/Philippine
"01111000": Malaysia/Taiwan
"10001000": Indonesia/Hong Kong/
Middle East/South Africa
"10011000": India
122 1 - 8 Not used "01001011": Malaysia/Taiwan/South Africa
"01101001": New Zealand/India
"10010110": China/Singapore/Thailand/Hong
Kong
123 1 - 8 Not used "00010000": France
124 1 - 8 Not used "10100101": China/Thailand/Hong Kong
125 1 - 8 Not used 0
126 1 - 8 Not used "00000000": North America/New Zealand/
China/Indonesia/Thailand/Malaysia/
Philippine/Hong Kong/Taiwan/Middle East/
Other3
"00000010": India
"00000011": Australia/Singapore/
South Africa
127 1 - 8 Not used "00000100": China/Indonesia/Thailand/
Malaysia/Philippine/Hong Kong
"00000110": North America/Australia/
Taiwan/Middle East/Other3
"00001010": New Zealand
"00100100": Singapore/India/South Africa
"01000110": Rusia
128 1 - 8 Not used "00100000": Australia
129 1 - 8 Not used "01110100": Sweden/Indonesia
130 1 - 8 Not used "00000000": Australia/China/Indonesia/
Thailand/Malaysia/India/Philippine/
Hong Kong/Taiwan/Middle East/Other3
"00000010": Rusia
"00010000": North America/Singapore
"00110010": Sweden
"01000000": New Zealand
Thailand/Malaysia/India/Philippine/
Hong Kong/Taiwan/Middle East/Other3
132 1 - 8 Not used 0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
SW
No.
Bit
No.
System
settings
133 1 - 8 Not used "00000100": North America/China/Thailand/
Malaysia/Philippine/Taiwan/Rusia
"00001000": Singapore/Indonesia/India/
Hong Kong/Middle East
"00100100": Other3
"00101000": New Zealand/South Africa
Thailand/Malaysia/India/Philippine/Hong
Kong/Taiwan/Middle East/Rusia/South Africa
135 1 - 8 Not used 0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
136 1 - 8 Not used 0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
137 1 - 8 Not used 0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
138 1 - 8 Not used 0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
139 1 - 8 Not used 1
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
140 1 - 8 Not used 0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
Norway/Switcherland/Austria/New Zealand/
China/Singapore/Indonesia/Thailand/
Malaysia/India/Philippine/Hong Kong/
Taiwan/Middle East/Other3
SW
No.
Bit
No.
System
settings
142 1 - 8 Not used 1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
143
|
144
1 - 8 Not used 0
145 1 - 8 Not used 1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
146
|
153
1 - 8 Not used 0
154 1 Addition of Content-X-
CIAJWNETFAX field (in
internet Fax send)
1: Add IGNORE 0: Do not add field 0 Do not add
2 Nighttime FAX mode setting
<when Internet Fax
reception is not set>
1: Do not enter the
nighttime FAX mode
0: Enter the nighttime
FAX mode
0 Enter the
nighttime FAX
mode
For internet Fax
reception setting
YES, refer to
SW154-3.
3 Pseudo-nighttime mode
setting <when Internet Fax
reception is set>
1: Do not enter the
pseudo-nighttime mode
(enter the nighttime
mode)
0: Enter the pseudo-
nighttime mode (do not
enter the nighttime
mode)
0 Enter the pseudo-
nighttime mode
For internet Fax
reception setting
NO, refer to
SW154-2.
4 Internet Fax
reception
setting
Processing at times of mail
reception (when the
Content-X-CIAJWNETFAX
field is not yet received)
1: Print the main text of
mails
0: Do not print mail
letters
0 Do not print Exclude confirmed
sent mails
5 Internet Fax
reception
setting
Setting of reduced printing
when receiving A3 by
Internet Fax
1: Discard 0: Reduce 1 Discard When in reduction,
94% for all.
6 Internet Fax
reception
setting
Setting of reduced printing
when receiving letters by
Internet Fax
1: Discard 0: Reduce 1 Discard
7 Setting of text printing when
receiving mails without
attached files
1: Print the main text of
mails
0: Do not print mail
letters
0 Do not print Print process only
for mail text without
an attached file
(Remains Error for
the communication
result.)
8 Resolution type of internet
Fax
1: mm type 0: inch type 0 inch type
155 1 - 6 Not used 1
1
0
0
1
0
7 Selection of the Internet Fax
date and transmission
source print language
<format>
1: North American
format
0: Follows the date
format setting.
0 Follows the date
format setting.
8 Report output (when
reception is refused)
<Internet Fax only>
1: Output 0: Do not output 0 Do not output FAX is set by
means of SW72-2.
Irrespective of
"Always print" and
"Error," the results
sheet is not printed.
SW
No.
Bit
No.
System
settings
(*): Change can be made in the system setting for theMX-5500N/6200N/7000N only.
156 1 Display setting at times of
NW trouble
1: Do not display trouble 0: Display trouble 0 Display trouble
2 Job log memory at times of
successive communication
1: Treat as 1 successive
communication
0: Treat each
communication as 1
0 Treat each
communication as
1
3 Valid/Invalid setting of
Internet Fax A4, letter
threshold
1: Invalid 0: Valid 1 Invalid
4 - 7 Not used 0
0
1
0
8 Setting of mail reception
method
1: SMTP 0: POP3 0 POP3
157 1 - 5 Not used 0
0
0
0
0
6 (*) Setting of transmitted data
upper limit value (FTP/
desktop/shared folder)
1: ON 0: OFF 0 OFF
7, 8 (*) Transmitted data upper limit
(FTP/desktop/shared folder)
50Mbyte 0 0 0 150Mbyte
150Mbyte 0 1 1
300Mbyte 1 0
158 1 - 8 Not used 0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
159 1 Not used 0
2 (WEB)
Control
setting
Received data E-mail
forwarding
1: Valid 0: Invalid 0 Invalid
3 (WEB)
Control
setting
Prohibition of forwarded
table registration
1: Prohibited 0: Permitted 0 Permitted
4 (WEB)
Control
setting
Prohibition of forwarded
table correction
5 (WEB)
Control
setting
Prohibition of forwarding
permission revision
6 (WEB)
Control
setting
Received data print
conditions in user transfer
1: Print on error 0: Always print 1 Print on error
7 Not used 0
8 Received data print
conditions at Administrator
transmission
1: Print on error 0: Always print 1 Print on error
160 1 - 8 Not used 0
161 1 - 6 Not used 0
0
0
0
0
0
7 Pseudo nighttime setting
<External accumulation
mode> Only for OSA
supporting farm
1: Do not enter the
pseudo-nighttime mode
(enter the nighttime
mode)
0: Enter the pseudo-
nighttime mode (do not
enter the nighttime
mode)
0 Enter the pseudo-
nighttime mode
8 Not used 0
162
|
170
1 - 8 Not used 0
SW
No.
Bit
No.
System
settings
MX-7000N SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 8 1
MX-7000N
Sv` Huuuu!

[8] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE
1. Self diag
When a trouble occurs in the machine or when the life of a consum-
able part is nearly expired or when the life is expired, the machine
detects and displays it on the display section. This allows the user
and the serviceman to take the suitable action. In case of a trouble,
this feature notifies the occurrence of a trouble and stops the
machine to minimize the damage.
A. Function and purpose
1) Securing safety. (The machine is stopped on detection of a
trouble.)
2) The damage to the machine is minimized. (The machine is
stopped on detection of a trouble.)
3) By displaying the trouble content, the trouble position can be
quickly identified. (This allows to perform an accurate repair,
improving the repair efficiency.)
4) Preliminary warning of running out of consumable parts allows
to arrange for new parts in advance of running out. (This
avoids stopping of the machine due to running out the a con-
sumable part.)
B. Self diag message kinds
The self diag messages are classified as shown in the table below.
C. Self diag operation and related work flow
The machine always monitors its own state.
When the machine recognizes a trouble, it stops the operation and
displays the trouble message.
A warning message is displayed when a consumable part life is
nearly expired or is expired.
When a warning message is displayed, the machine may be or
may not be stopped.
The trouble messages and the warning messages are displayed by
the LCD.
Some trouble messages are automatically cleared when the trou-
ble is repaired. Some other troubles must be cleared by a simula-
tion.
Some warning messages of consumable parts are automatically
cleared when the trouble is repaired. Some other warning mes-
sages must be cleared by a simulation.
Class 1 User Warning of troubles which can be recovered by
the user. (Paper jam, consumable part life
expiration, etc.)
Serviceman Warning of troubles which can be recovered only
by a serviceman. (Motor trouble, maintenance,
etc.)
Other
Class 2 Warning Warning to the user, not a machine trouble
(Preliminary warning of life expiration of a
consumable part, etc.)
Trouble Warning of a machine trouble. The machine is
stopped.
Other
Troubleshoot the cause.
YES
NO
Detects/analyzes
the content.
Trouble/Warning
Warning
Trouble
The machine is stopped.
The content is displayed.
Trouble/Warning
Warning A consumable
part has reached
its lifetime.
Trouble
Replace or supply
the consumable part.
Cancel the self-
diagnostic message with
the diagnostics
(test commands).
Reset
Standby state
Monitors the machine
conditions.
Repair
D. Breakdown sequence
(1) Breakdown mode list
There are following cases of the breakdown mode.
Kind of trouble
Judgment
block
Trouble code
Operatable mode
Copy scan
(including
interruption)
Scan
push
Scan pull
Scan
To
HDD
FAX
send
FAX
print
Print
List
print
Notification
to FAST
host
FAX board trouble MFP F6 1 1 1
(North
America
only)
HDD trouble E7 (03)
SCU communication
trouble
E7 (80), A0-02
PCU communication
trouble
E7 (90), A0-01
L8-20

Backup battery voltage fall U1 (01)
Printer port system trouble F9 (00)
* 13

* 14

Controller fan motor
trouble
L4-30
Connection trouble (MFP
detection)
E7 (60 65),
A0 (10 12, 20)

Serial number
discrepancy
U2-30
Memory error (included
not installed the expansion
RAM)
U2 (00, 05, 10,
11, 22, 23, 24,
25)

HDD registration data sum
error
U2 (50)
Image memory trouble,
decode error
E7 (00, 01, 05,
06, 09)

Personal counter not-
installed trouble
PC---
Network error Not displayed.
(Only the
message for
each trouble is
displayed.)

Operatable
but send
NG
Operatable
but send
NG

Laser trouble PCU E7 (20, 28, 29),
L6 (10)

* 10

Connection trouble (PCU
detection)
E7 (50), A0 (21)
PCU section troubles
(motor, fusing, etc.)
C1 (01, 02),
C4 (00, 01),
F2 (02, 04, 05,
40, 64, 70, 74),
H2, H3, H4, H5,
H7 (10 12, 14),
L4 (excluding L4-
30), L8 (01, 02),
U2 (90, 91)

* 10

PCU color system
troubles
E7 (21), F2 (41
43, 65 67, 71
73, 75 77)
* 9

* 9

* 9

* 9

* 9

* 9

* 9

* 9
* 10
Paper feed tray 1 trouble F3-12 3 3 3 3

* 10

* 10

* 10

* 10

Paper feed tray 5 trouble U6 (09, 20 24,
51)
3 3 3 3
* 10

Staple trouble F1 (10) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
* 10

After-process trouble F1 (excluding 10) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
* 10

Inserter trouble (except for
communication trouble)
F1 (61, 62) 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
* 10

Other troubles EE (EL, EU, EC)
Process control trouble
(PCU detection)
F2 (39, 44, 45,
49 53, 58, 78)

* 12

: Operation enabled, : Operation disabled
1: The operation is enabled in a line other than the trouble line.
3: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled with a tray other than the trouble tray.
4: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in a section other than the trouble paper exit section.
5: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in a section other than the inserter connection paper exit port.
6: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in the OC mode.
7: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in the single surface scan mode.
* 9: When the color mode is set to Disable in the "Color mode disable setting" of the system setting, the operation is enabled in the Black
mode.
* 10: Since communication is enabled, reception can be transferred.
* 12: Trouble display message is displayed in 2 lines. (Example: Ready to copy. F2 trouble)
* 13: When FIERY option is installed, PCL will not operate. (Machine specifications) (Exclusive)
* 14: Only FIERY option list print (self print) is disabled.
* Trouble mode process
Machine operation enabled under some conditions.
The operations excluding the trouble mode are enabled (READY). For the mode where operations are disabled, only setting is enabled and
the operation disable message is made.
(NOT READY)
(Display) A dialog is displayed when a trouble occurs. For the mode where operations are enabled, [OK] button is added to the message.
When operations are disabled, [OK] button is not displayed, and the message is displayed until the trouble is cancelled.
* For 1, 3, 5, 6, 7, perform the following procedures. (In order to avoid patent interference.)
When a trouble is detected during a job, the machine operation is terminated. (Trouble display/without [OK] key)
When a trouble is detected during other than a JOB, the trouble display is not made and the trouble position cannot be selected. (The dis-
play is not turned off. Machine/Button)
Troubles which disable the machine operations
The trouble display is always made, and all the modes cannot be set.
Writing to the trouble memory
Writing of a same trouble to the trouble memory can be selected with SIM26-35. When this simulation is set, any trouble is written to the trou-
ble memory unconditionally.
(Sim26-35)
0: Only once. If same as the previous one, it is not saved. (Default)
1: Any time. Though same as the previous one, it is saved.
Connection trouble (SCU
detection)
SCU E7 (70, 75),
A0 (22)

SCU color system
troubles
UC (02)
Document control trouble UC (20)
EEPROM system U2 (80, 81)
Scanner section troubles
(mirror motor, lens, copy
lamp)
L1, L3
CCD troubles (shading,
etc.)
E7 (10, 11, 14)
DSPF trouble U5 6 6 6 6 6
DSPF back surface CCD
troubles (shading, etc.)
E6 (10, 11, 14) 7 7 7 7 7
(Only history is left.) (MFP
detection)
MFP F2 (80 87, 90)
(Only history is left.) (PCU
detection)
PCU F2 (92 94)
Kind of trouble
Judgment
block
Trouble code
Operatable mode
Copy scan
(including
interruption)
Scan
push
Scan pull
Scan
To
HDD
FAX
send
FAX
print
Print
List
print
Notification
to FAST
host
(2) Power ON trouble detection sequence.
When the power is turned ON and each trouble of H3, H4, H5, U1, U2, U6 (09) is stored, it is judged as a trouble immediately.
* For A0 and E7 troubles (connection troubles), only the connection trouble information is saved, and they are not regarded as save troubles.
(There is no way to delete the communication trouble information.) (Detected every time when the power is turned ON.)
2. Trouble code list
Trouble code
Trouble code content Remarks
Trouble
detection
Mechanism Option Electricity FAX Supply Main
code
Sub
code
A0 01 PCU ROM abnormality MFP
02 SCU ROM abnormality MFP
10 Controller ROM error MFP
11 IF version discrepancy (CTL-PCU) MFP
12 IF version discrepancy (CTL-SCU) MFP
20 Machine level error (CTL detection) MFP
21 Machine level error (PCU detection) PCU
22 Machine level error (SCU detection) SCU
C1 01 Charger cleaner trouble PCU
02 Charger cleaner motor lock PCU
C4 00 PTC (Pre-Transfer Charger) high voltage output trouble PCU
01 PTC (Pre-Transfer Charger) cleaner trouble PCU
CE 00 Communication error other than CE-01 08 The trouble
code is not
displayed,
but only the
message for
each trouble
is displayed.
MFP
01 Network controller trouble MFP
02 Not-specified mail/FTP server error MFP
03 Communication error in image send MFP
04 FTP server account name or authentication password input
error
MFP
05 FTP server directory input error MFP
06 POP3 server access error MFP
07 POP3 server authentication check error MFP
08 POP3 server timeout error MFP
E6 10 Back-face shading trouble (Black correction) (DSPF) SCU
11 Shading trouble (White correction) (DSPF) SCU
14 Back-face SCAN-ASIC trouble (DSPF) SCU
E7 00 System memory access error MFP
01 System data trouble MFP
03 HDD trouble MFP
04 HDD-ASIC trouble (DSK model only) MFP
05 Local memory access error MFP
(To the corresponding
block)
MFP event
manager
Communication of trouble status
[Trouble code] [Trouble status]
sim task
Trouble cancel command
Trouble cancel status is communicated.
Each block
When the power is turned on,
check is made in each block.
Trouble cancel
(The trouble memory is
initialized.)
(Power ON sequence)
H3, H4, U1, U2, U6 trouble check

(Trouble cancel sequence)
When executing SIM 13, 14, 15, 16

Trouble check is made in each block when initializing
and data are sent to the MFPcnt.
H3, H4, H5: Saved in the MFPcnt.
U1: Saved in the MFPcnt.
U2: Saved in each block.
U6-09: Saved in the PCU.
SIM 13: U1 trouble cancel
SIM 14: H3, H4, H5 (Color mode
cancel)
SIM 15: LCC (U6) trouble cancel
SIM 16: U2 trouble cancel
E7 06 Decode error trouble: Compression decode error
(A compression file cannot decompressed.)
MFP
09 Local memory combination error MFP
10 Shading trouble (Black correction) SCU
11 Shading trouble (White correction) SCU
14 SCAN-ASIC trouble SCU
20 LSU BD detection trouble PCU
21 LSU LD deterioration trouble PCU
28 LSU control ASIC connection abnormality PCU
29 LSU-ASIC frequency abnormality PCU
50 Engine connection trouble PCU
60 Controller connection trouble (Engine detection) MFP
61 Controller connection trouble (Engine) MFP
62 Controller connection trouble (Scanner) MFP
65 PWB information sum error (Controller detection) MFP
70 Scanner connection trouble SCU
75 PWB information sum error (Scanner detection) SCU
80 Communication trouble between the MFP and the scanner
(MFP detection)
MFP
90 Communication trouble between the MFP and the PCU
(MFP detection)
MFP
EE EC Auto developer adjustment trouble (The sample level for
every rotation is other than 128 10.)
PCU
EL Auto developer adjustment trouble (Overtoner abnormality) PCU
EU Auto developer adjustment trouble (Under-toner
abnormality)
PCU
F1 00 Finisher communication trouble (Machine side detection) PCU
03 Finisher oscillation motor trouble PCU
08 Finisher stapler shift motor trouble PCU
10 Finisher staple motor abnormality PCU
15 Finisher tray lift motor abnormality PCU
19 Finisher pre-alignment motor abnormality PCU
20 Finisher after-alignment motor abnormality PCU
21 Finisher interface fan motor abnormality PCU
22 Finisher rear edge assist motor trouble PCU
23 Shutter trouble PCU
30 Communication trouble between the finisher and the saddle PCU
31 Finisher folding motor trouble PCU
32 Communication trouble between the finisher and the punch
unit
PCU
33 Finisher punch shift motor trouble PCU
34 Finisher punch motor trouble PCU
37 Finisher backup RAM trouble PCU
38 Finisher punch backup RAM trouble PCU
41 Positioning plate motor trouble PCU
42 Guide motor trouble PCU
43 Side alignment motor trouble PCU
44 Stitch motor rear trouble PCU
45 Stitch motor front trouble PCU
46 Paper pushing motor trouble PCU
50 Finisher incompatibility trouble PCU
51 Sensor connector connection trouble PCU
52 Micro SW trouble PCU
60 Communication trouble between the finisher and the
inserter
PCU
61 Inserter EEPROM trouble PCU
62 Inserter reverse sensor trouble PCU
F2 02 Toner supply abnormality (K2) PCU
04 Toner cartridge improper (K2) PCU
05 Toner cartridge CRUM error (K2) PCU
39 Process thermistor trouble PCU
40 Toner empty sensor abnormality (K) PCU
41 Toner empty sensor abnormality (C) PCU
42 Toner empty sensor abnormality (M) PCU
43 Toner empty sensor abnormality (Y) PCU
44 Black exclusive image density sensor trouble (Transfer belt
surface reflection ratio abnormality)
PCU
45 Color exclusive image density sensor trouble (Calibration
plate surface reflection ratio abnormality)
PCU
49 LSU thermistor trouble PCU
Trouble code
Trouble
detection
code
Sub
code
F2 50 K phase sensor sensing trouble PCU
51 CL phase sensor sensing trouble (C) PCU
52 CL phase sensor sensing trouble (M) PCU
53 CL phase sensor sensing trouble (Y) PCU
58 Process humidity sensor trouble PCU
64 Toner supply abnormality (K) PCU
65 Toner supply abnormality (C) PCU
66 Toner supply abnormality (M) PCU
67 Toner supply abnormality (Y) PCU
70 Toner cartridge improper (K) PCU
71 Toner cartridge improper (C) PCU
72 Toner cartridge improper (M) PCU
73 Toner cartridge improper (Y) PCU
74 Toner cartridge CRUM error (K) PCU
75 Toner cartridge CRUM error (C) PCU
76 Toner cartridge CRUM error (M) PCU
77 Toner cartridge CRUM error (Y) PCU
78 Registration exclusive image density sensor trouble
(Transfer belt surface reflection ratio abnormality)
PCU
80 Half tone process control 1st patch reference value trouble
(K)
MFP
(C)
MFP
(M)
MFP
(Y)
MFP
84 Half tone process control 2nd patch reference value trouble
(K)
MFP
(C)
MFP
(M)
MFP
(Y)
MFP
92 High-density process control density correction error (C) PCU
93 High-density process control density correction error (M) PCU
94 High-density process control density correction error (Y) PCU
F3 12 Tray 1 lift-up trouble PCU
22 Tray 2 lift-up trouble PCU
F6 00 Communication trouble between the MFP and the FAX Refer to FAX manual for details
01 FAX board EEPROM read/write error
04 FAX MODEM operation trouble
21 Combination error between the TEL/LIU PWB and the FAX
soft switch
30 Access error to power controller on the FAX board (FAX
detection)
97 FAX PWB incompatibility trouble
98 Combination error between the FAX-BOX PWB destination
information and the machine destination information.
F9 00 Communication trouble between the controller and the
printer controller (FIERY option)
MFP
H2 00 Detection thermistor open (TH1_AD2) of the non-contact
thermistor
PCU
01 Lower thermistor open (TH_LM) PCU
02 Sub thermistor open (TH_US) PCU
03 Non-contact thermistor compensation thermistor open
(TH1_AD1)
PCU
04 External heating thermistor open (TH_EX1) PCU
05 Fusing external heating thermistor open (TH_EX2) PCU
H3 00 Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_UM) PCU
01 Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_LM) PCU
02 Sub thermistor fusing section high temperature trouble
(TH_US)
PCU
04 External heating thermistor high temperature trouble
(TH_EX1)
PCU
05 Fusing external thermistor high temperature trouble
(TH_EX2)
PCU
H4 00 Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_UM_AD2) PCU
Trouble code
Trouble
detection
code
Sub
code
H4 01 Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_LM) PCU
02 Sub thermistor fusing section low temperature trouble
(TH_US)
PCU
04 External heating thermistor fusing section low temperature
trouble (TH_EX1)
PCU
30 Detection thermistor input abnormality (TH_UM) PCU
H5 01 5 continuous detection of POD1 not-reached jam PCU
H7 10 Low temperature detection during the temperature control
reset operation after stopping the alarm in a JOB (HL_UM)
PCU
11 Low temperature detection during the temperature control
reset operation after stopping the alarm in a JOB (HL_LM)
PCU
reset operation after stopping the alarm in a JOB (HL_US)
PCU
reset operation after stopping the alarm in a JOB (HL_EX1)
PCU
L1 00 Mirror feed trouble SCU
L3 00 Mirror return trouble SCU
L4 02 Paper feed motor lock trouble PCU
03 Fusing motor lock trouble PCU
04 Developing motor trouble (BK) PCU
05 Developing motor trouble (CL) PCU
06 Transfer belt separation position sensor trouble PCU
08 Waste toner motor lock PCU
09 Resist motor lock PCU
12 Secondary transfer separation trouble PCU
13 Fusing external heating separation trouble PCU
30 Controller fan motor trouble MFP
31 Paper exit cooling fan F lock PCU
32 Power cooling fan 1 lock PCU
34 LSU cooling fan trouble PCU
35 Fusing exhaust fan lock PCU
36 Fusing suction fan lock PCU
37 Charger cooling fan lock PCU
38 Machine ventilation fan center lock PCU
39 Machine ventilation fan right lock PCU
40 Ozone fan 1 lock PCU
43 Paper exit cooling fan center lock PCU
44 Power cooling fan 2 lock PCU
L6 10 Polygon motor lock detection PCU
L8 01 No full wave signal PCU
02 Full wave signal width abnormality PCU
20 Power controller communication trouble MFP
PC -- Personal counter not installed MFP
U1 01 Battery trouble MFP
U2 00 EEPROM read/write error (MFP detection) MFP
05 HDD/SRAM/EEPROM data discrepancy MFP
10 SRAM user authentication index check sum error MFP
11 EEPROM check sum error (MFP detection) MFP
22 SRAM memory check sum error MFP
23 MFPC section SRAM memory individual data check sum
error
MFP
24 SRAM memory user authentication counter check sum
error
MFP
25 Flash memory user authentication counter check sum error MFP
30 Serial number data discrepancy (MFP PCU) MFP
50 HDD section individual data check sum error (MFP) MFP
80 EEPROM read/write error (SCU detection) SCU
81 Adjustment value check sum error (SCU detection) SCU
90 EEPROM read/write error (PCU detection) PCU
91 Adjustment value check sum error (PCU detection) PCU
U5 00 SPF communication trouble SCU
16 SPF fan motor trouble SCU
30 SPF tray lift-up trouble SCU
31 SPF tray lift-down trouble SCU
U6 09 LCC lift motor trouble PCU
20 LCC communication trouble PCU
21 LCC transport motor trouble PCU
22 LCC 24V power abnormality PCU
Trouble code
Trouble
detection
code
Sub
code
3. Details of trouble code

A0-01 PCU ROM abnormality

A0-02 SCU ROM abnormality

A0-10 Controller ROM error

A0-11 IF version discrepancy (CTL-PCU)

A0-12 IF version discrepancy (CTL-SCU)

A0-20 Machine level error (CTL detection)

A0-21 Machine level error (PCU detection)

A0-22 Machine level error (SCU detection)

C1-01 Charger cleaner trouble

C1-02 Charger cleaner motor lock
U6 23 LCC tray descending trouble (reverse winding detection) PCU
24 LCC tray lock detection trouble PCU
51 LCC incompatibility trouble PCU
UC 02 CPT-ASIC trouble SCU
20 Document control module trouble SCU
21 DOCC (Document Control) PWB not-detected (DSK model
only)
SCU
Trouble code
Trouble
detection
code
Sub
code
Trouble content PCU ROM content trouble
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause Firmware upgrade is not made properly due to
power OFF, etc.
Check and
remedy
Use SIM49-1 to upgrade the firmware.
Trouble content SCU ROM content trouble
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause Some part of SFU is not upgraded during
upgrading of the firmware.
Check and
remedy
Use SIM49-1 to execute the firmware.
Trouble content SFU combination error in the controller
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause SFU upgrade was not properly made when
upgrading the firmware.
Check and
remedy
Controller firmware upgrade
Trouble content Combination error between CTL and PCU
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause Combination error between CTL and PCU
Check and
remedy
Check the firmware combination between CTL and
PCU.
Trouble content Combination error between CTL and SCU
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause Combination error between CTL and SCU
Check and
remedy
Check the firmware combination between CTL and
SCU.
Trouble content Combination error between the machine
production/remodeling and the firmware
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause Combination error between the machine
Check and
remedy
Check the combination between the machine
production/remodeling and the firmware.
Section PCU
Check and
remedy
Section SCU
Check and
remedy
Trouble content The charger cleaner does not complete shift
operation during the specified time.
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Charger unit trouble
Check and
remedy
Check the charger unit
Case 2 Cause RE sensor, HP sensor, charger cleaner motor, and
PCU PWB troubles, harness connection trouble
Check and
remedy
1) Check the sensor, the motor, and the PCU
PWB.
2) Check the harness connection between the
sensor, the motor and the PCU PWB.
Trouble content When the charger cleaner motor is rotating, an
excess motor current over the specified level is
detected.
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Charger cleaner motor trouble
Check and
remedy
Check the charger cleaner motor
Case 2 Cause PCU PWB trouble, harness connection trouble
Check and
remedy
1) Check the PCU PWB.
2) Check harness connection between the
motor and the PCU PWB.

C4-00 PTC (Pre-Transfer Charger) high
voltage output trouble

C4-01 PTC (Pre-Transfer Charger) cleaner
trouble

CE-00 Communication error other than
CE-01 08

CE-01 Network controller trouble

CE-02 Not-specified mail/FTP server error

CE-03 Communication error in image send

CE-04 FTP server account name or
authentication password input error
Trouble content A trouble signal is detected during PTC high
voltage output.
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Charger wire breakage
Check and
remedy
Check the charger unit.
Case 2 Cause PTC high voltage PWB trouble
Check and
remedy
Replace the PTC high voltage PWB.
Case 3 Cause PCU PWB trouble
Check and
remedy
Replace the PCU PWB.
Case 4 Cause Connector and harness connection trouble
Check and
remedy
Check connection of the connector and the
harness.
Trouble content Shifting the PTC cleaner is not completed within
the specified time.
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Cleaner mechanism trouble
Check and
remedy
Check the cleaner mechanism.
Case 2 Cause HP sensor trouble
Check and
remedy
Replace the HP sensor.
Case 3 Cause Cleaner motor trouble
Check and
remedy
Replace the cleaner motor.
Check and
remedy
Check and
remedy
harness.
Trouble content Another communication error occurs.
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause Network cable connection trouble
Check and
remedy
Check to insure that the network cable is securely
connected.
Trouble content Network controller and its peripheral circuit trouble
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause Network controller and its peripheral circuit trouble
Check and
remedy
1) Check the network controller and its
peripheral circuit.
2) Output the NIC Config Page and check the
NIC version.
3) Replace the MFPcnt PWB.
Trouble content The specified mail server, FTP server, and SMB
server are not found
Section MFP
Check and
remedy
connected.
Case 2 Cause Network setup trouble
Check and
remedy
1) Check that the connected network supports
TCP/IP protocol.
2) Check from Web page that the Primary/
Secondary E-mail Server Address or the FTP
server/Desktop PC/SMB server address as
the destination is properly set.
3) When the above address is described with
the Hostname, check that the DNS server is
properly set or not.
Case 3 Cause SMTP server/FTP server/NST/SMB server trouble
Check and
remedy
Check the SMTP server/FTP server/NST/SMB
server for any trouble.
Trouble content The specified server does not respond during
image send.
Section MFP
Check and
remedy
connected.
Case 2 Cause SMTP server/FTP server/NST/SMB server trouble
Check and
remedy
Check the SMTP server/FTP server/NST/SMB
server for any trouble.
Trouble content The entered FTP server account name or the
authentication password is invalid.
The entered SMB server log-in name or the
password is invalid.
Section MFP
Check and
remedy
connected.
Case 2 Cause The FTP server account name registered as the
destination or the password for the account is
incorrect.
Check and
remedy
Check to insure that the FTP server account name
registered as the destination or the password for
the account is correct.
Case 3 Cause The SMB server account name registered as the
incorrect.
Check and
remedy
Check to insure that the SMB server account name
registered as the destination or the password for
the account is correct.

CE-05 FTP server directory input error

CE-06 POP3 server access error

CE-07 POP3 server authentication check
error

CE-08 POP3 server timeout error

E6-10 Back-face shading trouble (Black
correction) (DSPF)

E6-11 Shading trouble (White correction)
(DSPF)

E6-14 Back-face SCAN-ASIC trouble (DSPF)

E7-00 System memory access error
Trouble content The entered FTP server directory is invalid.
The entered SMB server folder is invalid.
Section MFP
Check and
remedy
connected.
Case 2 Cause The FTP server account name registered as the
incorrect.
Check and
remedy
Check to insure that there exits the FTP server
directory registered as the destination.
Case 3 Cause The SMB server account name registered as the
destination or the password for it is incorrect.
Check and
remedy
Check to insure that there exists the SMB server
folder registered as the destination.
Trouble content The specified mail server (POP3) is not found.
(POP3 server access error)
Section MFP
Check and
remedy
connected.
Case 2 Cause Network setup error
Check and
remedy
1) Check that the connected network supports
TCP/IP protocol.
2) Check the Web page to insure that the POP3
server address is correctly set.
3) If the above address is described in
Hostname, check to insure that the DNS
server is correctly set.
Case 3 Cause POP3 server trouble
Check and
remedy
Check the POP3 server for any trouble.
Trouble content The entered POP3 server account name or the
authentication password is invalid. (POP3 server
authentication check error)
Section MFP
Check and
remedy
connected.
Case 2 Cause The POP3 server account name or the password
registered for the account is incorrect.
Check and
remedy
Check to insure that the POP3 server account
name or the password for the account is correct.
Trouble content The specified mail server (POP3) does not
respond. (POP3 server timeout error)
Section MFP
Check and
remedy
connected.
Case 2 Cause POP3 server trouble
Check and
remedy
Check the POP3 server for any trouble.
Trouble content CCD black scan level abnormality when the copy
lamp is turned off.
Section SCU
Case 1 Cause Installation error of the CCD unit flat cable
Check and
remedy
Check the installing state of the flat cable to the
CCD unit.
Case 2 Cause CCD unit abnormality
Check and
remedy
Check the CCD unit.
Case 3 Cause DSPF PWB abnormality
Check and
remedy
Check the DSPF PWB.
Trouble content CCD white scan level abnormality when the copy
lamp is on.
Section SCU
Check and
remedy
CCD unit.
Case 2 Cause Dirt on the mirror, the lens, or the reference white
plate.
Check and
remedy
Clean the mirror, the lens, or the reference white
plate.
Case 3 Cause Copy lamp lighting trouble
Check and
remedy
copy lamp unit.
Check and
remedy
Check the CCD unit.
Check and
remedy
Check the DSPF PWB.
Trouble content Written register value cannot be read correctly
Section SCU
Check and
remedy
Check the DSPF PWB.
Trouble content System memory trouble (Tandem memory cannot
be guaranteed.)
Access to system memory cannot be made.
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause Expansion memory installation error
Check and
remedy
Check installation of the system expansion
memory.
Case 2 Cause Garbled data
Check and
remedy
1) Use SIM60-01 to check memory read/write
2) Replace the expansion memory (if installed.)
Case 3 Cause Dirt on the memory pin
Check and
remedy
Clean the memory pin with alcohol.
* When E7-00 is in the following combination where system mem-
ory Slot 2 (inside) and Slot 1 (outside) operate normally but a
hard error occurs.
(Combination of system memory (Slot 1, Slot 2)

E7-01 System data trouble

E7-03 HDD trouble

E7-04 HDD-ASIC trouble (DSK model only)

E7-05 Local memory access error
* Combination where local memory Slot operate normally (Refer to
E7-09) but a hard error occurs.

E7-06 Decode error trouble: Compression
decode error (A compression file
cannot decompressed.)

E7-09 Local memory combination error
* When the following combination (E7-09) where operation is not
performed properly is used.
No.
System memory Operation guarantee
When turning
on the power
Slot 2
(Inside)
Slot 1
(Outside)
Hard Soft
1 Since the
machine is not
booted, the
trouble display is
not made.
2 256MB Normal operation
4 256MB 256MB Normal operation
Trouble content MFP data trouble occurs.
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause MFP image transfer trouble
Check and
remedy
1) Check the connection state of the MFPcnt
PWB connector.
Trouble content HDD connection trouble
File control area data trouble (when FAT is broken)
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause The HDD is not properly installed to the MFPcnt
PWB
Check and
remedy
1) Check installation of the HDD of the MFPcnt
PWB.
2) Check connection of the harness of the
MFPcnt PWB.
3) Use SIM62-2 and -3 to check read/write from/
to the HDD.
Case 2 Cause The HDD does not work properly.
Check and
remedy
Replace the HDD.
Case 3 Cause MFPcnt PWB trouble
Check and
remedy
Replace the MFPcnt PWB.
Trouble content An error occurs in the HDD-ASIC self test when
booting.
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause HDD-ASIC abnormality
Check and
remedy
Check installation of the HDD-ASIC on the MFPcnt
PWB.
Trouble content Local memory cannot be accessed.
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause Local memory installation abnormality
Check and
remedy
Check the installing state of the local memory.
Case 2 Cause Dirt on local memory pin
Check and
remedy
Clean the local memory pin with alcohol.
Case 3 Cause Garbled data
Check and
remedy
1) Use SIM60-01 to check memory read/write.
2) Replace the local memory.
Trouble content A decode error occurs when forming an image.
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause Compression data abnormality
Check and
remedy
1) Check the installing state of the PWB. (PCI
bus)
2) When an error occurs during a FAX job,
check the installation of the FAX PWB. In the
other cases, check the installation of the
MFPcnt PWB and HDD.
Case 2 Cause HDD connection abnormality
Check and
remedy
Check the HDD connection.
Case 3 Cause Data are garbled in image compression/send.
Check and
remedy
1) Check the installation of the PWB. (PCI bus)
2) When an error occurs during a FAX job,
check the installation of the FAX PWB. In the
other cases, check the installation of the
MFPcnt PWB and HDD.
Case 4 Cause MFPcnt PWB abnormality
Check and
remedy
Case 5 Cause Local memory access error
Check and
remedy
Check and execute remedy similarly to E7-05.
Trouble content Combination error of installation of local slot
memory
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause DIMM of other than 1GB is installed to the slot.
Check and
remedy
Check the combination of installed DIMM.
No.
Local memory Operation guarantee When turning on
the power Slot 4 Hard Soft
1 E7-09
2 256MB E7-09
3 512MB E7-09
4 1GB Normal operation
5 1GB or more E7-09

E7-10 Shading trouble (Black correction)

E7-11 Shading trouble (White correction)

E7-14 SCAN-ASIC trouble

E7-20 LSU BD detection trouble

E7-21 LSU LD deterioration trouble

E7-28 LSU control ASIC connection
abnormality

E7-29 LSU-ASIC frequency abnormality

E7-50 Engine connection trouble
Trouble content CCD black scan level abnormality when the copy
lamp is turned off.
Section SCU
Check and
remedy
CCD unit.
Check and
remedy
Check the CCD unit.
Case 3 Cause SCU PWB abnormality
Check and
remedy
Check the SCU PWB.
Trouble content CCD white reference plate scan level abnormality
when the copy lamp is on.
Section SCU
Check and
remedy
CCD unit.
Case 2 Cause Dirt on the mirror, the lens, or the reference white
plate.
Check and
remedy
Clean the mirror, the lens, or the reference white
plate.
Case 3 Cause Copy lamp lighting trouble
Check and
remedy
copy lamp unit.
Check and
remedy
Check the CCD unit.
Check and
remedy
Check the SCU PWB.
Trouble content Written register value cannot be read correctly
Section SCU
Check and
remedy
Check the SCU PWB.
Trouble content LSU BD signal is not detected.
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Disconnection or improper connection of harness
and connector between LD/BD PWB and LSUcnt
PWB
Check and
remedy
Check connection of the harness of each PWB
inside the LSU.
Case 2 Cause 1) Optical axis shift
2) BK laser deterioration, power reduction
3) BD PWB trouble
Check and
remedy
1) Use SIM61-1 to check the LSU operation.
2) Replace the LSUcnt/BD PWB.
3) If the trouble cannot be removed by the
above 1) to 2), replace the LSU.
Trouble content The color laser does not light up normally.
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Disconnection or improper connection of harness
and connector between LD PWB and LSUcnt PWB
Check and
remedy
Check connection of the harness of each PWB
inside the LSU.
Case 2 Cause Y/M/C laser deterioration
Check and
remedy
1) Use SIM61-1 to check the LSU operation.
2) Replace the LSUcnt PWB.
3) If the trouble cannot be removed by the
above 1) to 2), replace the LSU.
Trouble content Access error between the CPU of the PCU PWB
and the LSU control ASIC
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Communication connector connection trouble
between the PCU PWB and the LSUcnt PWB
(interface PWB), or harness trouble
Check and
remedy
Check the connector connection between the PCU
PWB and the LSUcnt PWB (interface PWB), or
check the harness.
Case 2 Cause PCU PWB or LSUcnt PWB (interface PWB)
trouble
Check and
remedy
Replace the PCU PWB or the LSUcnt PWB
(interface PWB).
Trouble content Oscillation trouble of the external oscillator used in
LSU-ASIC and the internal oscillation circuit
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Trouble of the oscillator on the LSU-ASIC PWB,
the resistor and capacitor for the oscillation circuit,
and the LSU-ASIC itself.
Check and
remedy
Replace the LSUcnt PWB.
Trouble content Unknown PWB identification information is
detected in the PCU PWB.
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause A PWB which is incompatible with the machine
specifications is connected.
Check and
remedy
1) Replace the PCU PWB.
2) Replace the LSU PWB.
Case 2 Cause A firmware which is incompatible with the machine
specifications is used.
Check and
remedy
Check the kind and the version of the firmware.
Case 3 Cause LSU PWB connection trouble
Check and
remedy
Check the LSU PWB connection.
Case 4 Cause LSU PWB trouble
Check and
remedy
Replace the LSU PWB.

E7-60 Controller connection trouble (Engine
detection)

E7-61 Controller connection trouble
(Engine)

E7-62 Controller connection trouble
(Scanner)

E7-65 PWB information sum error
(Controller detection)

E7-70 Scanner connection trouble

E7-75 PWB information sum error (Scanner
detection)

E7-80 Communication trouble between the
MFP and the scanner (MFP detection)

E7-90 Communication trouble between the
MFP and the PCU (MFP detection)

EE-EC Auto developer adjustment trouble
(The sample level for every rotation is
other than 128 10.)
Trouble content Unknown PWB kind information is detected in the
MFPcnt PWB.
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause A PWB which is not compatible with the machine
Check and
remedy
Replace the controller PWB.
Case 2 Cause A firmware which is not compatible with the
machine specifications is applied.
Check and
remedy
Trouble content Controller connection trouble
Compatibility trouble between the controller and
the engine
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause Combination trouble of the controller PWB and the
engine
Check and
remedy
Check the controller PWB.
Check the combination between the controller
PWB and the engine.
Trouble content Controller connection trouble
Compatibility trouble between the controller and
the scanners
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause Combination trouble between the controller PWB
and the scanner
Check and
remedy
Replace the controller PWB.
Check the combination between the controller
PWB and the scanner.
Trouble content EEPROM PWB information sum error
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause 1) EEPROM device trouble
2) EEPROM device contact failure
3) Device access error due to electrical noises
Check and
remedy
Trouble content Unknown PWB identification information is
detected in the SCU PWB.
Section SCU
Case 1 Cause SCU PWB trouble
Check and
remedy
Replace the SCU PWB.
Case 2 Cause A firmware which is incompatible with the machine
Check and
remedy
Trouble content EEPROM PWB information sum error
Section SCU
Check and
remedy
Replace the scanner control PWB.
Trouble content Communication establishment error/Framing/
Parity/Protocol error
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause SCU PWB connector connection trouble
Check and
remedy
Check the connector connection between the SCU
PWB and the MFPcnt PWB.
Case 2 Cause Harness trouble between the SCU PWB and the
MFPcnt PWB
Check and
remedy
Check the harness between the SCU PWB and the
MFPcnt PWB.
Case 3 Cause Broken connector pin of the SCU PWB mother
board
Check and
remedy
Check grounding of the machine.
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause PCU PWB connector connection trouble
Check and
remedy
Check the connector connection between the PCU
PWB and the MFPcnt PWB.
Case 2 Cause Harness trouble between the PCU PWB and the
MFPcnt PWB
Check and
remedy
Check the harness between the PCU PWB and the
MFPcnt PWB.
Case 3 Cause Broken connector pin of the PCU PWB mother
board
Check and
remedy
Check grounding of the machine.
Trouble content When the automatic development adjustment is
executed, the sample level for each rotation is not
128 10.
<Detection only with SIM25-2, no trouble memory,
only display>
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Toner density sensor trouble, charging voltage/
developing voltage trouble, toner density trouble,
developing unit trouble, PCU PWB trouble
Check and
remedy
Use SIM25-2 to execute the auto developer
adjustment.

EE-EL Auto developer adjustment trouble
(Overtoner abnormality)

EE-EU Auto developer adjustment trouble
(Under-toner abnormality)

F1-00 Finisher communication trouble
(Machine side detection)

F1-03 Finisher oscillation motor trouble

F1-08 Finisher stapler shift motor trouble

F1-10 Finisher staple motor abnormality

F1-15 Finisher tray lift motor abnormality

F1-19 Finisher pre-alignment motor
abnormality

F1-20 Finisher after-alignment motor
abnormality

F1-21 Finisher interface fan motor
abnormality
Trouble content The sample level is 76 or below, or the control
voltage is 208 or above.
only display>
Section PCU
Check and
remedy
adjustment.
Trouble content The sample level is 178 or above, or the control
voltage is 51 or below.
only display>
Section PCU
Check and
remedy
adjustment.
Trouble content Communication line test error when turning on the
power or after canceling an exclusion simulation.
Communication error with the finisher
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Malfunction due to electrical noises
Check and
remedy
Turn OFF/ON the power to cancel.
Case 2 Cause PCU finisher connector or harness connection
error or disconnection
Check and
remedy
Check the connector and harness in the
communication line.
Case 3 Cause Finisher control PWB trouble
Check and
remedy
Replace the finisher control PWB.
Case 4 Cause Control (PCU) PWB trouble
Check and
remedy
Trouble content Oscillation motor operation abnormality
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Motor lock, motor RPM abnormality, motor
overvoltage, finisher control PWB trouble
Check and
remedy
Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the motor
(FSWM).
Trouble content Stapler shift motor operation abnormality
Section PCU
Check and
remedy
Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the staple
motor (FSM).
Trouble content Staple operation trouble
Section PCU
Check and
remedy
Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the staple
motor (FFSM).
Trouble content Lift motor trouble
Section PCU
Check and
remedy
Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the tray lift
motor (FTLM).
Case 2 Cause Interlock switch (black bar-shape switch under the
upper tray) operation
Check and
remedy
Check that there is nothing on the interlock switch.
If there is, remove it.
Trouble content Pre-alignment motor trouble
Section PCU
Check and
remedy
Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the pre-
alignment motor (FFJM).
Trouble content After-alignment motor trouble
Section PCU
Check and
remedy
Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the after-
alignment motor (FRJM).
Trouble content Interface transport fan motor trouble
Section PCU
Check and
remedy
Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the fan motor
(FJFM).

F1-22 Finisher rear edge assist motor
trouble

F1-23 Shutter trouble

F1-30 Communication trouble between the
finisher and the saddle

F1-31 Finisher folding motor trouble

finisher and the punch unit

F1-33 Finisher punch shift motor trouble

F1-34 Finisher punch motor trouble

F1-37 Finisher backup RAM trouble

F1-38 Finisher punch backup RAM trouble
Trouble content Rear edge assist motor operation trouble
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Motor trouble, HP sensor trouble, harness
disconnection, finisher control PWB trouble
Check and
remedy
Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the rear
edge assist motor.
Trouble content Shutter operation trouble
Section PCU
Check and
remedy
Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the bundle
paper exit motor.
Trouble content Communication error between the finisher and the
saddle unit
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Malfunction due to electrical noises.
Check and
remedy
Turn ON/OFF the power to cancel the error.
Case 2 Cause Connection trouble or disconnection of the
connector and the harness between the finisher
and the saddle unit.
Check and
remedy
communication line.
Case 3 Cause Finisher control PWB trouble. Saddle control PWB
trouble.
Check and
remedy
Replace the finisher control PWB. Replace the
saddle control PWB.
Trouble content Sensor input value abnormality
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Sensor breakage, harness disconnection, finisher
control PWB trouble
Check and
remedy
Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the
bookbinding position sensor (FFPD).
Trouble content Finisher and punch unit communication error
Section PCU
Check and
remedy
Cancel by turning OFF/ON the power.
Case 2 Cause Connector/harness connection error or
disconnection between the finisher and the punch
unit
Check and
remedy
Check the connector and the harness in the
communication line.
Case 3 Cause Finisher control PWB trouble
Check and
remedy
Check and
remedy
Replace the control (PCU) PWB
Trouble content Punch shift motor operation abnormality
Section PCU
overvoltage, finisher control PWB trouble, punch
control PWB trouble
Check and
remedy
Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the punch
shift motor (FPSM).
Replace the finisher punch unit (Replace the
punch control PWB.).
Trouble content Punch motor operation abnormality
Section PCU
overvoltage, finisher control PWB trouble, punch
control PWB trouble
Check and
remedy
Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the punch
motor (FPNW).
Replace the finisher punch unit (Replace the
punch control PWB.).
Trouble content Backup RAM data garbled
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Finisher control PWB trouble, malfunction due to
electrical noises
Check and
remedy
Trouble content Punch unit backup RAM data garbled
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Punch control PWB trouble, malfunction due to
electrical noises
Check and
remedy
Replace the punch control PWB.

F1-41 Positioning plate motor trouble

F1-42 Guide motor trouble

F1-43 Side alignment motor trouble

F1-44 Stitch motor rear trouble

F1-45 Stitch motor front trouble

F1-46 Paper pushing motor trouble

F1-50 Finisher incompatibility trouble

F1-51 Sensor connector connection trouble

F1-52 Micro SW trouble

finisher and the inserter

F1-61 Inserter EEPROM trouble
Trouble content Positioning plate motor operation trouble
Section PCU
Check and
remedy
Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper
positioning plate motor.
Trouble content Guide motor operation trouble
Section PCU
Check and
remedy
Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the guide
motor.
Trouble content Side alignment motor operation trouble
Section PCU
Check and
remedy
alignment motor.
Trouble content Rear stitch motor operation trouble
Section PCU
Check and
remedy
Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the rear
stitch motor.
Trouble content Front stitch motor operation trouble
Section PCU
Check and
remedy
Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the front
stitch motor.
Trouble content Paper pushing motor operation trouble
Section PCU
Check and
remedy
Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper
pushing motor.
Trouble content Detection of finisher incompatible with MX-5500N/
6200N/7000N
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Connection of the AR-F13, etc. which is
incompatible with MX-5500N/6200N/7000N is
detected.
Check and
remedy
Connect the MX-FNX3/MX-FNX4.
Trouble content Sensor operation trouble
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Sensor trouble, harness disconnection, finisher
control PWB trouble
Check and
remedy
Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the guide HP
sensor, the paper pushing plate HP sensor, and
the paper pushing plate lead edge sensor.
Trouble content Micro SW operation trouble
Section PCU
control PWB trouble
Check and
remedy
Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the inlet port
cover open/close sensor and the paper exit cover
open/close sensor.
Trouble content Communication error between the finisher and the
inserter
Section PCU
Check and
remedy
Turn ON/OFF the power to cancel the error.
connector and the harness between the finisher
and the inserter. Finisher control PWB trouble,
inserter control PWB trouble
Check and
remedy
Check the connector and the harness in the
communication line. Replace the finisher control
PWB. Replace the inserter control PWB.
Trouble content EEPROM trouble
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause EEPROM trouble, finisher control PWB trouble,
inserter control PWB trouble
Check and
remedy
Replace the inserter control PWB.

F1-62 Inserter reverse sensor trouble

F2-02 Toner supply abnormality (K2)

F2-04 Toner cartridge improper (K2)

F2-05 Toner cartridge CRUM error (K2)

F2-39 Process thermistor trouble

F2-40 Toner empty sensor abnormality (K)

F2-41 Toner empty sensor abnormality (C)

F2-42 Toner empty sensor abnormality (M)
Trouble content Sensor adjustment failure
Section PCU
control PWB trouble, inserter control PWB trouble
Check and
remedy
Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the inlet port
cover open/close sensor and the paper exit cover
open/close sensor.
Replace the inserter control PWB.
Trouble content Toner end with the remaining quantity of 25% or
more.
The toner supply time exceeds 5 times as much as
the specified time.
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Toner motor section connector harness trouble
Check and
remedy
Check the connector connection of the toner motor
section.
Check the connector harness (TM) connection to
the main PWB.
Case 2 Cause Toner motor and toner density sensor trouble.
Piezoelectric sensor abnormality
Check and
remedy
1) Check the toner density sensor output.
(SIM25-1)
2) Check that the toner transport pipe is not
clogged between the toner cartridge and the
developing unit. Replace the toner cartridge
(CRUM) if necessary. Intermediate hopper
replacement
3) If replacement of the toner cartridge (CRUM)
does not clear the trouble, check the
developing unit.
Trouble content Improper data are detected in the CRUM contents
when the normal CRUM of the cartridge is
detected.
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause An improper cartridge is inserted.
Toner cartridge trouble
Check and
remedy
Replace the toner cartridge.
Trouble content CRUM cannot be read or written.
Section PCU
connector and the harness between the PCU and
the toner cartridge.
Check and
remedy
Check the connector and the harness between the
PCU and the toner cartridge.
Case 2 Cause CRUM trouble
Check and
remedy
Check and
remedy
Trouble content Process thermistor open
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Process thermistor harness connection trouble
Check and
remedy
Check the connection of the harness and
connector of the process thermistor.
Case 2 Cause Process thermistor trouble
Check and
remedy
Check the connection of the harness and
connector of the process thermistor.
Check and
remedy
Check the PCU PWB.
Trouble content Toner empty sensor output abnormality. Sample
level 25 or less or 231 or above.
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause The connector is not installed.
Check and
remedy
Check the connection of the connector harness to
the PCU PWB. Check the connection of the toner
empty sensor.
Case 2 Cause Connector harness trouble
Check and
remedy
Check the harness disconnection.
Case 3 Cause Cartridge trouble
Check and
remedy
Check the cartridge connection.
Section PCU
Check and
remedy
empty sensor.
Check and
remedy
Check and
remedy
Section PCU
Check and
remedy
empty sensor.
Check and
remedy
Check and
remedy

F2-43 Toner empty sensor abnormality (Y)

F2-44 Black exclusive image density sensor
trouble (Transfer belt surface
reflection ratio abnormality)

F2-45 Color exclusive image density sensor
trouble (Calibration plate surface

F2-49 LSU thermistor trouble

F2-50 K phase sensor sensing trouble

F2-51 CL phase sensor sensing trouble (C)
Section PCU
Check and
remedy
empty sensor.
Check and
remedy
Check and
remedy
Trouble content The transfer belt surface is scanned by the image
density sensor before starting the process control,
and adjust the sensor gain so that the output is
kept at a certain level. However, the output is not
within the specified range though the senor gain is
adjusted.
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Image density sensor trouble, harness connection
trouble between PCU PWB and the image density
sensor, image density sensor dirt, transfer belt
cleaning trouble, calibration plate solenoid
operation trouble
Check and
remedy
Use SIM44-2 to execute the process control
sensor gain adjustment. If "ERROR" is displayed,
check the sensor, the harness and the calibration
plate solenoid operation for any trouble. If the
adjustment is completed, check the transfer belt
surface state.
Trouble content The calibration plate surface is scanned by the
image density sensor before starting the process
control, and adjust the sensor gain so that the
output is kept at a certain level. However, the
output is not within the certain level though the
senor gain is adjusted.
Section PCU
sensor, image density sensor dirt, calibration plate
dirt, calibration plate solenoid operation trouble
Check and
remedy
check the sensor and the harness operation for
any trouble. If the adjustment is completed, check
the calibration plate solenoid operation.
Trouble content The detection temperature is out of the range of
-28C to 78C.
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause LSU thermistor harness connection trouble
Check and
remedy
Check the connection of the LSU thermistor
harness and connector.
Case 2 Cause LSU thermistor trouble, PCU PWB trouble
Check and
remedy
Replace the LSU thermistor. Replace the PCU
PWB.
Trouble content Detection is made by interruption of light in the
sensor section of the projection rib on the drum
drive gear to control the BK drum phase. The
detection signal cannot be acquired and phase
control cannot be made.
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Sensor connector connection trouble
Check and
remedy
Check the sensor connector connection.
Case 2 Cause Dirt on the sensor light emitting section, or
installation trouble
Check and
remedy
Check for dirt on the sensor or check the
installation state.
Case 3 Cause Drum drive gear upper rib breakage, sensor
trouble
Check and
remedy
If there is no trouble in the rib, replace the sensor.
(Use SIM30-1 "DHPD_K" to check interruption or
transmission of light.)
drive gear to control the color drum (C) phase. The
Section PCU
Check and
remedy
Check and
remedy
installation state.
trouble
Check and
remedy
(Use SIM30-1 "DHPD_C" to check interruption or

F2-52 CL phase sensor sensing trouble (M)

F2-53 CL phase sensor sensing trouble (Y)

F2-58 Process humidity sensor trouble

F2-64 Toner supply abnormality (K)

F2-65 Toner supply abnormality (C)

F2-66 Toner supply abnormality (M)
drive gear to control the color drum (M) phase. The
Section PCU
Check and
remedy
Check and
remedy
installation state.
trouble
Check and
remedy
(Use SIM30-1 "DHPD_M" to check interruption or
drive gear to control the color drum (Y) phase. The
Section PCU
Check and
remedy
Check and
remedy
installation state.
trouble
Check and
remedy
(Use SIM30-1 "DHPD_Y" to check interruption or
Trouble content Process humidity sensor open
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Process humidity sensor harness connection
trouble
Check and
remedy
Check the harness and connector connection of
the process humidity sensor.
Case 2 Cause Process humidity sensor trouble
Check and
remedy
Check the process humidity sensor.
Check and
remedy
Check the PCU PWB.
more.
the specified time.
Section PCU
Check and
remedy
section.
the main PWB.
Case 2 Cause Toner motor and toner density sensor trouble.
Piezoelectric sensor abnormality
Check and
remedy
(SIM25-1)
(CRUM) if necessary. Intermediate hopper
replacement
developing unit.
more.
the specified time.
Section PCU
Check and
remedy
section.
the main PWB.
Case 2 Cause Toner motor and toner density sensor trouble
Check and
remedy
(SIM25-1)
(CRUM) if necessary.
developing unit.
more.
the specified time.
Section PCU
Check and
remedy
section.
the main PWB.
Check and
remedy
(SIM25-1)
developing unit.

F2-67 Toner supply abnormality (Y)

F2-70 Toner cartridge improper (K)

F2-71 Toner cartridge improper (C)

F2-72 Toner cartridge improper (M)

F2-73 Toner cartridge improper (Y)

F2-74 Toner cartridge CRUM error (K)

F2-75 Toner cartridge CRUM error (C)

F2-76 Toner cartridge CRUM error (M)

F2-77 Toner cartridge CRUM error (Y)
more.
the specified time.
Section PCU
Check and
remedy
section.
the main PWB.
Check and
remedy
(SIM25-1)
developing unit.
detected.
Section PCU
Check and
remedy
detected.
Section PCU
Check and
remedy
detected.
Section PCU
Check and
remedy
detected.
Section PCU
Check and
remedy
Section PCU
Check and
remedy
Check and
remedy
Check and
remedy
Section PCU
Check and
remedy
Check and
remedy
Check and
remedy
Section PCU
Check and
remedy
Check and
remedy
Check and
remedy
Section PCU
Check and
remedy
Check and
remedy
Check and
remedy

F2-78 Registration exclusive image density
sensor trouble (Transfer belt surface

F2-80 Half tone process control 1st patch
reference value trouble (K)

reference value trouble (C)

reference value trouble (M)

reference value trouble (Y)

F2-84 Half tone process control 2nd patch
reference value trouble (K)
Trouble content The transfer belt surface is scanned by the image
density sensor before starting the registration, and
adjust the sensor gain so that the output is kept at
a certain level. However, the output is not within
the specified range though the senor gain is
adjusted.
Section PCU
sensor, image density sensor dirt, transfer belt
cleaning trouble, calibration plate solenoid
operation trouble
Check and
remedy
Check the sensor and the harness. Check the
calibration plate solenoid operation and the
transfer belt surface state.
If the trouble is not cleared, replace the image
sensor exclusively used for registration, replace
the transfer belt, replace the calibration plate
solenoid, or replace the PCU PWB according to
the check result.
Trouble content The low-density rising point or the high-density
saturation point cannot be calculated because of a
calculation error in the primary approximation
formula of the sensor output ratio for the LSU
PWM value obtained from the first step patch print
result when executing the half tone process control
in BK.
Section MFP
trouble between PCU sub PWB and the image
density sensor, image density sensor dirt, transfer
belt cleaning trouble
Check and
remedy
check the sensor and the harness. If the
adjustment is completed, check the drum surface
state and the belt surface state.
in C.
Section MFP
Check and
remedy
in M.
Section MFP
Check and
remedy
in Y.
Section MFP
Check and
remedy
Trouble content The low-density section output is greater than the
middle-density section output when connecting the
low-density section approximation formula and the
middle-density section approximation formula
(formula of the sensor output ratio for the LSU
PWM value) from the second step patch print
in BK.
Section MFP
Check and
remedy

reference value trouble (C)

reference value trouble (M)

reference value trouble (Y)

F2-92 High-density process control density
correction error (C)

correction error (M)

correction error (Y)
in C.
Section MFP
Check and
remedy
in M.
Section MFP
Check and
remedy
in Y.
Section MFP
Check and
remedy
Trouble content The patch density value is not in the range of the
density correction reference density value (STD
value) 30% at the upper limit or the lower limit
bias voltage when executing the high density
process control.
Section PCU
trouble between PCU PWB and image density
sensor, dirt on image density sensor, transfer belt
cleaning trouble
Check and
remedy
1) Use SIM44-2 to execute the process control
sensor gain adjustment.
2) If an error occurs, check the sensors and the
harnesses.
3) If the adjustment of 1) is completed, check
the drum surface state, the belt surface state,
etc.
process control.
Section PCU
cleaning trouble
Check and
remedy
harnesses.
etc.
process control.
Section PCU
cleaning trouble
Check and
remedy
harnesses.
etc.

F3-12 Tray 1 lift-up trouble




controller and the printer controller
(FIERY option)

H2-00 Detection thermistor open (TH1_AD2)
of the non-contact thermistor

H2-01 Lower thermistor open (TH_LM)

H2-02 Sub thermistor open (TH_US)

H2-03 Non-contact thermistor
compensation thermistor open
(TH1_AD1)
Trouble content T1LUD does not turn ON within the specified time.
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause T1LUD sensor trouble. Harness connection trouble
between PCU PWB, the lift-up unit, and the paper
feed unit.
Check and
remedy
Check the harness and the connector of T1LUD.
Case 2 Cause Tray 1 lift-up motor trouble
Check and
remedy
Check the lift-up unit.
Trouble content T2LUD does not turn ON within the specified time.
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause T2LUD sensor trouble. Harness connection trouble
feed unit.
Check and
remedy
Check the harness and the connector of T2LUD.
Check and
remedy
Trouble content LUD3 does not turn ON within the specified time.
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause LUD3 sensor trouble. Harness connection trouble
feed unit.
Check and
remedy
Check the harness and the connector of LUD3.
Check and
remedy
Trouble content LUD4 does not turn ON within the specified time.
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause LUD4 sensor trouble. Harness connection trouble
feed unit.
Check and
remedy
Check the harness and the connector of LUD4.
Check and
remedy
Trouble content A communication error is detected during initial
establishment or after establishment of
communication with the controller (FIERY option).
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause Printer controller MFPcnt PWB cable trouble
Check and
remedy
Check the printer controller MFPcnt PWB cable.
Case 2 Cause MFPcnt PWB trouble, printer controller PWB
trouble
Check and
remedy
Replace the MFPcnt PWB. Repair or replace the
printer controller PWB.
After completion of check, turn OFF/ON the
machine and the printer controller.
Trouble content Thermistor open
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Thermistor trouble, control PWB trouble, fusing
section connector connection trouble, AC power
source trouble, fusing unit not-installed
Check and
remedy
Check the harness and the connector from the
thermistor to the control PWB.
Section PCU
Check and
remedy
Section PCU
Check and
remedy
Section PCU
source trouble
Check and
remedy

H2-04 External heating thermistor open
(TH_EX1)

H2-05 Fusing external heating thermistor
open (TH_EX2)

H3-00 Fusing section high temperature
trouble (TH_UM)

H3-01 Fusing section high temperature
trouble (TH_LM)

H3-02 Sub thermistor fusing section high
temperature trouble (TH_US)

H3-04 External heating thermistor high
temperature trouble (TH_EX1)

H3-05 Fusing external thermistor high
temperature trouble (TH_EX2)
Section PCU
source trouble
Check and
remedy
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Fusing section connector and harness connection
trouble
Check and
remedy
thermistor to the PCU PWB.
Case 2 Cause Thermistor trouble, PCU PWB trouble
Check and
remedy
Replace the thermistor or the PCU PWB.
Trouble content The fusing temperature inside the PWB exceeds
the specified level.
Section PCU
section connector connection error, AC power
source trouble
Check and
remedy
1) Use SIM5-2 to check blinking of the heater
lamp.
2) If it blinks normally, check the thermistor and
the harness.
Check the control PWB thermistor input
circuit section.
3) If the heater lamp keep lighting, check the AC
PWB and the control PWB lamp control
circuit.
4) Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
Section PCU
source trouble
Check and
remedy
lamp.
the harness.
circuit section.
circuit.
Section PCU
source trouble
Check and
remedy
lamp.
the harness.
circuit section.
circuit.
Trouble content The external heating thermistor temperature
exceeds the specified temperature.
Section PCU
source trouble
Check and
remedy
1) Use Sim44-14 to check if the thermistor
(TH_EX1) shows an abnormal temperature. If
the display is normal, use Sim5-2 to check
the blinking operation of the heater lamp.
a) If it blinks normally, check the thermistor
and the harness.
circuit section.
b) If the heater lamp keep lighting, check
the AC PWB and the control PWB lamp
control circuit.
Trouble content It is detected that the fusing temperature exceeds
the specified temperature.
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Fusing section connector and harness connection
trouble
Check and
remedy
thermistor to the PCU PWB.
Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
Case 2 Cause Thermistor trouble, PCU PWB trouble
Check and
remedy
Replace the thermistor or the PCU PWB.

H4-00 Fusing section low temperature
trouble (TH_UM_AD2)

H4-01 Fusing section low temperature
trouble (TH_LM)

H4-02 Sub thermistor fusing section low
temperature trouble (TH_US)

H4-04 External heating thermistor fusing
section low temperature trouble
(TH_EX1)

H4-30 Detection thermistor input
abnormality (TH_UM)

H5-01 5 continuous detection of POD1 not-
reached jam
Trouble content The temperature does not reach the specified level
within the specified time after turning on the power
relay.
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Thermistor trouble, heater lamp trouble, PCU PWB
trouble, thermostat trouble, AC power source
trouble, interlock switch trouble
Check and
remedy
lamp.
the harness.
Check the PCU PWB thermistor input circuit
section.
3) If it is not lighted, check for the heater lamp
disconnection and the thermostat breakage.
Check the interlock switch. Check the AC
PWB and the PCU PWB lamp control circuit.
relay.
Section PCU
Check and
remedy
lamp.
the harness.
section.
relay.
Section PCU
Check and
remedy
lamp.
the harness.
section.
Trouble content When the power relay is turned ON after supplying
power, the set temperature is not reached within
the specified time.
Section PCU
Check and
remedy
lamp.
the harness.
section.
Trouble content TH_UM_AD1 and TH_UM_AD2 do not exceed the
specified level (50 count with the AD value) within
5 minutes after HL_UM is turned on.
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause HL_UM does not turn on. Thermistor trouble,
harness trouble, PCU PWB trouble
Check and
remedy
lamp.
the harness.
section.
Trouble content 5 continuous detection of POD1 not-reached jam
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause The fusing jam is not removed completely. (Jam
paper remains.)
Check and
remedy
Check the fusing section for jam paper. (winding,
etc.)
Case 2 Cause POD1 sensor trouble or harness connection
trouble
Check and
remedy
Check the POD1 sensor harness.
Case 3 Cause Fusing unit installation trouble
Check and
remedy
Check the fusing unit installation.

H7-10 Low temperature detection during the
temperature control reset operation
after stopping the alarm in a JOB
(HL_UM)

(HL_LM)

(HL_US)

(HL_EX1)

L1-00 Mirror feed trouble

L3-00 Mirror return trouble

L4-02 Paper feed motor lock trouble

L4-03 Fusing motor lock trouble
Trouble content When the alarm is stopped, the set temperature is
not reached within the specified time.
* Alarm stop: When the fusing temperature falls
below the specified level in a print JOB, printing
is interrupted temporarily and the temperature is
reset.
Section PCU
Check and
remedy
harness.
Case 2 Cause Thermistor trouble, thermostat trouble, heater lamp
trouble, PCU PWB trouble, AC power source
Check and
remedy
Use SIM 5-2 to check lighting of the heater lamp.
Check conduction of the thermostat. Replace the
heater lamp, the PCU PWB, and the AC PWB.
reset.
Section PCU
Check and
remedy
harness.
Check and
remedy
reset.
Section PCU
Check and
remedy
harness.
Check and
remedy
reset.
Section PCU
Check and
remedy
harness.
Check and
remedy
Trouble content Mirror feed is not completed within the specified
time.
Section SCU
Case 1 Cause Mirror unit trouble, mirror wire disengagement
Check and
remedy
Use SIM1-1 to check the mirror operation.
Trouble content Mirror return is not completed within the specified
time.
Section SCU
Case 1 Cause Mirror unit trouble, mirror wire disengagement
Check and
remedy
Use SIM1-1 to check the mirror operation.
Trouble content When the paper feed motor is rotated in warming
up or in canceling a jam and the lock signal is not
detected within 1sec.
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Paper feed motor trouble, harness connection
trouble between PCU PWB and paper feed motor,
control circuit trouble
Check and
remedy
Use SIM6-1 to check the paper feed motor
operation. Check the harness and the connector
between the PCU PWB and the paper feed motor.
Trouble content The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of
the fusing motor.
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Harness connection trouble between the PCU
PWB and the fusing motor.
Check and
remedy
Check the harness and the connector between the
PCU PWB and the fusing motor.
Case 2 Cause Fusing motor trouble, control circuit trouble
Check and
remedy
Use SIM6-1 to check the operation of the fusing
motor.

L4-04 Developing motor trouble (BK)

L4-05 Developing motor trouble (CL)

L4-06 Transfer belt separation position
sensor trouble

L4-08 Waste toner motor lock

L4-09 Resist motor lock

L4-12 Secondary transfer separation trouble

L4-13 Fusing external heating separation
trouble

L4-30 Controller fan motor trouble
the developing motor.
Section PCU
PWB and the developing motor.
Check and
remedy
PCU PWB and the developing motor.
Case 2 Cause Developing motor trouble, control circuit trouble
Check and
remedy
developing motor.
the developing motor.
Section PCU
PWB and the developing motor.
Check and
remedy
PCU PWB and the developing motor.
Case 2 Cause Developing motor trouble, control circuit trouble
Check and
remedy
developing motor.
Trouble content When separating the primary transfer belt unit,
change in the separation position sensor
characteristics is not detected within the specified
time.
Section PCU
PWB and the separation position sensor
Check and
remedy
Check the harness between the PCU PWB and the
separation position sensor.
Case 2 Cause The belt position sensor is not interrupted or it is
always interrupted. Belt separation clutch
operation trouble
Check and
remedy
Use SIM6-3 to check the belt separation operation.
Check to insure that the sensor is interrupted from
lighting when the belt is separated.
Case 3 Cause The primary transfer belt unit is not installed.
Check and
remedy
Install the primary transfer belt unit.
the waste toner motor.
Section PCU
PWB and the waste toner motor.
Check and
remedy
PCU PWB and the waste toner motor.
Case 2 Cause Waste toner motor trouble, control circuit trouble
Check and
remedy
Use SIM6-1 to check the operation of the waste
toner motor.
Trouble content When the resist motor is rotation, the motor lock
signal is detected.
Section PCU
PWB and the resist motor
Check and
remedy
PCU PWB and the resist motor.
Case 2 Cause Resist motor trouble, control circuit trouble
Check and
remedy
Use SIM6-1 to check the operation of the resist
motor.
Trouble content When the secondary transfer unit is separated, the
separation sensor status change is not detected
within the specified time.
Section PCU
Check and
remedy
harness.
Case 2 Cause Separation mechanism trouble, separation motor
trouble, separation sensor trouble
Check and
remedy
Check the separation mechanism. Replace the
separation motor and the separation sensor.
Check and
remedy
Trouble content When the fusing external heating unit is separated,
the separation sensor status change is not
detected within the specified time.
Section PCU
Check and
remedy
harness.
Case 2 Cause Separation mechanism trouble, separation motor
trouble, separation sensor trouble
Check and
remedy
Check the separation mechanism. Replace the
separation motor and the separation sensor.
Check and
remedy
Trouble content 1) The motor lock signal is detected during
rotation of the controller fan motor.
2) The motor lock signal is detected during
rotation of the HDD fan motor.
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause Fan motor trouble
Check and
remedy
Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the fan
motor.
Case 2 Cause Harness connection trouble between the mother
PWB and the fan motor.
Check and
remedy
mother PWB and the fan motor.
Case 3 Cause Control circuit trouble
Check and
remedy
Case 4 Cause Mother PWB trouble.
Check and
remedy
Replace the mother PWB.

L4-31 Paper exit cooling fan F lock

L4-32 Power cooling fan 1 lock

L4-34 LSU cooling fan trouble

L4-35 Fusing exhaust fan lock

L4-36 Fusing suction fan lock

L4-37 Charger cooling fan lock

L4-38 Machine ventilation fan center lock

L4-39 Machine ventilation fan right lock

L4-40 Ozone fan 1 lock

Trouble content When the paper exit cooling fan F is operated, the
fan operation signal is not detected within the
specified time.
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Fan connector disconnection
Check and
remedy
PCU PWB and the fan.
Case 2 Cause Fan does not rotate because of other trouble.
Check and
remedy
Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually
rotating.
Trouble content When the power cooling fan 1 is operated, the fan
operation signal is not detected within the specified
time.
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Power cooling fan 1 connector disconnection
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause Fan does not rotate because of other trouble
Check and
remedy
rotating.
Trouble content When the LSU cooling fan is operated, the fan
time.
Section PCU
Check and
remedy
LSU PWB and the fan.
Case 2 Cause Fan does not rotate because of other trouble
Check and
remedy
rotating.
If the trouble is not canceled, replace the LSU fan
and the LSU cnt PWB.
Trouble content When the fusing exhaust fan is operated, the fan
time.
Section PCU
Check and
remedy
Check and
remedy
rotating.
Trouble content When the fusing suction fan is operated, the fan
time.
Section PCU
Check and
remedy
Check and
remedy
rotating.
Trouble content When the charger cooling fan is operated, the fan
time.
Section PCU
Check and
remedy
Check and
remedy
rotating.
Trouble content When the machine ventilation fan center is
operated, the fan operation signal is not detected
within the specified time.
Section PCU
Check and
remedy
Check and
remedy
rotating.
Trouble content When the machine ventilation fan right is operated,
the fan operation signal is not detected within the
specified time.
Section PCU
Check and
remedy
Check and
remedy
rotating.
Trouble content When the ozone fan 1 is operated, the fan
time.
Section PCU
Check and
remedy
Check and
remedy
rotating.
time.
Section PCU
Check and
remedy
Check and
remedy
rotating.


L4-43 Paper exit cooling fan center lock

L4-44 Power cooling fan 2 lock

L6-10 Polygon motor lock detection

L8-01 No full wave signal

L8-02 Full wave signal width abnormality

L8-20 Power controller communication
trouble

PC--- Personal counter not installed

U1-01 Battery trouble

U2-00 EEPROM read/write error
(MFP detection)
time.
Section PCU
Check and
remedy
Check and
remedy
rotating.
Trouble content When the paper exit cooling fan center is operated,
the fan operation signal is not detected within the
specified time.
Section PCU
Check and
remedy
Check and
remedy
rotating.
Trouble content When the power cooling fan 2 is operated, the fan
time.
Section PCU
Check and
remedy
Check and
remedy
rotating.
Trouble content It is judged that the LSU polygon motor lock signal
is not outputted, and the lock signal is checked
after 15 sec from starting rotation of the polygon
motor and it is judged that the polygon motor does
not rotate properly.
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Disconnection of the LSU connector or the LSU
inside harness, or breakage
Check and
remedy
Check connection of the harness and the
connector.
Case 2 Cause Polygon motor trouble, LSU PWB trouble
Check and
remedy
Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the polygon
motor.
Replace the LSUcnt PWB. Replace the LSU.
Trouble content No full wave signal is detected.
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Harness trouble
Check and
remedy
Check connection of the harness and the
connector.
Case 2 Cause Power unit trouble
Check and
remedy
Replace the power unit.
Check and
remedy
Trouble content The full wave signal is judged as frequency
abnormality. (The detection frequency is judged as
65Hz or above or 45Hz or less.)
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Harness trouble
Check and
remedy
Check the harness and the connector connection.
Case 2 Cause Power unit trouble
Check and
remedy
Replace the power unit.
Check and
remedy
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause Connector connection trouble between the mother
board PWB and the MFPcnt PWB.
MFPcnt PWB mother board connector pin
breakage
Check and
remedy
Check the connector connection between the
mother board PWB and the MFPcnt PWB. Check
grounding of the machine.
Case 2 Cause Mother PWB trouble
Check and
remedy
Replace the mother PWB.
Case 3 Cause Mother PWB jumper error
Check and
remedy
Set the mother PWB jumper to the Default side.
Trouble content The personal counter is not installed.
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause The personal counter is not installed.
Check and
remedy
Install the personal counter.
Trouble content Backup SRAM battery voltage fall
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause 1) Battery life
2) Battery circuit abnormality
Check and
remedy
Check that the battery voltage is about 2.5V or
above.
Trouble content EEPROM device read/write error
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause EEPROM device trouble
Check and
remedy
Replace the EEPROM device.
Case 2 Cause EEPROM device contact failure
Check and
remedy
Check that EEPROM device is properly inserted.
Case 3 Cause Device access error due to electrical noises
Check and
remedy

U2-05 HDD/SRAM/EEPROM data
discrepancy

U2-10 SRAM user authentication index
check sum error

U2-11 EEPROM check sum error
(MFP detection)

U2-22 SRAM memory check sum error

U2-23 MFPC section SRAM memory
individual data check sum error

U2-24 SRAM memory user authentication
counter check sum error

U2-25 Flash memory user authentication
counter check sum error

U2-30 Serial number data discrepancy
(MFP PCU)
Trouble content A HDD or SRAM memory for user authentication
different from that used before turn off the power is
installed.
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause HDD replacement or SRAM memory replacement
Check and
remedy
Initialize the authentication information with SIM16,
and import the backup data (exported data by
device cloning) if any.
Trouble content User index information (basic data of user
authentication) check sum error on the SRAM
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause 1) SRAM trouble
2) Hang-up of the control circuit due to electrical
noises
3) MFPcnt PWB SRAM access circuit trouble
Check and
remedy
Use SIM16 to cancel U2 trouble.
Trouble content Counter information check sum error on the
EEPROM
Section MFP
Check and
remedy
Trouble content MFPcnt PWB SRAM memory check sum error
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause SRAM trouble
Check and
remedy
1) Initialize the communication management
table registered in SRAM and the FAX soft
switch.
2) Since the registered contents have been
deleted, register them again.
Case 2 Cause Control circuit hang-up due to electrical noises
Check and
remedy
Case 3 Cause MFPcnt PWB SRAM access circuit trouble
Check and
remedy
Trouble content MFPcnt PWB SRAM memory individual data
check sum error (Communication management
table, sender registration data, etc.)
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause SRAM trouble
Check and
remedy
1) Turn OFF/ON the power to initialize the data
related to the check sum error contents
automatically.
Check and
remedy
Case 3 Cause MFPcnt PWB SRAM access circuit trouble
Check and
remedy
Trouble content Check sum error of the user counter on SRAM
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause 1) SRAM trouble
2) Control circuit hang-up due to electrical
noises
3) MFPcnt PWB SRAM access circuit trouble
Check and
remedy
Trouble content Check sum error of the user authentication counter
on FLASH
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause Flash trouble. Control circuit hang-up due to
electrical noises
MFPcnt PWB FLASH access circuit trouble.
Check and
remedy
Use SIM16 to recalculate the check sum of the
user counter and save the normal sum value.
Trouble content The serial number stored in the PCU differs from
that stored in the MFP.
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause EEPROM is not changed when the PCU/MFPcnt
PWB is replaced.
Check and
remedy
1) Check that EEPROM is properly set.
2) Check that EEPROM on the previous PWB is
inserted to the newly installed PWB.

U2-50 HDD section individual data check
sum error (MFP)

(SCU detection)

U2-81 Adjustment value check sum error
(SCU detection)

(PCU detection)

U2-91 Adjustment value check sum error
(PCU detection)

U5-00 SPF communication trouble

U5-16 SPF fan motor trouble
Trouble content MFPcnt HDD individual data check sum error
(One-touch, group, program, etc.)
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause Write/read error to/from HDD
Check and
remedy
1) Turn OFF/ON the power to initialize the data
related to the check sum error contents
automatically.
3) If the trouble is not canceled, replace the
HDD.
Check and
remedy
Case 3 Cause MFPcnt PWB HDD access circuit trouble
Check and
remedy
Trouble content 1) EEPROM version error
2) Write error to EEPROM
Section SCU
Case 1 Cause EEPROM trouble, installation of EEPROM which is
not initialized
Check and
remedy
Check that EEPROM is properly set.
Case 2 Cause SCU PWB EEPROM access circuit trouble
Check and
remedy
To avoid deletion of the counter data/adjustment
values, use the simulation to save the counter/
adjustment values. (If there is a printer option,
execute SIM22-1 to save the counter data and the
adjustment values.) Replace the SCU PWB. Use
SIM16 to cancel the trouble.
Trouble content EEPROM (SCU) check sum error
Section SCU
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause EEPROM trouble
Check and
remedy
adjustment values.) Replace the SCU PWB. Use
Case 3 Cause SCU PWB EEPROM access circuit trouble
Check and
remedy
Trouble content EEPROM version error, write error to EEPROM
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause EEPROM trouble, installation of EEPROM which
is not initialized.
Installation of 64KBit EEPROM
Check and
remedy
Check to insure that 256KBit EEPROM is installed.
Case 2 Cause PCU PWB EEPROM access circuit trouble
Check and
remedy
adjustment values.) Replace the PCU PWB. Use
Trouble content EEPROM (PCU) check sum error
Section PCU
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause EEPROM trouble.
Check and
remedy
Case 3 Cause PCU PWB EEPROM access circuit trouble
Check and
remedy
adjustment values.) Replace the PCU PWB.
Trouble content Communication error between the SCU and the
DSPF, communication line test error after turning
on the power or canceling the exclusive simulation
Section SCU
Check and
remedy
Cancel the trouble by turning OFF/ON.
Case 2 Cause Connector and harness connection trouble or
disconnection
Check and
remedy
Check the connector and the harness of the
communication line.
Case 3 Cause Control (SCU) PWB trouble. DSPF PWB trouble
Check and
remedy
Replace the control (SCU) PWB. Replace the
DSPF PWB.
the fan.
Section SCU
Case 1 Cause Fan motor trouble, harness of the fan motor
related, circuit trouble
Check and
remedy
Use SIM2-3 to check the operation.
Check harness, connector and fan motor related
circuit.

U5-30 SPF tray lift-up trouble

U5-31 SPF tray lift-down trouble

U6-09 LCC lift motor trouble

U6-20 LCC communication trouble

U6-21 LCC transport motor trouble

U6-22 LCC 24V power abnormality

U6-23 LCC tray descending trouble
(reverse winding detection)

U6-24 LCC tray lock detection trouble

U6-51 LCC incompatibility trouble

UC-02 CPT-ASIC trouble
Trouble content Lift-up trouble is detected 5 times continuously.
(STUD does not turn ON within the specified time.)
Section SCU
Case 1 Cause STUD/STLD trouble
Check and
remedy
Check STUD/STLD and its harness and connector.
Trouble content Lift-down trouble (STLD does not turn OFF within
the specified time.)
Section SCU
Case 1 Cause STUD/STLD trouble
Check and
remedy
Check STUD/STLD and its harness and connector.
Trouble content The encoder input value is not changed in
0.2sec (1st time)/0.5sec (2nd time and later)
after rotation of the motor.
The motor is rotated for 24sec (LCX2)/48sec
(LCX3) or more.
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Sensor trouble, LCC control PWB trouble, gear
breakage, lift motor trouble
Check and
remedy
Use SIM4-2 and 4-3 to check the operation of the
sensor and the lift motor. Use SIM15 to cancel the
trouble.
Trouble content LCC communication error. Communication line test
error after turning ON the power or canceling the
exclusive simulation. LCC and machine model
codes discrepancy error
Section PCU
disconnection, LCC control PWB trouble, control
(PCU) PWB trouble, malfunction due to electrical
noises
Check and
remedy
Turn OFF/ON the power to cancel the trouble.
Check the connector and the harness of the
communication line.
Trouble content After passing 1 sec from turning ON the motor, the
lock state of the motor lock signal is detected
continuously for 1 sec.
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Motor lock, motor RPM abnormality, an
overcurrent to the motor, LCC control PWB trouble
Check and
remedy
Use SIM4-3 to check the operation of the transport
motor.
Trouble content DC24V power is not supplied to LCC.
Section PCU
disconnection, LCC control PWB trouble, power
unit trouble
Check and
remedy
Check the connector and the harness of the power
line. Check that the power unit and the LCC control
PWB is of 24V.
Trouble content Reverse winding of the LCC tray wire is detected.
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Reverse winding of the wire
Check and
remedy
Check the wire.
Check and
remedy
harness.
Case 3 Cause Reverse winding detection SW-ON, reverse
winding detection SW trouble, LCC control PWB
trouble
Check and
remedy
Replace the reverse winding SW and the LCC
control PWB.
Trouble content Malfunction of the LCC tray lock mechanism is
detected.
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Tray lock mechanism trouble
Check and
remedy
Check the tray lock mechanism.
Check and
remedy
harness.
Case 3 Cause Tray lock detection sensor trouble, LCC control
PWB trouble
Check and
remedy
Replace the tray lock detection sensor and the
LCC control PWB.
Trouble content Detection of LCC connection which is incompatible
with the MX-5500N/6200N/7000N series.
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Connection of the LCC, which is incompatible with
the MX-5500N/6200N/7000N series is detected.
Check and
remedy
Connect the MX-LCX2/MX-LCX3.
Trouble content CPT-ASIC access error (When the ASIC does not
operate normally.)
Section SCU
Case 1 Cause 1) CPT-ASIC abnormality
2) SCU PWB abnormality
Check and
remedy
Turn OFF/ON the power several times. If the
trouble still occurs, replace the SCU PWB or the
CPT-ASIC.

UC-20 Document control module trouble

UC-21 DOCC (Document Control) PWB
not-detected (DSK model only)
Trouble content Communication error between SCU and DOCC
Communication line test error when turning on the
power or after canceling an exclusion simulation.
Section SCU
Case 1 Cause Connector or harness connection error or
disconnection
Check and
remedy
communication line.
Case 2 Cause Control (SCU) PWB trouble. DOCC PWB trouble.
Check and
remedy
Replace the SCU PWB or the DOCC PWB.
Check and
remedy
Turn OFF/ON the power to electrical cancel the
trouble.
Trouble content When the data security kit ROM (BOOT, PROG1,
2) is installed, the DOCC PWB is not detected.
Section SCU
Case 1 Cause Connector or harness connection error or
disconnection
Check and
remedy
communication line.
Case 2 Cause Control (SCU) PWB trouble. DOCC PWB trouble.
Check and
remedy
Replace the SCU PWB or the DOCC PWB.
Case 3 Cause DOCC PWB not-installed
Check and
remedy
Install the DOCC PWB.
MX-7000N MAINTENANCE 9 1
MX-7000N
Sv` Huuuu!

[9] MAINTENANCE
1. Maintenance system table
: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust : Lubricate : Shift the position.
Unit name Part name
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical parts
When
calling
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
Remark
Color supply
100
K
200
K
300
K
400
K
500
K
600
K
700
K
800
K
900
K
1000
K
Drum
peripheral
Drum (BK) Monochrome
supply

Cleaner blade (BK)
Side seal F/R (BK)
Charging unit (BK)
Drum (CL) Color supply
Cleaner blade (CL)
Charging unit (CL)
Side seal F/R (CL)
Toner reception seal (CL)
Toner stirring sheet
Cleaning brush (BK) Mechanical
parts

Discharge lamp (K)
Sub blade
Waste toner box
Developing
section
Developer (K) Monochrome
supply

DV seal (BK)
DV side seal F (BK)
DV side seal R (BK)
Toner filter (BK)
Developer (C) Color supply
Developer (M)
Developer (Y)
DV seal (CL)
DV side seal F/R (CL)
Toner filter (CL)
Toner cartridge (BK/C/M/Y) Monochrome/
Color supply
User replacement for every toner empty
(or the specified traveling distance).
Bias pin/Connector Mechanical
parts

Unit name Part name
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical parts
When
calling
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
Remark
LSU Dust proof glass Mechanical
parts

Cleaning base
Transfer
section
Primary transfer belt Mechanical
parts

Primary transfer roller
Transfer sub blade
Transfer cleaning blade
Belt drive gear
Primary transfer drive roller
Primary transfer follower
roller

Tension roller
Cleaning brush
Y auxiliary roller
Resist backup roller
Secondary transfer belt
Secondary transfer roller
Secondary belt drive roller
Secondary belt tension roller
Secondary belt follower roller
Secondary drive idle gear
PTC cleaner
PTC cleaner B
Charger wire
Transfer idle roller
Cleaner seal
Unit name Part name
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical parts
When
calling
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
Remark
200
K
400
K
600
K
800
K
1000
K
1200
K
1400
K
1600
K
1800
K
2000
K
Fusing
section
Lower heat roller Mechanical
parts (300K)
Lower heat roller
unit (Excludes the
heater lamp)
Lower roller bearing
Upper separation pawl
Lower separation pawl
Separation pawl SP
Upper thermistor sub
External thermistor main
External thermistor sub
Lower thermistor
Slider ring External heating unit
(Excludes the
heater lamp)
External heating roller
External heating belt
External heating bearing
External heating collar
External heating SP
Gears Specified positions
Paper guides
Web unit Mechanical
parts (200K)

Upper heat roller Upper heat roller
unit (Excludes the
heater lamp)
Fusing gear
Upper roller bearing
Unit name Part name
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical parts
When
calling
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
Remark
Filters Ozone filter Mechanical
parts

Toner filter
Paper exit filter
Dust filter
Paper feed
section
Paper pickup roller Mechanical
parts
Replacement
reference
Paper feed tray 1, 2:
200K or 1 year
of use
100K or 1 year
of use
Manual paper feed:
100K or 1 year
of use
Paper feed roller
Separation roller
Torque limiter
Transport
section/
Paper exit
reverse
section
Resist roller (Idle) Mechanical
parts

Transport rollers
Paper dust cleaner unit
Discharge brush
Transport paper guides
Gears When checking,
apply to the
necessary positions
(specified positions).
Drive
section
Gears (Grease) Mechanical
parts
When checking,
apply to the
necessary positions
UKOG-0307FCZZ
Shaft earth sections
(Conduction grease)
When checking,
apply to the
necessary positions
UKOG-0012QSZZ
Belts
Sensors (Process control/
Resist sensors)

Image
quality/
Others
Sensors Mechanical
parts

Optical
section
Mirror/Lens/Reflector/CCD Mechanical
parts

Table glass/SPF glass
Scanner lamp
Rails Specified positions
Drive belt/Drive wire
DSPF Paper feed
section/
Transport
section
Paper feed
roller
Mechanical
parts

Pickup roller
Separation
roller

No. 1 resist
roller

Transport roller
1 (PS front)

No. 2 resist
roller (PS)

Platen roller
Transport roller
2 (after first
scanning)

Transport roller
3 (after second
scanning)

Paper exit roller
Discharge
brush

Torque limiter
(for separation)

No. 1 scanning
plate

No. 2 scanning
section,
scanning glass

No. 2 scanning
section, white
reference glass

Optical
section
Mirror
Lens/CCD
Scanner lamp/
Reflector

Others OC mat
Drive
section
Gears (Specified positions)
UKOG-0299FCZZ
Belts
Unit name Part name
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical parts
When
calling
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
Remark
2. Details of maintenance
A. Drum peripheral
No. Part name
Monochrome supply/
Mechanical parts When
calling
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
Remark
Color supply
100
K
200
K
300
K
400
K
500
K
600
K
700
K
800
K
900
K
1000
K
1 Drum (BK) Monochrome supply
2 Cleaner blade (BK)
3 Side seal F/R (BK)
4 Charging unit (BK)
5 Drum (CL) Color supply
6 Cleaner blade (CL)
7 Charging unit (CL)
8 Side seal F/R (CL)
9 Toner reception seal (CL)
10 Toner stirring sheet
11 Cleaning brush (BK) Mechanical parts
12 Discharge lamp (K)
13 Sub blade
14 Waste toner box
1
5
6
8
8
9
7
11
12
2
10
3
14
3
4
13
The PM cycle means the replacement timing of periodic replace-
ment consumable parts and other parts for maintaining the perfor-
mance.
The PM cycle is specified only for B/W output. For color output, it is
used as a reference value.
[REASON]
Since the ratio of B/W to color differs depending on the user's oper-
ation scene and other conditions which varies every day, the PM
cycle cannot be specified in a certain cycle for color output.
Replacement of a PM item at the recommended life is performed
by the dealer's judgment or at PM call or at EM call.
Definition of drum life end
When the drum counter exceeds the specified level of 100% black
output or 100% full color output, it is judged as life end.
However in practice, wear cannot be specified by the number of
sheets of output because racing is increased in the tandem engine
by the mixing ratio of black and color outputs or when black output
is made in the color mode in ACS. For the reference of product
quality, wear is specified by the drum rotations. The rotation of the
MX-5500/MX-6200/MX-7000 series drum rotation is 840K.
The drum life is affected by the print quantity of one job. This is
because the actual life is determined by the rotations of the drum.
When the print quantity of one job is less than 6, the number of
rotations for one page is increased. As shown in the graph below,
therefore, the drum life quantity varies for each print quantity of one
job.
As a reference of the drum life, "Life meter" can be checked with
SIM22-1 according to each drum rotations.
"Life meter" indicates the remained life (%) of the drum with the
entire drum life as 100%.
(Example) If the used number of rotations is 550K:
100 (%) - 550 (K rotations)/ 840 (K rotations) x 100 = 040 (%)
B. LSU
Drum counter Number of rotations of drum
B/W Full color B/W Full color
Drum 3000K pages 100K pages 840K rotations 840K rotations
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Number of multi print quantity (Unit: sheet)
Black Drum
Color Drum
Drum Life
D
r
u
m
L
i
f
e
No. Part name
Monochrome supply/
Mechanical parts
When
calling
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
Remark
1 Dust proof glass Mechanical parts
2 Cleaning base
1
2
1
1
1
C. Developing section
No. Part name
Monochrome supply/
Mechanical parts When
calling
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
Remark
Color supply
100
K
200
K
300
K
400
K
500
K
600
K
700
K
800
K
900
K
1000
K
1 Developer (K) Monochrome supply
2 DV seal (BK)
3 DV side seal F (BK)
4 DV side seal R (BK)
5 Toner filter (BK)
6 Developer (C) Color supply
7 Developer (M)
8 Developer (Y)
9 DV seal (CL)
10 DV side seal F/R (CL)
11 Toner filter (CL)
12 Toner cartridge (BK/C/M/Y) Monochrome/
Color supply
User replacement for every toner empty (or the specified traveling distance).
13 Bias pin/Connector Mechanical parts
1
3
13
13
9
13
10
13
12
6,7,8
10
11
13
2
5
4
D. Transfer section
No. Part name
Monochrome supply/
Mechanical parts
When
calling
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
Remark
1 Primary transfer belt Mechanical parts
2 Primary transfer roller
3 Transfer sub blade
4 Transfer cleaning blade
5 Belt drive gear
6 Primary transfer drive roller
7 Primary transfer follower roller
8 Tension roller
9 Cleaning brush
10 Y auxiliary roller
11 Resist backup roller
12 Secondary transfer belt
13 Secondary transfer roller
14 Secondary belt drive roller
15 Secondary belt tension roller
16 Secondary belt follower roller
17 Secondary drive idle gear
18 PTC cleaner
19 PTC cleaner B
20 Charger wire
21 Transfer idle roller
22 Cleaner seal
1
12
13
5
14
16
15
17
3
4
9
22
22
9
2
2
2
2
6
11
10
7
8
21
21
18
19
20
E. Fusing section
No. Part name
Monochrome supply/
Mechanical parts
When
calling
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
Remark
200
K
400
K
600
K
800
K
1000
K
1200
K
1400
K
1600
K
1800
K
2000
K
1 Lower heat roller Mechanical parts
(300K)
Lower heat roller unit
(Excludes the heater lamp) 2 Lower roller bearing
3 Upper separation pawl
4 Lower separation pawl
5 Separation pawl SP
6 Upper thermistor sub
7 External thermistor main
8 External thermistor sub
9 Lower thermistor
10 Slider ring External heating unit
(Excludes the heater lamp) 11 External heating roller
12 External heating belt
13 External heating bearing
14 External heating collar
15 External heating SP
16 Gears Specified positions
17 Paper guides
18 Web unit Mechanical parts
(200K)

19 Upper heat roller Upper heat roller unit
(Excludes the heater lamp) 20 Fusing gear
21 Upper roller bearing
18
17
17
17
19
20
21
21
11
3
5
12
3
5
3
16
16 16
16
6
2
1
2
4
14
14
4
5
13
13
14
5
9
10
10
15
15
8
7
F. Optical section
No. Part name
Monochrome supply/
Mechanical parts
When
calling
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
Remark
1 Mirror/Lens/Reflector/CCD Mechanical parts
2 Table glass/SPF glass
3 Scanner lamp
4 Rails Specified positions
5 Drive belt/Drive wire
1
2
4
1
4
3
5
1
5
G. Filters
No. Part name
Monochrome supply/
Mechanical parts
When
calling
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
Remark
1 Ozone filter Mechanical parts
2 Toner filter
3 Paper exit filter
4 Dust filter
1
1
4
3
2
2
H. Paper feed section
No. Part name
Monochrome supply/
Mechanical parts
When
calling
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
Remark
1 Paper pickup roller Mechanical parts Replacement reference
200K or 1 year of use
Manual paper feed:
2 Paper feed roller
3 Separation roller
4 Torque limiter
1
2
4
4
2
3
1
1
3
2
1
2
4
3
3
4
1
2
3
4
I. Transport section/Paper exit reverse section
No. Part name
Monochrome supply/
Mechanical parts
When
calling
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
Remark
1 Resist roller (Idle) Mechanical parts
2 Transport rollers
3 Paper dust cleaner unit
4 Discharge brush
1
2
2
2
3
2
2
4
4
2
4
J. Drive section
No. Part name
Monochrome supply/
Mechanical parts
When
calling
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
Remark
1 Gears (Grease) Mechanical parts When checking, apply to
the necessary positions
UKOG-0307FCZZ
2 Shaft earth sections
(Conduction grease)
When checking, apply to
the necessary positions
UKOG-0012QSZZ
3 Belts
1
1
2
2
3
K. Image quality/Others
No. Part name
Monochrome supply/
Mechanical parts
When
calling
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
Remark
1 Sensors Mechanical parts
1
L. DSPF
No. Part name
Monochrome supply/
Mechanical parts
When
calling
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
Remark
1 Paper feed
section/
Transport
section
Paper feed roller Mechanical parts
2 Pickup roller
3 Separation roller
4 No. 1 resist roller
5 Transport roller 1
(PS front)

(PS)

7 Platen roller
(after first scanning)

(after second
scanning)

10 Paper exit roller
11 Discharge brush
12 Torque limiter (for
separation)

13 No. 1 scanning
plate

14 No. 2 scanning
section, scanning
glass

15 No. 2 scanning
section, white
reference glass

16 Optical
section
Mirror
17 Lens/CCD
18 Scanner lamp/
Reflector

19 Others OC mat
20 Drive
section
Gears (Specified positions)
UKOG-0299FCZZ
21 Belts
10
9
8
13
15
16
17
21
18
21
21
20
17
14
5
6
7
3
2
12
19
1
4
11
3. Other related items
A. Maintenance timing display
The message of maintenance execution timing is displayed when
each counter reaches the set value. The relationship between the
messages and the counters is shown blow.
(1) (Maintenance timing) (Frameless)
a. Maintenance related
After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-4 (Mainte-
nance counters (total, color) clear).
b. Transfer unit
After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-4 (Primary
and secondary transfer unit counters (number of the transfer unit
print counter, accumulated traveling distance of the transfer unit,
days of use of the transfer unit) clear).
c. Fusing unit related
After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-4 (Fusing
unit counters (number of the fusing unit print counter, days of use
of the fusing unit) clear).
d. Drum related
After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-7 (Drum
counters (number of the drum print counter, accumulated travel-
ing distance of the drum) clear).
e. Developer related
After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-5 (Devel-
oper counters (number of the developer print counter, accumu-
lated traveling distance of the developer) clear).
(2) [Maintenance timing] (Framed)
a. Maintenance related
After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-4 (Mainte-
nance counters (total, color) clear).
(3) [Check the waste toner box.] (Framed)
After detection of the waste toner full, reset the full detection by
opening/close of the front door.
Code Content
Print job
Enable/Disable
TA The maintenance counters (total) reaches 90%
of the set value of SIM21-1, or they reaches
the set value of SIM21-1 but SIM26-38 is set to
Print Enable.
Enable
CA The maintenance counters (color) reaches
90% of the set value of SIM21-1, or they
reaches the set value of SIM21-1 but SIM26-
38 is set to Print Enable.
Enable
AA The maintenance counters (both of total and
color) reaches 90% of the set value of SIM21-
1, or they reaches the set value of SIM21-1 but
SIM26-38 is set to Print Enable.
Enable
Code Content
Print job
Enable/Disable
TK1 Primary transfer belt life end: 300K Enable
TK2 Secondary transfer belt life end: 300K Enable
Code Content
Print job
Enable/Disable
FK1 Fusing upper heat roller life end: 200K Enable
FK2 Fusing lower/external heat roller life end: 300K Enable
FK3 Fusing web life end: 200K Enable
Code Content
Print job
Enable/Disable
DK Drum life end (K) print counter: 300K or the
accumulated rotation number (K) of 840K.
Enable
DC Drum life end (C) print counter: 100K or the
accumulated rotation number (C) of 840K.
Enable
DM Drum life end (M) print counter: 100K or the
accumulated rotation number (M) of 840K.
Enable
DY Drum life end (Y) print counter: 100K or the
accumulated rotation number (Y) of 840K.
Enable
Code Content
Print job
Enable/Disable
VK Developer life end (K) print counter: 300K or
the accumulated rotation number (K) of 840K.
Enable
VC Developer life end (C) print counter: 100K or
the accumulated rotation number (C) of 840K.
Enable
VM Developer life end (M) print counter: 100K or
the accumulated rotation number (M) of 840K.
Enable
VY Developer life end (Y) print counter: 100K or
the accumulated rotation number (Y) of 840K.
Enable
Code Content
Print job
Enable/Disable
TA The maintenance counters (total) reaches the
set value of SIM21-1, and SIM26-38 is set to
Print Disable.
Disable
CA The maintenance counters (color) reaches the
set value of SIM21-1, and SIM26-38 is set to
Print Disable.
Disable
AA The maintenance counters (both of total and
color) reaches the set value of SIM21-1, and
SIM26-38 is set to Print Disable.
Disable
Code Content
Print job
Enable/Disable
Waste toner full Disable
MX-7000N ROM VERSION-UP 10 1
MX-7000N
Sv` Huuuu!

[10] ROM VERSION-UP
1. General
A. Cases where version-up is required
ROM version-up is required in the following cases:
1) When there is a necessity to upgrade the performance.
2) When installing a new spare ROM to the machine for repair.
3) When installing a new spare PWB unit with ROM installed to it.
4) When there is a trouble in the programs in ROM and it must be
repaired.
B. Notes for version-up
(1) Relationship between each ROM and version-up
Before execution of ROM version-up, check combinations with
ROMs installed in the other PWBs including options.
Some combinations of versions may cause malfunctions of the
machine.
C. Update procedures and kinds of firmware
There are following methods of downloading of the firmware.
1) Firmware download using media
2) Firmware download using FTP
3) Firmware download using Web page
Firmware types
NOTE: If the MFPcnt PWB DIP SW No. 2 is not set to ON, an error
occurs.
2. Version-up procedure
A. Firmware download using media
(1) Firmware update from USB memory device
First you must install the firmware file (xxx.sfu) to the root of a
USB jump drive.
If the firmware is in a folder, Simulation 49-01 cannot open
the folder.
Secure Jumpdrive will not work.
Must have a minimum of 32MB of storage capacity to load
the firmware onto it.
1) Insert the USB memory device into the main unit.
2) Enter the 49-01 screen. Press the button of the file to be
updated. The screen transfers to the update screen.
(In this screen, [FILE 1] is selected)
* The number of button changes depending on the number of
the file in the USB memory device inserted.
Flash ROM Contents
Machine ALL Includes all contents shown below.
ICU(BOOT) ANIME
CONFIG
ESCP_FONT
PDL_FONT
ANIMATION
COLOR PROFILE
GRAPHIC
SLIST
ICU(MAIN) ICU(MAIN)
IMG-ASIC IMAGE DATA
SCU SCU(MAIN)
PCU PCU(MAIN)
DSPF DSPF(MAIN)
Option FAX FAX OPTION(MAIN)
4K FINISHER 4KFIN(MAIN)
SADDLE UNIT SADDLE(MAIN)
INSERTER INSERTER(MAIN)
A3 LCC A3LCC(MAIN)
A4 LCC A4LCC(MAIN)
+
USB Memor y
USB Host
Firmware.
Firmware.sfu
Firmware.
Media
Adapter
Firmware.
The machine recognizes the
media and automatically executes
processing.
SIMULATION NO.49-01
TEST
FIRMWARE UPDATE/usbbd00/**********/
FILE1 FILE2
FILE3 FILE4
1/1
CLOSE
..
3) Current version number and the version number to be updated
will be shown for each firmware respectively.
Following key-codes will be changed;
NOW CURRENT
NEXT UPDATED TO
4) Select the button of the firmware to be updated. The button will
be highlighted. (In this screen, [ICU(MAIN)] and [LANGUAGE]
are selected.) At the same time, [EXECUTE] button appears.
* Press the selected button again to release the selection.
* Press [ALL] button to select all items.
5) Press [EXECUTE] button. ARE YOU SURE? [YES] [NO]
becomes clear. If no button is selected, [EXECUTE] button is
gray out and cannot be pressed. Press [YES] to start the
update.
6) At the completion of the upgrade, the display will change to:
"COMPLETE: PLEASE TOUCH [OK] TO FINISH" Press OK.
The Imager will reboot at this time.
7) Go to Simulation 22-05 and confirm the firmware has
upgraded successfully.
Note: If the Imager locks up or loses power during the
upgrade, it could corrupt the firmware, preventing the
imager from booting up normally. If this occurs, you can
"rescue" the firmware using the following procedure:
Rename the firmware file on the USB device to emup-
date.sfu
Power off the imager (both switches) and insert the USB
device (Jumpdrive) into the USB port of the imager.
Power on the imager
The Imager will boot up into emergency update mode.
When finished, the display will read "update completed"
Power off the imager, and remove the USB device
Reboot the imager, and go simulation 22-05 to confirm
firmware has upgraded successfully.
TEST
FIRMWARE UPDATE
ICU(MAIN) CURRENT 01.00.00.00 UPDATED TO 01.01.00.00 :
1/3
ICU(BOOTM) CURRENT 09.00.00.00 UPDATED TO 01.00.00.00 :
ICU(BOOTS) CURRENT 01.01.00.00 UPDATED TO 09.00.00.00
:
LANGUAGE CURRENT 01.00.00.00 UPDATED TO 01.01.00.00 :
GRAPHIC CURRENT 01.00.00.00 UPDATED TO 01.01.00.00 :
SLIST CURRENT 09.00.00.00 UPDATED TO 01.00.00.00 :
PCU(BOOT) CURRENT 01.01.00.00 UPDATED TO 09.00.00.00 :
PCU(MAIN) CURRENT 01.00.00.00 UPDATED TO 01.01.00.00 :
DESK(BOOT) CURRENT 01.00.00.00 UPDATED TO 01.01.00.00 :
A4LCC(BOOT) CURRENT 01.01.00.00 UPDATED TO 09.00.00.00 :
DESK(MAIN) CURRENT 01.01.00.00 UPDATED TO 09.00.00.00 :
CONFIG CURRENT 01.00.00.00 UPDATED TO 01.01.00.00 :
EXECUTE ALL
TEST
FIRMWARE UPDATE
ICU(MAIN) CURRENT 01.00.00.00 UPDATED TO 01.01.00.00 :
1/3
ICU(BOOTM) CURRENT 09.00.00.00 UPDATED TO 01.00.00.00 :
ICU(BOOTS) CURRENT 01.01.00.00 UPDATED TO 09.00.00.00
:
LANGUAGE CURRENT 01.00.00.00 UPDATED TO 01.01.00.00 :
GRAPHIC CURRENT 01.00.00.00 UPDATED TO 01.01.00.00 :
SLIST CURRENT 09.00.00.00 UPDATED TO 01.00.00.00 :
PCU(BOOT) CURRENT 01.01.00.00 UPDATED TO 09.00.00.00 :
PCU(MAIN) CURRENT 01.00.00.00 UPDATED TO 01.01.00.00 :
DESK(BOOT) CURRENT 01.00.00.00 UPDATED TO 01.01.00.00 :
A4LCC(BOOT) CURRENT 01.01.00.00 UPDATED TO 09.00.00.00 :
DESK(MAIN) CURRENT 01.01.00.00 UPDATED TO 09.00.00.00 :
CONFIG CURRENT 01.00.00.00 UPDATED TO 01.01.00.00 :
EXECUTE ALL
COMPLETEPLEASE TURN MAIN POWER OFF THEN ON
SIMULATION NO.49-01
TEST
FIRMWARE UPDATE
CLOSE
S E
CAUTION DO NOT POWER OFF THE MFP! FIRMWARE UPDATE IN PROGRESS!
COMPLETE : PLEASE TOUCH [OK] TO FINISH.
SIMULATION NO.49-01
TEST
FIRMWARE UPDATE
CLOSE
OK
ERROR : PLEASE TOUCH [OK] TO FINISH.
SIMULATION NO.49-01
TEST
FIRMWARE UPDATE
CLOSE
ICUM,PCU,SCU
OK
B. Firmware download using FTP
FTP software is used to transfer the firmware data (extension .sfu) from the PC to the machine. The controller recognizes the firmware identi-
fier and the machine automatically switches to firmware write mode. After the firmware is updated, the machine automatically resets.
C. Firmware download using Web page
A Web browser (service technicians Web page) is used to update
the firmware.
Update procedure
1) Start the Web browser on a PC and enter the specified URL. A
special firmware upgrade page appears.
2) Click the Update of Firmware button in the Web page. Click
the Browse button and select the firmware for the update.
3) After selecting the file, click the Submit button to send the
firmware to the Renaissance machine.
Update processing begins. While processing takes place,
Firmware Update, now processing... appears.
4) When the firmware update is finished, Firmware Update com-
pleted. Please reboot the MFP. appears. Pressing the
[Reboot] key, the machine will restart to complete the update.
The browser will shift to the following screen.
Close the browser and open again to display latest informa-
tion. will be displayed.
5) Update is completed with the above procedures.
FTP Client
Machine 2 Machine 4
Firmware.sfu
Machine 1
10.36.112.83
Machine 3
10.36.112.84
10.36.101.52 10.36.112.83
MX-7000N
MX-7000N ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 1
MX-7000N
Sv` Huuuu!

[11] ELECTRICAL SECTION
1. Block diagram
A. System block diagram
C
P
F
M
P
O
M
T
2
P
F
C
C
L
U
M
1
T
A
N
C
L
D
H
1
/2
P
A
P
E
R
C
A
S
S
E
T
T
E
C
L
U
M
2
M
P
U
C
T
R
C
1
/2
M
P
F
S
M
P
G
S
P
G
M
L
S
U
S
S
P
O
F
M
_
F
O
Z
F
M
1
/2
/3
P
S
F
M
1
/2
H
L
_
U
M
P
O
F
M
_
U
H
L
_
U
S
H
L
_
L
M
D
L
_
K
D
L
_
M
D
L
_
C
D
L
_
Y
M
C
2
T
C
A
3
/A
4
L
C
C
4
K
(
S
A
D
D
L
E
)
F
IN
R
R
C
T
F
D
P
P
D
2
P
O
D
2
P
O
D
3
T
F
D
_
R
T
F
D
2
P
O
_
T
M
P
M
P
F
D
M
P
L
D
1
M
T
O
P
1
M
T
O
P
2
M
P
E
D
C
3
P
F
D
M
P
W
D
C
L
U
D
3
C
P
E
D
3
L
S
S
_
B
K
C
3
S
P
D
C
4
S
P
D
C
P
E
D
2
L
S
S
C
4
P
F
D
C
L
U
D
2
D
S
W
_
A
D
U
A
P
P
D
1
T
C
S
_
K
A
P
P
D
2
T
C
S
_
C
T
C
S
_
M
H
T
C
S
_
K
T
C
S
_
Y
T
H
/H
U
D
_
M
T
H
1
_
L
S
U
M
S
W
D
S
W
_
F
U
C
O
IN
V
E
N
D
E
R
D
H
S
W
P
N
C
M
IM
O
R
S
_
L
E
D
O
R
S
_
P
D
C
L
M
H
P
S
O
C
S
W
C
A
R
D
R
E
A
D
E
R
A
U
D
IT
O
R
P
N
C
P
C
U
P
W
B
S
C
N
C
P
W
B
IN
V
E
R
T
E
R
P
W
B
O
P
E
P
W
B
L
V
D
S
P
W
B
C
C
D
P
W
B
M
O
T
H
E
R
P
W
B
L
S
U
C
N
T
P
W
B
M
F
P
C
P
W
B
D
R
IV
E
R
P
W
B
H
L
P
W
B
A
C
P
W
B
M
a
in
D
C
P
S
H
D
D
R
D
I/F
P
W
B
2
B
L
D
_
K
P
W
B
B
D
_
K
P
W
B
L
D
_
C
P
W
B
L
D
_
M
P
W
B
L
D
_
Y
P
W
B
W
H
P
W
B
C
o
lo
r
L
C
D
T
O
U
C
H
P
A
N
E
L
L
S
U
U
N
I
T
F
U
S
E
R
U
N
I
T
D
V
_
K
U
N
I
T
D
V
_
C
U
N
I
T
D
V
_
M
U
N
I
T
D
V
_
Y
U
N
I
T
P
S
F
E
E
D
U
N
I
T
P
A
P
E
R
O
U
T
U
N
I
T
K
P
R
O
C
E
S
S
D
R
I
V
E
U
N
I
T
P
A
P
E
R
F
E
E
D
3
U
N
I
T
T
A
N
D
E
M
P
A
P
E
R
F
E
E
D
U
N
I
T
P
A
P
E
R
F
E
E
D
4
U
N
I
T
R
I
G
H
T
D
O
O
R
U
N
I
T
M
A
N
U
A
L
P
A
P
E
R
F
E
E
D
U
N
I
T
O
P
E
R
A
T
I
O
N
U
N
I
T
C
L
IN
V
E
R
T
E
R
P
W
B
P
O
W
E
R
S
W
P
W
B
S
C
A
N
N
E
R
U
N
I
T
F
A
X
O
P
T
I
O
N
O
P
T
I
O
N
O
P
T
I
O
N
O
P
T
I
O
N
A
C
I
N
D
H
S
1
/2
D
H
_
L
C
C
S
IZ
E
D
E
T
E
C
T
P
W
B
C
3
S
S
1
-
4
O
P
T
I
O
N
O
P
T
I
O
N
S
ta
n
d
a
rd
s
:
O
n
ly
J
a
p
a
n
H
D
D
F
M
C
P
U
F
M
O
P
T
I
O
N
D
O
C
C
P
W
B
O
P
T
IO
N
E
F
I
O
P
T
I
O
N
IN
S
E
R
T
E
R
P
U
N
C
H
U
N
IT
D
C
P
S
fo
r
F
IN
O
n
ly
J
a
p
a
n
A
C
I
N
S
u
b
D
C
P
S
T
H
2
_
L
S
U
H
L
_
E
X
1
H
L
_
E
X
2
D
S
P
F
U
N
I
T
D
S
P
F
c
n
tP
W
B
C
C
D
P
W
B
C
L
C
L
IN
V
E
R
T
E
R
P
W
B
D
S
P
F
D
R
IV
E
R
P
W
B
S
P
P
D
3
S
P
P
D
4
S
P
P
D
5
S
P
P
D
1
S
P
P
D
2
S
P
R
A
N
D
O
M
S
P
O
D
S
O
C
D
R
O
C
D
S
P
O
M
S
P
F
F
A
N
S
P
F
M
S
L
U
M
S
P
U
M
S
P
F
C
S
R
R
C
S
R
R
B
C
S
T
R
C
S
T
M
P
S
S
T
R
R
C
S
T
R
R
B
C
O
P
T
IO
N
S
P
L
S
1
S
P
L
S
2
S
C
O
V
S
T
L
D
S
P
E
D
1
S
P
E
D
2
S
T
U
D
D
V
C
R
U
M
_
Y
T
O
N
E
R
_
Y
U
N
I
T
P
T
C
D
V
C
R
U
M
_
M
T
O
N
E
R
_
M
U
N
I
T
D
V
C
R
U
M
_
C
T
O
N
E
R
_
C
U
N
I
T
D
V
C
R
U
M
_
K
1
T
O
N
E
R
_
K
1
U
N
I
T
D
V
C
R
U
M
_
K
2
T
O
N
E
R
_
K
2
U
N
I
T
T
M
_
K
2
T
M
_
K
1
T
M
_C
T
M
_
M
T
M
_
Y
H
T
M
_K
1
H
T
M
_C
H
T
M
_
M
H
T
M
_
Y
H
T
C
S
_Y
H
T
C
S
_M
H
T
C
S
_
C
D
M
_
K
D
V
K
M
B
T
M
C
C
M
P
T
C
M
D
H
P
D
_
K
B
L
T
C
L
B
L
T
C
L
_
R
D
M
_
C
D
H
P
D
_
C
D
M
_
M
D
H
P
D
_
M
D
M
_
Y
D
H
P
D
_
Y
T
B
L
T
C
C
O
L
O
R
P
R
O
C
E
S
S
D
R
I
V
E
U
N
I
T
P
C
S
S
R
E
G
S
_
F
P
C
S
R
E
G
S
_
R
R
E
G
I
S
T
S
E
N
S
O
R
U
N
I
T
D
S
W
_
R
P
T
C
M
H
P
D
S
W
_
F
L
T
H
_
U
M
T
H
_
U
S
T
H
_
E
X
1
T
H
_
E
X
2
T
H
_
L
M
W
E
B
_
IN
L
/E
N
D
P
O
D
1
F
U
M
F
E
X
D
F
U
F
M
_
R
F
U
F
M
_
F
F
E
X
M
A
D
U
G
S
A
D
M
L
A
D
M
H
T
U
R
M
T
H
P
S
1
T
C
V
F
M
_
R
V
F
M
_
C
L
C
C
M
P
F
M
R
R
M
M
P
U
C
L
P
F
C
C
C
H
P
P
H
T
M
_
K
1
C
C
M
D
P
P
D
1
R
R
C
2
T
1
P
F
C
T
2
P
U
S
T
A
N
D
E
M
S
E
N
S
O
R
P
W
B
T
1
P
E
D
/
L
U
D
T
A
N
D
E
M
S
E
N
S
O
R
P
W
B
T
2
P
E
D
/
L
U
D
T
1
P
P
D
1
T
1
P
P
D
2
T
1
S
P
D
T
2
S
P
D
T
1
P
U
S
T
A
N
S
E
T
T
1
L
U
M
T
2
L
U
M
C
3
L
U
M
C
4
L
U
M
S
IZ
E
D
E
T
E
C
T
P
W
B
C
4
S
S
1
-
4
C
3
P
U
S
C
4
P
U
S
C
3
P
W
D
W
T
M
C
F
M
V
T
O
D
D
S
W
_
D
T
N
F
D
T
B
B
O
X
D
V
K
D
r
iv
e
r
P
W
B
P
H
T
M
_
K
2
D
T
B
F
M
T
1
P
P
D
L
P
P
D
A
C
T
A
P
P
U
N
IT
B. MFP controller PWB
CPU
RM7965A
-900
SYSTEM
ASIC
S
O
-
D
I
M
M
D
I
M
M
2
S
O
-
D
I
M
M
D
I
M
M
1
D
D
R
S
D
R
A
M
x
2
DDR bus 1
ICU
ASIC
IDE
ASIC
FLASH
Mem. x2
LOCAL bus
(ROM bus)
PCI bus 2
ATA
connector
IDE bus
P
C
I
b
u
s
1
E
N
G
I
N
E
I
F
c
o
n
n
e
c
t
o
r
LSUIF
SCAN IN IF
VIDEOIF
SCAN OUT IF
EFI connector
OPE IF
SDR
FLASH
FLASH IF
LAN
JACK
LAN
USB-D
USB-H
L
V
D
S
DDR bus 3
64bits width
64bits width
32bits width
EEPROM
256Kbits
I2C (Ch.0)
I2C (Ch.0)
I2C (Ch.1)
EEPROM
2Kbits
MicroWire
Control
signals
UART
RS232C
Transmitter
UART
PCU,SCN
UART
FAX
(OPT)
UART
for Debug
CPLD
CPLD
Expansion
PCI connector
USB
DEV
USB
HOST
Piano
SW
VBUS
SW
Ether
MAC
RIC
(RS232C)
L
V
D
S
I
C
3
8
5
/
3
8
6
/
0
4
7
/
0
4
8
SRAM
RTC
Battery
IF
ASIC
SDR
SDRAM
IMG
ASIC
IO
EXPAND
72pinDIMM Socket
100pinDIMM Socket
72pinDIMM Socket
72pinDIMM Socket
72pinDIMM Socket
72pinDIMM Socket
72pinDIMM Socket
S
O
-
D
I
M
M
D
I
M
M
3
S
O
-
D
I
M
M
D
I
M
M
4
DDR bus 2
SYSAD bus
LOCAL bus
(LSI bus)
I
M
G
-
C
B
u
s
(
I
m
a
g
e
p
r
o
c
e
s
s
)
I
M
G
-
B
B
u
s
(
A
r
e
a
s
e
p
a
r
a
t
i
o
n
)
IMG-A Bus
(Auto Color)
C. PCU PWB
I
C
1
C
P
U
H
8
S
/
2
3
7
3
I
C
4
/
I
C
8
S
R
A
M
(
1
M
b
i
t
x
2
)
F
L
A
S
H
R
O
M
(
1
6
M
b
i
t
)
I
C
6
E
E
P
R
O
M
(
2
5
6
k
b
i
t
)
I
C
1
1
P
M
C
A
S
I
C
I
C
7
I
/
O
A
S
I
C
I
C
9
/
I
C
2
7
D
F
F
L
C
X
5
7
4
I
C
2
9
/
I
C
3
0
M
U
X
H
C
1
5
1
x
2
C
L
O
C
K
F
I
N
I
S
H
E
R
U
A
R
T
U
A
R
T
I
C
3
R
E
S
E
T
I
C
L
S
U
L
C
C
O
p
t
i
o
n
a
l
T
o
M
F
P
C
V
i
a
M
o
t
h
e
r
U
A
R
T
U
A
R
T
D
C
P
o
w
e
r
S
u
p
p
l
y
X
1
X
t
a
l
1
9
.
6
6
0
8
M
H
z
I
C
2
S
p
r
e
a
d
S
p
e
c
t
r
u
m
S
e
n
s
o
r
I
n
p
u
t
(
P
P
D
2
)
S
e
n
s
o
r
I
n
p
u
t
(
P
P
D
1
-
3
)
/
(
D
S
W
_
R
/
D
/
F
U
/
F
L
)
/
(
B
E
L
T
_
H
P
)
(
C
3
P
E
D
)
/
(
C
4
P
E
D
)
/
(
T
F
D
)
/
(
C
C
H
P
)
(
F
P
D
_
C
L
/
B
K
)
/
(
C
3
P
F
D
)
/
(
P
O
D
1
)
/
(
T
B
L
T
B
)
(
A
P
P
D
1
-
2
)
/
(
T
B
L
T
C
)
/
(
C
3
S
S
1
-
4
)
(
C
4
S
S
1
-
4
)
/
(
T
1
P
P
D
1
-
2
)
/
(
L
P
P
D
)
/
(
T
2
L
U
D
)
(
T
1
L
U
D
)
/
(
C
4
S
P
D
)
/
(
C
4
L
U
D
)
/
(
C
4
P
F
D
)
(
V
T
O
D
)
/
(
C
3
S
P
D
)
/
(
C
3
L
U
D
)
/
(
M
P
F
D
)
(
D
H
P
D
_
K
/
C
/
M
/
Y
)
/
(
T
2
P
P
D
)
/
(
T
A
N
S
E
T
)
(
T
2
P
E
D
)
/
(
T
1
P
E
D
)
/
(
T
2
S
P
D
)
/
(
T
1
S
P
D
)
C
R
U
M
(
C
R
U
M
_
C
/
M
/
Y
/
K
1
/
K
2
)
I
C
7
0
D
/
A
C
o
n
v
(
T
C
S
/
R
E
G
S
c
o
n
t
)
L
o
a
d
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
O
u
t
p
u
t
C
o
i
n
v
e
n
d
o
r
(
O
p
t
i
o
n
a
l
)
S
t
e
p
p
i
n
g
M
o
t
o
r
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
P
o
u
t
M
o
t
o
r
(
P
O
M
)
A
D
U
M
o
t
o
r
(
A
D
M
L
/
(
A
D
M
H
)
P
S
F
M
o
t
o
r
(
P
F
M
)
D
r
u
m
M
o
t
o
r
B
K
(
D
M
_
K
)
D
r
u
m
M
o
t
o
r
C
L
(
D
M
_
C
/
M
/
Y
)
B
e
l
t
M
o
t
o
r
(
B
T
M
)
L
C
C
M
o
t
o
r
(
L
C
C
M
)
F
u
s
e
r
R
e
l
e
a
s
e
M
o
t
o
r
(
F
U
E
X
M
)
F
u
s
e
r
u
n
i
t
H
L
c
o
n
t
r
o
l
(
H
L
_
U
M
/
L
M
/
U
S
/
E
X
)
S
e
n
s
o
r
I
n
p
u
t
(
D
V
K
_
C
H
)
/
(
C
C
M
_
R
O
T
)
(
P
T
C
M
_
R
O
T
/
H
P
)
(
T
N
F
D
)
/
(
H
T
C
S
_
K
/
C
/
M
/
Y
)
(
F
U
E
X
D
)
/
(
W
E
B
_
I
N
L
/
E
N
D
)
L
o
a
d
c
o
n
t
r
o
l
O
u
t
p
u
t
(
P
C
S
S
)
/
(
M
P
F
S
)
/
(
T
A
N
C
L
)
(
L
S
S
_
C
L
)
/
(
B
L
T
C
L
_
R
)
(
B
L
T
C
L
)
/
(
L
S
S
_
B
K
)
U M / L M / U S
F
A
N
M
o
t
o
r
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
P
S
F
a
n
(
P
S
F
M
1
-
2
)
O
z
o
n
e
F
a
n
(
O
Z
F
M
1
-
3
)
P
o
u
t
F
a
n
(
P
O
F
M
_
F
/
U
)
F
u
s
e
r
F
a
n
(
F
U
F
M
_
F
/
R
/
D
T
B
F
M
)
V
e
n
t
i
l
a
t
i
o
n
F
a
n
(
V
F
M
_
C
/
R
)
F
l
a
s
h
W
r
i
t
e
P
r
o
t
e
c
t
H
V
M
C
/
T
C
2
u
n
i
t
/
P
T
C
u
n
i
t
3 - w i r e d s e r i a l
D
i
s
c
h
a
r
g
e
L
a
m
p
(
D
L
_
K
/
C
/
M
/
Y
)
D
C
M
o
t
o
r
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
D
V
M
o
t
o
r
B
K
(
D
V
K
M
)
D
V
M
o
t
o
r
C
L
(
D
V
C
M
)
P
a
p
e
r
F
e
e
d
M
o
t
o
r
(
C
P
F
M
)
R
e
s
i
s
t
M
o
t
o
r
(
R
R
M
)
F
u
s
e
r
M
o
t
o
r
(
F
U
M
)
W
a
s
t
e
T
o
n
e
r
M
o
t
o
r
(
W
T
M
)
S
e
n
s
o
r
I
n
p
u
t
T
B
B
O
X
F
A
N
L
o
c
k
D
e
t
e
c
t
(
P
O
F
M
_
L
D
1
-
3
)
/
(
O
Z
F
M
_
L
D
1
-
3
)
(
F
U
F
M
_
R
_
F
D
)
/
(
F
U
F
M
_
F
_
L
D
)
(
V
F
M
_
C
_
L
D
)
/
(
V
F
M
_
R
_
L
D
)
(
P
S
F
M
_
L
D
1
-
2
)
I
C
7
1
/
I
C
7
2
/
I
C
8
2
A
n
a
l
o
g
M
U
X
x
3
A
n
a
l
o
g
I
n
p
u
t
T
e
m
p
/
H
u
m
s
e
n
s
o
r
(
T
H
_
M
/
H
U
D
_
M
)
L
S
U
T
h
e
r
m
i
s
t
o
r
(
T
H
1
_
L
S
U
/
T
H
2
_
L
S
U
)
D
V
d
e
t
e
c
t
o
r
(
D
V
T
Y
P
_
C
/
M
/
Y
/
K
1
/
K
2
)
F
u
s
e
r
T
h
e
r
m
i
s
t
o
r
(
T
H
_
U
M
/
L
M
/
U
S
/
E
X
1
/
E
X
2
)
P
a
p
e
r
O
u
t
T
h
e
r
m
i
s
t
o
r
(
P
O
_
T
M
P
)
D
r
u
m
M
a
r
k
S
e
n
s
o
r
(
D
M
S
)
F
W
S
e
n
s
o
r
I
n
p
u
t
C
O
I
N
V
E
N
D
O
R
(
O
p
t
i
o
n
a
l
)
(
C
V
_
C
L
C
O
P
Y
/
C
O
P
Y
)
L
o
a
d
o
u
t
p
u
t
M
e
c
h
a
n
i
c
a
l
C
o
u
n
t
e
r
(
O
p
t
i
o
n
a
l
)
(
P
N
C
_
K
/
C
L
)
S
y
n
c
r
o
n
o
u
s
M
o
t
o
r
T
o
n
e
r
M
o
t
o
r
(
T
N
_
C
/
M
/
Y
/
K
1
/
K
2
)
D
C
M
o
t
o
r
T
r
a
y
L
i
f
t
U
p
M
o
t
o
r
(
T
1
L
U
M
)
/
(
T
2
L
U
M
)
(
C
3
L
U
M
)
/
(
C
4
L
U
M
)
S
e
n
s
o
r
I
n
p
u
t
(
D
S
W
_
A
D
U
)
/
(
T
F
D
3
)
/
(
M
P
L
D
)
(
M
T
O
P
1
-
2
)
/
(
M
P
E
D
)
M
U
X
H
C
1
5
1
R
D
I
/
F
P
W
B
S
y
n
c
r
o
n
o
u
s
M
o
t
o
r
F
u
s
e
r
C
l
e
a
n
i
n
g
M
o
t
o
r
(
W
E
B
_
M
)
I
C
1
0
7
U
n
b
u
f
f
e
r
e
d
I
n
v
e
r
t
e
r
H
V
T
C
1
u
n
i
t
D
C
M
o
t
o
r
2
n
d
B
e
l
t
R
e
l
e
a
s
e
M
o
t
o
r
(
T
U
R
M
)
C
h
a
r
g
e
r
C
l
e
a
n
e
r
M
o
t
o
r
(
C
C
M
)
/
(
P
T
C
M
)
L
o
a
d
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
O
u
t
p
u
t
(
R
R
C
)
/
(
T
1
P
U
S
)
/
(
T
2
P
U
S
)
(
C
3
P
F
C
)
/
(
M
P
G
S
)
/
(
C
4
P
F
C
)
(
T
R
C
1
-
2
)
/
(
M
P
U
C
)
/
(
A
D
U
G
S
)
(
T
2
P
F
C
)
/
(
T
1
P
F
C
)
/
(
L
P
F
C
)
(
F
P
C
L
2
)
/
(
R
R
C
2
)
/
(
F
P
C
L
1
)
(
C
3
P
U
S
)
/
(
C
4
P
U
S
)
/
(
M
F
P
S
)
E
X
D
M
C
L
K
/
B
T
M
C
L
K
D
r
i
v
e
r
P
W
B
S
y
n
c
h
r
o
n
o
u
s
M
o
t
o
r
T
o
n
e
r
H
o
p
p
e
r
M
o
t
o
r
(
H
T
M
_
K
/
C
/
M
/
Y
)
I
C
8
3
/
8
4
/
8
6
/
8
7
/
8
8
A
N
D
G
a
t
e
V
H
C
T
0
8
x
4
A
n
a
l
o
g
I
n
p
u
t
T
o
n
e
r
D
e
t
e
c
t
o
r
(
T
C
S
_
K
/
C
/
M
/
Y
)
P
r
o
c
e
s
s
C
o
n
t
.
s
e
n
s
o
r
(
P
C
S
_
K
/
C
L
)
R
e
s
i
s
t
s
e
n
s
o
r
(
R
E
G
S
_
F
/
R
)
M
u
l
t
i
-
b
y
p
a
s
s
t
r
a
y
w
i
d
t
h
s
e
n
s
o
r
(
M
P
W
D
)
I
2
C
B
u
s
D
V
K
D
r
i
v
e
r
P
W
B
S
y
n
c
h
r
o
n
o
u
s
M
o
t
o
r
T
o
n
e
r
H
o
p
p
e
r
M
o
t
o
r
(
P
H
T
M
_
K
1
)
(
P
H
T
M
_
K
2
)
A
d
d
r
e
s
s
B
u
s
[
2
1
:
0
]
D
A
T
A
B
u
s
[
1
5
:
0
]
I
2
C
B
u
s
D. Scanner control PWB
S
C
N
c
n
t
P
W
B
R
S
P
F
U
n
i
t
R
S
P
F
F
E
E
D
M
O
T
O
R
S
C
A
N
N
E
R
M
O
T
O
R
R
S
P
F
R
V
S
M
O
T
O
R
P
H
O
T
O
S
E
N
S
O
R
C
L
U
T
C
H
S
D
R
A
M
B
U
S
C
C
D
P
W
B
W
i
t
h
A
F
E
&
L
V
D
S
L
V
D
S
D
S
P
F
c
n
t
P
W
B
E
E
P
R
O
M
3
2
K
b
i
t
I
2
C
R
G
B
1
0
b
i
t
*
3
L
V
D
S
D
r
i
v
e
r
4
b
i
t
*
2
L
V
D
S
L
V
D
S
L
V
D
S
D
r
i
v
e
r
2
8
b
i
t
R
G
B
8
b
i
t
*
3
R
G
B
8
b
i
t
*
3
R
G
B
8
b
i
t
*
3
L
V
D
S
L
V
D
S
D
r
i
v
e
r
3
0
b
i
t
M
H
P
S
L
V
D
S
R
e
c
e
i
v
e
r
4
b
i
t
*
2
C
A
R
D
R
E
A
D
E
R
A
U
D
I
T
O
R
O
C
S
W
X
T
A
L
2
8
.
7
9
5
M
H
z
o
r
2
2
.
7
4
2
5
M
H
z
L
V
D
S
2
4
b
i
t
B
U
S
B
U
F
F
E
R
S
T
M
P
U
N
L
A
M
P
U
N
P
A
N
E
L
P
W
B
I
N
V
E
R
T
E
R
P
W
B
L
C
D
L
V
D
S
R
e
c
e
i
v
e
r
3
0
b
i
t
A
D
D
R
E
S
S
/
D
A
T
A
B
U
S
S
R
A
M
1
M
b
i
t
/
C
S
2
S
C
A
N
A
S
I
C
/
C
S
3
S
D
R
A
M
1
2
8
M
b
i
t
L
V
D
S
D
r
i
v
e
r
2
8
b
i
t
D
S
P
F
M
e
m
o
r
y
P
W
B
L
V
D
S
R
e
c
e
i
v
e
r
2
8
b
i
t
2
4
b
i
t
B
U
S
B
U
F
F
E
R
C
P
T
A
S
I
C
/
C
S
4
D
O
C
C
P
W
B
M
o
t
h
e
r
P
W
B
(
M
F
P
P
W
B
)
<
E
n
g
i
n
e
/
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r
>
C
P
U
H
8
S
/
2
3
7
3
X
T
A
L
1
9
.
6
6
0
8
M
H
z
F
l
a
s
h
R
O
M
<
S
o
c
k
e
t
>
8
M
b
i
t
/
C
S
0
(
/
C
S
0
R
E
S
E
R
V
E
)
I
O
A
S
I
C
/
C
S
5
O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l
d
e
t
e
c
t
i
o
n
(
L
i
g
h
t
r
e
c
e
i
v
i
n
g
)
O
r
i
g
i
n
a
l
d
e
t
e
c
t
i
o
n
(
L
i
g
h
t
e
m
i
t
t
i
n
g
)
E. Serial communication
C
P
U
H
8
S
/
2
3
7
3
T
x
D
_
L
C
C
R
x
D
_
L
C
C
T
x
D
_
F
I
N
R
x
D
_
F
I
N
O
.
C
.
O
.
C
.
O
.
C
.
O
.
C
.
P
M
C
A
S
I
C
u
P
D
6
5
9
4
6
G
J
O
.
C
.
O
.
C
.
O
.
C
.
O
.
C
.
C
P
U
M
3
0
8
4
3
F
W
G
P
S
c
h
m
it
I
n
v
.
O
.
C
.
O
.
C
.
O
.
C
.
C
P
U
H
8
/
3
6
8
7
D
T
R
_
F
I
N
D
S
R
_
F
I
N
D
T
R
_
L
C
C
D
S
R
_
L
C
C
P
C
U
F
I
N
I
S
H
E
R
(
O
p
t
i
o
n
a
l
)
L
C
C
(
O
p
t
i
o
n
a
l
)
S
c
h
m
it
I
n
v
.
O
.
C
.
O
.
C
.
O
.
C
.
A
[
4
:
0
]
D
[
1
5
:
8
]
S
c
h
m
it
I
n
v
.
S
c
h
m
it
I
n
v
.
S
c
h
m
it
I
n
v
.
S
C
K
_
L
S
U
R
S
V
_
D
A
T
T
R
A
N
S
_
D
A
T
S
c
h
m
it
I
n
v
.
S
c
h
m
it
I
n
v
.
S
c
h
m
it
I
n
v
.
L
S
U
A
S
I
C
O
.
C
.
n
P
C
U
_
R
x
D
S
c
h
m
it
I
n
v
.
n
P
C
U
_
T
x
D
O
.
C
.
P
C
U
_
D
S
R
S
c
h
m
it
I
n
v
.
P
C
U
_
D
T
R
S
c
h
m
it
I
n
v
.
O
.
C
.
S
c
h
m
it
I
n
v
.
O
.
C
.
M
F
P
C
I
/
F
A
S
I
C
O
.
C
O
.
C
.
S
c
h
m
it
I
n
v
.
O
.
C
.
n
T
x
D
_
S
C
N
n
R
x
D
_
S
C
N
R
T
S
_
S
C
N
C
P
U
H
8
S
/
2
3
7
3
C
P
U
H
8
S
/
2
3
7
3
S
c
h
m
it
I
n
v
.
S
c
h
m
it
I
n
v
.
O
.
C
S
c
h
m
it
I
n
v
.
C
T
S
_
S
C
N
S
c
h
m
it
In
v
.
T
x
D
0
S
c
h
m
it
In
v
.
O
.
C
.
O
.
C
.
S
c
h
m
it
I
n
v
.
S
c
h
m
it
In
v
.
O
.
C
.
O
.
C
.
T x D _ S C A N
R x D _ S C A N
I
/
O
A
S
I
C
u
P
D
6
5
8
9
2
G
C
O
.
C
O
.
C
.
S
c
h
m
it
I
n
v
.
O
.
C
.
F
A
X
2
D
_
R
T
S
F
A
X
2
D
_
C
T
S
F
A
X
2
C
S
_
R
T
S
S
c
h
m
it
I
n
v
.
S
c
h
m
it
I
n
v
.
O
.
C
S
c
h
m
it
I
n
v
.
F
A
X
2
C
S
_
C
T
S
P
.
D
.
P
.
U
.
P
.
D
.
P
.
U
.
P
.
D
.
P
.
U
.
P
.
U
.
P
.D
.
P
.
D
.
P
.
U
.
P
.
U
.
P
.
U
.
P
.
U
.
P
.
U
.
P
.
U
.
P
.
U
.
P
.
U
.
P
.
U
.
P
.
U
.
P
.
U
.
P
.
U
.
P
.
U
.
P
.
U
.
P
.
U
.
P
.
U
.
P
.
U
.
P
.
U
.
P
.
U
.
P
.
U
.
P
.
U
.
P
.
D
.
P
.
D
.
P
.
U
.
P
.
U
.
P
.
D
.
P
.
U
.
P
.
U
.
P
.
U
.
P
.
D
.
P
.
D
.
P
.
U
.
P
.
D
.
P . D .
P . U .
P . U .
P . D .
P . U .
P . D .
P . U .
P . D .
A
[
4
:
0
]
D
[
1
5
:
8
]
P
.
D
.
P
.
U
.
P
.
U
.
P
.
D
.
P
.
D
.
P
.
U
.
P
.
U
.
P
.
D
.
F
A
X
2
D
_
T
x
D
F
A
X
2
D
_
R
x
D
F
A
X
2
C
S
_
T
x
D
F
A
X
2
C
S
_
R
x
D
L
V
D
S
R
x
D
0
I
/
O
p
o
r
t
I
/
O
p
o
r
t
T
x
D
1
R
x
D
1
S
C
K
1
T
x
D
2
R
x
D
2
T
x
D
4
R
x
D
4
R
x
D
T
x
D
S
C
K
R
x
D
T
x
D
I
/
O
I
/
O
R
x
D
T
x
D
I
/
O
I
/
O
R
x
D
[
1
]
T
x
D
[
1
]
C
T
S
[
1
]
R
T
S
[
1
]
R
x
D
[
2
]
T
x
D
[
2
]
C
T
S
[
2
]
R
T
S
[
2
]
R
x
D
[
7
]
T
x
D
[
7
]
C
T
S
[
7
]
R
T
S
[
7
]
T
x
D
[
8
]
R
x
D
[
8
]
C
T
S
[
8
]
R
T
S
[
8
]
P
I
C
T
x
D
[
P
I
C
]
R
x
D
[
P
I
C
]
O
.
C
.
S
c
h
m
it
I
n
v
.
P
.
U
.
P
.
D
.
n
T
x
D
_
P
I
C
O
.
C
S
c
h
m
it
I
n
v
.
n
R
x
D
_
P
I
C
P
.
U
.
C
L
R
[
P
I
C
]
O
.
C
.
O
.
C
P
.
U
.
C
L
R
_
P
I
C
R
E
Q
[
P
I
C
]
S
c
h
m
it
I
n
v
.
R
E
Q
_
P
I
C
O
.
C
P
.
U
.
L
S
U
D
S
P
F
C
n
t
S
C
N
C
n
t
M
o
t
h
e
r
M
F
P
C
F
A
X
(
O
p
t
i
o
n
a
l
)
T x DR x D
TxD RxD
I / O
I/O
N
e
w
A
S
I
C
T
x
D
_
F
A
X
(
D
)
+
T
x
D
_
F
A
X
(
D
)
-
R
x
D
_
F
A
X
(
D
)
+
R
x
D
_
F
A
X
(
D
)
-
T
x
D
_
F
A
X
(
C
S
)
+
T
x
D
_
F
A
X
(
C
S
)
-
R
x
D
_
F
A
X
(
C
S
)
+
R
x
D
_
F
A
X
(
C
S
)
-
R
x
D
T
x
D
C
P
U
S
H
7
7
0
6
P
I
C
T
x
D
R
x
D
P
.
U
.
D
O
C
C
(
O
p
t
i
o
n
a
l
)
C
P
U
H
8
S
/
2
3
2
0
O
.
C
.
S
c
h
m
it
I
n
v
.
R x D
T x D
S
c
h
m
it
I
n
v
.
O
.
C
D
T
R
_
S
C
A
N
D
S
R
_
S
C
A
N
R
x
D
T
x
D
F. Interlock
5
V
2
5
V
2
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
I
N
T
5
V
L
S
U
P
W
B
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
i
n
H
L
P
R
A
C
A
C
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
H
L
P
W
B
/
I
N
T
c
n
t
I
N
T
2
4
V
_
T
M
D
S
W
-
R
(
R
i
g
h
t
d
o
o
r
)
D
S
W
-
F
L
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
i
n
2
4
V
1
(
F
r
o
n
t
d
o
o
r
l
o
w
e
r
)
6
.
3
A
2
4
V
D
S
W
-
F
L
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
i
n
2
4
V
2
2
4
V
2
I
N
T
2
4
V
2
I
N
T
2
4
V
2
6
.
3
A
A
C
P
W
B
H
L
_
U
M
H
L
_
L
M
P
T
C
P
W
B
F
E
X
M
P
T
C
C
M
D
L
_
K
P
W
B
1
T
C
P
W
B
2
T
C
P
W
B
M
C
P
W
B
W
T
M
H
L
_
E
X
1
H
L
_
U
S
L
S
U
S
S
C
L
H
L
_
E
X
2
T
M
_
M
T
M
_
K
2
T
M
_
C
D
M
_
C
L
D
_
B
K
L
D
C
L
C
M
L
D
Y
P
C
U
P
W
B
L
C
C
M
T
M
_
K
1
A
D
U
H
B
T
M
P
O
M
D
M
_
K
D
M
_
M
D
M
_
Y
A
D
U
L
D
V
C
M
C
C
M
D
R
-
D
C
P
S
D
R
I
V
E
R
P
W
B
P
S
M
F
U
M
L
S
U
S
S
B
K
T
M
_
Y
L
S
U
S
S
B
K
i
n
t
e
r
r
u
p
t
s
l
a
s
e
r
b
e
a
m
s
.
L
S
U
S
S
C
L
i
n
t
e
r
r
u
p
t
s
l
a
s
e
r
b
e
a
m
s
.
G. AC power line diagram (100V series)
H
L
O
U
T
_
U
S
IN
T
2
4
V
1
H
L
O
U
T
_
L
M
/H
L
_
P
R
H
L
O
U
T
_
E
X
2
4
V
2
G
N
D
H
L
O
U
T
_
U
M
+
5
V
o
R
Y
-C
N
T
LN
2
0
A
/2
5
0
V
T
D
2
S
S
R
2
S
S
R
1
S
S
R
3
W
H
-L
W
H
-N
N
C
N
O
1
0
W
L
C
C
T
2
.0
A
H
/2
5
0
V
W
H
-L
W
H
-N
F
3
N
/
F
A
C
IN
C
a
s
s
e
tte
T
a
n
d
e
m 1
8
W
M
a
in
u
n
it
S
C
N
S
C
N
u
n
it
1
0
W
L
C
C
(
O
P
T
I
O
N
)
T
5
A
H
/2
5
0
V
T
2
A
H
/2
5
0
V
D
C
S
U
B
P
O
W
E
R
S
U
P
P
L
Y
V
o
lta
g
e
G
e
n
e
ra
tio
n
+
5
V
o
+
5
V
L
A
C
P
W
B
n
o
-
m
o
u
n
t
in
g
n
o
-
m
o
u
n
t
in
g
n
o
-
m
o
u
n
t
in
g
W
A
R
M
H
E
A
T
E
R
S
E
T
(
O
P
T
I
O
N
)
W
H
P
W
B
H
L
P
W
B
F
W
G
e
n
e
ra
tin
g
C
irc
u
it
R
L
5
1
D
C
M
A
I
N
P
O
W
E
R
S
U
P
P
L
Y
N
/
F
V
o
lta
g
e
G
e
n
e
ra
tio
n
+
5
V
o
+
5
V
L
V
o
lta
g
e
G
e
n
e
ra
tio
n
+
2
4
V
1
+
2
4
V
2
+
2
4
V
3
+
2
4
V
4
+
2
4
V
5
+
1
2
V
+
5
V
n
+
3
.3
V
T
8
A
H
/2
5
0
V
F
W
G
e
n
e
ra
tin
g
C
irc
u
it
T
1
A
H
/2
5
0
Vd
r
a
w
e
r
H
L
_
U
S
T
S
_
L
M
T
S
_
U
S
F
U
S
I
N
G
U
N
I
T
H
L
_
L
M
T
S
_
E
X
2
H
L
_
E
X
2
A
C
1
2
5
V
1
5
A
A
C
2
5
0
V
1
0
A
A
C
1
2
0
V
1
5
A
A
C
2
4
0
V
1
0
A
A
C
1
2
5
V
1
5
A
A
C
2
5
0
V
1
0
A
H
L
_
U
M
H
L
_
E
X
1
A
C
1
2
0
V
-
T
B
D
A
A
C
2
4
0
V
-
T
B
D
A
T
S
_
E
X
1
A
C
1
2
5
V
1
5
A
A
C
2
5
0
V
1
0
A
T
S
_
U
M
F
1
0
3
F
1
0
3
~
~
+- R
C
1
0
1
~
~
+- R
C
1
0
1
L
2
L
2
A
1
A
1
V
R
3
V
R
3
Z
1
0
1
Z
1
0
1
F
6
1
L
1
L
1
F
1
0
1
F
1
0
1
A
2
A
2
~
~
+- D
1
0
2
~
~
+- D
1
0
2
V
R
2
V
R
2
F
2
F
2
W
H
-S
W
A
1
A
1
F
3
0
1
F
3
0
1
V
R
1
V
R
1
S
Q
6
1
F
1
0
2
F
1
0
2
F
1
F
1
F
1
F
1
R
Y
1
R
Y
1
M
A
I
N
P
O
W
E
R
S
W
46
2 1
T
1
T
2
G
T
D
1
46
2 1
T
1
T
2
G
T
D
3
46
2 1
T
1
T
2
G
S
S
R
4
T
D
4
6
2 1
T
1
T
2
G
R
Y
1
H. AC power line diagram (200V series)
H
L
O
U
T
_
U
S
IN
T
2
4
V
1
H
L
O
U
T
_
L
M
/H
L
_
P
R
H
L
O
U
T
_
E
X
2
4
V
2
G
N
D
H
L
O
U
T
_
U
M
+
5
V
o
R
Y
-C
N
T
D
C
C
N
T
+
5
V
1
LN
T
1
0
A
H
/2
5
0
V
T
1
0
A
H
/2
5
0
V
T
D
2
S
S
R
2
T
D
1
T
1
T
2
G
S
S
R
1
S
S
R
3
W
H
-L
W
H
-N
N
C
N
O
1
0
W
L
C
C
T
2
.0
A
H
/2
5
0
V
W
H
-L
W
H
-N
F
3
F
4
N
/
F
T
2
.0
A
H
/2
5
0
V
A
C
IN
C
a
s
s
e
tte
T
a
n
d
e
m 1
8
W
M
a
in
u
n
it
S
C
N
S
C
N
u
n
it
1
0
W
L
C
C
(
O
P
T
I
O
N
)
T
5
A
H
/2
5
0
V
T
5
A
H
/2
5
0
V
T
2
A
H
/2
5
0
V
D
C
S
U
B
P
O
W
E
R
S
U
P
P
L
Y
V
o
lta
g
e
G
e
n
e
ra
tio
n
+
5
V
o
+
5
V
L
A
C
P
W
B
n
o
-
m
o
u
n
t
in
g
n
o
-
m
o
u
n
t
in
g
n
o
-
m
o
u
n
t
in
g
W
A
R
M
H
E
A
T
E
R
S
E
T
(
O
P
T
I
O
N
)
W
H
P
W
B
H
L
P
W
B
F
W
G
e
n
e
ra
tin
g
C
irc
u
it
R
L
5
1
N
/
F
N
/
F
V
o
lta
g
e
G
e
n
e
ra
tio
n
+
3
.3
V
+
5
V
2
+
1
2
V
2
+
3
8
V
1
+
3
8
V
3
F
W
G
e
n
e
ra
tin
g
C
irc
u
it
V
o
lta
g
e
G
e
n
e
ra
tio
n
+
1
2
V
1
+
5
V
1
R
L
1
T
5
A
H
/2
5
0
V
T
3
.1
5
A
H
/2
5
0
V
M
S
W
d
e
te
c
tio
n
c
irc
u
it
D
C
M
A
I
N
P
O
W
E
R
S
U
P
P
L
Y
d
r
a
w
e
r
H
L
_
U
S
T
S
_
L
M
T
S
_
U
SF
U
S
I
N
G
U
N
I
T
H
L
_
L
M
T
S
_
E
X
2
H
L
_
E
X
2
A
C
1
2
5
V
1
5
A
A
C
2
5
0
V
1
0
A
A
C
1
2
0
V
1
5
A
A
C
2
4
0
V
1
0
A
A
C
1
2
5
V
1
5
A
A
C
2
5
0
V
1
0
A
H
L
_
U
M
H
L
_
E
X
1
A
C
1
2
5
V
1
5
A
A
C
2
5
0
V
1
0
A
T
S
_
E
X
1
A
C
1
2
5
V
1
5
A
A
C
2
5
0
V
1
0
A
T
S
_
U
M
F
1
F
1
T
8
A
H
/2
5
0
V
N
R
2
N
R
2
F
2
F
2
L
1
L
1
F
2
F
2
V
R
2
A
2
A
2
W
H
-S
W
W
H
-S
W
F
2
F
2
A
1
S
Q
6
1
F
3
F
3
A
1
A
1
N
R
1
N
R
1
F
1
F
1
R
Y
1
R
Y
1
L
2
L
2
F
6
1
F
6
1
V
R
1
~
~
+- R
C
1
0
1
~
~
+- R
C
1
0
1
F
1
F
1
V
R
3
V
R
3
M
A
IN
P
O
W
E
R
S
W
n
o
-m
o
u
n
tin
g
46
12
T
1
T
2
G
46
12
T
D
3
T
1
T
2
G
46
12
S
S
R
4
T
D
4
T
1
T
2
G
46
12
I. DC power line diagram (100V/200V series)
IN
T
2
4
V
1
5
V
5
V
D
-
G
N
D
L
D
B
K
P
W
B
IN
T
2
4
V
1
D
M
_
Y
D
M
_
C
D
M
_
M
D
M
_
K
B
T
M
A
D
M
H
P
O
M
L
C
C
M
A
D
M
L
P
F
M
D
R
I
V
E
R
P
W
B
P
-
G
N
D
IN
T
5
V
3
.3
V
2
4
V
2
5
V
P
-
G
N
D
2
4
V
3
L
D
C
P
W
B
L
D
M
P
W
B
L
D
Y
P
W
B
P
-
G
M
D
L
S
U
P
W
B
D
-
G
N
D
IN
T
2
4
V
2
5
V
5
V
1
T
C
P
W
B
P
-
G
N
D
5
V
3
2
4
V
6
2
4
V
6
F
I
N
I
S
E
R
IN
T
5
V
D
-
G
N
D
B
D
P
W
B
(
K
)
S
P
U
M
p
a
p
e
r
f
e
e
d
m
o
t
o
r
2
4
V
_
S
P
U
M
P
-
G
N
D
P
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
IN
T
2
4
V
2
O
P
T
I
O
N
M
C
P
W
B
2
4
V
3
2
4
V
P
-
G
N
D
P
-
G
N
D
P
o
ly
g
o
n
m
o
t
o
r
S
U
L
M
lif
t
-
u
p
m
o
t
o
r
2
4
V
_
T
R
2
4
V
1
IN
T
2
4
V
2
P
-
G
N
D
L
S
U
F
A
N
D
S
P
F
D
R
I
V
E
R
P
W
B
2
T
C
P
W
B
P
-
G
N
D
2
4
V
_
T
R
5
V
F
A
N
P
G
N
D
IN
T
2
4
V
2
2
4
V
2
P
T
C
P
W
B
P
-
G
N
D
D
H
P
D
K
D
H
P
D
C
D
H
P
D
M
D
H
P
D
Y
T
1
S
P
W
B
T
2
S
P
W
B
P
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
S
P
F
M
t
r
a
n
s
p
o
r
t
m
o
t
o
r
2
4
V
_
S
P
F
M
5
V
2
4
V
4
5
V
C
P
F
M
P
-
G
N
D
2
4
V
4
D
-
G
N
D
P
-
G
N
D
D
V
K
M
5
V
D
-
G
N
D
D
S
P
F
C
L
in
v
e
r
t
e
r
P
W
B
P
W
B
2
4
V
2
4
V
P
G
N
D
A
G
N
D
5
V
P
G
N
D
W
T
M
IN
T
2
4
V
2
IN
T
2
4
V
2
S
G
N
D
2
4
V
2
2
4
V
2
P
-
G
N
D
P
-
G
N
D
D
V
C
M
3
.3
V
D
S
P
F
C
N
T
P
W
B
5
V
2
4
V
3
M
o
t
h
e
r
F
A
N
5
V
A
C
P
W
B
R
D
I
/
F
P
W
B
D
-
G
N
D
1
2
V
3
.3
V
2
4
V
5
V
D
S
P
F
C
C
D
P
W
B
IN
T
2
4
V
2
E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l
v
a
r
ia
b
le
m
o
t
o
r
G
N
D
1
2
V
D
C
P
O
W
E
R
P
W
B
IN
T
2
4
V
2
P
G
N
D
G
N
D
F
u
s
in
g
m
o
t
o
r
P
-
G
N
D
5
V
2
4
V
3
D
V
K
D
R
I
V
E
R
P
W
B
D
-
G
N
D
IN
T
2
4
V
2
R
R
M
P
-
G
N
D
5
V
IN
T
2
4
V
2
IN
T
2
4
V
2
2
4
V
3
C
O
I
N
V
E
N
D
O
R
5
V
IN
T
2
4
V
1
in
IN
T
2
4
V
1
in
P
-
G
N
D
C
A
R
D
R
E
A
D
E
R
D
-
G
N
D
P
-
G
N
D
P
-
G
N
D
O
P
T
I
O
N
O
P
T
O
N
N
D
S
W
-
R
R
e
t
u
r
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
(
R
ig
h
t
d
o
o
r
)
(
F
r
o
n
t
d
o
o
r
u
p
p
e
r
)
5
V
5
V
3
.3
V
5
V
G
N
D
S
U
B
P
O
W
E
R
P
W
B
5
V
5
V
M
F
P
O
P
E
-
J
P
W
B
D
-
G
N
D
O
R
S
P
D
P
W
B
M
H
P
S
D
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
1
2
V
2
4
V
2
2
4
V
2
IN
T
2
4
V
1
3
.3
V
D
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
M
F
P
F
A
N
H
D
D
F
A
N
3
.3
V
D
-
G
N
D
L
C
D
U
N
2
4
V
D
-
G
N
D
P
-
G
N
D
L
V
D
S
-
C
D
P
W
B
L
-
H
L
_
U
3
.3
V
2
4
V
L
-
H
L
_
L
M
D
-
G
N
D
E
F
I
D
-
G
N
D
L
C
D
I
N
V
P
W
B
M
O
T
H
E
R
P
W
B
H
L
P
W
B
3
.3
V
O
P
T
I
O
N
H
L
(
U
S
)
H
L
(
U
M
)
H
L
(
L
M
)
H
L
(
E
X
1
)
H
L
(
E
X
2
)
5
V
1
2
V
S
C
N
c
n
t
P
W
B
2
4
V
O
R
S
L
E
D
P
W
B
D
-
G
N
D
5
V
N
_
H
L
(
E
X
)
D
-
G
N
D
E
X
T
E
N
D
P
C
I
N
_
H
L
(
L
M
)
N
_
H
L
(
U
M
)
M
F
P
P
W
B
O
P
T
I
O
N
5
V
N
_
H
L
(
S
U
)
D
-
G
N
D
O
C
S
W
3
.3
V
5
V
5
V
5
V
F
A
X
U
N
3
.3
V
2
4
V
7
2
4
V
7
L
C
C
D
-
G
N
D
1
2
V
5
V
P
-
G
N
D
P
-
G
N
D
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
P
W
B
D
-
G
N
D
1
2
V
C
C
D
P
W
B
G
N
D
D
S
W
-
F
L
O
P
T
I
O
N
O
P
T
I
O
N
(
F
r
o
n
t
d
o
o
r
lo
w
e
r
)
2
4
V
1
2
4
V
1
D
-
G
N
D
2
4
V
C
L
in
v
e
r
t
e
r
P
W
B
3
.3
V
3
.3
V
5
V
5
V
H
D
D
P
W
B
5
V
5
V
1
2
V
1
2
V
2
4
V
3
2
4
V
3
D
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
2
4
V
4
2
4
V
4
G
N
D
1
G
N
D
1
P
C
U
P
W
B
3
.3
V
3
.3
V
G
N
D
2
G
N
D
2
5
V
5
V
1
2
V
1
2
V
5
V
5
V
2
4
V
5
2
4
V
5
1
2
V
1
2
V
P
-
G
N
D
P
-
G
N
D
2
4
V
5
2
4
V
5
6
.3
A
6
.3
A
6
.3
A
6
.3
A
/IN
T
c
n
t
6
.3
A
6
.3
A
6
.3
A
3
.
3
V
5
V
D
-
G
N
D
D
O
C
C
P
W
B
O
P
T
I
O
N
J. DC power line diagram (120V series)
IN
T
2
4
V
1
5
V
5
V
D
-
G
N
D
IN
T
2
4
V
1
D
M
_
Y
D
M
_
C
D
M
_
M
D
M
_
K
B
T
M
A
D
M
H
P
O
M
L
C
C
M
A
D
M
L
P
F
M
P
-
G
N
D
IN
T
5
V
3
.3
V
2
4
V
2
5
V
P
-
G
N
D
2
4
V
3
P
-
G
M
D
L
S
U
P
W
B
D
-
G
N
D
IN
T
2
4
V
2
5
V
5
V
P
-
G
N
D
5
V
3
2
4
V
6
2
4
V
6
IN
T
5
V
D
-
G
N
D
2
4
V
_
S
P
U
M
P
-
G
N
D
P
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
IN
T
2
4
V
2
O
P
T
I
O
N
2
4
V
3
2
4
V
P
-
G
N
D
P
-
G
N
D
2
4
V
_
T
R
2
4
V
1
IN
T
2
4
V
2
P
-
G
N
D
P
-
G
N
D
2
4
V
_
T
R
5
V
P
G
N
D
IN
T
2
4
V
2
2
4
V
2
P
-
G
N
D
P
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
2
4
V
_
S
P
F
M
5
V
2
4
V
4
5
V
P
-
G
N
D
2
4
V
4
D
-
G
N
D
P
-
G
N
D
5
V
D
-
G
N
D
2
4
V
2
4
V
P
G
N
D
A
G
N
D
5
V
P
G
N
D
IN
T
2
4
V
2
IN
T
2
4
V
2
S
G
N
D
2
4
V
2
2
4
V
2
P
-
G
N
D
P
-
G
N
D
3
.3
V
5
V
2
4
V
3
5
V
A
C
P
W
B
D
-
G
N
D
1
2
V
3
.3
V
2
4
V
5
V
IN
T
2
4
V
2
G
N
D
1
2
V
D
C
P
O
W
E
R
IN
T
2
4
V
2
P
G
N
D
G
N
D
P
W
B
P
-
G
N
D
5
V
2
4
V
3
D
-
G
N
D
IN
T
2
4
V
2
P
-
G
N
D
5
V
IN
T
2
4
V
2
IN
T
2
4
V
2
2
4
V
3
5
V
IN
T
2
4
V
1
in
IN
T
2
4
V
1
in
P
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
P
-
G
N
D
P
-
G
N
D
O
P
T
I
O
O
N
O
P
T
O
N
N
D
S
W
-
R
R
e
t
u
r
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
(
R
ig
h
t
d
o
o
r
)
(
F
r
o
n
t
d
o
o
r
u
p
p
e
r
)
5
V
5
V
3
.3
V
5
V
G
N
D
5
V
5
V
D
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
1
2
V
2
4
V
2
2
4
V
2
IN
T
2
4
V
1
3
.3
V
D
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
3
.3
V
D
-
G
N
D
2
4
V
D
-
G
N
D
P
-
G
N
D
L
-
H
L
_
U
3
.3
V
2
4
V
L
-
H
L
_
L
M
D
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
M
O
T
H
E
R
P
W
B
H
L
P
W
B
3
.3
V
O
P
T
I
O
N
5
V
1
2
V
S
C
N
c
n
t
P
W
B
2
4
V
D
-
G
N
D
5
V
N
_
H
L
(
E
X
)
D
-
G
N
D
N
_
H
L
(
L
M
)
N
_
H
L
(
U
M
)
O
P
T
I
O
N
5
V
N
_
H
L
(
S
U
)
D
-
G
N
D
3
.3
V
5
V
5
V
5
V
3
.3
V
2
4
V
1
2
4
V
1
D
-
G
N
D
1
2
V
5
V
P
-
G
N
D
P
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
1
2
V
G
N
D
D
S
W
-
F
L
O
P
T
I
O
N
O
P
T
I
O
N
(
F
r
o
n
t
d
o
o
r
lo
w
e
r
)
2
4
V
4
2
4
V
4
D
-
G
N
D
2
4
V
3
.3
V
3
.3
V
5
V
5
V
5
V
5
V
1
2
V
1
2
V
2
4
V
3
2
4
V
3
D
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
G
N
D
1
G
N
D
1
P
C
U
P
W
B
3
.3
V
3
.3
V
G
N
D
2
G
N
D
2
5
V
5
V
1
2
V
1
2
V
5
V
5
V
2
4
V
5
2
4
V
5
1
2
V
1
2
V
P
-
G
N
D
P
-
G
N
D
2
4
V
5
2
4
V
5
L
C
C
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
P
W
B
F
I
N
I
S
E
R
H
L
(
U
S
)
H
L
(
U
M
)
H
L
(
L
M
)
H
L
(
E
X
1
)
H
L
(
E
X
2
)
O
R
S
L
E
D
P
W
B
O
C
S
W
C
C
D
P
W
B
C
L
in
v
e
r
t
e
r
P
W
B
L
V
D
S
-
C
D
P
W
B
O
R
S
P
D
P
W
B
L
C
D
U
N
L
C
D
I
N
V
P
W
B
D
S
P
F
C
N
T
P
W
B
D
S
P
F
D
R
I
V
E
R
P
W
B
D
S
P
F
C
C
D
P
W
B
M
F
P
O
P
E
-
J
P
W
B
S
P
U
M
p
a
p
e
r
f
e
e
d
m
o
t
o
r
S
U
L
M
lif
t
-
u
p
m
o
t
o
r
F
A
N
S
P
F
M
t
r
a
n
s
p
o
r
t
m
o
t
o
r
M
H
P
S
C
A
R
D
R
E
A
D
E
R
T
1
S
P
W
B
T
2
S
P
W
B
D
S
P
F
C
L
in
v
e
r
t
e
r
P
W
B
M
F
P
F
A
N
H
D
D
F
A
N
M
F
P
P
W
B
F
A
X
U
N
H
D
D
P
W
B
E
X
T
E
N
D
P
C
I
E
F
I
E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l
v
a
r
ia
b
le
m
o
t
o
r
D
V
K
D
R
I
V
E
R
P
W
B
C
O
I
N
V
E
N
D
O
R
S
U
B
P
O
W
E
R
P
W
B
D
H
P
D
Y
D
V
K
M
D
V
C
M
M
o
t
h
e
r
F
A
N
B
D
P
W
B
(
K
)
P
o
ly
g
o
n
m
o
t
o
r
L
S
U
F
A
N
D
H
P
D
K
D
H
P
D
C
D
H
P
D
M
L
D
B
K
P
W
B
L
D
C
P
W
B
L
D
M
P
W
B
L
D
Y
P
W
B
2
T
C
P
W
B
M
C
P
W
B
1
T
C
P
W
B
D
R
I
V
E
R
P
W
B
/IN
T
c
n
t
6
.3
A
6
.3
A
6
.3
A
R
R
M
F
u
s
in
g
m
o
t
o
r
R
D
I
/
F
P
W
B
W
T
M
C
P
F
M
P
T
C
P
W
B
6
.3
A
6
.3
A
6
.3
A
3
.
3
V
5
V
D
-
G
N
D
D
O
C
C
P
W
B
O
P
T
I
O
N
K. DC24V distribution drawing
2
4
V
4
6
.
3
A
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
i
n
H
L
P
R
H
L
P
W
B
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
/
I
N
T
c
n
t
I
N
T
2
4
V
_
T
M
2
4
V
2
R
e
t
u
r
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
f
o
r
e
x
c
e
p
t
J
a
p
a
n
(
F
r
o
n
t
d
o
o
r
u
p
p
e
r
)
I
N
T
2
4
V
_
T
M
D
S
W
-
R
(
R
i
g
h
t
d
o
o
r
)
D
S
W
-
F
L
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
i
n
D
S
W
-
F
D
2
4
V
1
(
F
r
o
n
t
d
o
o
r
l
o
w
e
r
)
(
F
r
o
n
t
d
o
o
r
u
p
p
e
r
)
6
.
3
A
2
4
V
D
S
W
-
F
L
2
4
V
2
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
i
n
2
4
V
2
I
N
T
2
4
V
2
I
N
T
2
4
V
2
6
.
3
A
A
C
P
W
B
2
4
V
3
2
4
V
3
6
.
3
A
2
4
V
5
6
.
3
A
2
4
V
6
6
.
3
A
2
4
V
7
6
.
3
A
L
S
U
P
W
B
H
V
P
W
B
M
e
c
h
a
n
i
c
a
l
c
o
u
n
t
e
r
1
,
2
P
S
M
W
T
M
T
o
n
e
r
c
o
n
c
e
n
t
r
a
t
i
o
n
s
e
n
s
o
r
P
O
F
M
1
-
3
D
C
F
M
1
,
2
O
Z
F
M
1
-
3
C
l
u
t
c
h
,
s
o
l
e
n
o
i
d
F
P
C
L
1
,
2
L
U
M
1
-
4
C
o
i
n
v
e
n
d
e
r
D
L
_
K
D
L
_
C
,
M
,
Y
T
M
M
T
M
K
2
T
M
C
T
M
Y
F
U
M
D
V
C
M
C
C
M
T
M
K
1
D
M
M
D
M
Y
B
T
M
A
D
M
H
P
F
M
D
V
K
M
D
M
B
K
D
M
C
D
R
-
D
C
P
S
P
C
U
P
W
B
M
o
t
h
e
r
P
W
B
S
C
N
c
n
t
P
W
B
D
S
P
F
C
L
I
N
V
H
T
M
K
H
T
M
M
D
R
I
V
E
R
P
W
B
I
N
S
E
R
T
E
R
L
C
C
M
M
O
R
S
L
E
D
P
O
M
A
D
M
L
P
S
F
M
H
T
M
C
H
T
M
Y
L
C
C
M
A
U
D
I
T
E
R
W
E
B
M
P
H
T
M
K
T
A
7
2
9
1
c
i
r
c
u
i
t
2. Actual wiring chart
A. Power supply section (100V/200V series) (1/31)
C
N
1
(
B
0
3
P
-
V
L
)
C
N
2
(
B
0
3
P
-
V
L
-
K
)
(
M
S
W
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
C
N
_
1
(
B
2
P
3
-
V
H
)
C
N
_
3
(
B
1
0
P
-
V
H
)
(
L
o
w
e
r
m
a
in
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
C
N
1
2
(
B
1
2
B
-
X
L
)
1
L
_
I
N
M
S
W
-
L
o
u
t
3
B
K
B
K
L
_
D
C
5
V
L
B
L
B
L
5
V
L
2
N
C
N
C
2
W
H
N
_
D
C
5
V
L
B
L
B
L
5
V
L
3
N
_
I
N
M
S
W
-
N
o
u
t
1
W
H
G
N
D
G
Y
G
Y
D
-
G
N
D
C
N
6
(
B
2
P
3
-
V
H
-
R
)
C
N
3
(
B
0
3
P
-
V
L
-
R
)
G
N
D
G
Y
G
Y
D
-
G
N
D
W
H
1
N
_
W
H
M
S
W
-
L
in
1
B
K
5
V
O
B
L
B
L
5
V
O
B
K
3
L
_
W
H
N
C
2
M
S
W
C
N
_
2
(
B
3
P
4
-
V
H
)
G
N
D
G
Y
G
Y
D
-
G
N
D
M
S
W
-
N
in
3
W
H
B
K
L
_
R
Y
F
W
B
R
R
D
2
4
V
5
C
N
5
(
B
0
3
P
-
V
L
-
E
)
C
N
4
(
B
3
P
4
-
V
H
-
R
)
W
H
N
_
R
Y
F
W
B
R
G
Y
P
-
G
N
D
B
K
1
L
_
H
L
L
_
D
C
1
B
K
R
Y
_
C
N
T
L
B
P
L
1
2
V
H
D
W
H
3
N
_
H
L
N
_
D
C
4
W
H
O
F
F
_
C
N
T
P
L
B
L
5
V
H
D
(
A
C
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
(
A
C
-
D
C
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
S
U
B
D
C
P
S
P
L
1
2
V
N
B
L
5
V
N
C
N
1
0
(
B
4
P
-
P
H
-
K
-
S
)
(
A
C
-
D
C
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
P
S
M
-
6
p
in
R
C
N
1
3
A
C
_
P
W
B
1
R
D
B
R
F
P
S
-
2
5
0
4
G
Y
R
Y
_
C
N
T
L
B
R
Y
_
C
N
T
C
N
2
(
B
8
P
-
V
H
)
O
F
F
_
C
N
T
P
L
O
F
F
_
C
N
T
O
u
t
p
u
t
O
N
a
t
O
p
e
n
/
D
C
C
N
T
1
B
R
D
C
_
C
N
T
1
B
R
D
C
_
C
N
T
1
F
P
S
-
1
8
7
/
M
S
W
-
M
O
N
2
D
C
_
C
N
T
2
H
L
P
W
B
C
N
_
A
C
(
B
2
P
3
-
V
H
)
G
N
D
2
3
3
.
3
V
B
K
1
L
_
D
C
+
5
V
1
4
B
L
D
-
G
N
D
G
Y
D
-
G
N
D
W
H
3
N
_
D
C
G
N
D
2
5
A
W
G
c
o
n
v
e
r
s
io
n
B
0
8
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
+
1
2
V
1
6
P
L
N
E
W
M
O
T
H
E
R
P
W
B
G
N
D
2
7
(
W
H
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
W
H
_
S
W
+
1
2
V
1
8
P
S
-
1
8
7
C
N
3
(
B
9
P
-
V
H
)
D
S
W
-
F
L
C
N
1
B
K
1
+
2
4
V
1
1
R
D
R
D
2
4
V
D
S
W
-
F
L
G
N
D
1
2
G
Y
G
Y
P
-
G
N
D
B
K
+
2
4
V
2
3
R
D
P
a
g
e
2
P
S
-
1
8
7
G
N
D
1
4
G
Y
G
Y
P
-
G
N
D
+
2
4
V
3
5
R
D
R
D
2
4
V
3
G
N
D
1
6
G
Y
G
Y
P
-
G
N
D
+
2
4
V
4
7
R
D
R
D
G
N
D
1
8
P
L
1
2
V
(
A
C
-
D
C
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
F
W
9
B
R
F
W
C
N
5
B
L
5
V
2
1
G
Y
C
N
4
(
B
7
P
-
V
H
)
G
Y
3
R
D
+
2
4
V
5
1
R
D
O
R
B
0
3
B
-
P
H
-
K
-
R
G
N
D
1
2
G
Y
G
Y
+
2
4
V
6
3
R
D
I
N
S
E
R
T
E
R
(
2
p
c
s
.
)
B
1
2
B
-
X
L
C
N
1
G
N
D
1
4
G
Y
I
N
S
E
R
T
E
R
(
2
p
c
s
.
)
B
K
1
+
2
4
V
7
5
R
D
L
C
C
P
C
U
P
W
B
W
H
3
G
N
D
1
6
G
Y
L
C
C
B
2
P
3
-
V
H
-
R
(
N
C
)
7
C
N
5
(
B
4
P
-
V
H
)
W
H
P
W
B
+
1
2
V
2
1
P
L
(
A
C
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
(
S
C
N
-
W
H
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
:
c
o
m
m
o
n
)
G
N
D
2
2
C
N
2
E
L
R
E
L
P
E
L
R
C
N
8
(
B
6
P
-
V
H
)
+
1
2
V
2
3
1
W
H
2
2
W
H
W
H
2
1
+
3
8
V
1
G
N
D
2
4
G
Y
3
B
K
1
1
B
K
B
K
1
2
G
N
D
1
B
2
P
3
V
H
-
B
L
3
+
3
8
V
2
C
N
6
(
B
1
0
P
-
V
H
)
4
G
N
D
1
+
5
V
2
1
B
L
E
L
R
5
+
3
8
V
3
G
N
D
2
2
G
Y
C
N
3
E
L
R
W
H
2
6
G
N
D
1
+
5
V
2
3
1
1
2
T
o
P
2
3
B
K
1
G
N
D
2
4
3
4
L
C
C
h
e
a
t
e
r
+
5
V
2
5
B
L
I
N
S
E
R
T
E
R
B
2
P
3
-
V
H
G
N
D
2
6
(
W
H
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
E
L
R
E
L
P
+
5
V
2
7
B
L
L
C
C
W
H
1
1
G
N
D
2
8
C
N
4
B
K
2
2
+
5
V
2
9
B
L
W
H
-
N
(
C
S
_
W
H
)
G
N
D
2
1
0
E
L
R
E
L
P
W
H
1
1
C
N
7
(
B
2
P
-
V
H
)
W
H
-
L
(
T
A
N
_
W
H
)
B
K
2
2
+
3
.
3
V
1
O
R
B
4
P
(
5
-
3
)
-
V
H
G
N
D
2
2
G
Y
11 3
(
A
C
c
o
r
d
:
c
o
m
m
o
n
)
L
_
W
H
D
-
G
N
D
2
4
V
2
M
S
W
-
N
o
u
t
(
W
H
)
M
S
W
-
L
in
(
R
D
)
M
S
W
-
N
in
(
R
D
)
L
_
H
L
N
_
H
L
M
S
W
-
L
o
u
t
(
W
H
)
1
2
W
H
-
L
(
C
S
_
W
H
)
2
4
V
2
W
H
-
N
(
S
C
A
N
)
1
L
_
W
H
W
H
-
N
(
L
C
C
)
W
H
-
L
(
L
C
C
)
W
H
-
L
1
7 3412 734 7 6 1
F
W
5 8
4
345
3
1
0
F
W
6
4
6789
2 9 315
2
1
0
4
1
2
5
1
1
5
D
-
G
N
D
3
.
3
V
2
4
V
4
1
1
D
-
G
N
D
6
1
0
1
2
8
C
a
s
s
e
t
t
e
h
e
a
t
e
r
W
H
-
N
(
T
A
N
_
W
H
)
T
a
n
d
e
m
h
e
a
t
e
r
9
5 2
W
H
-
N
W
H
-
L
(
S
C
A
N
)
D
-
G
N
D
4
2 1
2 3451
D
C
P
S
P
Y
B. Power supply section (120V series) (2/31)
(
A
C
c
o
r
d
)
C
N
1
(
B
0
3
P
-
V
L
)
C
N
2
(
B
0
3
P
-
V
L
-
K
)
(
A
C
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
1
2
0
C
D
)
C
N
_
1
(
B
2
P
3
-
V
H
)
C
N
_
3
(
B
1
0
P
-
V
H
)
(
L
o
w
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
1
2
0
V
C
D
)
C
N
1
2
(
B
1
2
B
-
X
L
)
1
L
_
I
N
M
S
W
-
L
o
u
t
3
B
K
B
K
L
_
D
C
5
V
L
B
L
B
L
5
V
L
2
N
C
N
C
2
W
H
N
_
D
C
5
V
L
B
L
B
L
5
V
L
3
N
_
I
N
M
S
W
-
N
o
u
t
1
W
H
G
N
D
G
Y
G
Y
D
-
G
N
D
C
N
6
(
B
2
P
3
-
V
H
-
R
)
C
N
3
(
B
0
3
P
-
V
L
-
R
)
G
N
D
G
Y
G
Y
D
-
G
N
D
W
H
1
N
_
W
H
M
S
W
-
L
i
n
1
B
K
5
V
O
B
L
B
L
5
V
O
B
K
3
L
_
W
H
N
C
2
M
S
W
C
N
_
2
(
B
3
P
4
-
V
H
)
G
N
D
G
Y
G
Y
D
-
G
N
D
M
S
W
-
N
i
n
3
W
H
B
K
L
_
R
Y
F
W
B
R
B
L
5
V
N
C
N
5
(
B
0
3
P
-
V
L
-
E
)
C
N
4
(
B
3
P
4
-
V
H
-
R
)
W
H
N
_
R
Y
F
W
B
R
B
L
5
V
H
D
B
K
1
L
_
H
L
L
_
D
C
1
B
K
R
Y
_
C
N
T
L
B
P
L
1
2
V
H
D
W
H
3
N
_
H
L
N
_
D
C
4
W
H
O
F
F
_
C
N
T
P
L
R
D
2
4
V
5
(
A
C
-
D
C
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
S
U
B
D
C
P
S
P
L
1
2
V
N
G
Y
P
-
G
N
D
(
A
C
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
1
2
0
C
D
)
C
N
1
0
(
B
4
P
-
P
H
-
K
-
S
)
C
N
1
3
A
C
_
P
W
B
1
R
D
(
A
C
-
D
C
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
C
N
1
(
B
2
P
3
-
V
H
-
B
)
B
R
4
G
Y
B
K
3
L
_
D
C
L
B
R
Y
_
C
N
T
F
P
S
-
2
5
0
W
H
1
N
_
D
C
P
L
O
F
F
_
C
N
T
C
N
8
(
B
7
P
-
V
H
-
B
)
D
C
_
C
N
T
1
2
4
V
1
1
I
N
S
E
R
T
E
R
(
2
p
c
s
.
)
D
C
_
C
N
T
2
F
P
S
-
1
8
7
2
4
V
1
2
L
C
C
3
.
3
V
H
L
P
W
B
C
N
6
(
B
0
3
B
-
P
A
S
K
-
1
)
2
4
V
2
3
T
o
P
2
G
Y
D
-
G
N
D
1
D
C
C
N
T
1
2
4
V
3
4
B
0
8
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
3
D
C
C
N
T
2
2
4
V
3
5
N
E
W
M
O
T
H
E
R
P
W
B
2
4
V
4
6
(
W
H
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
W
H
_
S
W
2
4
V
5
7
D
S
W
-
F
L
P
S
-
1
8
7
C
N
7
(
B
8
P
-
V
H
-
B
)
C
N
1
B
K
1
F
W
1
R
D
2
4
V
D
S
W
-
F
L
P
-
G
N
D
2
G
Y
P
-
G
N
D
B
K
P
-
G
N
D
3
G
Y
P
-
G
N
D
P
S
-
1
8
7
P
-
G
N
D
4
G
Y
P
-
G
N
D
P
-
G
N
D
5
R
D
2
4
V
3
P
-
G
N
D
6
R
D
P
-
G
N
D
7
I
N
S
E
R
T
E
R
(
2
p
c
s
.
)
P
L
1
2
V
P
-
G
N
D
8
L
C
C
B
L
5
V
2
(
A
C
-
D
C
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
G
Y
C
N
5
C
N
4
(
B
6
P
-
V
H
-
B
)
O
R
1
G
Y
5
V
N
1
G
Y
3
R
D
5
V
N
2
I
N
S
E
R
T
E
R
B
R
F
W
B
0
3
B
-
P
H
-
K
-
R
5
V
N
3
L
C
C
B
1
2
B
-
X
L
5
V
N
4
C
N
1
D
-
G
N
D
5
P
C
U
P
W
B
B
K
1
D
-
G
N
D
6
W
H
3
(
D
C
i
n
t
e
f
a
c
e
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
B
2
P
3
-
V
H
-
R
C
N
2
(
B
5
P
-
V
H
-
B
)
R
E
L
-
2
p
i
n
P
D
-
G
N
D
2
1
D
-
G
N
D
1
5
V
L
4
2
5
V
L
2
W
H
P
W
B
(
A
C
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
1
2
0
C
D
)
(
S
C
N
-
W
H
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
:
c
o
m
m
o
n
)
C
N
5
(
B
0
4
P
-
V
H
-
B
)
C
N
2
E
L
R
E
L
P
E
L
R
1
2
V
1
1
W
H
2
2
W
H
W
H
2
1
2
V
2
3
B
K
1
1
B
K
B
K
1
D
-
G
N
D
3
B
2
P
3
V
H
-
B
L
D
-
G
N
D
4
E
L
R
C
N
3
(
B
0
3
P
-
V
H
-
B
)
C
N
3
E
L
R
W
H
2
3
.
3
V
1
1
1
2
T
o
P
2
3
B
K
1
D
-
G
N
D
3
3
4
L
C
C
h
e
a
t
e
r
B
2
P
3
-
V
H
(
W
H
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
E
L
R
E
L
P
W
H
1
1
C
N
4
B
K
2
2
W
H
-
N
(
C
S
_
W
H
)
E
L
R
E
L
P
W
H
1
1
W
H
-
L
(
T
A
N
_
W
H
)
B
K
2
2
B
4
P
(
5
-
3
)
-
V
H
L
_
H
L
W
H
-
N
(
L
C
C
)
4 1
M
S
W
-
N
i
n
(
R
D
)
2
4
V
2
1
L
_
W
H
D
-
G
N
D
N
_
H
L
W
H
-
L
(
L
C
C
)
W
H
-
L
(
C
S
_
W
H
)
14
9 345678 2
23
1
3
M
S
W
-
L
o
u
t
(
W
H
)
C
a
s
s
e
t
t
e
h
e
a
t
e
r
2
4
V
2
M
S
W
-
N
o
u
t
(
W
H
)
M
S
W
-
L
i
n
(
R
D
)
C
J
-
P
S
u
n
1
W
H
-
N
(
T
A
N
_
W
H
)
T
a
n
d
e
m
h
e
a
t
e
r
L
_
W
H
D
-
G
N
D
W
H
-
N
(
S
C
A
N
)
5 2
W
H
-
N
W
H
-
L
(
S
C
A
N
)
W
H
-
L
1
0
1
2
1
1
1
0
169 8 5 471
F
W
2312 456735 46
2
4
V
4
7
1
2
8
1
1
D
-
G
N
D
9
D
-
G
N
D
1
0
3
.
3
V
R
Y
C. Interlock section (3/31)
F
r
o
n
t
t
o
n
e
r
b
o
t
t
l
e
s
e
c
t
i
o
n
F
r
o
n
t
t
o
n
e
r
b
o
t
t
l
e
s
e
c
t
i
o
n
D
S
W
_
F
U
(
H
L
r
e
l
a
y
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
J
P
C
D
)
P
D
S
W
_
F
U
(
H
L
r
e
l
a
y
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
P
E
L
4
P
R
(
U
p
p
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
C
N
1
1
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
t
o
T
N
m
o
t
o
r
P
S
-
1
8
7
-
2
V
P
S
-
1
8
7
-
2
V
B
2
P
3
-
V
H
P
E
L
2
P
R
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
T
C
E
l
e
c
t
r
o
d
e
u
n
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
i
g
h
t
d
o
o
r
s
e
c
t
i
o
n
(
I
L
r
e
t
u
r
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
D
S
W
_
R
(
U
p
p
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
C
N
1
6
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
P
S
-
1
8
7
-
2
V
B
2
P
3
-
V
H
S
M
-
5
P
N
T
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
s
e
p
a
r
a
t
io
n
s
e
n
s
o
r
B
K
(
T
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
b
e
l
t
s
e
p
a
r
a
t
i
o
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
B
K
C
D
)
R
P
(
U
p
p
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
C
N
1
5
B
R
B
R
B
R
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
B
L
B
L
B
L
G
P
1
S
7
3
P
1
7
9
2
2
8
-
3
B
R
B
R
B
4
0
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
G
Y
G
Y
C
N
1
8
B
R
G
Y
F
r
o
n
t
d
o
o
r
s
e
c
t
i
o
n
(
M
S
W
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
B
3
0
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
P
H
N
R
-
0
2
-
H
+
D
S
W
_
F
L
P
E
L
6
P
R
(
L
o
w
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
C
N
1
P
T
C
H
P
d
e
t
e
c
t
i
o
n
(
P
T
C
g
u
i
d
e
U
N
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
B
U
0
2
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
R
D
R
D
R
D
B
R
B
R
B
R
R
D
R
D
B
1
2
B
-
X
L
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
P
S
-
1
8
7
-
2
V
1
7
9
2
2
8
-
2
C
N
3
D
R
-
D
C
P
S
1
R
D
(
J
a
p
a
n
/
2
0
0
V
s
e
r
i
e
s
)
3
R
D
B
9
P
-
V
H
C
N
8
C
J
-
D
C
P
S
6
R
D
(
1
2
0
V
s
e
r
i
e
s
)
3
R
D
B
0
7
P
-
V
H
D
R
-
P
C
U
P
W
B
C
N
1
0
(
L
o
w
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
R
D
R
D
P
-
G
N
D
G
Y
P
-
G
N
D
G
Y
5
V
N
P
D
B
L
B
5
P
-
V
H
D
R
I
V
E
R
P
W
B
C
N
2
R
D
P
-
G
N
D
G
Y
P
S
M
-
6
p
i
n
R
C
N
4
5
V
N
B
L
B
L
4
0
B
3
P
-
V
H
A
W
G
c
o
n
v
e
r
s
i
o
n
C
N
2
R
D
1
R
D
2
G
Y
3
C
N
8
G
Y
5
c
o
i
l
P
-
G
N
D
4
G
Y
B
L
8
R
D
R
D
4
I
N
T
2
4
V
2
1
R
D
R
D
6
I
N
T
2
4
V
2
P
-
G
N
D
2
G
Y
G
Y
7
P
-
G
N
D
/
I
N
T
_
C
N
T
5
B
R
B
R
9
/
I
N
T
_
C
N
T
R
D
B
9
P
-
V
H
A
C
P
W
B
R
D
B
7
P
-
V
H
-
B
P
T
C
M
_
H
P
1
D
-
G
N
D
2
1
P
T
C
M
_
H
P
2
2
D
-
G
N
D
1
4
P
T
C
M
_
H
P
4
5
D
-
G
N
D
5
P
-
G
N
D
2
4
V
(
D
S
W
_
F
L
)
T
B
L
T
B
D
-
G
N
D
5
V
N
P
D
(
L
E
D
)
I
N
T
2
4
V
_
T
M
I
N
T
2
4
V
2
1
3
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
i
n
2
I
N
T
2
4
V
2
1
1
I
N
T
2
4
V
_
T
M
2
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
i
n
5
V
N
P
D
(
L
E
D
)
5
V
N
P
D
2
4
V
2
2 53 34 1
3
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
I
N
T
2
4
V
_
T
M
5
V
N
2
2
P
T
C
M
_
H
P
2
4
D
-
G
N
D
1
I
N
T
2
4
V
2
1
2
4
V
(
D
S
W
_
F
L
)
3
1
4
1
6
1
8
1
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
i
n
2
4
V
2
6
2
4
V
2
7
2
4
V
(
D
S
W
_
F
L
)
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
i
n
3
2
2
4
V
(
D
S
W
_
F
L
)
2
1
2
4
V
1
1
2
1
I
N
T
2
4
V
_
T
M
2
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
i
n
4
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
i
n
1
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
i
n
1
2
P
-
G
N
D
2
4
V
1
2
4
V
2
1
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
2
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
2
4
V
1
2
4
V
2
6
2
3
1
2
I
N
T
2
4
V
2
234
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
i
n
2
D
-
G
N
D
2
2
4
V
1
1
2
4
V
(
D
S
W
_
F
L
)
5
V
N
P
D
(
L
E
D
)
3
2
D
-
G
N
D
3
1
T
B
L
T
B
1
T
B
L
T
B
1
5
V
N
6
2
J
a
p
a
n
a
n
d
A
g
e
n
c
y
N
o
r
h
t
A
m
e
r
i
c
a
a
n
d
E
u
r
o
p
e
4 3
1
1
r
P
O
w
L
P
P
Y
D. Fusing unit section (4/31)
(
T
S
-
H
L
_
U
M
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
(
F
u
s
i
n
g
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
(
T
S
-
H
L
_
U
S
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
#
2
5
0
#
2
5
0
(
H
L
r
e
l
a
y
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
C
N
1
W
H
W
H
W
H
5
5
0
W
W
H
#
2
5
0
#
1
8
7
W
H
H
L
P
W
B
B
K
B
K
B
K
B
K
9
5
0
W
W
H
C
N
4
5
5
0
W
B
3
P
5
-
V
H
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
R
D
4
0
0
W
#
1
8
7
#
1
8
7
D
-
G
N
D
G
Y
B
K
B
K
C
N
2
H
L
o
u
t
_
U
M
B
R
B
K
H
L
o
u
t
_
U
S
P
K
W
H
W
H
W
H
4
0
0
W
W
H
H
L
o
u
t
_
L
M
L
B
S
0
2
B
-
V
T
H
L
o
u
t
_
E
X
P
L
4
5
0
W
#
1
8
7
/
H
L
P
R
B
R
B
K
B
K
B
K
B
K
1
4
0
0
W
B
K
B
0
7
B
-
P
A
S
K
F
P
S
-
2
5
0
W
H
W
H
W
H
4
5
0
W
(
T
S
-
H
L
_
L
O
W
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
:
c
o
m
m
o
n
)
#
1
8
7
W
H
W
H
W
H
9
5
0
W
#
1
8
7
(
H
L
r
e
l
a
y
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
(
U
p
p
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
#
1
8
7
#
1
8
7
R
S
M
-
2
p
i
n
_
N
P
P
D
F
1
B
-
2
0
P
S
C
N
8
4
7
5
W
#
1
8
7
#
1
8
7
#
1
8
7
#
1
8
7
#
1
8
7
B
R
B
R
D
R
I
V
E
R
P
W
B
4
7
5
W
P
L
P
L
B
K
B
K
B
K
B
1
2
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
#
1
8
7
W
H
(
W
E
B
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
P
H
N
R
-
5
-
H
+
B
U
0
5
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
C
N
1
2
C
N
1
0
W
H
P
K
P
K
P
K
/
H
L
P
R
B
R
W
H
G
Y
G
Y
B
R
G
Y
H
L
o
u
t
_
E
X
P
L
H
L
o
u
t
_
L
M
L
B
H
L
o
u
t
_
U
S
P
K
H
L
o
u
t
_
U
M
B
R
D
-
G
N
D
G
Y
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
R
D
P
H
N
R
-
3
-
H
+
B
U
0
3
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
B
4
0
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
(
U
p
p
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
B
K
W
H
P
L
P
L
P
L
W
H
W
H
L
B
L
B
L
B
B
L
W
H
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
P
H
N
R
-
2
-
H
+
B
U
0
2
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
W
H
P
L
P
L
P
L
W
H
G
Y
P
H
N
R
-
4
-
H
+
B
U
0
4
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
W
H
P
K
P
K
P
K
W
H
G
Y
W
H
B
R
B
R
B
R
W
H
G
Y
(
W
E
B
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
P
H
N
R
-
2
-
H
+
B
U
0
2
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
W
H
L
B
L
B
L
B
W
H
G
Y
B
R
B
R
B
R
B
1
6
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
G
Y
C
N
1
3
P
O
D
1
W
H
G
Y
B
4
0
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
W
H
6
8
7
5
4
3
2
1
D
R
-
P
C
U
P
W
B
W
H
G
P
1
A
7
1
L
3
P
H
R
-
3
D
r
a
w
e
r
R
W
Z
D
F
1
1
-
8
D
P
-
S
P
1
P
O
D
1
5
V
N
P
D
D
-
G
N
D
T
H
_
E
X
1
D
-
G
N
D
2
1
2
1
2
T
H
_
E
X
1
C
o
n
t
a
c
t
T
H
_
E
X
2
C
o
n
t
a
c
t
T
H
_
L
M
C
o
n
t
a
c
t
T
H
_
E
X
2
32 41
11 2
N
-
H
L
_
E
X
3
N
-
H
L
_
U
S
W
E
B
_
E
N
D
19
B
-
2
1
4
1
4
1
6
8
T
H
_
U
M
T
H
_
L
M
8
1
6
3
8
P
O
D
1
1
5
5
V
N
P
D
1
5
1
3
1
3
A
-
8
3
6
4
W
E
B
M
_
b
W
E
B
M
_
a
1
7
2 1
W
E
B
M
_
a
W
E
B
m
o
t
o
r
D G N D
D G N D
D G N D
B
-
7
B
-
8
12
D G N D
A
-
7
5
A
-
2
8
A
-
6
D G N D
D G N D
A
-
5
B
-
3
D G N D
L
-
H
L
_
L
M
N
-
H
L
_
L
M
45
26 45 3
N
-
H
L
_
E
X
5
6
7
1
2
1
7
6
1
0
T
H
_
U
S
A
-
3
T
H
1
_
A
D
2
T
H
1
_
A
D
1
2
B
-
9
W
E
B
_
E
N
D
97
W
E
B
M
_
a
W
E
B
M
_
b
1
8
T
H
_
L
M
1
6
T
H
1
_
A
D
1
2
0
T
H
1
_
A
D
2
T
H
2
_
A
D
1
6
D
-
G
N
D
4
T
H
_
U
M
T
H
_
E
X
1
T
H
_
E
X
2
D
-
G
N
D
7
D
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
A
-
4
D
-
G
N
D
T
H
_
U
M
N
o
n
-
c
o
n
t
a
c
t
1
D
-
G
N
D
12
T
H
_
U
S
D
-
G
N
D
T
H
_
U
S
C
o
n
t
a
c
t
3
T
H
1
_
A
D
2
1
2
T
H
1
_
A
D
1
23
W
E
B
-
E
N
D
54
12
W
E
B
_
E
N
D
3
3
W
E
B
_
I
N
L
A
-
8
B
-
7
B
-
1
B
-
8
W
E
B
_
I
N
L
B
-
4
B
-
6
34
A
-
2
A
-
9
A
-
1
0
A
-
5
A
-
6
B
-
2
A
-
4
A
-
3
D
-
G
N
D
A
-
7
T
H
_
E
X
1
A
-
1
3 1
N
-
H
L
_
U
M
1
N
-
H
L
_
U
M
1
1
2
2
L
-
H
L
_
U
4
1
0
2
0
26
D
-
G
N
D
1
9
T
H
2
_
A
D
2
A
-
9
A
-
1
0
1
2
D
-
G
N
D
1
0
1
4
T
H
_
U
S
T
H
_
E
X
2
T
H
_
E
X
1
N
-
H
L
_
U
S
L
-
H
L
_
L
M
L
-
H
L
_
U
N
-
H
L
_
L
M
3 521
1
0
15 3
1
8
W
E
B
M
_
b
D
-
G
N
D
T
H
2
_
A
D
2
1
5
T
H
1
_
A
D
1
4 2
T
H
1
_
A
D
2
6
1 3 5
T
H
2
_
A
D
1
1
3
1
3
7
1
1
97
W
E
B
_
E
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
9
D
-
G
N
D
1
T
H
_
U
S
3
B
-
3
1
9
P
O
D
1
2
B
-
9
D
-
G
N
D
B
-
1
B
-
5
P
O
D
1
B
-
5
A
-
1
T
H
_
L
M
D
-
G
N
D
T
H
_
E
X
2
5
V
N
P
D
3
D G N D
2
T
H
_
L
M
1
1
D
-
G
N
D
2
1
D
-
G
N
D
5
2
T
H
_
L
M
4
B
-
4
5
V
N
P
D
B
-
6
T
H
_
U
M
D
-
G
N
D
T
H
E
R
M
O
S
T
A
T
T
H
E
R
M
O
S
T
A
T
T
H
E
R
M
O
S
T
A
T
B
R
B
R
T
S
T
S
H
L
_
E
X
1
H
L
_
E
X
2
H
L
_
L
M
H
L
_
U
S
H
L
_
U
M
Y
L
R
/
P
Y
L
R
/
P
#
1
8
7
#
1
8
7
#
1
8
7
#
1
8
7
#
2
5
0
#
1
8
7
#
1
8
7
W
H
F
u
s
e
r
u
n
i
t
I
/
F
D
r
a
w
e
r
V
i
e
w
f
r
o
m
F
u
s
e
r
u
n
i
t
s
i
d
e
A 5
B 2
A 1
A 6
B 3
B 5
A 8
6
B 6
B 8
B 7
B 9
B 1
2
34
5
A 7
A 2
A 3
A 4
B 4
1
A 9
A 1 0
F
u
s
e
r
u
n
i
t
I
/
F
D
r
a
w
e
r
V
i
e
w
f
r
o
m
B
o
d
y
s
i
d
e
A 5
A 6
A 7
A 1
A 2
A 3
A 4
A 8
A 9
6
5
4
B 1
A 1 0
1
2
3
B 9
B 8
B 7
B 6
B 5
B 4
B 3
B 2
1
1
1
1
W
E
B
_
I
N
L
W
E
B
_
I
N
L
1
1
E. Fusing drive unit section (5/31)
P
S
M
-
4
p
R
(
U
p
p
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
)
C
N
1
3
R
D
L
B
G
Y
E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l
v
a
r
i
a
b
l
e
s
e
n
s
o
r
(
H
L
r
e
l
a
y
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
)
P
D
F
1
B
-
3
2
P
S
D
R
-
P
C
U
P
W
B
G
Y
P
K
B
L
O
J
-
4
5
0
6
-
N
2
3
Z
H
R
-
3
B
4
0
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
P
S
M
-
4
p
R
(
B
o
t
t
l
e
F
A
N
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
)
P
S
M
-
4
p
R
(
H
L
r
e
l
a
y
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
)
C
N
1
2
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
P
L
P
L
P
L
L
B
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
L
B
L
B
L
B
B
1
6
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
C
N
1
0
P
L
B
4
0
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
P
P
A
-
3
p
i
n
R
R
D
G
Y
P
S
M
-
6
p
i
n
_
N
R
(
H
L
r
e
l
a
y
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
)
(
U
p
p
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
)
C
N
1
4
B
L
B
R
B
R
B
R
B
R
P
L
P
L
P
L
Y
L
L
B
L
B
L
B
R
D
P
K
P
K
P
K
W
H
R
D
R
D
R
D
F
u
s
i
n
g
m
o
t
o
r
(
U
p
p
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
)
R
D
R
D
G
Y
G
Y
L
B
L
B
P
K
P
K
B
R
B
R
B
3
0
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
B
7
B
-
P
H
-
K
-
S
P - G N D
P - G N D
P - G N D
P - G N D
F U F M _ F
F U F M _ F
F U F M _ F
F U F M _ F
3
P
-
G
N
D
3
4
F
U
F
M
_
F
_
L
D
4
1
F
U
F
M
_
F
1
2
/
P
O
F
M
_
C
N
T
2
2
F
u
s
i
n
g
d
u
c
t
f
a
n
F
U
F
M
_
R
(
8
0
)
1
F
U
F
M
_
R
1
2
/
F
U
F
M
_
C
N
T
2
3
P
-
G
N
D
3
4
F
U
F
M
_
R
_
L
D
4
F
u
s
i
n
g
d
u
c
t
f
a
n
F
U
F
M
_
F
(
S
i
r
o
c
c
o
)
1
F
U
F
M
_
F
1
2
/
P
O
F
M
_
C
N
T
2
2
P
-
G
N
D
4
F
U
F
M
_
F
_
L
D
3
3
13
3
F
E
X
D
1
D
-
G
N
D
7
F
U
F
M
_
F
_
L
D
9
4
/
F
U
F
M
_
C
N
T
1
4
D
-
G
N
D
(
/F
U
F
M
_
C
N
T
)
5
V
N
P
D
3
2
3
4
F
U
F
M
_
F
_
L
D
P
-
G
N
D
15 3
F
U
F
M
_
F
2
1
F
E
X
M
_
A
2
1
2
3
I
N
T
2
4
V
2
2
3
1
0
P
O
F
M
_
C
N
T
2
D
-
G
N
D
F
E
X
D
2
8
3
0
6
P
-
G
N
D
2
F
U
F
M
_
R
4
F
U
F
M
_
R
_
L
D
579
1
1
1
9
F
U
M
_
L
D
I
N
T
2
4
V
2
I
N
T
2
4
V
2
P
-
G
N
D
/
F
U
M
_
C
K
/
F
U
M
_
D
1
F
E
X
M
_
B
F
E
X
M
_
/
A
5
5
V
N
P
D
1
D
-
G
N
D
3
B
o
t
t
l
e
c
o
o
l
i
n
g
f
a
n
B
T
F
M
1
F
U
F
M
_
F
/
F
U
M
_
D
2
N
,
C
6
5
I
N
T
2
4
V
2
5
I
N
T
2
4
V
2
1
P
-
G
N
D
2
F
E
X
D
2
4 13
1
5
1
9
N
.
C
7
N
.
C
3 6
2
E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l
v
a
r
i
a
b
l
e
m
o
t
o
r
F
E
X
M
_
/
A
F
U
M
_
L
D
F
E
X
M
_
/
B
4
F
E
X
M
_
A
/
F
U
M
_
C
K
4
13
F
E
X
M
_
B
6
5
F
U
F
M
_
F
7
5
5
V
N
P
D
9
1
1
P
-
G
N
D
1
1
1
3
/
P
O
F
M
_
C
N
T
2
1
3
F
E
X
M
_
/
A
1
5
F
E
X
M
_
/
B
1
7
F
E
X
M
_
B
1
3
1
5
1
7
1
9
3
1
7
F
E
X
M
_
/
B
F
E
X
M
_
A
3
P
-
G
N
D
3 1
2
N
C
2
F. Paper exit unit section (6/31)
P
S
M
-
4
p
R
(
P
a
p
e
r
e
x
i
t
U
N
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
P
D
F
1
B
-
1
8
p
S
C
N
1
5
B
R
B
R
B
R
B
R
P
L
P
L
P
L
P
L
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
P
S
M
-
4
p
R
P
K
P
K
P
K
B
R
P
L
P
L
P
L
P
L
G
Y
P
K
p
,
4
P
S
M
-
4
p
R
D
F
1
1
-
4
D
P
-
S
P
1
(
U
p
p
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
(
U
p
p
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
B
L
B
L
B
L
M
a
i
n
u
n
i
t
p
a
p
e
r
e
x
i
t
f
u
l
l
d
e
t
e
c
t
i
o
n
P
L
P
L
P
L
B
L
P
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
G
Y
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
G
2
4
8
N
L
1
1
7
9
2
2
8
-
3
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
B
R
B
R
B
R
P
a
p
e
r
e
x
i
t
d
e
t
e
c
t
i
o
n
T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e
s
e
n
s
o
r
C
N
1
B
4
0
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
B
L
B
R
L
B
G
Y
D
R
-
P
C
U
P
W
B
G
Y
S
4
B
-
P
H
-
K
-
S
L
G
2
4
8
N
L
1
2
-
1
7
9
2
2
8
-
3
D
F
1
1
-
4
D
P
-
S
P
1
D
F
1
1
-
8
D
P
-
S
P
2
(
P
a
p
e
r
e
x
i
t
U
N
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
(
U
p
p
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
C
N
4
P
K
P
K
P
K
P
K
P
a
p
e
r
e
x
i
t
m
o
t
o
r
B
R
B
R
B
R
P
L
P
L
P
L
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
D
R
I
V
E
R
P
W
B
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
S
6
B
-
P
H
-
S
M
3
B
1
2
B
-
P
A
S
K
-
1
3C N T 2
2C N T 2
1C N T 2
1
8
1
5
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
1
5
5
V
N
P
D
1
7
D
-
G
N
D
2
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
P
O
M
_
/
A
3
P
O
M
_
/
B
56 4
P
O
M
_
B
2
5
V
N
P
D
T
F
D
/
P
O
F
M
_
C
N
T
1
2 131
P
O
F
M
/
P
O
F
M
_
C
N
T
2
24
P
O
F
M
P
O
F
M
_
L
D
1
79
P
O
F
M
_
L
D
2
5
P
-
G
N
D
4
6
1
0
8
P
O
_
T
M
P
4
D
-
G
N
D
1
8
P
-
G
N
D
5
V
N
P
D
4
/
P
O
F
M
_
C
N
T
2
1
1
/
P
O
F
M
_
C
N
T
1
1
1
3
1
1
379
P
O
F
M
_
L
D
2
P
O
F
M
_
L
D
3
P
O
F
M
_
L
D
1
3
/
P
O
F
M
_
C
N
T
1
P
O
F
M
1
1
3
3P O F M
1P O F M
2P O F M
4P O F M
/
P
O
F
M
_
C
N
T
2
1
1
1
2
T
F
D
3
P
O
_
T
M
P
3
P
O
-
T
M
P
D
-
G
N
D
4
2
P
a
p
e
r
e
x
i
t
c
o
o
l
i
n
g
f
a
n
P
O
F
M
_
U
(
6
0
)
4 12
4
P
O
F
M
_
U
_
L
D
5
V
N
P
D
1
P
O
M
_
A
2
1
7
P
O
D
2
P
O
D
2
1
3
2
5
V
N
P
D
1
3
5
59 7
P
O
M
_
A
P
O
M
_
/
A
14
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
5
P
O
M
_
/
B
6
P
O
M
_
B
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
2 3
4P - G N D
8P - G N D
6P - G N D
2P - G N D
1D - G N D
3D - G N D
5D - G N D
7D - G N D
6
P
O
M
_
A
6
8
P
O
M
_
/
A
8
1
2
P
O
M
_
B
1
2
1
0
P
O
M
_
/
B
1
0
1
4
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
1
4
1
6
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
1
6
1
P
a
p
e
r
e
x
i
t
c
o
o
l
i
n
g
f
a
n
P
O
F
M
_
F
(
8
0
)
1
P
O
F
M
4
P
O
F
M
_
F
_
L
D
P
-
G
N
D
3
P
-
G
N
D
3
T
F
D
2
D
-
G
N
D
3
D
-
G
N
D
3
5
V
N
P
D
1
P
O
D
2
2
P
L
B
R
G. Right door section 1/2 (7/31)
P
H
N
R
-
2
-
H
+
B
U
0
2
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
(
R
i
g
h
t
d
o
o
r
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
(
U
p
p
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
C
N
1
5
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
P
L
P
L
P
L
P
L
R
i
g
h
t
f
u
l
l
d
e
t
e
c
t
i
o
n
(
R
i
g
h
t
p
a
p
e
r
e
x
i
t
U
N
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
(
R
i
g
h
t
d
o
o
r
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
C
N
2
C
N
1
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
P
L
P
K
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
B
L
B
L
P
K
P
K
P
K
P
K
R
i
g
h
t
p
a
p
e
r
e
x
i
t
d
e
t
e
c
t
i
o
n
G
P
1
S
7
3
1
7
9
2
2
8
-
3
P
K
P
K
P
L
P
L
P
L
P
L
G
Y
G
Y
P
L
P
L
P
L
P
L
B
L
B
L
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
P
H
N
R
-
6
-
H
+
B
U
0
6
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
G
P
1
S
7
3
1
7
9
2
2
8
-
3
A
D
U
o
p
e
n
/
c
lo
s
e
d
e
t
e
c
t
io
n
(
R
i
g
h
t
d
o
o
r
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
B
R
B
R
B
R
B
R
P
L
P
L
G
Y
G
Y
P
K
P
K
P
K
P
K
B
L
B
L
P
K
P
K
P
K
P
K
G
P
1
S
7
3
1
7
9
2
2
8
-
3
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
P
L
P
L
P
L
P
L
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
S
1
6
B
-
P
H
D
S
S
-
B
A
D
U
t
r
a
n
s
p
o
r
t
d
e
t
e
c
t
io
n
1
(
A
D
U
t
r
a
n
s
p
o
r
t
1
r
e
l
a
y
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
:
c
o
m
m
o
n
)
(
R
i
g
h
t
d
o
o
r
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
G
Y
R
D
R
D
L
B
L
B
G
Y
P
L
P
L
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
P
K
P
K
B
L
B
L
G
Y
R
D
R
D
G
P
1
S
7
3
1
7
9
2
2
8
-
3
P
H
N
R
-
3
-
H
+
B
U
0
3
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
S
1
6
B
-
P
H
D
S
S
-
B
P
Q
R
/
P
4
4
0
P
I
N
S
B
4
0
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
A
D
U
t
r
a
n
s
p
o
r
t
d
e
t
e
c
t
io
n
2
(
A
D
U
t
r
a
n
s
p
o
r
t
2
r
e
l
a
y
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
(
R
i
g
h
t
d
o
o
r
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
C
N
3
(
1
/
2
)
P
C
U
P
W
B
G
Y
G
Y
R
I
G
H
T
D
O
O
R
I
/
F
P
W
B
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
G
P
1
S
7
3
1
7
9
2
2
8
-
3
P
H
N
R
-
0
8
-
H
+
B
U
0
8
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
(
R
i
g
h
t
d
o
o
r
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
(
M
a
n
u
a
l
f
e
e
d
t
r
a
y
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
:
c
o
m
m
o
n
)
(
M
a
n
u
a
l
f
e
e
d
t
r
a
y
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
:
c
o
m
m
o
n
)
L
B
L
e
n
g
t
h
d
e
t
e
c
t
i
o
n
1
P
H
N
R
-
9
-
H
+
B
U
0
9
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
B
L
B
R
B
R
B
R
B
R
G
Y
G
Y
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
G
P
1
S
7
3
1
7
9
2
2
8
-
3
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
R
S
M
2
P
P
W
i
d
t
h
d
e
t
e
c
t
i
o
n
P
K
P
K
P
K
P
K
(
M
u
l
t
i
u
p
p
e
r
U
N
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
:
c
o
m
m
o
n
)
R
D
G
Y
G
Y
P
H
N
R
-
8
-
H
+
B
U
0
8
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
P
L
G
Y
R
D
C
N
3
(
2
/
2
)
G
Y
P
L
M
a
n
u
a
l
p
a
p
e
r
fe
e
d
p
a
p
e
r
e
m
p
ty
d
e
te
c
tio
n
P
H
N
R
-
3
G
Y
G
Y
P
L
P
L
E
x
t
e
n
s
i
o
n
G
Y
P
L
P
L
P
L
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
B
L
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
B
L
G
P
1
S
7
3
1
7
9
2
2
8
-
3
B
L
B
L
B
L
P
H
N
R
-
5
-
H
+
B
U
0
5
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
R
e
d
u
c
t
i
o
n
G
P
1
S
7
3
1
7
9
2
2
8
-
3
G
Y
P
L
P
L
P
L
L
B
L
B
L
B
G
Y
R
D
R
D
R
D
G
Y
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
G
Y
G
Y
G
P
1
S
7
3
1
7
9
2
2
8
-
3
T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e
/
h
u
m
i
d
i
t
y
G
Y
G
Y
P
K
P
K
P
K
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
R
B
R
B
R
M
a
n
u
a
l
p
a
p
e
r
fe
e
d
p
a
p
e
r
e
n
try
d
e
te
c
tio
n
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
P
K
P
K
P
K
P
K
G
Y
Z
H
R
-
4
P
H
N
R
-
1
4
-
H
+
B
U
1
4
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
S
3
2
B
-
P
H
D
S
S
-
B
B
L
G
P
1
S
7
3
1
7
9
2
2
8
-
3
D
F
1
1
-
6
D
P
-
S
P
2
P
S
M
2
P
R
R
D
P
L
(
M
u
l
t
i
l
o
w
e
r
U
N
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
:
c
o
m
m
o
n
)
D
F
1
1
-
8
D
P
-
S
P
1
1
H
P
L
D
2
1
4
2
5
V
L
E
D
8
1
3
13
5
V
N
(
L
E
D
)
P
O
D
3
2
4
D
-
G
N
D
5
D
-
G
N
D
6
5
V
N
P
D
(
L
E
D
)
8
5
V
N
2
0
M
P
W
S
1
9
5
V
N
P
D
(
L
E
D
)
5
V
L
E
D
8
M
P
L
D
1
1
3
1
6
1
5
1
8
5
V
N
P
D
(
L
E
D
)
M
T
O
P
2
5
V
N
P
D
(
L
E
D
)
2
5
M
T
O
P
1
D
-
G
N
D
3
1
2
8
5
V
N
2
9
1
4
2
7
2
4
M
T
O
P
1
6
2
2
D - G N D
D - G N D
D - G N D
D - G N D
2
7
1
8
6
D - G N D
3
5
4
D - G N D
D - G N D
D - G N D
3
M
T
O
P
2
D
-
G
N
D
5
V
N
P
D
(
L
E
D
)
12
T
H
_
M
1234
5
V
N
H
U
D
_
M
D
-
G
N
D
1
4
1
3
2
D
-
G
N
D
123
M
T
O
P
1
D
-
G
N
D
5
V
N
P
D
(
L
E
D
)
1
T
H
_
M
5
V
N
P
D
(
L
E
D
)
52
D
-
G
N
D
7
H
U
D
_
M
1
0
1
2
3
5
V
N
P
D
(
L
E
D
)
9
1
1
5
V
N
4 8
7
M
T
O
P
2
8
9
5
5
V
N
4
5
V
N
P
D
(
L
E
D
)
1
1
1
0
32
5
V
N
1
D
-
G
N
D
M
P
W
S
1
M
P
W
S
D
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
6
3
5
V
N
P
D
(
L
E
D
)
589 7
32
5
V
N
6
M
P
W
S
3
P
O
D
3
5
V
N
P
D
(
L
E
D
)
5
5
V
N
P
D
(
L
E
D
)
4
1
M
P
L
D
1
6 5
2
D
-
G
N
D
2
13
A
P
P
D
1
2
4
V
3
1
1
2
5
V
N
P
D
(
L
E
D
)
D
-
G
N
D
1
1
1
D
-
G
N
D
3
0
2
8
2
6
M
P
F
D
2
9
3
1
S
E
L
I
N
1
3
3
S
E
L
I
N
2
M
P
L
D
1
6
3
M
P
L
D
1
1
2
H
P
L
D
2
4
D
-
G
N
D
1
23
D
-
G
N
D
1
5
V
N
P
D
(
L
E
D
)
3
5
V
N
(
L
E
D
)
D
S
W
_
A
D
U
D
-
G
N
D
2
3
5
V
N
P
D
(
L
E
D
)
6
3
D
-
G
N
D
T
F
D
-
R
5
V
N
(
L
E
D
)
2 1
2 1
4
4
P
O
D
3
5
V
N
P
D
(
L
E
D
)
2
D
-
G
N
D
3
5
V
N
(
L
E
D
)
D
-
G
N
D
5
A
D
U
g
a
t
e
s
o
l
e
n
o
i
d
1
2
4
V
3
2
2
T
F
D
-
R
T
F
D
-
R
2
5
5
V
N
2
1
2
4
V
3
/
A
D
U
G
S
2
7
2
3
9
/
A
D
U
G
S
2
4
V
3
5
V
N
2
5
1
5
V
N
4
0
F
-
G
N
D
3
/
A
D
U
G
S
1
12 1
1
2
D
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
A
P
P
D
1
D
S
W
_
A
D
U
79
5
V
N
(
L
E
D
)
1
0
M
P
F
D
A
P
P
D
1
1
5
5
V
N
P
D
H
W
P
D
T
H
_
M
H
U
D
_
M
1
1
1
6
1
3
1
4
6
S
I
N
3
3
S
E
L
I
N
1
47
S
E
L
I
N
2
P
O
D
3
1
0
A
P
P
D
2
8
A
D
U
D
3
9 5
S
E
L
I
N
3
H
U
D
_
M
S
I
N
3
1
8
36
3
2
2
0
5
V
N
P
D
S
E
L
I
N
1
A
P
P
D
2
D
-
G
N
D
2
H
W
P
D
1
7
A
P
P
D
1
7
M
P
F
D
S
E
L
I
N
3
P
O
D
3
9
2
5
7
2
3
4
0
1
7
2
1
6
3
2
2
/
M
P
F
S
/
M
P
G
S
4
0
2
4
V
3
2
4
V
3
3
4
8
3
6
H
U
D
_
M
3
1
1
5
T
H
_
M
2
3
8
3
2
1
9
2
1
4
S
E
L
I
N
2
T
H
_
M
3
7
3
5
S
E
L
I
N
3
H
W
P
D
S
I
N
3
5
V
N
P
D
2
0
P
O
D
3
2
2
2
4
A
P
P
D
1
3
9
A
P
P
D
2
5
V
N
P
D
(
L
E
D
)
4
A
P
P
D
2
5
D
-
G
N
D
6
1
8
3
1
9
4
2
7
P
-
G
N
D
2
7
1
4
1
4
3
0
3
0
3
8
/
M
P
F
S
2
4
V
3
/
M
P
G
S
3
1
1
5
8
M
P
F
D
3
2
4
V
3
1
2
12
2
4
V
3
/
M
P
F
S
1
M
a
n
u
a
l
p
a
p
e
r
f
e
e
d
t
a
k
e
-
u
p
s
o
l
e
n
o
i
d
5
V
N
(
L
E
D
)
5
V
N
(
L
E
D
)
M
P
F
D
D
-
G
N
D
3 12
5
V
N
(
L
E
D
)
4
2
/
M
P
G
S
2
23
3
/
M
P
G
S
M
P
F
D
1
2
4
V
3
4 5
5
1
0
D
-
G
N
D
2
1
8 6
1
2
4
V
3
1
1
3
5
M
a
n
u
a
l
p
a
p
e
r
f
e
e
d
g
a
t
e
s
o
l
e
n
o
i
d
2
4
6
2
/
M
P
G
S
7
7
/
M
P
F
S
24
65
D
-
G
N
D
2
4
V
3
1
D
-
G
N
D
M
P
E
D
12
M
P
E
D
3
3
4
5
V
N
(
L
E
D
)
5
5 V N ( L E D )
5 V N ( L E D )
13
D - G N D
D - G N D
D - G N D
5 V N ( L E D )
D
-
G
N
D
T
H
_
M
H
U
D
_
M
M
P
E
D
5
V
N
(
L
E
D
)
789
M
P
F
D
A
P
P
D
1
6
5
V
N
P
D
(
L
E
D
)
5
V
N
P
D
(
L
E
D
)
2
D
-
G
N
D
A
P
P
D
2
3
8
A
P
P
D
2
1
7
D
-
G
N
D
2
H. Right door section 2/2 (8/31)
2
T
C
s
e
p
a
r
a
t
i
o
n
m
o
t
o
r
(
2
T
C
s
e
p
a
r
a
t
i
o
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
B
2
P
-
P
H
-
K
-
S
(
A
D
U
t
r
a
n
s
p
o
r
t
2
r
e
l
a
y
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
(
R
i
g
h
t
d
o
o
r
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
C
N
1
8
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
2
T
C
s
e
p
a
r
a
t
i
o
n
d
e
t
e
c
t
i
o
n
1
P
L
G
Y
G
Y
P
C
U
B
R
G
Y
G
Y
P
W
B
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
B
L
G
Y
G
Y
G
P
1
S
7
3
1
7
9
2
2
8
-
3
P
H
N
R
-
0
5
-
H
+
B
U
0
5
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
P
H
N
R
-
0
8
-
H
+
B
U
0
8
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
B
3
0
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
A
D
U
L
m
o
t
o
r
(
R
i
g
h
t
d
o
o
r
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
C
N
7
P
L
P
L
P
K
P
K
B
R
B
R
L
B
L
B
P
K
P
K
P
L
P
L
L
B
L
B
B
R
B
R
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
S
6
B
-
P
H
-
S
M
3
D
R
I
V
E
R
P
W
B
A
D
U
H
m
o
t
o
r
(
R
i
g
h
t
d
o
o
r
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
(
U
p
p
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
(
U
p
p
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
(
U
p
p
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
P
L
P
L
P
K
P
K
B
R
B
R
L
B
L
B
P
K
P
K
P
L
P
L
L
B
L
B
B
R
B
R
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
S
6
B
-
P
H
-
S
M
3
P
Q
R
/
P
4
4
0
P
I
N
S
B
1
2
B
-
P
A
S
K
-
1
1
5
V
N
P
D
(
L
E
D
)
5
3
T
H
P
S
3
2
D
-
G
N
D
4
5
P
-
G
N
D
1
4
/
T
U
R
M
_
A
2
T
H
P
S
2
1
3
1
3
1
4
T
H
P
S
2
1
6
D
-
G
N
D
P
-
G
N
D
1
/
T
U
R
M
_
A
2
4
P
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
T
H
P
S
1
T
H
P
S
2
7
T
H
P
S
2
7
2
8
1
2
D
-
G
N
D
2
5
V
N
P
D
(
L
E
D
)
3
2
9
5
V
N
P
D
(
L
E
D
)
2
9
2
8
D
-
G
N
D
2
4
P
-
G
N
D
2
4
2
6
/
T
U
R
M
_
A
2
6
3
7
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
3
7
3
5
A
D
M
H
_
B
3
5
3
4
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
3
4
3
6
A
D
M
H
_
A
/
3
6
3
8
A
D
M
H
_
B
/
3
8
1
6
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
1
6
3
3
A
D
M
H
_
A
3
3
5
1
2
A
D
M
L
_
A
/
1
2
1
0
A
D
M
L
_
B
/
6
/
T
U
R
M
_
A
8
5
V
N
P
D
(
L
E
D
)
1
0
1
1
A
D
M
L
_
B
1
0
2
2
1
1
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
1
0
2
2
A
D
M
L
_
B
/
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
5
A
D
M
L
_
A
/
1
A
D
M
L
_
B
6
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
2
A
D
M
L
_
B
/
3 4
A
D
M
L
_
A
8
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
1
2
A
D
M
L
_
A
1
1
A
D
M
L
_
A
/
5
A
D
M
L
_
A
2
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
1
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
9
A
D
M
L
_
B
7
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
6
A
D
M
H
_
A
/
3 5
A
D
M
H
_
A
4
A
D
M
H
_
B
/
A
D
M
H
_
B
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
5
A
D
M
H
_
B
6
A
D
M
H
_
A
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
2 4
A
D
M
H
_
A
/
1
A
D
M
H
_
B
/
3
T
H
P
S
6
2
D
-
G
N
D
7
1
5
V
N
P
D
(
L
E
D
)
8
5
P
-
G
N
D
4
4
/
T
U
R
M
_
A
5
3
1
8
5
V
N
P
D
(
L
E
D
)
3
9
5
V
N
(
L
E
D
)
3
9
I. High voltage section (9/31)
S
P
S
-
0
1
T
-
1
8
7
(
T
C
r
e
l
a
y
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
B
K
C
D
)
S
P
S
-
0
1
T
-
1
8
7
F
P
S
-
1
8
7
(
B
K
)
(
1
s
t
T
C
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
F
P
S
-
1
8
7
(
B
K
)
R
D
R
D
N
E
W
1
s
t
T
C
P
W
B
S
P
S
-
0
1
T
-
1
8
7
(
T
C
r
e
l
a
y
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
C
D
)
S
P
S
-
0
1
T
-
1
8
7
C
N
1
(
U
p
p
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
(
L
o
w
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
(
L
o
w
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
C
N
1
0
R
D
P
S
-
1
8
7
(
B
L
)
(
1
s
t
T
C
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
F
P
S
-
1
8
7
(
B
L
)
I
N
T
2
4
V
2
1
R
D
R
D
I
N
T
2
4
V
2
S
P
S
-
0
1
T
-
1
8
7
(
T
C
r
e
l
a
y
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
C
D
)
S
P
S
-
0
1
T
-
1
8
7
R
D
P
-
G
N
D
2
G
Y
G
Y
P
-
G
N
D
R
D
/
H
V
_
D
A
T
A
#
3
P
K
P
K
/
1
T
C
_
D
A
T
A
#
S
P
S
-
0
1
T
-
1
8
7
(
T
C
r
e
l
a
y
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
Y
C
D
)
S
P
S
-
0
1
T
-
1
8
7
P
S
-
1
8
7
(
R
D
)
(
1
s
t
T
C
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
F
P
S
-
1
8
7
(
R
D
)
/
H
V
_
C
L
K
#
4
B
R
B
R
/
1
T
C
_
C
L
K
#
R
D
R
D
/
H
V
_
L
D
1
#
5
L
B
L
B
/
1
T
C
_
L
D
1
#
T
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
b
e
l
t
u
n
H
V
_
R
E
M
#
6
P
L
P
L
H
V
_
R
E
M
#
P
S
-
1
8
7
(
Y
L
)
(
1
s
t
T
C
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
F
P
S
-
1
8
7
(
Y
L
)
B
0
6
B
-
P
A
S
K
B
4
0
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
R
D
D
r
i
v
e
U
N
_
C
L
(
P
T
C
-
K
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
S
R
A
-
2
1
T
-
3
(
M
C
-
K
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
P
S
-
2
5
0
(
W
H
)
S
R
A
-
2
1
T
-
3
S
R
A
-
2
1
T
-
4
P
S
2
5
0
(
B
K
)
M
C
-
K
R
D
M
C
-
K
R
D
P
T
C
S
R
A
-
2
1
T
-
3
(
M
C
-
K
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
V
H
R
-
2
G
B
-
K
R
D
G
B
-
K
W
H
C
A
S
E
(
M
C
-
K
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
V
H
R
-
3
D
R
-
P
C
U
P
W
B
P
S
2
5
0
(
W
H
)
S
R
A
-
2
1
T
-
3
W
H
B
S
-
K
S
R
A
-
2
1
T
-
3
S
R
A
-
2
1
T
-
4
B
S
-
K
D
r
i
v
e
U
N
_
B
K
G
B
-
C
(
S
p
r
i
n
g
)
G
B
-
C
C
N
1
C
N
6
B
S
-
C
(
S
p
r
i
n
g
)
B
S
-
C
R
D
2
4
V
3
G
Y
G
Y
P
-
G
N
D
G
B
-
M
(
S
p
r
i
n
g
)
G
B
-
M
N
E
W
M
C
P
W
B
R
D
R
D
I
N
T
2
4
V
2
G
Y
G
Y
P
-
G
N
D
(
M
C
r
e
l
a
y
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
:
c
o
m
m
o
n
)
(
M
C
r
e
l
a
y
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
:
c
o
m
m
o
n
)
(
M
C
r
e
l
a
y
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
:
c
o
m
m
o
n
)
B
S
-
M
(
S
p
r
i
n
g
)
B
S
-
M
P
K
P
K
/
H
V
_
D
A
T
A
P
S
-
1
8
7
M
C
-
C
L
B
L
B
/
H
V
_
C
L
K
G
B
-
Y
(
S
p
r
i
n
g
)
G
B
-
Y
P
L
P
L
/
H
V
_
L
D
1
P
S
-
1
8
7
M
C
-
M
R
D
B
R
B
R
B
S
-
Y
(
S
p
r
i
n
g
)
B
S
-
Y
B
0
8
B
-
P
A
S
K
B
4
0
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
P
S
-
1
8
7
M
C
-
M
P
S
-
1
8
7
M
C
-
Y
R
D
P
S
-
1
8
7
(
W
H
)
P
S
-
1
8
7
M
C
-
Y
R
D
M
C
-
C
M
Y
(
2
n
d
T
C
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
P
S
1
8
7
(
W
H
)
C
N
1
C
N
5
P
S
1
8
7
(
B
L
)
2
-
T
C
R
D
2
-
T
C
I
N
T
2
4
V
2
1
R
D
R
D
I
N
T
2
4
V
2
P
-
G
N
D
2
G
Y
G
Y
P
-
G
N
D
P
S
1
8
7
(
R
D
)
C
L
R
R
D
C
L
R
/
T
C
_
D
A
T
A
#
3
L
B
L
B
/
T
C
_
D
A
T
A
#
V
H
R
-
2
/
T
C
_
C
L
K
#
4
P
K
P
K
/
T
C
_
C
L
K
#
/
T
C
_
L
D
#
5
B
R
B
R
/
T
C
_
L
D
#
2
n
d
T
C
P
W
B
/
H
V
_
R
E
M
#
6
P
L
P
L
/
H
V
_
R
E
M
#
B
0
6
B
-
P
A
S
K
B
3
4
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
(
2
n
d
T
C
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
P
S
1
8
7
(
W
H
)
C
N
1
C
N
1
9
R
D
W
H
V
H
R
-
2
P
T
C
P
W
B
B
0
7
B
-
P
A
S
K
B
1
6
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
T
C
-
M
T
C
-
C
T
C
-
K
1
T
C
-
Y
1
T
C
-
M
1
T
C
-
C
1
T
C
-
K
P
T
C
C
A
S
E
I
N
T
2
4
V
2
P
-
G
N
D
/
P
T
C
_
D
A
T
A
#
1
/
P
T
C
_
C
L
K
#
/
P
T
C
_
L
D
#
H
V
_
R
E
M
P
T
C
_
E
R
R
1234567
/
P
T
C
_
L
D
#
H
V
_
R
E
M
P
T
C
_
E
R
R
1
1
1
3
1
5
I
N
T
2
4
V
2
P
-
G
N
D
/
P
T
C
_
D
A
T
A
#
/
P
T
C
_
C
L
K
#
8
1
0
79
H
V
_
R
E
M
#
13576868 1357
1
1
2
8 246
1
0
2
4
V
3
3
I
N
T
2
4
V
2
P
-
G
N
D
14
P
-
G
N
D
8
/
H
V
_
D
A
T
A
#
/
H
V
_
C
L
K
#
/
H
V
_
L
D
1
#
H
V
_
R
E
M
#
1
0
567 2
2
P
T
C
_
U
N
1
T
C
-
K
1
T
C
-
C
1
T
C
-
M
1
T
C
-
Y
T
C
-
K
T
C
-
C
T
C
-
M
T
C
-
Y
T
C
-
Y
J. Toner bottle section (10/31)
R
S
M
2
P
-
N
P
(
T
M
-
C
R
U
M
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
P
D
F
1
B
-
3
4
D
E
S
(
U
p
p
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
C
N
1
0
B
R
B
R
B
R
B
R
P
L
P
L
P
L
P
L
R
S
M
2
P
-
N
P
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
P
K
P
K
P
K
P
K
R
S
M
2
P
-
N
P
B
R
B
R
B
R
B
R
P
L
P
L
P
L
P
L
R
S
M
2
P
-
N
P
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
P
K
P
K
P
K
P
K
R
S
M
2
P
-
N
P
B
R
B
R
B
R
B
R
P
L
P
L
P
L
P
L
C
R
U
M
_
K
(
C
R
U
M
r
e
l
a
y
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
R
S
M
4
P
-
N
P
(
T
M
-
C
R
U
M
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
(
U
p
p
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
P
K
P
K
P
K
P
K
P
K
B
R
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
T
S
R
-
0
4
V
-
K
C
R
U
M
_
K
2
(
C
R
U
M
e
l
a
y
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
R
S
M
4
P
-
N
P
G
Y
G
Y
B
L
B
L
P
K
P
K
P
K
P
K
P
K
B
R
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
T
S
R
-
0
4
V
-
K
C
R
U
M
_
C
(
C
R
U
M
e
l
a
y
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
R
S
M
4
P
-
N
P
G
Y
G
Y
B
L
B
L
P
K
P
L
P
L
P
L
P
L
B
R
B
R
B
R
B
R
B
R
T
S
R
-
0
4
V
-
K
P
C
U
P
W
B
C
R
U
M
_
M
(
C
R
U
M
e
l
a
y
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
R
S
M
4
P
-
N
P
G
Y
G
Y
B
L
B
L
P
K
P
K
P
K
P
K
P
K
B
R
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
T
S
R
-
0
4
V
-
K
C
R
U
M
_
Y
(
C
R
U
M
e
l
a
y
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
R
S
M
4
P
-
N
P
G
Y
G
Y
B
L
B
L
P
K
P
L
P
L
P
L
P
L
B
R
B
R
B
R
B
R
B
R
T
S
R
-
0
4
V
-
K
p
,
1
0
D
F
1
1
-
4
D
P
-
S
P
1
(
c
)
D
F
1
1
-
8
D
P
-
S
P
1
(
b
)
D
F
1
1
-
6
D
P
-
S
P
1
(
a
)
T
M
_
Y
b
T
M
_
Y
a
3
8
2
0
D
-
G
N
D
1
2
5
V
3
_
C
R
U
M
2
D
-
G
N
D
1
2 3
C
R
M
_
K
2
_
C
K
#
32
5
V
3
_
C
R
U
M
2
14
C
R
M
_
Y
_
D
T
#
4
3
C
R
M
_
Y
_
C
K
#
3
C
R
M
_
C
_
D
T
#
4
3
C
R
M
_
M
_
C
K
#
3
1
D
-
G
N
D
1
2
5
V
3
_
C
R
U
M
2
5
V
3
_
C
R
U
M
2
4
C
R
M
_
M
_
D
T
#
4
3
C
R
M
_
C
_
C
K
#
3
4 1
D
-
G
N
D
1
1
D
-
G
N
D
1
4
C
R
M
_
K
2
_
D
T
#
4
1 4
C
R
M
_
K
_
D
T
#
4
3
C
R
M
_
K
_
C
K
#
3
3
5
3
3
2
5
V
3
_
C
R
U
M
2
4
3
1
3
0
3
2
4
0
C
R
M
_
Y
_
D
T
#
C
R
M
_
Y
_
C
K
#
3
7
1
3
T
M
_
K
1
b
3
D
-
G
N
D
C
R
M
_
M
_
D
T
#
C
R
M
_
M
_
C
K
#
5
V
3
_
C
R
U
M
C
R
M
_
M
_
D
T
#
5
V
3
_
C
R
U
M
4
C
R
M
_
Y
_
D
T
#
C
R
M
_
Y
_
C
K
#
C
R
M
_
M
_
C
K
#
D
-
G
N
D
4
C
R
M
_
C
_
D
T
#
1 4
C
R
M
_
K
_
D
T
#
3
C
R
M
_
C
_
C
K
#
D
-
G
N
D
3 12
5
V
3
_
C
R
U
M
D
-
G
N
D
1
1
9
1
6
D
-
G
N
D
1
7
T
M
_
Y
a
1
7
1
2
T
o
n
e
r
m
o
t
o
r
Y
C
R
M
_
K
_
C
K
#
2
T
M
_
C
a
T
M
_
C
b
1
9
T
M
_
Y
b
5
V
3
_
C
R
U
M
2
5
V
3
_
C
R
U
M
1
1
0
1
2
1
8
C
R
M
_
Y
_
D
T
#
C
R
M
_
Y
_
C
K
#
1
8
2
2
1
4
1
6
1
4
1
6
C
R
M
_
C
_
D
T
#
C
R
M
_
C
_
C
K
#
C
R
M
_
C
_
C
K
#
C
R
M
_
K
2
_
C
K
#
4D - G N D
7D - G N D
65 V 3 C R
55 V 3 C R
45 V 3 C R
35 V 3 C R
25 V 3 C R
15 V 3 C R
6D - G N D
5D - G N D
4D - G N D
3D - G N D
2D - G N D
1D - G N D
3D - G N D
2D - G N D
1D - G N D
C
R
M
_
K
_
C
K
#
C
R
M
_
K
_
D
T
#
D
-
G
N
D
5
V
3
_
C
R
U
M
1
0
2
9
2
2
2
1
C
R
M
_
M
_
C
K
#
C
R
M
_
M
_
D
T
#
2
0
2
1
T
M
_
M
b
T
M
_
C
b
9
1
3
2
T
o
n
e
r
m
o
t
o
r
M
T
o
n
e
r
m
o
t
o
r
C
T
o
n
e
r
m
o
t
o
r
K
2
2 122
46
8
C
R
M
_
K
_
D
T
#
C
R
M
_
K
_
C
K
#
D
-
G
N
D
8
2
T
M
_
K
1
a
T
M
_
M
a
1
9
1 2
2
T
M
_
K
1
b
1
5
1
5
7
T
M
_
C
b
2
2
0
2
2
T
M
_
M
b
T
M
_
Y
a
T
M
_
C
a
1
T
M
_
M
b
T
M
_
M
a
2
79
1
1
1
1
T
M
_
K
2
b
2
3
2
5
21
5
T
M
_
K
2
a
5
2
7
2
1
T
M
_
K
1
b
3
9
2
4
2
8
2
6
C
R
M
_
K
2
_
D
T
#
T
M
_
C
a
T
M
_
K
2
b
T
M
_
K
2
a
13 242 3
T
o
n
e
r
m
o
t
o
r
K
1
1
T
M
_
K
1
a
1
1
T
M
_
K
1
a
T
M
_
K
2
a
1
3
T
M
_
M
a
C
R
M
_
K
2
_
C
K
#
1
T
M
_
K
2
b
1
T
M
_
Y
b
5
V
3
_
C
R
U
M
2
C
R
M
_
K
2
_
D
T
#
4
C
R
M
_
K
2
_
C
K
#
3
3
4
3
6
1
2
C
R
M
_
K
2
_
D
T
#
C
R
M
_
C
_
D
T
#
K. Hopper section (11/31)
R
S
M
3
P
-
B
P
(
T
M
-
C
R
U
M
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
P
D
F
1
B
-
3
4
D
E
S
(
U
p
p
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
C
N
8
B
R
B
R
B
R
B
R
P
L
P
L
P
L
P
L
R
S
M
3
P
-
B
P
B
R
B
R
B
R
B
R
P
L
P
L
P
L
P
L
D
R
I
V
E
R
P
W
B
R
S
M
3
P
-
B
P
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
P
K
P
K
P
K
P
K
R
S
M
3
P
-
B
P
B
R
B
R
B
R
B
R
P
L
P
L
P
L
P
L
B
1
2
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
(
H
T
C
S
r
e
l
a
y
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
R
S
M
-
3
P
i
n
_
N
P
(
T
M
-
C
R
U
M
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
(
U
p
p
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
C
N
1
0
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
P
L
B
R
B
R
B
R
B
R
G
Y
G
Y
D
F
3
-
3
S
-
2
C
P
C
U
P
W
B
(
H
T
C
S
r
e
l
a
y
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
R
S
M
-
3
P
i
n
_
N
P
B
L
B
L
P
L
P
L
P
L
P
L
P
L
G
Y
G
Y
D
F
3
-
3
S
-
2
C
(
H
T
C
S
r
e
l
a
y
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
R
S
M
-
3
P
i
n
_
N
P
B
L
B
L
P
L
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
G
Y
G
Y
B
4
0
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
D
F
3
-
3
S
-
2
C
p
,
9
D
F
1
1
-
4
D
P
-
S
P
1
(
c
)
D
F
1
1
-
4
D
P
-
S
P
1
(
d
)
D
-
G
N
D
3
H
o
p
p
e
r
r
e
m
a
in
in
g
q
u
a
n
tity
s
e
n
s
o
r
C
5
V
N
P
D
1
H
T
C
S
_
C
2
H
o
p
p
e
r
r
e
m
a
in
in
g
q
u
a
n
tity
s
e
n
s
o
r
Y
H
o
p
p
e
r
r
e
m
a
in
in
g
q
u
a
n
tity
s
e
n
s
o
r
M
5
V
N
P
D
1
H
T
C
S
_
M
2
D
-
G
N
D
3
H
T
M
_
K
1
a
1
3
H
T
M
_
K
1
b
3
2
5
2
3
H
T
M
_
K
1
a
H
T
M
_
K
1
a
H
T
M
_
K
1
b
3
H
T
M
_
K
1
b
1
2
3
2
5
H
o
p
p
e
r
m
o
t
o
r
C
H
o
p
p
e
r
m
o
t
o
r
Y
1
H
T
M
_
C
a
1
H
T
M
_
C
a
2
7
3
H
o
p
p
e
r
m
o
t
o
r
K
1
1
H
T
M
_
C
a
H
T
M
_
C
b
3
2
9
H
T
M
_
C
b
2
9
7
H
T
M
_
C
b
2
7
5
H
o
p
p
e
r
m
o
t
o
r
M
3
H
T
M
_
M
b
3
3
3
H
T
M
_
M
b
3
3
H
T
M
_
M
a
3
1
9
H
T
M
_
M
a
1
1
H
T
M
_
M
b
1
H
T
M
_
M
a
1
3
1
3
H
T
M
_
Y
b
3
2
6
H
T
M
_
Y
b
2
6
1
H
T
M
_
Y
a
1
2
4
H
T
M
_
Y
a
2
4
2
H
T
M
_
Y
a
H
T
M
_
Y
b
4
H
T
C
S
_
C
5
V
N
P
D
2
8
5
V
N
P
D
2
8
1
5
3
0
H
T
C
S
_
C
3
0
1
7
3
2
H
T
C
S
_
M
3
2
1
6
H
T
C
S
_
M
123123
H
T
C
S
_
Y
D
-
G
N
D
5
V
N
P
D
2
123
D - G N D
4
3
123
1
3
D
-
G
N
D
3
4
H
T
C
S
_
Y
3
4
D - G N D
D - G N D
2
1
4
3
D - G N D
5 V N P D
5 V N P D
5 V N P D
5 V N P D
H
T
C
S
_
Y
1
8
123123
12
H
T
C
S
_
M
D
-
G
N
D
5
V
N
P
D
H
T
C
S
_
Y
5
V
N
P
D
H
T
C
S
_
C
D
-
G
N
D
5
V
N
P
D
L. Process drive K unit section (12/31)
B
e
l
t
M
(
D
r
i
v
e
U
N
-
B
K
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
S
D
F
1
B
-
3
4
D
E
P
(
U
p
p
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
C
N
4
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
B
R
B
R
B
R
B
R
P
L
P
L
P
L
P
L
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
P
K
P
K
P
K
P
K
D
R
I
V
E
R
B
6
B
-
X
H
B
1
2
B
-
P
A
S
K
-
1
P
W
B
D
M
_
K
C
N
5
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
B
R
B
R
B
R
B
R
P
L
P
L
P
L
P
L
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
P
K
P
K
P
K
P
K
B
6
B
-
P
H
-
K
-
S
B
1
3
B
-
P
A
S
K
-
1
N
E
W
d
e
v
e
l
o
p
i
n
g
B
K
C
N
1
3
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
V
H
-
2
P
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
R
B
R
B
R
B
R
P
L
P
L
P
L
P
L
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
P
K
P
K
P
K
P
K
B
R
B
R
B
R
B
R
B
0
7
B
-
P
A
S
K
P
h
a
s
e
d
e
t
e
c
t
i
o
n
B
K
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
P
K
P
K
P
K
P
K
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
G
P
1
A
7
1
P
H
R
-
3
P
H
N
R
-
0
2
-
H
+
B
U
0
2
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
P
C
U
P
W
B
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
B
R
B
R
B
R
B
R
P
H
N
R
-
0
2
-
H
+
B
U
0
2
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
P
L
P
L
P
L
P
L
P
S
M
-
2
p
i
n
R
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
P
K
P
K
P
K
P
K
B
4
0
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
P
S
M
-
2
p
i
n
R
C
N
1
8
L
B
P
K
B
3
0
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
D
r
i
v
e
u
n
B
K
C
N
1
3
B
4
0
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
3
1
P
T
C
M
_
b
3
1
2
5
2
7
3
4
P
T
C
M
_
a
3
4
P
T
C
c
l
e
a
n
e
r
m
o
t
o
r
1
P
T
C
M
_
a
1
2
P
T
C
M
_
b
2
3
9
5
V
N
P
D
3
7
D
-
G
N
D
4
0
B
L
T
_
H
P
P
T
C
M
_
A
P
T
C
M
_
B
D
V
K
M
_
G
A
I
N
6
D
V
K
M
_
C
W
/C
C
W
7
2
/
D
V
K
M
_
D
4
3
0
D
V
K
M
_
C
W
/
C
C
W
3
0
D
V
K
M
_
L
D
1
0
5
V
N
2
9
D
-
G
N
D
2
9
2
1
D
M
_
K
_
A
/
2
1
2
3
D
M
_
K
_
A
2
3
D
M
_
K
_
B
1
7
1
9
D
M
_
K
_
B
/
1
9
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
1
3
1
3
1
8
2
4
V
3
1
8
2
0
/
B
L
T
C
L
2
0
2
4
V
3
1
2
/
B
L
T
C
L
1
B
e
l
t
s
e
p
a
r
a
t
i
o
n
c
l
u
t
c
h
(
n
o
r
m
a
l
)
12
2
4
V
3
D
V
K
M
_
L
D
5
5
V
N
2
/
D
V
K
M
_
D
2
4
V
4
1
P
-
G
N
D
2
D
-
G
N
D
1
/
D
V
K
M
_
C
K
4 3
2
9
/
B
L
T
C
L
_
R
3
1
2
4
V
3
2
4
V
3
2
5
2
7
/
B
L
T
C
L
/
D
V
K
M
_
C
K
9
/
D
V
K
M
_
D
D
-
G
N
D
9
B
T
M
_
A
/
9
1
1
1
6
5
B
T
M
_
B
5
B
T
M
_
A
1
1
5
V
N
P
D
3
1
6
5
V
N
P
D
1
2
D
-
G
N
D
1
2
1
4
D
H
P
D
_
K
1
4
D
-
G
N
D
1
D
H
P
D
_
K
2
P
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
1
1
5
5
V
N
7
D
V
K
M
_
L
D
1
3
53 34
2
4
V
4
1
1 2 8
1
1
96 1
D
M
_
K
_
A
4
D
M
_
K
_
A
/
1
5
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
1
5
3
D
M
_
K
_
B
/
16
D
M
_
K
_
A
/
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
B
T
M
_
A
/
D
M
_
K
_
B
D
M
_
K
_
B
/
B
T
M
_
A
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
B
T
M
_
B
B
T
M
_
B
/
1
0
7
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
3
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
3
7
B
T
M
_
B
/
1
2
B
T
M
_
B
B
T
M
_
A
/
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
1
63 54
7
2
B
T
M
_
B
/
1
B
T
M
_
A
2
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
5
D
M
_
K
_
B
1
7
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
/
D
V
K
M
_
C
K
2
4
V
3
2
2
/
B
L
T
C
L
_
R
2
4
2
4
2
7
2
5
2
5
2
4
V
4
P
-
G
N
D
2
7
26
48 6
8
D
V
K
M
_
C
W
/
C
C
W
1
5
1
7
C
C
M
_
a
1
C
C
M
_
b
2
2
6
C
C
M
_
b
2
8
1
D
M
_
K
_
A
D
V
K
M
_
G
A
I
N
1
0
D
V
K
M
_
G
A
I
N
12
B
e
l
t
s
e
p
a
r
a
t
i
o
n
c
l
u
t
c
h
(
r
e
v
e
r
s
e
)
2
2
2
/
B
L
T
C
L
_
R
2
3
5
C
C
M
_
a
2
6
2
8
1
9
2
1
C
C
M
_
b
3
3
C
C
M
_
a
D
H
P
D
_
K
2
3
5
V
N
P
D
C
h
a
r
g
e
r
c
l
e
a
n
e
r
m
o
t
o
r
M. Process drive CL unit section (13/31)
R
S
M
6
P
(
D
r
i
v
e
U
N
-
C
L
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
S
D
F
1
B
-
3
4
D
E
P
(
U
p
p
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
C
N
5
W
H
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
B
K
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
B
L
B
R
B
R
B
R
B
R
O
R
P
L
P
L
P
L
P
L
Y
L
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
R
D
P
K
P
K
P
K
P
K
B
1
3
B
-
P
A
S
K
-
1
R
S
M
6
P
C
N
6
W
H
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
B
K
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
B
L
B
R
B
R
B
R
B
R
O
R
P
L
P
L
P
L
P
L
Y
L
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
R
D
P
K
P
K
P
K
P
K
R
S
M
6
P
W
H
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
D
R
I
V
E
R
P
W
B
B
K
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
B
L
B
R
B
R
B
R
B
R
O
R
P
L
P
L
P
L
P
L
Y
L
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
R
D
P
K
P
K
P
K
P
K
B
1
4
B
-
P
A
S
K
-
1
D
V
m
o
t
o
r
C
L
(
U
p
p
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
C
N
9
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
B
R
B
R
B
R
B
R
P
L
P
L
P
L
P
L
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
P
h
a
s
e
d
e
t
e
c
t
i
o
n
C
L
1
(
C
)
B
7
P
-
P
H
-
K
-
S
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
P
K
P
K
P
K
P
K
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
P
H
R
-
3
P
h
a
s
e
d
e
t
e
c
t
i
o
n
C
L
2
(
M
)
G
Y
B
R
B
R
B
R
B
R
B
L
B
L
P
H
R
-
3
P
h
a
s
e
d
e
t
e
c
t
i
o
n
C
L
3
(
Y
)
G
Y
P
C
U
P
W
B
P
L
P
L
P
L
P
L
B
L
B
L
P
H
R
-
3
T
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
s
e
p
a
r
a
t
io
n
s
e
n
s
o
r
C
L
(
T
C
b
e
l
t
s
e
p
a
r
a
t
i
o
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
L
C
D
)
B
R
B
R
B
R
B
R
B
R
G
Y
G
Y
B
3
0
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
B
L
B
L
B
L
G
P
1
S
7
3
P
1
7
9
2
2
8
-
3
P
H
N
R
-
3
-
H
+
B
U
0
3
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
C
N
1
8
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
3
0
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
P
S
M
4
P
R
(
U
p
p
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
C
N
1
5
D
F
1
1
-
6
D
P
-
S
P
1
(
a
)
R
D
B
R
G
Y
L
B
D
r
i
v
e
u
n
C
L
B
3
0
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
1
1
5
V
N
P
D
(
L
E
D
)
7
5
V
N
P
D
(
L
E
D
)
9
5
V
N
P
D
(
L
E
D
)
D
-
G
N
D
N
.
C
3
N
.
C
7
2
I
N
T
2
4
V
2
/
D
V
C
M
_
C
K
I
N
T
2
4
V
2
P
-
G
N
D
4
6
/
D
V
C
M
_
C
K
68
1
7
1
9
1
3
1
5
5 1
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
D
M
_
M
4 12
I
N
T
2
4
V
2
2
7
8
/
D
V
C
M
_
D
D
V
C
M
_
L
D
1
0
1
2
1
2
1
0
56
4
D
V
C
M
_
L
D
/
D
V
C
M
_
D
1
0
D
-
G
N
D
1
4
D
H
P
D
_
M
3
D
H
P
D
_
C
5
V
N
P
D
(
L
E
D
)
5
V
N
P
D
(
L
E
D
)
3
5
V
N
P
D
(
L
E
D
)
3
3
0
5
V
N
P
D
(
L
E
D
)
3
D
H
P
D
_
Y
2
D
-
G
N
D
1
3
2
3
2
D
-
G
N
D
5
D
H
P
D
_
M
2
8
D
H
P
D
_
Y
2
/
D
V
C
M
_
D
D
V
C
M
_
L
D
1
2
D
M
_
Y
_
A
2
3
1
D
M
_
Y
_
B
/
3
3
D
M
_
Y
_
A
/
3
1
3
3
D
M
_
Y
1
D
H
P
D
_
M
2
D
-
G
N
D
2
7
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
2
9
D
M
_
Y
_
B
2
9
D
H
P
D
_
C
1
6
1
2
5
V
N
P
D
(
L
E
D
)
D
H
P
D
_
Y
/
D
V
C
M
_
C
K
4
P
-
G
N
D
6
P
-
G
N
D
8
D
M
_
M
_
B
/
1
9
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
1
3
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
1
5
1
1
D
M
_
C
_
A
1
1
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
1
3
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
3
D
M
_
C
_
B
5
7
D
M
_
C
_
B
/
7
9
D
M
_
C
_
A
/
9
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
D
M
_
M
_
B
/
2
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
D
M
_
M
_
A
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
3
D
M
_
M
_
B
7
2
5
4
D
M
_
M
_
B
1
7
1
1
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
415 6
2
1
D
M
_
M
_
A
/
2
1
2
5
9 68
5
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
32
D
M
_
M
_
A
3
D
M
_
Y
_
B
1
D
M
_
Y
_
B
/
D
M
_
M
_
A
2
3
2 5
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
D
M
_
Y
_
A
D
M
_
Y
_
A
/
4 6
D
M
_
Y
_
A
D
M
_
Y
_
B
D
M
_
Y
_
B
/
1 32
D
M
_
Y
_
A
/
4
1
2
1
0
6
D
M
_
M
_
A
/
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
15
D
M
_
M
_
A
/
6
1 3 52
7
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
8
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
1
1
D
M
_
C
_
A
/
1
2
D
M
_
C
_
B
9
1
0
D
M
_
C
_
B
/
D
M
_
C
_
A
D
M
_
M
_
B
/
D
M
_
M
_
B
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
4
D
M
_
C
_
A
/
1
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
D
M
_
C
_
B
/
D
M
_
C
_
B
54 32
52
D
M
_
C
61 34
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
6
D
M
_
C
_
A
2
4
2
3
1
6
5
V
N
P
D
(
L
E
D
)
1
6
2
6
2
8
1
4
5
V
N
P
D
(
L
E
D
)
1
4
2
6
D
H
P
D
_
C
2
4
3
0
3
1
8
T
B
L
T
C
4
21
1
3
5
1
8
T
B
L
T
C
1
1
T
B
L
T
C
D
-
G
N
D
2
2
D
-
G
N
D
5
V
N
P
D
(
L
E
D
)
3
3
5
V
N
P
D
(
L
E
D
)
D - G N D
D - G N D
D - G N D
D - G N D
D - G N D
3
4
T
B
L
T
C
3
4
2
1
8
5
V
N
P
D
(
L
E
D
)
D
M
C
F
M
1
D
M
C
F
M
1
2
/
D
M
C
F
F
M
_
C
N
T
2
3
P
-
G
N
D
3
4
D
M
C
F
M
_
L
D
4
1
5
2
0
C
F
M
_
P
T
C
_
L
D
C
F
M
_
P
T
C
1
7
C
F
M
_
P
T
C
_
C
N
T
1
9
P
-
G
N
D
C
L
d
r
i
v
e
f
r
o
n
t
s
i
r
o
c
c
o
f
a
n
N. PS drive unit section (14/31)
L
C
C
t
r
a
n
s
p
o
r
t
m
o
t
o
r
(
D
r
i
v
e
U
N
-
t
a
n
d
e
m
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
S
D
F
1
B
-
2
8
D
E
P
(
L
o
w
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
C
N
1
B
R
B
R
B
R
B
R
P
L
P
L
P
L
P
L
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
P
K
P
K
P
K
P
K
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
B
6
B
-
X
H
B
6
B
-
P
A
S
K
-
1
D
R
I
V
E
R
P
W
B
P
S
f
r
o
n
t
m
o
t
o
r
(
D
r
i
v
e
U
N
-
P
S
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
P
D
F
1
B
-
1
8
D
E
S
(
U
p
p
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
C
N
9
B
R
B
R
B
R
B
R
P
L
P
L
P
L
P
L
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
P
K
P
K
P
K
P
K
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
B
6
P
-
P
H
-
K
-
S
B
7
B
-
P
A
S
K
-
1
P
H
N
R
-
0
2
-
H
+
B
U
0
2
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
R
D
B
R
(
U
p
p
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
C
N
1
4
R
D
R
D
R
D
P
S
m
o
t
o
r
B
R
B
R
B
R
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
P
L
P
L
P
L
P
L
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
P
K
P
K
P
K
P
K
B
6
P
-
P
H
-
K
-
S
(
U
p
p
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
P
C
U
P
W
B
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
B
R
B
R
B
R
B
R
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
P
L
P
L
P
L
P
L
B
3
0
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
P
S
d
r
i
v
e
u
n
2
5
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
2
5
2
7
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
2
7
2
1
2
3
L
C
C
M
_
B
2
3
1
7
1
9
L
C
C
M
_
A
/
1
9
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
L
C
C
M
_
B
4
L
C
C
M
_
A
/
L
C
C
M
_
B
/
P
-
G
N
D
1
2
/
R
R
M
_
C
K
/
R
R
M
_
D
56
8
R
R
M
_
L
D
8
/
M
P
U
C
6
1
7
I
N
T
2
4
V
2
1
7
2
P
-
G
N
D
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
2
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
5 6
5
5
P
F
M
_
B
/
3
P
F
M
_
B
P
F
M
_
A
4
P
F
M
_
A
/
1
1
4
2
4
V
3
1
6
1
4
1
6
/
L
P
F
C
L
C
C
p
a
p
e
r
f
e
e
d
c
l
u
t
c
h
1
2
4
V
3
2
2
/
L
P
F
C
1
2
4
/
L
P
F
C
2
2
2
4
V
3
/
M
P
U
C
1
1
2
0
2
4
V
3
2
P
F
M
_
A
7
1
3
P
F
M
_
A
/
3
1
P
F
M
_
B
/
7
M
a
n
u
a
l
p
a
p
e
r
f
e
e
d
c
l
u
t
c
h
1
8
2
4
V
3
1
0
2
4
V
3
1
0
1
2
/
M
P
U
C
1
2
2
/
R
R
M
_
D
2
/
R
R
M
_
C
K
4
6 4
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
9
1
1
9
1
3
2
4
V
3
1
3
1
2
4
V
3
2
6
/
R
R
M
_
C
K
4
/
R
R
M
_
D
5
P
F
M
_
A
1
P
-
G
N
D
2
1
5
/
R
R
C
1
5
P
S
c
l
u
t
c
h
P
F
M
_
A
/
2 43
R
R
M
_
L
D
1
6
2
4
V
3
/
R
R
C
1
0
82
1
4
4
I
N
T
2
4
V
2
L
C
C
M
_
B
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
2 4
L
C
C
M
_
A
2
/
R
R
C
1
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
1
1
P
F
M
_
B
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
5
L
C
C
M
_
B
/
6
L
C
C
M
_
A
/
3
L
C
C
M
_
A
1
7
L
C
C
M
_
A
2
1
L
C
C
M
_
B
/
1
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
P
F
M
_
B
6
P
F
M
_
B
/
N
.
C
3
3 12
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
5 1
I
N
T
2
4
V
2
R
R
M
_
L
D
O. DV and DL K, C section (15/31)
P
r
o
c
e
s
s
K
u
n
D
r
i
v
e
U
N
-
B
K
(
U
p
p
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
D
L
-
P
W
B
(
D
L
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
(
D
V
K
r
e
l
a
y
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
S
D
F
1
B
-
2
2
D
E
P
C
N
9
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
P
K
P
K
B
R
B
R
S
3
B
-
P
H
-
K
-
S
C
h
a
r
g
e
r
c
le
a
n
e
r
H
P
d
e
t
e
c
t
io
n
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
P
L
P
L
P
L
P
L
R
D
R
D
B
L
B
L
G
P
1
A
7
1
P
H
R
-
3
P
Q
R
/
P
8
-
8
P
S
D
V
-
K
u
n
T
o
n
e
r
c
o
n
c
e
n
t
r
a
t
io
n
s
e
n
s
o
r
(
D
V
K
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
-
N
)
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
P
L
P
L
P
L
P
L
P
L
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
5
1
0
2
1
-
0
4
0
0
R
S
M
-
5
p
i
n
P
(
D
V
K
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
-
N
)
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
P
C
U
P
W
B
P
L
P
L
P
L
L
B
L
B
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
P
K
P
K
L
B
P
L
P
L
P
K
(
D
V
K
m
o
t
o
r
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
R
S
M
-
4
p
i
n
P
C
N
2
C
N
1
L
B
P
K
P
K
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
P
K
L
B
L
B
L
B
P
K
B
R
P
K
P
K
P
K
B
R
I
n
t
e
r
m
e
d
i
a
t
e
h
o
p
p
e
r
G
Y
P
K
P
K
P
K
P
K
P
K
B
R
B
R
B
R
B
R
B
R
(
D
V
K
m
o
t
o
r
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
R
S
M
-
3
p
i
n
P
R
D
L
B
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
P
Q
R
/
P
8
-
2
0
P
S
B
3
0
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
P
K
G
Y
P
K
S
M
1
2
B
-
G
H
S
-
T
B
D
V
K
D
r
i
v
e
P
W
B
S
M
9
B
-
G
H
S
-
T
B
C
C
M
r
o
t
a
t
i
o
n
d
e
t
e
c
t
i
o
n
C
N
1
8
G
Y
P
L
P
L
B
L
B
L
S
R
A
-
0
1
T
-
3
.
2
G
P
1
A
7
1
P
H
R
-
3
B
3
0
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
F
.
G
.
G
Y
D
R
I
V
E
R
P
W
B
C
N
8
S
R
A
-
0
1
T
-
3
.
2
#
1
1
0
#
1
1
0
S
R
A
-
0
1
T
-
3
.
2
P
K
B
R
(
D
V
K
_
B
S
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
(
D
V
K
_
B
S
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
B
1
2
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
D
F
1
1
-
4
D
P
-
S
P
1
D
F
1
1
-
4
D
P
-
S
P
1
D
F
1
1
-
4
D
P
-
S
P
1
4
3
2
1
G N D
G N D
G N D
G N D
C
C
M
D
2
8
5
V
N
P
D
5
V
N
P
D
3
6
C
C
M
D
D
-
G
N
D
1
H
T
C
S
_
K
D
-
G
N
D
5
V
N
P
D
D
V
K
_
C
H
4
1
4
F
P
C
L
1
9
F
P
C
L
2
4
1
2
5
V
N
T
S
G
_
K
2
5
2
4
V
3
D
-
G
N
D
4 3
7
1
D
-
G
N
D
7 8
8
D
-
G
N
D
6
5
V
N
68
8 6
3
1
6
2
2
2
0
D
-
G
N
D
P
H
T
M
_
K
b
P
H
T
M
_
K
a
5
V
N
P
D
H
T
C
S
_
K
1
0
1
1
7
T
C
S
_
K
1
5
D
L
_
K
#
T
S
G
_
K
D
-
G
N
D
1
1
2
1
2
1
8
3
1
4
1
5
I
n
t
e
r
m
e
d
i
a
t
e
h
o
p
p
e
r
m
o
t
o
r
9
1
0
1
4
9 1
1
1
1
2
1
3
3
D
-
G
N
D
P
H
T
M
_
K
a
P
H
T
M
_
K
b
1
0
D
-
G
N
D
D
V
K
_
C
H
1
9
8
1
1
3
T
S
G
_
K
5
2
3
2
1
9
D
L
_
K
#
37
1
3
T
C
S
_
K
F
P
C
L
2
D
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
F
P
C
L
1
T
S
G
_
K
D
-
G
N
D
5
V
N
P
D
1
D
-
G
N
D
D
V
K
_
C
H
2
5
1
4
1
0
1
2
2
0
2
6
2
1
1
9
4
2
4
V
3
6
1
1
D
-
G
N
D
1
D
L
_
K
#
3
T
C
S
_
K
1
3
T
C
S
_
K
6
1
2
4
V
_
D
L
2
4
V
_
D
L
7
5
V
N
P
D
C
C
H
P
6
3
5
V
N
P
D
5
C
C
H
P
2
9
7
7
2
1
2
4
V
1
2
2
4
V
_
D
L
31
D
L
_
K
#
1
P
H
T
M
_
K
a
P
H
T
M
_
K
b
1
1
D
-
G
N
D
C
C
H
P
1
5
5
V
N
P
D
1
7
2
4
V
3
5
V
N
F
P
C
L
1
1
3
1
5
1
7
D
-
G
N
D
1
8
5
5
V
N
P
D
9
C
C
H
P
2
F
P
C
L
2
1
6
D
-
G
N
D
2
2
1
9
2
0
2
1
4
1
3
1
2
3
4
4
H
T
C
S
_
K
2
9
2
4
2
2
3
0
2
7
2
D
-
G
N
D
2
4
V
3
578 5
7
1
5
P
H
T
M
2
_
B
D
V
K
_
C
H
_
R
9
2
4
V
3
D
-
G
N
D
5
V
N
P
D
68
1
0
D
V
K
_
F
M
_
L
D
1
2
V
F
M
_
R
D
-
G
N
D
D
V
K
_
C
H
D
V
K
_
C
H
1
2
P
H
T
M
_
K
a
P
H
T
M
1
_
A
2
3
P
H
T
M
_
K
b
3
D
V
K
_
C
H
4
D
V
K
_
C
H
_
R
1
P
H
T
M
_
1
a
2
P
H
T
M
_
1
b
2 4 V 3
2 4 V 3
2 4 V 3
2 4 V 3
4
D
-
G
N
D
78
D
V
K
_
F
M
D
V
K
_
F
M
_
L
D
1234
5
H
T
C
S
_
C
H
5
4
P
H
T
M
1
_
B
3
F
P
C
L
1
4
F
P
C
L
2
5
3
D
-
G
N
D
3
4
H
T
C
S
_
C
H
4
1
5
V
N
P
D
1
2
H
T
C
S
_
K
2
G N D
G N D
G N D
G N D
3
2
1
D
-
G
N
D
3
2
1
C
C
P
_
R
O
T
1
5
V
N
P
D
5
6
D
V
K
_
C
H
_
R
3 12
1
1
1
4
P
H
T
M
2
_
A
23
5
I
n
t
e
r
m
e
d
i
a
t
e
h
o
p
p
e
r
t
o
n
e
r
c
o
n
c
e
n
t
r
a
t
i
o
n
s
e
n
s
o
r
S
t
i
r
r
i
n
g
m
o
t
o
r
P
H
T
M
_
2
a
N
C
P
H
T
M
_
2
b
P. DV and DL M, Y section (16/31)
(
D
V
r
e
l
a
y
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
:
c
o
m
m
o
n
)
D
L
-
C
P
H
N
R
-
1
0
-
H
,
B
U
1
0
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
(
P
r
o
c
e
s
s
d
u
c
t
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
S
D
F
1
B
-
2
6
D
E
P
(
L
o
w
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
(
L
o
w
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
C
N
7
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
P
K
P
L
P
L
L
B
L
B
5
3
2
5
4
-
0
3
1
0
T
o
n
e
r
c
o
n
c
e
n
t
r
a
t
io
n
s
e
n
s
o
r
(
D
V
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
P
L
P
L
L
B
L
B
P
L
P
L
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
B
R
B
R
P
K
P
K
L
B
L
B
5
1
0
2
1
-
0
4
0
0
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
L
B
B
R
B
R
P
K
P
K
P
K
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
P
Q
R
/
P
8
-
8
P
S
W
H
B
S
-
C
(
S
p
r
i
n
g
)
T
o
P
4
D
V
-
C
u
n
S
R
A
-
0
1
T
-
3
.
2
(
B
I
A
S
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
A
/
B
:
c
o
m
m
o
n
)
S
P
S
-
0
1
T
-
1
1
0
D
L
-
M
(
D
V
r
e
l
a
y
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
:
c
o
m
m
o
n
)
P
H
N
R
-
1
0
-
H
,
B
U
1
0
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
P
K
L
B
L
B
P
K
P
K
5
3
2
5
4
-
0
3
1
0
T
o
n
e
r
c
o
n
c
e
n
t
r
a
t
io
n
s
e
n
s
o
r
(
D
V
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
R
D
R
D
R
D
P
L
P
L
P
K
P
K
P
L
P
L
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
B
R
B
R
B
R
B
R
L
B
L
B
P
C
U
P
W
B
5
1
0
2
1
-
0
4
0
0
G
Y
G
Y
L
B
P
L
P
L
P
K
P
K
P
K
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
P
Q
R
/
P
8
-
8
P
S
W
H
B
S
-
C
(
S
p
r
i
n
g
)
T
o
P
4
T
o
P
4
D
V
-
M
u
n
S
R
A
-
0
1
T
-
3
.
2
(
B
I
A
S
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
A
/
B
:
c
o
m
m
o
n
)
S
P
S
-
0
1
T
-
1
1
0
D
L
-
Y
(
D
V
r
e
l
a
y
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
:
c
o
m
m
o
n
)
P
H
N
R
-
1
0
-
H
,
B
U
1
0
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
P
K
P
K
P
K
B
R
B
R
5
3
2
5
4
-
0
3
1
0
T
o
n
e
r
c
o
n
c
e
n
t
r
a
t
io
n
s
e
n
s
o
r
(
D
V
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
P
L
P
L
B
R
B
R
P
L
P
L
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
B
R
B
R
P
L
P
L
L
B
L
B
5
1
0
2
1
-
0
4
0
0
G
Y
G
Y
L
B
L
B
L
B
P
K
P
K
P
K
P
K
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
P
Q
R
/
P
8
-
8
P
S
W
H
B
S
-
C
(
S
p
r
i
n
g
)
D
V
-
Y
u
n
S
R
A
-
0
1
T
-
3
.
2
(
B
I
A
S
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
A
/
B
:
c
o
m
m
o
n
)
S
P
S
-
0
1
T
-
1
1
0
P
S
M
4
P
R
D
F
1
1
-
8
D
P
-
S
P
1
R
D
R
D
B
R
B
R
B
R
B
R
P
L
P
L
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
B
3
0
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
D
L
_
Y
#
D
-
G
N
D
6
5
V
N
T
C
S
_
M
T
S
G
_
M
D
V
T
Y
P
_
M
2
1
2
4
V
3
1
6
D
V
T
Y
P
_
Y
1
6
1
8
1
4
T
S
G
_
Y
1
4
1
0
2
4
V
3
1
0
6
D
-
G
N
D
6
8
D
L
_
Y
#
8
2
D
V
T
Y
P
_
M
2
4
5
V
N
4
2
3
T
C
S
_
M
2
3
2
1
2
4
V
3
2
1
1
0
5
V
N
1
089 14
3
D
-
G
N
D
37
D
-
G
N
D
2 9
T
S
G
_
M
9
2
4
V
3
T
C
S
_
M
467
D
L
_
Y
#
5
D
V
T
Y
P
_
M
8
1
0
D
-
G
N
D
1
5
V
N
2
4
V
3
3 1
2 4
D
-
G
N
D
D
V
T
Y
P
_
Y
4
5
V
N
D
-
G
N
D
124
D
V
T
Y
P
_
Y
2
3 2
2
4
V
3
2
5
2
4
V
3
1
D
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
4
356
D
L
_
Y
#
7
7
T
C
S
_
Y
3
6
T
C
S
_
Y
D
-
G
N
D
T
S
G
_
Y
1
8
T
S
G
_
Y
T
S
G
_
Y
1
D
V
T
Y
P
_
M
23
2 3
6
7
D
-
G
N
D
T
S
G
_
Y
8
56 8
T
C
S
_
Y
3
2
4
V
3
T
C
S
_
Y
T
S
G
_
M
4
D
-
G
N
D
2
4
V
3
6
T
C
S
_
M
5
D
-
G
N
D
4
T
S
G
_
M
1
2
5
5
2
5
T
S
G
_
M
2
5
D
L
_
M
#
1
1
9
D
L
_
M
#
4
1
2
2
3
1
6
1
2
T
C
S
_
Y
1
2
2
1
4
14
1
D
-
G
N
D
5
V
N
4
3 2
1
D
-
G
N
D
1
1
9
3
D
L
_
C
#
T
S
G
_
C
D
-
G
N
D
1
3
D
V
T
Y
P
_
C
9
D
-
G
N
D
D
V
T
Y
P
_
C
1
3
8
1
3
1
3
2 1
3
D
L
_
C
#
3
1
7
D
-
G
N
D
1
7
1
0
D
L
_
M
#
D
L
_
M
#
3
5
1
7
D
-
G
N
D
78
6
7
7
56
8
8
2
4
V
3
2
T
C
S
_
M
3
D
-
G
N
D
1
D
-
G
N
D
2
1
D
-
G
N
D
D
L
_
C
#
3
9
1
0
D
L
_
C
#
8
2
4
V
3
3
5
2
4
V
3
5
5
2
4
V
3
7
T
C
S
_
C
4
7
T
C
S
_
C
7
7
T
C
S
_
C
D
-
G
N
D
4
D
-
G
N
D
7
D
-
G
N
D
6
T
S
G
_
C
1
78
T
S
G
_
C
8
56
T
S
G
_
C
5
9
T
S
G
_
C
9
9
2
4
P
-
G
N
D
O
Z
F
M
_
L
D
1
/
O
Z
F
M
_
C
N
T
2
2
2
4
1
D
-
G
N
D
1
4
3
D
-
G
N
D
1
1
1
1
D
-
G
N
D
2
D
V
T
Y
P
_
C
2
D
V
T
Y
P
_
C
D
-
G
N
D
7
1
1
4
5
V
N
9
4
21
5
V
N
1
0
3
1
5
5
V
N
1
5
1
9
5
V
N
5
V
N
1
8
1
5
1
0
8
1
8
5
V
N
D
V
T
Y
P
_
Y
P
-
G
N
D
O
Z
F
M
1
2
0
2
2
O
Z
F
M
1
2
2
/
O
Z
F
M
_
C
N
T
2
0
4
O
Z
F
M
_
L
D
1
4
2
4
2
6
2
6
O
Z
F
M
_
L
D
1
2
6
5
T
C
S
_
C
3
6
T
C
S
_
C
6
2
4
V
3
2
5
2
4
V
3
P
-
G
N
D
3
2
0
7G N D
6G N D
5G N D
4G N D
3G N D
2G N D
1G N D
O
Z
O
N
E
F
A
N
1
1
O
Z
F
M
1
1
2
/
O
Z
F
M
_
C
N
T
2
3
Q. Resist sensor and process control sensor section (17/31)
P
H
N
R
-
8
-
H
P
S
f
r
o
n
t
s
e
n
s
o
r
(
P
P
D
1
)
(
P
S
U
N
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
B
U
0
8
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
(
U
p
p
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
P
L
P
L
P
K
P
K
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
Q
S
W
-
Z
0
5
3
8
P
H
R
-
3
P
S
U
N
P
S
s
e
n
s
o
r
(
P
P
D
2
)
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
R
B
R
L
B
L
B
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
G
P
2
A
2
0
0
L
1
7
9
2
2
8
-
3
P
H
N
R
-
2
-
H
B
U
0
2
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
B
R
L
B
L
B
R
D
R
D
R
D
B
3
0
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
P
S
U
N
D
R
-
P
C
U
P
W
B
R
e
s
i
s
t
s
e
n
s
o
r
F
(
P
r
o
c
e
s
s
c
o
n
t
r
o
l
s
e
n
s
o
r
U
N
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
R
S
M
1
8
P
P
(
H
L
r
e
l
a
y
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
P
D
F
1
B
-
3
2
P
S
(
U
p
p
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
P
D
F
1
B
-
1
8
D
E
S
(
L
o
w
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
C
N
8
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
L
B
L
B
B
R
L
B
B
R
B
R
L
B
L
B
P
K
P
K
P
L
P
K
P
L
P
L
P
K
P
K
P
H
R
-
4
P
r
o
c
e
s
s
c
o
n
t
r
o
l
s
e
n
s
o
r
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
B
R
B
R
P
L
P
L
P
K
P
L
P
K
P
K
P
L
P
L
P
K
P
K
B
R
P
K
B
R
B
R
L
B
L
B
P
r
o
c
e
s
s
c
o
n
t
r
o
l
s
e
n
s
o
r
U
N
P
H
R
-
5
R
e
s
i
s
t
s
e
n
s
o
r
R
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
B
R
B
R
P
L
B
R
P
L
P
L
P
K
P
K
P
K
P
K
L
B
P
K
L
B
L
B
B
R
B
R
P
H
R
-
4
B
R
P
K
B
R
P
K
P
K
P
K
P
K
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
S
M
2
P
P
B
4
0
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
(
U
p
p
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
C
N
1
8
P
L
P
L
P
L
P
L
B
R
B
R
B
R
B
R
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
B
3
0
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
P
r
o
c
e
s
s
c
o
n
t
r
o
l
s
e
n
s
o
r
U
N
5
V
N
P
D
(
L
E
D
)
1
5
V
N
P
D
4
5
V
N
P
D
(
L
E
D
)
3
5
V
N
P
D
12
2 3
2
P
P
D
1
3
5
5
V
N
P
D
D
-
G
N
D
2
1
6
D
-
G
N
D
P
P
D
1
2
8
2
3
4
P
C
S
_
L
E
D
#
D
-
G
N
D
56 3
2
6
P
C
S
_
C
L
1
0
D
-
G
N
D
/
P
C
S
S
1
1
9
2
P
r
o
c
e
s
s
c
o
n
t
r
o
l
s
h
u
t
t
e
r
s
o
l
e
n
o
i
d
1
78
1
4
1
5
1
2
/
P
C
S
S
2
4
V
3
21
4321
5
V
N
P
D
D
-
G
N
D
R
E
G
_
R
R
E
G
_
R
_
L
E
D
#
P
C
S
_
L
E
D
#
54321
5
V
N
P
D
D
-
G
N
D
P
C
S
_
C
L
P
C
S
_
K
R
E
G
_
F
R
E
G
_
F
_
L
E
D
#
4321
5
V
N
P
D
D
-
G
N
D
P
S
c
l
u
t
c
h
2
1
/
R
R
C
2
2
4
V
2
2
1
3 12
1
5
V
N
P
D
D
-
G
N
D
R
E
G
_
F
6
P
P
D
1
D
-
G
N
D
P
P
D
2
P
P
D
2
P
P
D
2
D
-
G
N
D
2
4
V
3
5
V
N
P
D
78
/
R
R
C
2
2
2
9
/
R
R
C
2
2
1
R
E
G
_
F
5
V
N
P
D
3
0
2
7
D
-
G
N
D
R
E
G
_
R
_
L
E
D
#
2
9
5
V
N
P
D
3
0
D
-
G
N
D
3
1
R
E
G
_
R
3
6
/
P
C
S
S
3
5
2
4
V
3
1
4
1
5
1
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
7 2345
7
P
C
S
_
K
6
8
1
1
3
R
E
G
_
R
R
E
G
_
R
_
L
E
D
#
R
E
G
_
F
_
L
E
D
#
5
V
N
P
D
D
-
G
N
D
45
2
6
2
7
2
5
89
3
2
5
V
N
P
D
(
L
E
D
)
2
3
5
V
N
P
D
2
0
2
5
1
2
4
V
3
1
3
D
-
G
N
D
3
5
V
N
P
D
1
2
5
V
N
P
D
5
R
E
G
_
F
5
7
R
E
G
_
F
_
L
E
D
#
7
9
5
V
N
P
D
9
1
1
D
-
G
N
D
1
1
1
3
P
C
S
_
K
1
3
1
5
P
C
S
_
C
L
1
5
1
7
P
C
S
_
L
E
D
#
1
7
1
8
5
V
N
P
D
1
8
2
D
-
G
N
D
2
4
R
E
G
_
R
4
6
R
E
G
_
R
_
L
E
D
#
6
1
0
2
4
V
3
1
0
2
4
8
/
P
C
S
S
8
D
-
G
N
D
P
C
S
_
K
1
9
D
-
G
N
D
2
2
R
E
G
_
F
_
L
E
D
#
P
C
S
_
L
E
D
#
P
C
S
_
C
L
2
4
D
-
G
N
D
4
6
R
E
G
_
F
6
8
R
E
G
_
F
_
L
E
D
#
8
1
0
5
V
N
P
D
1
0
1
2
D
-
G
N
D
1
2
1
4
P
C
S
_
K
1
4
1
6
P
C
S
_
C
L
1
6
1
8
P
C
S
_
L
E
D
#
1
8
2
0
5
V
N
P
D
2
0
2
2
D
-
G
N
D
2
2
2
4
R
E
G
_
R
2
4
2
6
R
E
G
_
R
_
L
E
D
#
2
6
2
4
V
3
3
0
2
8
/
P
C
S
S
2
8
D
M
S
1
7
3
0
2
4
V
3
2
9
2
7
D
M
S
2
5
2
9
1
2
V
D
M
S
_
L
E
D
1
8
D
M
S
_
L
E
D
1
2
V
1
6
1
2
V
1
7
D
M
S
2
5
2
7
1
3
1
5
D
M
S
_
L
E
D
R. LSU section (internal connection) (18/31)
L
D
B
K
P
W
B
(
2
B
E
A
M
)
(
L
S
U
-
L
D
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
C
N
1
B
2
0
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
G
B
L
B
L
B
C
N
6
B
0
7
B
-
P
A
S
K
-
1
(
L
S
U
-
L
D
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
L
S
U
t
h
e
r
m
i
s
t
o
r
1
G
Y
G
Y
H
P
L
P
L
C
L
B
L
B
G
Y
G
Y
B
R
B
R
S
4
B
-
P
H
-
K
-
S
S
H
S
H
P
K
P
K
W
H
W
H
C
N
6
B
0
7
B
-
P
A
S
K
-
1
(
L
S
U
-
L
D
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
B
D
P
W
B
(
K
)
S
H
S
H
H
B
L
B
L
J
P
K
P
K
G
Y
G
Y
W
H
W
H
P
L
P
L
P
L
P
L
G
Y
G
Y
P
K
P
K
B
4
P
-
P
H
-
K
-
R
B
R
B
R
L
B
L
B
P
K
P
K
S
M
1
5
B
-
G
H
B
-
T
B
L
D
C
P
W
B
(
L
S
U
-
L
D
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
C
N
4
B
3
4
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
F
G
Y
G
Y
A
B
L
B
L
L
S
U
P
W
B
B
R
B
R
P
K
P
K
W
H
W
H
P
K
P
K
S
H
S
H
P
L
P
L
L
B
L
B
B
R
B
R
S
1
0
B
-
P
H
-
K
-
S
L
D
M
P
W
B
(
L
S
U
-
L
D
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
C
N
4
B
3
4
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
E
G
Y
G
Y
A
B
L
B
L
B
R
B
R
C
N
8
B
0
8
B
-
P
A
S
K
-
1
(
P
o
l
y
g
o
n
m
o
t
o
r
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
L
S
U
t
h
e
r
m
i
s
t
o
r
2
P
K
P
K
A
P
K
P
K
C
W
H
W
H
G
Y
G
Y
P
K
P
K
S
4
B
-
P
H
-
K
-
S
S
H
S
H
P
L
P
L
L
B
L
B
C
N
8
B
0
8
B
-
P
A
S
K
-
1
(
P
o
l
y
g
o
n
m
o
t
o
r
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
P
o
l
y
g
o
n
m
o
t
o
r
B
R
B
R
A
L
B
L
B
B
S
1
0
B
-
P
H
-
K
-
S
P
L
P
L
P
K
P
K
B
R
B
R
L
D
Y
P
W
B
(
L
S
U
-
L
D
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
C
N
4
B
3
4
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
G
Y
G
Y
D
G
Y
G
Y
A
R
D
R
D
B
L
B
L
B
6
B
-
P
H
-
S
M
3
-
T
B
B
R
B
R
P
K
P
K
W
H
W
H
P
K
P
K
C
N
2
B
0
3
B
-
P
A
S
K
-
1
S
H
S
H
P
L
P
L
L
B
L
B
B
R
B
R
S
1
0
B
-
P
H
-
K
-
S
n
P
O
L
Y
_
S
T
A
R
T
P
-
G
N
D
n
P
O
L
Y
_
C
K
n
P
O
L
Y
_
L
O
C
K
T
H
2
_
2
8
2
4
V
6
G
N
D
5
D
-
G
N
D
4
C
L
O
C
K
1
34
1
n
B
D
12
2 3 5
5
V
3
T
H
1
D
-
G
N
D
+
5
V
_
L
D
8
3
V
R
E
F
_
K
n
B
D
+
5
V
_
L
D
D
-
G
N
D
12
2 1
V
r
e
f
_
K
1
D
-
G
N
D
5
V
3
D
-
G
N
D
T
H
1
6
D
-
G
N
D
4
34
D
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
74
D
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
D
T
_
K
-
6
1
8
1
4
D
T
_
K
2
+
D
A
T
A
+
_
K
1
/
L
D
O
F
F
4
n
E
N
B
_
K
D
-
G
N
D
56
D
T
_
K
+
D
-
G
N
D
3
79
1
0
D
A
T
A
-
_
K
1
D
-
G
N
D
8
D
A
T
A
+
_
K
2
D
A
T
A
-
_
K
2
D
T
_
C
-
D
T
_
C
+
D
-
G
N
D
I
N
T
5
V
/
S
H
_
C
/
E
N
B
_
C
D
-
G
N
D
V
r
e
f
_
C
L
D
C
H
K
_
C
n
L
D
E
R
R
_
C
D
-
G
N
D
I
N
T
5
V
/
S
H
_
M
/
E
N
B
_
M
D
T
_
M
-
D
T
_
M
+
D
-
G
N
D
V
r
e
f
_
M
D
-
G
N
D
I
N
T
5
V
1
0
9876543
L
D
C
H
K
_
M
n
L
D
E
R
R
_
M
21
/
S
H
_
Y
/
E
N
B
_
Y
D
T
_
Y
-
D
T
_
Y
+
D
-
G
N
D
V
r
e
f
_
Y
L
D
C
H
K
_
Y
n
L
D
E
R
R
_
Y
2 41 87653
1
5
1
3
4321
1
7
1
9
1
0
9
1
8
1
6
1
4
2
0
2
2
2
1
3
4
3
3
2
9
3
1
3
0
2
8
3
2
2
6
2
7
2
5
D
T
_
M
+
D
-
G
N
D
V
r
e
f
_
M
L
D
C
H
K
_
M
n
L
D
E
R
R
_
M
D
-
G
N
D
I
N
T
5
V
n
L
D
E
R
R
_
Y
D
-
G
N
D
V
r
e
f
_
Y
D
T
_
M
-
D
T
_
Y
+
L
D
C
H
K
_
Y
/
S
H
_
Y
/
E
N
B
_
Y
D
T
_
Y
-
D
-
G
N
D
I
N
T
5
V
/
S
H
_
M
/
E
N
B
_
M
T
H
2
3 7
B
R
A
K
E
3
4
1
65
L
O
C
K
D
-
G
N
D
L
S
U
F
A
N
3
2
4
V
1
n
F
A
N
R
D
Y
P
-
G
N
D
12
2
4
V
2
3
n
B
R
E
A
K
4 2
S
T
A
R
T
/
S
T
O
P
/
S
H
_
K
1
1
1
L
D
E
R
R
1
4
/
S
H
_
K
2
1
2
L
D
C
H
K
5
2
0
1
0
6 5
87 9
1
6
I
N
T
5
V
/
E
N
B
_
C
/
S
H
_
C
D
T
_
C
-
28
1
0
9
L
D
C
H
K
_
C
n
L
D
E
R
R
_
C
V
r
e
f
_
C
D
-
G
N
D
V
r
e
f
_
K
2
L
D
C
H
K
_
K
1
5
1
0
1
3
3
1
2
D
-
G
N
D
+
5
V
D
T
_
C
+
1
1
4
1
7
n
S
H
B
_
K
1
9
n
S
H
B
_
K
2
D
-
G
N
D
7
1
3
T
H
2
_
1
n
S
H
_
K
D
T
_
K
2
-
V
R
E
F
_
K
2
n
L
D
E
R
R
_
K
n
S
H
_
K
2
1
6
5
1
5
9
S. LSU section (external connection) (19/31)
C
N
8
R
D
R
D
/
L
S
S
_
C
L
P
L
P
L
/
L
S
S
_
C
L
P
S
M
2
P
-
N
R
C
N
9
(
L
o
w
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
G
Y
G
Y
O
R
O
R
G
Y
G
Y
B
L
B
L
R
D
R
D
G
Y
G
Y
S
6
B
-
X
A
C
N
5
(
L
o
w
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
B
L
B
L
G
Y
G
Y
B
R
B
R
G
Y
G
Y
P
L
P
L
G
Y
G
Y
P
C
U
P
W
B
L
B
L
B
P
K
P
K
B
R
B
R
P
L
P
L
P
K
P
K
L
B
L
B
B
4
0
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
(
L
o
w
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
C
N
6
B
R
B
R
P
L
P
L
P
K
P
K
L
B
L
B
B
R
B
R
P
L
P
L
P
K
P
K
L
B
L
B
S
2
0
B
-
P
A
D
S
S
-
1
C
N
3
(
L
o
w
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
P
K
P
K
W
H
W
H
S
H
S
H
S
H
S
H
P
K
P
K
W
H
W
H
P
K
P
K
W
H
W
H
M
O
T
H
E
R
P
W
B
S
H
S
H
S
H
S
H
P
K
P
K
W
H
W
H
P
K
P
K
W
H
W
H
S
H
S
H
G
Y
G
Y
P
K
P
K
W
H
W
H
S
H
S
H
S
H
S
H
P
K
P
K
W
H
W
H
B
3
2
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
S
2
4
B
-
P
A
D
S
S
-
1
N
.
C
2
3
N
.
C
2
4
1
4
1
3
1
2
1
1
1
8
1
7
H
S
Y
N
C
_
L
S
U
_
N
H
S
Y
N
C
_
L
S
U
_
P
D
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
E
C
L
K
_
L
S
U
_
P
E
C
L
K
_
L
S
U
_
N
1
6
1
5
2
2
2
1
1
9
2
0
V
S
Y
N
C
_
Y
_
N
11
D
-
G
N
D
1
9
2
0
V
S
Y
N
C
_
M
_
P
V
S
Y
N
C
_
M
_
N
V
S
Y
N
C
_
Y
_
P
V
S
Y
N
C
_
Y
_
N
H
S
Y
N
C
_
L
S
U
_
P
H
S
Y
N
C
_
L
S
U
_
N
E
C
L
K
_
L
S
U
_
P
E
C
L
K
_
L
S
U
_
N
D
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
V
S
Y
N
C
_
K
_
P
V
S
Y
N
C
_
K
_
N
V
S
Y
N
C
_
C
_
P
V
S
Y
N
C
_
C
_
N
1
8
D
-
G
N
D
3
.
3
V
D
-
G
N
D
5
V
N
2
4
V
3
P
-
G
N
D
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
2
4
V
3
5
1
7
2
P
-
G
N
D
6
D
-
G
N
D
3
5
V
N
423
D
-
G
N
D
C
L
C
L
K
_
N
C
H
2
_
N
1
0
1
1
9
C
H
3
_
P
C
H
3
_
N
C
L
C
L
K
_
P
D
-
G
N
D
1
6
2
2
2
1
2
0
1
9
1
4
1
3
1
2
3
0
2
9
2
3
2
8
2
7
2
6
2
5
D
-
G
N
D
4
2
4
5678
1
8
1
7
1
5
C
L
C
L
K
_
P
C
H
3
_
N
C
H
3
_
P
D
-
G
N
D
C
H
2
_
P
D
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
C
L
C
L
K
_
N
D
-
G
N
D
C
H
0
_
N
C
H
0
_
P
D
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
C
H
1
_
N
C
H
1
_
P
C
H
2
_
N
C
H
1
_
N
C
H
2
_
P
C
H
0
_
N
D
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
C
H
1
_
P
2
C
H
0
_
P
1
6
1
7
1
8
3
2
1
3
1
43
D
-
G
N
D
1
65
1
1
1
287
1
3
3
.
3
V
V
S
Y
N
C
_
C
_
N
V
S
Y
N
C
_
M
_
N
V
S
Y
N
C
_
M
_
P
V
S
Y
N
C
_
Y
_
P
n
T
R
A
N
S
_
R
S
T
9
1
0
V
S
Y
N
C
_
K
_
N
1
4
1
5
1
2
J
O
B
E
N
D
_
I
N
T
L
S
U
T
H
1
L
S
U
T
H
2
1
0
1
1
V
S
Y
N
C
_
K
_
P
V
S
Y
N
C
_
C
_
P
L
S
U
P
W
B
I
N
T
5
V
I
N
T
5
V
1
L
S
U
T
H
2
n
T
R
A
N
S
_
R
S
T
J
O
B
E
N
D
_
I
N
T
D
-
G
N
D
2
2
D
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
3
3
D
-
G
N
D
n
S
C
K
_
L
S
U
4
4
n
S
C
K
_
L
S
U
n
T
R
A
N
S
_
D
A
T
A
5
5
n
T
R
A
N
S
_
D
A
T
A
7
L
S
U
A
S
I
C
_
R
S
T
D
-
G
N
D
6
6
D
-
G
N
D
n
R
S
V
_
D
A
T
8
L
S
U
T
H
1
9
L
S
U
A
S
I
C
_
R
S
T
7
8
n
R
S
V
_
D
A
T
L
S
U
s
h
u
t
t
e
r
s
o
l
e
n
o
i
d
C
L
1
I
N
T
2
4
V
2
1
3
9
I
N
T
2
4
V
2
2
2
4
0
T
h
e
s
h
o
r
t
e
s
t
c
o
m
m
u
n
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
l
i
n
e
c
o
n
n
e
c
t
i
o
n
T. Tandem drive unit section (20/31)
N
E
W
p
a
p
e
r
f
e
e
d
m
o
t
o
r
(
D
r
i
v
e
u
n
i
t
t
a
n
d
e
m
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
S
D
F
1
B
-
2
8
D
E
P
(
L
o
w
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
C
N
4
R
D
P
K
G
Y
G
Y
V
H
-
2
P
G
Y
G
Y
B
L
B
L
B
R
B
R
P
L
P
L
L
B
L
B
P
K
B
R
B
0
7
B
-
P
A
S
K
P
H
N
R
-
0
2
-
H
+
B
U
0
2
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
R
D
R
D
P
L
P
K
P
H
N
R
-
0
2
-
H
+
B
U
0
2
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
R
D
L
B
B
R
D
R
-
P
C
U
P
W
B
P
H
N
R
-
0
2
-
H
+
B
U
0
2
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
R
D
P
K
P
L
P
H
N
R
-
0
2
-
H
+
B
U
0
2
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
R
D
B
R
L
B
R
D
P
L
P
K
P
S
M
2
P
-
N
R
B
4
0
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
C
N
8
R
D
R
D
R
D
/
L
S
S
_
B
K
B
R
/
L
S
S
_
B
K
B
R
B
R
/
L
S
S
_
B
K
P
S
M
2
P
-
B
R
B
4
0
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
D
F
1
1
-
6
D
P
-
S
P
1
I
N
T
2
4
V
2
2
2
2
0
2
0
3
8
1
8
I
N
T
2
4
V
2
1
8
3
7
L
S
U
s
h
u
t
t
e
r
s
o
l
e
n
o
i
d
B
K
1
I
N
T
2
4
V
2
1
C
P
F
M
_
C
W
/
C
C
W
2
2
C
P
F
M
_
C
W
/
C
C
W
2 4 V 3
C
P
F
M
_
G
A
I
N
6
C
P
F
M
_
C
W
/
C
C
W
7
2
4
V
3
2
2
/
T
R
C
1
1
2 4 V 3
6
5
4
2 4 V 3
2 4 V 3
2 4 V 3
2 4 V 3
2
3
8
/
T
A
N
C
L
1
T
r
a
y
1
p
a
p
e
r
f
e
e
d
c
l
u
t
c
h
21
2
4
V
3
/
T
1
P
F
C
12
/
T
1
P
F
C
1
2
1
0
T
r
a
y
2
p
a
p
e
r
f
e
e
d
c
l
u
t
c
h
2
4
V
3
2
/
T
2
P
F
C
1
12
/
T
2
P
F
C
T
a
n
d
e
m
t
r
a
n
s
p
o
r
t
c
l
u
t
c
h
2 1
1
/
T
A
N
C
L
2
4
V
3
2
7
5
V
N
D
-
G
N
D
2
4
V
4
1
5 3
P
-
G
N
D
1
2
4
V
4
1
/
C
P
F
M
_
D
3
P
-
G
N
D
2
D
-
G
N
D
1
5
V
N
2
/
C
P
F
M
_
C
K
4
1
3
C
P
F
M
_
L
D
1
3
9
/
C
P
F
M
_
D
1
1
/
C
P
F
M
_
C
K
6
/
T
R
C
1
V
e
r
t
i
c
a
l
t
r
a
n
s
p
o
r
t
u
p
p
e
r
c
l
u
t
c
h
4
2
4
V
3
1
C
P
F
M
_
L
D
5
1
5
C
P
F
M
_
G
A
I
N
1
3
C
P
F
M
_
L
D
T
r
a
y
2
p
i
c
k
-
u
p
s
o
l
e
n
o
i
d
1
2
4
V
3
2
2
/
T
2
P
U
S
1
2
4
V
4
1
3
P
-
G
N
D
3
5
D
-
G
N
D
5
7
5
V
N
7
9
/
C
P
F
M
_
D
9
1
1
/
C
P
F
M
_
C
K
1
1
1
5
C
P
F
M
_
G
A
I
N
1
5
24
2
4
V
3
4
6
/
T
R
C
1
6
8
/
T
A
N
C
L
8
1
0
/
T
2
P
F
C
1
0
1
2
/
T
1
P
F
C
1
2
1
4
/
T
2
P
U
S
1
4
1
4
/
T
2
P
U
S
U. Tandem tray section (21/31)
T
2
S
P
W
B
(
T
a
n
d
e
m
1
s
e
n
s
o
r
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
R
S
M
-
4
P
-
N
P
(
C
a
s
s
e
t
t
e
s
i
z
e
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
R
C
D
)
P
D
F
1
B
-
2
6
D
E
S
(
L
o
w
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
C
N
5
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
P
K
P
K
P
K
P
K
P
K
B
R
B
R
B
R
B
R
B
R
P
A
P
-
0
4
V
T
r
a
y
1
p
a
p
e
r
p
a
s
s
s
e
n
s
o
r
2
(
T
a
n
d
e
m
t
r
a
n
s
p
o
r
t
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
R
S
M
-
6
P
-
N
P
B
L
B
L
B
L
P
K
P
K
P
K
P
L
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
G
P
2
A
2
0
0
L
1
7
9
2
2
8
-
3
B
L
B
L
B
L
L
B
L
B
L
B
G
Y
G
Y
T
r
a
y
1
p
a
p
e
r
p
a
s
s
s
e
n
s
o
r
1
B
L
L
B
G
Y
G
P
2
A
2
0
0
L
1
7
9
2
2
8
-
3
T
1
S
P
W
B
(
T
a
n
d
e
m
2
s
e
n
s
o
r
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
R
S
M
-
1
0
P
-
N
P
B
L
G
Y
B
R
B
R
P
L
P
L
P
A
P
-
0
4
V
G
Y
L
B
T
r
a
y
2
p
a
p
e
r
r
e
m
a
i
n
i
n
g
q
u
a
n
t
i
t
y
d
e
t
e
c
t
i
o
n
B
L
G
Y
P
K
P
K
B
L
G
P
1
A
7
1
P
H
R
-
3
T
r
a
y
1
p
a
p
e
r
r
e
m
a
i
n
i
n
g
q
u
a
n
t
i
t
y
d
e
t
e
c
t
i
o
n
G
P
1
A
7
1
P
H
R
-
3
P
S
M
-
2
P
I
N
R
D
F
1
1
-
8
D
P
-
S
P
1
R
D
P
L
B
3
4
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
T
r
a
y
2
l
i
f
t
-
u
p
m
o
t
o
r
(
L
o
w
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
C
N
6
G
Y
L
B
B
2
P
-
P
H
-
K
-
S
T
r
a
y
1
l
i
f
t
-
u
p
m
o
t
o
r
(
L
o
w
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
G
Y
P
K
B
2
P
-
P
H
-
K
-
S
B
4
0
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
T
a
n
d
e
m
tr
a
y
in
s
ta
lla
tio
n
d
e
te
c
tio
n
(
P
a
p
e
r
f
e
e
d
d
r
i
v
e
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
(
L
o
w
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
D
-
4
(
p
,
2
2
)
P
D
F
1
B
-
3
4
D
E
S
C
N
3
B
R
G
P
1
A
7
1
P
H
R
-
3
B
3
4
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
D
R
-
P
C
U
P
W
B
T
1
P
E
D
2
1
2
4
V
3
1
7
T
2
S
P
D
5
V
N
1
1
T
1
P
P
D
1
1
3
6
T
2
S
P
D
1
2
4
V
3
1
T
r
a
y
1
p
i
c
k
u
p
s
o
l
e
n
o
i
d
P
-
G
N
D
12
2
/
T
1
L
U
M
9
T
1
S
P
D
9
8D - G N D
7D - G N D
6D - G N D
5D - G N D
4D - G N D
3D - G N D
2D - G N D
1D - G N D
85 V N P D
75 V N P D
65 V N P D
55 V N P D
45 V N P D
35 V N P D
25 V N P D
15 V N P D
5
D
-
G
N
D
5
1
0
5
V
N
P
D
1
0
7
5
V
N
P
D
7
8 4
T
1
P
E
D
4
3
T
1
L
U
D
1
5
V
N
P
D
1
2
D
-
G
N
D
2
5
V
N
P
D
3
5
V
N
P
D
1
D
-
G
N
D
2
T
1
L
U
D
3
T
1
P
E
D
4
D
-
G
N
D
1
T
1
S
P
D
2
T
1
P
P
D
1
3
5
V
N
9
1
1
5
V
N
P
D
1
5
V
N
P
D
4
3
3
D
-
G
N
D
2
T
1
P
P
D
2
3
T
2
L
U
D
3
4
T
2
P
E
D
4 1
2
D
-
G
N
D
2
1
5
V
N
P
D
9
T
2
L
U
D
5
1
3
T
2
P
E
D
7
T
1
P
P
D
2
9
1
7
T
1
P
P
D
2
5
V
N
P
D
1
9
5
V
N
T
2
L
U
D
T
2
P
E
D
1
1
2
7
T
2
S
P
D
5
T
1
P
P
D
1
5
6
D
-
G
N
D
7
1
5
2
3
/
T
1
P
U
S
6
5
V
N
46 3
D
-
G
N
D
8
3
D
-
G
N
D
3
/
T
2
L
U
M
2
P
-
G
N
D
1
5
1
T
1
S
P
D
2
9
2
3
D
-
G
N
D
1
1
5
V
N
P
D
1
5
V
N
P
D
1
D
-
G
N
D
2
D
-
G
N
D
2
T
2
L
U
D
34
T
2
P
E
D
T
1
P
P
D
2
2
D
-
G
N
D
11
D
-
G
N
D
2
2
1
T
1
P
P
D
1
5
V
N
3
T
1
L
U
D
2
3
D
-
G
N
D
1
T
A
N
S
E
T
2
T
2
S
P
D
2
5
V
N
P
D
3
2
5
T
1
P
E
D
1
3
T
1
L
U
D
1
5
1
5
1
7
1
9
T
1
S
P
D
2
1
1
9
3
2
2
5
3
3
/
T
1
P
U
S
P
-
G
N
D
1
3
3
1
/
T
2
L
U
M
/
T
1
L
U
M
1
1
1
7
2
4
V
3
1
5
P
-
G
N
D
T
A
N
S
E
T
5
V
N
3
4
3
2
2
3
3
4
5
V
N
3
4
T
A
N
S
E
T
3
2
2
5
/
T
1
P
U
S
V. CS3/4 drive unit section (22/31)
C
S
3
l
i
f
t
-
u
p
m
o
t
o
r
(
L
o
w
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
C
N
6
G
Y
G
Y
L
B
L
B
B
2
P
-
P
H
-
K
-
S
G
Y
P
K
C
S
4
l
i
f
t
-
u
p
m
o
t
o
r
B
4
0
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
G
Y
P
K
B
2
P
-
P
H
-
K
-
S
C
S
3
r
e
m
a
i
n
i
n
g
q
u
a
n
t
i
t
y
(
C
a
s
s
e
t
t
e
s
i
z
e
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
F
C
D
)
P
H
N
R
-
1
4
-
H
+
B
U
1
4
P
-
T
R
-
K
-
S
(
C
a
s
s
e
t
t
e
s
i
z
e
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
R
C
D
)
P
D
F
1
B
-
2
6
D
E
S
(
L
o
w
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
C
N
5
G
Y
B
R
B
R
B
R
P
L
P
L
P
C
U
P
W
B
B
L
L
B
L
B
G
P
1
A
7
1
P
H
R
-
3
P
K
P
K
B
R
B
R
P
L
P
L
C
S
p
a
p
e
r
f
e
e
d
C
S
4
r
e
m
a
i
n
i
n
g
q
u
a
n
t
i
t
y
L
B
B
R
G
Y
P
K
P
L
P
L
B
R
L
B
B
L
P
L
P
K
G
P
1
A
7
1
P
H
R
-
3
L
B
L
B
P
K
P
K
B
R
B
R
C
S
3
p
a
p
e
r
s
i
z
e
d
e
t
e
c
t
i
o
n
B
3
4
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
G
Y
L
B
P
K
B
R
P
L
S
6
P
-
P
H
-
K
-
S
C
S
4
p
a
p
e
r
s
i
z
e
d
e
t
e
c
t
i
o
n
G
Y
L
B
P
K
B
R
P
L
S
6
P
-
P
H
-
K
-
S
D
F
1
1
-
6
D
P
-
S
P
1
C
4
S
S
3
C
4
S
S
4
3
0
3
2
3
4
C
4
S
S
2
C
4
S
S
4
32
6D - G N D
5D - G N D
4D - G N D
3D - G N D
2D - G N D
1D - G N D
C
4
S
S
2
C
4
S
S
3
C
4
S
S
4
1
9
1
0
1
4
1
2
1
3
1
1
C
4
S
S
3
C
3
S
S
4
C
4
S
S
2
1
4
1
4
C
3
S
S
3
1
6
2
6
2
0
2
2
5
V
N
P
D
C
3
S
S
2
2
4
1
0
1
0
C
3
S
S
1
1
2
1
2
5
V
N
P
D
6
6
C
4
S
P
D
8
8
2
2
C
3
S
P
D
4
4
D
-
G
N
D
C
3
S
S
3
2
6
C
3
S
S
4
1
0
D
-
G
N
D
1
2
C
3
S
P
D
C
4
S
P
D
2
0
C
3
S
S
1
2
8
1
6
C
4
S
S
1
6 7
C
3
S
S
3
1
8
2
4
5
2
0
C
4
S
S
1
4
5678
C
3
S
S
1
1
0
C
3
S
S
2
9
1234
8
5
V
N
P
D
5
V
N
P
D
C
3
S
P
D
1
3
C
4
S
P
D
1
1
1
4
5
V
N
P
D
1
6
D
-
G
N
D
1
4
5
V
N
P
D
1
2
2
2
C
3
S
S
2
1
6
1
2
1
8
1
4
P
-
G
N
D
P
-
G
N
D
/
C
4
L
U
M
/
C
3
L
U
M
P
-
G
N
D
/
C
4
L
U
M
12
P
-
G
N
D
/
C
3
L
U
M
12
C
4
S
S
4
6
5
V
N
P
D
3
C
4
S
S
1
3
C
4
S
S
2
4
D
-
G
N
D
2 4
D
-
G
N
D
C
3
S
S
1
C
3
S
S
2
23
D
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
1
C
3
S
P
D
5
V
N
P
D
123
1
8
2
2
C
4
S
S
3
5
C
3
S
S
3
5
C
3
S
S
4
6
C
4
S
P
D
2
2
4
2
6
C
3
S
S
4
1
8
C
4
S
S
1
W. CS3/4 paper feed and transport section (23/31)
T
r
a
y
1
t
r
a
n
s
p
o
r
t
s
e
n
s
o
r
(
T
1
P
P
D
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
P
H
N
R
-
0
3
-
H
+
B
U
0
3
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
(
P
a
p
e
r
f
e
e
d
d
r
i
v
e
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
P
D
F
1
B
-
3
4
S
(
L
o
w
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
C
N
3
P
L
B
R
B
R
B
R
B
R
G
Y
G
Y
A
-
2
A
-
1
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
B
L
B
L
B
-
2
B
-
1
B
L
B
L
B
L
G
P
2
A
2
0
0
L
1
7
9
2
2
8
-
3
C
-
1
B
L
B
L
L
C
C
p
a
p
e
r
e
n
t
r
y
d
e
t
e
c
t
io
n
(
L
P
P
D
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
P
H
N
R
-
0
3
-
H
+
B
U
0
3
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
P
L
P
L
P
L
P
L
P
L
G
Y
G
Y
A
-
3
D
-
1
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
B
L
B
L
B
-
3
G
P
2
A
2
0
0
L
1
7
9
2
2
8
-
3
C
S
3
p
a
p
e
r
e
n
t
r
y
d
e
t
e
c
t
io
n
(
P
a
p
e
r
f
e
e
d
U
N
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
P
H
N
R
-
1
2
-
H
+
B
U
1
2
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
A
-
4
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
-
4
P
K
P
K
P
K
G
P
2
A
2
0
0
L
1
7
9
2
2
8
-
3
C
S
3
l
i
f
t
-
u
p
d
e
t
e
c
t
i
o
n
G
Y
G
Y
A
-
5
B
R
B
R
B
R
G
Y
B
R
P
K
3
C
S
p
a
p
e
r
f
e
e
d
U
N
B
R
B
L
B
L
C
-
2
P
L
P
L
P
L
B
L
G
Y
G
Y
A
-
6
L
B
L
B
L
B
C
S
3
p
a
p
e
r
e
m
p
t
y
d
e
t
e
c
t
io
n
G
P
1
A
7
1
P
H
R
-
3
P
L
B
R
O
R
O
R
O
R
G
Y
B
L
B
L
C
-
3
P
L
R
D
R
D
E
-
2
B
L
P
K
P
L
G
P
1
A
7
1
P
H
R
-
3
P
K
P
K
P
K
P
H
N
R
-
2
-
H
B
R
B
R
B
R
B
U
2
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
P
L
P
L
P
L
R
D
E
-
1
R
D
R
D
P
K
L
B
L
B
L
B
P
K
P
K
P
K
B
R
B
R
B
R
C
S
3
w
i
d
t
h
d
e
t
e
c
t
i
o
n
(
C
P
W
S
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
P
L
P
L
P
L
B
R
L
B
B
3
4
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
G
Y
G
Y
A
-
7
P
C
U
P
W
B
O
R
O
R
S
l
i
d
e
v
o
l
u
m
e
R
S
M
3
p
i
n
_
N
P
P
H
N
R
-
1
2
-
H
+
C
S
4
p
a
p
e
r
e
n
t
r
y
d
e
t
e
c
t
io
n
(
P
a
p
e
r
f
e
e
d
U
N
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
B
U
1
2
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
A
-
8
L
B
L
B
P
K
N
.
C
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
-
5
p
,
2
3
G
P
2
A
2
0
0
L
1
7
9
2
2
8
-
3
C
S
4
l
i
f
t
-
u
p
d
e
t
e
c
t
i
o
n
G
Y
G
Y
D
-
2
G
Y
B
R
B
R
4
C
S
p
a
p
e
r
f
e
e
d
U
N
B
R
B
L
B
L
C
-
5
B
L
G
Y
G
Y
D
-
3
C
S
4
p
a
p
e
r
e
m
p
t
y
d
e
t
e
c
t
io
n
G
P
1
A
7
1
P
H
R
-
3
P
L
P
L
G
Y
B
L
B
L
C
-
6
P
L
R
D
R
D
E
-
3
B
L
P
K
L
B
D
F
1
1
-
8
D
P
-
S
P
1
(
C
)
D
F
1
1
-
8
D
P
-
S
P
1
(
B
)
D
F
1
1
-
8
D
P
-
S
P
1
(
A
)
G
P
1
A
7
1
P
H
R
-
3
P
H
N
R
-
2
-
H
B
U
2
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
p
,
2
0
R
D
p
,
2
3
P
K
P
H
N
R
-
0
2
-
H
+
B
U
0
2
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
P
K
R
D
E
-
4
P
H
N
R
-
0
2
-
H
+
B
U
0
2
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
D
F
1
1
-
6
D
P
-
S
P
1
(
E
)
D
F
1
1
-
8
D
P
-
S
P
1
(
D
)
B
R
R
D
E
-
5
P
H
N
R
-
0
2
-
H
+
B
U
0
2
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
P
L
R
D
E
-
6
1
9
2
1
1
0
3
1
3
3
68
2
3
1
3
1
5
1
7
/
T
R
C
2
9357
1
1
1
/
C
3
P
F
C
6
/
C
4
P
F
C
8
2
4
V
3
3
1
C
4
P
U
S
3
3
2
3
C
4
P
F
D
2
5
C
4
L
U
D
2
7
V
R
E
F
1
9
C
3
P
U
S
2
1
C
3
P
W
D
1
7
C
3
P
E
D
1
3
C
3
P
F
D
1
5
C
3
L
U
D
1
1
L
P
P
D
1
D
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
5
5
V
N
7
5
V
N
P
D
D - G N D
D - G N D
7D - G N D
2
1
D - G N D
D - G N D
D - G N D
D - G N D
D - G N D
2
5
2
7
2
9
D - G N D
D - G N D
1
2
1
5 V N
D - G N D
D - G N D
7
6
5 V N
2
1
9
C
3
P
U
S
C
4
L
U
D
2
3
C
3
P
W
D
V
R
E
F
1
7
C
3
P
E
D
1
5
C
3
L
U
D
1
3
C
3
P
F
D
L
P
P
D
1
1
1
8
4
3
2
1
2 4 V 3
2 4 V 3
2 4 V 3
2 4 V 3
2 4 V 3
5 V N P D
2 4 V 3
75 V N P D
8
7
5 V N
5 V N
6
5
6
5
5 V N P D
5 V N P D
5 V N P D
5 V N P D
5 V N
5 V N
5 V N
5
4
3
C
S
3
p
a
p
e
r
f
e
e
d
c
l
u
t
c
h
2
1
C
S
4
p
a
p
e
r
f
e
e
d
c
l
u
t
c
h
12
2
/
C
3
P
F
C
2
4
V
3
/
T
R
C
2
2
/
C
4
P
F
C
1 2
1
1
12
2
4
V
3
V
R
E
F
1
2
4
V
3
1
1
D
-
G
N
D
1
654
1
2
3
3
C
4
P
U
S
1
0
2
1
/
T
R
C
2
/
C
3
P
F
C
/
C
4
P
F
C
C
4
P
F
D
D
-
G
N
D
7
5
V
N
P
D
6
5
V
N
1
3
5
V
N
C
4
P
E
D
2
5
2
9
2
7
3
5
V
N
8 9
2
D
-
G
N
D
1
11
2
T
1
P
P
D
2
3
D
-
G
N
D
3
T
1
P
P
D
3
9
T
1
P
P
D
3
D
-
G
N
D
C
3
P
E
D
C
3
P
F
D
D
-
G
N
D
2
D
-
G
N
D
21
D
-
G
N
D
3 2
5
V
N
1
5
V
N
12
D
-
G
N
D
32
C
3
P
W
D
3
5
V
N
P
D
C
S
3
p
i
c
k
u
p
s
o
l
e
n
o
i
d
1
1
1
C
S
4
p
i
c
k
u
p
s
o
l
e
n
o
i
d
2
C
4
P
E
D
2
5
V
N
P
D
3
C
4
P
U
S
C
4
P
F
D
2
5
V
N
1
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
3 13
V
R
E
F
32
D
-
G
N
D
21
2
C
3
P
W
D
3
2
3
1
2
4
V
3
1
1
1
2
C
4
P
E
D
2
9
5
4
3
65 V N
5
4
D - G N D
D - G N D
D - G N D
D - G N D
8
8
6
2
4
3
1
5 V N P D
5 V N P D
C
3
P
U
S
89
C
4
P
F
D
5
V
N
D
-
G
N
D
7 4
+
2
4
V
3
C
3
P
F
D
5
V
N
D
-
G
N
D
C
3
L
U
D
87
5
V
N
P
D
1
0
3
654
1
2
5
V
N
P
D
8
2
912
9
1
1
3
5
V
N
P
D
L
P
P
D
D
-
G
N
D
7
L
P
P
D
3
D
-
G
N
D
C
3
L
U
D
T
1
P
P
D
5
5
V
N
D
-
G
N
D
1
1
0
C
3
P
E
D
56
D
-
G
N
D
5
V
N
P
D
3
9
D
-
G
N
D
1
7
5
V
N
P
D
6
+
2
4
V
2
1
1
1
C
4
L
U
D
1
2
3
5
+
2
4
V
1
0
1
1
C
4
P
E
D
3
C
4
L
U
D
2
1
0
5
V
N
P
D
V
e
r
t
i
c
a
l
t
r
a
n
s
p
o
r
t
l
o
w
e
r
c
l
u
t
c
h
3
8
D
-
G
N
D
2
24
C
4
P
U
S
1
+
2
4
V
2
1
0
2
C
3
P
U
S
1
X. LCC and waste toner section (24/31)
C
N
5
P
K
(
W
T
M
r
e
l
a
y
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
W
T
M
(
I
n
n
e
r
l
o
t
h
a
r
)
P
S
M
-
7
p
i
n
R
(
W
T
M
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
P
D
F
1
B
-
2
0
D
E
S
(
P
a
p
e
r
f
e
e
d
d
r
i
v
e
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
P
D
F
1
B
-
3
4
D
E
S
(
L
o
w
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
C
N
3
B
R
L
B
L
B
L
B
B
L
B
L
P
K
P
L
P
L
P
L
P
L
L
B
B
R
B
R
B
R
B
L
B
L
B
-
6
(
p
,
2
2
)
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
R
D
R
D
R
D
R
D
S
8
B
-
Z
R
-
S
M
4
V
e
r
t
i
c
a
l
t
r
a
n
s
p
o
r
t
o
p
e
n
/
c
l
o
s
e
d
e
t
e
c
t
i
o
n
G
Y
B
R
G
Y
G
Y
D
-
5
(
p
,
2
2
)
B
L
B
R
B
R
B
R
B
R
F
r
o
n
t
lo
w
e
r
d
o
o
r
d
e
t
e
c
t
io
n
G
P
1
A
7
1
L
3
P
H
R
-
3
B
L
B
L
B
-
7
(
p
,
2
2
)
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
D
-
6
(
p
,
2
2
)
P
L
P
L
P
L
P
L
P
L
B
L
B
L
B
L
B
-
8
(
p
,
2
2
)
G
P
1
A
7
1
L
3
P
H
R
-
3
P
A
P
P
A
-
3
p
i
n
P
A
L
R
D
R
-
P
C
U
P
W
B
R
D
R
D
B
L
L
B
L
B
B
L
G
Y
G
Y
B
L
P
K
W
a
s
t
e
t
o
n
e
r
f
u
l
l
d
e
t
e
c
t
i
o
n
B
3
4
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
G
Y
P
K
C
N
8
B
L
G
P
1
A
7
1
L
3
P
H
R
-
3
B
4
0
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
W
a
s
t
e
t
o
n
e
r
b
o
x
s
e
n
s
o
r
(
L
o
w
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
C
N
6
Q
S
W
-
Z
0
5
3
8
P
H
R
-
3
B
4
0
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
C
N
-
A
(
L
o
w
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
C
N
4
L
B
L
B
P
L
P
L
B
R
B
R
L
C
C
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
P
K
P
K
P
W
B
B
R
B
R
F
.
G
.
G
Y
F
.
G
.
B
L
G
Y
G
Y
R
D
P
K
G
Y
B
4
0
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
P
K
B
1
2
B
-
P
H
D
S
S
-
B
P
E
L
1
5
P
I
N
R
(
L
o
w
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
C
N
4
R
D
G
Y
(
W
H
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
C
N
3
B
7
P
-
V
H
D
R
-
D
C
P
W
B
B
K
B
K
C
N
6
(
J
a
p
a
n
/
2
0
0
V
s
e
r
i
e
s
)
W
H
W
H
B
L
Y
/
G
B
0
3
P
-
V
H
W
H
P
W
B
B
1
0
P
-
V
H
F
.
G
.
P
E
L
1
2
P
I
N
R
(
L
C
C
O
P
T
I
O
N
)
(
L
o
w
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
1
2
0
V
_
C
D
)
C
N
8
F
.
G
.
R
D
B
7
P
-
V
H
C
N
7
G
Y
C
J
-
D
C
P
W
B
B
8
P
-
V
H
(
1
2
0
V
s
e
r
i
e
s
)
C
N
4
B
L
B
6
P
-
V
H
2
5
V
N
P
D
3
1
2
P
-
G
N
D
1
2
1
D
-
G
N
D
T
N
F
D
2
8
P
-
G
N
D
8
C
F
M
8
1
0
C
F
M
2
6
C
F
M
_
L
D
2
5
V
3
1
5
1
7
D
-
G
N
D
/
W
T
M
_
C
L
K
3
4
/
W
T
M
_
D
4
P
-
G
N
D
1
/
W
T
M
_
L
D
1
2
/
W
T
M
_
C
W
2
3
1
3
5
V
3
3
D
S
W
_
D
2
V
T
O
D
2
5
V
3
3
D
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
1
1
7
2
1
1
5
4
D
S
W
_
D
1
9
C
F
M
4
2
4
1
9
D
-
G
N
D
2
8
2
8
2
6
2
4
2
4
6
6
5
V
3
2
0
5
V
N
P
D
(
L
E
D
)
T
N
F
D
3
3
3
4
D
-
G
N
D
5
V
N
P
D
3
0
9
D
-
G
N
D
1
9
T
B
B
O
X
2
G
N
D
/
W
T
M
_
L
D
1
4
/
W
T
M
_
C
W
1
2
2
0
V
T
O
D
2
2
D
S
W
_
D
5
7
/
W
T
M
_
D
7
5
/
W
T
M
_
C
L
K
1
1
V
T
O
D
1
3
/
W
T
M
_
C
W
3
1
/
W
T
M
_
L
D
5
V
3
9
1
8
/
W
T
M
_
L
D
2
/
W
T
M
_
C
W
3
5
V
3
5
6
P
-
G
N
D
/
W
T
M
_
C
L
K
/
W
T
M
_
D
I
N
T
2
4
V
2
8
P
-
G
N
D
7 45
5
V
3
6
7
42
I
N
T
2
4
V
2
I
N
T
2
4
V
2
7 6
1
3
P
-
G
N
D
1
1
5
6
/
T
R
C
_
L
C
C
1
2
2
4
V
4
1
P
-
G
N
D
2
N
C
3
1
W
H
_
N
(
L
C
C
)
3
W
H
_
L
(
L
C
C
)
C
F
M
_
L
D
R
E
S
_
L
C
C
1
1
6
/
D
S
R
_
L
C
C
6
7
R
E
S
_
L
C
C
7
95
D
-
G
N
D
W
H
_
L
(
L
C
C
)
1
0
1
T
X
D
_
L
C
C
7
R
X
D
_
L
C
C
8
/
D
T
R
_
L
C
C
/
D
S
R
_
L
C
C
1
0
5
V
N
5
4
W
H
_
L
(
L
C
C
)
W
H
1
5
F
-
G
N
D
2
W
H
_
N
(
L
C
C
)
2
4
1
2
W
H
_
N
(
L
C
C
)
1
2
1
3
1
1
2
4
V
4
1
1
1
2
P
-
G
N
D
1
2
1
3
/
T
R
C
_
L
C
C
1
0
D
-
G
N
D
1
0
9
5
V
N
8
F
-
G
N
D
89
4
R
X
D
_
L
C
C
4
5
/
D
T
R
_
L
C
C
5
12
N
C
N
C
12
3
6
D
-
G
N
D
R
X
D
_
L
C
C
3
4
R
E
S
_
L
C
C
5
V
N
5
2
4
V
7
6
P
-
G
N
D
3
8
/
T
R
C
_
L
C
C
T
X
D
_
L
C
C
3
N
C
4
3
9
1
6
/
W
T
M
_
C
L
K
/
W
T
M
_
D
1
6
/
W
T
M
_
C
L
K
1
6
I
N
T
2
4
V
2
1
2
/
W
T
M
_
L
D
1
2
1
4
/
W
T
M
_
C
W
1
4
1
8
/
W
T
M
_
D
1
8
4
P
-
G
N
D
4
2
I
N
T
2
4
V
2
2
2
0
V
T
O
D
2
0
2
2
2
2
D
S
W
_
D
B
K
c
h
a
r
g
e
r
c
l
e
a
n
e
r
f
a
n
C
F
M
_
L
D
2
P
-
G
N
D
3
3
C
F
M
2
1
1
P
-
G
N
D
2
6
C
F
M
_
L
D
2
D
-
G
N
D
2
T
B
B
O
X
3
3
5
2
4
V
1
5
V
N
P
D
(
L
E
D
)
1
7
3
7
/
D
T
R
_
L
C
C
3
9
/
D
S
R
_
L
C
C
3
3
T
X
D
_
L
C
C
8
P
-
G
N
D
3
5
V
N
Y. Between the PCU, the Mother and the Motor drive section (25/31)
C
N
2
(
L
o
w
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
C
N
4
S
O
C
K
E
T
1
S
O
C
K
E
T
1
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
B
R
B
R
P
L
P
L
G
Y
L
B
L
B
B
L
B
L
P
K
B
R
B
R
G
Y
B
1
6
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
B
4
0
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
D
R
I
V
E
R
P
W
B
T
X
2
4
-
6
0
R
-
L
T
-
H
1
T
X
-
2
5
-
6
0
P
-
L
T
-
H
1
5
9
P
O
M
_
/
B
6
0
D
-
G
N
D
5
7
B
T
M
_
E
N
5
8
P
O
M
_
B
5
5
D
M
Y
_
E
N
5
6
/
B
T
M
_
C
N
T
P
H
T
M
K
_
2
5
V
N
H
T
M
C
_
2
H
T
M
M
_
1
P
-
G
N
D
P
-
G
N
D
5
V
N
N
,
C
H
T
M
C
_
1
6
0
5
7
5
1
5
V
N
5
2
D
M
K
_
C
L
K
5
3
/
D
M
K
_
C
N
T
5
4
D
M
C
_
E
N
4
0
N
,
C
2
2
B
T
M
_
C
L
K
D
R
M
C
L
_
C
L
K
D
M
M
_
E
N
H
T
M
M
_
2
H
T
M
K
_
2
P
-
G
N
D
5
V
N
2
2
n
_
F
W
P
_
P
C
U
3
1
6
2
1
1
9
A
D
M
L
_
A
2
1
1
5
5
V
N
2
0
L
C
C
M
_
/
A
1
9
2
0
3
L
C
C
M
_
C
N
T
L
C
C
M
_
A
1
4
W
E
B
_
M
1
5
V
N
W
E
B
_
M
2
8 7
A
D
M
L
_
A
1
5
1
1
D
-
G
N
D
6
W
E
B
_
M
1
5
V
N
P
D
i
n
A
D
M
L
_
/
A
T
X
D
_
P
C
U
L
C
C
M
_
/
A
L
C
C
M
_
C
N
T
M
O
T
H
E
R
P
W
B
3
2
D
-
G
N
D
n
_
F
W
P
_
P
C
U
n
_
R
E
S
_
M
P
F
C
_
P
C
U
5 6
T
X
D
_
P
C
U
D
-
G
N
D
P
C
U
_
R
E
S
1
2
1
7
n
_
R
E
S
_
M
P
F
C
_
P
C
U
/
A
D
M
H
_
C
N
T
P
C
U
_
R
E
S
1
4
84
A
D
M
H
_
A
A
D
M
H
_
/
A
D
-
G
N
D
1
1
W
E
B
_
M
2
247
n
_
P
O
F
_
P
C
U
7
1
9
H
T
M
Y
_
1
H
T
M
Y
_
2
P
H
T
M
K
_
1
2
1
D
-
G
N
D
H
T
M
Y
_
1
9
D
-
G
N
D
P
-
G
N
D
23
P
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
n
_
D
S
R
_
P
C
U
P
C
U
_
R
X
D
5
V
N
P
D
i
n
n
_
F
A
X
_
L
E
D
D
-
G
N
D
n
_
D
T
R
_
P
C
U
D
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
12
1
0
3
0
2
8
2
2
3
1
2
0
2
4
2
6
1
8
2
9
59
1
4
6
8
1
1
1
2
1
3
9
P
S
F
M
_
C
L
K
D
-
G
N
D
1
6
1
6
A
D
M
L
_
/
A
1
7
D
R
M
C
L
_
C
L
K
1
7
P
S
F
M
_
C
L
K
L
C
C
M
_
A
P
-
G
N
D
H
T
M
Y
_
2
P
H
T
M
K
_
1
5
P
H
T
M
K
_
2
4
/
A
D
M
H
_
C
N
T
N
,
C
1
1
1
2
1
3
D
-
G
N
D
1
0
A
D
M
H
_
A
A
D
M
H
_
/
A
H
T
M
K
_
1
2
7
3
5
3
6
3
0
3
1
/
P
O
M
_
C
N
T
P
O
M
_
A
D
-
G
N
D
2
5
P
O
M
_
/
A
A
D
M
H
_
B
3
2
A
D
M
H
_
/
B
3
3
/
A
D
M
L
_
C
N
T
3
4
2
8
2
6
2
9
1
0
/
D
R
M
C
L
_
C
N
T
D
M
K
_
E
N
3
7
P
S
F
M
_
E
N
3
8
4
1
4
0
A
D
M
L
_
B
A
D
M
L
_
/
B
N
,
C
3
9
4
2
4
5
D
M
K
_
C
L
K
5
2
4
3
4
4
L
C
C
M
_
B
P
S
F
M
_
C
N
T
L
C
C
M
_
/
B
5
V
N
5
1
/
B
T
M
_
C
N
T
4
6
/
D
M
K
_
C
N
T
5
5
5
6
D
M
C
_
E
N
5
4
5
3
B
T
M
_
E
N
4
7
5
0
P
O
M
_
/
B
4
8
4
9
P
O
M
_
B
D
M
Y
_
E
N
5
8
5
9
/
P
O
M
_
C
N
T
3
0
D
-
G
N
D
3
1
P
-
G
N
D
2
9
3
2
H
T
M
M
_
1
3
6
H
T
M
K
_
1
3
3
H
T
M
M
_
2
3
4
H
T
M
C
_
1
3
9
P
-
G
N
D
2
8
P
O
M
_
/
A
3
7
H
T
M
K
_
2
3
8
5
V
N
3
5
H
T
M
C
_
2
4
1
D
-
G
N
D
4
2
A
D
M
H
_
B
4
3
A
D
M
H
_
/
B
4
4
/
A
D
M
L
_
C
N
T
4
5
A
D
M
L
_
B
4
6
A
D
M
L
_
/
B
4
7
P
S
F
M
_
C
N
T
4
8
P
S
F
M
_
E
N
4
9
L
C
C
M
_
B
5
0
L
C
C
M
_
/
B
P
C
U
_
R
X
D
D
-
G
N
D
n
_
D
T
R
_
P
C
U
2
7
n
_
D
S
R
_
P
C
U
2
5
n
_
F
A
X
_
L
E
D
2
3
n
_
P
O
F
_
P
C
U
P
O
M
_
A
2
3
2
4
2
5
/
D
R
M
C
L
_
C
N
T
D
M
K
_
E
N
D
M
M
_
E
N
B
T
M
_
C
L
K
2
7
5
V
N
P
D
i
n
5
V
N
P
D
i
n
1
3
2
6
2
4
P
C
U
P
W
B
1
8
1
8
2
3
1
5
Z. Inserter and outlet fan section (26/31)
P
S
M
4
P
R
(
L
o
w
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
C
N
6
P
K
P
L
G
Y
B
R
P
S
M
4
P
R
P
L
G
Y
L
B
B
4
0
B
-
P
N
D
Z
-
S
C
N
1
9
(
L
o
w
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
P
K
P
L
B
R
B
1
6
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
P
S
M
4
P
R
S
D
F
1
B
1
8
D
E
P (
U
p
p
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
C
N
1
3
R
D
C
N
1
8
L
B
B
3
0
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
P
H
D
R
-
3
-
H
+
B
U
0
3
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
(
A
C
D
C
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
R
S
M
6
P
P
(
L
o
w
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
C
N
6
D
R
-
P
C
U
P
W
B
P
K
P
K
B
R
B
R
G
Y
G
Y
P
H
D
R
-
3
-
H
+
B
U
0
3
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
P
L
P
L
L
B
L
B
G
Y
G
Y
C
N
C
N
(
L
o
w
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
P
K
P
K
B
R
B
R
P
L
P
L
L
B
L
B
P
K
P
K
R
D
B
L
G
Y
G
Y
G
Y
B
4
0
B
-
P
N
D
Z
-
S
G
Y
R
D
G
Y
P
E
L
1
2
P
I
N
R
I
N
S
E
R
T
O
R
C
N
4
R
D
F
I
N
I
S
H
E
R
&
I
N
S
E
R
T
O
R
(
O
P
T
I
O
N
)
G
Y
F
.
G
.
B
7
P
-
V
H
-
B
D
R
-
D
C
P
W
B
C
N
6
(
J
a
p
a
n
/
2
0
0
V
s
e
r
i
e
s
)
B
L
B
1
0
P
-
V
H
-
B
C
N
8
R
D
B
7
P
-
V
H
-
B
C
N
7
G
Y
B
8
P
-
V
H
-
B
C
J
-
D
C
P
W
B
C
N
4
(
1
2
0
V
s
e
r
i
e
s
)
B
L
B
6
P
-
V
H
-
B
R
S
V
_
I
O
_
O
U
T
2
4
V
3
6
P
-
G
N
D
6
4
O
V
F
M
3
4
5
/
O
Z
F
M
_
C
N
T
5
3
P
-
G
N
D
3
1
O
V
F
M
3
1
2
/
O
Z
F
M
_
C
N
T
2
P
S
F
M
1
P
S
F
M
2
3
2
P
S
F
M
_
L
D
2
3
3
P
-
G
N
D
3
0
P
-
G
N
D
2
9
1
4
R
S
V
_
I
O
_
O
U
T
1
4
2
9
3
1
P
S
F
M
_
L
D
1
/
O
Z
F
M
_
C
N
T
2
6
P
-
G
N
D
1
2
2
4
V
3
1
2
2
0
/
F
U
F
M
_
C
N
T
1
/
R
S
V
_
i
n
1
1
6
R
S
V
_
P
M
C
1
4
2
2
O
V
F
M
3
2
8
O
Z
F
M
_
L
D
3
2
4
2
7
O
Z
F
M
_
L
D
2
2
1
O
Z
F
M
2
2
3
3
2
5
P
-
G
N
D
4
O
Z
F
M
_
L
D
2
4
P
-
G
N
D
3
O
Z
O
N
E
F
A
N
3
4
O
Z
F
M
_
L
D
3
4
1
O
V
F
M
3
1
3
P
-
G
N
D
3
O
Z
O
N
E
F
A
N
2
2
/
O
Z
F
M
_
C
N
T
2
1
O
Z
F
M
2
1
2
/
O
Z
F
M
_
C
N
T
2
1 33
2
P
S
F
M
_
L
D
2
2 1
2
P
S
F
M
_
L
D
1
2
P
o
w
e
r
s
o
u
r
c
e
F
A
N
1
P
o
w
e
r
s
o
u
r
c
e
F
A
N
2
1
P
S
F
M
2
3
P
-
G
N
D
3 1
P
S
F
M
1
P
-
G
N
D
4
0
D
-
G
N
D
3
5
T
X
D
_
I
N
S
/
O
Z
F
M
_
C
N
T
3
4
3
7
1
T
X
D
_
F
I
N
1
2
R
X
D
_
F
I
N
2
3
/
D
T
R
_
F
I
N
3
4
/
D
S
R
_
F
I
N
4
8
D
-
G
N
D
8
5
R
E
S
_
F
I
N
5
6
2
4
V
6
6
1
1
2
4
V
6
1
1
1
2
P
-
G
N
D
1
2
3
2
4
V
6
5
5
V
2
4
G
N
D
1
P
-
G
N
D
R
E
S
_
F
I
N
2
4
V
3
5
V
N
D
-
G
N
D
2
4
V
5
1
/
D
T
R
_
F
I
N
4
/
D
S
R
_
F
I
N
T
X
D
_
F
I
N
R
X
D
_
F
I
N
/
D
T
R
_
F
I
N
/
D
S
R
_
F
I
N
3
8
F
I
N
I
S
H
E
R
1
1
2
4
V
5
1
2
P
-
G
N
D
9
P
-
G
N
D
5
V
N
1
0
F
-
G
N
D
1
0
/
D
T
R
_
I
N
S
3
6
R
E
S
_
I
N
S
3
9
7
/
D
S
R
_
I
N
S
P
-
G
N
D
4
R
X
D
_
I
N
S
M
F
P
F
M
_
L
D
9
T
X
D
_
F
I
N
R
X
D
_
F
I
N
2
4
V
3
D
-
G
N
D
P
-
G
N
D
9
P
-
G
N
D
5
V
N
7
7
F
-
G
N
D
26 5
R
E
S
_
F
I
N
38
1
0
F
-
G
N
D
M
o
t
h
e
r
F
A
N
1
M
F
P
F
M
1
2
M
F
P
F
M
_
C
N
T
23
34
2
5
V
N
1
2
4
V
6
7
P
-
G
N
D
AA.Option section (27/31)
C
N
1
6
P
C
U
P
W
B
B
1
6
B
-
P
N
D
Z
-
1
(
M
S
W
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
M
e
c
h
a
n
i
c
a
l
c
o
u
n
t
e
r
1
S
M
R
-
0
4
P
E
L
-
6
P
R
(
L
o
w
e
r
m
a
i
n
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
C
N
7
R
D
R
D
L
B
L
B
1
7
9
2
2
8
-
2
R
D
P
L
S
M
P
-
0
4
B
3
0
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
M
e
c
h
a
n
i
c
a
l
c
o
u
n
t
e
r
2
R
D
P
L
1
7
9
2
2
8
-
2
R
S
M
-
6
p
i
n
P
S
C
N
-
m
o
t
h
e
r
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
C
N
1
4
5
B
R
L
B
P
K
P
L
B
L
G
Y
B
6
P
-
P
H
-
K
-
R
C
N
1
3
1
S
C
N
-
c
n
t
P
W
B
R
P
T
a
b
l
e
r
e
l
a
y
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
P
N
C
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
B
1
3
P
-
P
H
-
K
-
S
S
M
6
P
M
E
C
H
A
N
I
C
A
L
C
O
U
N
T
E
R
(
O
P
T
I
O
N
)
3
3
4
4
1
1
2
2
/
P
N
C
_
B
2
2
7
2
4
V
3
1
4
/
P
N
C
_
B
/
P
N
C
_
B
3
2
4
V
3
34
2
4
V
3
2
9
5
2
8
2
4
V
3
1
2
4
V
3
/
P
N
C
_
C
2
6
/
P
N
C
_
C
6
3
0
/
P
N
C
_
C
5
2
4
V
3
1
0
/
C
V
_
C
O
L
O
R
0
3
/
C
V
_
C
O
P
Y
49
/
C
V
_
S
T
A
P
L
E
5
V
3
/
C
V
_
C
O
U
N
T
1
2
4
V
3
2
P
-
G
N
D
/
C
V
_
S
I
Z
E
0
1
1
/
C
V
_
S
T
A
R
T
6
/
C
V
_
C
A
7
/
C
V
_
C
L
C
O
P
Y
5
/
C
V
_
D
U
P
L
E
X
1
2
1
6
/
C
V
_
S
I
Z
E
3
T
O
C
O
I
N
V
E
N
D
O
R
(
O
P
T
I
O
N
)
1
4
/
C
V
_
S
I
Z
E
1
1
5
/
C
V
_
S
I
Z
E
2
8
/
C
V
_
C
O
L
O
R
1
1
3
1
3
D
-
G
N
D
1
/
C
_
C
A
R
D
2
/
C
_
S
E
L
3
/
C
_
C
L
O
C
K
4
/
C
_
D
A
T
A
1
1
2
4
V
1
2
P
N
C
-
a
9
D
-
G
N
D
1
0
n
A
_
T
C
5
V
7
D
-
G
N
D
8
2
4
V
6
n
A
_
C
A
n
A
_
R
E
A
D
Y
n
A
_
A
U
D
5
V
n
A
_
P
N
C
345 562 1
45
n
A
_
C
O
P
Y
D
-
G
N
D
6
2
C
A
R
D
R
E
A
D
E
R
(
O
P
T
I
O
N
)
T
O
A
U
D
I
T
E
R
/
C
_
C
L
O
C
K
/
C
_
D
A
T
A
5
V
D
-
G
N
D
13
/
C
_
C
A
R
D
1
6
/
C
_
C
A
R
D
/
C
_
S
E
L
12345
/
C
_
S
E
L
2
/
C
_
C
L
O
C
K
D
-
G
N
D
6 3
/
C
_
D
A
T
A
4
5
V
5
C
A
R
D
R
E
A
D
E
R
(
O
P
T
I
O
N
)
123456
AB.Scanner section 1/2 (28/31)
C
N
3
5
0
1
1
9
0
-
4
0
1
7
(
M
O
L
E
X
)
C
N
1
5
0
1
1
9
0
-
2
0
1
7
(
M
O
L
E
X
)
M
H
P
S
I
n
v
e
r
t
e
r
P
W
B
E
H
G Y
G Y
B R
P K
G Y
B R
P K
B R
B R
P K
G R
B R
P K
G Y
B R
P K
G Y
B R
P K
G Y
G Y
P L
G Y
B L
G Y
O R
B R
P K
B R
P K
B R
P K
G Y
B R
P K
B R
G Y
B R
P K
G Y
G Y
B R
P K
G Y
B R
P K
G Y
B R
P K
G Y
G Y
B R
P K
G Y
B R
P K
G Y
B R
P K
G Y
B R
G Y
B L
C
N
1
4
8
5
0
1
1
9
0
-
4
0
1
7
(
M
O
L
E
X
)
C
N
1
4
7
5
0
1
1
9
0
-
2
0
1
7
(
M
O
L
E
X
)
C
N
1
3
0
C
N
1
3
7
C
N
1
3
4
P
H
C
N
1
3
6
B
L
G
Y
L
B
O
C
S
W
E
H
R
D
P
L
L
B
B
6
P
-
P
H
-
K
-
S
G
Y
O
R
S
L
E
D
P
W
B
C
N
1
3
8
B
6
P
-
V
H
-
R
C
N
1
4
4
B
3
0
B
-
P
H
D
S
S
-
B
C
N
1
4
6
B
1
0
B
-
P
H
D
S
S
-
B
C
N
1
4
3
B
1
5
P
-
P
H
-
K
-
S
G Y
R D
P L
B L
O R
G Y
L B
P L
S H
P K
W H
S H
P K
W H
S H
P K
W H
S H
P K
W H
G Y
B L
L B
P L
L B
P L
P L
L B
P L
L B
P L
L B
P L
L B
G Y
P K
G Y
L B
P K
B R
G Y
G Y
W H
P K
S H
W H
P K
S H
W H
P K
S H
W H
P K
S H
W H
P K
S H
C
N
1
1
B
6
P
-
V
H
C
N
3
B
3
0
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
C
N
1
9
B
1
2
B
-
P
H
D
S
S
-
B
C
N
5
B
1
5
P
-
P
H
-
K
-
S
C
N
4
B
1
2
B
-
P
H
D
S
S
-
B
C
N
3
B
1
5
P
-
P
H
-
K
-
S
S C N - L A M P
F F C : c o m m o n
C C D - F h a r n e s s 1
: c o m m o n
C C D - F h a r n e s s 1 :
c o m m o n
D - G N D
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
1 3
1 0
1 1
1 2
S C A N D A T A 3 +
D - G N D
S C A N D A T A 2 +
D - G N D
S C A N C L K O U T -
S C A N C L K O U T +
S C A N D A T A 3 -
1 4
1 5
S C A N D A T A 0 -
S C A N D A T A 0 +
D - G N D
S C A N D A T A 1 -
S C A N D A T A 1 +
D - G N D
S C A N D A T A 2 -
9
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
3
4
1 5
1 6
1 7
1 8
1 0
5 V
M H P S h a r n e s s : c o m m o n
1
2 4 V
1
4
9
1 0
N d e t e c t
D - G N D
n D E T _ A N C
N C
T X D _ A N C
N C
R X D _ A N C
N C
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
C
C
D
P
W
B
n R E S _ M P F C _ S C N
D - G N D
R E S _ S C N
L C D _ D A T A 1 +
3 9
3 1
3 3
2 7
2 9
M
O
T
H
E
R
P
W
B
1
2
3
/ D E T E C T
D - G N D
/ D E T _ A N C
R X D _ S C N
8
9
5
7
9
1 0
8
1
2
3
4
1 2
3
4
M
I
R
R
O
R
M
O
T
O
R
3
3
2
M H P S
D - G N D
M i M _ / A
1 3
1 4
1 5
1 5
9
1 0
1 1
5
6
7
S C A N D A T A 2 +
S C A N D A T A 0 -
S C A N D A T A 0 +
D - G N D
S C A N D A T A 1 -
L C D _ C L K -
S C A N D A T A 1 +
D - G N D
S C A N D A T A 2 -
T X D _ A N C
R X D _ A N C
D - G N D
D - G N D
D - G N D
D - G N D
7
1
1 1
n I N F O _ L E D
3C N _ C H K _ O U T
9
5D - G N D
L C D _ C L K +
1 7
1 8
1 2
1 3
2 3
4
1 5
1 9
6
2
n P O W _ L E D
2 4
2 5
1 0
2 2
5 V O
T X D _ S C N
2 7
n P W R _ S W
6
1 3
1 4
1 6
3 0 3 0
2 8
1 0
2 0
S C A N D A T A 3 +
L C D _ D A T A 2 +
n P O F _ S C N
D - G N D
D - G N D
n W U _ K E Y
n C T S _ S C N
L C D _ D A T A 0 +
D - G N D
D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
P
W
B
D - G N D
L C D _ D A T A 1 -
L C D _ D A T A 0 -
n F W P _ S C N
C N _ C H K _ I N
S C A N D A T A 3 -
n W U _ L E D
D - G N D
5
6
L C D _ D A T A 1 +
n R T S _ S C N
L C D _ D A T A 2 -
n R E S _ M P F C _ S C N
D - G N D
R E S _ S C N
D - G N D
N C
1
2
3
4
P ^ G N D
2 4 V 1
1 2 V
5 V N
3 . 3 V
D - G N D
M i M _ A
M i M _ B
3 . 3 V
D - G N D
5
6
A D _ R D S I
C C D _ C L K 1 -
3
1
2
4
M i M _ / B
1
2
T E -
1 2
8
1 4
2 0A G N D
T C L K +
3 4
T B -
1
3 8
A G N D
7
4 0
T C -
A G N D
1 1
T C +
T E +
5
6
A G N D
1 3
2
1 9
T B +
T A +
S H _ O U T +
C L K P 1 _ O U T -
3 6
3 7
A G N D
A D _ C L P I N
2 4
A D _ S C L K
C C D _ S H
A G N D
S C A N D A T A 2 -
D - G N D
A G N D
A G N D
S H _ O U T -
R X D _ S C N
A G N D
D - G N D
C N _ C H K _ I N
A D _ B L K C L P
D - G N D
S C A N D A T A 1 +
D - G N D
D - G N D
T X D _ A N C
N C
R X D _ A N C
N C
5
2 9
2 7
3 0
3 2
2 6
2 8
2 0
/ R E S _ C C D A D
9
T X D _ S C N2 2
2 3
2 1
1 8
n W U _ K E Y
L C D _ D A T A 0 -
1 6
2 2
1 8
1 2
1 4
A D _ W R S O
A G N D
A D _ S E N
/ L V D S _ S T B Y
A D _ M C L K -
A D _ M C L K +
C L K P 1 _ O U T +
A 3 . 3 V
A G N D
A G N D
A G N D
C C D _ C P +
A 5 V
A G N D
C C D _ R S +
A 1 2 V
C C D _ R S -
A G N D
C C D _ C L K 2 -
C C D _ C L K 2 +
1 0
6
1 1
1 3
2 5
2 3
8
2 1
1 5
1 7
3 5
1
2
2
4
V
E
X
T
5
7
1 9
9
C C D _ C P -
5
/
S
I
Z
E
_
L
E
D
1
A G N D
A G N D
A G N D
O
C
S
W
3
5
V
E
X
T
4
2 6
S C N - m o t h e r h a r n e s s C D
1
2
3
4
5
2 0
2 1
1 4
2 8
2 9
3
4
6
7
8
9
1 0
1 7
1 2
1 1
D - G N D
9
1 0
S C A N D A T A 3 -
S C A N D A T A 3 +
D - G N D
D - G N D
S C A N D A T A 0 +
D - G N D
S C A N D A T A 1 -
2
3
4
1
n R T S _ S C N
L C D _ D A T A 0 +
S C A N D A T A 2 +
7
8
1 1
1 2
1 3
1 4
2 4
2 5
2 6
1 9
1 5
1 6
n I N F O _ L E D
5 V O
C N _ C H K _ O U T
n W U _ L E D
D - G N D
n P O W _ L E D
L C D _ C L K +
T A -
T C L K -
A G N D
A G N D
T D +
T D -
A G N D
A G N D
A G N D
A G N D
A G N D
A 1 2 V
C C D _ C P -
A G N D
C C D _ C P +
A 5 V
A G N D
C C D _ R S +
C C D _ R S -
A G N D
A G N D
C C D _ C L K 2 -
A D _ S C L K
C C D _ C L K 2 +
A D _ W R S O
C C D _ C L K 1 +
A G N D
A D _ M C L K -
/ L V D S _ S T B Y
/ R E S _ C C D A D
C C D _ C L K 1 -
A 3 . 3 V
A G N D
A G N D
S H _ O U T +
A D _ S E N
A D _ B L K C L P
C C D _ S H
A G N D
A D _ C L P I N
A D _ R D S I
2 5
2 6
2 7
S H _ O U T -
A G N D
A D _ M C L K +
A G N D
C L K P 1 _ O U T +
C L K P 1 _ O U T -
A G N D
2 8
2 9
3 0
3 1
3 7
2 2
2 4
3 8
3 9
3 2
3 3
3 4
3 5
1 4
1 6
1 8
2 0
4 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3 6
9
1 0
1 1
1 2
1 3
1 5
1 7
1 9
2 1
2 3
A G N D
A G N D
T C +
T E +
T C -
A G N D
T E -
A G N D
A G N D
T B +
A G N D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
A G N D
T A +
9
1 0
1 1
T C L K -
A G N D
T C L K +
T A -
T D +
T B -
T D -
1 3
1 4
1 5
8
2 0
1
D
-
G
N
D
2
C C D _ C L K 1 +
1 6
1 7
1 8
1 9
1 2
6
/
S
I
Z
E
_
L
E
D
2
P ^ G N D
2 4 V 1
1 2 V
5 V N
D - G N D
N C
S C A N D A T A 0 -
n C T S _ S C N
n F W P _ S C N
N d e t e c t
D - G N D
n D E T _ A N C
N C
L C D _ D A T A 1 -
M H P S
D - G N D
1
2
5 V
5
P - G N D
P - G N D
L A M P
2 4 V
2 4 V
1
2
3
1
P - G N D
P - G N D
L A M P
2 4 V
5
4
3
2
2
D
-
G
N
D
2
4
V
E
X
T
123
O
C
S
W
5
V
E
X
T
4
S
C
N
c
n
t
P
W
B
/
S
I
Z
E
_
L
E
D
2
F
-
G
N
D
/
S
I
Z
E
_
L
E
D
1
L C D _ D A T A 2 +
n P O F _ S C N
L C D _ D A T A 2 -
L C D _ C L K -
n P W R _ S W
C
L
O
P
T
I
O
N
W
h
e
n
D
O
C
C
P
W
B
is
in
s
t
a
lle
d
S
C
N
c
n
t
P
W
B
C
N
1
4
3
S
C
N
c
n
t
P
W
B
C
N
1
4
6
D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
d
e
t
e
c
t
io
n
lig
h
t
e
m
it
t
in
g
s
id
e
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
:
c
o
m
m
o
n
AC.Scanner section 2/2 (29/31)
C
N
1
4
2
C
N
1
3
5
C
N
1
C
N
2
P
H
B
R
L
B
P
L
B
L
P
K
G
Y
B
M
0
6
B
-
P
A
S
S
-
T
B
O
R
S
-
P
D
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
O
R
S
P
D
P
W
B
C
N
3
P
H
B
R
G
Y
G
Y
B
M
0
3
B
-
P
A
S
S
-
T
B
P
S
W
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
P
O
W
E
R
S
W
P
W
B
S
L
W
2
6
S
-
1
C
7
M
F
P
O
P
E
F
F
C
C
D
5
2
6
1
0
-
2
6
7
1
(
M
O
L
E
X
)
C
N
3
C
N
1
2
5
C
N
1
B
3
4
B
-
P
H
D
S
S
-
B
5
2
4
3
5
-
2
2
7
1
(
M
O
L
E
X
)
L
C
D
-
F
F
C
C
D
F
H
1
2
-
2
2
S
-
0
.
5
S
H
(
5
5
)
(
H
I
R
C
N
4
5
2
2
7
1
-
0
4
6
9
(
M
O
L
E
X
)
S
0
2
(
8
.
0
)
B
-
B
H
S
C
N
2
C
N
3
C
N
2
C
N
1
B
R
S
L
W
3
0
S
-
1
C
7
L
V
D
S
F
F
C
C
D
5
2
2
7
1
-
3
0
7
9
(
M
O
L
E
X
)
B
R
S
0
2
(
8
.
0
)
B
-
B
H
S
B
R
L
V
D
S
-
C
D
P
W
B
S
M
0
3
B
-
P
A
S
S
-
1
-
T
B
L
C
D
-
I
N
V
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
S
0
3
B
-
P
A
S
K
-
2
L
C
D
I
N
V
P
W
B
C
D
T
O
D
S
P
F
S
E
G
2
/
F
0
/
F
1
1
7
5
V
2
D
-
G
N
D
n
I
N
F
O
_
L
E
D
P
O
W
_
L
E
D
W
U
_
L
E
D
D
-
G
N
D
S
E
G
1
2
5
2
2
2
3
2
4
1
8
1
9
2
6
5
V
3
D
-
G
N
D
P
D
P
D
S
E
L
0
P
D
S
E
L
1
P
D
S
E
L
2
/
K
E
Y
I
N
S
E
G
0
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
2
0
/
B
Z
R
D
-
G
N
D
n
P
W
R
S
W
789
1
0
3
0
D
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
1
3
.
3
V
234562
6
2
7
2
8
Y
1
C
N
2
9
X
2
C
N
Y
2
C
N
X
1
C
N
2
4
2
5
2
2
2
3
2
0
2
1
2
4
V
_
E
X
T
T
P
1
4
4
9
A
V
C
C
/
C
C
F
T
1
D
I
S
P
C
N
_
C
H
K
_
IN
(
L
C
D
)
V
C
O
N
T
S
C
_
T
E
M
P
P
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
1
8
1
9
L
C
D
_
D
A
T
0
-
1
3
D
-
G
N
D
1
4
3
.
3
V
_
E
X
T
T
P
1
4
1
8
1
6
1
1
L
C
D
_
D
A
T
0
+
1
2
L
C
D
_
D
A
T
1
+
9
L
C
D
_
D
A
T
1
-
1
0
D
-
G
N
D
1
7
1
6
1
5
8
8
2
6
2
5
D
I
S
P
o
u
t
7
3
.
3
V
V
c
o
n
D
I
S
P
V
D
D
V
D
D
L
C
D
_
D
A
T
2
-
7
D
-
G
N
D
5
L
C
D
_
D
A
T
2
+
6
L
P
X
C
K
V
S
S
321
2
2
2
1
2
0
1
9
P
D
5
D
-
G
N
D
6
21
P
D
S
E
L
0
1
P
D
S
E
L
1
2
P
D
S
E
L
2
3
5
V
N
4
1
C
N
_
C
H
K
_
O
U
T
2
L
C
D
_
C
L
K
-
4
D
-
G
N
D
L
C
D
_
C
L
K
+
3
6543
1
0
987
1
4
1
3
1
2
1
1
1
8
1
7
1
6
1
5
2
2
2
1
2
0
1
9
2
6
2
5
2
4
2
3
n
W
U
_
K
E
Y
/
K
E
Y
I
N
S
E
G
0
S
E
G
1
S
E
G
2
/
F
0
/
F
1
D
-
G
N
D
n
P
W
R
S
W
/
F
2
P
D
P
D
S
E
L
0
P
D
S
E
L
1
P
D
S
E
L
2
D
-
G
N
D
3
.
3
V
5
V
N
D
-
G
N
D
6
P
D
S
E
L
0
P
D
S
E
L
1
1234
P
D
S
E
L
2
5
V
N
1
7
1
4
1
3
1
2
1
1
3
.
3
V
9
3
.
3
V
1
5
D
0
V
C
O
N
T
3
P
D
D
-
G
N
D
V
S
S
Y
D
n
P
W
R
S
W
D
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
5
D
-
G
N
D
2
M
F
P
O
P
E
P
W
B
C
D
n
P
W
R
S
W
D
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
11
3
.
3
V
_
E
X
T
D
-
G
N
D
5
V
2
D
-
G
N
D
C
N
_
C
H
K
_
O
U
T
L
C
D
_
C
L
K
+
N
C
1 87653 4
S
C
_
T
E
M
P
D
-
G
N
D
1
8
1
7
1
6
1
5
1
4
1
3
1
2
1
1
2
Y
1
C
N
9
P
-
G
N
D
2
4
V
_
E
X
T
X
1
C
N
N
C
/
C
C
F
T
1
C
N
_
C
H
K
_
IN
(
L
C
D
)
X
2
C
N
Y
2
C
N
D
-
G
N
D
L
C
D
_
D
A
T
2
+
1
0
2
1
D
-
G
N
D
L
C
D
_
D
A
T
0
+
2
0
1
9
D
-
G
N
D
3
0
2
9
2
8
2
7
A
V
C
C
/
F
2
/
F
3
1
5
1
6
2
4
2
3
2
2
/
B
Z
R
n
I
N
F
O
_
L
E
D
/
F
3
L
C
D
_
D
A
T
1
+
D
-
G
N
D
n
W
U
_
K
E
Y
L
C
D
_
C
L
K
-
D
-
G
N
D
L
C
D
_
D
A
T
2
-
P
O
W
_
L
E
D
W
U
_
L
E
D
3
4
D
-
G
N
D
3
4
3
2
5
V
P
D
3
2
3
3
D
-
G
N
D
3
3
3
0
S
P
P
D
3
3
0
3
1
S
P
P
D
5
3
1
2
8
S
P
P
D
4
2
8
2
9
S
P
F
F
A
N
2
9
2
6
S
E
L
C
_
2
6
2
7
S
S
E
L
O
2
7
2
4
S
E
L
A
_
2
4
2
5
S
E
L
B
_
2
5
2
2
S
P
F
C
2
2
2
3
S
P
W
S
2
3
2
0
S
T
M
P
S
2
0
2
1
S
R
R
C
2
1
1
8
S
P
R
M
O
1
1
8
1
9
S
G
S
1
9
1
6
S
P
R
M
B
1
6
1
7
S
P
R
M
B
/
1
7
1
4
S
P
R
M
A
1
4
1
5
S
P
R
M
A
/
1
5
1
2
S
P
F
M
O
1
1
2
1
3
S
P
F
M
O
2
1
3
1
0
S
P
F
M
M
1
1
0
1
1
S
P
F
M
M
2
1
1
8
A
V
C
C
8
9
S
P
F
M
C
K
9
6
2
4
V
P
D
6
7
5
V
_
E
X
T
7
4
S
P
P
D
2
4
5
2
4
V
P
D
5
S
C
N
-
C
N
T
P
W
B
1
P
-
G
N
D
1
2
P
-
G
N
D
2
3
S
P
P
D
1
3
1
V
S
S
L
C
D
U
N
3
3
D
-
G
N
D
3
4
D
-
G
N
D
D
I
S
P
L
C
D
_
D
A
T
1
-
L
C
D
_
D
A
T
0
-
D
-
G
N
D
2
2
5
D
5
4
D
6
3
D
7
2
V
S
S
1
9
D
7
2
0
D
-
G
N
D
2
1
D
6
3
1
S
P
P
D
5
3
2
5
V
P
D
2
9
S
P
F
F
A
N
3
0
S
P
P
D
3
2
7
S
S
E
L
O
2
8
S
P
P
D
4
2
5
S
E
L
B
_
2
6
S
E
L
C
_
2
3
S
P
W
S
2
4
S
E
L
A
_
2
1
S
R
R
C
2
2
S
P
F
C
1
0
D
-
G
N
D
1
7
S
P
R
M
B
/
1
8
S
P
R
M
O
1
1
9
S
G
S
2
0
S
T
M
P
S
Y
D
2
L
P
36
D
5
1
8
D
3
1
6
D
4
1
7
1
1
D
-
G
N
D
1
2
C
P
4
D
-
G
N
D
1
5
D
1
1
4
1
3
D
2
5
V
C
O
N
T
2
Y
H
(
Y
2
)
3
/
Y
L
(
Y
1
)
1
7
D
-
G
N
D
2
2
4
V
3
/
X
L
(
X
2
)
4
/
C
C
F
T
1
X
H
(
X
1
)
V
S
S
V
S
S
D
0
8
D
1
D
2
D
3
1
8
/
C
C
F
T
D
-
G
N
D
T
o
u
c
h
p
a
n
e
l
1
0
96
D
4
V
D
D
2
4
V
321
1
5
S
P
R
M
A
/
1
6
S
P
R
M
B
1
3
S
P
F
M
O
2
1
4
S
P
R
M
A
1
1
S
P
F
M
M
2
1
2
S
P
F
M
O
1
9
S
P
F
M
C
K
1
0
S
P
F
M
M
1
2
/
C
C
F
T
5
2
4
V
P
D
6
2
4
V
P
D
7
5
V
_
E
X
T
8
A
V
C
C
C
C
F
T
+
2
/
C
C
F
T
1
C
C
F
T
+
B
A
C
K
L
I
G
H
T
1
P
-
G
N
D
2
P
-
G
N
D
3
S
P
P
D
1
4
S
P
P
D
2
1
AD.MFP section 1/2 (30/31)
P
A
P
-
0
4
V
-
F
C
N
1
7
P
H
N
R
-
4
-
H
+
B
U
0
4
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
(
S
C
N
-
m
o
t
h
e
r
h
a
r
n
e
s
s
C
D
)
C
N
1
5
B
4
P
-
V
H
C
N
5
C
N
8
U
S
B
-
B
C
N
9
U
S
B
-
A
C
N
2
6
L
A
N
C
N
1
8
R
S
2
3
2
C
H
U
5
-
4
0
0
P
N
A
-
S
5
3
T
-
F
A
1
3
D
-
G
N
D
2
M
F
P
P
W
B
3
1
1
2
V
4
M
F
P
F
A
N
4
H
D
D
F
M
_
L
D
2
H
D
D
F
M
_
P
W
M
1
1
8
1
1
9
1
2
0
D
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
F
L
V
P
P
n
R
E
Q
_
P
IC
_
IN
T
1
0
4
1
1
7
D
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
1
1
6
1
0
7
n
W
U
_
F
A
X
1
3
.
3
V
9
7
D
-
G
N
D
9
8
D
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
9
5
D
-
G
N
D
9
6
D
-
G
N
D
9
0
1
2
V
9
1
D
-
G
N
D
9
2
D
-
G
N
D
9
3
D
-
G
N
D
9
4
1
0
5
8
8
3
.
3
V
8
9
5
V
O
D
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
1
1
3
1
1
4
1
1
5
1
0
8
R
X
D
_
F
A
X
(
D
)
D
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
1
0
9
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
.
3
V
D
-
G
N
D
n
C
L
R
_
P
I
C
7
6
T
X
D
_
P
I
C
7
7
R
X
D
_
P
I
C
P
W
M
n
C
N
C
T
_
F
A
N
n
R
E
S
_
P
I
C
R
E
S
_
M
F
P
P
W
M
2
n
C
N
C
T
_
F
A
X
7
1
7
4
7
5
1
0
3
1
0
2
T
X
D
_
S
C
N
T
X
D
_
F
A
X
(
D
)
n
W
U
_
F
A
X
2
7
2
n
M
S
W
_
M
O
N
2
7
3
n
P
O
F
_
M
F
P
C
n
R
E
Q
_
P
I
C
6
4
6
5
6
6
6
7
9
9
1
0
0
R
X
D
_
S
C
N
1
0
1
5
9
7
8
6
8
6
9
7
0
8
5
8
7
8
4
5
6
5
7
1
0
6
6
0
n
R
T
S
_
P
C
U
n
C
T
S
_
F
A
X
(
D
)
n
R
T
S
_
F
A
X
(
C
S
)
n
C
T
S
_
F
A
X
(
C
S
)
n
R
E
S
_
F
A
X
5
8
R
X
D
_
F
A
X
(
C
S
)
n
R
T
S
_
F
A
X
(
D
)
n
C
T
S
_
P
C
U
T
X
D
_
P
C
U
5
V
L
5
V
L
7
9
8
0
8
1
8
2
8
3
8
6
5
V
L
5
V
L
5
4
n
R
T
S
_
S
C
N
5
5
n
R
E
S
_
S
C
N
5
V
L
5
V
L
5
3
5
V
L
5
V
L
5
V
L
n
C
T
S
_
S
C
N
5
V
L
4
9
5
0
P
I
C
V
P
P
O
N
4
2
5
V
L
4
3
n
R
E
S
_
P
C
U
R
X
D
_
P
C
U
5
V
L
5
V
L
5
V
L
4
7
3
6
3
7
C
H
3
_
N
S
C
A
N
D
A
T
A
2
+
5
2
5
1
5
V
L
V
S
Y
N
C
_
Y
_
P
4
0
V
S
Y
N
C
_
Y
_
N
4
1
4
4
4
5
4
6
4
8
V
S
Y
N
C
_
M
_
N
3
8
V
S
Y
N
C
_
M
_
P
3
9
V
S
Y
N
C
_
C
_
P
V
S
Y
N
C
_
C
_
N
E
C
L
K
_
L
S
U
_
N
C
H
3
_
P
3
0
E
C
L
K
_
L
S
U
_
P
3
1
H
S
Y
N
C
_
L
S
U
_
P
3
2
H
S
Y
N
C
_
L
S
U
_
N
3
3
V
S
Y
N
C
_
K
_
N
3
4
V
S
Y
N
C
_
K
_
P
C
H
0
_
P
2
1
C
H
1
_
N
2
2
C
H
1
_
P
2
3
C
H
2
_
N
2
4
C
H
2
_
P
2
5
C
H
0
_
N
2
0
2
6
2
7
2
8
2
9
L
C
D
_
D
A
T
A
2
+
L
C
D
_
C
L
K
-
L
C
D
_
D
A
T
A
1
+
L
C
D
_
C
L
K
+
1
6
S
C
A
N
D
A
T
A
0
+
1
9
L
C
D
_
D
A
T
A
2
-
L
C
D
_
D
A
T
A
0
+
1
7
L
C
D
_
D
A
T
A
1
-
L
C
D
_
D
A
T
A
0
-
1
8
S
C
A
N
D
A
T
A
0
-
1
0
1
3
1
4
S
C
A
N
D
A
T
A
3
+
1
1
1
2
S
C
A
N
D
A
T
A
3
-
S
C
A
N
C
L
K
O
U
T
+
S
C
A
N
C
L
K
O
U
T
-
n
A
N
T
I
_
I
N
S
T
1
5
T
X
D
_
F
A
X
(
C
S
)
6
3
6
S
C
A
N
D
A
T
A
2
-
7
S
C
A
N
D
A
T
A
1
+
8
S
C
A
N
D
A
T
A
1
-
9 1
6
2
C
L
K
_
N
C
L
K
_
P
2345
3
5
5
V
L
5
V
L
H
D
D
6
1
U
S
B
1
.
1
(
H
O
S
T
)
L
A
N
R
S
2
3
2
C
15 V
2D -
3D +
4G N D
15 V
2D -
3D +
4
1T X +
1C D
2T X -
3C T
6C T
7R X +
8R X -
4N C
5N C
2R X D
3T X D
6D S R
7R T S
8C T S
9R I
4D T R
5G N D
G N D
D
-
G
N
D
4
D
-
G
N
D
U
S
B
2
.
0
(
D
E
V
I
C
E
)
3
9
I
D
E
_
D
A
S
P
_
N
4
0
D
-
G
N
D
3
7
I
D
E
_
C
S
0
3
8
I
D
E
_
C
S
1
3
5
I
D
E
_
D
A
0
3
6
I
D
E
_
D
A
2
3
3
I
D
E
_
D
A
1
3
4
ID
E
_
C
B
L
ID
_
N
3
1
I
D
E
_
I
N
T
R
Q
3
2
I
C
C
S
1
0
2
9
ID
E
_
D
M
A
C
K
_
N
3
0
D
-
G
N
D
2
7
ID
E
_
IO
R
D
Y
_
N
2
8
D
-
G
N
D
2
5
I
D
E
_
D
I
O
R
_
N
2
6
D
-
G
N
D
2
3
I
D
E
_
D
I
O
W
_
N
2
4
D
-
G
N
D
2
1
I
D
E
_
D
M
A
R
Q
2
2
D
-
G
N
D
1
9
D
-
G
N
D
2
0
K
E
Y
1
7
I
D
E
_
D
D
0
1
8
I
D
E
_
D
D
1
5
1
5
I
D
E
_
D
D
1
1
6
I
D
E
_
D
D
1
4
1
3
I
D
E
_
D
D
2
1
4
I
D
E
_
D
D
1
3
9
I
D
E
_
D
D
4
1
0
I
D
E
_
D
D
1
1
7
I
D
E
_
D
D
5
8
I
D
E
_
D
D
1
0
5
I
D
E
_
D
D
6
6
I
D
E
_
D
D
9
D
-
G
N
D
3
I
D
E
_
D
D
7
4
I
D
E
_
D
D
8
H
D
D
F
M
_
P
W
M
C
L
K
_
P
6
6
D
-
G
N
D
M
o
t
h
e
r
P
W
B
D
-
G
N
D
5
V
N
1
2
V
D
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
H
D
D
F
M
_
L
D
6
5
V
L
3
6
42 13
5
5
V
L
3
9
I
D
E
_
D
A
S
P
_
N
4
0
D
-
G
N
D
9
5
n
C
L
R
_
P
I
C
9
4
n
R
E
Q
_
P
I
C
9
3
n
P
O
F
_
M
F
P
C
9
1
3
5
C
L
K
_
N
6
4
D
-
G
N
D
6
5
D
-
G
N
D
4
5
V
L
3
4
C
H
2
_
P
3
3
C
H
2
_
N
6
3
D
-
G
N
D
n
W
U
_
F
A
X
2
2
5
V
L
3
2
C
H
1
_
P
6
2
D
-
G
N
D
9
2
n
M
S
W
_
M
O
N
2
3
1
C
H
1
_
N
6
1
D
-
G
N
D
3
8
3
2
1
6
1
1
8
5
V
L
3
8
I
D
E
_
C
S
1
1
5
V
L
3
5
V
L
1
1
I
D
E
_
D
D
3
1
2
I
D
E
_
D
D
1
2
3
6
I
D
E
_
D
A
2
3
7
I
D
E
_
C
S
0
3
4
I
D
E
_
C
B
L
I
D
_
N
3
5
I
D
E
_
D
A
0
I
C
C
S
1
0
2
3
3
H
D
D
F
A
N
34
1
I
D
E
_
R
S
T
_
N
2
1
4
1
2
V
I
D
E
_
D
A
1
1
1
2
V
2
5
V
N
3
3
1
I
D
E
_
I
N
T
R
Q
123
2
9
2
5
2
1
1
9
1
3
1
4
1
5
ID
E
_
D
M
A
C
K
_
N
3
0
D
-
G
N
D
2
7
I
D
E
_
I
O
R
D
Y
_
N
2
8
D
-
G
N
D
I
D
E
_
D
I
O
R
_
N
2
6
D
-
G
N
D
2
3
I
D
E
_
D
I
O
W
_
N
2
4
D
-
G
N
D
I
D
E
_
D
M
A
R
Q
2
2
D
-
G
N
D
I
D
E
_
D
D
0
I
D
E
_
D
D
1
5
D
-
G
N
D
2
0
K
E
Y
1
7
1
8
I
D
E
_
D
D
2
I
D
E
_
D
D
1
3
I
D
E
_
D
D
1
I
D
E
_
D
D
1
4
I
D
E
_
D
D
3
1
2
I
D
E
_
D
D
1
2
9
I
D
E
_
D
D
4
1
0
I
D
E
_
D
D
1
1
I
D
E
_
D
D
6
I
D
E
_
D
D
9
I
D
E
_
D
D
5
8
I
D
E
_
D
D
1
0
I
D
E
_
R
S
T
_
N
D
-
G
N
D
I
D
E
_
D
D
7
I
D
E
_
D
D
8
5
V
L
R
S
V
R
S
V
1234567
1
1
2
V
2
C
P
U
F
M
_
P
W
M
3
D
-
G
N
D
4
C
P
U
F
M
_
L
D
T
X
D
_
P
I
C
7
5
V
L
3
7
C
H
3
_
N
6
7
D
-
G
N
D
9
7
R
X
D
_
P
I
C
6
8
D
-
G
N
D
9
8
9
6
P
W
M
9
P
I
C
V
P
P
O
N
3
9
E
C
L
K
_
L
S
U
_
N
6
9
R
S
V
9
9
n
C
N
C
T
_
F
A
N
C
H
3
_
P
1
0
n
A
N
T
I
_
I
N
S
T
4
0
E
C
L
K
_
L
S
U
_
P
7
0
R
S
V
1
0
0
n
R
E
S
_
P
I
C
1
1
S
C
A
N
D
A
T
A
3
+
4
1
H
S
Y
N
C
_
L
S
U
_
P
7
1
R
X
D
_
S
C
N
1
0
1
R
E
S
_
M
F
P
1
2
S
C
A
N
D
A
T
A
3
-
4
2
H
S
Y
N
C
_
L
S
U
_
N
7
2
n
C
T
S
_
S
C
N
1
0
2
P
W
M
2
1
3
S
C
A
N
C
L
K
O
U
T
+
4
3
V
S
Y
N
C
_
K
_
N
7
3
T
X
D
_
S
C
N
1
0
3
F
L
V
P
P
1
4
S
C
A
N
C
L
K
O
U
T
-
4
4
V
S
Y
N
C
_
K
_
P
7
4
n
R
T
S
_
S
C
N
1
0
4
n
R
E
Q
_
P
IC
_
IN
T
1
5
S
C
A
N
D
A
T
A
2
+
4
5
V
S
Y
N
C
_
C
_
P
7
5
n
R
E
S
_
S
C
N
1
0
5
n
W
U
_
F
A
X
1
1
6
S
C
A
N
D
A
T
A
2
-
4
6
V
S
Y
N
C
_
C
_
N
7
6
n
R
E
S
_
P
C
U
1
0
6
3
.
3
V
1
7
S
C
A
N
D
A
T
A
1
+
4
7
V
S
Y
N
C
_
M
_
N
7
7
R
X
D
_
P
C
U
1
0
7
3
.
3
V
1
8
S
C
A
N
D
A
T
A
1
-
4
8
V
S
Y
N
C
_
M
_
P
7
8
n
C
T
S
_
P
C
U
1
0
8
3
.
3
V
1
9
S
C
A
N
D
A
T
A
0
+
4
9
V
S
Y
N
C
_
Y
_
P
7
9
T
X
D
_
P
C
U
1
0
9
5
V
O
2
0
S
C
A
N
D
A
T
A
0
-
5
0
V
S
Y
N
C
_
Y
_
N
8
0
n
R
T
S
_
P
C
U
1
1
0
1
2
V
2
1
L
C
D
_
D
A
T
A
0
-
5
1
5
V
L
8
1
T
X
D
_
F
A
X
(
D
)
1
1
1
D
-
G
N
D
2
2
L
C
D
_
D
A
T
A
0
+
5
2
5
V
L
8
2
T
X
D
_
F
A
X
(
C
S
)
1
1
2
D
-
G
N
D
2
3
L
C
D
_
D
A
T
A
1
-
5
3
5
V
L
8
3
R
X
D
_
F
A
X
(
D
)
1
1
3
D
-
G
N
D
2
4
L
C
D
_
D
A
T
A
1
+
5
4
5
V
L
8
4
R
X
D
_
F
A
X
(
C
S
)
1
1
4
D
-
G
N
D
2
5
L
C
D
_
D
A
T
A
2
-
5
5
5
V
L
8
5
n
R
T
S
_
F
A
X
(
D
)
1
1
5
D
-
G
N
D
2
6
L
C
D
_
D
A
T
A
2
+
5
6
5
V
L
8
6
n
C
T
S
_
F
A
X
(
D
)
1
1
6
D
-
G
N
D
2
7
L
C
D
_
C
L
K
-
5
7
5
V
L
8
7
n
R
T
S
_
F
A
X
(
C
S
)
1
1
7
D
-
G
N
D
2
8
L
C
D
_
C
L
K
+
5
8
5
V
L
8
8
n
C
T
S
_
F
A
X
(
C
S
)
1
1
8
D
-
G
N
D
2
9
C
H
0
_
N
5
9
5
V
L
8
9
n
R
E
S
_
F
A
X
1
1
9
D
-
G
N
D
3
0
C
H
0
_
P
6
0
5
V
L
9
0
n
C
N
C
T
_
F
A
X
1
2
0
D
-
G
N
D
AE.MFP section 2/2 (31/31)
C
N
2
0
C
N
1
9
B
3
2
B
-
P
H
D
S
S
-
B
C
N
2
2
F
X
8
C
-
6
0
S
-
S
V
5
F
X
8
C
-
6
0
S
-
S
V
5
6
0
D
-
G
N
D
5 V _ I N
5 V _ I N
1
2
5
8
n
P
D
_
P
R
T
C
I
F
(
O
)
5
9
D
-
G
N
D
5
6
P
O
N
_
P
R
T
C
(
I
)
5
7
n
W
U
_
E
F
4
8
G
P
I
_
n
E
F
_
D
E
T
E
C
T
4
9
E
N
G
_
R
D
Y
(
O
,
O
C
)
4
6
E
F
_
C
L
K
_
I
N
4
7
D
-
G
N
D
4
4
S
A
_
V
ID
E
O
_
H
S
Y
N
C
_
O
4
5
D
-
G
N
D
3
6
V
I
D
E
O
_
D
A
T
_
M
5
3
7
D
-
G
N
D
3
4
V
I
D
E
O
_
D
A
T
_
M
3
3
5
V
I
D
E
O
_
D
A
T
_
M
4
3
2
V
I
D
E
O
_
D
A
T
_
M
1
3
3
V
I
D
E
O
_
D
A
T
_
M
2
3
0
D
-
G
N
D
3
1
V
I
D
E
O
_
D
A
T
_
M
O
2
8
V
I
D
E
O
_
D
A
T
_
C
4
2
9
V
I
D
E
O
_
D
A
T
_
C
5
2
6
V
I
D
E
O
_
D
A
T
_
C
2
2
7
V
I
D
E
O
_
D
A
T
_
C
3
2
4
V
I
D
E
O
_
D
A
T
_
C
O
2
5
V
I
D
E
O
_
D
A
T
_
C
1
2
2
V
I
D
E
O
_
D
A
T
_
K
5
2
3
D
-
G
N
D
1
4
D
-
G
N
D
1
5
S
A
_
V
ID
E
O
_
V
S
Y
N
C
_
Y
_
I
1
2
D
-
G
N
D
1
3
S
A
_
V
ID
E
O
_
V
S
Y
N
C
_
M
_
I
1
0
D
-
G
N
D
1
1
S
A
_
V
ID
E
O
_
V
S
Y
N
C
_
C
_
I
8
D
-
G
N
D
9
S
A
_
V
ID
E
O
_
V
S
Y
N
C
_
K
_
I
1
3
.
3
V
D
-
G
N
D
1
2
3
.
3
V
3
3
.
3
V
4
D
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
2
3
.
3
V
3
3
.
3
V
4
F
A
X
D
_
T
X
D
_
N
5
n
C
N
C
T
_
F
A
X
6
F
A
X
D
_
T
X
D
_
P
7
n
M
S
W
_
M
O
N
8
F
A
X
C
S
_
T
X
D
_
P
9
n
R
E
S
_
F
A
X
1
0
F
A
X
C
S
_
T
X
D
_
N
1
1
D
-
G
N
D
1
2
F
A
X
D
_
R
X
D
_
N
1
3
n
R
E
S
_
M
F
P
1
4
F
A
X
D
_
R
X
D
_
P
1
5
n
F
A
X
_
W
U
P
1
6
F
A
X
C
S
_
R
X
D
_
P
1
7
n
P
L
E
D
1
8
F
A
X
C
S
_
R
X
D
_
N
1
9
D
-
G
N
D
2
0
n
F
A
X
D
_
R
T
S
2
1
2
4
n
F
A
X
C
S
_
R
T
S
2
5
D
-
G
N
D
2
2
n
F
A
X
D
_
C
T
S
2
3
3
0
D
-
G
N
D
S
A
_
V
I
D
E
O
_
H
S
Y
N
C
_
I
1
2
V
2
8
5
V
O
2
6
n
F
A
X
C
S
_
C
T
S
2
7
F
L
V
P
P
67
D
-
G
N
D
3
1
2
0
2
1
M
F
P
C
P
W
B
3
.
3
V
2
9
3
.
3
V
D
-
G
N
D
3
2
5 V _ I N
D - G N D
D - G N D
D - G N D
D - G N D
P C I 1 _ E X T
n P C I 1 _ R S T
P C I 1 _ I N T A _ P U
E X T _ R E Q
E X T _ G N T
P C I 1 M A C _ A D 3 0
P C I 1 M A C _ A D 3 1
P C I 1 M A C _ A D 2 8
P C I 1 M A C _ A D 2 9
P C I 1 M A C _ A D 2 6
P C I 1 M A C _ A D 2 7
P C I 1 M A C _ A D 2 4
P C I 1 M A C _ A D 2 5
P C I 1 M A C _ A D 2 3
P C I 1 M A C _ C B E 3
P C I 1 M A C _ A D 2 1
P C I 1 M A C _ A D 2 2
P C I 1 M A C _ A D 1 9
P C I 1 M A C _ A D 2 0
P C I 1 M A C _ A D 1 7
P C I 1 M A C _ A D 1 8
P C I 1 M A C _ C B E 2
P C I 1 M A C _ A D 1 6
P C I 1 M A C _ A D 1 4
P C I 1 M A C _ A D 1 5
P C I 1 M A C _ A D 1 2
P C I 1 M A C _ A D 1 3
S
A
_
V
I
D
E
O
_
C
L
K
I
P C I 1 M A C _ A D 1 0
P C I 1 M A C _ A D 1 1
P C I 1 M A C _ A D 8
D
-
G
N
D
V
I
D
E
O
_
D
A
T
_
K
O
P
R
T
_
R
X
D
(
I
)
3
.
3
V
V
I
D
E
O
_
D
A
T
_
Y
1
V
I
D
E
O
_
D
A
T
_
Y
2
P C I 1 M A C _ A D 9
P C I 1 M A C _ A D 7
P C I 1 M A C _ C B E 1
P C I 1 M A C _ A D 5
5
P C I 1 M A C _ A D 6
P C I 1 M A C _ A D 3
P C I 1 M A C _ A D 4
V
I
D
E
O
_
D
A
T
_
K
1
V
I
D
E
O
_
D
A
T
_
K
2
V
I
D
E
O
_
D
A
T
_
K
3
V
I
D
E
O
_
D
A
T
_
K
4
1
8
1
9
P C I 1 M A C _ A D 1
P C I 1 M A C _ A D 2
P C I 1 M A C _ C B E 0
P C I 1 M A C _ A D 0
D - G N D
P C I 1 M A C _ I D S E L
P C I 1 M A C _ P A R
P C I 1 M A C _ F R A M E
P C I 1 M A C _ I R D Y
P C I 1 M A C _ T R D Y
P C I 1 M A C _ D V S E L
P C I _ S T O P
P C I 1 _ S E R R
P C I 1 _ P E R R
D - G N D
D - G N D
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1 0
1 1
1 2
1 3
1 4
1 5
1 6
1 7
1 8
1 9
2 0
2 1
2 2
2 3
2 4
2 5
2 6
2 7
2 8
2 9
3 0
3 1
3 2
3 3
3 4
3 5
3 6
3 7
3 8
3 9
4 0
4 1
4 2
4 3
4 4
4 5
4 6
4 7
4 8
4 9
5 0
5 1
5 2
1
6
1
7
5
2
5
3
5
4
5
5
P
R
T
_
T
X
D
(
O
)
P
R
T
_
C
T
S
(
I
)
5 3
5 4
5 5
5 6
5 7
5 8
5 9
6 0
F
A
X
U
N
(
O
P
T
I
O
N
)
E
X
T
E
N
D
P
C
I
E
F
I
(
O
P
T
I
O
N
)
5
0
5
1
P
R
T
C
_
R
D
Y
(
I
,
O
C
)
P
R
T
_
R
T
S
(
O
)
3
8
3
9
4
0
4
1
V
I
D
E
O
_
D
A
T
_
Y
O
V
I
D
E
O
_
D
A
T
_
Y
3
4
2
4
3
V
I
D
E
O
_
D
A
T
_
Y
4
V
I
D
E
O
_
D
A
T
_
Y
5
3. Signal list
Signal name Name [Type] Function/Operation
Connector level Connector
No.
Pin
No.
PWB
name
NOTE
"L" "H"
ADUGS ADU gate solenoid
[Electromagnetic solenoid]
Controls the ADU gate. ON OFF CN15 23 PCU
ADUH ADU1 motor upper
[Stepping motor]
Drives the right door section. - - CN7 6, 5, 4,
3
Driver Drives with
4-phase signals.
ADUL ADU2 motor lower
[Stepping motor]
Drives the right door section. - - CN7 12, 11,
10, 9
Driver Drives with
4-phase signals.
APPD1 ADU transport path
detector 1 [Photo interrupter]
Detects paper pass in the
upstream section of the
duplex (ADU).
Pass - CN15 37 PCU
APPD2 ADU transport path
detector 2 [Photo interrupter]
Detects paper pass in the
midstream section of the
duplex (ADU).
Pass - CN15 39 PCU
BLTCL Belt separation clutch
(Normal)
[Electromagnetic clutch]
Controls separation of the
primary transfer belt.
ON OFF CN13 27 PCU
BLTCL_R Belt separation clutch
(Reverse)
Controls separation of the
primary transfer belt.
ON OFF CN13 31 PCU
BTM Transfer drive motor
[Stepping motor]
Drives the transfer belt. - - CN4 7, 8, 9,
10
Driver Drives with
4-phase signals.
C3LUD Tray 3 upper limit detection
(Lift HP detection)
[Photo interrupter]
Detects the upper limit of the
tray 3.
- Upper limit CN3 15 PCU
C3LUM Paper tray lift-up motor
(Tray 3) [Brush motor]
Drives the paper tray lift. Stop Drive CN6 14 PCU
C3PED Tray 3 paper detector
[Photo interrupter]
Detects paper in the tray 3.
Controls ON/OFF of the paper
feed roller in the tray 3 paper
feed section.
Detects paper pass in the tray
3.
YES NO CN3 17 PCU
C3PFC Tray 3 paper feed clutch
ON OFF CN3 6 PCU
C3PFD Tray 3 paper entry detector
[Reflection type sensor]
Pass - CN3 13 PCU
C3PUS Paper pickup solenoid
(Tray 3)
Paper pickup solenoid
(Tray 3)
ON OFF CN3 19 PCU
C3PWD Tray 3 width detector
[Volume resistor]
Detects the paper width in the
tray 3.
- - CN3 21 PCU Analog
detection
detector [Photo interrupter]
Detects the remaining
quantity of paper in the tray 3.
Remained - CN5 12 PCU
C3SS1 Tray 3 rear edge detector 1
[Tact switch]
Detects insertion of the tray
by detecting either of rear
edges 1 - 4 of the tray 3.
Detects the paper size in the
tray 3.
- - CN5 20 PCU
Refer to A-(1)
Tray 3.
[Tact switch]
- - CN5 22 PCU
[Tact switch]
- - CN5 24 PCU
[Tact switch]
- - CN5 26 PCU
C4LUD Tray 4 upper limit detector
(Lift HP detection)
[Photo interrupter]
Detects the upper limit of tray
4.
- Upper limit CN3 27 PCU
C4LUM Paper tray lift-up motor
(Tray 4) [Brush motor]
Drives the paper tray lift. Stop Drive CN6 18 PCU
C4PED Tray 4 paper detector
[Photo interrupter]
Detects paper presence in
tray 4.
YES NO CN3 29 PCU
C4PFC Tray 4 paper feed clutch
feed roller in the tray 4 paper
feed section.
ON OFF CN3 8 PCU
C4PFD Tray 4 paper entry detector
Detects paper pass in the tray
4.
Pass - CN3 25 PCU
C4PUS Paper pickup solenoid
(Tray 4)
(Tray 4)
ON OFF CN3 33 PCU
quantity of paper in the tray 3.
Remained - CN5 16 PCU
[Tact switch]
Detects insertion of the tray
by detecting either of rear
edges 1 - 4 of the tray 4.
Detects the paper size in the
tray 4.
- - CN5 28 PCU
Refer to A-(2)
Tray 4.
[Tact switch]
- - CN5 30 PCU
[Tact switch]
- - CN5 32 PCU
[Tact switch]
- - CN5 34 PCU
CCHP Charger cleaner HP detector
[Photo interrupter]
Detects the charger cleaner
position (in the process unit).
- HOME CN9 13 PCU
CCM Charger cleaner motor
[Brush motor]
Cleans the main charger. - - CN13 33, 35 PCU Normal/reverse
rotation with
2-phase.
CCM_ROT CCM rotation detector
[Photo interrupter]
Detects the RPM of the
charger cleaner.
- - CN18 2 3 PCU RPM detection
CFM Charger cooling fan motor Exhausts ozone. Stop Drive CN3 24 PCU
CFM_LD CFM lock detector Detects the CFM lock. - Lock
detected
CN3 26 PCU
CLI Scanner lamp[Xenon lamp] Radiates lights onto a
document for the CCD to
scan the document images.
ON OFF CN130 3 SCU
CPUFM Controller cooling fan motor Cools the control PWB. Stop Drive CN13 1 Mother
CPUFM_PWM Controller cooling fan motor
control
Controls the controller cooling
fan motor RPM.
- - CN13 2 Mother
CPUFM_LD Controller cooling fan motor
lock
Detects the controller cooling
fan motor lock.
- Lock
detected
CN13 4 Mother
CPFM_D Paper feed motor
[DC brushless motor]
Drives the paper feed section. Drive Stop CN4 9 PCU
CPFM_CK Paper feed motor control Controls the paper feed motor
RPM.
- - CN4 11 PCU PWM drive
CPFM_LD Paper feed motor lock Detects the paper feed motor
lock.
- Lock
detected
CN4 13 PCU
CSDH Cassette dehumidifying
heater
Dehumidifies paper.
CV_CA Clear all signal [Coin vendor] Clean all Clear - CN17 6 PCU
CV_CLCOPY Copy enable signal (Color)
[Coin vendor]
Copy enable (Color) Copy
Enable
- CN17 7 PCU
CV_COPY Copy enable signal
(Monochrome) [Coin vendor]
Coy enable (Monochrome) Copy
Enable
- CN17 3 PCU
CV_COUNT Count-up signal
[Coin vendor]
Count-up Count UP - CN17 4 PCU
CV_DUPLEX Print count identification
signal (Duplex mode)
[Coin Vendor]
Identifies the print count.
(Duplex mode)
DUPLEX - CN17 11 PCU
CV_SIZE0 Paper size detection 0
[Coin vendor]
Paper size 0 - - CN17 13 PCU
[Coin vendor]
[Coin vendor]
[Coin vendor]
CV_STAPLE Staple mode signal
[Coin vendor]
Identifies presence of the
staple mode.
STAPLE - CN17 9 PCU
CV_START Copy start signal
[Coin vendor]
Copy start status Start - CN17 5 PCU
DHPD_C C phase detection
[Photo interrupter]
Detects C phase. - Reference CN9 12 PCU
DHPD_K K phase detection
[Photo interrupter]
Detects K phase. - Reference CN13 21 PCU
DHPD_M M phase detection
[Photo interrupter]
Detects M phase. - Reference CN9 14 PCU
DHPD_Y Y phase detection
[Photo interrupter]
Detects Y phase. - Reference CN9 16 PCU
DHS1 Scanner heater Keeps the heat in the scanner
unit.
DL_C Discharge lamp (C) [LED] Discharges the
photoconductor.
OFF ON CN7 3 PCU
DL_K Discharge lamp (K) Discharges the
photoconductor.
OFF ON CN9 9 PCU
DL_M Discharge lamp (M) [LED] Discharges the
photoconductor.
OFF ON CN7 19 PCU
DL_Y Discharge lamp (Y) [LED] Discharges the
photoconductor.
OFF ON CN7 8 PCU
DM_C Drum motor C
[Stepping motor]
Drives the cyan
photoconductor unit.
- - CN5 9, 10,
11, 12
Driver Drives with
4-phase signals.
DM_K Drum motor K
[Stepping motor]
Drives the black
- - CN5 3, 4, 5,
6
Driver Drives with
4-phase signals.
DM_M Drum motor M
[Stepping motor]
Drives the magenta
- - CN6 3, 4, 5,
6
Driver Drives with
4-phase signals.
DM_Y Drum motor Y
[Stepping motor]
Drives the yellow
- - CN6 9, 10,
11, 12
Driver Drives with
4-phase signals.
No.
Pin
No.
PWB
name
NOTE
"L" "H"
DSPF COPY
LUMP
DSPF Copy lamp
[Xenon lamp]
Radiates the lights onto a
document for the CCD to
scan the document images.
DSW_ADU ADU transport open/close
detection [Photo interrupter]
Detects open/close of the
duplex (ADU) cover.
Open Close CN2 7 RD I/F
DSW_D Right lower door open/close
sensor [Photo interrupter]
right lower door.
Open Close CN3 22 PCU
DSW-FL Front door lower open/close
switch [Micro switch]
front door lower.
DSW-FU Front door upper open/close
switch [Micro switch]
front door upper.
DSW-R Right door open/close switch
[Micro switch]
right door.
DVCM_D Developing drive motor CL
Drives the developing section
(CL).
Drive Stop CN9 8 PCU
DVCM_CK Developing drive motor CL
control
Controls the developing drive
motor CL RPM.
DVCM_LD Developing drive motor CL
lock
Detects the developing drive
motor CL lock.
- Lock
detected
CN9 10 PCU
DVKM_D Developing drive motor K
Drives the developing section
(K). / Drives the primary
transfer belt separation.
DVKM_CK Developing drive motor K
control
Controls the developing drive
motor K RPM.
DVKM_LD Developing drive motor K
lock
Detects the developing drive
motor K lock.
- Lock
detected
CN13 13 PCU
DVKM_GAIN Developing drive motor K
gain
Developing drive motor K
gain.
Low
speed
High speed CN13 15 PCU
DVKM_CW/
CCW
rotating direction
rotating direction
CW CCW CN13 17 PCU
FUEXD External variable sensor
[Photo interrupter]
Detects the position of the
separation mechanism of the
external heater of the fusing
section.
- Reference CN13 30 PCU
FEXM External variable motor
[Stepping motor]
Separates the external
heating roller of the fusing
unit.
- - CN14 3, 13,
15, 17,
19
PCU Drives with
4-phase signals.
FUFM_F Fusing cooling fan/ Toner
bottle cooling fan
Cools the fusing unit./ Cools
the toner bottle.
Stop Drive CN12 1 PCU
FUFM_F_LD Fusing cooling fan lock Detects the fusing cooling fan
lock.
- Lock
detected
CN12 3 PCU
FUFM_R Fusing duct fan Cools the fusing unit. Stop Drive CN13 2 PCU
FUFM_CNT Fusing duct fan control Controls the fusing duct fan
RPM.
FUFM_CNT2 Fusing cooling fan control Controls the fusing cooling
fan RPM.
- - CN13 10 PCU
FUFM_R_LD Fusing duct fan lock Detects the fusing duct fan
lock.
- Lock
detected
CN13 4 PCU
FUM_D Fusing motor
Drives the fusing unit. Stop Drive CN14 9 PCU
FUM_CK Fusing motor control signal Controls the fusing motor
RPM.
FUM_LD Fusing motor lock Detects the fusing motor lock. - Lock
detected
CN14 11 PCU
HDDFM HDD cooling fan motor Cools the HDD. Stop Drive CN17 1 Mother
HDDFM_PWM HDD cooling fan motor
control
Controls the HDD cooling fan
motor RPM.
- - CN17 2 Mother PWM drive
HDDFM_LD HDD cooling fan motor lock Detects the HDD cooling fan
motor lock.
- Lock
detected
CN17 4 Mother
HL_EX Heater lamp [Halogen lamp] Heats the external roller. OFF ON CN10 11 PCU
HL_LM Lower heater lamp
[Halogen lamp]
Heats the lower heat roller. OFF ON CN10 9 PCU
HL_UM Heater lamp upper main
[Halogen lamp]
Heats the upper heat roller
(main).
OFF ON CN10 5 PCU
HL_US Heater lamp upper sub
[Halogen lamp]
Heats the upper heat roller
(sub).
OFF ON CN10 7 PCU
HTCS_C Hopper remaining quantity
sensor C [Oscillation sensor]
quantity of toner in the toner
hopper.
Remaining
quantity
Large
Remaining
quantity
Small
CN10 17 PCU
HTCS_K Hopper remaining quantity
sensor K [Oscillation sensor]
hopper.
Remaining
quantity
Large
Remaining
quantity
Small
CN9 27 PCU
No.
Pin
No.
PWB
name
NOTE
"L" "H"
HTCS_M Hopper remaining quantity
sensor M [Oscillation sensor]
hopper.
Remaining
quantity
Large
Remaining
quantity
Small
CN10 16 PCU
HTCS_Y Hopper remaining quantity
sensor Y [Oscillation sensor]
hopper.
Remaining
quantity
Large
Remaining
quantity
Small
CN10 18 PCU
[Synchronous motor]
Transports toner. - - CN8 5, 7 Driver Drives with
2-phase signals.
HTM_K Hopper motor K
[Synchronous motor]
2-phase signals.
[Synchronous motor]
2-phase signals.
[Synchronous motor]
2-phase signals.
HUD_M/TH_M Temperature/humidity
sensor [Temperature/
Humidity sensor]
Detects the temperature and
the humidity.
- - CN15 30, 32 PCU Analog
detection
LCCM LCC Transport motor
[Stepping motor]
Drives the LCC transport
roller.
- - CN1 1, 2, 3,
4
Driver Drives with
4-phase signals.
feed roller in the LCC paper
feed section.
ON OFF CN14 24 PCU
LPPD LCC paper entry sensor
[Reflection sensor]
Detects paper entry from the
LCC.
Pass - CN3 11 PCU
LSS_BK LSU shutter solenoid BK
Opens and closes the LSU
(BK) shutter.
ON OFF CN8 38 PCU
LSS_CL LSU shutter solenoid CL
Opens and closes the LSU
(CL) shutter.
ON OFF CN8 40 PCU
LSUFM LSU cooling fan motor Cools the polygon motor. Stop Drive CN2 1 LSU
nFANRDY LSU cooling fan motor lock Detects the LSU cooling fan
motor lock.
- Lock
detected
CN2 2 LSU
MHPS Scanner home position
sensor [Photo interrupter]
Detects the scanner home
position.
- Home
position
CN134 1 SCU
MIM Scanner motor
[Stepping motor]
Scanner (reading) section - - CN137 1, 2, 3,
4
SCU
MPED Manual paper presence
Detects paper in the manual
paper feed tray.
YES NO CN3 7 RD I/F
MPFD Manual paper entry detection
[Photo interrupter]
Detects paper entry from the
manual paper feed tray.
Pass - CN15 24 PCU
MPFS Paper pickup solenoid
(Manual paper feed)
(manual paper feed)
Pickup - CN15 38 PCU
MPGS Manual paper feed gate
solenoid
Controls open/close of the
manual feed gate.
ON OFF CN15 36 PCU
MPLD1 Manual feed paper length
Detects the paper length of
the manual paper feed tray.
Detection - CN3 16 RD I/F
MPUC Manual paper feed clutch
feed roller in the manual
paper feed section.
ON OFF CN14 20 PCU
MPWS Manual paper feed tray
paper width detector
[Volume resistor]
Detects the width of paper in
detection
MTOP1 Manual paper feed tray pull-
out position detector 1
[Photo interrupter]
Detects the pull-out position
(storing position) of paper in
- Storing
position
CN3 25 RD I/F
MTOP2 Manual paper feed tray pull-
[Photo interrupter]
Detects the pull-out position
(storing position) of paper in
- Puling out
position
CN3 22 RD I/F
OCSW Original cover SW
[Photo interrupter]
Document size detection
trigger
Close Open CN136 3 SCU
OZFM1 Ozone fan motor 1 Exhausts ozone. Stop Drive CN 7 20 PCU
OZFM_CNT Ozone fan motor control 1 Controls the ozone fan motor
1 and 2 RPM.
- - CN7 22, 23 PCU PWM drive
OZFM_CNT2 Ozone fan motor control 2 Controls the ozone fan motor
3 RPM.
OZFM_LD1 Ozone fan motor 1 lock Detects the ozone fan motor 1
lock.
- Lock
detected
CN7 26 PCU
lock.
- Lock
detected
CN6 27 PCU
lock.
- Lock
detected
CN6 28 PCU
No.
Pin
No.
PWB
name
NOTE
"L" "H"
PCS_CL/
PCS_K
Process control sensor PWB
[Toner density sensor]
Detects the toner patch
density.
- - CN8 25, 26 PCU Analog
detection
PCSS Process control shutter
solenoid
Opens and closes the shutter
of the process control and the
register sensor.
PFM PS front transport motor
[Stepping motor]
Drives the transport roller. - - CN9 3, 4, 5,
6
Driver Drives with
4-phase signals.
PHTM_K1 Intermediate hopper motor 1
[Synchronous motor]
Transports toner. - - CN2 2, 3 DVK_
Driver
PHTM_K2 Intermediate hopper motor 2
[Synchronous motor]
Transports toner. - - CN2 4, 5 DVK_
Driver
PNC_B Personal counter signal B Outputs the count UP signal. Count UP - CN7 29 PCU
PNC_C Personal counter signal C Outputs the count UP signal. Count UP - CN7 30 PCU
PO_TMP Paper exit temperature
detection
[Temperature sensor]
Detects the temperature. - - CN15 12 PCU Analog
detection
POD1 Fusing rear detection
[Photo interrupter]
Detects paper from the fusing
section.
- Pass CN13 36 PCU
POD2 Paper exit detection
[Photo interrupter]
Detects paper exit. Pass - CN15 8 PCU
POD3 Right tray paper exit
Detects paper exit to the right
tray.
Pass - CN15 22 PCU
POFM Paper exit cooling fan motor
(F side/ Center)
Cools the fusing unit. Stop Drive CN15 1 PCU
POFM_CNT1 Paper exit cooling fan motor
(F side) control
Controls the paper exit
cooling fan motor (F side)
RPM.
POFM_CNT2 Paper exit cooling fan motor
(Center) control
Controls the paper exit
cooling fan motor (center)
RPM.
POFM_F_LD Paper exit cooling fan motor
(F side) lock
Detects the paper exit cooling
fan motor (F side) lock.
- Lock
detected
CN15 7 PCU
POFM_U_LD Paper exit cooling fan motor
(Center) lock
Detects the paper exit cooling
fan motor (center) lock.
- Lock
detected
CN15 9 PCU
POLY_START Polygon motor
Scans laser beams. Drive Stop CN8 3 LSU
POLY_CL Polygon motor control Controls the polygon motor
RPM.
- - CN8 5 LSU
POLY_LOCK Polygon motor lock Detects the polygon motor
lock.
- Lock
detected
CN8 4 LSU
BRAKE Polygon motor brake Polygon motor brake Break - CN8 6 LSU
POM Paper exit motor
[Stepping motor]
Drives the paper exit roller. - - CN4 1, 2, 3,
4
Driver Drives with
4-phase signals.
PPD1 Resist front detection (PPD1)
[Photo interrupter]
Detects paper in front of the
resist roller.
Pass - CN14 23 PCU
PPD2 Resist detection (PPD2)
Detects paper at the rear of
the resist roller.
Pass - CN14 25 PCU
PSFM1 Power cooling fan motor 1 Cools the power unit. Stop Drive CN6 29 PCU
PSFM2 Power cooling fan motor 2 Cools the power unit. Stop Drive CN6 30 PCU
PSFM1_LD Power cooling fan motor 1
lock
Detects the power cooling fan
motor 1 lock.
- Lock
detected
CN6 31 PCU
PSFM2_LD Power cooling fan motor 2
lock
Detects the power cooling fan
motor 2 lock.
- Lock
detected
CN6 32 PCU
PTCM PTC cleaner motor
[Brush motor]
Cleans the PTC. - - CN18 25, 27 PCU Normal/reverse
rotation with
2-phase.
PTCM_HP PTC unit inside sensor
[Leaf switch]
Detects the home position of
the PTC cleaner.
- HOME CN18 22 PCU
REG R Resist sensor PWB R
(R side).
- - CN8 PCU Analog
detection
REG_F Resist sensor PWB F
(F side).
detection
RRC PS clutch
Controls ON/OFF of the resist
roller.
ON OFF CN14 10 PCU
RRC2 PS clutch 2
Resist roller braking ON OFF CN14 29 PCU
RRM_D PC motor
Drives the transport roller. Drive Stop CN14 14 PCU
RRM_CK PS motor control Controls the PS motor RPM. - - CN14 12 PCU PWM drive
RRM_LD PS motor lock Detects the PS motor lock. - Lock
detected
CN14 16 PCU
SCOV DSPF upper door open/close
sensor [Transmission type]
upper door.
Open SCU
No.
Pin
No.
PWB
name
NOTE
"L" "H"
SLCOV DSPF lower door open/close
sensor [Micro switch]
lower door.
Open SCU
SLUM DSPF lift-up motor
[PM stepper motor]
Lifts up or moves down the
paper feed tray.
SCU
SOCD DSPF open/close sensor
[Transmission type]
DSPF unit.
Open SCU
SPED1 DSPF document upper limit
DSPF document.
When
paper is
detected
SCU
SPED2 DSPF document empty
Detects document in the
paper feed tray.
When
paper is
detected
SCU
SPFC DSPF paper feed clutch
feed section roller.
SCU
SPFFAN DSPF cooling fan motor
Cools the motor and the
clutch.
SCU
SPFM DSPF transport motor
[Hybrid stepper motor]
Drives the transport roller. SCU
SPLS1 DSPF document length
detection short sensor
[Transmission type]
Detects the length of
document in the paper feed
tray.
When
paper is
detected
SCU
SPLS2 DSPF document length
detection long sensor
[Transmission type]
Detects the length of
tray.
When
paper is
detected
SCU
SPOD DSPF paper exit sensor
[Transmission type]
Detects paper exit. When
paper is
detected
SCU
SPOM DSPF paper exit motor
[PM stepper motor]
Drives the paper exit roller. SCU
SPPD1 DSPF paper pass sensor 1
[Transmission type]
Detects paper pass. When
paper is
detected
SCU
[Transmission type]
paper is
detected
SCU
[Transmission type]
paper is
detected
SCU
[Transmission type]
paper is
detected
SCU
[Transmission type]
paper is
detected
SCU
SPRDMD DSPF document random
Detects the paper size in
random paper feed.
When
paper is
detected
SCU
SPUM DSPF paper feed motor
[Hybrid stepper motor]
Drives the paper feed section
roller and the transport roller.
SCU
SPWS DSPF document width
sensor [Volume resistor]
Detects the width of
tray.
SCU
SRRBC DSPF No. 2 resist roller
brake clutch
No. 2 resist roller braking SCU
SRRC DSPF No. 2 resist roller
clutch
Controls ON/OFF of No. 2
resist roller.
SCU
STLD DSPF paper feed tray lower
limit sensor
[Transmission type]
Detects the lower limit of the
paper feed tray.
Lower limit SCU
STRC DSPF transport roller clutch
Controls ON/OFF of the
transport roller 1.
SCU
STRRBC DSPF No. 1 resist roller
brake clutch
No. 1 resist roller braking SCU
STRRC DSPF No. 1 resist roller
clutch [Electromagnetic
clutch]
Controls ON/OFF of No. 1
resist roller.
SCU
STUD DSPF paper feed tray upper
limit sensor
[Transmission type]
paper feed tray.
Upper limit SCU
T1LUD Tandem tray 1 sensor
[Photo interrupter]
Detects lift-up of the tandem
tray 1.
Upper limit - CN5 23 PCU
No.
Pin
No.
PWB
name
NOTE
"L" "H"
T1PED Tandem tray 1 sensor
[Photo interrupter]
Detects paper in the tandem
tray 1.
Paper NO Paper YES CN5 25 PCU
T1LUM Paper tray lift-up motor
(Tandem tray 2)
[Brush motor]
Drives the paper tray lift. Stop UP CN6 17 PCU
T1PFC Tandem tray 1 paper feed
clutch
feed tray in the tandem tray 1
paper feed section.
ON OFF CN4 12 PCU
T1PPD1 Tandem tray 1 transport
sensor 1
Detects paper entry of
tandem tray 1.
Pass - CN5 21 PCU
T1PPD2 Tandem tray 1 transport
sensor 2
Detects the tandem tray 1
paper pass in the transport
roller.
Pass - CN5 17 PCU
T1PUS Paper pickup solenoid
(Tandem tray 1)
(Tandem tray 1)
ON OFF CN5 33 PCU
T1SPD Tandem tray 1 paper
remaining quantity detector
[Photo interrupter]
quantity of paper in the
tandem tray 1.
- Remaining
quantity
66% or
less
CN5 29 PCU
T2LUD Tandem tray 2 sensor
[Photo interrupter]
Detects the tandem tray 2 lift-
up.
Upper limit - CN5 13 PCU
T2PED Tandem tray 2 sensor
[Photo interrupter]
Detects paper in the tandem
tray 2.
Paper NO Paper YES CN5 15 PCU
T2LUM Paper tray lift-up motor
(Tandem tray 2)
[Brush motor]
Drives the paper feed tray lift. Stop UP CN6 13 PCU
T2PFC Tandem tray 2 paper feed
clutch
feed roller in the tandem tray
2 paper feed section.
ON OFF CN4 10 PCU
T2PPD Tandem tray 2 transport
detection
Detects paper pass from the
tandem tray 2.
Pass - CN3 9 PCU
T2PUS Paper pickup solenoid
(Tandem tray 2)
(Tandem tray 2)
ON OFF CN5 14 PCU
T2SPD Tandem tray 2 paper
quantity detector [Photo
interrupter]
quantity of paper in the
tandem tray 2.
- Remaining
quantity
66% or
less
CN5 27 PCU
TANCL Tandem tray transport clutch
transport roller in the tandem
tray section.
ON OFF CN4 8 PCU
TANDH Tandem tray dehumidifying
heater
Dehumidifies paper.
TANSET Tandem tray installation
Detects insertion and removal
of the tandem tray.
Pull our Insertion CN3 32 PCU
TBBOX Waste toner box sensor
[Photo interrupter]
Detects installation of the
waste toner box.
NO Install CN8 28 PCU
TBLTB Transfer belt separation
sensor BK [Photo interrupter]
Detects the transfer belt
separation BK.
- BK position CN15 4 PCU
TBLTC Transfer belt separation
sensor Cl [Photo interrupter]
Detects the transfer belt
separation CL.
CL
position
- CN9 18 PCU
TCS_C Toner density detection C
(ATC) [Permeable sensor]
Detects the toner density (C). - - CN7 7 PCU Analog
detection
TCS_K Toner density detection K
Detects the toner density (K). - - CN9 19 PCU Analog
detection
TCS_M Toner density detection M
Detects the toner density (M). - - CN7 23 PCU Analog
detection
TCS_Y Toner density detection Y
Detects the toner density (Y). - - CN7 12 PCU Analog
detection
TFD Main unit paper exit full
Detects the full state of the
face-down paper exit tray.
Full - CN15 4 PCU
TFD_R Right tray paper exit full
Detects the full state of the
right tray paper exit.
Full - CN2 1 RD I/F
TH_EX1 Contact thermistor EX1
(External 1)
Detects the temperature of
the heat roller.
detection
TH_EX2 Contact thermistor EX2
(External 2)
the heat roller.
detection
TH_LM Contact thermistor (Lower
main)
the heat roller.
detection
TH_M Manual feed temperature
detection
the manual feed tray and its
peripheral sections.
detection
No.
Pin
No.
PWB
name
NOTE
"L" "H"
TH_UM Contact thermistor UM
(Upper Main)
the heat roller.
detection
TH_US Contact thermistor US
(Upper Sub)
the heat roller.
detection
TH1 LSU thermistor 1
the LSU.
detection
TH1_AD1/AD2 Non-contact thermistor
(Upper Main)
the heat roller.
- - CN12 16/2 PCU Analog
detection
TH2 LSU thermistor 2
the LSU.
detection
THPS Secondary transfer
separation drive sensor
[Photo interrupter]
Detects separation of
secondary transfer.
- Contact CN18 8 PCU
TM_C Toner motor C
[Synchronous motor]
Transports toner from the
toner cartridge to the
developing unit.
- - CN10 27, 28 PCU Drives with
2-phase signals.
[Synchronous motor]
developing unit.
2-phase signals.
[Synchronous motor]
developing unit.
2-phase signals.
TM_M Toner motor M
[Synchronous motor]
developing unit.
2-phase signals.
TM_Y Toner motor Y
[Synchronous motor]
developing unit.
2-phase signals.
TNFD Waste toner full detection
[Photo interrupter]
Detects the full state of waste
toner.
- Full CN3 30 PCU
TRC1 Vertical transport clutch
upper
vertical transport roller.
ON OFF CN4 6 PCU
TRC2 Vertical transport clutch
lower
vertical transport roller.
ON OFF CN3 10 PCU
TURM Secondary transfer
separation drive motor
[Brush motor]
Performs separation in the
secondary transfer.
Stop Separation/
Contact
CN18 6 PCU
VFM_C Machine inside ventilation
fan motor (Center)
Exhausts air from the
machine.
VFM_C_LD Machine inside ventilation
fan motor (Center) lock
Detects the machine inside
ventilation fan motor (center)
lock.
- Lock
detected
CN18 29 PCU
VFM_R Machine inside ventilation
fan motor (Right)
Exhausts air from the
machine.
Stop Drive CN15 15 PCU
VFM_R_CNT Machine inside ventilation
fan motor (Right) control
Controls the machine inside
ventilation fan motor (right)
RPM.
VFM_R_LD Machine inside ventilation
fan motor (Right) lock
Detects the machine inside
ventilation fan motor (right)
lock.
- Lock
detected
CN15 20 PCU
VTOD Right transport unit open/
close sensor
[Photo interrupter]
right transport unit.
WEB_END Web end sensor
[Mechanical switch]
Detects the web end. END
Detection
- CN12 9 PCU
WEB_INL Web presence detection
[Mechanical switch]
Detects presence of the web. YES NO CN12 11 PCU
WEBM Fusing web cleaning motor
[Synchronous motor]
Drives the fusing web
cleaning paper.
- - CN8 10, 12 Driver Drives with
2-phase signals.
WH_SW Dehumidifying heater SW
[Seesaw switch]
power of the dehumidifying
heater.
WTM_D Waste toner drive motor
Stirs waste toner. Drive Stop CN3 18 PCU
WTM_CLK Waste toner drive motor
Controls the waste toner drive
motor RPM.
WTM_LD Waste toner drive motor lock Detects the waste toner drive
motor lock.
- Lock
detected
CN3 12 PCU
No.
Pin
No.
PWB
name
NOTE
"L" "H"
A. Combination of cassette paper size detection SW pattern and volume detection width
* SW numbers 1 4: When viewed from the front.
(1) Tray 3
a. AB series
b. Inch series
c. China series
(2) Tray 4
a. AB series
b. Inch series
c. China series
C3 Rear edge detection SW
Width detection
volume paper width
(mm)
SS1 SS2 SS3 SS4 MIN MAX
A3W H L H L 299 309
A3 H L L L 291 303
A4 L L H L 291 303
A4R L H L H 204 216
B4 H L L H 251 263
B5 L L H H 251 263
B5R L H H L 176 188
A5R L L H L 142.5 154.5
11 x 17 H L L L 273.4 285.4
8.5 x 14 H L L H 209.9 221.9
8.5 x 13 L L L H 209.9 221.9
8.5 x 11 L L H L 273.4 285.4
8.5 x 11R L H L L 209.9 221.9
Tray not-
installed
H H H H - -
Width detection
volume paper width
(mm)
A3W H L H L 299 309
A3 H L L L 291 303
A4 L L H L 291 303
A4R L H L H 204 216
B4 H L L H 251 263
B5 L L H H 251 263
11 x 17 H L L L 273.4 285.4
8.5 x 14 H L L H 209.9 221.9
8.5 x 13 L L L H 209.9 221.9
8.5 x 11 L L H L 273.4 285.4
8.5 x 11R L H L L 209.9 221.9
7.25 x 10.5R L H H L 178.1 190.1
5.5 x 8.5R L L H L 133.7 145.7
Tray not-
installed
H H H H - -
Width detection
volume paper width
(mm)
A3W H L H L 299 309
A3 H L L L 291 303
A4 L L H L 291 303
A4R L H L H 204 216
A5R L L H L 142.5 154.5
8.5 x 13 L L L H 209.9 221.9
8K H L L H 264 276
16K L L H H 264 276
L L H L 264 276
16KR L H H L 189 201
L H L L 189 201
Tray not-
installed
H H H H - -
SS1 SS2 SS3 SS4
A3W H L H L
A3 H L L L
A4 L L H L
A4R L H L H
B4 H L L H
B5 L L H H
B5R L H H L
8.5 x 13 L L L H
8.5 x 11R L H L L
Tray not-installed H H H H
SS1 SS2 SS3 SS4
A3W H L H L
A4R L H L H
B5 L L H H
11 x 17 H L L L
8.5 x 14 H L L H
8.5 x 13 L L L H
8.5 x 11 L L H L
8.5 x 11R L H L L
7.25 x 10.5R L H H L
Tray not-
installed
H H H H
SS1 SS2 SS3 SS4
A3W H L H L
A3 H L L L
A4R L H L H
8.5 x 13 L L L H
8K H L L H
16K L L H H
L L H L
16KR L H H L
L H L L
Tray not-
installed
H H H H
MX-7000N OTHERS 12 1
MX-7000N
Sv` Huuuu!

[12] OTHERS
1. System settings (Administrator)
A. Login
(1) When user authentication is not enabled
1) Press [Admin Password] key.
2) Press [Password] text box and enter the administrator pass-
word.
3) Press [OK] key.
(2) When user authentication is enabled
a. When user authentication is by login name and password
(and e-mail address)
1) Press [Admin Login] key.
2) Press [Password] key, and enter the administrator password.
3) Press [OK] key.
b. Login by user number
1) Press [Admin Login] key, and enter the administrator pass-
word.
B. System settings (Administrator) list
(1) User control
*: This cannot be set on the machine. Set this in "User Control" in
the Web pages.
(2) Energy save
(3) Operation settings
*1: This cannot be set on the machine. Set this in the system
settings in the Web pages.
*2: When the Internet fax expansion kit is installed.
*3: When the facsimile expansion kit is installed.
*4: When the application integration module is installed.
(4) Device control
Setting item Factory default setting
User Authentication Setting
User Authentication Disabled
Authentication Method Setting Authenticate a User by
Login Name and
Password
Device Account Mode Setting Disabled
Other Settings
Actions when the Limit of Pages for
Output Jobs
Job is Stopped when the
Limit of Pages is Reached
The Number of User Name Displayed
Setting on Operation Panel
12
A Warning when Login Fails Disabled
Disabling of Printing by Invalid User Disabled
Default Network Authentication Server
Setting
User Information Print

User List
Page Limit Group List
Authority Group List
Favorite Operation Group List *
Favorite Operation Group Registration *
Home Screen List *
User Count
Toner Save Mode
Print Disabled
Copy Disabled
Auto Power Shut-Off Enabled
Auto Power Shut-Off Timer 90 min.
Preheat Mode Setting 15 min.
Other Settings
Keys Touch Sound Middle
Key Touch Sound at Initial Point Disabled
Auto Clear Setting 60 sec.
Cancel Auto Clear Timer Disabled
Message Time Setting 6 sec.
Display Language Setting American English
Disabling of Job Priority Operation Disabled
Disabling of Bypass Printing Disabled
Key Operation Setting 0.0 sec.
Disable Auto Key Repeat Disabled
Disabling of Clock Adjustment Disabled
Disabling of Covers/Inserts Mode Disabled
Customize Key Setting *
1
Copy
Customize 1 File
Customize 2 Quick File
Customize 3
Scan
Customize 1 Address Review
Customize 2 File
Customize 3 Quick File
Internet Fax *
2
(Same as Scan)
Fax *
3
(Same as Scan)
USB Memory Scan
Customize 1
Customize 2
Customize 3
Data Entry *
4
(Same as Scan)
Home Screen Settings *
1
Display Pattern Setting Following the System

Settings
Other Settings
Original Feeding Mode All Disabled
Saddle Stitch Position Adjust *
1
0.0 mm
Auto Paper Selection Setting Plain Paper
Tandem Connection Setting
IP Address of Slave Machine 0.0.0.0
Port Number 50001
Disabling of Master Machine Mode Disabled
Disabling of Slave Machine Mode Disabled
Detect Standard in Auto Color Mode 3
Auto Switching of Finisher Trays Enabled
Registration Adjustment
Optimization of a Hard Disk
Clear All Job Log Data
Original Size Detector Setting
Original Detection Size Combination Inch-1
Cancel Detection at Document Glass Disabled
Disabling of Devices
Disabling of Document Feeder Disabled
Disabling of Duplex Disabled
Disabling of Large Capacity Cassette *
2
Disabled
Disabling of Tray Setting Disabled
Disabling of Finisher *
3
Disabled
Disabling of Inserter *
4
Disabled
Disabling of Offset Disabled
*1: When a saddle stitch finisher is installed.
*2: When a large capacity tray is installed.
*3: When a saddle stitch finisher or finisher is installed.
*4: When an inserter is installed.
*5: When a punch module is installed.
*6: When a color-related problem has occurred.
(5) Copy function settings
*: When a saddle stitch finisher is installed.
(6) Network settings
(7) Printer settings
(8) Image send settings
Disabling of Stapler *
3
Disabled
Disabling of Punch *
5
Disabled
Disabling of Color Mode *
6
Disabled
Fusing Control Settings 16 - 24 lbs. (60 - 90g/m
2
)
Initial Status Settings
Color Mode Full Color
Paper Tray Varies depending on the
machine configuration
Exposure Type Auto
Copy Ratio 100%
2-Sided Copy 1-Side to 1-Side
Output
Other Settings
Copy Exposure Adjustment
Color 5
Black & White 5
Rotation Copy Setting Enabled
Add or Change Extra Preset Ratios
Setting a Maximum Number of Copies 999
Initial Margin Shift Setting
Side 1 1/2"
Side 2 1/2"
Erase Width Adjustment
Edge Clearance Width 1/2"
Center Clearance Width 1/2"
Card Shot Settings
Original Size X: 3-3/8", Y: 2-1/8"
Fit to Page Disabled
Automatic Saddle Stitch * Enabled
Initial Tab Copy Setting 1/2"
Disabling Deletion of Job Programs Disabled
Disabling of Bypass-Tray in Duplex Copy Disabled
Disabling of Auto Paper Selection Disabled
Auto Selection Setting of Tray that is
Supplied the Paper
Disabled
B/W 600dpi x 600dpi Scanning Mode for
Document Feeder
Disabled
B/W Quick Scan from Document Glass Enabled
Color Adjustments
Initial Color Balance Setting Factory default state
Auto Color Calibration
IP Address Setting DHCP
Enable TCP/IP Enabled
Enable NetWare Enabled
Enable EtherTalk Enabled
Enable NetBEUI Enabled
Reset the NIC
Ping Command
Default Settings
Prohibit Notice Page Printing Enabled
Prohibit Test Page Printing Disabled
A4/Letter Size Auto Change Disabled
Print Density Level
Color 3
Black & White 3
Bypass Tray Settings
Enable Detected Paper Size in
Bypass Tray
Disabled
Enable Selected Paper Type in
Bypass Tray
Enabled
Exclude Bypass-Tray from Auto
Paper Select
Disabled
Job Spool Queuing Enabled
Interface Settings
Hexadecimal Dump Mode Disabled
I/O Timeout 60 sec.
Enable USB Port Enabled
USB Port Emulation Switching Auto
Enable Network Port Enabled
Network Port Emulation Switching Auto
Port Switching Method Switch at End of Job
Auto Color Calibration
Operation Settings
Other Settings
Default Display Settings Scan (fax when fax is
installed)
Hold settings for a while after
scanning has been completed
Disabled
Switch Automatically to Copy
Mode Screen
Enabled
Initial Resolution Setting
Apply the Resolution Set when
Stored
Disabled
Scan 200 X 200 dpi
Internet Fax *
1
200 X 100 dpi
Fax *
2
Standard
Default Exposure Settings Auto
Original Image Type Text
Moir Reduction Disabled
Must Input Next Address Key at
Broadcast Setting
Disabled
Scan Complete Sound Setting Middle
The Number of File Name/Subject/
Body Keys Displayed Setting
12
The Number of Direct Address Keys
Displayed Setting
10
Disable Switching of Display Order Disabled
Hold Setting for Received Data Print Disabled
Settings to Disable Registration
Disable Registering Destination from
Operation Panel
Disabled
Disable Registering Destination on
Web Page *
3
Disabled
Disable Registration Using Network
Scanner Tool *
3
Disabled
Settings to Disable Transmission
Disable [Resend] on Image Send
Mode
Disabled
Disable Selection From Address
Book
Disabled
Disable Direct Entry Disabled
Disable PC-Internet Fax
Transmission *
1
Disabled
Disable PC-Fax Transmission *
2
Disabled
Scan Settings
Other Settings
*3: When network connection is enabled.
(9) Document filing settings
(10) List print (Administrator)
*2: When the application integration module is installed.
Default Sender Set
Default Color Mode Settings
Black & White Mono 2
Color Mode Auto, Grayscale
Disable Change of B/W Setting in
Auto Mode
Disabled
Initial File Format Setting
File Type PDF
Black & White MMR (G4)
Color/Grayscale Medium
Specified Pages per File Disabled
Compression Mode at Broadcasting
Black & White MH (G3)
Color/Grayscale Medium
Maximum Size of E-mail Attachments
(E-mail)
Unlimited
Maximum Size of Data Attachments
(FTP/Desktop/Network Folder)
Unlimited
Bcc Setting
Enable Bcc Disabled
Display Bcc Address on the Job
Status Screen
Disabled
Disable Scan Function
USB Memory Scan Disabled
PC Scan Disabled
Pre-Setting Mail Signature Disabled
Default Address Setting Disabled
Internet Fax Settings *
1
Internet Fax Default Settings
Internet Fax Own Name and Address
Set
Auto Wake Up Print Enabled

Compression Setting MH (G3)
Speaker Volume Setting
Receive Signal Middle
Communication Error Signal Middle
Original Print on Transaction Report Print Out Error Report
Only
Transaction Report Print Select Setting
Single Sending Print Out Error Report
Only
Broadcasting Print Out All Report
Receiving No Printed Report
Activity Report Print Select Setting
Auto Print at Memory Full Disabled
Print Daily at Designated Time Disabled
Body Text Print Select Setting Disabled
Pre-Setting Mail Signature Disabled
Internet Fax Send Settings
Internet Fax Reception Report On/Off
Setting
Disabled
Internet Fax Reception Report
Request Timeout Setting
1 hour
Number of Resend Times at
Reception Error
2
Maximum Size of E-mail Attachments Unlimited
Rotation Sending Setting All Enabled
Printing Page Number at Receiver Enabled
Internet Fax Receive Settings
Auto Receive Reduce Setting Enabled
Duplex Reception Setting Disabled
Set Address for Data Forwarding
A3 RX Reduce Disabled
POP3 Communication Timeout
Setting
60 sec.
Reception Check Interval Setting 5 min.
Internet Fax Output Setting Varies depending on the
Anti Junk Mail/Domain Name Setting All Invalid
Other Settings
Default Mode Settings Sharing Mode
Sort Method Setting Date
Administrator Authority Setting
Delete File Disabled
Delete Folder Disabled
Delete All Quick Files
Delete
Delete quick files at power up
(protected files excluded)
Enabled
Default Color Mode Settings
Color Auto
Black & White Mono 2
Default Exposure Settings Auto
Original Image Type Text
Moir Reduction Disabled
Initial Resolution Settings 600 x 600 dpi
Color Data Compression Ratio Setting Medium
Default Output Tray Varies depending on the
Scan Complete Sound Setting Middle
Disable Stamp for Reprinting Disabled
Batch Print Settings
Selection of [All Users] is not allowed. Enabled
Selection of [User Unknown] is not
allowed.
Enabled
Document Output Options
Print
Copy Enabled
Print Enabled
Scan Send Disabled
Internet Fax Send (Incl. PC-Internet
Fax)
Disabled
Fax Send (Incl. PC-Fax) Disabled
Scan to HDD Enabled
Scan Send
Copy Disabled
Scan Send Enabled
Fax)
Disabled
Scan to HDD Enabled
Internet Fax Send *
1
Copy Disabled
Scan Send Disabled
Fax)
Enabled
Scan to HDD Disabled
Fax Send *
2
Copy Disabled
Scan Send Disabled
Fax)
Disabled
Fax Send (Incl. PC-Fax) Enabled
Scan to HDD Disabled
Administrator Settings List
Image Sending Activity Report
Data Receive/Forward List
Web Settings List *
1
Metadata Set List *

2
(11) Security settings
(12) Enable/disable settings
*1: When a large capacity tray is installed.
*2: When a saddle stitch finisher or finisher is installed.
*3: When an inserter is installed.
*4: When a punch module is installed.
*5: When a color-related problem has occurred.
(13) Change Administrator password
(14) Product key
* It may not be possible to use some settings, depending on the
peripheral devices installed.
(15) Initialize and/or store settings
2. Paper JAM code
A. JAM cause code list
(1) PCU JAM cause
Setting of SSL
HTTPS Disabled
IPP-SSL Disabled
FTPS Disabled
SMTP-SSL Disabled
POP3-SSL Disabled
Level of Encryption Disabled
User Control
Disabling of Printing by Invalid User Disabled
Operation Settings
Cancel Auto Clear Timer Disabled
Disabling of Job Priority Operation Disabled
Disabling of Bypass Printing Disabled
Disable Auto Key Repeat Disabled
Disabling of Clock Adjustment Disabled
Disabling of Covers/Inserts Mode Disabled
Device Control
Disabling of Document Feeder Disabled
Disabling of Duplex Disabled
Disabling of Large Capacity Cassette *
1
Disabled
Disabling of Tray Setting Disabled
Disabling of Finisher *
2
Disabled
Disabling of Inserter *
3
Disabled
Disabling of Offset Disabled
Disabling of Stapler *
2
Disabled
Disabling of Punch *
4
Disabled
Disabling of Color Mode *
5
Disabled
Disabling of Master Machine Mode Disabled
Disabling of Slave Machine Mode Disabled
Copy Function Settings
Disabling Deletion of Job Programs Disabled
Disabling of Bypass-Tray in Duplex Copy Disabled
Disabling of Auto Paper Selection Disabled
Printer Settings
Prohibit Notice Page Printing Enabled
Prohibit Test Page Printing Disabled
Exclude Bypass-Tray from Auto Paper
Select
Disabled
Image Send Settings
Other Disabling
Disable Switching of Display Order Disabled
Disable Scan Function
USB Memory Scan Disabled
PC Scan Disabled
Settings to Disable Registration
Disable Registering Destination from
Operation Panel
Disabled
Disable Registering Destination on
Web Page *
6
Disabled
Disable Registration Using Network
Scanner Tools *
6
Disabled
Settings to Disable Transmission
Disable [Resend] on Image Send
Mode
Disabled
Disable Selection from Address Book Disabled
Disable Direct Entry Disabled
Disable PC-Internet Fax
Transmission *
7
Disabled
Disable PC-Fax Transmission *
8
Disabled
Document Filing Settings
Disable Stamp for Reprinting Disabled
Batch Print Settings
Selection of [All Users] is not allowed. Enabled
Selection of [User Unknown] is not
allowed.
Enabled
Setting item Factory default account Factory default password
User users users
Administrator admin admin
PS3 Expansion Kit
Internet Fax Expansion Kit
E-mail Alert and Status
Application Integration Module
Serial Number
Restore Factory Defaults
Store Current Configuration
Restore Configuration
Code Code content
NO_JAM_CAUSE No JAM. Also used for JAM canceling.
NO_MATCH Parameter no matching
STOP_JAM Emergency stop request JAM (Controller request)
TRAY1 Tray 1 paper feed JAM (T1PPD1 not-reached JAM)
CPFD1_S1 CPFD1 remaining JAM (Cassette 1 feed paper)
CPFD1_N2 CPFD1 not-reached JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper)
CPFD1_N3 CPFD1 not-reached JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
CPFD1_S2 CPFD1 remaining JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
TRAY2 Tray 2 paper feed JAM (T2PPD not-reached JAM)
CPFD2_S2 CPFD2 remaining JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper)
PPD1_N1 PPD1 not-reached JAM (Cassette 1 feed paper)
PPD1_N3 PPD1 not-reached JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
PPD1_NM PPD1 not-reached JAM (Manual feed tray feed
paper)
PPD1_NL PPD1 not-reached JAM (Side LCC feed paper)
PPD1_NA PPD1 not-reached JAM (ADU refeed paper)
PPD1_S1 PPD1 remaining JAM (Cassette 1 feed paper)
PPD1_S3 PPD1 remaining JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
PPD1_SM PPD1 remaining JAM (Manual feed tray feed paper)
PPD1_SL PPD1 remaining JAM (Side LCC feed paper)
PPD1_SA PPD1 remaining JAM (ADU refeed paper)
(2) SCU JAM cause
PPD2_NM PPD2 not-reached JAM (Manual feed tray feed
paper)
PPD2_NL PPD2 not-reached JAM (Side LCC feed paper)
PPD2_NA PPD2 not-reached JAM (ADU refeed paper)
PPD2_SM PPD2 remaining JAM (Manual feed tray feed paper)
PPD2_SL PPD2 remaining JAM (Side LCC feed paper)
PPD2_SA PPD2 remaining JAM (ADU refeed paper)
PPD2_PRI PPD2 JAM (Image preparation wait timeout)
POD1_N POD1 not-reached JAM
POD1_S POD1 remaining JAM
APPD1_N APPD1 not-reached JAM
APPD1_S APPD1 remaining JAM
APPD2_N APPD2 not-reached JAM
APPD2_S APPD2 remaining JAM
TRAY3 Cassette 3 paper feed JAM (C3PFD not-reached
JAM)
DPFD1_N4 DPFD1 not-reached JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
DPFD1_S3 DPFD1 remaining JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
TRAY4 Cassette 4 paper feed JAM (C4PFD not-reached
JAM)
MFT Manual feed tray paper feed JAM (MPFD not-
reached)
MPFD_S MPFD remaining JAM (Manual feed tray feed paper)
LCC Side LCC paper feed JAM (LPFD1 not-reached)
LPFD_SL LPFD remaining JAM (Side LCC feed paper)
SIZE_ILG Size illegal JAM
MTR_ILG Motor driver trouble JAM
FJPID_N Interface transport inlet sensor not-reached JAM
FJPID_S Interface transport inlet sensor remaining JAM
FJPOD_N Interface transport outlet sensor not-reached JAM
FJPOD_S Interface transport outlet sensor remaining JAM
FED_N Finisher inlet sensor not-reached JAM
FED_S Finisher inlet sensor remaining JAM
FFPD_N Finisher saddle not-reached JAM
FFPD_S Finisher saddle remaining JAM
FEXIT_S Finisher bundle exit remaining JAM
FSTPL Staple JAM
FPNCH Punch JAM
FDOP Finisher door open
FIN_TIME Finisher paper clearance abnormality JAM
TREG_SEN_N Inserter tab sheet resist sensor not-reached JAM
TREG_SEN_S Inserter tab sheet resist sensor remaining JAM
THI_SEN_N Inserter tab sheet paper exit sensor not-reached JAM
THI_SEN_S Inserter tab sheet paper exit sensor remaining JAM
REG_SEN_N Inserter resist sensor not-reached JAM
REG_SEN_S Inserter resist sensor remaining JAM
TIM_SEN_N Inserter timing sensor not-reached JAM
TIM_SEN_S Inserter timing sensor remaining JAM
HI_SEN_NI Inserter paper exit sensor not-reached JAM (when
feeding with the inserter)
HI_SEN_NP Inserter paper exit sensor not-reached JAM (when
feeding with the main unit)
HI_SEN_S Inserter paper exit sensor remaining JAM
H_SEN_NF Inserter reverse sensor not-reached JAM (when
entering the reverse path)
H_SEN_NB Inserter reverse sensor not-reached JAM (when
discharging from the reverse path)
H_SEN_SF Inserter reverse sensor remaining JAM (when
entering the reverse path)
Code Code content
H_SEN_SB Inserter reverse sensor remaining JAM (when
discharging from the reverse path)
TBH_SEN_NF Inserter tab sheet reverse sensor not-reached JAM
(when entering the reverse path)
TBH_SEN_NB Inserter tab paper sheet reverse sensor not-reached
JAM (when discharging from the reverse path)
TBH_SEN_SF Inserter tab sheet reverse sensor not-reached JAM
(when entering the reverse path)
TBH_SEN_SB Inserter tab sheet reverse sensor not-reached JAM
(when discharging from the reverse path)
FHS_N Finisher paper exit not-reached JAM
FHS_S Finisher paper exit remaining JAM
FSFS_N Finisher saddle transport not-reached JAM
FSFS_S Finisher saddle transport remaining JAM
FSHS_N Finisher saddle paper exit not-reached JAM
FSHS_S Finisher saddle paper exit remaining JAM
INS_EJCT Inserter not-delivered JAM
T1PPD1_S1 T1PPD1 remaining JAM (Tray 1 paper feed paper)
T1PPD2_N1 T1PPD2 not-reached JAM (Tray 1 paper feed paper)
T1PPD2_S1 T1 PPD2 remaining JAM (Tray 1 paper feed paper)
T2PPD_N3 T2PPD not-reached JAM (Cassette 3 paper feed
paper)
T2PPD_N4 T2PPD not-reached JAM (Cassette 4 paper feed
paper)
T2PPD_S2 T2PPD2 remaining JAM (Tray 2 paper feed paper)
T2PPD_S3 T2PPD remaining JAM (Cassette 3 paper feed
paper)
T2PPD_S4 T2PPD remaining JAM (Cassette 4 paper feed
paper)
C3PFD_N4 C3PFD not-reached JAM (Cassette 4 paper feed
paper)
C3PFD_S3 C3PFD remaining JAM (Cassette 3 paper feed
paper)
paper)
paper)
LPPD_NL LPPD not-reached JAM (Side LCC paper feed paper)
LPPD_SL LPPD remaining JAM (Side LCC paper feed paper)
Code Code content
NO_JAM_CAUSE No JAM. Also used for JAM canceling.
NO_MATCH Parameter no matching
STOP_JAM Emergency stop JAM (Controller request)
SPPD1_N SPPD1 not-reached JAM
SPPD1_S SPPD1 remaining JAM
SPOD_N SPOD not-reached JAM
SPOD_S SPOD remaining JAM
SPRDMD_S SPRDMD remaining JAM
SPSD_SCN Exposure start notification wait timeout
SPPD2_NR SPPD2 reverse not-reached JAM
SPPD2_SR SPPD2 reverse remaining JAM
ICU_REQ ICU factor stop JAM
Code Code content
3. Hidden Page for Serviceman Only
A. Outline
The Hidden Page for Serviceman Only is the web page used for a
serviceman to backup user data and system setup data of the
machine.
The backup data can be imported to another machine, and a profile
and fonts can be added from the web page.
B. Operating procedure
1) Boot the browser.
2) Enter "***.***.*** (IP address)/service_login.html" to the
address column of the browser, and press ENTER key.
3) Enter the password, and log in.
Password: service
* The password can be changed optionally.
1) Select "Password Setting" on the menu bar.
2) Enter a new password.
3) Enter the new password again on the reconfirmation column.
4) Press [Submit] button.
2) 1) 3)
2)
3)
4)
1)
(1) Font/Form Download
a. Font Download
1) Select "Font/Form Download" on the menu bar.
2) Select "Resource Type" in the pull-down menu.
(Example: Font/Form of PCL/PostScript, macro, etc.)
3) Click [Browse] button and select font files.
4) Click [Download] button, and the selected fonts are down-
loaded to the HDD.
5) The list of the downloaded fonts and the use rate (%) of the
HDD are displayed.
b. Deleting downloaded fonts
1) Select fonts to be deleted from the lists of the downloaded
fonts, and click [Delete] button.
2) The confirmation message is displayed. Press [YES] key, and
the selected fonts are deleted.
3) To initialize all the resources, press the initial button.
4) The confirmation message is displayed. Press [YES] key, and
all the downloaded files are deleted.
(2) Output Profile Settings
1) Select "Output Profile Settings" on the menu bar.
2) Click [Browse] button and select an output profile.
3) Click [Add] button to add an output profile.
4) The added profile is displayed on the list, and the newly added
file becomes the default.
(If no file is added, the file registered when shipping serves as
the default.)
**Reference**
1. The difference between the output A profile and the output B
profile is:
Output profile A: Photo/CAD
Output profile B: Standard/Graphic
2. When the PS option is installed, the output C profile/Pantone
table setting can be made. (The setting procedure is the same.)
2)
3)
4)
5)
1)
2)
4)
3)
1)
(3) Device Cloning
a. Backup
1) Select "Device Cloning" on the menu bar.
2) Select an item to be backed up.
3) Press [Execute] button to execute backup.
(File name: *****.bin)
b. Import
1) Select "Device Cloning" on the menu bar.
2) Import from a file: Click [Browse] button and select a backup
file (file name: *****.bin).
3) Press [Execute] button to execute importing.
(4) Filing Data Backup
a. Backup
1) Select "Filing Data Backup" on the menu bar.
2) Select one of the radio buttons of the storage space for a file to
be exported.
(Main Folder/Quick File Folder/Custom Folder)
3) The index/number of display can be changed with the pull-
down menu to specify the retrieval condition.
4) Press [Execute] button to execute backup.
(File name: *****.bin)
b. Import
1) Select "Filing Data Backup" on the menu bar.
2) Import from a file: Click [Browse] button and select a backup
file (File name: *****.bin).
3) Press [Execute] button to execute importing.
2)
3)
4)
1)
(5) Jog Log
a. Save Job Log
1) Select "Job Log" on the menu bar.
2) Click [Save] button to execute backup of the job log.
(File name: *****.csv)
b. View Job Log
1) Select "Job Log" on the menu bar.
2) Click "View Job Log."
3) Click [Show] button, and the job log is displayed on the
browser.
2)
1)
3)
MX-7000N EXTERNAL OUTFIT A 1
MX-7000N
Sv` Huuuu!

[A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT
1. Disassembly and assembly
A. Cabinet
(1) Front cabinet
1) Open the front cabinet (A).
2) Remove the bands (B). Remove the hinges (C), and remove
the front cabinet (A).
Parts Page
a Front cabinet A- 1
b Rear cabinet A- 2
c Rear cabinet lower
d Upper cabinet rear cover A- 2
e Upper cabinet left A- 2
f Upper cabinet right
g Left cabinet A- 3
h Right lower door A- 3
i Right cabinet rear A- 4
j Right cabinet lower A- 4
k LCC lower cabinet
l Front cabinet upper A- 5
m Operation panel base plate
n Frame cover R A- 5
o Right lower door cover A- 6
p Upper cabinet rear A- 7
q Toner cover A- 8
r Paper exit tray
s Paper exit rear
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
i
j
p
q
r
n
k
s
m
l
h
o
Parts
a Front cabinet
a
A
C C
a
A
B
(2) Rear cabinet, Rear cabinet lower
1) Remove the screws (A), and remove the rear cabinet (B).
2) Loosen the screws (C). Remove the screws (D). Remove the
rear cabinet lower (E).
(3) Upper cabinet rear cover
1) Remove the screws (A), and remove the upper cabinet rear
cover (B).
* When installing, engage the pawls (C).
(4) Upper cabinet left, Upper cabinet right
1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover. (Refer to the (3) Upper
cabinet rear cover.)
2) Remove the DSPF unit. (Refer to the [C] DSPF SECTION)
3) Remove the table glass and the SPF glass. (Refer to the [D]
SCANNER SECTION.)
4) Remove the upper cabinet rear. (Refer to the (12) Upper cab-
inet rear.)
5) Release the lock (A), and open the right door unit (B).
Parts
b Rear cabinet
c Rear cabinet lower
b
c
A
B b
D
E c
C
Parts
d Upper cabinet rear cover
Parts
e Upper cabinet left
f Upper cabinet right
d
A
A
C
B d
e
f
A
B
6) Remove the screws (C), and remove the upper cabinet left (D)
and the upper cabinet right (E).
(5) Left cabinet
1) Pull out the tandem paper feed tray unit (A).
2) Open the front cabinet (B).
3) Pull out the handles (C). Remove the screw (D), and remove
the left cabinet (E).
* When installing, push the pawls (F) part from the obverse
side, and slide it to the rear side.
(6) Right lower door
2) Open the right lower door (C).
Parts
g Left cabinet
e
f E
D
C
C
g
A
B
Parts
h Right lower door
C
E
D
F
F
C
g
h
A
B
C
3) Remove the resin ring (D), and remove the right lower door
(C).
(7) Right cabinet rear
1) Remove the screw (A). Push down the right cabinet rear. Dis-
engage the pawl (C), and remove the right cabinet rear (B) so
that slide to the front side.
(8) Right cabinet lower, LCC lower cabinet
1) Remove the right lower door. (Refer to the "(6) Right lower
door".)
2) Remove the screws (A), and remove the LCC cover F (B) and
the LCC cover R (C).
* When installing, be careful to difference of the shapes.
3) Remove the screws (D). Remove the right cabinet lower (E).
* When installing, push the pawls (F) part from the obverse
side, and slide it to the lower side.
4) Remove the screws (G), and remove the LCC lower cabinet
(H).
Parts
i Right cabinet rear
D
C
h
i
A
B
B
C
l
Parts
j Right cabinet lower
k LCC lower cabinet
j
k
A
B
C
A
j
D
F
F
E
H
G
G
k
(9) Front cabinet upper, Operation panel base plate
2) Open the toner cover (C).
3) Remove the screws (D), and remove the front cabinet upper
(E).
4) Remove the screws (E). Disengage the pawls (F), and remove
the operation panel base plate (G).
* When installing, engage the pawls (F) to the holes (H) of the
scanner unit, fix with the screws (E) while supporting from
lower direction for engaging the pawls (F).
(10) Frame cover R
1) Remove the front cabinet upper. (Refer to the "(9) Front cabi-
net upper, operation panel base plate".)
Parts
l Front cabinet upper
m Operation panel base plate
m
l
A
B
C
E
D
D
l
Parts
n Frame cover R
m
F
E
E
E
E
G
F
H
E
E
E
n
A
3) Turn the blue screw (B) counterclockwise. Check that the lock
is released as shown in (C).
* Failure to complete this step may damage the primary trans-
fer belt.
4) Remove the screw (D). Hold the drum fixing knob (E) by the
hand to not rotate, remove the screw (F). Remove the drum
fixing knob (E).
5) Pull out the fixing cover (G).
6) Loosen the screws (H), and open the process section cover (I).
7) Remove the screw (J), and remove the knob (K). Remove the
screws (L), and remove the frame cover R (M).
(11) Right lower door cover
2) Open the right lower door (B).
B
C
E
D
F
G
H
H
I
Parts
o Right lower door cover
n M
J
K L
L
o
A
B
3) Pull out the tandem paper feed tray unit (C).
4) Pull out the paper feed tray (D).
5) Remove the screws (E), and remove the right lower door cover
(F).
(12) Upper cabinet rear
1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover. (Refer to the "(3) Upper
cabinet rear cover".)
2) Remove the DSPF unit. (Refer to the "[C] DSPF SECTION")
3) Remove the table glass and the SPF glass. (Refer to the "[D]
SCANNER SECTION".)
4) Disconnect the connector (A). Remove the screw (B), and
remove the earth wire (C).
5) Remove the screws (D), lift the upper cabinet rear (E), and dis-
connect the connector (F).
* When installing, engage the pawl (G) of the upper cabinet
rear to the upper cabinet right (H).
C
D
o
E
F
E
Parts
p Upper cabinet rear
p
B
A
C
D
D
D
F
E
p
G
H
(13) Toner cover, Paper exit tray, Paper exit tray rear
1) Remove the toner cartridge (BK/C/M/Y). (Refer to the "[K]
TONER SUPPLY SECTION".)
2) Remove the resin ring (A), and remove the toner cover (B).
3) Remove the paper arm (C), and remove the paper exit full
detection actuator (D).
4) Remove the screws (E), and remove the paper exit tray (F).
5) Remove the screws (G), and remove the paper exit tray rear
(H).
Parts
q Toner cover
r Paper exit tray
s Paper exit tray rear
q
r
s
A
B q
C
D
E
F
E
r
H
G
G
s
MX-7000N OPERATION PANEL B 1
MX-7000N
Sv` Huuuu!

[B] OPERATION PANEL
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram
Signal Name Function/Operation
OCSW Original cover SW Trigger for document size detection
PWRSW Operaton panel power supply switch Turns ON or OFF the main DC power supply
1 Touch panel Executes the various adjustments and the setting operation
2 LCD module Displays the various menu and information
3 LCD backlight Backlight for LCD
4 LVDS PWB Outputs the display signal for LCD
5 LCD INV PWB Drives the backlight that outputs the display signal for LCD
6 MFP OPE-JPWB Outputs the key operation signal
7 Document detection light emitting PWB Emits light for document size detection
8 Document detection light collector PWB Outputs the document size detection signal
PWRSW
1
2
OCSW
3
4
5
6
8
7
C
N
1
3
5
C
N
1
C
N
2
B
M
0
6
B
-
P
A
S
S
-
T
B
C
N
3
B
M
0
3
B
-
P
A
S
S
-
T
B
S
L
W
2
6
S
-
1
C
7
5
2
6
1
0
-
2
6
7
1
(
M
O
L
E
X
)
C
N
3
C
N
1
2
5
C
N
1
5
2
4
3
5
-
2
2
7
1
(
M
O
L
E
X
)
F
H
1
2
-
2
2
S
-
0
.5
S
H
(
5
5
)
(
H
IR
O
S
E
)
C
N
4
5
2
2
7
1
-
0
4
6
9
(
M
O
L
E
X
)
S
0
2
(
8
.0
)
B
-
B
H
S
C
N
2
C
N
2
C
N
1
S
L
W
3
0
S
-
1
C
7
5
2
2
7
1
-
3
0
7
9
(
M
O
L
E
X
)
S
0
2
(
8
.0
)
B
-
B
H
S
C
N
3
LVDS-CD
PWB
S
M
0
3
B
-
P
A
S
S
-
1
-
T
B
S
0
3
B
-
P
A
S
K
-
2
LCD INV
PWB CD
S
E
G
2
/F
0
/F
1
1
7
5
V
2
D
-
G
N
D
n
IN
F
O
_
L
E
D
P
O
W
_
L
E
D
W
U
_
L
E
D
D
-
G
N
D
S
E
G
1
2
5
2
2
2
3
2
4
1
8
1
9
2
6
5
V
3
D
-
G
N
D
P
D
P
D
S
E
L
0
P
D
S
E
L
1
P
D
S
E
L
2
/K
E
Y
IN
S
E
G
0
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
2
0
/B
Z
R
D
-
G
N
D
n
P
W
R
S
W
7891
0
3
0
D
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
1
3
.3
V
23456 2
6
2
7
2
8
Y
1
C
N
2
9
X
2
C
N
Y
2
C
N
X
1
C
N
2
4
2
5
2
2
2
3
2
0
2
1
2
4
V
_
E
X
T
T
P
1
4
4
9
A
V
C
C
/C
C
F
T
1
D
IS
P
C
N
_
C
H
K
_
IN
(L
C
D
)
V
C
O
N
T
S
C
_
T
E
M
P
P
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
1
8
1
9
L
C
D
_
D
A
T
0
-
1
3
D
-
G
N
D
1
4
3
.3
V
_
E
X
T
T
P
1
4
1
8
1
6
1
1
L
C
D
_
D
A
T
0
+
1
2
L
C
D
_
D
A
T
1
+
9
L
C
D
_
D
A
T
1
-
1
0
D
-
G
N
D
1
7
1
6
1
5
8
8
2
6
2
5
D
IS
P
o
u
t
7
3
.3
V
V
c
o
n
D
IS
P
V
D
D
V
D
D
L
C
D
_
D
A
T
2
-
7
D
-
G
N
D
5
L
C
D
_
D
A
T
2
+
6
L
P
X
C
K
V
S
S
321
2
2
2
1
2
0
1
9
P
D
5
D
-
G
N
D
6
21
P
D
S
E
L
0
1
P
D
S
E
L
1
2
P
D
S
E
L
2
3
5
V
N
4
1
C
N
_
C
H
K
_
O
U
T
2
L
C
D
_
C
L
K
-
4
D
-
G
N
D
L
C
D
_
C
L
K
+
3
6543 1
0
987 1
4
1
3
1
2
1
1
1
8
1
7
1
6
1
5
2
2
2
1
2
0
1
9
2
6
2
5
2
4
2
3
n
W
U
_
K
E
Y
/K
E
Y
IN
S
E
G
0
S
E
G
1
S
E
G
2
/F
0
/F
1
D
-
G
N
D
n
P
W
R
S
W
/F
2
P
D
P
D
S
E
L
0
P
D
S
E
L
1
P
D
S
E
L
2
D
-
G
N
D
3
.3
V
5
V
N
D
-
G
N
D
6
P
D
S
E
L
0
P
D
S
E
L
1
1234
P
D
S
E
L
2
5
V
N
1
7
1
4
1
3
1
2
1
1
3
.3
V
9
3
.3
V
1
5
D
0
V
C
O
N
T
3
P
D
D
-
G
N
D
V
S
S
Y
D
n
P
W
R
S
W
D
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
5
D
-
G
N
D
2
MFP OPE
PWB
n
P
W
R
S
W
D
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
1
1
3
.3
V
_
E
X
T
D
-
G
N
D
5
V
2
D
-
G
N
D
C
N
_
C
H
K
_
O
U
T
L
C
D
_
C
L
K
+
N
C
1 87653 4
S
C
_
T
E
M
P
D
-
G
N
D
1
8
1
7
1
6
1
5
1
4
1
3
1
2
1
1
2
Y
1
C
N
9
P
-
G
N
D
2
4
V
_
E
X
T
X
1
C
N
N
C
/C
C
F
T
1
C
N
_
C
H
K
_
IN
(L
C
D
)
X
2
C
N
Y
2
C
N
D
-
G
N
D
L
C
D
_
D
A
T
2
+
1
0
2
1
D
-
G
N
D
L
C
D
_
D
A
T
0
+
2
0
1
9
D
-
G
N
D
3
0
2
9
2
8
2
7
A
V
C
C
/F
2
/F
3
1
5
1
6
2
4
2
3
2
2
/B
Z
R
n
IN
F
O
_
L
E
D
/F
3
L
C
D
_
D
A
T
1
+
D
-
G
N
D
n
W
U
_
K
E
Y
L
C
D
_
C
L
K
-
D
-
G
N
D
L
C
D
_
D
A
T
2
-
P
O
W
_
L
E
D
W
U
_
L
E
D
SCN-CNT
PWB
1
V
S
S
LCD UN
D
IS
P
L
C
D
_
D
A
T
1
-
L
C
D
_
D
A
T
0
-
D
-
G
N
D
2
2
5
D
5
4
D
6
3
D
7
2
V
S
S
1
9
D
7
2
0
D
-
G
N
D
2
1
D
6
1
0
D
-
G
N
D
Y
D
2
L
P
36
D
5
1
8
D
3
1
6
D
4
1
7
1
1
D
-
G
N
D
1
2
C
P
4
D
-
G
N
D
1
5
D
1
1
4
1
3
D
2
5
V
C
O
N
T
2
Y
H
(
Y
2
)
3
/Y
L
(
Y
1
)
1
7
D
-
G
N
D
2
2
4
V
3
/X
L
(
X
2
)
4
/C
C
F
T
1
X
H
(
X
1
)
V
S
S
V
S
S
D
0
8
D
1
D
2
D
3
1
8
/C
C
F
T
D
-
G
N
D
1
096
D
4
V
D
D
2
4
V
321
2
/C
C
F
T
C
C
F
T
+
2
/C
C
F
T
1
C
C
F
T
+
1
C
N
1
3
6
B
6
P
-
P
H
-
K
-
S
/S
IZ
E
_
L
E
D
2
F
-
G
N
D
/S
IZ
E
_
L
E
D
1
D
-
G
N
D
2
4
V
E
X
T
123
O
C
S
W
5
V
E
X
T
6
/S
IZ
E
_
L
E
D
2
1
D
-
G
N
D
25
/S
IZ
E
_
L
E
D
1
O
C
S
W
3
5
V
E
X
T
4
2
4
V
E
X
T
2. Operational descriptions
The operation panel unit is composed of the MFP OPE-J PWB, the
LCD INV PWB/LVDS PWB, the LCD unit, and the operation keys,
and is used to operate the machine and to set and display the
machine status.
The MFP OPE-J PWB is connected to the document detection light
collector PWB for detecting the document size. It receives light
from the document detection light emitting PWB attached to the
rear frame, detecting the document size.
The power switch of the operation panel supplies the ON/OFF con-
trol signal of the DC power source.
A. Operation panel unit
(1) Operation panel unit
1) Remove the upper cabinet left, the front cabinet upper, and
the operation panel base plate. (Refer to the "[A] EXTERNAL
OUTFIT".)
2) Remove the screw (A) and the earth wire (B). Disconnect the
connector (C). Remove the screws (D).
3) Raise the operation panel unit (E) upright. Disconnect the flat
cables (F).
Unit Parts Page
1 Operation panel unit a LCD INV PWB B- 3
b LVDS PWB B- 3
c LCD module B- 3
d Touch panel B- 4
e POWER_SW_PWB B- 4
f MFP OPE-JPWB B- 4
1-a
1-c
1-f
1-d
1-e
1-b
1
Unit
1 Operation panel unit
1
A
D
D
D
D
C
B
E
F
1
a. LCD INV PWB, LVDS PWB
OUTFIT".)
2) Remove the operation panel unit. (Refer to the "(1) Operation
panel unit".)
3) Remove the screws (A), and disconnect the connectors (B)
and the flat cables (C), and remove the LCD INV PWB (D) and
LVDS PWB (E).
b. LCD module
OUTFIT".)
panel unit".)
3) Disconnect the connectors (A) and the flat cables (B). Remove
the screws (C), and remove the LCD holder (D).
4) Remove the LCD module (E). Remove the flat cable (F).
Unit Parts
1 Operation panel unit a LCD INV PWB
b LVDS PWB
1-a
1-b
A
A
E
C
A
D
B
B
1-a
1-b
Unit Parts
1 Operation panel unit c LCD module
1-c
C
D
C
C
B
A
E 1-c
F
c. Touch panel
OUTFIT".)
panel unit".)
3) Remove the screws (A), and remove the LCD unit (B).
4) Disconnect the flat cable (C), and remove the touch panel (D).
d. POWER_SW_PWB, MFP OPE-JPWB
OUTFIT".)
panel unit".)
3) Disconnect the connector (A), and remove the screws (B), and
the POWER_SW_PWB (C).
4) Disconnect the connector (D). Remove the screws (E) and the
mylar (F). Remove the MFP OPE-J PWB (G).
Unit Parts
1 Operation panel unit d Touch panel
1-d
A
A
B
A
D
C
1-d
Unit Parts
1 Operation panel unit e POWER_SW_PWB
f MFP OPE-J PWB
1-f
1-e
B
A
C 1-e
E
G
E
B
1-f
E
D
E
F
E
MX-7000N DSPF SECTION C 1
MX-7000N
Sv` Huuuu!

[C] DSPF SECTION
A. Paper feed section
P
H
N
R
-
0
3
-
H
P
H
N
R
-
0
3
-
H
+
B
U
0
3
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
1
0
93
P
H
N
R
-
0
3
-
H
+
B
U
0
3
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
1
2
1
3
1
7
C
N
4
S
G
N
D
2
1 2
4 1
1
P
H
N
R
-
0
3
-
H
1
S
G
N
D
1
8
1
4
1
5
1
6
B
1
8
B
-
P
H
D
S
S
-
B
D
_
S
O
C
V
D
_
S
P
E
D
1
56 781 2
S
G
N
D
S
G
N
D
S
G
N
D
D
_
S
T
U
D
7 89 1
0
B
1
0
B
-
P
H
D
S
S
-
B
S
G
N
D
D
_
S
P
P
D
1
B
9
B
-
P
H
-
K
-
S
D
_
S
P
L
S
2
S
G
N
D
1 23456
D
_
S
L
U
M
/
A
2
D
_
S
L
U
M
B
3
D
_
S
L
U
M
A
4
D
_
S
P
L
S
1
V
A
R
E
F
5
V
(
s
e
n
s
o
r
)
C
N
1
C
N
2
3 4
D
_
S
P
E
D
2
D
_
S
P
W
S
A
G
N
D
S
G
N
D
S
G
N
D
8
S
G
N
D
C
N
5
N
C
(
S
G
N
D
)
2
5
V
(
s
e
n
s
o
r
)
5
V
(
s
e
n
s
o
r
)
5
V
(
s
e
n
s
o
r
)
5
V
(
s
e
n
s
o
r
)
5
V
(
s
e
n
s
o
r
)
5
V
(
s
e
n
s
o
r
)
5
V
(
s
e
n
s
o
r
)
5
V
(
s
e
n
s
o
r
)
5
V
(
s
e
n
s
o
r
)
5
V
(
s
e
n
s
o
r
)
5
V
(
s
e
n
s
o
r
)
5
V
(
s
e
n
s
o
r
)
5
V
(
s
e
n
s
o
r
)
5
V
(
s
e
n
s
o
r
)
5
V
(
s
e
n
s
o
r
)
5
V
(
s
e
n
s
o
r
)
5
V
(
s
e
n
s
o
r
)
5
V
(
s
e
n
s
o
r
)
9 5456
D
_
S
P
U
M
B
D
_
S
P
U
M
/
B
C
N
7
B
6
B
-
P
H
-
K
-
S
D
_
S
P
U
M
/
A
D
_
S
P
U
M
A
2
4
V
_
S
P
U
M
2
4
V
_
S
P
U
M
123
D
_
S
P
L
S
1
D
_
S
P
L
S
2
123
S
G
N
D
D
_
R
A
N
D
O
M
2
4
V
_
T
R
/
D
_
S
P
F
C
S
G
N
D
D
_
S
T
L
D
1
1
7
5
4
8
7
-
3
S
G
N
D
123
1
7
5
4
8
7
-
3
V
A
R
E
F
D
_
S
P
W
S
A
G
N
D
V
A
R
E
F
D
_
S
P
W
S
A
G
N
D
123
321
2
4
V
_
T
R
5
D
_
S
L
U
M
/
B
1
D
_
S
P
O
D
67
D
_
S
T
L
D
S
G
N
D
1
7
5
4
8
7
-
3
P
H
R
-
3
2
4
V
_
T
R
/
D
_
S
P
F
C
1
S
G
N
D
23
D
_
S
P
E
D
2
S
G
N
D
D
_
S
P
P
D
1
B
5
B
-
P
H
-
K
-
S
12
1 2 3
3
P
H
R
-
3
1
S
G
N
D
DRIVER PWB
1
7
5
4
8
7
-
3
1
7
5
4
8
7
-
3
1
1
7
5
4
8
7
-
3
1
S
G
N
D
1
7
5
4
8
7
-
3
D
_
S
O
C
V
D
_
S
P
E
D
1
1 2
S
G
N
D
3 2
S
G
N
D
3
D
_
S
T
U
D
2 3
D
_
R
A
N
D
O
M
2 3
DSPF CNT PWB
2
1
2
2
2
3
2
4
2
5
2
6
B
2
6
B
-
P
H
D
S
S
-
B
P
G
N
D
2
0
2
1
2
2
2
3
1
6
1
7
1
8
1
9
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
567891
0
1
1
/
D
_
S
T
R
C
5
V
1
8
1
9
2
0
2
1
2
4
2
5
2
6
B
2
4
B
-
P
H
D
S
S
-
B
D
_
S
R
R
C C
N
3
1
0
A
G
N
D
D
_
S
P
F
C
D
_
S
E
L
O
U
T
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
1
8
1
9
D
_
S
P
W
S
1
1
4567891
0
D
_
S
P
O
M
_
D
I
R
D
_
S
E
L
O
U
T
9
V
A
R
E
F
1
1
8 123
C
N
6
0
9
D
_
S
E
L
B
D
_
S
E
L
C
7
D
_
S
E
L
C
B
2
6
B
-
P
H
D
S
S
-
B
2
0
D
_
S
P
F
M
_
V
R
E
F
D
_
S
P
O
M
_
V
R
E
F
1
D
_
S
P
O
M
_
V
R
E
F
2
V
A
R
E
F
D
_
S
P
W
S
D
_
S
R
R
B
C
D
_
S
P
F
M
_
M
1
D
_
S
P
F
M
_
M
2
D
_
S
P
F
M
_
C
L
K
D
_
S
P
F
M
_
D
IR
E
C
6
D
_
S
E
L
B
2
4
V
P
G
N
D
2
4
V
P
G
N
D
D
_
S
P
O
M
_
V
R
E
F
1
3
D
_
S
P
O
M
_
V
R
E
F
2
4
2
4
V
P
G
N
D
D
_
S
P
U
M
_
V
R
E
F
D
_
S
P
F
M
_
V
R
E
F
D
_
S
P
U
M
_
V
R
E
F
C
N
6
1
0
5
D
_
S
E
L
A
D
_
S
E
L
A
12
D
_
S
T
R
R
C
D
_
S
T
R
R
B
C
D
_
S
T
M
P
S
/
D
_
S
T
R
C
5
V
S
G
N
D
1234567891
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
1
8
1
9
2
0
2
1
2
2
2
3
2
4
D
_
S
P
U
M
_
I
N
/
B
D
_
S
L
U
M
A
D
_
S
P
O
M
_
E
N
A
D
_
S
P
O
M
_
S
T
E
P
D
_S
P
O
M
_
M
O
D
E
D
_
S
U
L
M
/
A
D
_
S
L
U
M
B
D
_
S
L
U
M
/
B
D
_
S
P
O
D
D
_
S
P
U
M
_
I
N
A
D
_
S
P
U
M
_
I
N
/
A
D
_
S
P
U
M
_
I
N
B
D
_
S
P
U
M
_
I
N
A
S
G
N
D
D
_
S
P
P
D
1
D
_
S
P
U
M
_
I
N
/
A
D
_
S
O
C
V
D
_
S
P
O
D
D
_
S
P
U
M
_
I
N
B
D
_
S
P
U
M
_
I
N
/
B
D
_
S
L
U
M
A
D
_
S
U
L
M
/
A
D
_
S
L
U
M
B
D
_
S
L
U
M
/
B
D
_
S
P
O
M
_
E
N
A
D
_
S
P
O
M
_
S
T
E
P
D
_
S
P
O
M
_
M
O
D
E
P
G
N
D
2
4
V
D
_
S
P
O
M
_
D
I
R
2
4
V
P
G
N
D
2
4
V
D
_
S
P
F
M
_
M
1
A
G
N
D
1
2
D
_
S
P
F
C
1
3
D
_
S
R
R
C
1
4
D
_
S
R
R
B
C
1
5B
2
4
B
-
P
H
D
S
S
-
B
5
V
S
G
N
D
D
_
S
P
F
F
A
N
S
G
N
D
D
_
S
P
P
D
1
D
_
R
A
N
D
O
M
D
_
S
O
C
V
1
6
D
_
S
P
F
M
_
M
2
2
4
S
G
N
D
1
7
D
_
S
P
F
M
_
C
L
K
2
2
2
3
D
_
S
P
F
M
_
D
IR
E
C
D
_
S
T
R
R
C
D
_
S
T
M
P
S
D
_
S
T
R
R
B
C
D
_
R
A
N
D
O
M
1234
C
N
6
S
G
N
D
D
_
S
P
F
F
A
N
5
V
SPUM
SLUM
SPED2
STUD
SPED1
SPFC
SCOV
SPPD1
2
SPRDMD
SPLS1
SPWS
SPLS2
STLD
3
4
1
SCOV DSPF upper door open/close sensor Detects open/close of upper door
SLUM DSPF lift-up motor Lifts up/down the paper feed tray
SPED1 DSPF document upper limit sensor Detects the upper limit of the document
SPED2 DSPF document empty sensor Detects the existing of document on the paper feed tray
SPFC DSPF paper feed clutch Controls the ON/OFF of the roller on the paper feed section
SPLS1
DSPF document length detection short
sensor
Detects length of the document on the paper feed tray
SPLS2
DSPF document length detection long
sensor
Detects length of the document on the paper feed tray
SPPD1 DSPF paper pass sensor 2 Detects pass of the paper
SPRDMD DSPF document random sensor Detects paper size at the random paper feed
SPUM DSPF paper feed motor Drives the roller and transport roller on the paper feed section
SPWS DSPF document width sensor Detects width of document on the paper feed tray
STLD DSPF paper feed tray lower limit sensor Detects the lower limit of the paper feed tray
STUD DSPF paper feed tray upper limit sensor Detects the upper limit of the paper feed tray
1 Pickup roller Picks up the document, and transports to the paper feed roller.
2 Paper feed roller Executes the document feed operation
3 Separation roller Separates a document to prevent double-feed
4 Torque limiter A certain level of resistance force is supplied to the rotation of the separation roller to prevent
double feed
B. Upper transport section
SPUM DSPF paper feed motor Drives the roller and transport roller on the paper feed section
STRC DSPF transport roller clutch Controls the ON/OFF of the transport roller 1
STRRBC DSPF No.1 resist roller brake clutch Brakes the No.1 resist roller
STRRC DSPF No.1 resist roller clutch Controls the ON/OFF of the No.1 resist roller
1 No.1 resist roller (Drive) Resists paper transporting
2 Transport roller (Drive) Transports the paper from the No.1 resist roller to the No.2 resist roller
D_SPPD2
1 SGND
2
3 5V
B3B-PH-K-S
2
4
V
_
T
R
D
_
S
P
F
M
B
D
_
S
P
F
M
/
B
/
D
_
S
T
M
P
2
4
V
_
T
R
/
D
_
S
T
R
R
B
C
2
4
V
_
T
R
/
D
_
S
T
R
R
C
1
S
G
N
D
D
_
S
T
S
E
T
2
4
V
_
T
R
P
G
N
D
F
A
N
_
L
O
C
K
N
C
(F
A
N
_
P
W
M
)
/
D
_
S
R
R
C
2
4
V
_
T
R
D
_
S
P
F
M
/
A
D
_
S
P
F
M
A
2
4
V
_
S
P
F
V
6 7 8
/
D
_
S
R
R
B
C
2
4
V
_
T
R
C
N
9
2
4
V
_
S
P
F
V
3 4 52
/
D
_
S
T
R
R
B
C
P
H
N
R
-
0
3
-
H
+
B
U
0
3
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
3 2 1
1 2 3
2
4
V
_
T
R
P
H
N
R
-
0
3
-
H
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
9
1
0
1
1
1
2
1
9
2
0
N
C
2
4
V
_
T
R
N
C
N
C
/
D
_
S
T
R
C
2
3
2
4
1
7
1
8
2
5
2
6
2
7
2
8
N
C
2
1
2
2
B
2
8
B
-
P
H
D
S
S
-
B
/
D
_
S
T
R
C
2
1
2
4
V
_
T
R
1
S
M
R
-
0
2
V
-
N
S
M
P
-
0
2
V
-
N
C
2
456
D
_
S
P
U
M
B
D
_
S
P
U
M
/
B
C
N
7
B
6
B
-
P
H
-
K
-
S
D
_
S
P
U
M
/
A
D
_
S
P
U
M
A
2
4
V
_
S
P
U
M
2
4
V
_
S
P
U
M
123
/
D
_
S
T
R
R
C
P
H
N
R
-
0
2
-
H
+
B
U
0
2
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
2 1
1 2
2
4
V
_
T
R
P
H
N
R
-
0
2
-
H
6
10
12
4
D_SOCD
GND
5V
5V
5V
5V'1.t)
D_SPPD4
D_SPPD5
GND
D_SPPD2
D_SPPD3
GND
5V
GND
D_ROCD
5
7
9
11
17
5V'1.t)
GND
GND
14
16
18
15
1
2
3
8
CN608
B18B-PH066-B
13
DRIVER PWB
2
1
2
2
2
3
2
4
2
5
2
6
B
2
6
B
-
P
H
D
S
S
-
B
P
G
N
D
2
0
2
1
2
2
2
3
1
6
1
7
1
8
1
9
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
56789
1
0
1
1
/
D
_
S
T
R
C
5
V
1
8
1
9
2
0
2
1
2
4
2
5
2
6
B
2
4
B
-
P
H
D
S
S
-
B
D
_
S
R
R
C
C
N
3
1
0
A
G
N
D
D
_
S
P
F
C
D
_
S
E
L
O
U
T
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
1
8
1
9
D
_
S
P
W
S
1
1
456789
1
0
D
_
S
P
O
M
_
D
I
R
D
_
S
E
L
O
U
T
9
V
A
R
E
F
1
1
8 123
C
N
6
0
9
DSPF CNT PWB
D
_
S
E
L
B
D
_
S
E
L
C
7
D
_
S
E
L
C
B
2
6
B
-
P
H
D
S
S
-
B
2
0
D
_
S
P
F
M
_
V
R
E
F
D
_
S
P
O
M
_
V
R
E
F
1
D
_
S
P
O
M
_
V
R
E
F
2
V
A
R
E
F
D
_
S
P
W
S
D
_
S
R
R
B
C
D
_
S
P
F
M
_
M
1
D
_
S
P
F
M
_
M
2
D
_
S
P
F
M
_
C
L
K
D
_
S
P
F
M
_
D
I
R
E
C
6
D
_
S
E
L
B
2
4
V
P
G
N
D
2
4
V
P
G
N
D
D
_
S
P
O
M
_
V
R
E
F
1
3
D
_
S
P
O
M
_
V
R
E
F
2
4
2
4
V
P
G
N
D
D
_
S
P
U
M
_
V
R
E
F
D
_
S
P
F
M
_
V
R
E
F
D
_
S
P
U
M
_
V
R
E
F
C
N
6
1
0
5
D
_
S
E
L
A
D
_
S
E
L
A
12
D
_
S
T
R
R
C
D
_
S
T
R
R
B
C
D
_
S
T
M
P
S
/
D
_
S
T
R
C
5
V
S
G
N
D
123456789
1
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
1
8
1
9
2
0
2
1
2
2
2
3
2
4
D
_
S
P
U
M
_
I
N
/
B
D
_
S
L
U
M
A
D
_
S
P
O
M
_
E
N
A
D
_
S
P
O
M
_
S
T
E
P
D
_
S
P
O
M
_
M
O
D
E
D
_
S
U
L
M
/
A
D
_
S
L
U
M
B
D
_
S
L
U
M
/
B
D
_
S
P
O
D
D
_
S
P
U
M
_
I
N
A
D
_
S
P
U
M
_
I
N
/
A
D
_
S
P
U
M
_
I
N
B
D
_
S
P
U
M
_
I
N
A
S
G
N
D
D
_
S
P
P
D
1
D
_
S
P
U
M
_
I
N
/
A
D
_
S
O
C
V
D
_
S
P
O
D
D
_
S
P
U
M
_
I
N
B
D
_
S
P
U
M
_
I
N
/
B
D
_
S
L
U
M
A
D
_
S
U
L
M
/
A
D
_
S
L
U
M
B
D
_
S
L
U
M
/
B
D
_
S
P
O
M
_
E
N
A
D
_
S
P
O
M
_
S
T
E
P
D
_
S
P
O
M
_
M
O
D
E
P
G
N
D
2
4
V
D
_
S
P
O
M
_
D
I
R
2
4
V
P
G
N
D
2
4
V
D
_
S
P
F
M
_
M
1
A
G
N
D
1
2
D
_
S
P
F
C
1
3
D
_
S
R
R
C
1
4
D
_
S
R
R
B
C
1
5B
2
4
B
-
P
H
D
S
S
-
B
5
V
S
G
N
D
D
_
S
P
F
F
A
N
S
G
N
D
D
_
S
P
P
D
1
D
_
R
A
N
D
O
M
D
_
S
O
C
V
1
6
D
_
S
P
F
M
_
M
2
2
4
S
G
N
D
1
7
D
_
S
P
F
M
_
C
L
K
2
2
2
3
D
_
S
P
F
M
_
D
I
R
E
C
D
_
S
T
R
R
C
D
_
S
T
M
P
S
D
_
S
T
R
R
B
C
D
_
R
A
N
D
O
M
1234
C
N
6
S
G
N
D
D
_
S
P
F
F
A
N
5
V
SPUM
STRRBC STRRC
STRC
SPPD2
1
2
C. Lower transport section
SPFM DSPF transport motor Drives the transport roller
SRRBC DSPF No.2 resist roller brake clutch Brakes the No.2 resist roller
SRRC DSPF No.2 resist roller clutch Controls the ON/OFF of the No.2 resist roller
1 No. 2 resist roller (Drive) Synchronizes the edge of document and the scanning start point
2 Platen roller Applies a pressure to paper to prevent variation of paper
3 Transport roller 2 (Drive) Transports the paper from the platen roller to the transport roller 3
4 Transport roller 3 (Drive) Transports the paper from the transport roller 3 to the paper exit roller
SPFM
SRRC
SPPD5
SPPD4
1 SPPD3
SRRBC
2
3
4
2
4
V
_
T
R
D
_
S
P
F
M
B
D
_
S
P
F
M
/
B
/
D
_
S
T
M
P
2
4
V
_
T
R
/
D
_
S
T
R
R
B
C
2
4
V
_
T
R
/
D
_
S
T
R
R
C
1
S
G
N
D
D
_
S
T
S
E
T
2
4
V
_
T
R
P
G
N
D
F
A
N
_
L
O
C
K
N
C
(
F
A
N
_
P
W
M
)
/
D
_
S
R
R
C
2
4
V
_
T
R
D
_
S
P
F
M
/
A
D
_
S
P
F
M
A
2
4
V
_
S
P
F
M
6 7 8
/
D
_
S
R
R
B
C
2
4
V
_
T
R
C
N
9
2
4
V
_
S
P
F
M
3 4 52
S
M
P
-
0
6
V
-
N
C /
D
_
S
R
R
B
C
S
M
R
-
0
6
V
-
N
2
4
V
_
T
R
P
H
N
R
-
0
3
-
H
+
B
U
0
3
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
3
1
2
2
1
3
P
H
N
R
-
0
3
-
H
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
9
1
0
1
1
1
2
1
9
2
0
N
C
2
4
V
_
T
R
N
C
N
C
/
D
_
S
T
R
C
2
3
2
4
1
7
1
8
2
5
2
6
2
7
2
8
N
C
2
1
2
2
B
2
8
B
-
P
H
D
S
S
-
B
1
D
_
S
P
F
M
B
1
2
D
_
S
P
F
M
/
B
2
3
D
_
S
P
F
M
/
A
3
4
D
_
S
P
F
M
A
4
5
2
4
V
_
S
P
F
M
5
6
2
4
V
_
S
P
F
M
6
P
H
N
R
-
0
3
-
H
+
B
U
0
3
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
P
H
N
R
-
0
3
-
H
2
1
2
2
2
3
2
4
2
5
2
6
B
2
6
B
-
P
H
D
S
S
-
B
P
G
N
D
2
0
2
1
2
2
2
3
1
6
1
7
1
8
1
9
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
5 6 7
6
1
0
1
2
8 9
1
0
1
1
/
D
_
S
T
R
C
5
V
1
8
1
9
2
0
2
1
2
4
2
5
2
6
B
2
4
B
-
P
H
D
S
S
-
B
D
_
S
R
R
C
C
N
3
1
0
A
G
N
D
D
_
S
P
F
C
D
_
S
E
L
O
U
T
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
1
8
1
9
D
_
S
P
W
S
1
1
4 5 6 7 8 9
1
0
D
_
S
P
O
M
_
D
I
R
D
_
S
E
L
O
U
T
9
V
A
R
E
F
1
1
4
8
S
G
N
D
1 2 3
C
N
6
0
9
DSPF CNT PWB
2
D
_
S
E
L
B
D
_
S
E
L
C
7
D
_
S
E
L
C
B
2
6
B
-
P
H
D
S
S
-
B
2
0
D
_
S
P
F
M
_
V
R
E
F
D
_
S
P
O
M
_
V
R
E
F
1
D
_
S
P
O
M
_
V
R
E
F
2
V
A
R
E
F
D
_
S
P
W
S
D
_
S
R
R
B
C
D
_
S
P
F
M
_
M
1
D
_
S
P
F
M
_
M
2
D
_
S
P
F
M
_
C
L
K
D
_
S
P
F
M
_
D
I
R
E
C
6
D
_
S
E
L
B
2
4
V
P
G
N
D
2
4
V
P
G
N
D
D
_
S
P
O
M
_
V
R
E
F
1
3
D
_
S
P
O
M
_
V
R
E
F
2
4
2
4
V
P
G
N
D
D
_
S
P
U
M
_
V
R
E
F
D
_
S
P
F
M
_
V
R
E
F
D
_
S
P
U
M
_
V
R
E
F
C
N
6
1
0
5
D
_
S
E
L
A
D
_
S
E
L
A
1 2
D
_
S
T
R
R
C
D
_
S
T
R
R
B
C
D
_
S
T
M
P
S
/
D
_
S
T
R
C
5
V
S
G
N
D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
1
8
1
9
2
0
2
1
2
2
2
3
2
4
5
V
3
3 2 1
D
_
S
P
U
M
_
I
N
/
B
D
_
S
L
U
M
A
D
_
S
P
O
M
_
E
N
A
D
_
S
P
O
M
_
S
T
E
P
D
_
S
P
O
M
_
M
O
D
E
2
D
_
S
P
P
D
5
D
_
S
U
L
M
/
A
D
_
S
L
U
M
B
D
_
S
L
U
M
/
B
D
_
S
P
O
D
D
_
S
P
U
M
_
I
N
A
D
_
S
P
U
M
_
I
N
/
A
D
_
S
P
U
M
_
I
N
B
D
_
S
P
U
M
_
I
N
A
S
G
N
D
D
_
S
P
P
D
1
D
_
S
P
U
M
_
I
N
/
A
D
_
S
O
C
V
D
_
S
P
O
D
D
_
S
P
U
M
_
I
N
B
D
_
S
P
U
M
_
I
N
/
B
D
_
S
L
U
M
A
D
_
S
U
L
M
/
A
D
_
S
L
U
M
B
D
_
S
L
U
M
/
B
D
_
S
P
O
M
_
E
N
A
D
_
S
P
O
M
_
S
T
E
P
D
_
S
P
O
M
_
M
O
D
E
P
G
N
D
2
4
V
D
_
S
P
O
M
_
D
I
R
2
4
V
P
G
N
D
2
4
V
D
_
S
P
F
M
_
M
1
A
G
N
D
1
2
D
_
S
P
F
C
1
3
D
_
S
R
R
C
1
4
D
_
S
R
R
B
C
1
5 B
2
4
B
-
P
H
D
S
S
-
B
5
V
S
G
N
D
D
_
S
P
F
F
A
N
S
G
N
D
D
_
S
P
P
D
1
D
_
R
A
N
D
O
M
D
_
S
O
C
V
1
6
D
_
S
P
F
M
_
M
2
2
4
S
G
N
D
1
7
D
_
S
P
F
M
_
C
L
K
2
2
2
3
D
_
S
P
F
M
_
D
I
R
E
C
D
_
S
T
R
R
C
D
_
S
T
M
P
S
D
_
S
T
R
R
B
C
D
_
S
P
P
D
3
S
G
N
D
D
_
S
O
C
D
G
N
D
5
V
5
V
5
V
5
V
'
1
.
t
)
D
_
S
P
P
D
4
D
_
S
P
P
D
5
G
N
D
D
_
S
P
P
D
2
D
_
S
P
P
D
3
G
N
D
5
V
DRIVER PWB
D
_
R
A
N
D
O
M
1 2 3 4
C
N
6
S
G
N
D
D
_
S
P
F
F
A
N
5
V
G
N
D
D
_
R
O
C
D
57 9
1
1
1
7
5
V
'
1
.
t
)
G
N
D
G
N
D
1
1
4
1
6
1
8
1
5
1 238
C
N
6
0
8
B
1
8
B
-
P
H
D
S
S
-
B
1
1
3
3
5
V
B
3
B
-
P
H
-
K
-
S
1
S
G
N
D
2 3
5
V
D
_
S
P
P
D
4
2 3
5
V
D
_
S
P
P
D
5
B
3
B
-
P
H
-
K
-
S
B
3
B
-
P
H
-
K
-
S
1
S
G
N
D
D. Optical section
DSPF COPY
LUMP
DSPF copy lamp Radiates the light to the document for CCD to read the image
1 Reflector Condenses the copy lamp light
2 Mirror Inducts the document image into the lens
3 Lens Shrinking the image (light) of the document, and project it on CCD.
4 DSPF CCD PWB Reads the document image (optical signal) and converts it into the electric signal
DSPF COPY LUMP
1
2
3
4
DSPF CNT
PWB
2
1
3
4
5
5597-05CPB7F
24V
24V
LAMP
PGND
1
2
5
4
3
CL-INV-R
PGND
PGND
PGND PGND
1
2
24V
PGND
CN130
24V
LAMP
E. Paper exit section
SPOD DSPF paper exit sensor Detects the paper that discharged
SPOM DSPF paper exit motor Drives the paper exit roller
1 Paper exit roller (Drive) Paper is discharged
SPOD
1
SPOM
10
B10B-PHDSS-B
SGND
D_SPOMA 4
B4B-PH-K-S
D_SPOMB
5V(1.t)
CN2
3
4 D_SPED2
SGND
3
8
SGND
NC( SGND )
2
5V(1.t)
5V(1.t)
9
5
D_SPOM/B
D_SPOM/A
1
2
D_STLD
1
D_SPOD
6
7
D_SPOD
SGND
5V(1.t)
1
2
CN8
175487-3
DRIVER
PWB
DSPF CNT PWB
3
21
22
23
24
25
26
B 26B-PHDSS-B
PGND
20
21
22
23
16
17
18
19
12
13
14
15
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
/D_STRC
5V
18
19
20
21
24
25
26
B24B-PHDSS-B
D_SRRC
CN3
10
AGND
D_SPFC
D_SELOUT
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
D_SPWS
11
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
D_SPO M_DIR
D_SELOUT
9 VAREF
11
8
1
2
3
CN609
D_SELB
D_SELC 7 D_SELC
B26B-PHDSS-B
20
D_SPFM_VREF
D_SPOM_VREF1
D_SPOM_VREF2
VAREF
D_SPWS
D_SRRBC
D_SPFM_M1
D_SPFM_M2
D_SPFM_CLK
D_SPFM_DIREC
6 D_SELB
24V
PGND
24V
PGND
D_SPOM_VREF1 3
D_SPOM_VREF2 4
24V
PGND
D_SPUM_VREF
D_SPFM_VREF
D_SPUM_VREF
CN610
5 D_SELA D_SELA
1
2
D_STRRC
D_STRRBC
D_STMPS
/D_STRC
5V
SGND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
D_SPU M_IN/B
D_SLUMA
D_SPO M_ENA
D_SPO M_STEP
D_SPO M_MODE
D_SULM/A
D_SLUMB
D_SLUM/B
D_SPOD
D_SPU M_INA
D_SPU M_IN/A
D_SPU M_INB
D_SPU M_INA
SGND
D_SPPD1
D_SPU M_IN/A
D_SOCV
D_SPOD
D_SPU M_INB
D_SPU M_IN/B
D_SLUMA
D_SULM/A
D_SLUMB
D_SLUM/B
D_SPO M_ENA
D_SPO M_ STEP
D_SPO M_ MODE
PGND
24V
D_SPO M_ DIR
24V
PGND
24V
D_SPFM_M1
AGND
12 D_SPFC
13 D_SRRC
14 D_SRRBC
15
B24B-PHDSS-B
5V
SGND
D_SPFFAN
SGND
D_SPPD1
D_RANDOM
D_SOCV
16 D_SPFM_M2
24 SGND
17 D_SPFM_CLK
22
23
D_SPFM_DIREC
D_STRRC
D_STMPS
D_STRRBC
D_RANDOM
1
2
3
4
CN6
SGND
D_SPFFAN
5V
A. Document size detection
Size detection on the document tray
The document width is detected by the DSPF document width sensor (SPWS), and the document length is detected by the DSPF document
length sensors (SPLS1, SPLS2). The document size is judged from the document width and the document length as shown in the table below.
When, however, documents of different sizes are mixed and set on the document tray, the largest size is detected.
B. Timing chart
To increase the document replacement speed, pre-feed of the second and the later documents is performed for documents of A4/Letter or
smaller sizes. Therefore, a clutch is provided for each transport roller to perform individual control. An electromagnetic brake is provided for
each transport roller in order to reduce loads to the motor in comparison with a mechanical brake.
Document size
Document length sensor
SPLS1 SPLS2
AB series A5 OFF OFF
B5 OFF OFF
11" 8.5" OFF OFF
A4 OFF OFF
B5R ON OFF
A4R ON OFF
8.5" 13" ON ON
B4 ON ON
A3 ON ON
11" 17" ON ON
Inch series 8.5" 5.5" OFF OFF
11" 8.5" OFF OFF
A4 OFF OFF
11" 8.5"R ON OFF
8.5" 13" ON ON
8.5" 14" ON ON
A3 ON ON
11" 17" ON ON
SPWS
SPLS1
SPLS2
ON simultaneously with print start of each motor
OFF at 500ms after SPCD of the last paper
SPFC
DSPF paper feed clutch
SPFC
DSPF paper feed clutch
SPUM
DSPF paper feed motor
SPFM
Timer from ON
Timer from ON
DSPF transport motor
SPFFAN
DSPF cooling fan motor
SPPD4
STRC
DSPF transport roller clutch
SRRC
DSPF No.2 resist roller clutch
SPOD
DSPF paper exit sensor
SPOM
DSPF paper exit motor
OC scanner scanning
Built-in scanner scanning
DSPF paper pass sensor 4
SPPD5
DSPF No.2 resist roller brake clutch
SRRBC
STRRBC
SPRDMD
SPPD1
SPPD2
SPPD3
DSPF paper pass sensor
DSPF random sensor 1
DSPFNo.1 resist roller brake clutch
DSPF No.1 resist roller cluch
STRRC
39.3mm
37.6mm
12.3mm 11.8mm
Reduces the speed simultaneously with SPOD OFF,
reduces the speed up to 1855PPS in 15.7mm.
Scanning start at 39.3mm (125ms) from
SPPD5 ON (SIM adjustment)
Scanning start at 37.6mm (120ms) from
SPPD4 ON (SIM adjustment)
ON simultaneously with SPPD3 ON
OFF at 10ms before SRRC ON
ON at 12.3mm - 10ms (29ms) after SPPD3 ON
(SIM adjustment)
OFF at 11.8mm (38ms) after SPPD3 OFF
ON simultaneously with SPPD2_ON
OFF at 69.4ms after SPPD2_OFF
(Common to each paper size)
Transport speed 314mm/s Letter single-surface transport
Copy key ON
A. Exterior section
(1) DSPF unit
1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover. (Refer to the "[A]
EXTERNAL OUTFIT".)
2) Remove the screw (A), and remove the earth wire (B). Discon-
nect the connector (C), and remove the snap band (D).
Remove the screw (E). Disengage the pawl (F), and pass the
cover (G) under the harness (H), and remove it.
3) Loosen the screws (I), and lower the angle adjustment plate
(J).
4) Open the DSPF unit (K) to put it straight up, and remove the
screws (L).
Section Page
A Exterior section C- 8
B Paper feed section C-11
C Upper transport section C-17
D Lower transport section C-19
E Optical section C-25
F Paper exit section C-31
G Drive section C-32
H Others C-35
Unit Parts Page
1 DSPF unit a Front cabinet C- 9
b Rear cabinet C- 9
c Paper feed cover C-10
d Upper door C-10
Unit
1 DSPF unit
1
1-a
1-d
1-c
1-b
1
A
D
C
B
G
E
E
F
H
I
I
J
K
L
L
5) Slide the DSPF unit (K) to the rear side, and fit the step screw
(M) with the key hole (N) of the hinge, and lift it up to remove.
a. Front cabinet
1) Open the upper door (A), and remove the screw (B).
2) Disengage the pawls (C, D, E, F), and remove the front cabinet
(G).
b. Rear cabinet
1) Open the upper door (A).
Unit Parts
1 DSPF unit a Front cabinet
K
M
N
1
1-a
A
B
Unit Parts
1 DSPF unit b Rear cabinet
C
D
E
F
G 1-a
1-b
A
2) Remove the screws (B). Disengage the pawls (C, D), and
remove the rear cabinet (E).
c. Paper feed cover
1) Open the upper door (A).
2) Remove the screw (B), and remove the paper feed cover (C).
d. Upper door
1) Remove the front cabinet. (Refer to the "a. Front cabinet".)
2) Remove the spring (A). Disengage the pawl (B), and remove
the pressure release axis holder (C). Remove the screw (D),
and remove the pressure release link lever (E).
Unit Parts
1 DSPF unit c Paper feed cover
B
B
B
C
D
E 1-b
1-c
A
Unit Parts
1 DSPF unit d Upper door
B
C 1-c
1-d
A
B
C
D
E
3) Remove the resin E-ring (F), and remove the upper door (G).
B. Paper feed section
(1) Paper feed tray unit
1) Remove the front cabinet and the rear cabinet. (Refer to the
"A. Exterior section".)
2) Disconnect the connector (A). Remove the screws (B), and
remove the paper feed tray unit (C).
a. DSPF document length detection short sensor, DSPF
document length detection long sensor
2) Remove the paper feed tray unit. (Refer to the "(1) Paper feed
tray unit".)
Unit Parts

Page
1 Paper feed
tray unit
a
DSPF document length
detection short sensor
C-11
b
DSPF document length
detection long sensor
c
DSPF document width
sensor
C-12
2 Paper feed
unit
a Pickup roller C-13
b Paper feed roller
c
DSPF paper feed tray upper
limit sensor
C-14
d
DSPF document upper limit
sensor
e
DSPF upper door open/
close sensor
f DSPF paper pass sensor 1

g
DSPF document random
sensor
h DSPF paper feed clutch

Parts
Mainte
nance
Page
a Separation roller C-15
b Torque limiter C-15
c DSPF paper feed tray lower limit sensor
C-16
d DSPF document empty sensor
G
F
1-d
d
b
2-b
2-a 1-a
1-c
1-b
c 1
2
a
2-
g
2-f 2-d
2-c 2-h
2-e
Unit
1 Paper feed tray unit
Unit Parts
1 Paper feed tray unit a DSPF document length detection
short sensor
b DSPF document length detection
long sensor
1
A
B
B
B
C 1
1-a
1-b
3) Remove the screws (A), and remove the paper feed tray lower
(B).
4) Disconnect the connectors (C), and remove the DSPF docu-
ment length detection short sensor (D) and the DSPF docu-
ment length detection long sensor (E).
b. DSPF document width sensor
tray unit".)
3) Remove the screws (A), and remove the paper feed tray lower
(B). Disconnect the connector (C).
4) Remove the screw (D), and remove the rotation tray shaft (E).
Remove the paper feed rotation tray (F).
5) Disconnect the connector (G). Disengage the pawl (H), and
remove the DSPF document width sensor (I).
Unit Parts
1 Paper feed tray unit c DSPF document width sensor
B
A
A
D
E
C
C
1-a
1-b
1-c
C
A
A
B
D
E
F
G
H
I
(2) Paper feed unit
1) Remove the front cabinet, the rear cabinet, and the paper feed
cover. (Refer to the "A. Exterior section".)
2) Disconnect the connector (A). Open the wire saddle (B).
Remove the snap band (C).
3) Remove the screws (D), and remove the paper feed unit (E).
a. Pickup roller, paper feed roller
1) Remove the paper feed cover. (Refer to the "A. Exterior sec-
tion".)
2) Disengage the pawl (A), and remove the paper feed PG upper
cover (B).
3) Disengage the pawl (C), and remove the pickup roller holder
(D). Remove the pickup roller (E) from the pickup roller holder
(D).
Unit
2 Paper feed unit
2
A
B
C
D
D
E 2
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
2 Paper feed unit a Pickup roller
b Paper feed roller
2-a 2-b
B
A
E
D
C
2-a
4) Remove the paper feed roller (F).
b. DSPF paper feed tray upper limit sensor, DSPF document
upper limit sensor, DSPF upper door open/close sensor,
DSPF paper pass sensor 1, DSPF document random
sensor
1) Remove the front cabinet and the rear cabinet and the paper
feed cover. (Refer to the "A. Exterior section".)
2) Remove the paper feed unit. (Refer to the "(2) Paper feed
unit".)
remove the paper feed PG upper supporting plate (C).
4) Disconnect the connectors (D), and remove the DSPF paper
feed tray upper limit sensor (E), the DSPF document upper
limit sensor (F), the DSPF upper door open/close sensor (G),
the DSPF paper pass sensor 1 (H), and the DSPF document
random sensor (I).
c. DSPF paper feed clutch
1) Remove the front cabinet and the rear cabinet and the paper
feed cover. (Refer to the "A. Exterior section".)
unit".)
cover (B).
Unit Parts
2 Paper feed unit c DSPF paper feed tray upper limit
sensor
d DSPF document upper limit sensor
e DSPF upper door open/close sensor
g DSPF document random sensor
F 2-b
2-e
2-f
2-
g
2-d
2-c
B
B
B
A
C
Unit Parts
2 Paper feed unit h DSPF paper feed clutch
D
D
D
E
F
G
H
I
2-e
2-d
2-f
2-c
2-
g
2-h
B
A
4) Disconnect the connector (C). Remove the screws (D), and
remove the paper feed PG upper supporting plate (E).
5) Remove the E-ring (F) and the bearing (G). Lift the paper feed
roller shaft (H) diagonally, and remove the DSPF paper feed
clutch (I).
* When installing, check to insure that the clutch rotation stop-
per is engaged with the plate.
(3) Separation rolloer
1) Remove the paper feed cover. (Refer to the "A. Exterior sec-
tion".)
cover (B).
3) Remove the screw (C), and remove the paper feed PG lower
cover (D).
4) Disengage the pawl (E), and remove the reverse pressure
release lever (F). Remove the separation roller (G).
Parts
Mainte
nance
a Separation roller
D
D
D
C
E
F
I
G
H
2-h
a
B
A
C
D
E
F
G a
(4) Torque limiter
unit".)
3) Remove the DSPF No.1 resist roller brake clutch, and remove
the DSPF No.1 resist roller clutch. (Refer to the "C. Upper
transport section")
4) Remove the drive unit. (Refer to the "G. Drive section.")
5) Remove the resin E-ring (A), and remove the No.1 resist roller
(idle) (B).
6) Remove the screws (C). Lift the paper feed rotation tray (D),
and remove the paper feed PG lower (E).
7) Remove the screws (F), and remove the separation roller sup-
porting plate (G) and the bearing (H). Remove the roller shaft
(I), and remove the torque limiter (J).
(5) DSPF paper feed tray lower limit sensor, DSPF
document empty sensor
tray unit".)
3) Disconnect the connectors (A), and remove the DSPF paper
feed tray lower limit sensor (B) and the DSPF document empty
sensor (C).
Parts
Mainte
nance
b Torque limiter
b
B
A
C
C
C
D
E
Parts
c DSPF paper feed tray lower limit sensor
d DSPF document empty sensor
I
H
G
F
J b
d
c
A
A
B
C d
c
C. Upper transport section
(1) DSPF No.1 resist roller brake clutch, DSPF No.1
resist roller clutch
1) Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to the "A. Exterior section".)
2) Disconnect the connectors (A). Remove the resin E-ring (B),
and remove the DSPF No.1 resist roller brake clutch (C) and
the DSPF No.1 resist roller clutch (D).
* When installing, check to insure that the clutch rotation stopper is
engaged with the plate.
(2) DSPF transport roller clutch
2) Disconnect the connector (A), and remove the snap band (B).
Remove the resin E-ring (C), and remove the DSPF transport
roller clutch (D).
Parts
Mainte
nance
Page
a DSPF No.1 resist roller brake clutch C-17
b DSPF No.1 resist roller clutch
c DSPF transport roller clutch C-17
d No.1 resist roller (Drive) C-18
e DSPF paper pass sensor 2 C-18
f Transport roller 1 (Drive)
Parts
a DSPF No.1 resist roller brake clutch
b DSPF No.1 resist roller clutch
c
a
e
f
b
d
a
b
Parts
c DSPF transport roller clutch
A
B
C
D
a
b
c
A
B
C
D c
(3) No.1 resist roller (Drive)
2) Remove the paper feed unit. (Refer to the "B. Paper feed sec-
tion".)
the DSPF No.1 resist roller clutch. (Refer to the "(1) DSPF
No.1 resist roller brake clutch, DSPF No.1 resist roller clutch".)
(idle) (B).
5) Remove the screws (C), lift the paper feed rotation tray (D),
6) Remove the resin E-ring (F) and the bearing (G), and remove
the No.1 resist roller (drive) (H).
7) Remove the E-ring (I) and the bearing (J) from the No.1 resist
roller (drive) (H).
(4) DSPF paper pass sensor 2, Transport roller 1
(drive)
Parts
Mainte
nance
d No.1 resist roller (Drive)
d
B
A
C
C
C
D
E
Parts
Mainte
nance
e DSPF paper pass sensor 2
f Transport roller 1 (Drive)
F
G
H
H
I
J
d
e
f
2) Remove the screws (A), and remove the transport PG upper
(B).
3) Disconnect the connector (C), and remove the DSPF paper
pass sensor 2 (D).
4) Remove the DSPF transport roller clutch. (Refer to the "(2)
DSPF transport roller clutch".)
5) Remove the E-ring (E), the washer (F), the spring (G), the col-
lar (H), the polyslider (I), and the bearing (J). Remove the belt
(K), the pulley (L), and the bearing (M), and remove the trans-
port roller 1 (drive) (N).
6) Remove the E-ring (O) and the bearing (P) from the transport
roller 1 (drive) (N).
D. Lower transport section
(1) Platen roller, No.1 scanning plate
A
A
B
C
D e
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
P
N
O
f
Parts
Mainte
nance
Page
a Platen roller C-19
b No. 1 scanning plate
c DSPF No.2 resist roller brake clutch C-20
d DSPF No.2 resist roller clutch
e DSPF paper pass sensor 3 C-20
g No.2 resist roller (Drive)
h DSPF paper pass sensor 5 C-22
i Transport roller 2 (Drive)
j Transport roller 3 (Drive) C-24
Parts
Mainte
nance
a Platen roller
b No. 1 scanning plate
b
i
j
a
h
c
d
e f g
b
a
1) Open the DSPF unit (A).
2) Clean the platen rollers (B) and the No.1 scanning plate (C).
(2) DSPF No.2 resist roller brake clutch, DSPF No.2
resist roller clutch
2) Disconnect the connectors (A). Remove the resin E-ring (B)
and remove the DSPF No.2 resist roller brake clutch (C) and
the DSPF No.2 resist roller clutch (D).
(3) DSPF paper pass sensor 3, DSPF paper pass
sensor 4, No.2 resist roller (Drive)
1) Remove the front cabinet and the rear cabinet and the upper
door. (Refer to the "A. Exterior section".)
(B).
Parts
c DSPF No.2 resist roller brake clutch
d DSPF No.2 resist roller clutch
A
C
B
B
b
a
a
c
d
Parts
Mainte
nance
e DSPF paper pass sensor 3
g No.2 resist roller (Drive)
C
D
A
B
d
c
e f g
A
A
B
3) Loosen the screws (C), and lower the angle adjustment plate
(D). Open the DSPF unit (E).
4) Remove the screw (F), and remove the left rear lower cabinet
(G).
5) Remove the resin E-ring (H), and remove the PS knob (I).
6) Remove the screws (J), and remove the PS outer PG (K).
7) Remove the screws (L), and remove the PS front PG (M).
8) Remove the screw (N), and disconnect the connector (O), and
remove the DSPF paper pass sensor 3 (P).
9) Remove the screws (Q), and remove the lift-up PG (R).
10) Remove the screw (S), and remove the spring (T). Remove
the belt (U), and disengage the pawls (V), and remove the
platen roller (W).
E
C
C
D
F
G
H
I
J
J
K
L
L
M
P
N
O
e
Q
Q
R
U
S T
V
V
W
11) Disconnect the connector (X) and remove the screw (Y).
Remove the DSPF paper pass sensor 4 (Z).
12) Remove the DSPF No.2 resist roller brake clutch and the
DSPF No.2 resist roller clutch. (Refer to the "(2) DSPF No.2
resist roller brake clutch, DSPF No.2 resist roller clutch".)
13) Remove the DSPF cooling fan motor. (Refer to the "G. Drive
section".)
14) Remove the E-ring (a), the washer (b), the spring (c), the collar
(d), the polyslider (e), the bearing (f), and the bering (g).
15) Loosen the screw (h). Loosen the belt (i) tension. Tighten the
screw (h). Slide the No.2 resist roller (drive) (j). Remove the
pulley (k), the E-ring (l), the bearing (m), and the bearing (n).
Remove the No.2 resist roller (drive) (j).
(4) DSPF paper pass sensor 5, Transport roller 2
(Drive)
2) Remove the OC mat. (Refer to the "H. Others.)
3) Loosen the screw (A), and lower the angle adjustment plate
(B). Open the DSPF unit (C).
4) Remove the screws (D), and remove the lift-up PG (E).
Z
X
Y
f
c
a b
f
g
d
e
j
h
i
m
m
n
k
l
g
Parts
Mainte
nance
h DSPF paper pass sensor 5
i Transport roller 2 (Drive)
i
h
C
A
A
B
D
D
E
5) Remove the screw (F), and remove the intersecting point plate
(G). Remove the lower door (H).
6) Remove the screws (I). Remove the transport PG lower (J).
Disconnect the connector (K).
7) Disconnect the connector (L), and remove the DSPF paper
pass sensor 5 (M).
8) Remove the DSPF No.1 resist roller brake clutch and remove
transport section".)
9) Remove the drive unit. (Refer to the "G. Drive section".)
10) Disconnect the connectors (N). Remove the screws (O), and
remove the control PWB unit (P).
11) Loosen the screw (Q), and loosen the belt (R) tension. Tighten
the screw (Q). Remove the belt (R). Remove the E-ring (S)
and the pulley (T).
12) Remove the E-ring (U). Slide the bearing (V). Remove the
transport roller 2 (drive) (W). Remove the bearing (X), the resin
E-ring (Y), and the spring pin (Z) from the transport roller 2
(drive) (W).
H
F
G
K
I
J
I
I
L
M h
P
N
N
N
N
O
O
S
T
Q
R
W
U
V
Z
X
X
Y
i
(5) Transport roller 3 (drive)
2) Remove the paper feed unit. (Refer to the "B. Paper feed sec-
tion".)
(idle) (B).
6) Remove the screws (C). Lift the paper feed rotation tray (D),
7) Disconnect the connector (F). Remove the screws (G), and
remove the control PWB unit (H).
8) Loosen the screw (I), and loosen the belt (J) tension. Tighten
the screw (I). Remove the belt (J).
9) Remove the resin E-ring (K) and the bearing (L). Remove the
transport roller 3 (drive) (M). Remove the E-ring (N), the pulley
(O), the spring pin (P), and the bearing (Q) from the transport
roller 3 (drive) (M).
Parts
Mainte
nance
j Transport roller 3 (Drive)
j
B
A
C
C
C
D
E
H
F
F
F
F
G
G
I
J
M
K L
P
Q
N
O
j
E. Optical section
(1) Lamp unit
2) Remove the OC mat. (Refer to the "H. Others".)
3) Disconnect the connector (B) from DSPF CL inverter PWB (A).
4) Remove the screw (C), and remove the intersecting point plate
(D). Remove the lower door (E).
5) Remove the screw (F), and remove the intersecting point plate
(G). Remove the white reference plate (H).
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
Page
1 Lamp unit a Scanning glass C-26
b DSPF copy lamp
c Reflector
2 Optical unit a Lens C-28
b CCD
c CCD unit
d Mirror C-29
Parts
Mainte
nance
Page
a DSPF CL inverter PWB C-29
b White reference glass C-30
Unit
1 Lamp unit
a
1
2-c 2-b 2-a
1-c
1-b
1-a
2-d
2
b
1
A
B
E
C
D
H
F
G
6) Remove the screw (I), and remove the scanning section cover
(J). Remove the screws (K), and remove the lamp unit (L).
a. Scanning glass, DSPF copy lamp, Reflector
2) Open the lower door (B).
3) Remove the cleaner (C).
4) Use the cleaner (C) to clean the scanning glass (surface) (D).
7) Remove the lamp unit. (Refer to the "(1) Lamp unit".)
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 Lamp unit a Scanning glass
b DSPF copy lamp
c Reflector
L
I
J
K
1
1-a
1-b
1-c
A
B
C
C
D 1-a
8) Remove the screw (E), and remove the DSPF copy lamp (F).
9) Clean the scanning glass (back surface) (G).
10) Remove the screws (H), and remove the reflector (I).
(2) Optical unit
(B).
5) Remove the screw (C), and remove the harness cover (D).
Disconnect the connectors (E).
* When installing, arrange the harness (F) so that it is placed
in the lower position than the rib height.
E
F 1-b
G 1-a
I
H
H
1-c
Unit
2 Optical unit
2
A
A
B
E
E
F
C
D
6) Remove the step screw (G), and remove the screws (H), and
remove the optical fixing plate (I). Remove the optical unit (J).
a. Lens, CCD
4) Remove the optical unit. (Refer to the "(2) Optical unit".)
5) Remove the screws (A). Disengage the pawls (B). Remove the
dust-proof cover (C). Remove the screw (D), and remove the
dark box (E).
6) Disengage the pawls (F), and remove the lens cover (G).
7) Clean the lens (H) and the CCD (I).
b. CCD unit
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
2 Optical unit a Lens
b CCD
I
J
G
H
2
2-a 2-b
C
A
A
B
B
D
E
Unit Parts
2 Optical unit c CCD unit
F
F
G
H
I
2-b
2-a
2-c
5) Remove the screws (A). Disengage the pawls (B), and remove
the dust-proof cover (C). Remove the screw (D), and remove
the dark box (E).
6) Remove the screws (F), and remove the CCD unit (G).
c. Mirror
5) Remove the screws (A), and remove the mirror base cover (B).
6) Clean the mirrors (C).
(3) DSPF CL inverter PWB
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
2 Optical unit d Mirror
C
A
A
B
B
D
E
F
F
G 2-c
2-d
Parts
a DSPF CL inverter PWB
A
A
A
B
C
C 2-d
2-d
a
2) Disconnect the connectors (A). Remove the screws (B), and
remove the control PWB unit (C).
3) Disconnect the connector (D), and remove the screws (E).
Remove the inverter PWB guide (F).
4) Remove the screws (G), and remove the DSPF CL inverter
PWB (H).
(4) White reference glass
2) Open the lower door (B).
C
A
A
A
A
B
B
F
D
E
E
G
G
H a
Parts
Mainte
nance
b White reference glass
b
A
B
3) Remove the cleaner (C).
4) Use the cleaner (C) to clean the white reference glass (D).
F. Paper exit section
(1) Discharge brush
2) Remove the paper feed tray unit. (Refer to the "B. Paper feed
section".)
3) Remove the discharge brush (A).
* When attaching the discharge brush, attach it to the attach-
ment reference.
(2) DSPF paper exit sensor
section".)
Parts
Mainte
nance
Page
a Discharge brush C-31
b DSPF paper exit sensor C-31
c Paper exit roller (drive) C-32
C
C
D b
c
b a
Parts
Mainte
nance
a Discharge brush
Parts
b DSPF paper exit sensor
a
A a
b
3) Disconnect the connector (A), and remove the DSPF paper
exit sensor (B).
(3) Paper exit roller (drive)
section".)
5) Remove the resin E-rings (A), the gear (B), the bearing (C),
and the paper exit roller (drive) (D).
G. Drive section
(1) Drive unit
Parts
Mainte
nance
c Paper exit roller (drive)
A
B b
c
C
C
D
A
B
A
c
Unit Parts Page
1 Drive unit a DSPF paper feed motor C-33
b DSPF paper exit motor C-33
c DSPF lift-up motor C-34
2 Drive transport unit a DSPF transport motor C-34
Parts Page
a DSPF cooling fan motor C-35
Unit
1 Drive unit
2-a
1-b 1-a 1-c
a 2 1
1
3) Disconnect the connectors (A), and open the edge saddle (B).
Remove the snap band (C).
4) Remove the screw (D), and remove the drive unit (E).
a. DSPF paper feed motor
2) Disconnect the connector (A), and open the edge saddle (B).
Remove the screws (C), and remove the DSPF paper feed
motor (D).
b. DSPF paper exit motor
2) Disconnect the connector (A), and open the edge saddle (B).
Remove the screws (C), and remove the DSPF paper exit
motor (D).
Unit Parts
1 Drive unit a DSPF paper feed motor
C
B
A
D
D
D
D
E 1
1-a
Unit Parts
1 Drive unit b DSPF paper exit motor
C
D
A
B
1-a
1-b
C
C
D
A
B
1-b
c. DSPF lift-up motor
remove the DSPF lift-up motor (C).
(2) Drive transport unit
2) Remove the DSPF No.1 resist roller brake clutch and the
DSPF No.1 resist roller clutch and the DSPF transport roller
clutch. (Refer to the "C. Upper transport section".)
3) Remove the DSPF cooling fan motor. (Refer to the "(3) DSPF
cooling fan motor".)
4) Loosen the screws (A), and loosen the belts tension (B).
Tighten the screws (A).
remove the drive transport unit (E).
a. DSPF transport motor
2) Loosen the screws (A), and loosen the belts (B) tension.
Tighten the screw (A).
Unit Parts
1 Drive unit c DSPF lift-up motor
Unit
2 Drive transport unit
1-c
C
A
B
1-c
2
Unit Parts
2 Drive transport unit a DSPF transport motor
A
A
B
B
E
C
D
D
D
2
2-a
A
A
B
B
3) Disconnect the connector (C), and remove the screws (D).
Remove the DSPF transport motor (E).
(3) DSPF cooling fan motor
remove the DSPF cooling fan motor (C).
H. Others
(1) OC mat
Parts
a DSPF cooling fan motor
E
C
D
2-a
a
C
A
B
a
Parts
Mainte
nance
Page
a OC mat C-35
b DSPF open/close sensor C-36
c DSPF lower door open/close sensor C-36
d DSPF driver PWB C-37
e DSPF flash PWB C-37
f DSPF control PWB C-37
Parts
Mainte
nance
a OC mat
a
e d f
c b
a
A
2) Remove the OC mat (B) from the left edge.
* When installing, place the OC mat (B) on the document table to
fit with the reference and close the DSPF unit (C).
(2) DSPF open/close sensor
2) Disconnect the connector (A) and remove the screw (B).
Remove the open/close sensor holder (C). Remove the DSPF
open/close sensor (D) from the open/close sensor holder (C).
(3) DSPF lower door open/close sensor
2) Disconnect the connector (A), and remove the screw (B).
Remove the lower door open/close sensor holder (C). Remove
the DSPF lower door open/close sensor (D) from the lower
door open/close sensor holder (C).
Parts
b DSPF open/close sensor
B a
B
C
b
Parts
c DSPF lower door open/close sensor
C
A
D
B
b
c
C
D
A
B
c
(4) DSPF driver PWB
remove the DSPF driver PWB (C).
(5) DSPF flash PWB
1) Remove the screw (A), and remove the ROM cover (B).
2) Release the lock (C), and remove the DSPF flash PWB (D).
(6) DSPF control PWB
2) Remove the DSPF flash PWB. (Refer to the "(5) DSPF flash
PWB".)
Parts
d DSPF driver PWB
Parts
e DSPF flash PWB
d
C
A
A
A
B
B
B
d
e
Parts
f DSPF control PWB
A
B
D
C
e
f
remove the control PWB unit (C).
4) Disconnect the connector (D), and remove the screws (E).
Remove the control PWB unit (F).
C
A
A
A
A
B
B
F
D
E
E
E
f
4. Maintenance
: Check : Clean : Replace : Adjust : Lubricate : Shift the position
(Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.)
No. Part name
Mono-
chrome
supply/
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the
replacement
parts are
described.)
1 Paper
feed
section/
Trans-
port
section
Paper feed roller Mechanical
parts

2 Pickup roller
3 Separation roller
(PS front)

(PS)

7 Platen roller
(after No.1 scanning)

(after No.2 scanning)

10 Paper exit roller
11 Discharge brush
12 Torque limiter
(for separation)

13 No. 1 scanning plate
14 No. 2 scanning
section, scanning
glass

15 No. 2 scanning
section, white
reference glass

16 Optical
section
Mirror
17 Lens/CCD
18 Copy lamp/Reflector
19 Others OC mat
20 Drive
section
Gears UKOG-0299FCZZ
(specified
positions)
21 Belts
10
9
8
13
15
16
17
21
18
21
21
20
17
14
5
6
7
3
2
12
19
1
4
11
MX-7000N SCANNER SECTION D 1
MX-7000N
Sv` Huuuu!

[D] SCANNER SECTION
CLI Scanner lamp Illuminates the document. (Xenon lamp)
MHPS Scanner home position sensor Detects the home position of the copy lamp unit
MIM Scanner motor Drives the copy lamp unit and the mirror base unit
1 Pulley belt Transmits the scanner motor power to the pulley
2 Pulley Drives the scanner drive wire
3 Scanner drive wire Transmits the scanner motor power to the copy lamp unit and the mirror base unit
4 Reflector Condenses the copy lamp light
5 No. 2 mirror Inducts the document image into the No. 3 mirror
6 No. 3 mirror Inducts the document image into the lens
7 Lens Shrinking the image (light) of the document, and project it on CCD.
8 CCD PWB Reads the document image (optical signal) and converts it intot the electric signal
9 Idle gear Transmits the scanner motor power to the belt
CN3 501190-4017 CN1 501190-2017
CN148 501190-4017 CN147 501190-2017 CN137
CCD PWB
C
C
D
_
C
L
K
1
+
1
6
1
7
1
8
1
9
2
0
23
3
8
4
0
3
9
3
5
1
3
0
1
5
5678
1
2
1
3
1
4
A
D
_
M
C
L
K
-
A
D
_
B
L
K
C
L
P
S
H
_
O
U
T
-
A
D
_
R
D
S
I
C
C
D
_
C
L
K
1
-
A
G
N
D
A
G
N
D
T
C
-
T
E
-
A
G
N
D
A
G
N
D
A
G
N
D
A
G
N
D
T
C
+
T
E
+
A
G
N
D
A
G
N
D
3
4
3
6
3
7
3
2
3
3
C
C
D
_
S
H
3
1
A
D
_
M
C
L
K
+
A
D
_
C
L
P
I
N
2
6
2
7
2
8
2
9
2
0
2
1
2
4
2
5
2
3
/R
E
S
_
C
C
D
A
D
C
C
D
_
C
L
K
2
-
2
2
A
D
_
S
C
L
K
C
C
D
_
C
L
K
2
+
A
D
_
W
R
S
O
A
G
N
D
A
D
_
S
E
N
1
8
1
9
A
3
.
3
V
C
C
D
_
R
S
-
/L
V
D
S
_
S
T
B
Y
A
G
N
D
1
5
1
6
1
7
C
C
D
_
C
P
-
A
G
N
D
C
C
D
_
C
P
+
A
5
V
A
G
N
D
A
G
N
D
C
C
D
_
R
S
+
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
789
1
0
12
A
G
N
D
A
G
N
D
A
1
2
V
56 34
A
G
N
D
9
1
0
1
1
4
A
G
N
D
A
G
N
D
C
L
K
P
1
_
O
U
T
+
S
H
_
O
U
T
+
C
L
K
P
1
_
O
U
T
-
T
B
+
T
D
+
T
B
-
T
D
-
A
G
N
D
A
G
N
D
T
A
+
T
C
L
K
+
T
A
-
T
C
L
K
-
A
G
N
D
A
G
N
D
A
G
N
D
A
G
N
D
A
G
N
D
A
1
2
V
C
C
D
_
C
P
-
A
G
N
D
C
C
D
_
C
P
+
A
5
V
A
G
N
D
A
G
N
D
C
C
D
_
R
S
+
A
3
.
3
V
C
C
D
_
R
S
-
/L
V
D
S
_
S
T
B
Y
A
G
N
D
/R
E
S
_
C
C
D
A
D
A
D
_
R
D
S
I
C
C
D
_
C
L
K
1
-
C
C
D
_
C
L
K
2
-
A
D
_
S
C
L
K
C
C
D
_
C
L
K
2
+
A
D
_
W
R
S
O
A
G
N
D
A
G
N
D
A
D
_
C
L
P
I
N
A
D
_
M
C
L
K
-
A
D
_
B
L
K
C
L
P
A
D
_
M
C
L
K
+
C
C
D
_
S
H
A
G
N
D
A
G
N
D
C
L
K
P
1
_
O
U
T
+
S
H
_
O
U
T
+
C
L
K
P
1
_
O
U
T
-
S
H
_
O
U
T
-
A
G
N
D
A
G
N
D
2
4
2
5
2
6
2
7
2
8
2
9
3
0
3
1
3
2
3
3
3
4
3
5
3
6
3
7
3
8
3
9
4
0
123456789
1
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
1
8
1
9
2
0
2
1
2
2
C
C
D
_
C
L
K
1
+
2
3
A
G
N
D
A
D
_
S
E
N
A
G
N
D
A
G
N
D
T
C
+
T
E
+
T
C
-
T
E
-
A
G
N
D
A
G
N
D
T
B
+
T
D
+
T
B
-
T
D
-
A
G
N
D
A
G
N
D
T
A
+
T
C
L
K
+
T
A
-
T
C
L
K
-
A
G
N
D
A
G
N
D
123456789
1
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
1
8
1
9
2
0
1234
M
iM
_
A
M
iM
_
B
M
iM
_
/
A
M
iM
_
/
B
MIM
1
2
3
MHPS
CLI
CN134
321
123
M
H
P
S
D
-
G
N
D
5
V
M
H
P
S
D
-
G
N
D
5
V
CL
INVERTOR
PWB
CN130
1
P
-
G
N
D
P
-
G
N
D
C
L
2
4
V
P
D
2
4
V
P
D
5432
5
P
-
G
N
D
P
-
G
N
D
C
L
2
4
V
P
D
1234
2
4
V
P
D
12
SCN-CNT PWB
8
4
3
7
5
6
2
9
A. Outline
This section functions and operates as follows:
1) The copy lamp radiates light onto the document, and the con-
trast of the reflected light is scanned by the three line (RGB)
CCD element and converted into image signals (analog).
2) The image signals (analog) are converted into 10bit digital sig-
nals by the A/D converter.
3) The image signals (digital) are sent to the image process sec-
tion (scanner control PWB).
B. Detail description
(1) Optical section drive
The optical section drive power is transmitted from the scanner
motor (MIM) to the drive pulley and the wire through the belt, to
drive the copy lamp unit and the mirror base which are attached by
the drive wires.
The scanner motor (MIM) is controlled by the drive signal sent from
the scanner control PWB.
(2) Scanner lamp drive
The scanner lamp (CLI) is driven by the scanner lamp drive voltage
generated in the CL inverter PWB according to the control signal
sent from the scanner control PWB.
(3) Image scan/color separation
The copy lamp radiates light onto the document, and the contrast of
the reflected light is scanned by the three line (RGB) CCD element
and converted into image signals (analog).
Each color component of RGB is separately extracted from the
document image by the three lines (RGB) of the CCD elements.
The red CCD extracts the red components from the document
image, the green CCD the green components, and the blue CCD
the blue components. This operation is called Color Separation.
A CCD element has three CCD elements of RGB.
Scanning of a document in the main scanning direction is per-
formed by the CCD elements. Scanning of a document in the sub
scanning direction is performed by shifting the scanner unit position
with the scanner motor.
Document images are optically reduced by the lens and projected
to the CCD elements.
Scanning resolution is 600 dpi.
(Image data per 1 line)
(4) Image signal A/D conversion
1) Each image signal (analog) of RGB is converted into 10bit dig-
ital signal by the A/D converter.
Each color pixel has 10bit information.
2) Each 10bit digital image signal of RGB is sent to the image
process section.
(5) Zooming operation
Zooming in the sub scanning direction is performed by changing
the scanning speed in the sub scanning direction.
Zooming in the main scanning direction is performed by the image
process technology (software), it is not achieved optically.
B
R
G
R
G
B
Red component of
image data
Blue component of
image data
Freen component of
image data
R G B
CCD PWB
B ADC
Transfer IC
B
B
3
CCD
B IC
G IC
R IC
G ADC
R ADC
R
R
G
G
A. Scanner unit
(1) Scanner unit
EXTERNAL OUTFIT".)
2) Remove the DSPF unit. (Refer to the "[C] DSPF SECTION".)
3) Remove the table glass and the SPF glass. (Refer to the a.
Table glass, SPF glass.)
4) Remove the upper cabinet rear, the upper cabinet left, the
upper cabinet right, the front cabinet upper, and the operation
panel base plate. (Refer to the "[A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT".)
5) Remove the operation panel unit. (Refer to the "[B] OPERA-
TION PANEL".)
6) Remove the screw (A), and remove the earth wire (B). Discon-
nect the connectors (C). Remove the snap band (D), the mylar
sheet (E), and remove the harnesses (G) from edge saddles
(F).
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
Page
1 Scanner unit a Table glass D- 4
b SPF glass
c Lens D- 5
d CCD
e Reflector D- 5
f Mirror
g Scanner lamp
h CL inverter PWB
i CCD unit D- 6
j Rails D- 7
k Drive wire D- 7
l Drive belt
m Scanner motor D- 7
n Scanner home position
sensor
D- 8
o Original cover SW D- 8
p Document detection light
collector PWB
D- 8
q Document detection light
emitting PWB
D- 9
1-a
1-k
1-k
1-m
1-o
1-b
1-n
1-c
1-i
1-f
1-f
1-e
1-h
1-d
1-l
1
1-
g
1-
j
1-
q
1-
p
1-
j
Unit
1 Scanner unit
1
C
D
G
G
D
E
B
A
F
C
F
7) Remove the screws (H), and remove the support plate (I). Dis-
connect the connector (J), and remove the snap band (K).
8) Disconnect the connector (L), and remove the screws (M), and
remove the air outlet duct (N).
9) Remove the screws (O), and remove the scanner unit (P).
a. Table glass, SPF glass
1) Loosen the screws (A), and lower the angle adjustment plate
(B).
2) Open the DSPF unit (C).
H
H
I
I
H
H
J
K
M
L
N
M
P
O
O
1
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 Scanner unit a Table glass
b SPF glass
1-a 1-b
A
A
B
C
3) Remove the screws (D), and remove the glass holder (E).
Remove the table glass (F). Remove the screws (G), and
remove the SPF glass (H).
b. Lens, CCD
1) Remove the table glass and the SPF glass. (Refer to the "a.
Table glass, SPF glass".)
2) Remove the screws (A), the earth wire (B), and remove the
dark box (C). Remove the lens cover (D).
3) Clean the lens (E) and the CCD (F).
c. Reflector, Mirror, Scanner lamp, CL inverter PWB
2) Clean the reflector (A) and mirror (B).
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 Scanner unit c Lens
d CCD
H
1-a F
D
D
E
1-b
G
G
1-c
1-d
A
B
A
C
D
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 Scanner unit e Reflector
f Mirror
g Scanner lamp
h CL inverter PWB
E
F
1-c
1-d
1-f
1-f
1-e
1-h
1-
g
1-f
1-e
B
A
3) Shift the lamp unit (C) to the right. Loosen the screw (D), and
remove the wire (E).
4) Lift the lamp unit (F) by rotating it. Remove the harness holder
(G), flat cable (H), and remove the lamp unit (F).
5) Clean the mirror (I).
6) Disconnect the connector (J), and remove the screw (K), and
remove the scanner lamp (L).
7) Remove the screws (M) and mirror spring (N), and remove the
CL inverter PWB (O).
d. CCD unit
2) Remove the screws (A), the earth wire (B), and remove the
dark box (C). Disconnect the connectors (D), and remove the
screws (E), and remove the CCD unit (F).
C
D
E
G
H
F
1-f I
J
K L 1-
g
Unit Parts
1 Scanner unit i CCD unit
M N
O
1-h
1-i
A B
A
D
D
E
E
F
1-i
C
e. Rails
2) Apply grease on each rail (A).
f. Drive wire, Drive belt
2) Check the drive wires (A) and drive belt (B).
* Install the drive wire in the order of alphabetical shown in the
figure below. Wind the drive wire 10 turns around the wind-
ing pulley. The 9th turn must be fixed with a screw.
g. Scanner motor
EXTERNAL OUTFIT".)
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 Scanner unit j Rails
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 Scanner unit k Drive wire
l Drive belt
1-
j
1-
j
A
A
1-
j
1-
j
A
A
1-
j
1-
j
1-k
1-k
1-l
Unit Parts
1 Scanner unit m Scanner motor
1-k
1-k
A
A
B
1-l
1 10 8 9
1 10 8 9
B
B
C
C
D
D
E
E
F
F
G
G
A
A
1-m
remove the scanner motor (C).
h. Scanner home position sensor
EXTERNAL OUTFIT".)
2) Disconnect the connector (A), and remove the screw (B), and
remove the scanner home position sensor (C).
i. Original cover SW
EXTERNAL OUTFIT".)
remove the original cover SW (C).
j. Document detection light collector PWB
1) Remove the upper cabinet left, the front cabinet upper, and the
operation panel base plate. (Refer to the "[A] EXTERNAL
OUTFIT".)
2) Remove the operation panel unit. (Refer to the "[B] OPERA-
TION PANEL SECTION".)
Unit Parts
1 Scanner unit n Scanner home position sensor
A B
C 1-m
1-n
A
B
C 1-n
Unit Parts
1 Scanner unit o Original cover SW
Unit Parts
1 Scanner unit p Document detection light collector PWB
1-o
A
B
C
1-o
1-p
3) Disconnect the connector (A), and remove the protection sheet
(B). Remove the screws (C), and remove the document detec-
tion light collector PWB (D).
k. Document detection light emitting PWB
1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover. (Refer to the [A]
EXTERNAL OUTFIT.)
2) Remove the DSPF unit. (Refer to the "[C] DSPF SECTION".)
3) Remove the table glass and the SPF glass. (Refer to the a.
Table glass, SPF glass.)
4) Remove the upper cabinet rear. (Refer to the "[A] EXTERNAL
OUTFIT".)
5) Remove the screw (A), and remove the light emitting unit (B).
6) Remove the screws (C), and remove the cover (D). Remove
the document detection light emitting PWB (E).
Unit Parts
1 Scanner unit q Document detection light emitting PWB
C
C
A
1-
p
D
B
1-
q
A
B
C
C
D
E 1-
q
4. Maintenance
When moving the copy lamp unit manually for cleaning or adjusting the scanner section and the mirror section, be sure to turn OFF the main
power source (the power switch inside the front cabinet) and confirm that the power LED on the operation panel is OFF.
No. Part name
Monochrome
supply,
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the
replacement
parts are
described.)
1 Mirror/lends/reflector/CCD Mechanical
parts

2 Table glass/SPF glass
3 Scanner lamp
4 Rails Specified position
5 Drive belt/drive wire
1
2
4
1
4
3
5
1
5
MX-7000N MANUAL PAPER FEED SECTION E 1
MX-7000N
Sv` Huuuu!

[E] MANUAL PAPER FEED SECTION
MPLD1
MPWS
MTOP2
MTOP1
HUD_M/TH_M
MPED
3
MPFD
MPFS
MPGS
MPUC
2
1
4
5
LCCM
CPFM
S DF1B-28DE P CN1
B6B-XH B6B-PASK-1
CN14
B30B-PNDZS-1
DRIVER
PWB
25 INT24V1 25
27 INT24V1 27
21
23 LCCM_B 23
17
19 LCCM_A/ 19
INT24V1
INT24V1
LCCM_B 4
LCCM_A/
LCCM_B/
5
6
LCCM_B
INT24V1 2
4
LCCM_A
LCCM_B/ 6
LCCM_A/ 3
LCCM_A 17 LCCM_A
21 LCCM_B/ 3
1
2
INT24V1 5
1
PCU
PWB
/MPUC /MPUC 1
1
20
24V3 2 18 24V3 10 24V3 10
12 /MPUC 12 2
S DF1B-28DE P CN4
VH-2P
B07B-PASK
CPFM_CW/CCW 2 2 CPFM_CW/CCW
CPFM_GAIN 6
CPFM_CW/CCW 7
7 5VN
D-GND
24V4 1
5
3 P-GND
1 24V4 1
/CPFM_D 3
P-GND 2
D-GND 1
5VN 2
/CPFM_CK 4
13 CPFM_LD 13
9 /CPFM_D
11 /CPFM_CK
CPFM_LD 5
15 CPFM_GAIN
13 CPFM_LD
24V4 1
3 P-GND 3
5 D-GND 5
7 5VN 7
9 /CPFM_D 9
11 /CPFM_CK 11
15 CPFM_GAIN 15
2
CN15 CN1
S16B-PHDSS-B
P QR/P4 40PIN S B40B-PNDZS-1
B40B-PNDZS-1
CN3(1/2)
RIGHT
DOOR
I/F PWB
PHNR-9-H + BU09P-TR-P-H PHNR-14-H + BU14P-TR-P-H
GP1S73 179228-3
R SM2P P
PHNR-8-H + BU08P-TR-P-H
CN3(2/2)
PHNR-3
GP1S73 179228-3
GP1S73 179228-3
GP1S73 179228-3
ZHR-4 S32B-PHDSS-B
GP1S73 179228-3
DF11-6DP-SP2
P SM2P R
DF11-8DP-SP1
2
5VN
20 MPWS
19
5VNPD(LED)
MPLD1 16
18
5VNPD(LED)
MTOP2
5VNPD(LED)
25 MTOP1
D-GND
31
28 5VN
29
14
27
24
MTOP1 6
22
6 81 3 5 4 2 7
3
MTOP2
D-GND
5VNPD(LED)
1
2
TH_M
1
2
3
4
5VN
HUD_M
D-GND
14
13
2 D-GND
1
2
3
MTOP1
D-GND
5VNPD(LED)
1 TH_M
5VNPD(LED) 5
2 D-GND
7
HUD_M
10
12 3
5VNPD(LED)
9
11 5VN 4
8 7 MTOP2
8
9
5 5VN
4 5VNPD(LED) 11
10 3
2
5VN
1 D-GND
MPWS
1
MPWS
D-GND
D-GND
6 3 5VNPD(LED)
5
8
9
7 3
2
5VN
6 MPWS
5
5VNPD(LED) 4
1 MPLD1
24V3
D-GND
30
28
26
MPFD
29
31 SELIN1
33 SELIN2
MPLD1 6 3 MPLD1 12 4
25 5VN
27
5VN 1 5VN
40 F-GND
1 1
D-GND
APPD1
MPFD
15
5VNPD
HWPD
TH_M
HUD_M
11
16
13
14
6
SIN3 3
SELIN1 4
7
SELIN2
POD3 10
APPD2 8
ADUD3 9
5
SELIN3
HUD_M
SIN3
18
3
6
32
20
5VNPD
SELIN1
APPD2
D-GND
2
HWPD
17
APPD1
7
MPFD
SELIN3
POD3
7
23
40
17
21
6
32
2
/MPFS
/MPGS
40 24V3
24V3 34
2 8 8
36
HUD_M
31
15
TH_M 23
19
21
4
SELIN2
TH_M
37
35 SELIN3
HWPD
SIN3
5VNPD
20
POD3 22
24
APPD1
39 APPD2
18
3
19
4
27 P-GND 27
14 14
30 30 38 /MPFS
24V3
/MPGS 31
15
8
MPFD
3 24V3
1
2
1
2
24V3
/MPFS
1
5VN(LED)
5VN(LED)
MPFD
D-GND
3
1
2
5VN(LED)
4 2 /MPGS 2 2
3 3
/MPGS
MPFD
1
24V3
4
5
5
10
D-GND 2
1
8
6 1 24V3 1
2 /MPGS 7
7 /MPFS 2
4
6
5 D-GND
24V3 1
135246
D-GND
MPED 1
2
MPED 3
3
4 5VN(LED) 5
D-GND
TH_M
HUD_M
MPED
5VN(LED)
7
8
9
MPFD
5
V
N
(
L
E
D
)
5
V
N
(
L
E
D
)
5
V
N
(
L
E
D
)
D
_
G
N
D
D
_
G
N
D
D
_
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
The paper pickup roller moves up and down to press paper and
separates the top paper. Paper which had been separated is fed to
the paper feed roller.
The paper feed roller feeds paper to the paper transport section,
and the separation roller prevents double feed.
ON/OFF of the paper pickup roller and the paper feed roller are
controlled of by the manual paper feed clutch.
Then, paper is transported to the resist roller by the manual paper
transport roller.
A. Manual paper feed tray unit
CPFM Paper feed motor Drives the paper feed section
HUD_M/TH_M Temperature/humidity sensors Detects temperature/humidity
LCCM LCC transport motor Drives the LCC transport motor
MPED Manual feed paper empty detection Manual paper feed tray paper empty detection
MPFD Manual feed paper entry detection Manual paper feed tray paper entry detection
MPFS Paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper
feed)
Controls the paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper feed)
MPGS Manual paper feed gate solenoid Controls the manual paper feed gate solenoid Open/Close
MPLD1 Manual feed paper length detector Manual paper feed tray paper length detection
MPUC Manual paper feed clutch Controls the manual paper feed section paper feed roller ON/OFF
MPWS Manual paper feed tray paper width
detector
Manual paper feed tray paper width detection
MTOP1 Manual paper feed tray pull-out position
detector 1
Manual paper feed tray paper pull-out position detection (storage position)
MTOP2 Manual paper feed tray pull-out position
detector 2
Manual paper feed tray paper pull-out position detection (pulling-out position)
1 Paper feed roller (Manual paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper transport section
2 Separation roller (Manual paper feed tray) Separates paper to prevent double feed
3 Paper pickup roller (Manual paper feed
tray)
Pick up paper, and feeds it to the paper feed roller.
double feed
5 Transport roller 16 (Drive) Transports paper transported from the transport roller 11 to the transport roller 8. Transports
paper fed from the manual feed tray to the transport roller 8
Unit Page
A Manual paper feed tray unit E- 3
B Manual paper feed unit E- 6
Unit Parts Page
1 Manual paper feed
tray unit
a Temperature/humidity
sensors
E- 4
b Manual paper feed tray pull-
c Manual paper feed tray pull-
d Manual paper feed tray paper
width detector
e Manual feed paper length
detector
E- 5
1-a
1-d
1-b
1-c
1-e
1
(1) Manual paper feed tray unit
2) Remove the screws (C), and remove the cabinet (D).
3) Remove the screw (E), and remove the lock pawl (F) and the
lever (G). Remove the screw (H), and disengage the pawl (I),
and remove the cabinet (J).
4) Remove the screw (K), and remove the slide rail (L).
5) Remove the screws (M). Remove the screw (N), and remove
the inner cover (O).
Unit
1 Manual paper feed tray unit
1
A
B
C
D
C
E
F G
H
J
I
K
L
M
M
N
O
6) Remove the screws (P), and remove the cabinet (Q).
7) Remove the shaft (R). Remove the screws (S), and remove
the manual paper feed tray unit (T).
8) Remove the cover (U), and disconnect the connector (V).
a. Temperature/humidity sensors, Manual paper feed tray
pull-out position detector 2, Manual paper feed tray pull-out
position detector 1, Manual paper feed tray paper width
detector
1) Remove the manual paper feed tray unit. (Refer to the "(1)
Manual paper feed tray unit".)
2) Remove the screws (A), and remove the cover (B).
3) Lift the cover (D), so that it push into rear side (C), and remove
the cover (D). Disengage the pawl (E). Lift the tray (F) and dis-
connect the connector (G).
P
P
P
Q
1
R
S
S
T
U
V
Unit Parts
1 Manual paper feed
tray unit
a Temperature/humidity sensors
b Manual paper feed tray pull-out position
detector 2
c Manual paper feed tray pull-out position
detector 1
d Manual paper feed tray paper width
detector
1-a
1-d
1-b
1-c
A
A
B
C
D
F
G
E
E
4) Remove the temperature/humidity sensor (H), the manual
paper feed tray pull-out position detector 2 (I), the manual
paper feed tray pull-out position detector 1 (J). Disconnect the
connectors (K).
5) Remove the manual paper feed tray paper width detector (L).
Disconnect the connector (M).
b. Manual feed paper length detector
1) Remove the manual paper feed tray unit. (Refer to the "(1)
3) Lift the cover (D), so that it push into rear side (C), and remove
the cover (D). Disengage the pawl (E). Lift the tray (F) and dis-
connect the connector (G).
4) Remove the screw (H), and remove the lower cover (I).
5) Disconnect the connector (J), and remove the manual feed
paper length detector (K).
Unit Parts
1 Manual paper feed
tray unit
e Manual feed paper length detector
H
I
J
1-a
1-b
1-c
K
K
M
L 1-d
1-e
A
A
B
C
D
F
G
E
E
H
I
K
J
1-e
B. Manual paper feed unit
(1) Manual paper feed unit
1) Remove the manual paper feed tray unit. (Refer to the "A.
2) Remove the screws (A), and remove the manual paper feed
unit (B). Disconnect the connector (C).
a. Paper pickup roller (Manual paper feed tray), Paper feed
roller (Manual paper feed tray), Separation roller (Manual
paper feed tray)
1) Disengage the pawl (A), and remove the cover (B).
2) Disengage the pawl (C), and remove the paper pickup roller
(Manual paper feed tray) (D), the paper feed roller (Manual
paper feed tray) (E).
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
Page
1 Manual
paper feed
unit
a Paper pickup roller (Manual
paper feed tray)
E- 6
b Paper feed roller (Manual
paper feed tray)

c Separation roller (Manual
paper feed tray)

d Manual paper feed gate
solenoid
E- 7
e Transport roller 16 (Drive) E- 7
f Manual feed paper entry
detection
g Torque limiter E- 8
h Manual feed paper empty
detection
E- 8
i Paper pickup solenoid
(Manual paper feed)
E- 9
Unit
1 Manual paper feed unit
1-a
1-f
1-b
1-c
1-d
1-e
1
1-h
1-i
1-
g
1
A
A
A
A
B
C
1
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 Manual paper feed
unit
a Paper pickup roller
(Manual paper feed tray)

b Paper feed roller

c Separation roller

1-a
1-b
1-c
A
B
1-a
C
D
E 1-b
3) Open the cover (F). Disengage the pawl (G), and remove the
separation roller (manual paper feed tray) (H).
b. Manual paper feed gate solenoid
2) Remove the manual paper feed unit. (Refer to the "(1) Manual
paper feed unit".)
3) Remove the screws (A), and remove the support plate (B).
Remove the spring (C).
4) Disengage the pawls (D), and remove the manual paper feed
gate solenoid (E). Disconnect the connector (F).
c. Transport roller 16 (Drive), Manual feed paper entry
detection
paper feed unit".)
Remove the spring (C).
4) Remove the E-ring (D), and remove the collar (E), the gear (F),
the parallel pin (G), the E-rings (H), and the bearings (I).
Remove the transport roller 16 (Drive) (J).
Unit Parts
1 Manual paper feed
unit
d Manual paper feed gate solenoid
F
G
H 1-c
1-d
A
A
B
C
E
F
1-d
D
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 Manual paper feed
unit
e Transport roller 16 (Drive)
f Manual feed paper entry
detection
1-f
1-e
A
A
B
C
D
H
E
F
I
G
J
H
I
1-e
5) Remove the screw (K), and remove the sensor mounting plate
(L). Disconnect the connector (M), and remove the manual
feed paper entry detection (N).
d. Torque limiter
paper feed unit".)
3) Remove the transport roller 16 (Drive). (Refer to the "C. Trans-
port roller 16 (Drive), Manual paper entry detection".)
4) Remove the E-rings (A), and remove the gears (B), the parallel
pins (C), the E-ring (D), and the bearings (E). Remove the
screws (F), and remove the support plate (G).
5) Remove the E-ring (H). Shift the shaft (I), and remove the
torque limiter (J).
e. Manual feed paper empty detection
paper feed unit".)
3) Disengage the pawl (A), and remove the cover (B) and the
screws (C), and remove the paper guide (D).
4) Remove the screw (E), and remove the sensor mounting plate
(F). Disconnect the connector (G), and remove the manual
feed paper empty detection (H).
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 Manual paper feed
unit
g Torque limiter
K
L
M
N 1-f
1-g
A
B
F
F
F
B
C
E
E
C
G
D
Unit Parts
1 Manual paper feed
unit
h Manual feed paper empty detection
H
I
J 1-g
1-h
A
B
C
C
D
E
F
H
G
1-h
f. Paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper feed)
paper feed unit".)
3) Remove the transport roller 16 (Drive). (Refer to the "C. Trans-
port roller 16 (Drive), manual feed paper entry detection".)
4) Remove the E-rings (A), and remove the gears (B), the parallel
pins (C), the E-ring (D), and the bearings (E). Remove the
screws (F), and remove the support plate (G).
5) Disconnect the connector (H). Remove the screws (I), and
remove the support plate (J).
6) Remove the paper guide unit (K).
7) Remove the spring (L). Remove the screws (M), and remove
the support plate (N).
8) Remove the screws (O), and remove the paper pickup sole-
noid (Manual paper feed) (P).
9) Remove the spring (Q), and remove the solenoid arm (R).
Remove the pin (S), and remove the solenoid plunger (T).
Unit Parts
1 Manual paper feed
unit
i Paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper
feed)
1-i
A
B
F
F
F
B
C
E
E
C
G
D
H
I
I
J
I
K
L
M
M
N
O
O
P 1-i
Q
R
S
T
1-i
4. Maintenance
No. Part name
Monochrome
supply,
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the
replacement
parts are
described.)
1 Paper pickup roller Mechanical
parts

2 Paper feed roller
3 Separation roller
4 Torque limiter
5 Each transport roller
1
4
2
5
3
MX-7000N TRAY PAPER FEED SECTION F 1
MX-7000N
Sv` Huuuu!

[F] TRAY PAPER FEED SECTION
A. Tandem paper feed tray unit
T2SPD
TANSET
T2PFC
T1PFC
T2PUS
T1PUS
T2LUM
CPFM
T1LUM
T1SPD
T1LUD
T1PED
1
3
5
2
4
4
1
2
3
T2LUD
T2PED
5
5
5
PCU PWB
R
S
M
-
4
P
-
N
P
P
D
F
1
B
-
2
6
D
E
S
C
N
5
P
A
P
-
0
4
V
R
S
M
-
1
0
P
-
N
P
P
A
P
-
0
4
V
G
P
1
A
7
1
P
H
R
-
3
G
P
1
A
7
1
P
H
R
-
3
P
S
M
-
2
P
IN
R
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
DF11-8DP-SP1
B
3
4
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
C
N
6
B
2
P
-
P
H
-
K
-
S
B
2
P
-
P
H
-
K
-
S
B
4
0
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
T
1
P
E
D
2
1
2
4
V
3
1
7
T
2
S
P
D
6
T
2
S
P
D
1
2
4
V
3
1
P
-
G
N
D
12
1
7
6
5
2
1
7
6
5
2
2
/T
1
L
U
M
9
T
1
S
P
D
9
5
D
-
G
N
D
5
1
0
5
V
N
P
D
1
0
7
5
V
N
P
D
7
8 4
T
1
P
E
D
4
3
T
1
L
U
D
1
5
V
N
P
D
1
2
D
-
G
N
D
2
5
V
N
P
D
3
5
V
N
P
D
1
D
-
G
N
D
2
T
1
L
U
D
3
T
1
P
E
D
4
D
-
G
N
D
1
T
1
S
P
D
2
3
T
2
L
U
D
3
4
T
2
P
E
D
4 1
2
D
-
G
N
D
2
1
5
V
N
P
D
9
T
2
L
U
D
5
1
3
T
2
P
E
D
7
5
V
N
P
D
T
2
L
U
D
T
2
P
E
D
1
1
2
7
T
2
S
P
D
7
1
5
2
/T
1
P
U
S
6 3
D
-
G
N
D
8
3
D
-
G
N
D
3
/T
2
L
U
M
2
P
-
G
N
D
1
5
T
1
S
P
D
2
9
2
3
1
5
V
N
P
D
1
5
V
N
P
D
1
D
-
G
N
D
2
T
2
L
U
D
34
T
2
P
E
D
D
-
G
N
D
T
1
L
U
D
2
3
D
-
G
N
D
1
T
2
S
P
D
2
5
V
N
P
D
3
2
5
T
1
P
E
D
T
1
L
U
D
1
5
1
5
1
7
1
9
T
1
S
P
D
2
1
1
9
2
5
3
3
/T
1
P
U
S
P
-
G
N
D
1
3
3
1
/T
2
L
U
M
/T
1
L
U
M
1
1
1
7
2
4
V
3
1
5
P
-
G
N
D
2
3
2
5
/T
1
P
U
S
S
D
F
1
B
-
2
8
D
E
P
C
N
4
V
H
-
2
P
B
0
7
B
-
P
A
S
K
P
H
N
R
-
0
2
-
H
+
B
U
0
2
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
P
H
N
R
-
0
2
-
H
+
B
U
0
2
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
P
H
N
R
-
0
2
-
H
+
B
U
0
2
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
B
4
0
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
DF11-6DP-SP1
C
P
F
M
_
C
W
/C
C
W
2
2
C
P
F
M
_
C
W
/C
C
W
C
P
F
M
_
G
A
IN
6
C
P
F
M
_
C
W
/C
C
W
7
4
24V3
24V3
24V3
24V3
5
6
1
21
2
4
V
3
/T
1
P
F
C
12
/T
1
P
F
C
1
2
1
0
2
4
V
3
2
/T
2
P
F
C
1
12
/T
2
P
F
C
7
5
V
N
D
-
G
N
D
2
4
V
4
1
5 3
P
-
G
N
D
1
2
4
V
4
1
/C
P
F
M
_
D
3
P
-
G
N
D
2
D
-
G
N
D
1
5
V
N
2
/C
P
F
M
_
C
K
4
1
3
C
P
F
M
_
L
D
1
3
9
/C
P
F
M
_
D
1
1
/C
P
F
M
_
C
K
6
/T
R
C
1
4
2
4
V
3
C
P
F
M
_
L
D
5
1
5
C
P
F
M
_
G
A
IN
1
3
C
P
F
M
_
L
D
1
2
4
V
3
2
2
/T
2
P
U
S
1
2
4
V
4
1
3
P
-
G
N
D
3
5
D
-
G
N
D
5
7
5
V
N
7
9
/C
P
F
M
_
D
9
1
1
/C
P
F
M
_
C
K
1
1
1
5
C
P
F
M
_
G
A
IN
1
5
24
2
4
V
3
4
6
/T
R
C
1
6
1
0
/T
2
P
F
C
1
0
1
2
/T
1
P
F
C
1
2
1
4
/T
2
P
U
S
1
4
1
4
/T
2
P
U
S
P
D
F
1
B
-
3
4
D
E
S
C
N
3
G
P
1
A
7
1
P
H
R
-
3
B
3
4
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
D
-
G
N
D
1
5
V
N
3
T
A
N
S
E
T
2
3
2
T
A
N
S
E
T
5
V
N
3
4
3
2
5
V
N
3
4
3
4
T
A
N
S
E
T
3
2
1
1
D
-
G
N
D
1
D
-
G
N
D
D=GND 4
D=GND 1
T1LUD Tandem tray 1 upper limit detection Detects upper limit of tandem tray 1
T1LUM Paper tray lift-up motor (Tandem tray 1) Drives the paper tray lift plate.
T1PED Tandem tray 1 paper empty detection Detects the paper empty of tandem tray 1
T1PFC Tandem tray 1 paper feed clutch Controls the paper feed roller ON/OFF on the paper feed section of tandem tray 1
T1PUS Paper pickup solenoid (Tandem tray 1) Controls the paper pickup
T1SPD Tandem tray 1 paper remaining quantity
detector
Detects remaining quantity of tandem tray 1
T2LUD Tandem tray 2 upper limit detection Detects upper limit of tandem tray 2
T2LUM Paper tray lift-up motor (Tandem tray 2) Drives the paper tray lift plate.
T2PED Tandem tray 2 paper empty detection Detects the paper empty of tandem tray 2
T2PFC Tandem tray 2 paper feed clutch Controls the paper feed roller ON/OFF on the paper feed section of tandem tray 2
T2PUS Paper pickup solenoid (Tandem tray 2) Controls the paper pickup
T2SPD Tandem tray 2 paper remaining quantity
detector
Detects remaining quantity of tandem tray 2
TANSET Tandem tray installation detection Detects the installation state of tandem tray
1 Paper pickup roller
(Tandem No. 1 / No. 2 paper feed tray)
Pick up paper, and feeds it to the paper feed roller
2 Paper feed roller
Feeds paper to the paper transport section
3 Separation roller
Separates paper to prevent Double Feed
double feed
5 Lift wire Transmits the paper tray lift-up motor power to the paper feed tray
B. Tray paper feed unit
CPFM
C3SPD
C4SPD
C3PED
1
C3LUD
C3PUS
C4PUS
C3LUM
C4PFC
C3PFC
TRC2
C4LUM
C4PED
C4LUD
C3PWD
C3PFD
C3SS2
C3SS4
C3SS3
C3SS1
C4SS2
C4SS4
C4SS3
C4SS1
C4PFD
2
3
8
7
9
10
9
10
4
1 2
3
6
5
4
11
11
12
12
P
H
N
R
-
1
4
-
H
+
B
U
1
4
P
-
T
R
-
K
-
S
P
D
F
1
B
-
2
6
D
E
S
C
N
5
G
P
1
A
7
1
P
H
R
-
3
G
P
1
A
7
1
P
H
R
-
3
B
3
4
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
S
6
P
-
P
H
-
K
-
S
S
6
P
-
P
H
-
K
-
S
C
4
S
S
3
C
4
S
S
4
3
0
3
2
3
4
C
4
S
S
2
C
4
S
S
4
3 2
C
4
S
S
2
C
4
S
S
3
C
4
S
S
4
1
9 1
0
1
4
1
2
1
3
1
1
C
4
S
S
3
C
3
S
S
4
C
4
S
S
2
1
4
1
4
C
3
S
S
3
1
6
2
6
2
0
2
2
5
V
N
P
D
C
3
S
S
2
2
4
1
0
1
0
C
3
S
S
1
1
2
1
2
5
V
N
P
D
6
6
C
4
S
P
D
8
8
2
2
C
3
S
P
D
4
4
D
-
G
N
D
C
3
S
S
3
2
6
C
3
S
S
4
1
0
D
-
G
N
D
1
2
C
3
S
P
D
C
4
S
P
D
2
0
C
3
S
S
1
2
8
1
6
C
4
S
S
1
67
C
3
S
S
3
1
8
2
4
5
2
0
C
4
S
S
1
4
5 6 7 8
C
3
S
S
1
1
0
C
3
S
S
2
9
1 2 3 4
8
5
V
N
P
D
5
V
N
P
D
C
3
S
P
D
1
3
C
4
S
P
D
1
1
1
4
5
V
N
P
D
1
6
D
-
G
N
D
1
4
5
V
N
P
D
1
2
2
2
C
3
S
S
2
C
4
S
S
4
6
5
V
N
P
D
3
C
4
S
S
1
3
C
4
S
S
2
4
D
-
G
N
D
24
D
-
G
N
D
C
3
S
S
1
C
3
S
S
2
2 3
D
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
1
C
3
S
P
D
5
V
N
P
D
1 2 3
1
8
2
2
C
4
S
S
3
5
C
3
S
S
3
5
C
3
S
S
4
6
C
4
S
P
D
2
2
4
2
6
C
3
S
S
4
1
8
C
4
S
S
1
PCU PWB
PCU PWB
P
D
F
1
B
-
3
4
S
C
N
3
P
H
N
R
-
1
2
-
H
+
B
U
1
2
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
G
P
2
A
2
0
0
L
1
7
9
2
2
8
-
3
G
P
1
A
7
1
P
H
R
-
3
G
P
1
A
7
1
P
H
R
-
3
P
H
N
R
-
2
-
H
B
U
2
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
B
3
4
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
R
S
M
3
p
in
_
N
P
P
H
N
R
-
1
2
-
H
B
U
1
2
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
S
lid
e
V
o
lu
m
e
G
P
2
A
2
0
0
L
1
7
9
2
2
8
-
3
G
P
1
A
7
1
P
H
R
-
3
G
P
1
A
7
1
P
H
R
-
3
P
H
N
R
-
2
-
H
B
U
2
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
1
9
2
1
3
1
3
3
2
3
1
3
1
5
1
7
2
4
V
3
3
1
C
4
P
U
S
3
3
2
3
C
4
P
F
D
2
5
C
4
L
U
D
2
7
V
R
E
F
1
9
C
3
P
U
S
2
1
C
3
P
W
D
1
7
C
3
P
E
D
1
3
C
3
P
F
D
1
5
C
3
L
U
D
2
5
2
7
2
9
1
9
C
3
P
U
S
C
4
L
U
D
2
3
C
3
P
W
D
V
R
E
F
1
7
C
3
P
E
D
1
5
C
3
L
U
D
1
3
C
3
P
F
D
V
R
E
F
1
1
1
D
-
G
N
D
1
6541
2
3
3
C
4
P
U
S
2
1
C
4
P
F
D
C
4
P
E
D
2
5
2
9
2
7
D
-
G
N
D
C
3
P
E
D
C
3
P
F
D
5
V
N
1 2
D
-
G
N
D
3
2
C
3
P
W
D
3
5
V
N
P
D
1 1
12
C
4
P
E
D
2
5
V
N
P
D
3
C
4
P
U
S C
4
P
F
D
2
5
V
N
1
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
3
13
V
R
E
F
32
D
-
G
N
D
21
2
C
3
P
W
D
3
2
3
1
2
4
V
3
1
1
1
2
C
4
P
E
D
2
9
C
3
P
U
S
89
C
4
P
F
D
5
V
N
D
-
G
N
D
7 4
+
2
4
V
3
C
3
P
F
D
5
V
N
D
-
G
N
D
C
3
L
U
D
87
5
V
N
P
D
1
0
3
6541
2
5
V
N
P
D
8
2
912
9 1
1
3
5
V
N
P
D
D
-
G
N
D
7
D
-
G
N
D
C
3
L
U
D
D
-
G
N
D
1
1
0
C
3
P
E
D
56
D
-
G
N
D
5
V
N
P
D
3
9
D
-
G
N
D
1
7
5
V
N
P
D
6
+
2
4
V
2
1 1
1
C
4
L
U
D
1
2
3
5
+
2
4
V
1
0
1
1
C
4
P
E
D
3
C
4
L
U
D
2
1
0
5
V
N
P
D
8
D
-
G
N
D
2
24
C
4
P
U
S
1
+
2
4
V
2
2
C
3
P
U
S
1
S
D
F
1
B
-
2
8
D
E
P
C
N
4
V
H
-
2
P B
0
7
B
-
P
A
S
K
C
P
F
M
_
C
W
/C
C
W
2
2
C
P
F
M
_
C
W
/C
C
W
C
P
F
M
_
G
A
IN
6
C
P
F
M
_
C
W
/C
C
W
7
7
5
V
N
D
-
G
N
D
2
4
V
4
1
53
P
-
G
N
D
1
2
4
V
4
1
/C
P
F
M
_
D
3
P
-
G
N
D
2
D
-
G
N
D
1
5
V
N
2
/C
P
F
M
_
C
K
4
1
3
C
P
F
M
_
L
D
1
3
9
/C
P
F
M
_
D
1
1
/C
P
F
M
_
C
K
C
P
F
M
_
L
D
5
1
5
C
P
F
M
_
G
A
IN
1
3
C
P
F
M
_
L
D
2
4
V
4
1
3
P
-
G
N
D
3
5
D
-
G
N
D
5
7
5
V
N
7
9
/C
P
F
M
_
D
9
1
1
/C
P
F
M
_
C
K
1
1
1
5
C
P
F
M
_
G
A
IN
1
5
2
C
N
6
B
4
0
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
B
2
P
-
P
H
-
K
-
S
B
2
P
-
P
H
-
K
-
S
1
6
1
2
1
8
1
4
P
-
G
N
D
P
-
G
N
D
/C
4
L
U
M
/C
3
L
U
M
P
-
G
N
D
/C
4
L
U
M
12
P
-
G
N
D
/C
3
L
U
M
12
P
H
N
R
-
0
2
-
H
+
B
U
0
2
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
P
H
N
R
-
0
2
-
H
+
B
U
0
2
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
P
H
N
R
-
0
2
-
H
+
B
U
0
2
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
2
112 2
/C
3
P
F
C
2
4
V
3
/T
R
C
2
2
/C
4
P
F
C
1 21 1
12
2
4
V
3
2
4
V
3
P
D
F
1
B
-
3
4
S
C
N
3
B
3
4
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
1
0 68
/T
R
C
2
/C
3
P
F
C
6
/C
4
P
F
C
8
1
0
/T
R
C
2
/C
3
P
F
C
/C
4
P
F
C
68
1
0
C3LUD Tray 3 upper limit detection (Lift HP
detection)
Detects upper limit of tray 3
C3LUM Paper tray lift-up motor (Tray 3) Drives the paper tray lift plate
C3PED Tray 3 paper empty detection Detects the paper empty of tray 3
C3PFC Tray 3 paper feed clutch Controls the paper feed roller ON/OFF on the paper feed section of tray 3
C3PFD Tray 3 paper entry detection Detects paper entry from tray 3
C3PUS Paper pickup solenoid (Tray 3) Controls the paper pickup
C3PWD Tray 3 paper width detection Detects paper width of tray 3
C3SPD Tray 3 remaining quantity detection Detects remaining quantity of tray 3
Detects the tray that is inserted from the detection of either tray 3 rear edge 1, 2, 3 or 4.
Detects paper size of tray 3
C4LUD Tray 4 upper limit detection (Lift HP
detection)
Detects upper limit of tray 4
C4LUM Paper tray lift-up motor (Tray 4) Drives the paper tray lift plate
C4PED Tray 4 paper empty detection Detects the paper empty of tray 4
C4PFC Tray 4 paper feed clutch Controls the paper feed roller ON/OFF on the paper feed section of tray 4
C4PFD Tray 4 paper entry detection Detects the paper entry from tray 4
C4PUS Paper pickup solenoid (Tray 4) Controls the paper pickup
C4SPD Tray 4 remaining quantity detection Detects remaining quantity of tray 4
Detects the tray that is inserted from the detection of either tray 4 rear edge 1, 2, 3 or 4.
Detects paper size of tray 4.
TRC2 Vertical transport clutch lower Controls the transport roller 1, 2, transport roller 3, 4 ON/OFF.
1 Paper pickup roller (No. 3 / No. 4 paper
feed tray)
Pick up paper, and feeds it to the paper feed roller
2 Paper feed roller (No. 3 / No. 4 paper feed
tray)
Feeds paper to the paper transport section
3 Separation roller (No. 3 / No. 4 paper feed
tray)
Separates paper to prevent double feed
double feed
5 Transport roller 1 (Drive) Transports the paper from the paper feed tray 4 to the transport roller 2
6 Transport roller 2 (Drive) Transports the paper from the transport roller 1 to the transport roller 4
7 Transport roller 3 (Drive) Transports the paper from the paper feed tray 3 to the transport roller 4
8 Transport roller 4 (Drive) Transports the paper from the transport roller 2 and the transport roller 3 to the transport roller 5
9 Paper size detection plate The rear edge detection detects the paper size, by changing position to synchronizing with the
rear end plate.
10 Lift plate Lifts up the paper, and always keeps constant the paper feed position.
11 Regulation plate Regulates short side direction of the paper
12 Rear end plate Regulates long side direction of the paper
A. Tandem paper feed
(1) Paper size of each paper feed tray
The paper feed tray 1 is used exclusively for A4, 11 x 8.5, or B5
paper size.
The paper feed tray 2 is used for A4 (11 x 8.5) paper size.
(2) Paper feed operation
1) When copy/print operation is started, the motors (CPFM) and
the clutch (T1PFC) are turned on to turn on the solenoid
(T1PUS) at the timing of paper pickup. This rotates and falls
the take-up roller to pick up paper.
2) At the same time, the paper feed roller rotates to feed paper to
the transport section. At that time, the separation roller rotates
to prevent against double feed of paper.
B. Tray paper feed
(1) Preliminary operation before paper feed
When the paper is set and the paper feed tray is inserted, the
pickup roller moves down and the paper feed tray sensor turns
ON.
The lift-up motor operates to lift the rotating plate.
The paper upper limit sensor turns on to stop the rotating plate at
the specified position.
(2) Paper feed operation
When copy/print operation is started, the motor and the clutch
are turned ON and the pickup roller is rotated in the paper pickup
timing to feed paper.
At the same time, the paper feed roller rotates to feed paper to
the transport section. At that time, the separation roller rotates to
prevent against double feed of paper.
(3) Remaining paper detection
Remaining paper detection is performed according to four
stages, i.e. three stages with paper and one stage with no paper,
and the result is displayed.
(4) Remaining paper detection method
The number of remaining sheets is determined according to the
number of times the remaining paper sensor changes from the
time the paper feed tray starts lifting up to the time when the
upper detection sensor comes ON.
Detects remaining paper
by the paper empty sensor
1/3 Field
Sensor logic: Low
2/3 Field
Sensor logic: Hi
3/3 Field
Sensor logic: Low
Not detects the paper
Remaining paper 1/3 position
Turn plate
CPED
(empty sensor)
Remaining paper
detection actuator
CSPD
(remaining paper detection)
(Figure showing state transition of the remaining paper detection sensor during tray elevation and changes
in status according to the number of remaining sheets)
A. Tandem paper feed tray unit
(1) Tandem paper feed tray unit
1) Remove the right lower door and right lower door cover. (Refer
to the [A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT).
2) Remove the screws (A), and remove the stopper (B). Remove
the screws (C), and remove the tandem paper feed tray unit
(D).
a. Paper pickup roller (Tandem No. 1 / No. 2 paper feed tray),
Paper feed roller (Tandem No. 1 / No. 2 paper feed tray)
Unit Page
A Tandem paper feed tray unit F- 6
B Tray paper feed unit F-11
C Others F-18
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
Page
1 Tandem
paper feed
tray unit
a Paper pickup roller
(Tandem No. 1 / No. 2
paper feed tray)
F- 6
b Paper feed roller (Tandem
No. 1 / No. 2 paper feed
tray)

c Separation roller (Tandem
No. 1 / No. 2 paper feed
tray)
F- 7
d Torque limiter F- 8
e Lift wire (Rear) F- 8
f Lift wire (Front) F-10
Unit
1 Tandem paper feed tray unit
1-a
1-b
1-c
1-c
1-d
1-a 1-d
1-f
1-e
1
1-b
1
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 Tandem paper feed
tray unit
a Paper pickup roller (Tandem
No. 1 / No. 2 paper feed tray)

b Paper feed roller (Tandem

1
C
D
C
B
A
1-a
1-b
1-b
1-a
A
2) Disengage the pawls (B), and remove the paper guide (C).
3) Raise the tandem paper feed PG unit (D). Disengage the pawl
(E), and remove the paper pickup roller (Tandem No. 1 / No. 2
paper feed tray) (F), the paper feed roller (Tandem No. 1 / No.
2 paper feed tray) (G).
b. Separation roller (Tandem No. 1 / No. 2 paper feed tray)
2) Remove the screw (B), and remove the paper guide (C).
3) Disengage the pawl (D), and remove the separation roller (E).
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 Tandem paper feed
tray unit
c Separation roller (Tandem

C
B
F
G E
1-a
1-b
D
1-c
1-c
A
C
B
1-c E
D
c. Torque limiter
2) Remove the screw (B), and remove the paper guide (C).
3) Remove the screws (D), and remove the separation roller unit
(E).
4) Remove the torque limiter (F).
d. Lift wire (Rear)
1) Remove the right lower door and the right lower door cover.
(Refer to the [A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT.)
2) Remove the tandem paper feed tray unit. (Refer to the "(1)
Tandem paper feed tray unit".)
3) Remove the screws (A), and remove the cassette positioning
plate (B).
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 Tandem paper feed
tray unit
d Torque limiter
1-d
1-d
A
C
B
D
E
Unit Parts
1 Tandem paper feed
tray unit
e Lift wire (Rear)
F 1-d
1-e
A
B
4) Remove the E-ring (C). Slide the pulley (D) to rear side, turn it
clockwise to loosen the wires (E).
5) Disengage the pawls (F), and remove the wires (E).
* When installing, the order of the installation on R side is sil-
ver (G), and red (H). L side is blue (I), and red (J).
6) Remove the resin E-rings (K).
7) Remove the wires (L).
* When installing, pass the wire through clamp (M).
* When installing the pulley, turn it counterclockwise, and fit
the shaft hole (O) of pulley and the T form pin (N) position on
the shaft, insert it.
C
D
E
F
E
J
I
G
H
K
K
K
M
L
L
L
L
1-e
1-e
1-e
1-e
N
O
e. Lift wire (Front)
to the EXTERNAL OUTFIT.)
2) Remove the tandem paper feed tray unit. (Refer to the "(1)
3) Remove the screws (A) and washers (B), and remove the front
cabinet (C).
4) Remove the E-ring (D). Slide the pulley (E) to front side, turn it
counterclockwise to loosen the wire (F).
5) Disengage the pawls (G), and remove the wires (F).
* When installing, the order of the installation on R side is sil-
ver (H), and red (I). L side is blue (J), and red (K).
6) Remove the resin E-rings (L).
7) Remove the wires (M).
* When installing, pass the wires (M) through clamp (N).
Unit Parts
1 Tandem paper feed
tray unit
f Lift wire (Front)
1-f
A
A
B
B
B
B
C
A
A
A
B
D
E
F
F
G
K
J
H
I
L
L
L
N
M
M
M 1-f
1-f
1-f
M
1-f
* When installing the pulley, turn it clockwise, and fit the shaft
hole (P) of pulley and the T form pin (O) position on the
shaft, insert it.
B. Tray paper feed unit
(1) Tray paper feed unit
1) Remove the right lower door, the right cabinet lower, and the
right lower door cover. (Refer to the "[A] EXTERNAL OUT-
FIT".)
2) Remove the waste toner box. (Refer to the PHOTOCONDUC-
TOR SECTION.)
3) Reomve the resin E-ring (A), and remove the right vertical
transport unit (B).
4) Remove the screws (C), and remove the supporting point
lower (D) and the paper guides (E).
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
Page
1 Tray paper
feed unit
a Paper pickup roller (No. 3 /
No. 4 paper feed tray)
F-12
b Paper feed roller (No. 3 /

c Separation roller (No. 3 /
F-12
d Transport roller 2, 4 (Drive) F-13
e Torque limiter F-13
f Paper empty detection F-14
g Upper limit detection (Lift
HP detection)
h Entry detection F-15

i Transport roller 1, 3 (Drive) F-16
j Paper pickup solenoid F-17
O
P
1
1-b
1-
g
1-
j
1-c
1-i
1-d
1-e
1-h
1-f
1-a
Unit
1 Tray paper feed unit
1
A
B
C
D
D
E
E
remove the tray paper feed unit (H). Remove the screws (I)
from tray paper feed unit (H), and remove the fixing plate (J).
a. Paper pickup roller (No. 3 / No. 4 paper feed tray), Paper
feed roller (No. 3 / No. 4 paper feed tray)
1) Remove the paper feed tray (A).
2) Disengage the pawl (B), and remove the paper guide (C).
3) Disengage the pawl (D), and remove the paper pickup roller
(No. 3 / No. 4 paper feed tray) (E) and paper feed roller (No. 3
/ No. 4 paper feed tray) (F).
b. Separation roller (No. 3 / No. 4 paper feed tray)
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 Tray paper feed unit a Paper pickup roller (No. 3 /

b Paper feed roller (No. 3 / No.
4 paper feed tray)

F
G
H
H
I
J
1
1
1-b
1-a
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 Tray paper feed unit c Separation roller (No. 3 / No.
4 paper feed tray)

A
C
B
D
E
F 1-b
1-a
1-c
2) Disengage the pawl (B), and remove the separation roller (No.
3 / No. 4 paper feed tray) (C).
c. Transport roller 2, 4 (Drive)
FIT".)
2) Remove the waste toner box. (Refer to the [J] PHOTOCON-
DUCTOR SECTION.)
3) Remove the tray paper feed unit. (Refer to the "(1) Tray paper
feed unit".)
4) Remove the E-ring (A), and remove the belt (B), the pulley (C),
and the parallel pin (D). Remove the E-ring (E), and remove
the bearing (F).
5) Remove the screw (G), and remove the earth plate (H), the E-
ring (I), and the bearing (J). Remove the transport roller 2, 4
(Dirve) (K).
d. Torque limiter
FIT".)
DUCTOR SECTION.)
feed unit".)
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 Tray paper feed unit d Transport roller 2, 4 (Drive)
A
B
C 1-c
1-d
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 Tray paper feed unit e Torque limiter
A
B
C
D
E
F
K
G
H
J
I
1-d
1-e
4) Remove the E-ring (A), the gear (B), the parallel pin (C), the E-
ring (D), and the bearing (E). Remove the screws (F), and
remove the paper guide unit (G).
5) Remove the spring (H). Remove the screws (I), and remove
the support plate (J). Remove the spring (K) and separation
pressure release plate (L).
6) Disengage the pawl (M), and remove the separation roller (N).
Remove the E-ring (O).
7) Slide the separation shaft (P), and remove the bearing (Q).
Remove the separation shaft (P).
8) Remove the E-ring (R), and remove the coupling (S). Remove
the separation shaft (T), and remove the torque limiter (U).
e. Paper empty detection, Upper limit detection (Lift HP
detection)
FIT".)
2) Remove the waste toner box. (Refer to the [J] PHTOCON-
DUCTOR SETCTION.)
feed unit".)
4) Remove the transport roller 2, 4 (Drive). (Refer to the "c.
Transport roller 2, 4 (Drive)".)
F
F
F
G
E
C
D
B
A
I
J
I
K
L
I
H
N
M
O
Unit Parts
1 Tray paper feed unit f Paper empty detection
g Upper limit detection (Lift HP detection)
P
Q
P
T
S
R
U 1-e
1-
g
1-f
5) Remove the screws (A), and remove the paper guide (B).
6) Remove the screws (C) and the screws (D), and remove the
support plate (E).
7) Remove the screws (F), and remove the paper empty detec-
tion (G) and the upper limit detection (Lift HP detection (H)).
Disconnect the connectors (I).
f. Entry detection
right lower door cover. (Refer to the "A. EXTERNAL OUTFIT".)
DUCTOR SECTION.)
feed unit".)
support plate (E).
A
A
B
D
D
D
C C
D
E
C
F
I
H
G
I
1-
g
1-f
Unit Parts
1 Tray paper feed unit h Entry detection
1-h
A
A
B
D
D
D
C C
D
E
C
7) Remove the screw (F) and paper entry detection unit (G). Dis-
connect the connector (H). Remove the screw (I) and paper
entry detection (J).
g. Transport roller 1, 3 (Drive)
FIT".)
DUCTOR SECTION.)
feed unit".)
support plate (E).
7) Remove the E-ring (F), and remove the gear (G), the pulley
(H), and the parallel pin (I). Remove the E-ring (J), and remove
the bearing (K).
8) Remove the screw (L), and remove the earth plate (M), the E-
ring (N), and the bearing (O). Remove the transport roller 1, 3
(Drive) (P).
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 Tray paper feed unit i Transport roller 1, 3 (Drive)
G
H
F
J
I
1-h
1-i
A
A
B
D
D
D
C
C
D
E
C
F
G
H
I
J
K
P 1-i
L
M
N
O
h. Paper pickup solenoid
1) Remove the right lower door, the right cabinet lower, the right
lower door cover. (Refer to the "[A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT".)
DUCTOR SECTION.)
feed unit".)
support plate (E).
7) Disconnect the connector (F), and remove the screws (G), and
remove the paper pickup solenoid unit (H).
* When installing, arrange so that the arm (I) is under the
take-up holder (J).
8) Remove the screws (K), and remove the paper pickup sole-
noid (L).
* When installing, check to insure that the solenoid pin (M) is
engaged with the arm (N).
Unit Parts
1 Tray paper feed unit j Paper pickup solenoid
1-
j
A
A
B
D
D
D
C
C
D
E
C
F
G
G
H
I
J
K
L 1-
j
N
M
C. Others
(1) Paper tray lift-up motor (Tandem tray 1, 2)
1) Remove the rear cabinet and rear cabinet lower. (Refer to the
"[A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT".)
2) Remove the E-ring (A), and remove the belt (B), the pulley (C),
and the parallel pin (D).
* When removal of the paper tray lift-up motor (Tandem tray
2), this procedure is required.
3) Disconnect the connectors (E), and remove the screws (F),
and remove the paper tray lift-up motor (Tandem tray 1, 2) unit
(G).
4) Disengage the pawls (H), and remove the coupling (I) and
spring (J) from the paper tray lift-up motor (Tandem tray 1, 2)
(K).
(2) Paper pickup solenoid (Tandem tray 1)
2) Remove the screws (A), and open the control box (B).
Parts Page
a Paper Tray lift-up motor (Tandem tray 1) F-17
b Paper Tray lift-up motor (Tandem tray 2)
c Paper pickup solenoid (Tandem tray 1) F-17
d Tandem sensor PWB (Tandem tray 1) F-19
e Tandem sensor PWB (Tandem tray 2)
f Tandem tray 1 paper remaining quantity detection F-20
g Tandem tray 2 paper remaining quantity detection
h Tandem tray installation detection F-20
i Tray 3 paper remaining quantity detector F-20
j Tray 4 paper remaining quantity detector
k C3SS PWB F-21
l C4SS PWB
m Tray 3 width detection F-21
Parts
a Paper tray lift-up motor (Tandem tray 1)
b Paper tray lift-up motor (Tandem tray 2)
b
d
f
a
h
i
j
g
k
l
e
c
m
b
a
D
C
B
A
Parts
c Paper pickup solenoid (Tandem tray 1)
E
E
F
G
G
F
H
I
H
J
K a b
c
B
B
A
A
3) Disconnect the connector (C). Disengage the pawls (D), and
remove the duct (E).
remove the ozone duct (H).
5) Disconnect the connector (I). Remove the screws (J), and
remove the paper pickup solenoid (Tandem tray 1) unit (K).
6) Remove the screws (L), and remove the mounting plate unit
(M) from the paper pickup solenoid (Tandem tray 1) (N).
* When installing, pass the shaft (O) through into the arm (P).
(3) Tandem sensor PWB (Tandem tray 1, 2)
1) Remove the right lower door and the right lower door cover.
([A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT.)
2) Remove the tandem paper feed tray unit. (Refer to the "A.
remove the tandem sensor PWB (Tandem tray 1, 2) (C).
D
D
E
C
D
G
G
G
F
H
K
J
I
J
Pa rts
d Tandem sensor PWB (Tandem tray 1)
e Tandem sensor PWB (Tandem tray 2)
M
N
c
L
L
O
P
e d
A
B
d
C
C
e
C
(4) Tandem tray 1, 2 paper remaining quantity
detection
to the [A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT.)
2) Remove the tandem paper feed tray unit. (Refer to the "A.
3) Disconnect the connectors (A), and remove the screws (B).
Remove the harness (D) from the wire saddles (C), and
remove the lock arm unit (E).
4) Disconnect the connectors (F), and remove the tandem tray 1
paper remaining quantity detector (G) and the tandem tray 2
paper remaining quantity detector (H).
(5) Tandem tray installation detection
3) Remove the tandem tray installation detection (C). Disconnect
the connector (D) from tandem tray installation detection (C).
(6) Tray 3, 4 remaining quantity detection
Parts
f Tandem tray 1 paper remaining quantity detection
g Tandem tray 2 paper remaining quantity detection
f g
A
A
B
B
E
B D
C
F
F
H
G f
g
Parts
h Tandem tray installation detection
Parts
i Tray 3 remaining quantity detection
j Tray 4 remaining quantity detection
h
B
A
A
D
C
h
i
j
2) Remove the screw (B), and remove the cover (C). Disconnect
the connector (D), and remove the tray 3, 4 remaining quantity
detection (E).
(7) C3SS, C4SS PWB
2) Disconnect the connector (B). Remove the screw (C), and
remove the holder (D).
3) Disengage the pawls (E), and remove the C3SS, C4SS PWB
unit (F). Remove the springs (G) from the C3SS, C4SS PWB
(H).
(8) Tray 3 width detection
FIT".)
DUCTOR SECTION.)
3) Remove the tray paper feed unit. (Refer to the "B. Tray paper
feed unit".)
Parts
k C3SS PWB
l C4SS PWB
A
B
C
D
E i
j
k
l
A
Parts
m Tray 3 width detection
B
C
D
E E
G
G
G
H
F
k l
m
4) Remove the screws (A), and remove the width detection unit
(B). Disconnect the connector (C).
5) Remove the spring (D). Disengage the pawl (E), and remove
the paper width detection mounting base (F).
6) Remove the width detection arm (G). Remove the screw (H),
and remove the tray 3 width detection (I).
* When installing the width detection arm (G), engage to the
projection (J) of tray 3 width detection (I).
B
A
A
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
m
4. Maintenance
No. Part name
Monochrome
supply,
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the
replacement
parts are
described.)
1 Paper pickup roller Mechanical
parts

2 Paper feed roller
3 Separation roller
4 Torque limiter
1
2
4
3
1
2
1
5
2
4
3
3
4
1
5
2
3
4
MX-7000N PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION G 1
MX-7000N
Sv` Huuuu!

[G] PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION
A. Paper pass unit
T1PPD1 Tandem tray 1 transport detector 1 Detects entry of the paper from the tandem tray 1
T1PPD2 Tandem tray 1 transport detector 2 Detects pass of the paper from the tandem tray 1
TANCL Tandem tray transport clutch Controls the ON/OFF of the transport roller 12 and 13
1 Transport roller 12 (Drive) Transports the paper from the tandem tray 1 to the transport roller 13
TANCL
CPFM
T1PPD1
T1PPD2
2
1
S
D
F
1
B
-
2
8
D
E
P
C
N
4
V
H
-
2
P
B
0
7
B
-
P
A
S
K
P
H
N
R
-
0
2
-
H
+
B
U
0
2
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
P
C
U
P
W
B
DF11-6DP-SP1
C
P
F
M
_
C
W
/
C
C
W
2
2
C
P
F
M
_
C
W
/
C
C
W
C
P
F
M
_
G
A
I
N
6
C
P
F
M
_
C
W
/
C
C
W
7
3 24V3
24V3
8
/
T
A
N
C
L
1
21
1
/
T
A
N
C
L
2
4
V
3
2
7
5
V
N
D
-
G
N
D
2
4
V
4
1
53
P
-
G
N
D
1
2
4
V
4
1
/
C
P
F
M
_
D
3
P
-
G
N
D
2
D
-
G
N
D
1
5
V
N
2
/
C
P
F
M
_
C
K
4
1
3
C
P
F
M
_
L
D
1
3
9
/
C
P
F
M
_
D
1
1
/
C
P
F
M
_
C
K
C
P
F
M
_
L
D
5
1
5
C
P
F
M
_
G
A
I
N
1
3
C
P
F
M
_
L
D
2
4
V
4
1
3
P
-
G
N
D
3
5
D
-
G
N
D
5
7
5
V
N
7
9
/
C
P
F
M
_
D
9
1
1
/
C
P
F
M
_
C
K
1
1
1
5
C
P
F
M
_
G
A
I
N
1
5
2
8
/
T
A
N
C
L
8
4
2
4
V
3
4
4
2
4
V
3
R
S
M
-
6
P
-
N
P
G
P
2
A
2
0
0
L
1
7
9
2
2
8
-
3
G
P
2
A
2
0
0
L
1
7
9
2
2
8
-
3
DF11-8DP-SP1
D-GND
D-GND
1
3 5VNPD
5VNPD
D-GND 1
3
4
5
V
N
1
1
T
1
P
P
D
1
1
3
T
1
P
P
D
1
3
5
V
N
9
1
1
5
V
N
P
D
1
5
V
N
P
D
4
3
3
D
-
G
N
D
2
T
1
P
P
D
2
T
1
P
P
D
2
9
3
D
-
G
N
D
3
1
5
V
N
P
D
1
5
T
1
P
P
D
1
5
6
D
-
G
N
D
3 6
5
V
N
41
D
-
G
N
D
2
T
1
P
P
D
2
2
D
-
G
N
D
1 1
2
1
7
1
9
2
1
1
3
5
V
N
T
1
P
P
D
1
T
1
P
P
D
2
1
1
D
-
G
N
D
B
3
4
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
B
4
0
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
9
5
V
N
P
D
B. Vertical transport unit
T2PPD Tandem tray 2 paper presence detector Detects pass of the paper from the tandem tray 2
TRC1 Vertical transport clutch upper Controls the ON/OFF of the transport roller 5, 6
DSW-D Right lower door open/close detection Detects open/close of the right lower door
2 Transport roller 6 (Drive) Transports the paper from the transport roller 5 and the tandem tray 1 to the transport roller 7
CPFM
TRC1
T2PPD
1
2
DSW_D
S DF1B-28DE P CN4
VH-2P
B07B-PASK B40B-PNDZS-1
PCU PWB
CPFM_CW/CCW 2 2 CPFM_CW/CCW
CPFM_GAIN 6
CPFM_CW/CCW 7
7 5VN
D-GND
24V4 1
5
3 P-GND
1 24V4 1
/CPFM_D 3
P-GND 2
D-GND 1
5VN 2
/CPFM_CK 4
13 CPFM_LD 13
9 /CPFM_D
11 /CPFM_CK
CPFM_LD 5
15 CPFM_GAIN
13 CPFM_LD
24V4 1
3 P-GND 3
5 D-GND 5
7 5VN 7
9 /CPFM_D 9
11 /CPFM_CK 11
15 CPFM_GAIN 15
2
PHNR-03-H + BU03P-TR-P-H P DF1B-34 S CN3
B34B-PNDZS-1 GP2A200L 179228-3
9
5VN 1
1 T2PPD 2
D-GND 3
T2PPD 3
2 D-GND 2
3 5VN
D-GND
5VN 1
9
3
5
3
5
T2PPD
D-GND
5VN
9
3
5
T2PPD
6 /TRC1
4 24V3 4 24V3 4
6 /TRC1 6
24V3 2
2 /TRC1 1
1
D
F
1
1
-
6
D
P
-
S
P
1
21
2
4
V
3
2
4
V
3
D
F
1
1
-
8
D
P
-
S
P
1
(
B
)
D
F
1
1
-
8
D
P
-
S
P
1
(
A
)
1 2
5
V
N
5
V
N
D
=
G
N
D
D
=
G
N
D
1 2
C. LCC transport unit
LPFC LCC transport clutch Controls the ON/OFF of the transport roller of LCC transport section
LPPD LCC paper entry detection sensor Detects entry of the paper from the LCC
1 Transport roller 14 (Drive) Transports the paper from the LCC to the transport roller 15
LPPD
1
LCCM
CPFM
LPFC
2
S
O
C
K
E
T
1
S
O
C
K
E
T
1
DRIVER PWB
T
X
2
4
-
6
0
R
-
L
T
-
H
1
T
X
-
2
5
-
6
0
P
-
L
T
-
H
1
2
6
2
4 PCU PWB
1
8
1
8
2
3
1
5
P
O
M
_
A
2
3
2
4
2
5
/D
R
M
C
L
_
C
N
T
D
M
K
_
E
N
D
M
M
_
E
N
B
T
M
_
C
L
K
2
7
4
9
L
C
C
M
_
B
5
0
L
C
C
M
_
/B
4
7
P
S
F
M
_
C
N
T
4
8
P
S
F
M
_
E
N
4
5
A
D
M
L
_
B
4
6
A
D
M
L
_
/B
4
3
A
D
M
H
_
/B
4
4
/A
D
M
L
_
C
N
T
4
1
D
-
G
N
D
4
2
A
D
M
H
_
B
3
9
P
-
G
N
D
2
8
P
O
M
_
/A
3
7
H
T
M
K
_
2
3
8
5
V
N
3
5
H
T
M
C
_
2
3
2
H
T
M
M
_
1
3
6
H
T
M
K
_
1
3
3
H
T
M
M
_
2
3
4
H
T
M
C
_
1
/P
O
M
_
C
N
T
3
0
D
-
G
N
D
3
1
P
-
G
N
D
2
9
B
T
M
_
E
N
4
7
5
0
P
O
M
_
/B
4
8
4
9
P
O
M
_
B
D
M
Y
_
E
N
5
8
5
9
/B
T
M
_
C
N
T
4
6
/D
M
K
_
C
N
T
5
5
5
6
D
M
C
_
E
N
5
4
5
3
4
5
D
M
K
_
C
L
K
5
2
4
3
4
4
L
C
C
M
_
B
P
S
F
M
_
C
N
T
L
C
C
M
_
/B
5
V
N
5
1
3
7
P
S
F
M
_
E
N
3
8
4
1
4
0
A
D
M
L
_
B
A
D
M
L
_
/B
N
,C
3
9
4
2
2
6
2
9
1
0
/D
R
M
C
L
_
C
N
T
D
M
K
_
E
N
D
-
G
N
D
2
5
P
O
M
_
/A
A
D
M
H
_
B
3
2
A
D
M
H
_
/B
3
3
/A
D
M
L
_
C
N
T
3
4
2
8
H
T
M
K
_
1
2
7
3
5
3
6
3
0
3
1
/P
O
M
_
C
N
T
P
O
M
_
A
/A
D
M
H
_
C
N
T
N
,C
1
1
1
2
1
3
D
-
G
N
D
1
0
A
D
M
H
_
A
A
D
M
H
_
/A
P
-
G
N
D
H
T
M
Y
_
2
P
H
T
M
K
_
1
5
P
H
T
M
K
_
2
4
P
S
F
M
_
C
L
K
D
-
G
N
D
1
6
1
6
A
D
M
L
_
/A
1
7
D
R
M
C
L
_
C
L
K
1
7
P
S
F
M
_
C
L
K
L
C
C
M
_
A
59
1
4
6
81
1
1
2
1
3
9
P
-
G
N
D
23
P
-
G
N
D
H
T
M
Y
_
1
H
T
M
Y
_
2
P
H
T
M
K
_
1
H
T
M
Y
_
1
D
-
G
N
D
W
E
B
_
M
2
2 1
1
47
/A
D
M
H
_
C
N
T
A
D
M
H
_
A
A
D
M
H
_
/A
D
-
G
N
D
6
W
E
B
_
M
1
A
D
M
L
_
/A
L
C
C
M
_
/A
L
C
C
M
_
C
N
T
3
L
C
C
M
_
C
N
T
L
C
C
M
_
A
1
4
W
E
B
_
M
1
5
V
N
W
E
B
_
M
2
8 7
A
D
M
L
_
A
5
V
N
2
0
L
C
C
M
_
/A
1
9
2
0
2
2
2
1
1
9
A
D
M
L
_
A
2
1
1
5
4
0
N
,C
2
2
B
T
M
_
C
L
K
D
R
M
C
L
_
C
L
K
D
M
M
_
E
N
H
T
M
M
_
2
H
T
M
K
_
2
P
-
G
N
D
5
V
N
6
0
5
7
5
1
5
V
N
5
2
D
M
K
_
C
L
K
5
3
/D
M
K
_
C
N
T
5
4
D
M
C
_
E
N
P
H
T
M
K
_
2
5
V
N
H
T
M
C
_
2
H
T
M
M
_
1
P
-
G
N
D
P
-
G
N
D
5
V
N
N
,C
H
T
M
C
_
1
5
5
D
M
Y
_
E
N
5
6
/B
T
M
_
C
N
T
5
7
B
T
M
_
E
N
5
8
P
O
M
_
B
5
9
P
O
M
_
/B
6
0
D
-
G
N
D
C
N
1
B
6
B
-
X
H
B
6
B
-
P
A
S
K
-
1
IN
T
2
4
V
1
IN
T
2
4
V
1
L
C
C
M
_
B
4
L
C
C
M
_
A
/
L
C
C
M
_
B
/
56
L
C
C
M
_
B
IN
T
2
4
V
1
2 4
L
C
C
M
_
A
L
C
C
M
_
B
/
6
L
C
C
M
_
A
/
3
L
C
C
M
_
A
3 12
IN
T
2
4
V
1
5 1
S
D
F
1
B
-
2
8
D
E
P2
5
IN
T
2
4
V
1
2
5
2
7
IN
T
2
4
V
1
2
7
2
1
2
3
L
C
C
M
_
B
2
3
1
7
1
9
L
C
C
M
_
A
/
1
9
1
7
L
C
C
M
_
A
2
1
L
C
C
M
_
B
/
B
3
0
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
1
4
2
4
V
3
1
6
1
4
1
6
/L
P
F
C
1
2
4
V
3
2
2
/L
P
F
C
1
2
4
/L
P
F
C
2
2
2
4
V
3
S
D
F
1
B
-
2
8
D
E
P
V
H
-
2
P
B
0
7
B
-
P
A
S
K
C
P
F
M
_
C
W
/C
C
W
2
2
C
P
F
M
_
C
W
/C
C
W
C
P
F
M
_
G
A
IN
6
C
P
F
M
_
C
W
/C
C
W
7
7
5
V
N
D
-
G
N
D
2
4
V
4
1
53
P
-
G
N
D
1
2
4
V
4
1
/C
P
F
M
_
D
3
P
-
G
N
D
2
D
-
G
N
D
1
5
V
N
2
/C
P
F
M
_
C
K
4
1
3
C
P
F
M
_
L
D
1
3
9
/C
P
F
M
_
D
1
1
/C
P
F
M
_
C
K
C
P
F
M
_
L
D
5
1
5
C
P
F
M
_
G
A
IN
1
3
C
P
F
M
_
L
D
2
4
V
4
1
3
P
-
G
N
D
3
5
D
-
G
N
D
5
7
5
V
N
7
9
/C
P
F
M
_
D
9
1
1
/C
P
F
M
_
C
K
1
1
1
5
C
P
F
M
_
G
A
IN
1
5
2
B
4
0
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
C
N
3
P
H
N
R
-
0
3
-
H
+
B
U
0
3
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
G
P
2
A
2
0
0
L
1
7
9
2
2
8
-
3
B
3
4
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
35 1
1
1
1
L
P
P
D
D
-
G
N
D
5
5
V
N
3
5
V
N
1
3
2
D
-
G
N
D
21
D
-
G
N
D
3 2
5
V
N
1
L
P
P
D
L
P
P
D
3
35 1
1
L
P
P
D
D
-
G
N
D
5
V
N
DF11-8DP-SP1 (B)
DF11-8DP-SP1 (A)
D=GND
D=GND
5VN 3
5VN 1
3
1
D. PS lower unit
1 Transport roller 7 (Drive) Transports the paper from the transport roller 6 and 13 to the transport roller 8
LCCM
1
S
O
C
K
E
T
1
S
O
C
K
E
T
1
DRIVER PWB
T
X
2
4
-
6
0
R
-
L
T
-
H
1
T
X
-
2
5
-
6
0
P
-
L
T
-
H
1
2
6
2
4
PCU PWB
1
8
1
8
2
3
1
5
P
O
M
_
A
2
3
2
4
2
5
/
D
R
M
C
L
_
C
N
T
D
M
K
_
E
N
D
M
M
_
E
N
B
T
M
_
C
L
K
2
7
4
9
L
C
C
M
_
B
5
0
L
C
C
M
_
/
B
4
7
P
S
F
M
_
C
N
T
4
8
P
S
F
M
_
E
N
4
5
A
D
M
L
_
B
4
6
A
D
M
L
_
/
B
4
3
A
D
M
H
_
/
B
4
4
/
A
D
M
L
_
C
N
T
4
1
D
-
G
N
D
4
2
A
D
M
H
_
B
3
9
P
-
G
N
D
2
8
P
O
M
_
/
A
3
7
H
T
M
K
_
2
3
8
5
V
N
3
5
H
T
M
C
_
2
3
2
H
T
M
M
_
1
3
6
H
T
M
K
_
1
3
3
H
T
M
M
_
2
3
4
H
T
M
C
_
1
/
P
O
M
_
C
N
T
3
0
D
-
G
N
D
3
1
P
-
G
N
D
2
9
B
T
M
_
E
N
4
7
5
0
P
O
M
_
/
B
4
8
4
9
P
O
M
_
B
D
M
Y
_
E
N
5
8
5
9
/
B
T
M
_
C
N
T
4
6
/
D
M
K
_
C
N
T
5
5
5
6
D
M
C
_
E
N
5
4
5
3
4
5
D
M
K
_
C
L
K
5
2
4
3
4
4
L
C
C
M
_
B
P
S
F
M
_
C
N
T
L
C
C
M
_
/
B
5
V
N
5
1
3
7
P
S
F
M
_
E
N
3
8
4
1
4
0
A
D
M
L
_
B
A
D
M
L
_
/
B
N
,
C
3
9
4
2
2
6
2
9
1
0
/
D
R
M
C
L
_
C
N
T
D
M
K
_
E
N
D
-
G
N
D
2
5
P
O
M
_
/
A
A
D
M
H
_
B
3
2
A
D
M
H
_
/
B
3
3
/
A
D
M
L
_
C
N
T
3
4
2
8
H
T
M
K
_
1
2
7
3
5
3
6
3
0
3
1
/
P
O
M
_
C
N
T
P
O
M
_
A
/
A
D
M
H
_
C
N
T
N
,
C
1
1
1
2
1
3
D
-
G
N
D
1
0
A
D
M
H
_
A
A
D
M
H
_
/
A
P
-
G
N
D
H
T
M
Y
_
2
P
H
T
M
K
_
1
5
P
H
T
M
K
_
2
4
P
S
F
M
_
C
L
K
D
-
G
N
D
1
6
1
6
A
D
M
L
_
/
A
1
7
D
R
M
C
L
_
C
L
K
1
7
P
S
F
M
_
C
L
K
L
C
C
M
_
A
59
1
4
6
81
1
1
2
1
3
9
P
-
G
N
D
23
P
-
G
N
D
H
T
M
Y
_
1
H
T
M
Y
_
2
P
H
T
M
K
_
1
H
T
M
Y
_
1
D
-
G
N
D
W
E
B
_
M
2
2 1
1
47
/
A
D
M
H
_
C
N
T
A
D
M
H
_
A
A
D
M
H
_
/
A
D
-
G
N
D
6
W
E
B
_
M
1
A
D
M
L
_
/
A
L
C
C
M
_
/
A
L
C
C
M
_
C
N
T
3
L
C
C
M
_
C
N
T
L
C
C
M
_
A
1
4
W
E
B
_
M
1
5
V
N
W
E
B
_
M
2
8 7
A
D
M
L
_
A
5
V
N
2
0
L
C
C
M
_
/
A
1
9
2
0
2
2
2
1
1
9
A
D
M
L
_
A
2
1
1
5
4
0
N
,
C
2
2
B
T
M
_
C
L
K
D
R
M
C
L
_
C
L
K
D
M
M
_
E
N
H
T
M
M
_
2
H
T
M
K
_
2
P
-
G
N
D
5
V
N
6
0
5
7
5
1
5
V
N
5
2
D
M
K
_
C
L
K
5
3
/
D
M
K
_
C
N
T
5
4
D
M
C
_
E
N
P
H
T
M
K
_
2
5
V
N
H
T
M
C
_
2
H
T
M
M
_
1
P
-
G
N
D
P
-
G
N
D
5
V
N
N
,
C
H
T
M
C
_
1
5
5
D
M
Y
_
E
N
5
6
/
B
T
M
_
C
N
T
5
7
B
T
M
_
E
N
5
8
P
O
M
_
B
5
9
P
O
M
_
/
B
6
0
D
-
G
N
D
C
N
1
B
6
B
-
X
H
B
6
B
-
P
A
S
K
-
1
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
L
C
C
M
_
B
4
L
C
C
M
_
A
/
L
C
C
M
_
B
/
56
L
C
C
M
_
B
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
24
L
C
C
M
_
A
L
C
C
M
_
B
/
6
L
C
C
M
_
A
/
3
L
C
C
M
_
A
3 12
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
5 1
S
D
F
1
B
-
2
8
D
E
P2
5
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
2
5
2
7
I
N
T
2
4
V
1
2
7
2
1
2
3
L
C
C
M
_
B
2
3
1
7
1
9
L
C
C
M
_
A
/
1
9
1
7
L
C
C
M
_
A
2
1
L
C
C
M
_
B
/
E. PS unit
PFM PS front transport motor Drives the transport roller
PPD1 Resist pre-detection Detects the paper of the resist roller front
PPD2 Resist detection Detects the paper of the resist roller front
RRC PS clutch Controls the ON/OFF of the resist roller
RRC2 PS clutch 2 Brakes the resist roller
RRM PS motor Drives the resist roller
1 Transport roller 8 (Drive) Transports the paper to the resist roller.
2 Resist roller (Drive) Transports the paper to the transfer section. Controls the paper transport timing to adjust relative
relations between images and paper.
3 Resist roller (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the resist roller to give paper the transport power of the transport
roller
PPD1
1
PPD2
RRC2
RRC
PFM
RRM
2
3
DRIVER
PWB
P DF1B-18DE S
CN9
B6P-PH-K-S
B7B-PASK-1
CN14
B6P-PH-K-S
PCU PWB
B30B-PNDZS-1
P-GND
12 /RRM_CK
/RRM_D
8 RRM_LD 8
6
17 INT24V2 17
2 P-GND
INT24V1 2
INT24V1 5
6
5 5 PFM_B/ 3
PFM_B
PFM_A 4
PFM_A/ 1
PFM_A
7
1
3 PFM_A/ 3
1
PFM_B/
7
/RRM_D
2
/RRM_CK 4
6
4
INT24V1 9
11
9
13 24V3 13
1 24V3 2
6
/RRM_CK 4
/RRM_D 5
PFM_A
1
P-GND 2
15 /RRC 15
PFM_A/
2
4
3
RRM_LD 16
24V3
/RRC 10
8
2
14
4
INT24V2
2 /RRC 1
INT24V1 11
PFM_B
INT24V1
5
1 INT24V1
PFM_B
6
PFM_B/
N.C 3
INT24V2
RRM_LD
PHNR-8-H
BU08P-TR-P-H
CN14
QSW-Z0538
GP2A200L
PHR-3
179228-3
PHNR-2-H
BU02P-TR-P-H
B30B-PNDZS-1
5VNPD(LED) 1
5VNPD
4 5VNPD(LED)
3
5VNPD 1
2 2
3
2
PPD1 3 5
21 6 D-GND
PPD1
28
23 4
D-GND
5
6
3
26
D-GND
1 /RRC2
24V 2
2
1
1
PPD1
D-GND
PPD2 PPD2 PPD2
D-GND
24V3
5VNPD
7
8
/RRC2 2 29 /RRC2
30
27 D-GND
7
8
5VNPD(LED)
25
1 24V3
Paper is fed from each paper feed section and transported to the
resist roller by the transport rollers.
ON/OFF of each transport roller is controlled of by the paper trans-
port clutch.
The resist roller controls the relative positions of transported paper
and the transfer image.
The resist roller is driven by the transport motor.
The relative positions of paper and the transfer image are deter-
mined by the ON timing of the transport motor.
A. Paper pass unit
(1) Paper pass unit
1) Romove the front cabinet, the right lower door, and the right
2) Remove the tandem paper feed tray unit. (Refer to the "[F]
TRAY PAPER FEED SECTION".)
remove the paper pass unit (C).
a. Transport roller 12 (Drive)
3) Remove the paper pass unit. (Refer to the "(1) Paper pass
unit".)
4) Remove the screw (A), and remove the sheet (B). Remove the
screw (C). Disengage the pawl (D), and remove the earth plate
(E).
* When installing the screw (C), apply thread locking material.
Unit Page
A Paper pass unit G- 6
B Vertical transport unit G- 8
C LCC transport unit G-11
D PS lower unit G-14
E PS unit G-15
F Others G-19
Unit Parts Mainte
nance
Page
1 Paper pass
unit
a Transport roller 12 (Drive) G- 6
b Transport roller 13 (Drive) G- 7
c Tandem tray 1 transport
detector 1
G- 7
d Tandem tray 1 transport
detector 2
G- 8
Unit
1 Paper pass unit
1-a
1-c
1-d
1-b
1
1
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 Paper pass unit a Transport roller 12 (Drive)
B
C
A
1
1-a
E
D
A
B
C
5) Remove the E-rings (F) and the bearings (G), and remove the
transport roller 12 (Drive) (H).
b. Transport roller 13 (Drive)
1) Romove the front cabinet, the right lower door, and right lower
door cover. (Refer to the "[A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT".)
unit".)
5) Remove the screw (C). Disengage the pawl (D), and remove
the earth plate (E).
* When installing the screw (C), apply thread locking material.
6) Remove the E-rings (F) and the bearings (G), and remove the
transport roller 13 (Drive) (H).
c. Tandem tray 1 transport detector 1
unit".)
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 Paper pass unit b Transport roller 13 (Drive)
F
G
H 1-a
F
G
1-b
A
A
B
Unit Parts
1 Paper pass unit c Tandem tray 1 transport detector 1
E
D
C
F
G
H
1-b
G
F
1-c
4) Remove the screw (A), and remove the tandem tray 1 trans-
port detector 1 (B). Disconnect the connector (C).
d. Tandem tray 1 transport detector 2
unit".)
5) Remove the screw (C), and remove the tandem tray 1 trans-
port detector 2 (D). Disconnect the connector (E).
B. Vertical transport unit
(1) Vertical transport unit
right lower door cover. (Refer to the [A] EXTERNAL OUT-
FIT.)
2) Remove the waste toner bottle. (Refer to the [J] PHOTOCON-
DUCTOR SECTION.)
3) Remove the resin E-ring (A), and remove the right vertical
transport unit (B).
Unit Parts
1 Paper pass unit d Tandem tray 1 transport detector 2
A
B
C
1-c
1-d
A
A
B
D
C
E
1-d
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
Page
1 Vertical
transport unit
a Transport roller 5 (Drive) G- 9
b Transport roller 6 (Drive) G- 9
c Tandem tray 2 transport
detector
G-10
d Right door open/close
detection sensor
G-11
Unit
1 Vertical transport unit
1-b
1-a
1-c
1
1-d
1
A
B
4) Release the lock (C), and open the right door unit (D).
5) Disconnect the connectors (E), and remove the screws (F),
and remove the vertical transport unit (G).
right door cover. (Refer to the [A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT.)
2) Remove the waste toner box. ([J] PHOTOCONDUCTOR SEC-
TION.)
3) Remove the vertical transport unit. (Refer to the "(1) Vertical
transport unit".)
4) Remove the E-ring (A), the gear (B), the parallel pin (C), and
the gear collar (D). Remove the E-rings (E), and remove the
bearing (F).
5) Remove the screw (G), and remove the earth plate (H).
Remove the E-ring (I), and remove the bearing (J). Remove
the transport roller 5 (Drive) (K).
b. Transport roller 6 (Drive)
FIT.)
DUCTOR SECTION.)
transport unit".)
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 Vertical transport unit a Transport roller 5 (Drive)
C
D
E
E
F
F
G 1
1-a
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 Vertical transport unit b Transport roller 6 (Drive)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K 1-a
1-b
5) Remove the E-ring (C), the gear (D), the parallel pin (E), and
the gear collar (F). Remove the E-rings (G), and remove the
bearing (H).
6) Remove the screw (I), and remove the earth plate (J). Remove
the E-ring (K), and remove the bearing (L). Remove the trans-
port roller 6 (Drive) (M).
c. Tandem tray 2 transport detector
FIT.)
DUCTOR SECTION.)
transport unit".)
5) Disconnect the connector (C). Remove the screw (D), and
remove the tandem tray 2 transport detector (E).
A
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M 1-b
Unit Parts
1 Vertical transport unit c Tandem tray 2 transport detector
1-c
A
A
B
C
D
E 1-c
d. Right lower door open/close detection sensor
1) Remove the right lower door, the right cabinet lower, the right
door cover. (Refer to the [A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT.)
DUCTOR SECTION.)
transport unit".)
4) Remove the right lower door open/close detection sensor (A).
C. LCC transport unit
(1) LCC transport unit
LCC lower cabinet. (Refer to the "[A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT".)
Unit Parts
1 Vertical transport unit d Right lower door open/close detection
sensor
1-c
A 1-d
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
Page
1 LCC
transport unit
a Transport roller 14 (Drive) G-12
b Transport roller 15 (Drive) G-12
c LCC paper entry detection
sensor
G-13
Unit
1 LCC transport unit
1-a
1-b
1-c
1
1
A
B
remove the earth wire (E) and LCC transport unit (F).
2) Remove the LCC transport unit. (Refer to the "(1) LCC trans-
port unit".)
3) Disengage the pawls (A), and remove the cover (B).
bearing (H).
5) Remove the E-ring (I), and remove the bearing (J). Remove
the transport roller 14 (Dirve) (K).
b. Transport roller 15 (Dirve)
port unit".)
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 LCC transport unit a Transport roller 14 (Drive)
D
D
F
C
D
E
1
1-a
A
A
B
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 LCC transport unit b Transport roller 15 (Drive)
C
D
E
F
H
G
I
J
K 1-a
1-b
3) Disengage the pawls (A), and remove the cover (B).
bearing (H).
5) Remove the E-ring (I), and remove the bearing (J). Remove
the transport roller 15 (Dirve) (K).
c. LCC paper entry detection sensor
port unit".)
4) Remove the screws (C) and the earth wire (D), and remove the
support plate (E).
A
A
B
C
D
E
F
H
G
K 1-b
I
J
Unit Parts
1 LCC transport unit c LCC paper entry detection sensor
1-c
A
A
B
C
C
E
D
5) Remove the screw (F), and remove the LCC paper entry
detection sensor (G). Disconnect the connector (H).
D. PS lower unit
(1) PS lower unit
2) Remove the LCC transport unit. (Refer to the "C. LCC trans-
port unit".)
3) Remove the paper dust removal cleaner. (Refer to the F. Oth-
ers.)
4) Remove the PS unit. (Refer to the "E. PS unit".)
5) Remove the screws (A), and remove the PS lower unit (B).
1) Remove the right lower door , the right cabinet lower, and the
2) Remove the LCC transport unit. (Refer to the "C. LCC trans-
port unit".)
ers.)
4) Remove the PS unit. (Refer to the "E. PS unit".)
5) Remove the PS lower unit. (Refer to the D. PS lower unit.)
6) Remove the screws (A), and remove the earth plate (B) and
supporting point holder (C). Remove the paper guide (D).
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
Page
1 PS lower unit a Transport roller 7 (Drive) G-14
Unit
1 PS lower unit
F
H
G
1
1-a
1
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 PS lower unit a Transport roller 7 (Drive)
A
A
B
1
1-a
D
B
A
C
7) Remove the screws (E), and remove the support plate (F).
8) Remove the screws (G) and screws (H), and remove the paper
guide (I).
9) Disengage the pawl (J), and remove the earth plate (K).
Remove the E-ring (L), and remove the bearing (M).
10) Remove the E-ring (N), the gear (O), the parallel pin (P), the
gear collar (Q). Remove the E-rings (R), and remove the bear-
ing (S). Remove the transport roller 7 (Drive) (T).
E. PS unit
(1) PS unit
ers.)
F
E
E
I
H
H
G
G
M
L
K
J
T
S
R
Q
P
N
O
1-a
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
Page
1 PS unit a Resist detection G-16
b Resist pre-detection G-17
c Resist roller (Drive) G-17
d Transport roller 8 (Drive) G-18
e Resist roller (Idle) G-18
f PS clutch 2 G-19
Unit
1 PS unit
1-a
1-c
1-e
1-b
1-d
1-f
1
1
A
B
3) Remove the screw (C), and remove the cover (D).
* When installing, engage the pawl (E) to the frame.
4) Remove the screw (F), and remove the harness cover (G).
5) Disconnect the connector (H) and the snap band (I). Remove
the screw (J), and remove the PS unit (K).
a. Resist detection
ers.)
2) Remove the PS unit. (Refer to the "(1) PS unit".)
3) Remove the screws (A), and remove the stay (B).
4) Remove the screw (C), and remove the resist detection (D).
Disconnect the connector (E).
C
D
E
F
G
J
H
I
K 1
Unit Parts
1 PS unit a Resist detection
1-a
A
A
A
B
A
A
A
A
C
D
E
1-a
b. Resist pre-detection
ers.)
4) Remove the screw (C), and the remove the mounting plate
(D). Disconnect the connector (E), and resist pre-detection (F).
c. Resist roller (Drive)
ers.)
3) Remove the snap band (A). Disconnect the connector (B).
Remove the screw (C), and remove the holder (D).
* When installing, check to insure that the clutch rotation-stop
projection is engaged with the rib of the holder.
4) Remove the screw (E), and remove the earth spring (F).
Remove the screw (G), and remove the coupling (H). Remove
the E-ring (I), and the gear (J), and the parallel pin (K).
Remove the E-ring (L), and remove the bearing (M).
* When installing, apply thread locking material to the screw
(G).
Unit Parts
1 PS unit b Resist pre-detection
1-b
A
A
A
B
A
A
A
A
C
D
E
F
1-b
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 PS unit c Resist roller (Drive)
1-c
C
A
C
D
B
J
H
I
K
L
M
G
F
E
5) Remove the E-ring (N) and the gear (O). Remove the E-ring
(P) and bearing (Q), and remove the resist roller (Drive) (R).
d. Transport roller 8 (Drive)
ers.)
3) Remove the snap band (A). Disconnect the connector (B).
Remove the screw (C), and remove the holder (D).
* When installing, check to insure that the clutch rotation-stop
projection is engaged with the rib of the holder.
4) Remove the screw (E), and the earth spring (F). Remove the
screw (G), and remove the coupling (H). Remove the E-ring (I)
and the bearing (J).
* When installing, apply thread locking material to the screw
(G).
5) Remove the E-ring (K), and remove the gear (L). Remove the
E-ring (M), and remove the bearing (N). Remove the transport
roller 8 (Dirve) (O).
e. Resist roller (Idle)
ers.)
Unit
Parts Mainte
nance
1 PS unit d Transport roller 8 (Drive)
N
O
P
Q
R 1-c
1-d
C
A
C
D
B
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 PS unit e Resist roller (Idle)
G
H
I
J
E
F
O
K
L
M
N
1-d
1-e
4) Clean the resist roller (Idle) (C).
f. PS clutch 2
ers.)
3) Disconnect the connector (A) and the E-ring (B), and remove
the PS clutch 2 (C).
* When installing, check to insure that the clutch rotation stop-
per is engaged with the rib of the holder.
F. Others
(1) Paper dust removal cleaner
Unit Parts
1 PS unit f PS clutch 2
A
A
A
B
A
A
A
A
C 1-e
1-f
Parts
Mainte
nance
Page
a Paper dust removal cleaner G-19
A B
C 1-f
a
A
2) Remove the paper dust removal cleaner (B), and clean the
paper dust.
4. Maintenance
B
a
No. Part name
Monochrome
supply,
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the
replacement
parts are
described.)
1 Resist roller (Idle) Mechanical
parts

3 Paper dust removal cleaner (P/G No. : [48]-10)
(P/G No. : [48]-11)
(P/G No. : [48]-12)
1
2
2
2
3
2
MX-7000N DUPLEX SECTION H 1
MX-7000N
Sv` Huuuu!

[H] DUPLEX SECTION
POD3
ADMH
ADUGS
DSW_ADU
APPD1
APPD2
ADML
TFD_R
1
4
5
6
2
3
P
H
N
R
-
2
-
H
+
B
U
0
2
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
C
N
1
5
C
N
2
C
N
1
G
P
1
S
7
3
1
7
9
2
2
8
-
3
P
H
N
R
-
6
-
H
+
B
U
0
6
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
G
P
1
S
7
3
1
7
9
2
2
8
-
3
G
P
1
S
7
3
1
7
9
2
2
8
-
3
S
1
6
B
-
P
H
D
S
S
-
B
G
P
1
S
7
3
1
7
9
2
2
8
-
3
P
H
N
R
-
3
-
H
+
B
U
0
3
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
S
1
6
B
-
P
H
D
S
S
-
B
P
Q
R
/P
4
4
0
P
IN
S
B
4
0
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
C
N
3
(
1
/2
)
RIGHT DOOR I/F PWB
G
P
1
S
7
3
1
7
9
2
2
8
-
3
P
H
N
R
-
0
8
-
H
+
B
U
0
8
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
S
3
2
B
-
P
H
D
S
S
-
B
13
5
V
N
(
L
E
D
)
P
O
D
3
2
4
D
-
G
N
D
5
D
-
G
N
D
6
5
V
N
P
D
(
L
E
D
)
8
3
P
O
D
3
5
V
N
P
D
(
L
E
D
)
6 5
2
D
-
G
N
D
2
1 3
A
P
P
D
1
1
1
2
5
V
N
P
D
(
L
E
D
)
D
-
G
N
D
1
1
1
D
-
G
N
D
3
0
3
2
2
8
2
6
M
P
F
D
2
9
3
1
S
E
L
IN
1
3
3
S
E
L
IN
2
D
-
G
N
D
1 2 3
D
-
G
N
D
1
5
V
N
P
D
(
L
E
D
)
3
5
V
N
(
L
E
D
)
D
S
W
_
A
D
U
D
-
G
N
D
2 3
5
V
N
P
D
(
L
E
D
)
6
3
D
-
G
N
D
T
F
D
-
R
5
V
N
(
L
E
D
)
2 12 1
4
4
P
O
D
3
5
V
N
P
D
(
L
E
D
)
2
D
-
G
N
D
3
5
V
N
(
L
E
D
)
D
-
G
N
D
5
1
2
4
V
3
2
2
T
F
D
-
R
T
F
D
-
R
2
5
5
V
N
2
1
2
4
V
3
/A
D
U
G
S
2
7
2
3
9
/A
D
U
G
S
2
4
V
3
5
V
N
2
5
1
5
V
N
4
0
F
-
G
N
D
3
/A
D
U
G
S
1
1
2 1
1
2
D
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
A
P
P
D
1
D
S
W
_
A
D
U
79
5
V
N
(
L
E
D
)
1
0
M
P
F
D
A
P
P
D
1
1
5
5
V
N
P
D
H
W
P
D
T
H
_
M
H
U
D
_
M
1
1
1
6
1
3
1
4
6
S
IN
3
3
S
E
L
IN
1
47
S
E
L
IN
2
P
O
D
3
1
0
A
P
P
D
2
8
A
D
U
D
3
9 5
S
E
L
IN
3
H
U
D
_
M
S
IN
3
1
8
363
2
2
0
5
V
N
P
D
S
E
L
IN
1
A
P
P
D
2
D
-
G
N
D
2
H
W
P
D
1
7
A
P
P
D
1
7
M
P
F
D
S
E
L
IN
3
P
O
D
3
92
5
72
3
4
0
1
7
2
1
63
2
28
8
H
U
D
_
M
T
H
_
M
2
3
1
9
2
1
4
S
E
L
IN
2
T
H
_
M
3
7
3
5
S
E
L
IN
3
H
W
P
D
S
IN
3
5
V
N
P
D
2
0
P
O
D
3
2
2
2
4
A
P
P
D
1
3
9
A
P
P
D
2
5
V
N
P
D
(
L
E
D
)
4
A
P
P
D
2
5
D
-
G
N
D
6
1
8
31
9
4
13
A
P
P
D
1
6
5
V
N
P
D
(
L
E
D
)
5
V
N
P
D
(
L
E
D
)
2
D
-
G
N
D
A
P
P
D
2
3
8
A
P
P
D
2
1
7
D
-
G
N
D
2
C
N
7
S
6
B
-
P
H
-
S
M
3
S
6
B
-
P
H
-
S
M
3
P
Q
R
/P
4
4
0
P
IN
S
B
1
2
B
-
P
A
S
K
-
1
3
7
IN
T
2
4
V
1
3
7
3
5
A
D
M
H
_
B
3
5
3
4
IN
T
2
4
V
1
3
4
3
6
A
D
M
H
_
A
/
3
6
3
8
A
D
M
H
_
B
/
3
8
1
6
IN
T
2
4
V
1
1
6
3
3
A
D
M
H
_
A
3
3
5
1
2
A
D
M
L
_
A
/
1
2
1
0
A
D
M
L
_
B
/
1
1
A
D
M
L
_
B
1
0
2
2
1
1
IN
T
2
4
V
1
1
0
2
2
A
D
M
L
_
B
/
IN
T
2
4
V
1
5
A
D
M
L
_
A
/
1
A
D
M
L
_
B
6
IN
T
2
4
V
1
2
A
D
M
L
_
B
/
3 4
A
D
M
L
_
A
8
IN
T
2
4
V
1
1
2
A
D
M
L
_
A
1
1
A
D
M
L
_
A
/
5
A
D
M
L
_
A
2
IN
T
2
4
V
1
1
IN
T
2
4
V
1
9
A
D
M
L
_
B
7
IN
T
2
4
V
1
6
A
D
M
H
_
A
/
3 5
A
D
M
H
_
A
4
A
D
M
H
_
B
/
A
D
M
H
_
B
IN
T
2
4
V
1
5
A
D
M
H
_
B
6
A
D
M
H
_
A
IN
T
2
4
V
1
2 4
A
D
M
H
_
A
/
1
A
D
M
H
_
B
/
3
S
O
C
K
E
T
1
S
O
C
K
E
T
1
DRIVER PWB
T
X
2
4
-
6
0
R
-
L
T
-
H
1
T
X
-
2
5
-
6
0
P
-
L
T
-
H
1
2
6
2
4
PCU PWB
1
8
1
8
2
3
1
5
P
O
M
_
A
2
3
2
4
2
5
/D
R
M
C
L
_
C
N
T
D
M
K
_
E
N
D
M
M
_
E
N
B
T
M
_
C
L
K
2
7
4
9
L
C
C
M
_
B
5
0
L
C
C
M
_
/B
4
7
P
S
F
M
_
C
N
T
4
8
P
S
F
M
_
E
N
4
5
A
D
M
L
_
B
4
6
A
D
M
L
_
/B
4
3
A
D
M
H
_
/B
4
4
/A
D
M
L
_
C
N
T
4
1
D
-
G
N
D
4
2
A
D
M
H
_
B
3
9
P
-
G
N
D
2
8
P
O
M
_
/A
3
7
H
T
M
K
_
2
3
8
5
V
N
3
5
H
T
M
C
_
2
3
2
H
T
M
M
_
1
3
6
H
T
M
K
_
1
3
3
H
T
M
M
_
2
3
4
H
T
M
C
_
1
/P
O
M
_
C
N
T
3
0
D
-
G
N
D
3
1
P
-
G
N
D
2
9
B
T
M
_
E
N
4
7
5
0
P
O
M
_
/B
4
8
4
9
P
O
M
_
B
D
M
Y
_
E
N
5
8
5
9
/B
T
M
_
C
N
T
4
6
/D
M
K
_
C
N
T
5
5
5
6
D
M
C
_
E
N
5
4
5
3
4
5
D
M
K
_
C
L
K
5
2
4
3
4
4
L
C
C
M
_
B
P
S
F
M
_
C
N
T
L
C
C
M
_
/B
5
V
N
5
1
3
7
P
S
F
M
_
E
N
3
8
4
1
4
0
A
D
M
L
_
B
A
D
M
L
_
/B
N
,C
3
9
4
2
2
6
2
9
1
0
/D
R
M
C
L
_
C
N
T
D
M
K
_
E
N
D
-
G
N
D
2
5
P
O
M
_
/A
A
D
M
H
_
B
3
2
A
D
M
H
_
/B
3
3
/A
D
M
L
_
C
N
T
3
4
2
8
H
T
M
K
_
1
2
7
3
5
3
6
3
0
3
1
/P
O
M
_
C
N
T
P
O
M
_
A
/A
D
M
H
_
C
N
T
N
,C
1
1
1
2
1
3
D
-
G
N
D
1
0
A
D
M
H
_
A
A
D
M
H
_
/A
P
-
G
N
D
H
T
M
Y
_
2
P
H
T
M
K
_
1
5
P
H
T
M
K
_
2
4
P
S
F
M
_
C
L
K
D
-
G
N
D
1
6
1
6
A
D
M
L
_
/A
1
7
D
R
M
C
L
_
C
L
K
1
7
P
S
F
M
_
C
L
K
L
C
C
M
_
A
59
1
4
6
81
1
1
2
1
3
9
P
-
G
N
D
23
P
-
G
N
D
H
T
M
Y
_
1
H
T
M
Y
_
2
P
H
T
M
K
_
1
H
T
M
Y
_
1
D
-
G
N
D
W
E
B
_
M
2
2 1
1
47
/A
D
M
H
_
C
N
T
A
D
M
H
_
A
A
D
M
H
_
/A
D
-
G
N
D
6
W
E
B
_
M
1
A
D
M
L
_
/A
L
C
C
M
_
/A
L
C
C
M
_
C
N
T
3
L
C
C
M
_
C
N
T
L
C
C
M
_
A
1
4
W
E
B
_
M
1
5
V
N
W
E
B
_
M
2
8 7
A
D
M
L
_
A
5
V
N
2
0
L
C
C
M
_
/A
1
9
2
0
2
2
2
1
1
9
A
D
M
L
_
A
2
1
1
5
4
0
N
,C
2
2
B
T
M
_
C
L
K
D
R
M
C
L
_
C
L
K
D
M
M
_
E
N
H
T
M
M
_
2
H
T
M
K
_
2
P
-
G
N
D
5
V
N
6
0
5
7
5
1
5
V
N
5
2
D
M
K
_
C
L
K
5
3
/D
M
K
_
C
N
T
5
4
D
M
C
_
E
N
P
H
T
M
K
_
2
5
V
N
H
T
M
C
_
2
H
T
M
M
_
1
P
-
G
N
D
P
-
G
N
D
5
V
N
N
,C
H
T
M
C
_
1
5
5
D
M
Y
_
E
N
5
6
/B
T
M
_
C
N
T
5
7
B
T
M
_
E
N
5
8
P
O
M
_
B
5
9
P
O
M
_
/B
6
0
D
-
G
N
D
Paper which had been sent from the fusing section is sent to the
paper exit roller 1 from the transport roller 13 that is driven by the
ADU motor upper.
At that time, paper passes under the gate guide.
After the specified time from detection of paper lead edge by
POD1, the paper exit drive motor is rotated forward, and after the
specified time, it is rotated reversely.
The paper exit drive motor rotates reversely, paper is transported
to the reverse section. At that time, paper passes the right side of
the ADU gate guide by its own weight.
The transport roller 10 and the transport roller 11 that are driven
by the ADU motor lower transport the paper to the duplex paper
feed position.
Paper is stopped at the duplex paper feed position, and trans-
ported to the inside of the machine again.
A. Right door unit
ADMH ADU motor upper Drives the transport roller
ADML ADU motor lower Drives the duplex (ADU) section
ADUGS ADU gate solenoid Controls the right paper exit gate
APPD1 ADU transport pass detection 1 Detects paper pass in the upstream of the duplex (ADU).
APPD2 ADU transport pass detection 2 Detects paper pass in the midstream of the duplex (ADU).
DSW_ADU ADU transport open/close detection Detects the duplex (ADU) cover open/close
POD3 Right tray paper exit detection Detects the paper exit into the right tray
TFD_R Right tray paper exit full detection Detects the right tray paper exit full
1 Transport roller 10 (Drive) Transports the paper transported from the transport roller 17 to the transport roller 11.
2 Transport roller 11 (Drive) Transports the paper transported from the transport roller 10 to the transport roller 16.
3 Transport roller 17 (Drive) Transports the paper transported from the paper exit roller 1 to the paper exit roller 2
/ Transports the paper to the duplex (ADU) section
4 Transport roller 2 (Drive) Ejects the paper to the right tray
5 Right paper exit gate Switching the paper path route which transports the paper to the duplex (ADU) section or ejects
the paper to the right paper tray.
6 ADU reverse gate When transporting the paper to the duplex (ADU) section, executes switchback for switching the
paper transport route.
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
Page
1 Right door
unit
a RD I/F PWB H- 3
b ADU motor upper H- 4
c ADU motor lower H- 5
d Right tray paper exit full
detection
H- 6
e Right tray paper exit
detection
f Discharge brush H- 7
g ADU transport pass
detection 1
H- 8
h ADU transport pass
detection 2
H- 9
i ADU transport open/close
detection
H- 9
j ADU gate solenoid H-10
k Transport roller 2 (Drive) H-11
l Transport roller 17 (Drive) H-12
m Transport roller 10 (Drive) H-13
n Transport roller 11 (Drive) H-14
o Right paper exit gate H-15
1-a
1-b
1-
j
1-e
1-l
1-f
1-f
1-k
1-o
1-m
1-
g
1-c
1-h
1-n
1-d
1-i
1
(1) Right door unit
2) Remove the screws (C), and remove the front cover (D).
3) Remove the screws (E), and remove the right door unit (B).
a. RD I/F PWB
Unit
1 Right door unit
1
A
B
C
D
C
Unit Parts
1 Right door unit a RD I/F PWB
E
B
E
E
1
1-a
A
B
2) Remove the screw (C), and remove the slide rail (D).
3) Remove the screws (E). Remove the screw (F), and remove
the inner cover (G).
remove the RD I/F PWB (J).
b. ADU motor upper
C
D
E
E
F
G
H
J
I
I
H
H
1-a
Unit Parts
1 Right door unit b ADU motor upper
1-b
A
B
C
D
4) Remove the screws (H), and remove the stay (I).
5) Disconnect the connector (J), and remove the the screws (K),
and remove the ADU motor upper (L).
c. ADU motor lower
2) Remove the screws (C). Remove the screw (D), and remove
the inner cover (E).
E
E
F
G
H
H
H
H
I
J
K
K
L 1-b
Unit Parts
1 Right door unit c ADU motor lower
1-c
A
B
C
C
D
E
3) Disconnect the connector (F), and remove the the screws (G),
and remove the ADU motor lower unit (H).
4) Remove the screws (I), and remove the ADU motor lower (J).
d. Right tray paper exit full deteciton, Right tray paper exit
detection
3) Remove the screws (F), and remove the rear cover (G).
4) Disconnect the connector (H). Remove the screws (I) and the
screws (J), and remove the right paper exit unit (K).
Unit Parts
1 Right door unit d Right tray paper exit full detection
e Right tray paper exit detection
F
H
G
G
G
I
I
J
1-c
1-e
1-d
A
B
C
C
D
E
F
F
F
G
H
K
I
I
J
J
5) Remove the screws (L), and remove the cover (M). Remove
the screws (N), and remove the cover (O).
6) Disconnect the connectors (P), and remove the screws (Q),
and remove the right tray paper exit full detection unit (R) and
right tray paper exit detection unit (S).
7) Remove the right tray paper full detection (U) and right tray
paper exit detection (V) from the sensor mounting plate (T).
e. Discharge brush
1) Relese the lock (A), open the right door unit (B).
L
L
L
O
M
N
N
N
P
P
R
S
Q
Q
T
T
V
U
1-d
1-e
Unit Parts
1 Right door unit f Discharge brush
1-f
A
B
C
C
D
E
4) Disconnect the connector (H), and remove the screws (I), the
screws (J), and remove the right paper exit unit (K).
5) Remove the screws (L), and remove the cabinet (M).
6) Check the discharge brush (N).
f. ADU transport pass detection 1
2) Remove the screws (C), and remove the reverse PG unit (D).
3) Remove the screw (E). Remove the ADU transport path detec-
tion unit (F). Disconnect the connector (G), and remove the
ADU transport path detection 1 (H).
F
F
F
G
H
K
I
I
J
J
L
L
L
M
N 1-f
Unit Parts
1 Right door unit g ADU transport pass detection 1
1-g
A
B
C
C
C
C
D
E
H
F
G
1-g
g. ADU transport pass detection 2
2) Remove the screws (C), and remove the paper guide (D).
3) Remove the screws (E), and remove the pressure plate (F).
Remove the springs (G).
4) Remove the screw (G), and remove the ADU transport path
detection unit (H). Disconnect the connector (I), and remove
the ADU transport path detection 2 (J).
h. ADU transport open/close detection
Unit Parts
1 Right door unit h ADU transport pass detection 2
1-h
A
B
C
C
D
E
E
E
E
F
G
G
Unit Parts
1 Right door unit i ADU transport open/close detection
G
J
H
I
1-h
1-i
A
B
3) Remove the screw (F), and remove the ADU transport open/
close detection unit (G). Disconnect the connector (H), and
remove the ADU transport open/close detection (I).
i. ADU gate solenoid
4) Remove the screws (H), and remove the stay (I).
Unit Parts
1 Right door unit j ADU gate solenoid
C
C
D
E
F
I
G
H
1-i
1-j
A
B
C
D
E
E
F
G
H
H
H
H
I
5) Disconnect the connector (J), and remove the screws (K), and
remove the ADU motor upper unit (L).
6) Disconnect the connector (M) and remove the screws (N), and
the ADU gate solenid unit (O).
7) Remove the screws (P), and remove the ADU gate solenoid
(Q).
j. Paper exit roller 2 (Drive)
1) Remove the ADU gate solenoid. (Refer to the "i. ADU gate
solenoid".)
2) Remove the screws (A), and remove the rear cover (B).
3) Disconnect the connector (C). Remove the screws (D) and the
screws (E). Remove the right paper exit unit (F).
J
K
K
K L
M
N
N
O
P
P
Q 1-j
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 Right door unit k Paper exit roller 2 (Drive)
1-k
A
A
A
B
C
F
D
D
E
E
4) Remove the screws (G), and remove the front cover (H).
5) Remove the screw (I), and remove the bearing plate (J).
Remove the E-ring (K), the gear (L), the parallel pin (M), the E-
ring (N), and the bearing (O).
6) Remove the screw (P), and remove the earth plate (Q).
Remove the E-ring (R) and the bearing (S), and remove the
paper exit roller 2 (Drive) (T).
k. Transport roller 17 (Drive)
G
G
H
I
J
K
L M
N
O
P
T
Q
R
S
1-k
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 Right door unit l Transport roller 17 (Drive)
1-l
A
B
C
C
D
E
3) Remove the screw (F), and remove the rear cover (G).
4) Disconnect the connector (H). remove the screws (I) and the
screws (J). Remove the right paper exit unit (K).
5) Disconnect the connector (L), and remove the screws (M), and
remove the ADU motor upper unit (N).
6) Remove the screws (O), and remove the front cover (P).
7) Remove the belt (Q). Remove the E-ring (R), and remove the
pulley (S), the parallel pin (T), the E-ring (U), and the bearing
(V).
8) Remove the E-rings (W), and remove the pulleys (X), the par-
allel pins (Y), and the belt (Z).
9) Remove the E-ring (a), and remove the bearing (b). Remove
the transport roller 17 (Drive) (c).
l. Transport roller 10 (Drive)
F
F
F
G
H
K
I
I
J
J
L
M
M
M
N
O
O
P
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 Right door unit m Transport roller 10 (Drive)
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
W
X
X
Y
Y
Z
a
b
c
1-l
1-m
3) Remove the screws (F), and remove the front cover (G).
4) Open the open/close door (H).
the E-ring (K), and remove the bearing (L).
6) Remove the E-ring (M), and remove the pulley (N), the parallel
pin (O), and the belt (P).
7) Remove the E-ring (Q), and remove the bearing (R). Remove
the transport roller 10 (Drive) (S).
m. Transport roller 11 (Drive)
A
B
C
C
D
E
F
G
F
H
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 Right door unit n Transport roller 11 (Drive)
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
1-m
1-n
3) Remove the screws (F), and remove the front cover (G).
4) Open the open/close door (H).
the E-ring (K), and remove the pulley (L), the belt (M), the par-
allel pin (N), the E-ring (O), and the bearing (P).
6) Remove the E-ring (Q), and remove the bearing (R). Remove
n. Right paper exit gate
A
B
C
C
D
E
F
G
F
H
Unit Parts
1 Right door unit o Right paper exit gate
I
J K
O
L M
N
P
Q
S
R
1-n
1-o
4) Disconnect the connector (H). Remove the screws (I) and
screws (J). Remove the right paper exit unit (K).
5) Remove the E-ring (L), and slide the bearing (M). Remove the
right paper exit gate (N), and remove the bearings (M).
A
B
C
C
D
E
F
F
F
G
H
K
I
I
J
J
L
M
M
M
N
1-o
4. Maintenance
No. Part name
Monochrome
supply,
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the
replacement
parts are
described.)
1 Each transport roller Mechanical
parts

2 Discharge brush
1
2
MX-7000N LSU SECTION i 1
MX-7000N
Sv` Huuuu!

[i] LSU SECTION
LSUFM
TH1
TH2
PGM
LSS_CL
LSS_BK
1
2
9
9
12
13
13
9
10
11
4
5
6
7
3
8
C
N
1
B
2
0
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
C
N
6
B
0
7
B
-
P
A
S
K
-
1
S
4
B
-
P
H
-
K
-
S
C
N
6
B
0
7
B
-
P
A
S
K
-
1
B
4
P
-
P
H
-
K
-
R
S
M
1
5
B
-
G
H
B
-
T
B
C
N
4
B
3
4
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
S
1
0
B
-
P
H
-
K
-
S
C
N
4
B
3
4
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
S
1
0
B
-
P
H
-
K
-
S
C
N
4
B
3
4
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
S
1
0
B
-
P
H
-
K
-
S
34
1
n
B
D
12
2 3 5
5
V
3
T
H
1
D
-
G
N
D
+
5
V
_
L
D
8
3
V
R
E
F
_
K
n
B
D
+
5
V
_
L
D
D
-
G
N
D
12
2 1
V
r
e
f
_
K
1
D
-
G
N
D
5
V
3
D
-
G
N
D
T
H
1
6
D
-
G
N
D
4
34
D
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
74
D
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
D
T
_
K
-
61
8
1
4
D
T
_
K
2
+
D
A
T
A
+
_
K
1
/
L
D
O
F
F
4
n
E
N
B
_
K
D
-
G
N
D
56
D
T
_
K
+
D
-
G
N
D
3
791
0
D
A
T
A
-
_
K
1
D
-
G
N
D
8
D
A
T
A
+
_
K
2
D
A
T
A
-
_
K
2
D
T
_
C
-
D
T
_
C
+
D
-
G
N
D
I
N
T
5
V
/
S
H
_
C
/
E
N
B
_
C
D
-
G
N
D
V
r
e
f
_
C
L
D
C
H
K
_
C
n
L
D
E
R
R
_
C
D
-
G
N
D
I
N
T
5
V
/
S
H
_
M
/
E
N
B
_
M
D
T
_
M
-
D
T
_
M
+
D
-
G
N
D
V
r
e
f
_
M
D
-
G
N
D
I
N
T
5
V
1
0
9876543
L
D
C
H
K
_
M
n
L
D
E
R
R
_
M
21
/
S
H
_
Y
/
E
N
B
_
Y
D
T
_
Y
-
D
T
_
Y
+
D
-
G
N
D
V
r
e
f
_
Y
L
D
C
H
K
_
Y
n
L
D
E
R
R
_
Y
2 41 87653
1
5
1
3
4321
1
7
1
9
1
0
9
1
8
1
6
1
4
2
0
2
2
2
13
4
3
3
2
9
3
1
3
0
2
8
3
2
2
6
2
7
2
5
D
T
_
M
+
D
-
G
N
D
V
r
e
f
_
M
L
D
C
H
K
_
M
n
L
D
E
R
R
_
M
D
-
G
N
D
I
N
T
5
V
n
L
D
E
R
R
_
Y
D
-
G
N
D
V
r
e
f
_
Y
D
T
_
M
-
D
T
_
Y
+
L
D
C
H
K
_
Y
/
S
H
_
Y
/
E
N
B
_
Y
D
T
_
Y
-
D
-
G
N
D
I
N
T
5
V
/
S
H
_
M
/
E
N
B
_
M
/
S
H
_
K
1
1
1
L
D
E
R
R
1
4
/
S
H
_
K
2
1
2
L
D
C
H
K
5
2
0
1
06 5
87 9
1
6
I
N
T
5
V
/
E
N
B
_
C
/
S
H
_
C
D
T
_
C
-
281
0
9
L
D
C
H
K
_
C
n
L
D
E
R
R
_
C
V
r
e
f
_
C
D
-
G
N
D
V
r
e
f
_
K
2
L
D
C
H
K
_
K
1
5
1
0
1
3
3
1
2
D
-
G
N
D
+
5
V
D
T
_
C
+
1
14
1
7
n
S
H
B
_
K
1
9
n
S
H
B
_
K
2
D
-
G
N
D
7
1
3
T
H
2
_
1
n
S
H
_
K
D
T
_
K
2
-
V
R
E
F
_
K
2
n
L
D
E
R
R
_
K
n
S
H
_
K
2
1
6
51
5
9
CN8 B08B-PASK-1
S4B-PH-K-S
CN8 B08B-PASK-1
B6B-PH-SM3-TB
CN2 B03B-PASK-1
nPOLY_START
P-GND
nPOLY_CK
nPOLY_LOCK
TH2_2 8
24V 6
GND 5
D-GND 4
CLOCK
1
TH2
3
7
BRAKE
3
4
1 6
5
LOCK
D-GND
3
24V1
n FANRDY
P-GND
1
2
24V
2
3
nBREAK
4
2
START/STOP
CN8
/LSS_CL /LSS_CL
P SM2P-N R
CN9
S6B-XA
CN5
PCU PWB
B40B-PNDZS-1
CN6
S20B-PADSS-1
CN3
MOTHER
PWB
B32B-PNDZS-1
S24B-PADSS-1
N.C 23
N.C 24
14
13
12
11
18
17
HSYNC_LSU_N
HSYNC_LSU_P
D-GND
D-GND
ECLK_LSU_P
ECLK_LSU_N 16
15
22
21
19
20
VSYNC_Y_N
1
1
D-GND
19
20
VSYNC_M_P
VSYNC_M_N
VSYNC_Y_P
VSYNC_Y_N
HSYNC_LSU_P
HSYNC_LSU_N
ECLK_LSU_P
ECLK_LSU_N
D-GND
D-GND
VSYNC_K_P
VSYNC_K_N
VSYNC_C_P
VSYNC_C_N
18
D-GND
3.3V
D-GND
5VN
24V3
P-GND
13
14
15
16
24V3 5 17
2
P-GND 6
D-GND 3
5VN 4
2
3
D-GND
CLCLK_N
CH2_N
10
11
9
CH3_P
CH3_N
CLCLK_P
D-GND
16
22
21
20
19 14
13
12
30
29
23
28
27
26
25
D-GND
4
24
5
6
7
8
18
17
15
CLCLK_P
CH3_N
CH3_P
D-GND
CH2_P
D-GND
D-GND
CLCLK_N
D-GND
CH0_N
CH0_P
D-GND
D-GND
CH1_N
CH1_P
CH2_N
CH1_N
CH2_P
CH0_N
D-GND
D-GND
CH1_P
2
CH0_P
16
17
18
32 1
31
4
3
D-GND 1
6
5
11
12
8
7
13
3.3V
VSYNC_C_N
VSYNC_M_N
VSYNC_M_P
VSYNC_Y_P
n TRANS_RST 9
10
VSYNC_K_N
14
15
12
JOBEND_INT
LSUTH1
LSUTH2
10
11
VSYNC_K_P
VSYNC_C_P
LSU PWB
INT5V INT5V 1
LSUTH2
n TRANS_RST
JOBEND_INT
D-GND 2 2 D-GND
D-GND 3 3 D-GND
n SCK_LSU 4 4 n SCK_LSU
n TRANS_DATA 5 5 n TRANS_DATA
7 LSUASIC_RST
D-GND 6 6 D-GND
n RSV_DAT 8
LSUTH1
9
LSUASIC_RST 7
8 n RSV_DAT
1
2 2
INT24V2 1 3
40
9 INT24V2
S DF1B-28DE P
/LSS_BK /LSS_BK /LSS_BK
P SM2P-B R
INT24V2
2 2 20 20 38
18 INT24V2 18 37 1 INT24V2 1
A. Outline
Converts the image data (has been sent by way of PCU from the
image processing circuit) to laser beam, and irradiates to the OPC
drum surface.
The LSU unit is composed of the primary system (including optical
elements such as lasers and the polygon mirror and the mirror
which assures the optical path) and the scan system (which
includes the optical elements including the polygon mirror and the
mirror which assures the optical path).
By the once scanning, black laser LD sends two laser beams of
BK1 and BK2 at same time for high-speed print.
The interval in the sub-scanning direction of two laser beams is
42.3 , also interval at image surface is 70 . The interval in the
paper feed direction of two laser beams is 70 by electrically con-
trolled.
Since interval of the laser beams is adjusted at shipping, adjust-
ment about that is not required at the later.
B. Composition
(1) Primary system
(2) Scan system
(3) polygon motor
C. Outline of LSU specifications
LSS_BK LSU shutter solenoid BK Opens/closes the shutter of the LSU (BK)
LSS_CL LSU shutter solenoid CL Opens/closes the shutter of the LSU (CL)
LSUFM LSU cooling fan motor Cools the polygon motor.
PGM Polygon mirror motor Reflects the laser beams at constant-speed rotating.
TH1 LSU therminstor 1
Measures the temperature in LSU.
TH2 LSU therminstor 2
1 LD PWB (K)
Controls laser beam flashing and the output value.
2 LD PWB (C)
3 LD PWB (M)
4 LD PWB (Y)
5 Cylindrical lens
Collects the laser beams, and focuses it. 6 fu lens 1
7 fu lens 2
8 Reflection mirror Secures the path for laser beams.
9 Cylindrical lens Collects the laser beams, and focuses it on the OPC drum.
10 Collective lens for BD Condenses the laser beam to the BD PWB.
11 BD PWB Detects the timing for starting laser scanning.
12 LSU CNT PWB Laser beams are controlled and the polygon motor control signal is generated according to the
PCU PWB control signal and image data.
13 OPC drum Forms electrostatic latent images according to laser beams.
Model
Number
of mirror
surface
Rotating speed Bearing
Model of 55 sheets 7 surfaces Color :
Monochrome :
35028 rpm
30371 rpm
AIR
Model of 62 sheets
Model of 70 sheets Color :
Monochrome :
35028 rpm
35939 rpm
Effective scan width: 307 mm
Resolution: 600 dpi
Beam diameter: Main scan = 50 to 65 m, Sub scan = 60 to 75 m
Laser power: Max. 0.8 mW
LD wavelength: 770 to 800 nm
D. Serial label
There is the LSU serial label on the LSU fan side.
Unit is different in each model of 55 or 62 or 70 sheets.
A. LSU
(1) LSU
1) Remove the left cabinet. (Refer to the "[A] EXTERNAL OUT-
FIT".)
2) Remove the screws (A), and remove the left plate (B).
3) Loosen the screws (C), and remove the screw (D). Remove
the screw (E), and remove the fixing plate (F). Remove the
snap band (G), and disconnect the connectors (H) and shift it
to the rear side, and remove the LSU (I) so that slide it to rear
side.
* When installing, insert the shaft (J) to cut-out portion of the
skew adjuster (K).
* After installing the LSU, be sure to check the condition of
skew image. Carry out the adjustment according to neces-
sity.
a. Dust-proof glass
Unit Page
A LSU i - 3
B Others i - 7
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
Page
1 LSU a Dust-proof glass i - 3
b LSU CNT PWB i - 4
c LSU cooling fan motor i - 5
d Polygon motor i - 5
e LSU thermistor 2
f LSU thermistor 1 i - 6
Unit
1 LSU
MODEL LSU CD UN 70
00000000
MODEL LSU CD UN 62
00000000
MODEL LSU CD UN 50
00000000
1
1-a
1-b
1-c
1-d
1-f
1-a
1-e
1-a
1
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 LSU a Dust-proof glass
B
A
A
A
C
E
F
I
H
H
1
D
G
J
K
1-a
1-a
1-a
1-a
2) Remove the claning rod (B).
3) Check the dirt of the cleaning base (C) (tip of the cleaning rod).
* When cleaning base is dirty, replace it. (Refer to the "B. Oth-
ers".)
4) Insert the cleaning rod (B) in the hole which cleaning is
required so that the cleaning base is made downward slowly.
5) Insert the cleaning rod (B) all the way and slide it back and
forth a few times for cleaning.
6) Clean all the cleaning holes (D) (4-positions) on the dustproof
glass.
* When the cleaning base became extremely dirty, replace it.
(Don't cleaning use dirty cleaning base other dustproof
glasses.)
b. LSU CNT PWB
1) Remove the left cabinet. (Refer to the [A] EXTERNAL OUT-
FIT.)
2) Remove the LSU. (Refer to the "(1) LSU".)
3) Remove the screws (A), and remove the earth wire (B).
Remove the cover (C).
* When installing the cover (C), engage the pawls (D) to cover
lower (E). At this time be careful it bite the wire.
A
B
C
B
B
B
Unit Parts
1 LSU b LSU CNT PWB
D 1-a
1-b
B
C
D
D
E
A
4) Disconnect the connectors (F), and remove the screws (G)
and the screw (H), and remove the LSU CNT PWB (I).
* When installing, first of all install the screw (H).
* When installing, engage the PWB to the pawl (J).
c. LSU cooling fan motor
FIT)
4) Remove the screws (F), and remove the cover (G).
* When removing the cover (G), be careful to work place and
method, to don't enter the dust into the unit. Trouble (image
not fully etc.) may occur.
* When installing the cover, lock the pawl (H).
5) Disconnect the connector (I). Remove the molt (J), and
remove the LSU cooling fan motor (K).
* When installing, point at the direction of outside with the
arrow (L).
d. Polygon motor, LSU thermistor 2
FIT.)
Unit Parts
1 LSU c LSU cooling fan motor
F F
H
G
I
G
1-b
J
1-c
B
C
D
D
E
A
Unit Parts
1 LSU d Polygon motor
e LSU thermistor 2
G
F
H
K
J
I
1-c
J
K
I
L
1-e
1-d
4) Remove the screws (F), and remove the cover (G).
* When removing the cover (G), be careful to work place and
method, to don't enter the dust into the unit. Trouble (image
not fully etc.) may occur.
* When installing the cover, lock the pawl (H).
5) Disconnect the connector (I), and remove the screws (J), and
remove the polygon motor (K). Disconnect the connector (L).
* When disassembling, be careful to drop the screw (etc.)
inside the LSU.
* Don't touch the cover glass surface (M) of polygon motor.
6) Loosen the screw (N), and remove the LSU thermistor 2 (O).
Disconnect the connector (P).
* When disassembling, be careful to drop the screw (etc.)
inside the LSU.
e. LSU thermistor 1
FIT.)
2) Remove the LSU. (Refer to the (1) LSU.)
3) Remove the screws (A), and remove the earth wire (B) and
cover (C).
B
C
D
D
E
A
G
F
H
K
I
J
1-d L
M
Unit Parts
1 LSU f LSU thermistor 1
O
P
N
1-e
1-f
C
A
A
A
B
A
4) Remove the screw (D), and remove the LSU thermistor 1 (E).
Disconnect the connector (F).
B. Others
(1) LSU shutter solenoid CL
FIT.)
remove the LSU shutter solenoid CL unit (C).
* When installing, insert the U-cut part (D) of solenoid arm to
the shaft (E).
remove the LSU shutter solenoid CL (H).
* When installing, hook the solenoid pin (I) to the solenoid arm
(J).
(2) LSU shutter solenoid BK
Parts
Mainte
nance
Page
a LSU shutter solenoid CL i - 7
b LSU shutter solenoid BK i - 7
c Cleaning base i - 9
Parts
a LSU shutter solenoid CL
D
E
F
1-f
b
a
c
a
Parts
b LSU shutter solenoid BK
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
G
H
I
J
a
b
3) Remove the screws (C), and remove the flywheel (D).
* Check to confirm that has not come in contact with the har-
ness etc.
4) Disconnect the connector (E). Remove the screws (F). Disen-
gage the pawl (G), and remove the duct (H).
remove the LSU shutter solenoid BK uint (K).
* When installing, engage the shutter drive shaft (L) to the
solenoid arm (M).
6) Disconnect the connector (N), and remove the snap band (O).
Remove the screws (P), and remove the mounting plate (Q).
* When installing, engage the spring (R) to the groove (S) of
the mounting plate and the groove (T) of the solenoid arm.
7) Disengage the pawl (U), and remove the LSU shutter solenoid
BK (V).
B
B
A
A
C
D
C
G
F
H
E
J
K
L
M
I
N
P
P
Q
R
S
T
O
V
U
b
(3) Cleaning base
2) Remove the cleaning rod (B).
3) Remove the dirty cleaning base (C).
4) Open the cover (D), and pull out the cleaning base (E) for
replacement.
5) Attach the new cleaning base (F) to the mounting hole with fit-
ting to the pawl.
Parts
Mainte
nance
c Cleaning base
c
A
B
C c
D
E
F
4. Maintenance
No. Part name
Monochrome
supply,
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the
replacement
parts are
described.)
1 Dust-proof glass Mechanical
parts

2 Cleaning base (P/G No. : [2]-50)
(P/G No. : [49]-40)
1
2
1
1
1
MX-7000N PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION J 1
MX-7000N
Sv` Huuuu!

[J] PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION
A. OPC drum unit
S
D
F
1
B
-
2
2
D
E
P
C
N
1
8
B
3
0
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
D
-
G
N
D
5
6
6
C
C
M
D
C
C
P
_
R
O
T
31
5
V
N
P
D
8
8
5
V
N
P
D
S
D
F
1
B
-
3
4
D
E
P
C
N
1
3
B
4
0
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
2
6
2
6
C
C
M
_
a
C
C
M
_
a
3
3
3
5
C
C
M
_
b
2
8
2
8
C
C
M
_
b
P
S
-
2
5
0
(
W
H
)
M
C
-
K
V
H
R
-
2G
B
-
K
PCU
PWB
G
B
-
C
C
N
1
C
N
6
2
4
V
3
P
-
G
N
D
G
B
-
M
MC PWB
IN
T
2
4
V
2
P
-
G
N
D
/H
V
_
D
A
T
A
/H
V
_
C
L
K
G
B
-
Y
/H
V
_
L
D
1
B
0
8
B
-
P
A
S
K
B
4
0
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
P
S
-
1
8
7
(
W
H
)
M
C
-
C
M
Y
1
0
5678
/H
V
_
D
A
T
A
#
/H
V
_
C
L
K
#
/H
V
_
L
D
1
#
H
V
_
R
E
M
#
2
4
V
3
3
IN
T
2
4
V
2
P
-
G
N
D
1 24
P
-
G
N
D
H
V
_
R
E
M
#
1 235768
DRIVER
PWB
C
N
5
B
6
B
-
P
H
-
K
-
S
B
1
3
B
-
P
A
S
K
-
1
D
M
_
K
_
A
1
7
IN
T
2
4
V
1
2
IN
T
2
4
V
1
5
D
M
_
K
_
B
D
M
_
K
_
A
/
D
M
_
K
_
B
D
M
_
K
_
B
/
IN
T
2
4
V
1
IN
T
2
4
V
1
3
D
M
_
K
_
B
/
1 6
D
M
_
K
_
A
4
D
M
_
K
_
A
/
1
5
IN
T
2
4
V
1
1
5
2 61 53 4
IN
T
2
4
V
1
1
3
1
3
D
M
_
K
_
B
1
7
1
9
D
M
_
K
_
B
/
1
9
2
1
D
M
_
K
_
A
/
2
1
2
3
D
M
_
K
_
A
2
3
S
D
F
1
B
-
3
4
D
E
P
R
S
M
6
P
S
D
F
1
B
-
3
4
D
E
P
C
N
5
B
1
3
B
-
P
A
S
K
-
1
R
S
M
6
P
C
N
6
R
S
M
6
P
B
1
4
B
-
P
A
S
K
-
1
IN
T
2
4
V
1
6
D
M
_
C
_
A
2
3
5 26 13 4 4
D
M
_
C
_
A
/
1
IN
T
2
4
V
1
D
M
_
C
_
B
/
D
M
_
C
_
B
5 43 2
1
0
D
M
_
C
_
B
/
D
M
_
C
_
A
D
M
_
M
_
B
/
D
M
_
M
_
B
IN
T
2
4
V
1
2
7
IN
T
2
4
V
1
8
IN
T
2
4
V
1
1
1
D
M
_
C
_
A
/
1
2
D
M
_
C
_
B
9
6
D
M
_
M
_
A
/
IN
T
2
4
V
1
1 5
D
M
_
M
_
A
/
6
135
D
M
_
Y
_
A
D
M
_
Y
_
B
D
M
_
Y
_
B
/
13 2
D
M
_
Y
_
A
/
4
1
2
1
0
D
M
_
M
_
A
2
3
25
IN
T
2
4
V
1
D
M
_
Y
_
A
D
M
_
Y
_
A
/
46 3
D
M
_
Y
_
B
1
D
M
_
Y
_
B
/
5
IN
T
2
4
V
1
3 2
D
M
_
M
_
A
96 8 1
1
IN
T
2
4
V
1
4 1 56
2
1
D
M
_
M
_
A
/
2
1
2
5
IN
T
2
4
V
1
3
D
M
_
M
_
B
7
2
5
4
D
M
_
M
_
B
1
7
IN
T
2
4
V
1
D
M
_
M
_
B
/
2
IN
T
2
4
V
1
D
M
_
M
_
A
D
M
_
C
_
B
5
7
D
M
_
C
_
B
/
7
9
D
M
_
C
_
A
/
9
1
1
D
M
_
C
_
A
1
1
IN
T
2
4
V
1
1
3
IN
T
2
4
V
1
3
D
M
_
M
_
B
/
1
9
IN
T
2
4
V
1
1
3
IN
T
2
4
V
1
1
5
2
9
2
7
IN
T
2
4
V
1
2
9
D
M
_
Y
_
B
2
D
M
_
Y
_
A
2
3
1
D
M
_
Y
_
B
/
3
3
D
M
_
Y
_
A
/
3
1
3
3
2
7
1
7
1
9
1
3
1
551
IN
T
2
4
V
1
S
D
F
1
B
-
2
2
D
E
P
C
N
9
S
3
B
-
P
H
-
K
-
S
B
3
0
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
1
D
L
_
K
#
1
2 3
3
4
4
2
4
V
_
D
L
2
1
2
4
V
1
1
2
4
V
_
D
L
2
4
V
_
D
L
7
D
L
_
K
#
3
9
D
L
_
K
#
3
3
D
L
_
K
#
P
H
N
R
-
1
0
-
H
,B
U
1
0
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
S
D
F
1
B
-
2
6
D
E
P
C
N
7
5
3
2
5
4
-
0
3
1
0
P
H
N
R
-
1
0
-
H
,B
U
1
0
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
5
3
2
5
4
-
0
3
1
0
P
H
N
R
-
1
0
-
H
,B
U
1
0
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
5
3
2
5
4
-
0
3
1
0
B
3
0
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
D
L
_
Y
#
D
-
G
N
D
6
6
D
-
G
N
D
6
8
D
L
_
Y
#
8
1
D
-
G
N
D
2
9
D
L
_
Y
#
1
0
D
-
G
N
D
123
D
L
_
Y
#
D
L
_
M
#
1
1
9
D
L
_
M
#
1
D
-
G
N
D
1
1
9 3
D
L
_
C
#
D
-
G
N
D
1
9
D
-
G
N
D
2 1
3
D
L
_
C
#
3
1
7
D
-
G
N
D
1
7
1
0
D
L
_
M
#
D
L
_
M
#
3
1
7
D
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
1
9
D
-
G
N
D
2
1
D
-
G
N
D
D
L
_
C
#
3
1
0
D
L
_
C
#
1
9
8
DL_C
DL_M
DM_Y
DM_M
DM_C
DM_K
MC
MC
MC
MC
DL_Y
GB
GB
GB
GB
MC
MC
MC
1
1
1
1
2
2
GB
GB
DL_K
DL_K
CCM
CCMD
2 1
1
2
CCM Charger cleaner motor Cleans the charge unit
CCMD CCM rotation detection Detects rotation of the charger cleaner motor
DL_C Discharge lamp (C)
Discharging the OPC drum
DL_K Discharge lamp (K)
DL_M Discharge lamp (M)
DL_Y Discharge lamp (Y)
DM_C Drum motor_C
Drives the OPC drum unit
DM_K Drum motor_K
DM_M Drum motor_M
DM_Y Drum motor_Y
GB Grid The OPC drum surface potential is controlled
MC Charge unit The OPC drum surface is charged negatively
1 OPC drum Latent electrostatic images are formed
2 Cleaning blade Residual toner is cleaned and removed from the OPC drum surface
B. Waste toner section
CFM Charger air inlet fan motor Sends air to the charge unit of OPC drum unit (BK)
TBBOX Waste toner box sensor Detects the installation state of the waste toner box
TNFD Waste toner full detection Detects the waste toner full
WTM Waste toner drive motor Stirs waste toner
1 Waste toner transport screw Transports the waste toner to the transport pipe
2 Waste toner transport pipe Transports the waste toner to the waste toner box
3 Waste toner transport screw Transports the waste toner from the waste toner pipe to the waste toner box
4 Waste toner box Receives waste toner when copying or printing, and collects it
TNFD
TBBOX
WTM
CFM
1
1
2 3
4
CN5
P SM-7pin R P DF1B-20DE S P DF1B- 34DE S CN3
S8B-ZR-SM4
PAP PA-3pin PALR
PCU
PWB
B34B-PNDZS-1
CN8
GP1A71L3 PHR-3
B40B-PNDZS-1
CN6
QSW-Z0538 PHR-3 B40B-PNDZS-1
2
5VNPD 3
12 P-GND 12
1 D-GND
TNFD
28 P-GND
8 CFM 8
10
CFM
26 CFM_LD
/WTM_CLK 3
4 /WTM_D 4
P-GND
1 /WTM_LD 1
2 /WTM_CW 2
3
13
CFM 24
28 28
26
24 24
20 5VNPD(LED)
TNFD
33
34 D-GND
5VNPD
30
9 D-GND
19 TBBOX
2 GND
/WTM_LD
14 /WTM_CW
12
5
7 /WTM_D 7
5 /WTM_CLK
11
1
3 /WTM_CW 3
1 /WTM_LD
5V3 9
18
/WTM_LD 2
/WTM_CW 3
5V3 5
6 P-GND
/WTM_CLK
/WTM_D
INT24V2 8
P-GND 7
4
5
5V3 6
7
4
2 INT24V2 INT24V2 7
6
13
P-GND 11
5
CFM_LD 10
9
16 /WTM_CLK
/WTM_D
16 /WTM_CLK 16
INT24V2
12 /WTM_LD 12
14 /WTM_CW 14
18 /WTM_D 18
4 P-GND 4
2 INT24V2 2
CFM_LD 2
P-GND 3 3
CFM
2
1 1
P-GND
26 CFM_LD
D-GND 2
TBBOX 3
5VNPD(LED) 1
D
F
1
1
-
8
D
P
-
S
P
1
(
B
)
5 5 5VN 5 5VN
5
V
N
1
5
V
N
6
The OPC drum surface is negatively charged by the charge unit.
The laser beam images are radiated to the OPC drum surface by
the laser (writing) unit to form latent electrostatic images.
1) The OPC drum surface is negatively charged by the charge
unit.
The charge unit is provided with the screen grid. The OPC
drum is charged at a voltage virtually same as the voltage
applied to the screen grid.
2) Laser lights are radiated to the OPC drum surface by the laser
(writing) unit to form latent electrostatic images.
When laser lights are radiated to the OPC drum CGL, negative
and positive charges are generated.
Positive charges generated in CGL are attracted to the nega-
tive charges on the OPC drum surface. At the same time, neg-
ative charges are attracted to positive charges in the aluminum
layer of the OPC drum.
Therefore, positive charges and negative charges are bal-
anced out on the OPC drum and in the aluminum layer, reduc-
ing positive and negative charges to decrease the OPC drum
surface voltage.
Electric charges remain at a position where laser lights are not
radiated.
As a result, latent electrostatic images are formed on the OPC
drum surface.
3) After transfer operation, remaining toner is removed by the
cleaning blade.
Toner removed from the OPC drum surface is transported to
the waste toner section by the waste toner transport screw.
4) The whole surface of the OPC drum is discharged.
By radiating the discharge lamp light to the discharge lens,
light is radiated through the lens to the OPC drum surface.
When the discharge lamp light is radiated to the OPC drum
CGL, positive and negative charges are generated.
Positive charges generated in CGL are attracted to the nega-
tive charges on the OPC drum surface. On the other hand,
negative charges are attracted to positive charges in the alumi-
num layer of the OPC drum.
Therefore, positive and negative charges are balanced out on
the OPC drum surface and in the aluminum layer, reducing
positive and negative charged to decrease the surface voltage
of the OPC drum.
Aluminum
layer
OPCdrum
CTL
CGL
High voltage unit
Main corona unit
Screen grid
Aluminum
layer OPCdrum
Laser lights
OPCdrum
CGL
CTL
CGL CGL
Aluminum
layer
Aluminum
layer
CTL CTL
lens
A. OPC drum unit (CL)
(1) OPC durm unit (CL)
1) Remove the development unit (CL). (Refer to the "[L] DEVEL-
OPING SECTION".)
2) Hold the lock lever (A), and pull out OPC drum unit (CL) gently,
and remove OPC drum unit (CL) (B) while supporting the lower
section with both hands.
a. Drum (CL)
OPING SECTION".)
2) Remove the OPC drum unit (CL). (Refer to the "(1) OPC durm
unit (CL)".)
3) Remove the screws (A), and remove the fixing shaft (B).
4) Slide the drum (CL) to the front side, and lift the OPC drum
rear side (C), and remove the drum (CL) (D) from the hole in
the front section.
* When installing, apply stearin acid to the drum (CL) surface
(E).
Unit Page
A OPC drum unit (CL) J - 5
B OPC drum unit (BK) J - 7
C Waste toner section J -12
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
Page
1 OPC drum
unit (CL)
a Drum (CL) J - 5
b Charge unit J - 6
c Side seal F (CL) J - 6
d Side seal R (CL)
e Toner reception seal (CL)
f Cleaner blade (CL)
g Toner mixing sheet
Unit
1 OPC drum unit (CL)
1-b
1-c
1-a
1-e
1-f
1-d
1
1-
g
1
A
B
1
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 OPC drum unit (CL) a Drum (CL)
1-a
A
B
A
C
D 1-a
E
b. Charge unit (CL)
OPING SECTION".)
unit (CL)".)
3) Remove the drum (CL). (Refer to the "a. Drum (CL)".)
5) Remove the lock pawl (C) with a screwdriver, and remove the
MC cleaner shaft (D).
6) Disengage the pawl (E), and remove the cover (F). Remove
the Charge unit (G).
* When installing the cover (F), be careful so that the other
side of the side with the pawl doesn't separate.
c. Side seal F (CL), Side seal R (CL), Toner reception seal
(CL), Cleaner blade (CL), Toner mixing sheet
OPING SECTION".)
unit (CL)".)
3) Remove the drum (CL). (Refer to the "a. Drum (CL)".)
4) Remove the Charge unit. (Refer to the "b. Charge unit".)
5) Remove the side seal F (CL) (A), the side seal R (CL) (B), and
the toner reception seal (CL) (C).
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 OPC drum unit (CL) b Charge unit (CL)
1-b
A
A
B
C
D
D
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 OPC drum unit (CL) c Side seal F (CL)
d Side seal R (CL)
e Toner reception seal (CL)
f Cleaner blade (CL)
g Toner mixing sheet
F
A
1-b
G
E
1-c
1-e
1-f
1-d
1-
g
A
B
C
1-c
1-e
1-d
* When attaching, position it within the specified range shown
from the reference line in the figure below.
6) Remove the screws (D), and remove the cleaner blade (CL)
(E) and the toner mixing sheet (F).
* When installing screw (D), install the screw to the hole
shown with mark of arrow in the order of numeral (1, 2, 3)
mark.
B. OPC drum unit (BK)
(1) OPC drum unit (BK)
1) Remove the development unit (BK). (Refer to the "[L] DEVEL-
OPING SECTION".)
2) Remove the Charge unit (BK). (Refer to the "a. Charge unit
(BK)".)
3) Hold the handle part, and remove the OPC drum unit (BK) (A).
0 - 0.5mm
0 - 0.5mm
0 - 0.5mm
0 - 0.3mm 0 - 0.3mm
0 - 0.3mm
Reference
line
Reference line Reference line
Reference line Reference line
3
2
1
D
D
D
E
F
1-f
1-
g
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
Page
1 OPC drum
unit (BK)
a Charge unit (BK) J - 8
b Drum (BK) J - 8
c Side seal F (BK)
d Side seal R (BK)
e Discharge lamp (K)
f Cleaner blade (BK) J - 9
g Cleaning brush (BK) J -10
h Charger cleaner HP
detection
J -11
i Sub blade J -12
Unit
1 OPC drum unit (BK)
1
1-b
1-e
1-
g
1-f
1-h
1-d
1-a
1-c
1-i
1
A
1
a. Charge unit (BK)
2) Open the cover (B) of the charge unit (BK). Loosen the screw
(C), and remove the Charge unit (BK) (D).
b. Drum (BK), Side seal F (BK), Side seal R (BK), Discharge
lamp (K)
OPING SECTION".)
2) Remove the charge unit (BK). (Refer to the "a. Chaege unit
(BK)".)
3) Remove the OPC drum unit (BK). (Refer to the "(1) OPC drum
unit (BK)".)
4) Remove the screws (A), and open the frame (B).
5) Remove the drum unit (BK) (C).
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 OPC drum unit (BK) a Charge unit (BK)
1-a
A
B
D
C
1-a
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 OPC drum unit (BK) b Drum (BK)
c Side seal F (BK)
d Side seal R (BK)
e Discharge lamp (K)
1-b
1-e
1-d
1-c
A
A
B
C
6) Remove the blue screws (D), and remove the flange (E).
Remove the drum (BK) (F).
* (Concerning OPC layer separating)
With the rotational friction, OPC layer in end of both sides of
the OPC drum may be separated.
If the print image is normal, the OPC drum can be continuing
use, replacement is not required.
* When installing the new OPC drum, be careful so that there
is the lot No. side (G) in upper side, insert the hand into the
OPC drum, and install.
Be careful not to touch the photo-surface of the OPC drum.
7) Check condition of the side seal F (BK) (H) and the side seal R
(BK) (I).
* If replacement is required, paste it along the reference line.
8) Lift up the knob (J), and disengage the pawl (K). Remove the
shading cover (L).
* When installing, engage the pawl (M) of the shading cover
to the frame.
9) Disconnect the connector (N). Remove the discharge lamp (O)
(B).
c. Cleaner blade (BK)
OPING SECTION".)
2) Remove the charge unit (BK). (Refer to the "a. Charge unit
(BK)".)
unit (BK)".)
F
1-b
D
E
G
H
I
Reference
line
Reference line
Reference line
1-d 1-c
Reference
line
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 OPC drum unit (BK) f Cleaner blade (BK)
K
J
L
M
O
1-e
N
1-f
6) Lift up the knob (D), and disengage the pawl (E). Remove the
shading cover (F).
* When installing, engage the pawls (G) of the shading cover
to the frame.
7) Remove the screws (H), and remove the cleaning blade (BK)
(I).
* When installing, be careful not to cover the molt (J) with the
cleaner blade (K).
d. Cleaning brush (BK)
OPING SECTION".)
2) Remove the charger unit (BK). (Refer to the "a. Charger unit
(BK)".)
unit (BK)".)
A
A
B
C
E
D
F
G
H
H
H
I 1-f
Unit Parts Mainte
nance
1 OPC drum unit (CL) g Cleaning brush (BK)
J
K K
J
J
K K
J
1-
g
A
A
B
5) Remove the screw (C), and remove the collar (D) and the
spring (E). Remove the screws (F), and remove the dirve plate
(G).
6) Remove the fixing block (H), and remove the cleaning brush
unit (BK) (I).
7) Disengage the pawl (J), and remove the coupling (K) and the
bearing (L) from the cleaning brush (BK) (M).
e. Charger cleaner HP detection
OPING SECTION".)
2) Remove the charger unit (BK). (Refer to the "a. Charger unit
(BK)".)
unit (BK)".)
4) Remove the screw (A), and charger cleaner HP detection unit
(B).
5) Disconnect the connector (C), and remove the charger cleaner
HP detection (D).
E
F
F
G
C
D
H
I
L
M
J
K
1-
g
Unit Parts
1 OPC drum unit (BK) h Charger cleaner HP detection
1-h
A
B
C
D 1-h
f. Sub blade
1) Remove the developement unit (BK). (Refer to the [L] DEVEL-
OPPING SECTION.)
2) Remove the charger unit (BK). (Refer to the a. Charger unit
(BK).)
3) Remove the OPC drum unit (BK). (Refer to the (1) OPC drum
unit (BK).)
6) Remove the screws (D), and remove the sub blade (E).
C. Waste toner section
(1) Waste toner box
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 OPC drum unit (BK) i Sub blade
1-i
A
A
B
C
Parts
Mainte
nance
Page
a Waste toner box J -12
b Waste toner full detection J -13
c Waste toner box sensor J -13
d Waste toner drive motor J -13
Parts
Mainte
nance
a Waste toner box
E 1-i
D
D
D
a
c
b
d
a
1) Open the right cabinet lower (A).
2) Remove the waste tnoer box (B).
(2) Waste toner full detection
2) Remove the waste toner box. (Refer to the (1) Waste toner
box.)
3) Remove the spring (A). Remove the screws (B), and remove
the rail (C).
4) Disconnect the connector (D), and remove the waste toner full
detection (E).
(3) Waste toner box sensor
1) Remove the rear cabinet and the rear cabinet lower. (Refer to
the [A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT.)
2) Disconnect the connector (A), and remove the waste toner box
sensor (B).
(4) Waste toner drive motor
1) Remove the waste toner box. (Refer to the (1) Waste toner
box.)
Parts
b Waste toner full detection
A
B a
b
A
B
C
Parts
c Waste toner box sensor
Parts
d Waste toner drive motor
D
E
b
c
A
B
c
d
LCC lower cabinet. (Refer to the [A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT.)
3) Remove the LCC transport unit. (Refer to the [G] PAPER
TRANSPORT SECTION.)
4) Remove the front cabinet upper and the frame cover R. (Refer
5) Disconnect the connector (A). Remove the E-ring (B), and
remove the gear (C). Remove the screws (D), and remove the
waste toner drive unit (E).
6) Disconnect the connector (F). Remove the E-ring (G), the
polyslider (H), and the bearing (I). Remove the screws (J), and
remove the drive mounting plate (K).
7) Remove the E-ring (L), and remove the gears (M). Remove the
screws (N), and remove the waste toner drive motor (O).
* When installing, fit the triangle mark (P) of the drive mount-
ing plate to the connector (Q) position, and install it.
A
E
C
D
D
B
G
J
K
I
H
J
F
L
N
N
N
O
M
d
P
Q
4. Maintenance
No. Part name
Monochrome
supply,
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the
replacement parts
are described.)
Color supply 100
K
200
K
300
K
400
K
500
K
600
K
700
K
800
K
900
K
1000
K
1 Drum (BK) Monochrome
supply

2 Cleaning blade (BK) (P/G No. : [36]-40)
3 Side seal F, R (BK)
4 Charge unit (BK) (P/G No. : [35]-41)
5 Drum (CL) Color supply
6 Cleaning blade (CL) (P/G No. : [34]-11)
7 Charge unit (CL) (P/G No. : [34]-2)
8 Side seal F, R (CL)
9 Toner reception seal (CL)
10 Toner mixing sheet (P/G No. : [34]-62)
11 Cleaning brush (BK) Mechanical
parts

12 Discharge lamp (K)
13 Sub blade (P/G No. : [36]-17)
14 Waste toner box
1
5
6
8
8
9
7
11
12
2
10
3
14
3
4
13
The PM cycle means the replacement timing of periodic replace-
ment consumable parts which are required for maintaining the per-
formance.
The PM cycle is specified only for B/W output. For color output, it is
used as a reference value.
[Reason]
Since the ratio of B/W to color differs depending on the user's oper-
ation scene which varies every day, the PM cycle cannot be speci-
fied in a certain cycle for color output.
Replacement of a PM item at the recommended life is performed
by the dealer's judgment or at PM call or at EM call.
[Life end definition of a OPC drum ]
When the OPC drum counter exceeds the specified level of 100%
black output or 100% full color output, it is judged as life end.
However in practice, wear cannot be specified by rotations
because racing is increased in the tandem engine by the mixing
ratio of black and color outputs or when black output is made in the
color mode in ACS. For the reference of product quality, wear is
specified by the OPC drum rotations. The rotation of the MX-5500/
MX-6200/MX-7000 series OPC drum rotation is 840K.
The OPC drum life is affected by the print quantity of one job. This
is because the actual life is determined by the rotations of the OPC
drum.
When the print quantity of one job is 5 or less, the number of rota-
tions for one page is increased. As shown in the graph below,
therefore, the OPC drum life quantity varies for each print quantity
of one job.
"Life meter" can be checked with SIM22-1 according to each OPC
drum rotations as the OPC drum life.
"Life meter" indicates the remained life (%) of the OPC drum with
the entire OPC drum life as 100%.
(Example) If the used number of rotations is 550K:
100(%) 550 (K rotations) / 840 (K rotations) x 100 = 040 (%)
OPC drum counter
Number of ratations
of OPC drum
B/W Full color B/W Full color
OPC
Drum
300K pages 100K pages 840K rotations 840K rotations
OPC drum Life
Black OPC drum
350
300
250
200
150
100
50
0
0 1 2 3
Number of sheets of one print job
4 5 6 7
Color OPC drum
MX-7000N TONER SUPPLY SECTION K 1
MX-7000N
Sv` Huuuu!

[K] TONER SUPPLY SECTION
TM_K2
DTBFM
HTM_Y
HTCS_Y
HTCS_M
HTCS_C
HTCS_K
HTM_M
HTM_C
HTM_K
TM_K1
TM_C
TM_M
TM_Y
R SM3P-B P P DF1B-34DE S CN8
R SM3P-B P
DRIVER
PWB
R SM3P-B P
R SM3P-B P
B12B-PNDZS-1
SM-3Pin_N
CN10
DF3-3S-2C
PCU PWB
R SM-3Pin_N P
DF3-3S-2C
R SM-3Pin_N P
B40B-PNDZS-1
DF3-3S-2C
5VNPD
HTCS_C
D-GND
5VNPD
2
3
1
2
HTCS_M
D-GND
5VNPD
HTCS_Y
1
2
3
1
HTCS_Y 18 34 HTCS_Y 34
1
2
3 3 D-GND
HTCS_Y
D-GND
5VNPD 1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
32 HTCS_M 32 16 HTCS_M
HTCS_C 30 17 HTCS_C 30
HTM_Yb 4
HTM_Ya 24 2 HTM_Ya 1 HTM_Ya 1 24
3 HTM_Yb 3 26 HTM_Yb 26
1 HTM_Ma 1 31
HTM_Mb 33
HTM_Ma 31 9 HTM_Ma
11 HTM_Mb
27 5
3 HTM_Mb 3 33
HTM_Ca
HTM_Cb 3 29 HTM_Cb 29 7 HTM_Cb
1 HTM_Ca 1 HTM_Ca 27
3
1
HTM_K1a
HTM_K1b 3 HTM_K1b
1 23
25 25
23 HTM_K1a HTM_K1a 1
3 HTM_K1b 3
5VNPD 1
HTCS_M 2
D-GND 3
D-GND 3
5VNPD 1
HTCS_C 2
R SM2P-N P
P DF1B-34DE S CN10 R SM2P-N P
R SM2P-N P
R SM2P-N P
R SM2P-N P
TM_Yb
TM_Ya
1
3 TM_K1b 3
19
17 TM_Ya 17 1
2
TM_Ca
TM_Cb
19 TM_Yb
1
TM_Mb
TM_Cb
9
13
2
2
1
2
2
TM_K1a
TM_Ma
19
1
TM_K1b
15 15
7
TM_Cb 2
20
22 TM_Mb
TM_Ya
TM_Ca
1
TM_Mb
TM_Ma
2
7
9
11 11
TM_K2b
23
25 2
2 2
1
5 TM_K2a 5
27
21 TM_K1b
24
28
26
TM_Ca
TM_K2b
TM_K2a
1 TM_K1a 1 1 TM_K1a
TM_K2a
13 TM_Ma
1
TM_K2b
1
TM_Yb
SMR-03
HRS SMP-03
D-GND
HTCS_K
29 3 D-GND
27
25 5VNPD 1 1 10 1
HTCS_K
D-GND
5VNPD
HTCS_K 2
3
2
5VNPD
14
10
12
14
12
3
5VNPD
D-GND
HTCS_K 2
1
3
2
1
3
2
R PA-3pin P
3
2 2
P-GND 3
NC
1 FUFM_F 1
P SM-4p R
3
2 2
P-GND 3
/POFM_CNT2
1 FUFM_F 1
4 4 FUFM_F_LD
P DF1B-32P R
11
9 9
P-GND 11
FUFM_F_LD
7 FUFM_F 7
13 13 /POFM_CNT2
F
U
F
M
_
F
F
U
F
M
_
F
F
U
F
M
_
F
F
U
F
M
_
F
S DF1B-22DE P CN9
B30B-PNDZS-1
P-GND
FUFM_F_LD
5
3
1 FUFM_F
CN12
B16B-PNDZS-1
10 POFM_CNT2
CN13
B40B-PNDZS-1
P QR/P8-20P S
A. Outline
Adoption of the rotating toner bottle enables large capacity with a
compact toner bottle size.
When the remaining toner detection sensor in the toner hopper unit
detects no toner, the toner bottle turns to supply toner to the toner
hopper.
After supplying, full or empty status is detected at the toner hopper
inside. Therefore even if the toner cartridge becomes empty, copy-
ing is not immediately suspended because toner inside the toner
hopper is used.
A. Toner cartridges (BK/C/M/Y)
(1) Toner cartridges
1) Open the toner cover (A).
2) Remove the old toner cartridge (B).
3) Shake the new toner cartridge (C) a few times.
* Do not put the toner cartridge upright.
DTBFM Bottle cooling fan motor Cools the toner cartridge
HTCS_C Hopper remaining sensor C
Detects toner remaining quantity
HTCS_K Hopper remaining sensor K
HTCS_M Hopper remaining sensor M
HTCS_Y Hopper remaining sensor Y
Transports the toner
HTM_K Hopper motor K
TM_C Toner motor C
Transports toner of the toner cartridge to the developement unit.
TM_M Toner motor M
TM_Y Toner motor Y
Unit Page
A Toner cartridges (BK/C/M/Y) K- 2
B Others K- 3
Unit Maintenance
1 Toner cartridges (BK/C/M/Y) User
replacement
1
A
B 1
C
4) Install the new toner cartridge (D).
* Do not forcibly insert the toner cartridge. Keep holding the
cartridge and completely insert it.
5) Insert the cartridge securely until it locks.
* Be sure to install the color cartridges to their proper posi-
tions. Avoid installation to a different color position.
6) Close the toner cover (E).
B. Others
(1) Hopper remaining sensor (C/M/Y)
1) Remove the toner cartridge. (Refer to the "[K] TONER SUP-
PLY SECTION".)
2) Remove the developement unit (CL) and the developement
unit (BK). (Refer to the "[L] DEVELOPEMENT SECTION".)
3) Remove the OPC drum unit (CL), the charge unit, and the
OPC drum unit (BK). (Refer to the "[J] PHTOCONDUCTOR
SECTION".)
4) Remove the paper exit tray, the paper exit tray rear, and the
rear cabinet. (Refer to the "[A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT".)
5) Remove the screws (A), and remove the guide fixture (B).
D
Y
M
C
BK1
BK2
E
Parts Page
a Hopper remaining sensor (C/M/Y) K- 3
b Bottle cooling fan motor K- 4
Parts
a Hopper remaining sensor (C/M/Y)
a
b
a
A
A
B
6) Disconnect the connectors (C).
7) Remove the screws (D). Remove the screws (E), and remove
the toner transport unit (C) (F), the toner transport unit (M) (G),
and the toner transport unit (Y) (H).
remove the hopper remaining sensor (C/M/Y) (K).
(2) Bottle cooling fan motor
1) Remove the toner cartridge (BK/C/M/Y). (Refer to the [K]
TONER SUPPLY SECTION.)
2) Remove the paper exit tray. (Refer to the [A] EXTERNAL
OUTFIT.)
3) Disconnect the connector (A). Remove the screws (B) and the
washers (C), and remove the bottle cooling fan motor (D).
* When installing, the label (E) side is upward.
C
C
C
E
E
E
H
G
F
D
I
J
J
K a
Parts
b Bottle cooling fan motor
b
A
C
D b
B
C
E
4. Maintenance
No. Part name
Monochrome
supply,
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the
replacement
parts are
described.)
1 Toner cartridge (BK/C/M/Y) Mechanical
parts
User replacement for every toner empty (or the specified traveling distance).
1
MX-7000N DEVELOPING SECTION L 1
MX-7000N
Sv` Huuuu!

[L] DEVELOPING SECTION
C
N
1
3
V
H
-
2
P
B
0
7
B
-
P
A
S
K
PCU PWB
B
4
0
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
D
V
K
M
_
G
A
IN
D
V
K
M
_
C
W
/C
C
W
1
5
1
7
6 822
5
2
7
2
4
V
4
1 3
P
-
G
N
D
1
15
5
V
N
7
D
V
K
M
_
L
D
1
3
/D
V
K
M
_
C
K
9
/D
V
K
M
_
D
D
-
G
N
D
D
V
K
M
_
G
A
IN
D
V
K
M
_
C
W
/C
C
W
2
4
V
4
P
-
G
N
D
5
V
N
D
V
K
M
_
L
D
/D
V
K
M
_
C
K
/D
V
K
M
_
D
D
-
G
N
D
D
V
K
M
_
G
A
IN
D
V
K
M
_
C
W
/C
C
W
5
V
N
D
V
K
M
_
L
D
/D
V
K
M
_
C
K
/D
V
K
M
_
D
D
-
G
N
D
1 43
2
4
V
4
1
P
-
G
N
D
2
52
2
9 4 3
0
1
0
6 822
5
2
7
2
9 4 3
0
1
0
6 7
C
N
9
B
7
P
-
P
H
-
K
-
S
B
3
0
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
/D
V
C
M
_
D
D
V
C
M
_
L
D
5 6
4 1
08
1
0
1
2
41 2
2
/D
V
C
M
_
C
K
IN
T
2
4
V
2
P
-
G
N
D
/D
V
C
M
_
D
D
V
C
M
_
L
D
/D
V
C
M
_
C
K
IN
T
2
4
V
2
P
-
G
N
D
/D
V
C
M
_
D
D
V
C
M
_
L
D
/D
V
C
M
_
C
K
IN
T
2
4
V
2
P
-
G
N
D
4
6
6 8
1
0
1
24 6 8
N
.C
3
N
.C
7
C
N
7
5
1
0
2
1
-
0
4
0
0
5
1
0
2
1
-
0
4
0
0
5
1
0
2
1
-
0
4
0
0
DF11-8DP-SP1
B
3
0
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
T
C
S
_
M
T
S
G
_
M
2
1
2
4
V
3
1
4
T
S
G
_
Y
1
4
1
0
2
4
V
3
1
0
2
3
T
C
S
_
M
2
3
2
1
2
4
V
3
2
1
4
D
-
G
N
D
3
T
S
G
_
M
2
4
V
3
T
C
S
_
M
4 6
6
5
2
4
V
3
2
4
V
3
2
5
2
4
V
3
D
-
G
N
D
4
7
7
T
C
S
_
Y
3
6
T
C
S
_
Y
D
-
G
N
D
T
S
G
_
Y
12 43 12 43 1
8
5 76 85 76 85 76 8
5 76 85 76 8
T
S
G
_
Y
T
S
G
_
Y
6
5
D
-
G
N
D
T
S
G
_
Y
8
T
C
S
_
Y
3
2
4
V
3
T
C
S
_
Y
T
S
G
_
M
D
-
G
N
D
2
4
V
3
T
C
S
_
M
D
-
G
N
D
T
S
G
_
M
2
5
5
2
5
T
S
G
_
M
2
5
1
2
2
3
1
2
T
C
S
_
Y
1
2
1
4
T
S
G
_
C
578 6
2
4
V
3
T
C
S
_
M
1
2
8
2
4
V
3
3
5
2
4
V
3
5
5
2
4
V
3
7
T
C
S
_
C
4
7
T
C
S
_
C
7
7
T
C
S
_
C
D
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
5
D
-
G
N
D
6
T
S
G
_
C
T
S
G
_
C
6
T
S
G
_
C
5
9
T
S
G
_
C
9
1
1
D
-
G
N
D
1
1
D
-
G
N
D
1
1
9 1
0
T
C
S
_
C
T
C
S
_
C
2
4
V
3
2
4
V
3
6
4
GND
GND
GND
GND
C
N
1
C
N
6
B
S
-
Y
2
4
V
3
P
-
G
N
D
MC PWB
IN
T
2
4
V
2
P
-
G
N
D
B
S
-
M
/H
V
_
D
A
T
A
/H
V
_
C
L
K
/H
V
_
L
D
1
B
S
-
C
B
0
8
B
-
P
A
S
K
B
4
0
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
1
0
5 6 7 83 2 1 4
H
V
_
R
E
M
#
2
4
V
3
P
-
G
N
D
IN
T
2
4
V
2
P
-
G
N
D
/H
V
_
D
A
T
A
/H
V
_
C
L
K
/H
V
_
L
D
1
H
V
_
R
E
M
#
12 3 5 7 6 8
V
H
R
-
3
B
S
-
K
P
Q
R
/P
8
-
8
P
S
P
Q
R
/P
8
-
8
P
S
P
Q
R
/P
8
-
8
P
S
P
H
N
R
-
1
0
-
H
,B
U
1
0
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
P
H
N
R
-
1
0
-
H
,B
U
1
0
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
P
H
N
R
-
1
0
-
H
,B
U
1
0
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
S
D
F
1
B
-
2
6
D
E
P
DVCM
DVKM
BS_M
BS_C
BS_Y
TCS_M
TCS_C
BS_K
TCS_Y
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
3
3
3
TCS_K
2
3
PTMH_1
PTMH_2
5
1
0
2
1
-
0
4
0
0
2
4
V
3
5 6 7 8
5 6 7 8
1
3
1
5
1
7
D
-
G
N
D
1
7
2
4
V
3
T
C
S
_
K
T
C
S
_
K
2
4
V
3
T
C
S
_
K
D
-
G
N
D
T
S
G
_
K
2
3
2
1
1
9
2
2
2
4
2
6
1
1
1
3
1
5
1
7
1
1
T
S
G
_
K
T
S
G
_
K
T
C
S
_
K
D
-
G
N
D
1
T
S
G
_
K
2
2
4
V
3
D
-
G
N
D
43
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
0
F
P
C
L
2
P
H
T
M
_
K
b
F
P
C
L
1
5
V
N
9 4
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
0 9 4
P
H
T
M
_
K
a
D
-
G
N
D
5
V
N
2 2
1
2
2
F
P
C
L
1
4
P
H
T
M
_
K
b
F
P
C
L
2
5
V
N
F
P
C
L
1
F
P
C
L
2
2
0
1
6
2 2
1
2
24 2
0
1
6
D
-
G
N
D
P
H
T
M
_
K
a
C
N
9
B
3
0
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
C
N
2
S
M
9
B
-
G
H
S
-
T
B
P
H
T
M
2
_
B
P
H
T
M
2
_
A
P
H
T
M
_
A
D
V
K
_
C
H
_
R
D
V
K
_
C
H
4 15 2
P
H
T
M
_
B
39
DVK DRIVER PWB
C
N
1
S
M
1
2
B
-
G
H
S
-
T
B
4 3 2 18 7 6 5
D
-
G
N
D
2
4
V
3
5
V
N
P
D
F
P
C
L
2
F
P
C
L
1
P
H
T
M
_
K
b
P
H
T
M
_
K
a
D
V
K
_
C
H
1
2
1
1
1
0 9
D
V
K
_
C
H
_
R
D
-
G
N
D
D
V
K
_
F
M
_
L
D
V
F
M
_
R
C
N
2
B
1
2
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
P
H
T
M
_
K
b
8
P
H
T
M
_
K
a
6
DRIVER
PWB
S
D
F
1
B
-
2
2
D
E
P
P
Q
R
/P
8
-
2
0
P
S
4 23 1
4 23 1
P
H
T
M
_
1
b
P
H
T
M
_
1
a
D
V
K
_
C
H
D
V
K
_
C
H
_
R
R
S
M
-
4
p
in
P23 1
23 1
P
H
T
M
_
2
b
P
H
T
M
_
2
a
N
C
R
S
M
-
3
p
in
P
4
Electrostatic latent images generated on the OPC drum by the
laser (writing) units (laser image ray) are converted into visible
images by toner.
Toner and carrier in the developing unit are stirred and transported
by the mixing roller.
By mixing and transporting, toner and carrier are negatively
charged due to mechanical friction.
The developing bias voltage (AC component and negative DC
component) is applied to the developing roller.
Negatively charged toner is attracted to the exposed section on the
OPC drum where the negative potential falls due to the developing
bias.
If the OPC drum is not exposed, the negative potential is higher
than the developing bias voltage, and toner is not attracted.
A. Development unit (CL)
(1) Development unit (CL)
BS_C Developer bias (C)
Developer bias
BS_K Developer bias (K)
BS_M Developer bias (M)
BS_Y Developer bias (Y)
DVCM Developer drive motor_CL Drives the development section (CL)
DVKM Developer drive motor_K Drives the developement section (K) /Drives the separating operations of the primary transfer belt
PTMH_1 Intermediate hopper motor Transports the toner
PTMH_2 Stirring motor Stirs the toner
TCS_C Toner density sensor (C) (ATC)
Detects the toner density in the developing unit
TCS_K Toner density sensor (K) (ATC)
TCS_M Toner density sensor (M) (ATC)
TCS_Y Toner density sensor (Y) (ATC)
1 Developer roller Latent electrostatic images on the OPC drum are changed to visible images
2 Stirring roller Stirring developer
3 Toner filter Prevents dispersing of toner
4 DVK DRIVER PWB Controls the toner stirring motor
Unit Page
A Development unit (CL) L - 2
B Development unit (BK) L - 6
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
Page
1 Development
unit (CL)
a Developer (C/M/Y) L - 4
b DV seal (CL) L - 5
c DV side seal F (CL)
d DV side seal R (CL)
e Toner density sensor (ATC) L - 5
f Toner filter (CL) L - 5
Unit
1 Development unit (CL)
1-a
1-c
1-b
1-
f
1-e
1-d
1
1
fer belt.
fixing knob (E).
5) Loosen the screws (H), and open the cover (I) of the process
section.
6) Loosen the screw (J).
7) Pinch the knob (K), and remove the development unit (CL) (L).
A
B
C
E
D
F
G
H
H
I
J
L
K
a. Developer (C/M/Y)
1) Remove the development unit (CL). (Refer to the "(1) Devel-
opment unit (CL)".)
2) Remove the screws (A).
3) Pinch the part of (B), and remove the cover (C) in the arrow
direction.
4) Take out the old developer (D), and infuse the developer (E).
* When replacing developer, use an extreme care not to drop
developer on the drive section (marked with ).
* [Important information]
(Note for cleaning the development unit)
If the development unit is cleaned with a cleaner or an air blower
with much developer in the development unit, static electricity
may be accumulated in the unit. In order to prevent against this,
note the following items.
* If metal part is brought into contact with the magnet roller sur-
face when transporting developer or removing foreign material
from the magnet roller, developer may adhere to the magnet
roller surface. Be careful to avoid this when handling the mag-
net roller.
* Remove developer in the development unit as well as devel-
oper attached to the magnet roller as far as possible.
* (When cleaning the development unit with an air blower [duct])
Before cleaning with an air duct, remove developer from the
unit as far as possible, and ground the magnet roller rear side
cored bar as shown in the figure below and clean the unit with
an air blower. (Do not pinch the grounding wire with a crocodile
clip connector in order to prevent against damage on the cored
bar.)
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 Development unit
(CL)
a Developer (C/M/Y)
1-a
A
A
B
B
C
B
E
1-a
D
the magnet roller
rear side cored bar
* After supplying developer, do not tilt the development unit.
b. DV seal (CL), DV side seal F (CL), DV side seal R (CL)
opment unit (CL)".)
2) Remove the DV seal (CL) (A), the DV side seal F (CL) (B), and
the DV side seal R (CL) (C).
* Attach the DV seal (CL) (D) and DV side seal F (CL) (E) and
DV side seal R (CL) (F) along the reference line.
c. Toner density sensor C/ M/ Y (ATC)
opment unit (CL)".)
2) Remove the screws (A), and remove the guide (B). Remove
the screws (C), and disconnect the connector (D), and remove
the toner density sensor C/M/Y (ATC) (E) and mylar (F).
* When pasting the mylar, paste it along the reference line.
d. Toner filter (CL)
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 Development unit
(CL)
b DV seal (CL)
c DV side seal F (CL)
d DV side seal R (CL)
1-c
1-b
1-d
B
A
C
1-b
1-c
1-d
0 - 0.2mm
0 - 0.3mm
0 - 0.3mm
0 - 0.3mm
0 - 0.3mm
0 - 0.5mm
E F
D
Unit Parts
1 Development unit
(CL)
e Toner density sensor C/M/Y (ATC)
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 Development unit
(CL)
f Toner filter (CL)
1-e
B
1-e
A
A
C D
E
F
0 - 0.5mm
referance
reference
0 - 0.3mm
1-
f
opment unit (CL)".)
2) Remove the cover (A), and remove the toner filter (CL) (B).
B. Development unit (BK)
(1) Development unit (BK)
fer belt.
fixing knob (E).
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
Page
1 Development
unit (BK)
a Developer (K) L - 7
b Toner density detection K
(ATC)
L - 8
c DVK DRIVER PWB L - 9
d Hopper remaining sensor K L -10
e Intermediate hopper motor L -10
f Toner filter (BK) L -11
g DV side seal F (BK) L -11
h DV side seal R (BK)
i DV seal (BK) L -12
j Stirring motor (BK) L -12
Unit
1 Development unit (BK)
A
B 1-
f
1-e
1-a
1-d
1
1-i
1-f
1-b
1-
g
1-h
1-c
1-
j
1
A
B
C
E
D
F
G
section.
6) Loosen the screw (J).
7) Hold the knob and remove the development unit (BK) (K).
a. Developer (K)
1) Remove the development unit (BK). (Refer to the "(1) Devel-
opment unit (BK)".)
2) Remove the screws (A), and remove the toner hopper unit (B).
* When installing, engage the toner hopper unit to the pawls
(C) of the MG roller unit.
3) Disconnect the connector (D) on front side and the connector
(E) on rear side.
4) Remove the DV discharge plate (F).
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 Development unit
(BK)
a Developer (K)
H
H
I
J
K
1
1-a
B
A
A
C
D
E
F
5) Take out the old developer (K) (G).
6) While rotating the MG roller knob (H), infuse the developer (K)
(I).
7) Install the DV discharge plate (J).
8) Engage the pawls (K) to the toner hopper unit (L), and install it,
and fix with the screws (M).
9) Shake the development unit (N) horizontally a few times.
b. Toner density detection K (ATC)
1) Remove the development unit (BK). (Refer to the "(1) Develop
ment unit (BK)".)
* When installing, engage the toner hopper unit to the pawls
(C) of the MG roller unit.
G
1-a
I
H
J
M
M
L
K
Unit Parts
1 Development unit
(BK)
b Toner density detection K (ATC)
N
1-b
B
A
A
C
3) Disconnect the connector (D) on front side, and the connector
(E) on rear side.
* Before the following procedure executing, be sure to take
out the developer (K).
4) Remove the screws (F), and remove the ATC sheet (G).
Remove the screws (H), and remove the toner density sensor
K (I). Disconnect the connector (J).
c. DVK DIRVER PWB
opment unit (BK)".)
2) Remove the screws (A), and remove the DV cover (B).
* When installing, engage the pawls (C) of the cover to the
pawls (D) of the DV_BOX.
3) Remove the DVK DRIVER PWB (E). Disconnect the connec-
tors (F).
D
E
H
I
J
1-b
F
F
G
Unit Parts
1 Development unit
(BK)
c DVK DRIVER PWB
1-c
A
A
A
D
C
B
F
E 1-c
F
d. Hopper remaining sensor K
1) Remove the development unit (BK). (Refer to the (1) Develop-
ment unit (BK).)
2) Remove the screws (A), and remove the sheet (B). Remove
the screws (C), and remove the hopper remaining sensor K
(D). Disconnect the connector (E).
* When installing, arrange the snap band (F) so that there is in
the upper side of the projection (G), then engage the har-
ness (H) to cut-out portion of the projection (G).
e. Intermediate hopper motor
opment unit (BK)".)
* When installing, engage the toner hopper unit to pawls (C)
of the MG roller unit.
3) Disconnect the connector (D) on front side, and the connector
(E) on rear side.
4) Remove the screws (F), and remove the intermediate hopper
motor unit (G).
Unit Parts
1 Development unit
(BK)
d Hopper remaining sensor K
Unit Parts
1 Development unit
(BK)
e Intermediate hopper motor
1-d
A
A
B
E
1-d
C
D
F
H
G
H
1-e
B
A
A
C
D
E
F
G
F
5) Remove the gear (H). Remove the harness from the clamp (I).
Remove the screws (J), and remove the intermediate hopper
motor (K).
f. Toner filter (BK)
1) Remove the development unit (BK). (Refer to the "(1) Develop-
ment unit (BK)".)
2) Remove the toner filter (A).
* Push the sheet into the hole (C) of development unit (BK)
until the edge (trapezoidal shape side) of the sheet (B) is
passing the hole, and exiting.
g. DV side seal F (BK), DV side seal R (BK)
ment unit (BK)".)
2) Remove the DV side seal F (BK) (A), and remove the DV side
seal R (BK) (B).
* When attaching, position it within the specified range.
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 Development unit
(BK)
f Toner filter (BK)
H
1-e
J
J
K
I
1-f
1-f
A
B
B
C
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 Development unit
(BK)
g DV side seal F (BK)
h DV side seal R (BK)
1-
g
1-h
0 - 0.5mm 0 - 0.5mm
0 - 0.5mm 0 - 0.5mm
A
B
1-h
1-
g
A
1-
g
B
1-h
h. DV seal
ment unit (BK)".)
2) Remove the screw (A), and remove the cover (B).
3) Remove the DV seal (C).
* When attaching, position it within the specified range.
i. Stirring motor
1) Remove the development unit (BK). (Refer to the (1) Develop-
ment unit (BK).)
2) Remove the screws (A), and remove the pawl (B) and front
cover (C).
3) Disconnect the connector (D). Remove the screws (E), and
remove the stirring motor (F) and gear (G).
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 Development unit
(BK)
i DV seal (BK)
1-i
A
B
0 - 0.5mm
Reference
C
C 1-
i
Unit Parts
1 Development unit
(BK)
j Stirring motor
1-
j
A
C
B
A
E
E
1-
j F
D
G
4. Maintenance
No. Part name
Monochrome
supply,
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the
replacement parts
are described.)
Color supply 100
K
200
K
300
K
400
K
500
K
600
K
700
K
800
K
900
K
1000
K
1 Developer (K) Monochrome
supply

2 DV seal (BK) (P/G No. : [32]-46)
3 DV side seal F (BK) (P/G No. : [32]-65)
4 DV side seal R (BK) (P/G No. : [32]-59)
5 Toner filter (BK) (P/G No. : [32]-63)
6 Developer (C) Color supply
7 Developer (M)
8 Developer (Y)
9 DV seal (CL) (P/G No. : [31]-49)
10 DV side seal F/R (CL) DV side seal F
(P/G No. : [31]-28),
DV side seal R
(P/G No. : [31]-37)
11 Toner filter (CL) (P/G No. : [30]-2)
12 Bias terminal/connector Mechanical
parts

1
3
12
12
9
12
10
12
6,7,8
10
11
12
2
5
4
MX-7000N TRANSFER SECTION M 1
MX-7000N
Sv` Huuuu!

[M] TRANSFER SECTION
BTM Transfer drive motor Drives the tranfer belt
DVKM Transfer drive motor_K Drives the development section (K) / Drives separation operation of primary transfer belt
BTM
DVKM
TBLTC
1
3
4
TBLTB
THPS
TURM
PTCM
PTCM_HP
4
4
4
14
6
2
9
13
10
11
12
5
7
8
R SM-3P N P CN15
GP1S73P 179228-3 B40B-PNDZS-1
CN18
B30B-PNDZS-1 PHNR-02-H +
BU02P-TR-P-H
179228-2
PCU PWB
PTCM_HP 1
D-GND 2
1 PTCM_HP 2
2 D-GND 1
4 PTCM_HP 4
5 D-GND 5
TBLTB
D-GND
5VNPD(LED) 5VNPD(LED)
22 PTCM_HP
24 D-GND
14
16
18
2
3
D-GND 2
5VNPD(LED) 3
2 D-GND
3
1 TBLTB 1 TBLTB 1
B2P-PH-K-S
CN18
GP1S73 179228-3 PHNR-05-H + BU05P-TR-P-H PHNR-08-H + BU08P-TR-P-H B30B-PNDZS-1 P QR/P4 40PIN S
1 5VNPD(LED) 5
3 THPS 3
2 D-GND 4
5 P-GND 1
4 /TURM_A 2
P-GND 1
/TURM_A 2 4 P-GND
D-GND
THPS 1 THPS 27 THPS 27
28
12
D-GND 2
5VNPD(LED) 3 29 5VNPD(LED) 29
28 D-GND
24 P-GND 24
26 /TURM_A 26 6 /TURM_A
8
5VNPD(LED)
10
THPS 6
2 D-GND 7
1 5VNPD(LED) 8
5 P-GND 4
4 /TURM_A 5
3
S DF1B-34DE P CN4
DRIVER
PWB
B6B-XH B12B-PASK-1
2
BTM_B/
1 BTM_A
12
BTM_B
BTM_A/
INT24V1 1
6
3
5
4
7 BTM_B/
10
7
INT24V1
INT24V1 3 INT24V1 3
7 BTM_B/
INT24V1
INT24V1
BTM_A/
BTM_A
BTM_B
1
8
11
9
5 BTM_B 5
BTM_A 11
9 BTM_A/ 9
11
B07B-PASK B40B-PNDZS-1
P SM-2pin R CN18
CN13
B30B-PNDZS-1
DVKM_GAIN 10 DVKM_GAIN
DVKM_CW/CCW
15
17
6
4
8
6
8
2
/DVKM_CK 11
5
5VN 7
DVKM_LD 13
/DVKM_CK
9 /DVKM_D
D-GND D-GND 1
/DVKM_CK 4
3
DVKM_LD 5
5VN 2
/DVKM_D
29 D-GND 29
2
/DVKM_D 4
30 DVKM_CW/CCW 30
DVKM_LD
10
5VN
DVKM_GAIN 6
DVKM_CW/CCW 7
PTCM_A
PTCM_B
1 PTCM_a 1
2 PTCM_b 2
34 PTCM_a 34
31 PTCM_b 31
25
27
B30B-PNDZS-1
GP1S73P 179228-3 PHNR-3-H + BU03P-TR-P-H
CN18
CN9
B30B-PNDZS-1
D
F
1
1
-
6
D
P
-
S
P
1
(
a
)
S DF1B-34DE P
S DF1B-34DE P
D
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
34 TBLTC 34
18 5VNPD(LED) 5VNPD(LED) 3 1 5VNPD(LED)
D-GND 2 3 D-GND
TBLTC 1 2 TBLTC 18 TBLTC
1
3
15
18
24
2
24 D-GND D-GND 3
11 5VNPD(LED)
7 5VNPD(LED)
9 5VNPD(LED)
A. Outline
In this section, a high voltage are applied to the primary transfer
roller, toner images on the OPC drum are transferred to the primary
transfer belt surface, toner images on the primary transfer belt are
transferred to paper by the secondary transfer belt.
B. Primary transfer roller separation mechanism
and content
The primary transfer roller performs all pressure contact, all sepa-
ration, and only black contact depending on the operation mode.
When the roller separation clutch (BLTCL) is turned ON, the trans-
fer cam rotates and the primary transfer link and the primary trans-
fer arm which is linked with the cam are shifted in the arrow
direction, performing separation of the roller.
All pressure contact
All separation
Only black contact
Also performs all pressure contact, all separation, and only black
contact by the roller separation sensor (TBLTC, TBLTB) and the
separation detection arm.
The primary transfer and the secondary transfer are driven together
with the black developing motor.
C. Transfer belt separation
Transfer belt is separated by the transfer separation motor.
The transfer belt is in contact with the OPC drum except for the fol-
lowing cases.
[Case where the transfer belt is not contact with the OPC drum]
When executing process control (to prevent against breakage of
toner patch on the OPC drum)
When a jam occurs (Protection of the OPC drum, right door
open/close)
PTCM PTC cleaner motor Drives the PTC cleaner
PTCM_HP Sensor inside the PTC unit Detects home position of the PTC cleaner
TBLTB Transfer belt separation sensor BK Detects primary transfer separation (BK)
TBLTC Transfer belt separation sensor CL Detects primary transfer separation (CL)
THPS Secondary transfer separation drive
sensor
Detects secondary transfer separation
TURM Secondary transfer separation drive motor Drives separation operation of the secondary transfer
1 Primary transfer belt Transfers toner on the OPC drum forms toner images on the belt.
2 Primary transfer drive roller Drives primary transfer belt
3 Primary transfer follower roller Drives primary transfer belt
4 Primary transfer roller Transfers toner images on the OPC drum to the primary transfer belt
5 Y auxiliary roller Retaining the belt position by separation of the Y primary transfer roller
6 Registration backup roller Retaining the belt position in the process control and the registration section.
7 Cleaning brush Cleans the back surface of the primary transfer belt
8 Transfer cleaning blade Cleans the frontal surface of the primary transfer belt
9 Secondary transfer belt Transfers toner images on the primary transfer belt to paper
10 Secondary belt dirve roller Drives secondary transfer belt
11 Secondary belt follower roller Drives secondary transfer belt
12 Secondary belt tension roller Applies a proper tension to the secondary transfer belt
13 PTC unit Imposes negative charges
14 PTC cleaner Clean the PTC unit
DRUM PTC
Y M C K
Y M C K
Y M C K
A. Primary transfer unit
(1) Primary transfer unit
1) Open the front cover (A).
fer belt.
fixing knob (E).
Unit Page
A Primary transfer unit M- 3
B Secondary transfer unit M- 9
C PTC unit M-12
D Secondary transfer separation drive unit M-14
E Others M-16
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
Page
1 Primary
transfer unit
a Primary transfer belt M- 4
b Y auxiliary roller M- 6
c Primary transfer follower
roller

d Primary transfer roller
e Belt drive gear M- 6
f Primary transfer drive roller M- 7
g Transfer idle roller M- 7
h Tension roller
i Cleaning brush M- 7
j Resist backup roller M- 8
k Cleaner seal M- 8
l Transfer sub blade
m Transfer cleaning blade
n Cleaning brush
1-a
1-f 1-
j
1-l
1-i
1-m
1-e
1-h
1
1-c
1-b
1-d
1-
g
1-
g
1-n
1-k
1-k
Unit
1 Primary transfer unit
1
A
B
C
E
D
F
section.
6) Release the lock (J), and open the right door unit (K).
7) Loosen the screws (L). Remove the primary transfer unit (M).
* When installing, check to insure that guide rail (O) of the pri-
mary transfer unit is in the rail (N) of main unit side, and
push into the primary transfer unit (M).
a. Primary transfer belt
1) Remove the primary transfer unit. (Refer to the "(1) Primary
transfer unit".)
2) Remove the screws (A). Rotate the cleaner unit (B) 45
degrees, and remove it.
G
H
H
I
J
K
L
L
M 1
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 Primary transfer unit a Primary transfer belt
N
M
O
1-a
B
A
A
45
4) Remove the screw (E), and disengage the pawl (F), and
remove the guide rail (G).
5) Remove the screw (H), and remove the guide (I).
* When installing, check that the shaft (J) is in the cut-out por-
tion (K) of the guide.
6) Remove the screws (L), and slide the plates (M). Remove the
fixing bearing (N).
7) Fold the transfer frame cleaner unit side (O), and remove the
primary transfer belt (P).
* When working, front side is made downward to prevent
damage of the primary transfer belt (P). When removing,
pinch the belt upper edge (rear side) (Q), be sure to don't
touch the surface.
* Install so that the lot number (R) side of the belt inside is
front side.
* Apply starting powder
a) Apply the Kynar powder (UKOG-0123FCZZ) to whole of
belt surface evenly.
b) Rub the Kynar that applied to the belt into the belt gen-
tly. (Cover the whole surface.)
C
D
C
E G
F
H
I
J
K
M
M
L
L
N
L
P
O
Q
1-a
R
b. Y auxiliary roller, Primary transfer follower roller, Primary
transfer roller
transfer unit".)
2) Remove the primary transfer belt. (Refer to the "a. Primary
transfer belt".)
3) Clean the Y auxiliary roller (A) and the primary transfer fol-
lower roller (B).
* Clean with alcohol. When installing, alcohol must be volatil-
ized completely.
* Prevent dust or dirt being put.
4) Remove the screws (C).
5) Remove the primary transfer roller units (D).
6) Remove the bearing (E), the collar (F), and bearings (G) from
primary transfer roller (H).
c. Belt drive gear
1) Remove the primary transfer unit. (Refer to the (1) Primary
transfer unit.)
2) Remove the screw (A), and remove the belt drive gear (B).
* When installing, be sure to install the parallel pin (C).
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 Primary transfer unit b Y auxiliary roller
c Primary transfer follower
roller

d Primary transfer roller
1-c
1-b
1-d
1-e
1-f
A
B
1-c
1-b
C
C
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 Primary transfer unit e Belt drive gear
D
D
D
E
F
G
G
H
1-d
1-e
A
B C 1-e
d. Primary transfer drive roller
1) Remove the primary transfer unit. (Refer to the (1) Primary
transfer unit.)
transfer belt".)
3) Clean the primary transfer drive roller (A).
ized completely.
e. Transfer idle roller, tension roller
transfer unit".)
transfer belt".)
3) Clean the transfer idle roller (A) and the tension roller (B).
f. Cleaning brush
transfer unit".)
transfer belt".)
3) Clean the cleaning brush (A).
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 Primary transfer unit f Primary transfer drive roller
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 Primary transfer unit g Transfer idle roller
h Tension roller
1-f
A 1-f
1-h
1-
g
1-
g
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 Primary transfer unit i Cleaning brush
A
A
B
1-
g
1-
g
1-h
1-i
A 1-i
g. Resist backup roller
transfer unit".)
transfer belt".)
3) Clean the resist backup roller (A).
ized completely.
h. Cleaner seal, Transfer sub blade, transfer cleaning blade,
cleaning brush
transfer unit".)
2) Remove the screws (A). Rotate the cleaner unit (B) 45
degrees, and remove it.
3) Check the cleaner seal (C).
* When replacing is required, paste it along the reference line.
4) Remove the screws (D), and remove the transfer sub blade (E)
and transfer cleaning blade (F).
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 Primary transfer unit j Resist backup roller
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 Primary transfer unit k Cleaner seal
l Transfer sub blade
m Transfer cleaning blade
n Cleaning brush
1-
j
A
1-
j
1-m
1-l
1-n
1-k
1-k
B
A
A
45
1-k
1-k
C
C
0 - 0.5mm 0 - 0.5mm
0.2mm - 0.7mm
reference line reference line
reference
line
0.2mm - 0.7mm
E
F
D
D
D
D
D
D
1-m
1-l
5) Remove the screw (G), and remove the cover (H), the shutter
(I), and the spring (J).
6) Remove the screws (K), and remove the plate (L). Remove the
E-ring (M), the bearing (N), and the screws (O), and remove
the pipe (P) and the plate (Q).
7) Remove the E-ring (R), and remove the bearing (S). Remove
the E-ring (T), the gear (U), and the bearing (V), and remove
the cleaning brush (W).
B. Secondary transfer unit
(1) Secondary transfer unit
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
O P
Q
1-n
R
S
T
V
U
W
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
Page
1 Secondary
transfer unit
a Secondary transfer idle
gear
M-10
b Secondary belt follwer roller
c Secondary drive belt
d Secondary transfer roller M-11
e Secondary belt dirve roller M-11
f Secondary belt tension
roller
M-11
Unit
1 Secondary transfer unit
1-e
1-a
1-b
1-d
1-f
1
1-c
1
A
B
2) Push the plate (C) slightly, and release the lock (D). Rotate the
secondary transfer unit (E) and remove it.
a. Secondary drive idle gear, Secondary belt follower roller,
Secondary transfer belt
1) Remove the secondary transfer unit. (Refer to the "(1) Second-
ary transfer unit".)
2) Remove the screws (A) and remove the plate (B), and remove
the secondary drive idle gear (C). Remove the bearing (D) and
the belt (E). Remove the polyslider (F), the pulley (G), the
polyslider (H), the bearing (I), and the parallel pin (J). Remove
the spring (K) and the plate (L).
3) Remove the screws (M), and remove the frame (N).
4) Remove the frame (O) and the bearing (P), and remove the
secondary belt follower roller (Q) and bearing (R).
5) Remove the secondary transfer belt (S).
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 Secondary transfer
unit
a Secondary drive idle gear
b Secondary belt follower roller
c Secondary transfer belt
D
E
1
C
1-c
1-a
1-b
A
B
1-a C
D
E
F
G
I
H
J
K
L
M
N
M
O
Q
R
P
1-b
S 1-c
b. Secondary transfer roller
2) Remove the secondary transfer belt. (Refer to the "a. Second-
ary transfer idle gear, secondary belt follower roller, secondary
transfer belt".)
3) Disenage the pawl (A), and remove the bearing (B) on the front
side, the bearing (C), and the spring (D). Remove the secon-
rary transfer roller (E), and remove the bearing (F) and the
bearing (G).
c. Secondary belt drive roller
transfer belt".)
3) Remove the C-ring (A). Remove the secondary belt drive roller
(B). Remove the C-ring (C), the parallel pin (D), and bearings
(E) from the secondary belt drive roller (B).
d. Secondary belt tension roller
transfer belt".)
3) Remove the bearings (A) and springs (B), and remove the sec-
ondary belt tension roller (C).
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
unit
d Secondary transfer roller
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
unit
e Secondary belt drive roller
1-d
D
B
C
E
G
F
A
1-d
1-e
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
unit
f Secondary belt tension roller
A
C
E
B 1-e
E
D
1-f
A
C
B
A
B
1-f
C. PTC unit
(1) PTC unit
1) Remove the paper dust removal cleaner. (Refer to the [G]
PAPER TRANSFER SECTION.)
2) Turn the blue screw (A) counterclockwise. Check that the lock
is released as shown in (B).
fer belt.
3) Remove the screw (C). Hold the drum fixing knob (D) by the
hand to not rotate, remove the screw (E). Remove the drum
fixing knob (D).
4) Pull out the fixing cover (F).
5) Loosen the screws (G), and open the cover (H) of the process
section.
6) Remove the screw (I), and pull out the PTC unit (J) straight.
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
Page
1 PTC unit a PTC cleaner B M-13
b PTC cleaner
c Charger wire M-13
Parts
1 PTC unit
1-b
1-c
1-a
1
1
A
B
D
C
E
F
G
G
H
J
I
1
* When installing, be careful to prevent damage of the primary
transfer belt where right side (K) of the PTC unit is a cause.
* When installing, check that rails (L) is engaged.
a. PTC cleaner B, PTC cleaner
PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION.)
2) Remove the PTC unit. (Refer to the "(1) PTC unit".)
3) After disengaging the pawl (A), disengage the pawl (B).
Remove the holder cover (C).
4) Disenage the pawl (D). Remove the PTC cleaner B (E), and
remove the PTC cleaner (F).
* When installing, check that the charger wire (G) is posi-
tioned to center of the cleaner pad (H).
* When installing the PTC cleaner B (E), be sure to check that
the pawl (D) and the pawl (I) of the PTC cleaner (F) is
engaged.
* When removing or installing, be careful that the charger wire
(G) hang up the lower side (J) of the PTC cleaner (F).
b. Charger wire
PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION.)
2) Remove the PTC unit. (Refer to the "(1) PTC unit".)
3) Remove the PTC cleaner B and PTC cleaner. (Refer to the a.
PTC cleaner B, PTC cleaner.)
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 PTC unit a PTC cleaner B
b PTC cleaner
K
L
L
1-b
1-a
A
B
C
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 PTC unit c Charger wire
G
H
J
D
E
I
1-b
F
1-a
1-c
4) Remove the spring (B) from the pawl (A). Remove the round
terminal (D) from the pawl (C). Remove the charger wire (E).
Remove the spring (B) form the round terminal (F).
* When installing, hold the round terminal (D). Don't touch the
wire directly.
* When installing, be careful to dirt of the wire and don't put oil
etc., and be sure to prevent the wire bending or twisting.
D. Secondary transfer separating drive unit
(1) Secondary transfer separating drive unit
3) Remove the screws (E), and remove the pressure plate (F)
and springs (G).
4) Disconnect the connector (H). Remove the screw (I). Disenage
the pawl (J), and remove the cover (K).
5) Remove the screws (L), and remove the secondary transfer
separation drive unit (M).
Unit Parts Page
1 PTC unit a Secondary transfer
separation motor
M-15
b Secondary transfer
separation drive sensor
M-15
Parts
1 Secondary transfer drive unit
A
B
C
D
B
F
E
1-c
1
1-a
1-b
A
B
C
C
D
E
E
E
E
F
G
G
I
H
H
K
J
L
L
M 1
a. Secondary transfer separation motor
and springs (G).
remove the secondary transfer separation motor unit (J).
5) Disengage the pawls (K), and remove the coupling (M) and
spring (N) from the secondary transfer separation motor (L).
b. Secondary tansfer separation drive sensor
Unit Parts
separating drive unit
a Secondary transfer separation motor
1-a
A
B
C
C
D
E
E
E
E
F
G
G
Unit Parts
separating drive unit
b Secondary transfer separation drive
sensor
I
H
I
J
K
M
K
N
L 1-a
1-b
A
B
and springs (G).
4) Disconnect the connector (H). Remove the screw (I). Disenage
the pawl (J), and remove the cover (K).
5) Disconnect the connector (L), and remove the secondary sep-
aration drive sensor (M).
E. Others
(1) Transfer belt separation BK detection
1) Remove the primary transfer unit. (Refer to the "A. Primary
transfer unit".)
2) Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to the "[A] EXTERNAL OUT-
FIT")
C
C
D
E
E
E
E
F
G
G
I
H
H
K
J
L
M 1-b
Parts Page
a Transfer belt separation BK detection M-16
b Sensor inside the PTC unit M-17
Parts
a Transfer belt separation BK detection
b
a
a
B
B
A
A
4) Disconnect the connectors (C).
5) Disconnect the connector (D). Remove the screw (E), and dis-
engage the pawls (F), and remove the electrode holder (G).
6) Remove the transfer belt separation BK detection (H).
(2) Sensor inside PTC unit
1) Remove the paper dust removal cleaner and the PS unit.
(Refer to the "[G] PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION".)
2) Remove the charge unit. (Refer to the "[J] PHOTOCON-
DUCTER SECTION".)
3) Remove the developement unit (BK). (Refer to the "[L]
DEVELOPING UNIT".)
4) Remove the OPC drum unit (BK). (Refer to the "[J] PHOTO-
CONDUCTER SECTION".)
5) Disengage the pawls (A), and remove the sensor inside PTC
unit (B), and disconnect the connector (C).
* When installing, be careful to the sensor tilting to the front
side.
C
C
D
G
E
F
F
a H
Parts
b Sensor inside PTC unit
b
B
C
A
b
4. Maintenance
No. Part name
Monochrome
supply,
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the
replacement parts
are described.)
1 Primary transfer belt Mechanical
parts
(P/G No. : [38]-12)
2 Primary transfer roller (P/G No. : [38]-31)
(P/G No. : [40]-35)
3 Transfer sub blade (P/G No. : [39]-19)
(P/G No. : [39]-34)
4 Transfer cleaning blade (P/G No. : [39]-19)
5 Belt drive gear (P/G No. : [38]-9)
6 Primary transfer drive roller
7 Primary ransfer follower roller
8 Tension roller
9 Cleaning brush
10 Y auxiliary roller
11 Resist backup roller
12 Secondary transfer belt (P/G No. : [43]-37)
13 Secondary transfer roller (P/G No. : [43]-15)
14 Secondary belt drive roller
15 Secondary belt tension roller
16 Secondary belt follower roller
17 Secondary drive idle gear (P/G No. : [43]-30)
18 PTC cleaner (P/G No. : [41]-29)
19 PTC cleaner B (P/G No. : [41]-30)
20 Charger wire (P/G No. : [41]-5)
21 Transfer idle roller
22 Cleaner seal
1
12
13
5
14
16
15
17
3
4
9
22
22
9
2
2
2
2
6
11
10
7
8
21
21
18
19
20
MX-7000N PROCESS CONTROL SENSOR, REGISTRATION SENSOR SECTION N 1
MX-7000N
Sv` Huuuu!

[N] PROCESS CONTROL SENSOR, REGISTRATION SENSOR SECTION
PCS_CL/
PCS_K
Process control sensor PWB Detects the toner patch density
PCSS Process control shutter solenoid Opens/closes the shutter of the process control and the registration sensor.
REG_F Registration sensor PWB F
Detects the shift of registration image
REG_R Registration sensor PWB R
PCSS
REG_R
PCS_CL/PCS_K
REG_F
P
C
U
P
W
B
R
S
M
1
8
P
P
P
D
F
1
B
-
3
2
P
S
P
D
F
1
B
-
1
8
D
E
S
C
N
8
P
H
R
-
4
P
H
R
-
5
P
H
R
-
4
R
S
M
2
P
P
B
4
0
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
5
V
N
P
D
D
-
G
N
D
P
C
S
_
L
E
D
#
P
C
S
_
C
L
1
0
/
P
C
S
S
1
1
9
2 1
7 8
1
4
1
5
1
2
/
P
C
S
S
2
4
V
3
2 1
4 3 2 1
5
V
N
P
D
D
-
G
N
D
R
E
G
_
R
R
E
G
_
R
_
L
E
D
#
P
C
S
_
L
E
D
#
5 4 3 2 1
5
V
N
P
D
D
-
G
N
D
P
C
S
_
C
L
P
C
S
_
K
R
E
G
_
F
R
E
G
_
F
_
L
E
D
#
4 3 2 1
5
V
N
P
D
D
-
G
N
D
31 2
5
V
N
P
D
D
-
G
N
D
R
E
G
_
F
6
2
1
R
E
G
_
F
5
V
N
P
D
R
E
G
_
R
_
L
E
D
#
2
9
5
V
N
P
D
3
0
D
-
G
N
D
3
1
R
E
G
_
R
3
6
/
P
C
S
S
3
5
2
4
V
3
1
4
1
5
1
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
72 3 4 5
P
C
S
_
K
61
1
3
R
E
G
_
R
R
E
G
_
R
_
L
E
D
#
R
E
G
_
F
_
L
E
D
#
5
V
N
P
D
D
-
G
N
D
4 5
2
6
2
7
2
5
8 9
3
2
2
3
5
V
N
P
D
2
0
1
3
D
-
G
N
D
3
5
V
N
P
D
1
2
5
V
N
P
D
5
R
E
G
_
F
5
7
R
E
G
_
F
_
L
E
D
#
7
9
5
V
N
P
D
9
1
1
D
-
G
N
D
1
1
1
3
P
C
S
_
K
1
3
1
5
P
C
S
_
C
L
1
5
1
7
P
C
S
_
L
E
D
#
1
7
1
8
5
V
N
P
D
1
8
2
D
-
G
N
D
2
4
R
E
G
_
R
4
6
R
E
G
_
R
_
L
E
D
#
6
1
0
2
4
V
3
1
0
2
4
8
/
P
C
S
S
8
D
-
G
N
D
P
C
S
_
K
1
9
D
-
G
N
D
2
2
R
E
G
_
F
_
L
E
D
#
P
C
S
_
L
E
D
#
P
C
S
_
C
L
2
4
D
-
G
N
D
4
6
R
E
G
_
F
6
8
R
E
G
_
F
_
L
E
D
#
8
1
0
5
V
N
P
D
1
0
1
2
D
-
G
N
D
1
2
1
4
P
C
S
_
K
1
4
1
6
P
C
S
_
C
L
1
6
1
8
P
C
S
_
L
E
D
#
1
8
2
0
5
V
N
P
D
2
0
2
2
D
-
G
N
D
2
2
2
4
R
E
G
_
R
2
4
2
6
R
E
G
_
R
_
L
E
D
#
2
6
2
4
V
3
3
0
2
8
/
P
C
S
S
2
8
3
0
2
4
V
3
A. Process control sensor control
The shutter is provided on the monochrome (PCS_K) and color
(PCS_CL) process control sensor. When the shutter is opened (the
image density is corrected), the toner patch formed on the transfer
belt is scanned by the process control sensor and the information is
passed to the PCU.
When the shutter is closed, the gray resin section on the back of
the shutter is scanned to perform calibration of the sensor itself.
The shutter operation is controlled by the process control shutter
solenoid (PCSS).
B. Registration sensor control
The registration sensor is attached to the F side (REG_F) and the
R side (REG_R). When the shutter is opened, the registration
image formed on the transfer belt is scanned by the sensor and the
information is passed to the PCU.
A. Process control registration sensor unit
(1) Process control registration sensor unit
OPING SECTION".)
3) Remove the charge unit (BK) and OPC drum unit (BK). (Refer
to the "[J] PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION".)
4) Remove the primary transfer unit. (Refer to the [M] TRANS-
FER SECTION.)
5) Remove the paper exit tray. (Refer to the "[A] EXTERNAL
OUTFIT".)
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
Page
1 Process
control
registration
sensor unit
a Process control sensor
PWB
N- 3
b Registration PWB F
c Registration PWB R
d Process control shutter
solenoid
N- 3
Unit
1 Process control registration sensor unit
1
1-c
1-b
1-a
1-d
1
remove the process control registration sensor unit (C).
a. Process control sensor PWB, Registration sensor PWB F,
Registration sensor PWB R
1) Remove the process control registration sensor unit. (Refer to
the "(1) Process control registration sensor unit)");
2) Push up the shutters (A), and clean the process control sensor
PWB (B), the registration sensor PWB F (C), and the registra-
tion sensor PWB R (D) .
b. Process control shutter solenoid
OPING SECTION".)
3) Remove the charge unit (BK) and OPC drum unit (BK). (Refer
to the "[J] PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION".)
4) Remove the primary transfer unit. (Refer to the [M] TRANS-
FER SECTION.)
OUTFIT".)
6) Remove the process control registration sensor unit. (Refer to
the "(1) Process control registration sensor unit".)
remove the process control shutter solenoid (C) so that it lift up
from the connector side.
* When installing, hook cut-out portion (D) of the shutter move
plate to the process control shutter solenoid.
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 Process control
registration sensor
unit
a Process control sensor PWB
b Registration sensor PWB F
c Registration sensor PWB R
A
B
C 1
1-c
1-b
1-a
A
B
D
C
1-a
1-b
1-c
Unit Parts
1 Process control
registration sensor
unit
d Process control shutter solenoid
1-d
A
B
C 1-d
D
4. Maintenance
No. Part name
Monochrome
supply,
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the
replacement
parts are
described.)
1 Sensors Mechanical
parts

1
MX-7000N FUSING SECTION O 1
MX-7000N
Sv` Huuuu!

[O] FUSING SECTION
WEBM
POD1
HL_EX
HL_US
HL_LM
HL_UM
FUM
FEXM
FCFM
TH_US
WEB_END
6
TH_UM
TS_LM
TS_UM
TS_US
TH_EX1
TH_EX2
TS_EX
TS_EX
TH_LM
7
1
2
3
4
4
4
5
3
C
N
1
H
L
P
W
B
C
N
4
B
3
P
5
-
V
H
IN
T
2
4
V
1
D
-
G
N
D
C
N
2
H
L
o
u
t_
U
M
H
L
o
u
t_
U
S
H
L
o
u
t_
L
M
S
0
2
B
-
V
T
H
L
o
u
t_
E
X
/H
L
P
R
B
0
7
B
-
P
A
S
K
F
P
S
-
2
5
0
R
S
M
-
2
p
in
_
N
P
P
D
F
1
B
-
2
0
P
S
C
N
8
D
R
I
V
E
R
P
W
B
B
1
2
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
P
H
N
R
-
5
-
H
+
B
U
0
5
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
C
N
1
2
C
N
1
0
/H
L
P
R
H
L
o
u
t_
E
X
H
L
o
u
t_
L
M
H
L
o
u
t_
U
S
H
L
o
u
t_
U
M
D
-
G
N
D
IN
T
2
4
V
1
P
H
N
R
-
3
-
H
+
B
U
0
3
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
B
4
0
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
P
H
N
R
-
2
-
H
+
B
U
0
2
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
P
H
N
R
-
4
-
H
+
B
U
0
4
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
P
H
N
R
-
2
-
H
+
B
U
0
2
P
-
T
R
-
P
-
H
B
1
6
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
C
N
1
3
B
4
0
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
G
P
1
A
7
1
L
3
P
H
R
-
3
DF11-8DP-SP1
T
H
_
U
M
D
-
G
N
D
B
-
4
5
V
N
P
D
B
-
6
D
-
G
N
D
5
2
T
H
_
L
M
4
5
V
N
P
D
3
2
T
H
_
L
M
1
1
D
-
G
N
D
2
1
A
-
1
T
H
_
L
M
D
-
G
N
D
T
H
_
E
X
2
P
O
D
1
2
B
-
9
D
-
G
N
D
B
-
1
B
-
5
P
O
D
1
B
-
5
D
-
G
N
D
1
T
H
_
U
S
B
-
3
1
9
1
3
1
197
W
E
B
_
E
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
97
1 3 5
T
H
2
_
A
D
1
1
3
T
H
2
_
A
D
2
1
5
T
H
1
_
A
D
1
4 2
T
H
1
_
A
D
2
6
1
8
W
E
B
M
_
b
D
-
G
N
D
N
-
H
L
_
U
S
L
-
H
L
_
L
M
L
-
H
L
_
U
N
-
H
L
_
L
M
3 5211
0
1
0
1
4
T
H
_
U
S
T
H
_
E
X
2
T
H
_
E
X
1
A
-
9
A
-
1
0
1
2
D
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
1
9
T
H
2
_
A
D
2
41
0
2
026
L
-
H
L
_
U
1
1
N
-
H
L
_
U
M
1
2
2
N
-
H
L
_
U
M
1
A
-
1
3
B
-
2
A
-
4
A
-
3
D
-
G
N
D
A
-
7
T
H
_
E
X
1
4
A
-
2
A
-
9
A
-
1
0
A
-
5
A
-
6
3
B
-
8
W
E
B
_
E
N
D
A
-
8
B
-
7
B
-
1
3
54
12
3
T
H
1
_
A
D
2
1
2
T
H
1
_
A
D
1
2
D
-
G
N
D
1
D
-
G
N
D
12
T
H
_
U
S
D
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
D
-
G
N
D
A
-
4
D
-
G
N
D
7
T
H
_
E
X
2
T
H
_
U
M
T
H
_
E
X
1
T
H
1
_
A
D
1
2
0
T
H
1
_
A
D
2
T
H
2
_
A
D
1
6
D
-
G
N
D
4
T
H
_
L
M
1
6
W
E
B
M
_
a
W
E
B
M
_
b
1
82
B
-
9
W
E
B
_
E
N
D
97
1
0
T
H
_
U
S
A
-
3
T
H
1
_
A
D
2
T
H
1
_
A
D
1
7
1
2
1
7
6
N
-
H
L
_
E
X
5
6
26 45 3
L
-
H
L
_
L
M
N
-
H
L
_
L
M
45
A
-
5
B
-
3
DGND
6
8
7
5
4
3
2
1
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
A
-
7
A
-
2
8
A
-
6
B
-
7
B
-
8
12
W
E
B
M
_
a
1
7
2 1
W
E
B
M
_
a
A
-
8
3
6
4
W
E
B
M
_
b
3
8
P
O
D
1
1
5
5
V
N
P
D
1
5
1
3
1
3
T
H
_
U
M
T
H
_
L
M
8 1
6
8 1
4
1
4
1
6
W
E
B
_
E
N
D
9
B
-
2
N
-
H
L
_
E
X
3
N
-
H
L
_
U
S
11 2
T
H
_
E
X
2
32 41
P
O
D
1
5
V
N
P
D
D
-
G
N
D
T
H
_
E
X
1
D
-
G
N
D
2
1
2
1
2
F
U
F
M
_
F
_
L
D
3 1
F
U
F
M
_
F
5
P
-
G
N
D
1
0
P
O
F
M
_
C
N
T
2
P
C
U
P
W
B
P
S
M
-
6
p
in
_
N
R
P
D
F
1
8
-
3
2
P
S
C
N
1
4
B
3
0
B
-
P
N
D
Z
S
-
1
B
7
B
-
P
H
-
K
-
S
2
1
F
E
X
M
_
A
2
1
2
3
IN
T
2
4
V
2
2
3
1
1 1579
F
U
M
_
L
D
F
E
X
M
_
/B
F
E
X
M
_
B
F
E
X
M
_
/A
F
E
X
M
_
A
IN
T
2
4
V
2
IN
T
2
4
V
2
P
-
G
N
D
/F
U
M
_
C
K
/F
U
M
_
D
1
5
F
E
X
M
_
/B
1
7
F
E
X
M
_
B
1
9
5
IN
T
2
4
V
2
1
P
-
G
N
D
2
1
5
1
9
F
E
X
M
_
/A
2
4
F
E
X
M
_
A
N
.C
7
N
.C
3
/F
U
M
_
C
K
4
/F
U
M
_
D
6
2
F
E
X
M
_
/A
F
U
M
_
L
D
F
E
X
M
_
/B
1
3
F
E
X
M
_
B
3
6
N
,C
6
5
IN
T
2
4
V
2
5 4
1
1
3
1
5
1
7
1
93
1
7
P
D
F
1
B
-
3
2
P
R1
1
1
1
P
-
G
N
D
F
U
F
M
_
F
7
9
F
U
F
M
_
F
_
L
D
9
1
3
/P
O
F
M
_
C
N
T
2
1
3
7
P
D
F
1
B
-
3
2
P
R3
3
P
-
G
N
D
F
U
F
M
_
F
1
2
F
U
F
M
_
F
_
L
D
2
4
/P
O
F
M
_
C
N
T
2
4
1
P
D
F
1
B
-
3
2
P
R3
3
P
-
G
N
D
F
U
F
M
_
F
1
2
F
U
F
M
_
F
_
L
D
2
4
/P
O
F
M
_
C
N
T
2
4
1
WEB_INL
3
3
W
E
B
_
IN
L
B
-
6
B
-
4
W
E
B
_
IN
L
1
1
W
E
B
_
IN
L
1
1
W
E
B
_
IN
L
1
1
A. Fusing unit drive
To drive the fusing unit, the drive power is transmitted from the
drive motor (FUM) through the connection gear to the upper heat
roller gear.
The drive motor (stepping motor) is driven according to the control
signal sent from the PCU.
B. Heater lamp drive
The surface temperature of the heat roller detected by the ther-
mistor is sent to the PCU. When the temperature is lower than the
specified level, the heater lamp lighting signal is sent from the PCU
to the heater lamp drive circuit in the sub power PWB.
The power triac in the heater lamp drive circuit is turned on, and the
AC power is supplied to the heater lamp, lighting the lamp and
heating the heat roller.
To prepare for an abnormally high temperature of the heat roller,
the thermostat is provided for safety.
When the thermostat is opened, power supply (AC line) to the
heater lamp is cut off.
C. Fusing operation
Color toner of YMCK on paper is heated and pressed by the heat
rollers to be fused on paper.
At that time, color toner of YMCK is mixed to reproduce nearly
actual colors of document images.
The heater lamp is provided in the upper and lower heat rollers and
the external heat roller. It heats paper up and down.
This is because necessary to heat from left/right/above/below for
fusing four layers of toner on paper.
The upper and lower heat rollers are of silicon rubber.
This is because of the following reasons:
1) To provide a greater nip quantity and a higher heating capacity
for paper.
2) The soft, flexible rollers press multi-layer toner without defor-
mation to fuse on paper.
3) An even pressure is applied to an uneven surface of multilayer
toner.
The external heat roller roller has the following functions.
1) Helps fusing and keeps the fusing temperature under special
conditions.
FCFM Fusing cooling fan Cools the fusing unit
FEXM External variable motor Separates the external heat roller of the fusing unit
FUM Fusing motor Drives the fusing unit
HL_EX Heater lamp external Heats the external heat roller
HL_LM Lower heater lamp Heats the lower heat roller
HL_UM Heater lamp upper main Heats the upper heat roller
HL_US Heater lamp upper sub Heats the upper heat roller
POD1 Fusing rear detection Detects the paper from the fusing unit
TH_EX1 External thermistor main Controls surface temperature of the external heat roller
TH_EX2 External thermistor sub Controls surface temperature of the external heat roller
TH_LM Lower thermistor Controls surface temperature of the lower heat roller
TH_UM Upper thermistor main Controls surface temperature of the upper heat roller
TH_US Upper thermistor sub Controls surface temperature of the upper heat roller
TS_EX External thermostat Prevents the external heat roller overheating
TS_LM Lower thermostat Prevents the lower heat roller overheating
TS_UM Upper thermostat main Prevents the upper heat roller overheating
TS_US Upper thermostat sub Prevents the upper heat roller overheating
WEB_END Web end sensor Detects end of the web
WEB_INL Web installation detection Detects installation of the web unit
WEBM Fusing web cleaning motor Drives the fusing web cleaning paper
1 Upper heat roller Heat and presses toner on paper to fuse it on paper
2 Lower heat roller Heat and presses toner on paper to fuse it on paper
3 Upper separation pawl Mechanically separates the paper which was not separated naturally from the upper heat roller.
4 Lower separation pawl Mechanically separates the paper which was not separated naturally from the lower heat roller.
5 External heat roller Supports temperature control of the upper heat roller.
6 Web unit Clean the upper heat roller
7 Transport roller 9 (Drive) Transports paper from the upper/lower heat rollers to the paper exit roller 1
FUM PCU
D. Fusing temperature control
The temperature sensors are provided at the center and the edges
of the upper heat roller, at the center of the lower heat roller, and at
the center and the edges of the external heat roller.
The heat roller temperature is detected by the temperature sensors
to control the heater lamp so that the temperature is maintained at
The fusing temperature is switched according to the paper type
selected.
* For the fusing temperature set value, refer to SIM43-1 in [7] SIM-
ULATIONS.
A. Fusing unit
Unit Page
A Fusing unit O- 3
B Others O-20
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
Page
1 Fusing unit a External thermostat main O- 4
b External thermostat sub
c External thermistor main O- 5
d External thermistor sub
e Upper thermostat main O- 6
f Upper thermostat sub
g Upper thermistor sub O- 7
h Upper thermistor main O- 8
i Lower thermostat O- 8
j Lower thermistor
k Fusing rear detection O- 9
l Heater lamp external O-10
m External heat SP
n Slider ring
o External heat bearing
p External heat collar
q External heat belt
r External heat roller
s Heater lamp upper sub O-12
t Heater lamp upper main
u Fusing gear
v Upper roller bearing
w Upper heat roller
x Lower heater lamp O-14
y Lower roller bearing
z Lower heat roller
A Discharge brush O-16
B Transport roller 9 (Drive) O-16
C Upper separation pawl O-17
D Upper separation pawl SP
E Lower separation pawl O-18
F Lower separation pawl SP
G Web unit O-19
1-G
1-r
1-
q
1
1-v
1-v 1-C
1-C
1-C
1-
g
1-w
1-k
1-a
1-b
1-l
1-f 1-e
1-s
1-t
1-x
1-
p
1-B
1-m
1-
y
1-c
1-d
1-z
1-i
1-
p
1-o
1-
y
1-E
1-F
1-F
1-E
1-D
1-D
1-h
1-
j
1-n
1-o
1-m
1-n
1-u
1-A
(1) Fusing unit
* CAUTION. HOT
When removing the fusing unit, because the fusing unit is high
temperature, remove after it cools enough.
* When working, open the right door unit enough.
2) Remove the screws (C), and pull out the fusing unit (D).
3) Hold the part of green felts (E), and remove the fusing unit (F).
a. External thermostat main, External thermostat sub
1) Remove the fusing unit. (Refer to the "(1) Fusing unit".)
Unit
1 Fusing unit
1
A
B
C
C
D
Unit Parts
1 Fusing unit a External thermostat main
b External thermostat sub
F 1
E
E
1-a
1-b
2) Remove the screws (A). Rotate the fusing web unit (B), and
remove it.
* When installing, engage the fusing web unit (B) to the pawls
(C) of the upper cover.
* When installing, be careful to prevent bending the elec-
trodes (D), and check that the electrodes are contacted.
3) Remove the screws (E), and remove the upper cover (F).
4) Disconnect the connectors (H) by releasing each locks (G).
Remove the screws (I), and remove the external thermostat
main (J), the external thermostat sub (K), and the washers (L).
b. External thermistor main, External thermistor sub
remove it.
A
A
B
B
C
D
E
F
E
E
J
K
1-a
1-b
H
L
L
H
I
G
G
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 Fusing unit c External thermistor main
d External thermistor sub
1-d
1-c
A
A
B
B
C
D
E
F
E
E
4) Remove the screw (G), and remove the clamp (H). Disconnect
the connector (I). Remove the screws (J), and remove the
mounting plates (K). Remove the screws (L), and remove the
external thermistor main (M) and the external thermistor sub
(N).
c. Upper thermostat main, Upper thermostat sub
remove it.
* When installing, engage the fusing web unit (B) to the pawl
Unit Parts
1 Fusing unit e Upper thermostat main
f Upper thermostat sub
K
K
J
J
L
L
M
N
1-c
1-d
G
H
I
1-f 1-e
A
A
B
B
C
D
E
F
E
E
4) Disconnect the connectors (H) by releasing each locks (G).
Remove the screws (I) and the washers (J), and remove the
thermostat main (K) and the thermostat sub (L). Remove the
washers (M).
d. upper thermistor sub
remove it.
4) Disconnect the connector (G). Remove the screw (H), and
remove the upper thermistor sub (I).
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 Fusing unit g Upper thermistor sub
B
D
D
B
C
A
A
K 1-e
L
1-f
H
J
J
H
I
G
G
M
M
1-
g
A
A
B
B
C
D
E
F
E
E
G
I
H
1-g
e. Upper thermistor main
remove it.
4) Disconnect the connector (G). Remove the screw (H), and
remove the upper thermistor main (I).
f. Lower thermostat, Lower thermistor
2) Remove the screw (A), and remove the cover (B). Disconnect
the connector (C). Remove the screws (D), and remove the
cover R (E).
Unit Parts
1 Fusing unit h Upper thermistor main
1-h
A
A
B
B
C
D
E
F
E
E
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 Fusing unit i Lower thermostat
j Lower thermistor
H
G
I 1-h
1-
j
1-i
A
B
C
D
E
D
3) Remove the screws (F), and remove the cover F (G).
4) Remove the screws (H), and remove the lower cover (I).
5) Disconnect the connectors (K) by releasing each locks (J).
Remove the screws (L) and the washers (M), and remove the
lower thermostat (N). Disconnect the connector (O), and
remove the screw (P), and remove the fusing lower thermistor
(Q).
g. Fusing rear detection
cover R (E).
3) Disconnect the connector (F), and remove the fusing rear
detection (G).
* When installing, apply thread locking material.
F
F
G
H
H
I
H
K
M
M
K
L
J
J
N
1-
i
P
O
Q
1-
j
Unit Parts
1 Fusing unit k Fusing rear detection
1-k
A
B
C
D
E
D
F
1-k
G
h. Heater lamp external, External heat SP, Slider ring, External
heat bearing, External heat collar, External heat belt,
External heat roller
remove it.
3) Remove the screws (C), and remove the upper cover (D).
4) Remove the screw (E), and remove the cover (F). Disconnect
the connector (G). Remove the screws (H), and remove the
cover R (I).
5) Remove the screws (J), and remove the cover F (K).
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 Fusing unit l Heater lamp external
m External heat SP
n Slider ring
o External heat bearing
p External heat collar
q External heat belt
r External heat roller
1-
p
1-o
1-
q
1-r
1-
p
1-n
1-l
1-m
1-m
1-n
1-o
A
A
B
B
C
D
C
D
C
C
E
F
G
H
I
H
J
J
K
6) Remove the screws (L), and remove the clamps (M). Discon-
nect the connectors (N) with release each locks (O).
* When installing, be careful to the wiring.
7) Remove the screws (P) and the lamp holders (Q). Remove the
heater lamps external (R).
* When installing the heater lamp external (R), voltage nota-
tion side (S) is the rear side.
8) Remove the screw (T) and the clamp (U), and disconnect the
connectors (V). Remove the screws (W), and remove the
external heat roller unit (X) from the shaft (Y).
9) Remove the external heat springs (Z). Remove the E-rings (a),
and remove the slider rings (b), the lever F (c), and the lever R
(d).
Remove the slider rings (e) from the lever F (c) and lever R (d).
10) Remove the screws (f), and remove the external heat roller
unit (g). Remove the external heat bearings (h).
11) Remove the external heat collars (i), and the external heat belt
(j) from the external heat rollers (k).
M
O O
M
L
L
L
M
N
P Q
Q P
R
R
1-l
1-l
S
S
W
Y
W
X
T
U
V
V
a
b
1-n
1-n
a
b
d
c
d
c
1-n e
e
1-m
Z
1-n
f
f
h
h 1-o
1-o
g
k
k i
i
j
1-p
1-p
1-
r
1-
r
1-q
i. Heater lamp upper sub, Heater lamp upper main, Fusing
gear, Upper roller bearing , Upper heat roller
2) Raise upwards the pressure release levers (A), release the
pressure.
cover R (E).
5) Remove the screws (H), and remove the clamps (I). Discon-
nect the connectors (J). Remove the screws (K), and remove
the lamp holders (L).
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 Fusing unit s Heater lamp upper sub
t Heater lamp upper main
u Fusing gear
v Upper roller bearing
w Upper heat roller
1-u
1-v
1-w
1-s
1-t
1-v
A
A
A
B
C
D
E
D
F
F
G
H
L
H
H
I
I
J
J
K
K
L
6) Remove the heater lamp upper sub (M) and the heater lamp
upper main (N).
* When installing the heater lamp upper sub (M) and heater
lamp upper main (N), the red harnesses (O) is the rear side.
7) Remove the screws (P). Rotate the fusing web unit (Q), and
remove it.
* When installing, engage the fusing web unit (Q) to the pawls
(R) of the upper cover.
trodes (S), and check that the electrodes are contacted.
8) Disconnect the connector (T). Remove the screws (U), and
remove the paper guide (V).
9) Remove the screws (W), and open the fusing upper unit (X).
10) Remove the upper heat roller unit (Y).
* Don't touch the heat roller surface.
11) Remove the roller stoppers (Z), and remove the fusing gear (a)
and the fusing gear F (b). Remove the roller stoppers (c), and
remove the upper roller bearings (d) from the upper heat roller
(e).
M
N
1-s
1-t
O
O
P
P
Q
Q
R
S
U
U
V
T
W
X
W
Y
Z
Z
a
b
c
d
d
e
1-v
1-v
1-u
1-w
j. Lower heater lamp, Lower roller bearing, Lower heat roller
2) Raise upwards the pressure release levers (A), release the
pressure.
3) Remove the screw (B), and remove the cover (C). Disconnect
the connector (D). Remove the screws (E), and remove the
cover R (F).
4) Remove the screws (G), and remove the cover F (H).
5) Remove the screws (I), and remove the lower cover (J).
6) Disconnect the connectors (K). Remove the screws (L), and
remove the lamp holders (M).
7) Remove the lower heater lamp (N).
* Install so that the red harness (O) is in the rear side.
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 Fusing unit x Lower heater lamp
y Lower roller bearing
z Lower heat roller
1-z
1-y
1-x
1-y
A
A
B
C
D
E
F
E
G
G
H
I
I
J
I
L
L
M
M
K
N 1-x
O
8) Remove the screws (P). Rotate the fusing web unit (Q), and
remove it.
* When installing, engage the fusing web unit (Q) to the pawls
(R) of the upper cover.
trodes (S), and check that the electrode is contacted.
9) Disconnect the connector (T). Remove the screws (U), and
remove the paper guide (V).
10) Open the paper guide (W). Remove the springs (X).
11) Remove the screws (Y), and open the fusing lower unit (Z).
12) Remove the lower heat roller unit (a).
* Don't touch the heat roller surface.
13) Remove the roller stoppers (b), and remove the lower roller
bearings (c). Remove the roller stoppers (d) from lower heat
roller (e).
P
P
Q
Q
R
S
U
U
V
T
W
X
Y
Z
Y
a
b
b
c
c
e
d
d
1-z
1-y
1-y
k. Discharge brush
cover R (E).
5) Remove the screws (J), and remove the paper guide (K).
6) Check the discharge brush (L).
* When replacing is required, attach it based on reference line
as bend part end of the frame.
l. Transport roller 9 (Drive)
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 Fusing unit A Dischrge brush
A 1-
A
B
C
D
E
D
F
F
G
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 Fusing unit B Transport roller 9 (Drive)
H
H
I
H
K
J
J
L
20mm 0.5mm
1-A
Reference
line
B 1-
cover R (E).
4) Disconnect the connector (H). Remove the screw (I), and
remove the sensor unit (J).
5) Remove the E-ring (K). Lift the actuator (L), and remove the
gear (M) and the bearing (N).
6) Remove the screw (O), and remove the earth plate (P).
Remove the E-ring (Q), and remove the bearing (R). Remove
m. Upper separation pawl, Upper separation pawl SP
1) Remove the fusing unit. (Refer to the "(1) FUSING UNIT".)
remove it.
* When installing, be careful to prevent bending the electrode
(D), and check that the electrode is contacted.
A
B
C
D
E
D
F
F
G
I
H
J
L
N M
K
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 Fusing unit C Upper separation pawl
D Upper separation pawl SP
S 1-B
O
P
Q
R
1-C
1-D
A
A
B
B
C
D
3) Remove the screws (E), and remove the separation pawl hold-
ers (F). Disengage the upper separation pawls (G), and
remove the upper separation pawl SPs (H).
n. Lower separation pawl, Lower separation pawl SP
1) Remove the fusing unit. (Refer to the "(1) FUSING UNIT".)
cover R (E).
5) Open the paper guide (J). Remove the springs (K).
6) Remove the screw (L), and remove the mounting plate (M).
Remove the paper guide (N).
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 Fusing unit E Lower separation pawl
F Lower separation pawl SP
E
H
1-D
1-D
1-C
E
E
F
F
H
G
1-F
1-E
A
B
C
D
E
D
F
F
G
H
H
I
H
J
K
N
M
L
7) Remove the lower separation pawl units (O). Disengage the
lower separation pawl SPs (Q) from the lower separation
pawls (P).
o. Web unit
remove it.
* When installing, be careful to prevent bending the electrode
(D), and check that the electrode is contacted.
3) Remove the screw (E), and remove the bearing (F).
4) Remove the wind-up side (G) of web unit. Remove the collar
(H).
5) Remove the springs (I) and the bearings (J). Remove the roller
(K).
6) Pull out the shafts (L) from rear side.
* When installing, be careful to the installing direction of the
shafts. First of all, insert the side where the tip of the shaft
each is steps.
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 Fusing unit G Web unit
Q
1-F
P 1-E
O
1-G
A
A
B
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
J
I
L
L
7) Remove the web unit (M). Remove the collar (N) and the break
rubber (O).
* When installing the collar (N) and the break rubber (O), pre-
vent damage of the web unit (M), install to other side of red
line (P).
* When installing, hang the web unit to the shafts (Q) and the
roller (R), and arrange as shown below.
B. Others
(1) Fusing cooling fan
FIT".)
3) Remove the snap bands (C). Remove the harness (E) from the
wire saddles (D).
Parts Page
a Fusing cooling fan O-20
b Fusing motor O-21
c External variable motor O-21
d Fusing web cleaning motor O-22
e Fusing air outlet fan O-23
M 1-G
N
O
P
Q
A Q
R
b
e
d
a
c
Parts
a Fusing cooling fan
a
B
B
A
A
D
C
C
D
E
4) Disconnect the connectors (F). Remove the screws (G), and
remove the fusing cooling fan unit (H).
5) Remove the screws (I), and remove the fusing cooling fan (J).
(2) Fusing motor
FIT".)
remove the fusing motor (E).
(3) External variable motor
FIT".)
2) Remove the fusing unit. (Refer to the "A. FUSING UNIT".)
3) Remove the fusing cooling fan. (Refer to the "(1) Fusing cool-
ing fan".)
Parts
b Fusing motor
F
F
F
F
H
F G
G
a J
I
I
b
Parts
c External variable motor
B
B
A
A
b E
D
D
D
C
c
4) Remove the screws (A), and remove the drive unit (B).
remove the external variable motor unit (E).
6) Remove the screws (F). Slide the gear part (G), and remove
the external variable motor (H).
(4) Fusing web cleaning motor
1) Remove the fusing unit. (Refer to the "A. FUSING UNIT".)
2) Remove the front cabinet upper. (Refer to the "[A] EXTERNAL
OUTFIT".)
3) Disconnect the connector (A), and remove the harness (C)
from the clamps (B).
4) Remove the screws (D), and remove the fusing web cleaning
motor unit (E).
5) Remove the E-ring (F), and remove the gear (G). Remove the
screws (H), and remove the fusing web cleaning motor (I).
Parts
d Fusing web cleaning motor
B
A
A
A
C
D
E
F
F
G
H c
d
C
B
A
E
D
D
H
H
F
G
I d
(5) Fusing air outlet fan
1) Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to the [A] EXTERNAL OUT-
FIT.)
2) Remove the paper exit filter. (Refer to the [S] FAN, FILTER
SECTION.)
remove the blanket (C).
4) Remove the screws (D), and remove the fusing air outlet fan
(E).
* When installing, label side (F) of the fusing air outlet fan is
the blanket side, and according to the projection (G), install
it.
Parts
e Fusing air outlet fan
e
A
C
B
B
C
D
D
E
F G
e
4. Maintenance
Part name
Monochrome
supply,
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the replacement
parts are described.)
No.
200
K
400
K
600
K
800
K
1000
K
1200
K
1400
K
1600
K
1800
K
2000
K
1 Lower heat roller Mechanical
parts
(300K)
(P/G No.
: [54]-15)
Lower heat
roller unit
(without the
heater lamp)
2 Lower roller bearing (P/G No.
: [54]-14)
3 Upper separation pawl (P/G No.: [51]-28)
4 Lower separation pawl (P/G No.: [54]-3)
5 Separation pawl SP (P/G No.: [54]-2)
6 Upper thermistor sub (P/G No.: [53]-18)
7 External thermistor main (P/G No.: [52]-10)
8 External thermistor sub (P/G No.: [52]-10)
9 Lower thermistor (P/G No.: [54]-37)
10 Slider ring (P/G No.
: [52]-30)
External
heat unit
(without the
heater lamp)
11 External heat roller (P/G No.
: [52]-18)
12 External heat belt (P/G No.
: [52]-23)
13 External heat bearing (P/G No.
: [52]-15)
14 External heat collar (P/G No.
: [52]-17)
15 External heat SP (P/G No.
: [52]-22)
16 Gears etc. Apply to specified
positions
17 Paper guides etc.
18 Transport rollers
19 Discharge brush
20 Web unit Mechanical
parts
(200K)
(P/G No.: [51]-13)
21 Upper heat roller (P/G No.
: [53[-37)
Upper heat
roller unit
(without the
heater lamp)
22 Fusing gear (P/G No.
: [53]-34)
23 Upper heat roller bearing (P/G No.
: [53]-36)
20
17
17
17
21
1
22
23
2
23
2
4
11
14
14
4
3
5
5
12
13
13
3
5
3
14
5
16
16 16
16
9
10
10
15
15
8
19
18
6
7
MX-7000N PAPER EXIT SECTION P 1
MX-7000N
Sv` Huuuu!

[P] PAPER EXIT SECTION
PO_TMP Paper exit temperature detection Detects the temperature
POD2 Paper exit detection Detects the exit paper
POFM_F Paper exit cooling fan motor (F side) Cools the fusing unit
POFM_U Paper exit cooling fan motor (Center) Cools the fusing unit
POM Paper exit motor Drives the paper exit roller
TFD Paper exit full detection (Main unit) Detects face-down paper exit tray full
1 Paper exit roller 1 (Drive) Paper is discharged. / Paper is transported to the right paper exit tray.
/ Paper is transported to the duplex (ADU) section.
POD2
TFD
POM
1
POFM_F
POFM_U
PO_TMP
SOCKET1 SOCKET1
DRIVER
PWB
TX24-60R-LT-H1 TX-25-60P-LT-H1
26
24
PCU PWB
18 18
23
15
POM_A
23
24
25
/DRMCL_CNT
DMK_EN
DMM_EN
BTM_CLK
27
49 LCCM_B
50 LCCM_/B
47 PSFM_CNT
48 PSFM_EN
45 ADML_B
46 ADML_/B
43 ADMH_/B
44 /ADML_CNT
41 D-GND
42 ADMH_B
39 P-GND
28 POM_/A
37 HTMK_2
38 5VN
35 HTMC_2
32 HTMM_1
36 HTMK_1
33 HTMM_2
34 HTMC_1
/POM_CNT
30 D-GND
31 P-GND
29
BTM_EN
47
50
POM_/B
48
49
POM_B
DMY_EN
58
59
/BTM_CNT
46
/DMK_CNT
55
56
DMC_EN 54
53
45
DMK_CLK 52
43
44
LCCM_B
PSFM_CNT
LCCM_/B
5VN 51
37
PSFM_EN
38
41
40
ADML_B
ADML_/B
N,C
39
42
26
29
10
/DRMCL_CNT
DMK_EN
D-GND
25
POM_/A
ADMH_B
32
ADMH_/B
33
/ADML_CNT
34
28
HTMK_1
27
35
36
30
31
/POM_CNT
POM_A
/ADMH_CNT
N,C
11
12
13
D-GND
10
ADMH_A
ADMH_/A
P-GND
HTMY_2
PHTMK_1
5 PHTMK_2
4
PSFM_CLK
D-GND
16 16 ADML_/A
17
DRMCL_CLK
17 PSFM_CLK
LCCM_A
5
9
14
6
8
11
12
13
9
P-GND
2
3
P-GND
HTMY_1
HTMY_2
PHTMK_1
HTMY_1
D-GND
WEB_M2
2
1 1
4
7
/ADMH_CNT
ADMH_A
ADMH_/A
D-GND
6 WEB_M1
ADML_/A
LCCM_/A
LCCM_CNT
3
LCCM_CNT
LCCM_A
14
WEB_M1
5VN
WEB_M2
8
7
ADML_A
5VN
20
LCCM_/A 19
20
22
21
19
ADML_A
21
15
40 N,C
22
BTM_CLK
DRMCL_CLK
DMM_EN
HTMM_2
HTMK_2
P-GND
5VN
60
57
51 5VN
52 DMK_CLK
53 /DMK_CNT
54 DMC_EN
PHTMK_2
5VN
HTMC_2
HTMM_1
P-GND
P-GND
5VN
N,C
HTMC_1
55 DMY_EN
56 /BTM_CNT
57 BTM_EN
58 POM_B
59 POM_/B
60 D-GND
P SM-4p R
P DF1B-18p S CN15
P SM-4p R
P SM-4p R
LG248NL1 179228-3
B40B-PNDZS-1
LG248NL1 2-179228-3
CN4
S6B-PH-SM3 B12B-PASK-1
15
INT24V1
15
5VNPD 17
D-GND
2
INT24V1
POM_/A
3 POM_/B
5
6
4 POM_B
2
5VNPD
TFD
/POFM_CNT1 2
1
3
1 POFM
/POFM_CNT2 2
4
POFM
POFM_LD1 7
9 POFM_LD2
5 P-GND
4
6
10
8
4 D-GND
P-GND
5VNPD
4
/POFM_CNT2 11
/POFM_CNT1
1
13
11
3
7
9 POFM_LD2
POFM_LD3
POFM_LD1
3 /POFM_CNT1
POFM 1 1
3
/POFM_CNT2 11
TFD
3
2
4
1
2
4
POFM_U_LD
5VNPD
1 POM_A
2
17
POD2 POD2
13 2 5VNPD 13
5 5
9
7
POM_A
POM_/A
1
4
INT24V1 5
POM_/B 6
POM_B
INT24V1 2
3
6 POM_A 6
8 POM_/A 8
12 POM_B 12
10 POM_/B 10
14 INT24V1 14
16 INT24V1 16
1
1 POFM
4 POFM_F_LD
P-GND
3 P-GND
3
TFD 2
D-GND 3
D-GND 3
5VNPD 1
POD2 2
18 18 PO_TMP 18 PO_TMP
S4B-PH-K-S
CN1
PO_TMP 3
D-GND 4
Paper transported from the fusing section is passed to the trans-
port roller 9 which is driven by the fusing motor and to the paper
exit roller 1, then discharged to the inner tray.
When paper is discharged to the right tray, it is passed to the
paper exit roller 1 and the paper exit motor is reversely rotated,
and paper is passed over the ADU reverse gate and the right
paper exit gate, and discharged to the right tray.
A. Paper exit unit
(1) Paper exit unit
1) Remove the fusing unit. (Refer to the "[O] FUSING SEC-
TION".)
2) Remove the paper holding arm (A), and remove the paper exit
full detection actuator (B).
3) Remove the screws (C). Disengage the pawl (D), and remove
the cover (E).
remove the paper exit unit (H).
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
Page
1 Paper exit
unit
a Paper exit motor P- 3
b Paper exit cooling fan motor
(F side)
P- 3
c Paper exit cooling fan motor
(Center)
d Paper exit full detection

(Main unit)
P- 4
e Paper exit detection
f Paper exit roller 1 (Drive) P- 4
g Paper exit temperature
detection PWB
P- 5
h Discharge brush P- 5
Unit
1 Paper exit unit
1-b
1-c
1-a
1-e
1-f
1-h
1-h
1-g
1
1-d
1
A
B
E
D
C
F
G
G
H 1
a. Paper exit drive motor
TION".)
2) Remove the paper exit unit. (Refer to the "(1) Paper exit unit".)
3) Disconnect the connector (A), and remove the screws (B) and
the paper exit motor (C).
b. Paper exit cooling fan motor (F side), Paper exit cooling fan
motor (Center)
TION".)
3) Remove the screws (A), and remove the fan cover (B).
4) Disconnect the connectors (C), and remove the paper exit
cooling fan motor (F side) (D) and the paper exit cooling fan
motor (Center) (E).
* When installing, attach the fan motor (F side) (D) so that the
label surface is upper, and attach the fan motor (center) (E)
so that label surface is bottom. At each install be careful to
direction of the harnesses.
Unit Parts
1 Paper exit unit a Paper exit motor
Unit Parts
1 Paper exit unit b Paper exit cooling fan motor (F side)
c Paper exit cooling fan motor (Center)
1-a
A
B
B
C 1-a
1-b
1-c
A
A
A
A
B
C
C
E
D
1-c
1-b
c. Paper exit full detection (Main unit), Paper exit detection
TION".)
4) Remove the screw (C), and remove the mounting plate (D).
Disconnect the connectors (E), and remove the paper exit full
detection (Main unit) (F), and the paper exit detection (G).
d. Paper exit roller 1 (Drive)
TION".)
remove the bearing (B). Remove the screws (D), and remove
the paper exit motor unit (E).
4) Remove the screws (F), and remove the paper guide unit (G).
Unit Parts
1 Paper exit unit d Paper exit full detection (Main unit)
e Paper exit detection
1-e
1-d
A
A
A
A
B
C
D
F
E
G 1-e
1-d
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 Paper exit unit f Paper exit roller 1 (Drive)
1-f
D
D
D
C
B
E
A
F
F
G
5) Remove the screws (H), and remove the earth plate (I).
Remove the E-ring (J), and remove the bearing (K). Remove
the E-ring (L), and remove the belt (M), the pulley (N), the par-
allel pin (O). Remove the paper exit roller 1 (Drive) (P).
e. Paper exit temperature detection PWB
TION".)
4) Remove the screw (C), and remove the paper exit temperature
detection PWB (D). Disconnect the connector (E).
f. Discharge brush
TION".)
Unit Parts
1 Paper exit unit g Paper exit temperature detection PWB
H
H I
K
L
M
N
O
P
J
1-f
1-
g
Unit Parts
Mainte
nance
1 Paper exit unit h Discharge brush
A
A
A
A
B
C
D
E
1-
g
1-h
remove the bearing (C). Remove the screws (D), and remove
the paper exit motor unit (E).
4) Remove the screws (F), and remove the fan cover (G).
5) Remove the earth tapes (H). Check the discharge brushes (I).
* When pasting, fit the reference line.
D
D
D
C
B
E
A
F
F
F
F
G
0.5 0 0.5 0
0.5
0
0.5
0
H
H
I
I
1-h
1-h
4. Maintenance
No. Part name
Monochrome
supply,
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the
replacement
parts are
described.)
1 Transport rollers
2 Discharge brush
1
2
2
MX-7000N DRIVE SECTION Q 1
MX-7000N
Sv` Huuuu!

[Q] DRIVE SECTION
A. Main drive unit (CL)
(1) Main drive unit (CL)
FIT".)
3) Remove the screws (C), and remove the flywheel (D) and (E).
* When installing, check to confirm that has not come in con-
tact with the harness etc.
* When installing, the order of the installation is the flywheel
(E), the flywheel (D). (Equipping the mark to each color.)
Unit Page
A Main drive unit (CL) Q- 1
B Main drive unit (BK) Q- 4
C Toner transport drive unit Q-11
D PS drive unit Q-16
E Tandem drive unit Q-21
F Multistage drive unit Q-28
Unit Parts Page
1 Main drive unit (CL) a Developement drive
motor_CL
Q- 2
b Drum motor_Y Q- 3
c Drum motor_M
d Drum motor_C
e Y phase detection Q- 3
f M phase detection
g C phase detection
h Transfer belt separation
detection sensor CL
Q- 4
1-a
1-h
1-d 1-g
1-f
1-e
1-b
1-c
1
Unit
1 Main drive unit (CL)
1
B
B
A
A
D
E C
4) Disconnect the connectors (F). Remove the harness (H) from
the wire saddles (G). Remove the screws (I), and remove the
main drive unit (CL) (J).
a. Developement drive motor_CL
FIT".)
remove the developement dirve motor_CL (H).
Unit Parts
1 Main drive unit (CL) a Developement dirve motor_CL
J
1
F
I
G G
H
F
1-a
B
A
A
D
E C
G
G
F
H 1-a
G
b. Drum motor_Y, Drum motor_M, Drum motor_C
FIT".)
3) Remove the screws (C). Remove the flywheel (D), the flywheel
(E), and the flywheel (F).
The flywheel (F) is out of the order.
4) Disconnect the connectors (G). Remove the screws (H), and
remove the drum motors (I) of each color.
* Be careful to wiring of harnesses.
c. Y phase detection, M phase detection, C phase detection
FIT".)
Unit Parts
1 Main drive unit (CL) b Drum motor_Y
c Drum motor_M
d Drum motor_C
1-b
1-c
1-d
B
A
A
C
F
D
E
C
Unit Parts
1 Main drive unit (CL) e Y phase detection
f M phase detection
g C phase detection
H
H
H
H
H
G
G
I 1-b
G
I 1-c
I 1-d
1-e
1-f
1-
g
B
A
A
3) Remove the screws (C). Remove the flywheel (D), the flywheel
(E).
4) Remove the screws (F), and remove the phase detections (G)
of each color. Disconnect the connectors (H).
d. Transfer belt separation sensor CL
FIT".)
2) Remove the main drive unit (CL). (Refer to the "(1) Main drive
unit (CL)".)
3) Disconnect the connector (A), and remove the transfer belt
separation sensor CL (B).
B. Main drive unit (BK)
(1) Main drive unit (BK)
FIT".)
Unit Parts
1 Main drive unit (CL) h Transfer belt separation sensor CL
D
E C
F
G
H
G
G
G 1-e
1-f
1-
g
1-h
Unit Parts Page
1 Main drive unit (BK) a Developement drive motor_K Q- 6
b Developement drive motor Q- 7
c Drum motor_K Q- 7
d Belt separation clutch
(normal)
Q- 8
e Belt separation clutch
(reverse)
f K phase detection Q- 9
g Charger cleaner motor Q-10
h CCM rotation detection
i PTC cleaner motor Q-10
Unit
1 Main drive unit (BK)
A
B 1-h
1-d
1-b
1-i
1-e
1-a
1
1-
g
1-c 1-f
1-h
1
fer belt.
fixing knob (E).
section.
7) Loosen the screw (J), pull out slightly the developement unit
(BK) (K) and the OPC drum unit (BK) (L).
8) Remove the screws (M), and open the control box (N).
A
B
C
E
D
F
G
H
H
I
J
K L
N
N
M
M
9) Remove the screws (O), and remove the flywheel (P).
10) Disconnect the connectors (Q).
11) Disconnect the connectors (R), and the connectors (S).
Remove the screws (T), and remove the main drive unit (BK)
(U).
* When connecting the connectors (S), refer to the mark (V)
and connect it.
a. Developement drive motor_K
FIT".)
O
P
O
Q
Q
T
U 1
S
R
R
V
Unit Parts
1 Main drive unit (BK) a Developement drive motor_K
1-a
B
B
A
A
C
D
C
4) Disconnect the connectors (E). Remove the screws (F). Disen-
gage the pawl (G) of PWB supporter, and remove the devel-
opement drive motor_K (H).
b. Developement drive motor
FIT".)
4) Disconnect the connector (E). Remove the screws (F), and
remove the transfer drive motor (G).
c. Drum motor_K
FIT".)
Unit Parts
1 Main drive unit (BK) b Developement drive motor
E
E
F
F
F
F
H
1-a
G
1-b
B
B
A
A
Unit Parts
1 Main drive unit (BK) c Drum motor_K
C
D
C
F
F
E
G 1-b
1-c
4) Disconnect the connector (E). Remove the screws (F), and
remove the drum drive motor_K (G).
d. Belt separation clutch (normal), Belt separation clutch
(reverse)
FIT".)
B
B
A
A
C
D
C
E
F
F
G 1-c
Unit Parts
1 Main drive unit (BK) d Belt separation clutch (normal)
e Belt separation clutch (reverse)
1-e
1-d
B
B
A
A
C
D
C
4) Remove the E-ring (E), and remove the separation drive gear
(F) and the parallel pin (G).
5) Disconnect the connectors (H). Remove the harness from the
wire saddles (I). Remove the belt separation clutch (normal)
(J) and the belt separation clutch (reverse) (K).
e. K phase detection
FIT".)
4) Remove the screw (E). Remove the mounting plate (F). Dis-
connect the connector (G), and remove the K phase detection
(H).
Unit Parts
1 Main drive unit (BK) f K phase detection
E
F
G
H
I
K
I I
H
1-e
I
J
1-d
1-f
B
B
A
A
C
D
C
E
H
G
F
1-f
f. Charger cleaner motor, CCM rotation detection
FIT".)
2) Remove the main drive unit (BK). (Refer to the (1) Main drive
unit (BK).)
3) Disconnect the connector (A). Remove the harness (C) from
the pawls (B) of the motor fixing plate. Disconnect the connec-
tor (D). Remove the screws (E), and remove the motor fixing
plate (F). Disconnect the connector (G).
4) Disconnect the connector (H). Remove the drive gear (I), the
charger cleaner motor (J), and the CCM rotation detection (K).
g. PTC cleaner motor
FIT".)
2) Remove the main drive unit (BK). (Refer to the "(1) Main drive
unit (BK)".)
3) Remove the transfer drive motor. (Refer to the "b. Transfer
dirve motor".)
4) Remove the drum drive motor_K. (Refer to the "c. Drum drive
motor_K".)
5) Remove the screws (A), and remove the terminal (white har-
ness) (B) and the terminal (red harness) (C).
* When installing, refer the mark (D) of the mounting plate,
arrange the terminals.
6) Remove the screw (E), and remove the PTC electrode mount-
ing plate (F).
Unit Parts
1 Main drive unit (BK) g Charger cleaner motor
h CCM rotation detection
1-g
1-h
E
D
A
E
F
G
B
B
C
I
J
K
H
1-h
1-
g
Unit Parts
1 Main drive unit (BK) i PTC cleaner motor
1-i
A
A
B
C
D
E
F
7) Disconnect the connector (G). Insert the screwdriver to the
holes (H), and remove the screws (I). Remove the electrode
mounting plate unit (J).
* When installing, fit the positioning pins (K).
8) Remove the harness (L) from the pawls (M). Remove the
screws (N), and remove the PTC cleaner motor (O).
C. Toner transport drive unit
(1) Toner transport drive unit
unit (BK). (Refer to the "[L] DEVELOPING SECTION".)
3) Remove the OPC drum unit (CL), the charge unit (BK), and the
OPC drum unit (BK). (Refer to the "[J] PHOTOCONDUCTOR
SECTION".)
Remove the screw (C), and disengage the pawls (D), and
remove the toner cartridge guide (E).
6) Remove the screws (F), and remove the toner transport unit
(BK) (G).
Unit Parts Page
1 Toner transport drive
unit
a Toner motor K1 Q-13
b Toner motor K2
c Toner motor C
d Toner motor M
e Toner motor Y
f Hopper motor K Q-14
g Hopper motor C
h Hopper motor M
i Hopper motor Y
G
H
H
I
I
J
K
K
O
N
1-i
M M
L
1-a
1-f
1-
g
1-h
1-i
1-b
1-c
1-d
1-e
1
Unit
1 Toner transport drive unit
1
C
E
A
A
B
D
D
F
G
F
7) Disconnect the connectors (H).
8) Remove the screws (I). Remove the screws (J), and remove
the toner transport unit C (K), the toner transport unit M (L),
and the toner transport unit Y (M).
9) Remove the screws (N), and open the control box (O).
10) Disconnect the connectors (P). Remove the harness (R) from
the wire saddles (Q).
11) Remove the screws (S), and remove the PWB mounting plate
(T).
12) Remove the screws (U), and remove the toner transport drive
unit (V).
H
H
H
J
J
J
M
L
K
I
O
O
N
N
P
Q
R
T
S
S
S
S
V 1
U
U
U
a. Toner motor
2) Remove the developement unit (CL), the charge unit (BK), and
the developement unit (BK). (Refer to the "[L] DEVELOPING
SECTION".)
3) Remove the OPC drum unit (CL), charge unit (BK), and the
SECTION".)
4) Remove the paper exit tray and the rear cabinet. (Refer to the
5) Turn it counterclockwise while holding the coupling (A),
release the lock.
6) Remove the couplings (B).
7) Remove the screws (C), and open the control box (D).
8) Disconnect the connectors (E). Remove the harness (G) from
the wire saddles (F).
9) Remove the screws (H), and remove the PWB mounting plate
(I).
Unit Parts
unit
a Toner motor K 1
b Toner motor K 2
c Toner motor C
d Toner motor M
e Toner motor Y
1-a
1-b
1-c
1-d
1-e
A
B
B
B
B
B
D
D
C
C
E
F
G
I
H
H
H
H
10) Disconnect the connectors (J). Remove the screws (K), and
remove the toner motors (L) of each color.
b. Hopper motor
unit (BK). (Refer to the "[L] DEVELOPING SECTION".)
3) Remove the OPC drum unit (CL), the charge unit (BK), and the
SECTION".)
Remove the screw (C), and disengage the pawls (D), and
remove the toner cartridge guide (E).
6) Remove the screws (F), and remove the toner transport unit
(BK) (G).
7) Disconnect the connectors (H).
Unit Parts
unit
f Hopper motor K
g Hopper motor C
h Hopper motor M
i Hopper motor Y
L
1-e
J
L 1-d
L
L
L
1-c
1-b
1-a
K
K
1-f
1-g
1-h
1-i
C
E
A
A
B
D
D
F
G
F
H
H
H
8) Remove the screws (I). Remove the screws (J), and remove
the toner transport unit C (K), the toner transport unit M (L),
and the toner transport unit Y (M).
9) Turn it counterclockwise while holding the coupling (N),
release the lock.
10) Remove the couplings (O).
11) Disconnect the connectors (P). Remove the screws (Q), and
remove the guide (R). Remove the gears (S).
* When installing, be careful it bite the wire.
12) Remove the screws (T), and open the control box (U).
13) Disconnect the connectors (V). Remove the harness (X) from
the wire saddles (W).
J
J
J
M
L
K
I
N
O
O
O
O
O
P
P
P
S
S
S
S
Q
Q
Q
R
R
R
R
U
U
T
T
V
W
X
14) Remove the screws (Y), and remove the PWB mounting plate
(Z).
15) Disconnect the connector (a). Remove the screws (b), and
remove the hopper motors (c) of each color.
D. PS drive unit
(1) PS drive unit
Z
Y
Y
Y
Y
a
c
c
c
c
b
c 1-i
1-h
1-
g
1-f
Unit Parts Page
1 PS drive unit a PS front transport motor Q-18
b LCC transport motor Q-18
c PS motor Q-18
d PS clutch Q-19
e Manual paper feed clutch Q-20
f LCC transport clutch Q-20
g Torque limiter
Unit
1 PS drive unit
1-c
1-a
1-d
1-b
1-e
1
1-
g
1-f
1
5) Remove the resin ring (I), and remove the pulley sheet (J), the
belt (K), the pulley (L), and the parallel pin (M).
6) Remove the resin ring (N). Remove the pulley sheet (O), the
belt (P), and the pulley (Q), and remove the parallel pin (R).
7) Remove the screws (S), and remove the support plate (T).
8) Disconnect the connectors (U), and remove the screws (V),
and remove the PS drive unit (W).
B
B
A
A
C
D
C
G
F
H
E
I
J
K
L
M
Q
R
N
O
P
S
S
T
V
W
U
U
1
a. PS front transport motor
the "[A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT".)
2) Remove the PS drive unit. (Refer to the (1) PS dirve unit.)
remove the PS front transport motor (C).
* When installing, check that the motor pulley (E) and the pul-
ley (F) puts on the belt (D).
b. LCC transport motor
2) Remove the PS drive unit. (Refer to the (1) PS drive unit.)
remove the LCC transport motor (C).
* When installing, check that the motor pulley (E) and the pul-
ley (F) puts on the belt (D).
c. PS motor
Unit Parts
1 PS drive unit a PS front transport motor
1-a
B
C
A
1-a
E
D
F
Unit Parts
1 PS drive unit b LCC transport motor
Unit Parts
1 PS drive unit c PS motor
1-b
B
C
A
1-b
E
D
F
1-c
remove the PS motor (E).
d. PS clutch
2) Remove the PS dirve unit. (Refer to the "(1) PS drive unit".)
3) Remove the screws (F), and remove the frame (G).
4) Disconnect the connector (H), and remove the PS clutch unit
(I).
* When installing, fit the clutch rotation stopper, and be careful
to the wiring of the harness.
5) Remove the E-ring (J), and remove the PS clutch (K).
Unit Parts
1 PS drive unit d PS clutch
B
B
A
A
D
E
C
1-c
1-d
F
F
F
G
I
H
J
K 1-d
e. Manual paper feed clutch
3) Remove the E-rings (A), the gears (B), the parallel pins (C),
and the collars (D).
4) Remove the screws (E), and remove the frame (F).
5) Disconnect the connector (G), and remove the manual paper
feed clutch unit (H).
6) Remove the E-rings (I), and remove the manual paper feed
clutch (J).
f. LCC transport clutch
Unit Parts
1 PS drive unit e Manual paper feed clutch
1-e
A
D
B
C
B
C
D
A
A
D
B
C
E F E
E
Unit Parts
1 PS drive unit f LCC transport clutch
g Torque limiter
G
H
I
J 1-e
I
1-f
1-g
3) Remove the E-rings (A), the gears (B), the parallel pins (C),
and the collars (D).
4) Remove the screws (E), and remove the frame (F).
5) Remove the torque limiter unit (G). Disconnect the connector
(H), and remove the LCC transport clutch unit (I).
6) Remove the E-rings (I), and remove the LCC transport clutch
(J).
7) Remove the E-rings (K), and remove the torque limiter (L).
E. Tandem drive unit
A
D
B
C
B
C
D
A
A
D
B
C
E F E
E
H
I
G
Unit Parts Page
1 Tandem drive unit a Paper feed motor Q-23
b Tandem tray 1 paper feed
clutch
Q-23
c Tandem tray transport clutch Q-24
d Tandem tray 2 paper feed
clutch
Q-25
e Vertical transport clutch upper Q-26
f Paper pickup solenoid
(Tandem tray 2)
Q-27
J
I
1-f
I
L 1-
g
K
1-a
1-f
1-c
1-b
1-d
1-e
1
(1) Tandem drive unit
5) Remove the resin ring (I), and remove the pulley sheet (J), the
belt (K), the pulley (L), and the parallel pin (M).
6) Remove the resin ring (N), and remove the pulley sheet (O),
the belt (P), the pulley (Q), and the parallel pin (R).
7) Remove the screws (S), and remove the support plate (T).
Unit
1 Tandem drive unit
1
B
B
A
A
C
D
C
G
F
H
E
I
J
K
L
M
Q
R
N
O
P
S
S
T
8) Remove the resin ring (U), remove the pulley (V), the belt (W),
the parallel pin (X), and the pulley sheet (Y). Remove the
screws (Z), and remove the support plate (a).
9) Disconnect the connector (b). Remove the harness (d) from
the wire saddle (c). Remove the screws (e), and remove the
inner ventilation fan motor (Center) unit (f).
10) Disconnect the connectors (g). Remove the screws (h), and
remove the tandem drive unit (i).
a. Paper feed motor
2) Disconnect the connectors (A). Remove the screws (B). Disen-
gage the pawl (C) of the PWB supporter, and remove the
paper feed motor (D).
b. Tandem tray 1 paper feed clutch
2) Remove the tandem drive unit. (Refer to the "(1) Tandem drive
unit".)
U
V
W
X
Y
a
Z
Z
f
e
b
c d
h
i
1
g
g
g
Unit Parts
1 Tandem drive unit a Paper feed motor
Unit Parts
1 Tandem drive unit b Tandem tray 1 paper feed clutch
1-a
B
B
1-a D
A
C
1-b
3) Remove the screws (A), and remove the couplings (B) and the
spring (C).
* When installing, apply thread locking material to the screws
(A).
4) Remove the screws (D), and remove the support plate (E).
Remove the screws (F), and remove the frame (G).
5) Disconnect the connector (H), and remove the tandem tray 1
paper feed clutch unit (I).
* When installing, fit the clutch rotation stopper.
6) Remove the E-ring (J), and remove the tandem tray 1 paper
feed clutch (K).
c. Tandem tray transport clutch
unit".)
spring (C).
(A).
4) Remove the screws (D), and remove the support plate (E).
Remove the screws (F), and remove the frame (G).
A
A
B
B
C
D
F
F
E
G
I
H
J
K 1-b
Unit Parts
1 Tandem drive unit c Tandem tray transport clutch
1-c
A
A
B
B
C
D
F
F
E
G
5) Remove the bearing (H) and the belt (I).
6) Disconnect the connector (J), and remove the tandem tray
transport clutch unit (K).
7) Remove the E-ring (L), and remove the tandem tray transport
clutch (M).
d. Tandem tray 2 paper feed clutch
unit".)
spring (C).
(A).
4) Remove the E-rings (D), and remove the collars (E), the gears
(F), and the parallel pins (G).
remove the support plate (J). Remove the screws (K), and
remove the frame (L).
Unit Parts
1 Tandem drive unit d Tandem tray 2 paper feed clutch
I
H
J
K
L
M 1-c
1-d
A
A
B
B
C
F
D
E
F
D
E
G
G
F
D
E
G
K
J
H
I
K
L
6) Disconnect the connector (M), and remove the tandem tray 2
paper feed clutch unit (N).
7) Remove the E-ring (O), and remove the tandem tray 2 paper
feed clutch (P)
e. Vertical transport clutch upper
unit".)
3) Remove the E-ring (A), and remove the pulley (B), the parallel
pin (C), and the belt (D).
4) Remove the screws (E), and remove the couplings (F) and the
spring (G).
(A).
5) Remove the E-rings (H), and remove the collars (I), the gears
(J), and the parallel pins (K).
Unit Parts
1 Tandem drive unit e Vertical transport clutch upper
M
N
O
P 1-d
1-e
A
B
D
C
E
E
F
F
G
J
H
I
J
H
I
K
K
J
H
I
K
6) Disconnect the connector (L). Remove the screws (M), and
remove the support plate (N). Remove the screws (O), and
remove the frame (P).
7) Disconnect the connector (Q), and remove the vertical trans-
port clutch upper unit (R).
8) Remove the E-rings (S), and remove the vertical transport
clutch upper (T).
f. Paper pickup solenoid (Tandem tray 2)
unit".)
spring (C).
(A).
4) Remove the E-rings (D), and remove the collars (E), the gears
(F), and the parallel pins (G).
O
N
L
M
O
P
R
Q
T 1-e
S
Unit Parts
1 Tandem drive unit f Paper pickup solenoid (Tandem tray 2)
1-f
A
A
B
B
C
F
D
E
F
D
E
G
G
F
D
E
G
remove the support plate (J). Remove the screws (K), and
remove the frame (L).
6) Remove the screws (M), and remove the paper pickup sole-
noid (Tandem tray 2) unit (N).
7) Remove the screws (O), and remove the mounting plate unit
(P) from the paper pickup solenoid (Ttandem tray 2) (Q).
* When installing, insert the shaft (R) in the arm (S).
F. Multistage drive unit
(1) Multistage drive unit
K
J
H
I
K
L
M
M
N
1-f
P
Q
O
O
R
S
Unit Parts Page
1 Multistage drive unit a Paper tray lift-up motor
(Tray 3)
Q-29
b Paper tray lift-up motor
(Tray 4)
c Tray 3 paper feed clutch Q-29
d Tray 4 paper feed clutch Q-30
e Vertical transport clutch lower Q-31
Unit
1 Multistage drive unit
1-a
1-b
1-c
1-d
1-e
1
1
2) Remove the resin ring (A), and remove the pulley (B), the belt
(C), the parallel pin (D), and the pulley sheet (E). Remove the
screws (F), remove the support plate (G).
3) Disconnect the connectors (H). Remove the screws (I), and
remove the multistage drive unit (J).
a. Paper tray lift-up motor (Tray 3), Paper tray lift-up motor
(Tray 4)
2) Disconnect the connectors (A), and remove the screws (B),
and remove the paper tray lift-up motor (Tray3, 4) units (C).
3) Disengage the pawls (D), and remove the coupling (E) and the
spring (F) from the paper tray lift-up motor (Tray 3, 4) (G).
b. Tray 3 paper feed clutch
2) Remove the multistage drive unit. (Refer to the "(1) Multistage
drive unit".)
Unit Parts
1 Multistage drive unit a Paper tray lift-up motor (Tray 3)
b Paper tray lift-up motor (Tray 4)
A
B
C
D
E
G
F
F
J 1
I
H
H
H
H
H
1-a
1-b
Unit Parts
1 Multistage drive unit c Tray 3 paper feed clutch
B
A
C
C
A
B
D
E
D
F
G
1-a
1-b
1-c
3) Remove the E-rings (A), and remove the collars (B), the gears
(C), and the parallel pins (D). Remove the screws (E), and
remove the frame (F).
4) Disconnect the connector (G), and remove the tray 3 paper
5) Remove the E-rings (I), and remove the tray 3 paper feed
clutch (J).
c. Tray 4 paper feed clutch
drive unit".)
3) Remove the E-rings (A), and remove the collars (B), the gears
(C), and the parallel pins (D). Remove the screws (E), and
remove the frame (F).
4) Disconnect the connector (G), and remove the tray 4 paper
B
A
A
C
D
D
E
E
F
C
B
H
G
J
I
I
1-c
Unit Parts
1 Multistage drive unit d Tray 4 paper feed clutch
1-d
B B
A A
C C
D
D
E
E
F
G
H
5) Remove the E-ring (I), and remove the tray 4 paper feed clutch
(J).
d. Vertical transport clutch lower
drive unit".)
3) Remove the E-ring (A), and remove the pulley (B), the parallel
pin (C), the belt (D), and the pulley sheet (E).
4) Remove the E-rings (F), and remove the collars (G), the gears
(H), and the parallel pins (I). Remove the screws (J), and
remove the frame (K).
5) Disconnect the connector (L), and remove the vertical trans-
port clutch lower unit (M).
6) Remove the E-ring (N), and remove the bearing (O). Remove
the E-ring (P), and remove the vertical transport clutch lower
(Q).
Unit Parts
1 Multistage drive unit e Vertical transport clutch lower
J
I
1-d
1-e
B
A
C
D
E
G G
F F
H H
I
I
J
J
K
L
M
Q
O
1-e
P
N
2. Maintenance
No. Part name
Monochrome
supply,
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide. Block/
Item No. (Only the
replacement parts are
described.)
1 Gears (grease) Mechanical
parts
When chacking, apply to
the necessary positions.
(Specified positions)
(UKOG-0307FCZZ)
2 Earth portion of each
shaft
(Conduction Grease)
When chacking, apply to
the necessary positions.
(Specified positions)
(UKOG-0012QCZZ)
3 Belts
1
1
2
2
3
MX-7000N PWB SECTION R 1
MX-7000N
Sv` Huuuu!

[R] PWB SECTION
A. PWB
(1) SUB power PWB
remove the SUB power PWB (C).
(2) AC power PWB
Parts Page
a SUB power PWB R- 1
b AC power PWB R- 1
c DC power PWB R- 2
d 1 TC PWB R- 3
e HL PWB R- 3
f DRIVER PWB R- 4
g PCU PWB R- 4
h Mother PWB R- 4
i MFP cnt PWB R- 5
j MC PWB R- 6
k 2 TC PWB R- 6
l HDD R- 6
m DSPF memory PWB R- 7
n Scanner control PWB
o PTC PWB R- 8
a
b
c
d
e
j
g
n
i
f
k
l
m
n
o
Parts
a SUB power PWB
Parts
b AC power PWB
a
C
A
B
B
B
B
B
B
a
b
2) Disconnect the connectors (A). Remove the screws (B) and
the screws (C), and remove the AC power PWB (D).
* Be careful to the difference between the size of the screws
(B) and the size of screws (C).
(3) DC power PWB
2) Disconnect the connectors (A).
3) Remove the snap bands (A). Remove the screws (B), and
remove the cord mounting plate (C).
4) Remove the screws (D), and remove the power supply unit
(E).
5) Remove the snap bands (F), and disconnect the connector
(G). Remove the screws (H), and remove the AC power unit
(I).
Parts
c DC power PWB
D
A
B
B
B
B
C
C
b
c
A
A
200V
120V
C
A
A
B
B
A
A
D
D
E
D
D
F
G
I
H
H H
6) Remove the screws (J), and disconnect the connector (K).
Remove the DC power PWB (L).
(4) 1 TC PWB
FIT".)
3) Disconnect the connectors (C). Remove the screws (D), and
remove the 1 TC PWB (E).
(5) HL PWB
FIT".)
Parts
d 1 TC PWB
c
J
J
J
L
K
c
J
J
J
J
J
L
200V
120V
d
B
B
A
A
Parts
e HL PWB
D
D
E
d
C
D
D
e
B
B
A
A
3) Disconnect the connectors (C). Remove the screws (D), and
remove the HL PWB (E).
(6) DRIVER PWB
FIT".)
disconnect the connector (C), and remove the DRIVER PWB
(D).
(7) PCU PWB
FIT".)
2) Disconnect the connectors (A). Remove the screws (B) and
the connector (C), and remove the PCU PWB (D).
(8) Mother PWB
FIT".)
Parts
f DRIVER PWB
D
D
D
D
E
C
e
f
B
B
B
B
D
A
C
f
Parts
g PCU PWB
Parts
h Mother PWB
g
D g
B
B
B
B
B
B
A
C
h
2) Disconnect the connectors (A). Remove the screws (B). Dis-
connect the connector (C), and remove the Mother PWB (D).
(9) MFP cnt PWB
1) Remove the right cabinet rear. (Refer to the "[A] EXTERNAL
OUTFIT".)
2) Remove the screws (A). Raise the finger hooks (B), and pull
out the control box (D) until the position in which the clamp (C)
is seen. Remove the harness (E) from the clamp (C).
3) Pull out the control box (G) until the position in which the con-
nector (F) is seen. Pull the sheet (H), and remove the connec-
tor (F).
* When installing, check that the harness (I) is put on the
mylar (J).
* Check that the harness is not twisting, hanging down, etc.
4) Remove the screws (K), and remove the MFP cnt PWB (L).
Parts
i MFP cnt PWB
D h
A
B
B
B
B
C
i
A
A
B
D
C
E
F
G
H
J
I
L i
K
K
K
K
(10) MC PWB
FIT".)
4) Disconnect the connectors (F). Remove the screw (G), and
remove the earth wire (H).
5) Remove the screws (I). Disengage the pawls (J), and remove
the MC PWB (K).
(11) 2 TC PWB
Parts Mainte
nance
j MC PWB
j
B
B
A
A
D
E C
Parts
k 2 TC PWB
G
F
F
F
H
F
I
I
J
K j
k
remove the 2 TC PWB (C).
(12) HDD
FIT".)
2) Remove the screws (A), and remove the mounting plate (B)
and HDD unit (C). Disconnect the connectors (D).
3) Remove the screws (E), and remove the angles (G) from the
HDD (F).
* Since the HDD is weak in shock, handle it carefully. For
example, avoid hitting the corner, dropping, or other shocks.
(13) DSPF memory PWB, Scanner control PWB
EXTERNAL OUTFIT".)
2) Disconnect the connectors (A). Remove the snap bands (B).
Remove the screws (C), and remove the scanner control PWB
unit (D).
3) Remove the screws (E), and remove the DSPF memory PWB
(F).
Parts
l HDD
B
A
B
B
B
C k
l
A
A
B
C
D
D
E
E F
G
G
l
Parts
m DSPF memory PWB
n Scanner control PWB
m
n
A
B
C
B
D
m
E
F
E
4) Remove the screws (G), and remove the mounting plates (H).
Remove the screws (I), and remove the scanner control PWB
(J).
(14) PTC PWB
remove the PTC PWB (C).
Parts
o PTC PWB
G
G
H
I
J
H
H
I
I
I
n
o
B
B
B
B
A
C o
MX-7000N FAN, FILTER SECTION S 1
MX-7000N
Sv` Huuuu!

[S] FAN, FILTER SECTION
A. Fan motor
(1) Controller cooling fan motor
FIT".)
2) Remove the screws (A), and open the controller box (B).
3) Peel off the mylar (C). Disconnect the connector (D), and
remove the screws (E). Remove the contrller cooling fan motor
(F).
* When installing, the label side is upward.
Unit Page
A Fan motor S- 1
B Filter S- 7
Parts Page
a Controller cooling fan motor S- 1
b HDD cooling fan motor S- 2
c Power cooling fan motor S- 2
d Ozone fan motor 3 S- 3
e Ozone fan motor 2
f Ozone fan motor 1 S- 4
g Charger air inlet fan motor S- 5
h Inner ventilation fan motor (center) S- 5
i Inner ventilation fan motor (right) S- 6
a
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
b
Parts
a Controller cooling fan motor
a
B
B
A
A
F a
E
C D
(2) HDD cooling fan motor
FIT".)
2) Remove the screws (A), and remove the mounting plate (B)
and HDD unit (C). Disconnect the connectors (D).
3) Disconnect the connector (E). Remove the harness from the
wire saddle (F). Remove the screws (G), and remove the HDD
cooling fan motor (H).
* When installing, the label side is inward.
(3) Power cooling fan motor
2) Disconnect the connectors (A).
3) Remove the snap bands (B). Remove the screws (C), and
remove the cord mounting plate (D).
Parts
b HDD cooling fan motor
b
A
A
B
C
D
D
G
G
H b
E
F
Parts
c Power cooling fan motor
c
A
A
200V
120V
D
B
B
C
C
B
B
4) Remove the screws (E), and remove the power supply unit (F).
5) Disconnect the connectors (G), and remove the snap bands
(H). Remove the screws (I), and remove the power cooling fan
motor (J).
* When installing, the label side is positioned on the inside.
(4) Ozone fan motor 3, Ozone fan motor 2
Parts
d Ozone fan motor 3
e Ozone fan motor 2
E
E
F
E
E
I
I
J
G
G
H
H
c
c
J
d
e
B
A
A
D
D
E
C
D
G
G
G
F
H
5) Disengage the pawl (I), and remove the duct (J).
* When installing, hook the duct (J) to the washer (K).
6) Disconnect the connector (L). Remove the screws (M), and
remove the washer (N). Remove the ozone fan motor 3 (O).
Disconnect the connector (P). Remove the screws (Q), and
remove the ozone fan motor 2 (R).
(5) Ozone fan motor 1
4) Disconnect the connectors (F). Remove the screws (G), and
Parts
f Ozone fan motor 1
I
J
K J
K
d O
R
L
M
N
P
Q
e
f
B
A
A
D
D
E
C
D
G
G
G
F
H
remove the ozone fan motor 1 (K).
(6) Charger air inlet fan motor
1) Remove the frame cover R. (Refer to the "[A] EXTERNAL
OUTFIT".)
remove the charger air inlet fan motor (C).
(7) Inner ventilation fan motor (center)
3) Disconnect the connector (C). Remove the herness (E) from
the clamp (D). Remove the screws (F), and remove the inner
ventilation fan motor (Center) unit (G).
Parts
g Charger air inlet motor
I
J
J
K f
g
B
A
C g
Parts
h Inner ventilation fan motor (center)
h
B
B
A
A
G
F
C
D E
4) Remove the screws (H), and remove the inner ventilation fan
motor (Center) (I).
* When installing, direct the label face (J) to the mounting
plate side, and position the harness (L) in mark (K) side.
(8) Inner ventilation fan motor (right)
FIT".)
3) Disconnect the connector (C), and remove the snap band (D).
4) Close the control box (E).
5) Remove the screw (F), and push the part (G), disengage the
pawl (H). Disengage the pawl (I), and remove the inner ventila-
tion fan motor (Right) unit (J).
Parts
i Inner ventilation fan motor (right)
K
H H
I h
J
L
i
B
A
A
C
D
E
G
F
H
J
I
6) Remove the screws (K), and remove the inner ventilation fan
motor (Right) (L).
B. Filter
(1) Ozone filter
1) Remove the filter cover (A), and remove the ozone filters (B).
(2) Ozone filter
1) Remove the rear cabinet and rear lower cabinet. (Refer to the
2) Remove the screws (A). Pull out the cover (B), and remove the
ozone filter (C).
Parts
Mainte
nance
Page
a Ozone filter S- 7
b Ozone filter S- 7
c Dust filter S- 8
d Paper exit filter S- 8
Parts Mainte
nance
a Ozone filter
L
K
i
a
c
d
b
a
Parts
Mainte
nance
b Ozone filter
A
B
B
a
a
b
A
A
B
b C
(3) Dust filter
2) Remove the holder (C). Remove the dust filter (D).
(4) Paper exit filter
1) Disengage the pawl (A), and remove the filter cover (B).
Remove the paper exit filter (C).
Parts
Mainte
nance
c Dust filter
c
A
B
c D
C
Parts
Mainte
nance
d Paper exit filter
d
C d
A
B
2. Maintenance
No. Part name
Monochrome
supply,
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
300
K
600
K
900
K
1200
K
1500
K
1800
K
2100
K
2400
K
2700
K
3000
K
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the
replacement
parts are
described.)
1 Ozone filter Mechanical
parts
(P/G No. : [65]-22)
(P/G No. : [65]-24)
2 Paper exit filter (P/G No. : [55]-50)
3 Dust filter
1
1
3
2
MX-7000N SENSOR, SWITCH SECTION T 1
MX-7000N
Sv` Huuuu!

[T] SENSOR, SWITCH SECTION
A. Sensor, switch
(1) Right door open/close switch
FIT".)
3) Disconnect the connector (C).
4) Release the lock (D), and open the right door unit (E).
Parts Page
a Right door open/close switch T- 1
b Main switch T- 2
c Front door lower open/close switch T- 3
d Front door upper open/close switch T- 3
e Right transport unit open/close detection sensor T- 4
Parts
a Right door open/close switch
a
e
b
c
d
a
B
B
A
A
C
D
E
5) Remove the screws (F), and remove the holder (G).
6) Remove the screw (H), and remove the right door open/close
switch (I).
(2) Main switch
1) Romove the front cabinet left. (Refer to the "A. EXTERNAL
OUTFIT".)
2) Pull out the paper feed tray (A).
3) Remove the screw (B), and remove the cover (C). Remove the
screw (D), and remove the left cabinet lower (E). Remove the
screw (F), and remove the rail cover (G).
* When installing, engage the pawl (H) to hole of the frame.
* Install so that the rib (I) of the left cabinet lower is positioned
inside than adjuster cover (J).
4) Remove the screws (K), and remove the frame cover (L).
5) Remove the screw (M), and remove the cover (N). Remove
the screws (O), and remove the main switch unit (P).
* When installing, engage the pawl (Q) to the main unit (P).
* When installing, pinch the pawl (R) to the frame (S).
Parts
b Main switch
F
F
G
I
H
a
b
A
H
H
B
C
D
E
EEF
J
I
H
G
K
K
L
N
O
M
R
S
P
Q
6) Disconnect the connectors (T). Disengage the pawls (U), and
remove the main switch (V).
(3) Front door lower open/close switch
1) Romove the front cabinet. (Refer to the "[A] EXTERNAL OUT-
FIT".)
2) Pull out the tandem paper feed tray (A).
3) Remove the screws (B), and remove the frame cover (C).
4) Remove the screw (D), and remove the front door lower open/
close switch (E). Disconnect the connectors (F).
(4) Front door upper open/close switch
OUTFIT".)
3) Remove the screw (A), and remove the switch cover (B).
Parts
c Front door lower open/close switch
U
U
V
T
b
T
T
c
A
Parts
d Front door upper open/close switch
B
B
C
F
E
D
c
d
B
A
4) Remove the screws (C), and remove the front door upper
open/close switch unit (D).
5) Disconnect the connectors (E). Remove the screw (F), and
remove the front door upper open/close switch (G).
(5) Right transport unit open/close detection sensor
2) Remove the tandem paper feed tray unit. (Refer to "[F] Tray
paper feed section".)
remove the mounting plate (C). Remove the right transport unit
open/close detection sensor (D).
Parts
e Right transport unit open/close detection sensor
D
C
E
F
G d
e
B
A
C
D
e

No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical,
photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without
prior written permission of the publisher.
COPYRIGHT XXXX BYSHARP CORPORATION
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
The PWBs of this model employs lead-free solder. The LF marks indicated on the PWBs and the Service Manual mean Lead-Free solder.
The alphabet following the LF mark shows the kind of lead-free solder.
(1) NOTE FOR THE USE OF LEAD-FREE SOLDER THREAD
When repairing a lead-free solder PWB, use lead-free solder thread.
Never use conventional lead solder thread, which may cause a breakdown or an accident.
Since the melting point of lead-free solder thread is about 40C higher than that of conventional lead solder thread, the use of the
exclusive-use soldering iron is recommendable.
(2) NOTE FOR SOLDERING WORK
Since the melting point of lead-free solder is about 220C, which is about 40C higher than that of conventional lead solder, and its soldering
capacity is inferior to conventional one, it is apt to keep the soldering iron in contact with the PWB for longer time. This may cause land
separation or may exceed the heat-resistive temperature of components. Use enough care to separate the soldering iron from the PWB when
completion of soldering is confirmed.
Since lead-free solder includes a greater quantity of tin, the iron tip may corrode easily. Turn ON/OFF the soldering iron power frequently.
If different-kind solder remains on the soldering iron tip, it is melted together with lead-free solder. To avoid this, clean the soldering iron
tip after completion of soldering work.
If the soldering iron tip is discolored black during soldering work, clean and file the tip with steel wool or a fine filer.
Example:
5mm
Lead-Free
Solder composition
code (Refer to the
table at the right.)
<Solder composition code of lead-free solder>
Solder composition
Sn-Ag-Cu
Sn-Ag-Bi
Sn-Ag-Bi-Cu
Sn-Zn-Bi
Sn-In-Ag-Bi
Sn-Cu-Ni
Sn-Ag-Sb
Bi-Sn-Ag-P
Bi-Sn-Ag
a
b
z
i
n
s
p
Solder composition code
a
LEAD-FREE SOLDER

(Danish) ADVARSEL !
Lithiumbatteri Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig hndtering.
Udskiftning m kun ske med batteri
af samme fabrikat og type.
Levr det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandoren.
(English) Caution !
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to manufacturers instructions.
(Finnish) VAROITUS
Paristo voi rjht, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan
tyyppiin. Hvit kytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden
mukaisesti.
(French) ATTENTION
Il y a danger dexplosion s il y a remplacement incorrect
de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du
mme type ou dun type quivalent recommand par
le constructeur.
Mettre au rebut les batteries usages conformment aux
instructions du fabricant.
(Swedish) VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Anvnd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent
typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.
Kassera anvnt batteri enligt fabrikantens
instruktion.
(German) Achtung
Explosionsgefahr bei Verwendung inkorrekter Batterien.
Als Ersatzbatterien drfen nur Batterien vom gleichen Typ oder
vom Hersteller empfohlene Batterien verwendet werden.
Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien nur nach den vom
Hersteller angegebenen Anweisungen.
(For USA, CANADA)
BATTERY DISPOSAL
THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A LITHIUM PRIMARY
(MANGANESS DIOXIDE) MEMORY BACK-UP BATTERY
THAT MUST BE DISPOSED OF PROPERLY. REMOVE THE
BATTERY FROM THE PRODUCT AND CONTACT YOUR
LOCAL ENVIRONMENTAL AGENCIES FOR INFORMATION
ON RECYCLING AND DISPOSAL OPTIONS.
TRAITEMENT DES PILES USAGES
CE PRODUIT CONTIENT UNE PILE DE SAUVEGARDE DE
MMOIRE LITHIUM PRIMAIRE (DIOXYDE DE MANGANSE)
QUI DOIT TRE TRAITE CORRECTEMENT. ENLEVEZ LA
PILE DU PRODUIT ET PRENEZ CONTACT AVEC VOTRE
AGENCE ENVIRONNEMENTALE LOCALE POUR DES
INFORMATIONS SUR LES MTHODES DE RECYCLAGE ET
DE TRAITEMENT.
CAUTION FOR BATTERY REPLACEMENT
CAUTION FOR BATTERY DISPOSAL
* Applicable for model that uses battery.

COPYRIGHT 2005 BY SHARP CORPORATION
Trademark acknowledgements
Microsoft
Windows
operating system is a trademark or copyright of Microsoft

Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
Windows
95, Windows
98, Windows
Me, Windows NT
4.0, Windows
2000,
Windows
XP, Windows
2000 Server, Windows
Server 2003 and Internet

Explorer
are trademarks or copyrights of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and

other countries.
IBM and PC/AT are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
Acrobat
Reader Copyright
1987- 2002 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights

reserved. Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, and the Acrobat logo are trademarks of
Adobe Systems Incorporated.
re
All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.
All rights reserved.
Printed in Japan.
No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted,
in any form or by any means,
electronic; mechanical; photocopying; recording or otherwise
without prior written permission of the publisher.
SHARP CORPORATION
Digital Document System Group
CS Promotion Center
Yamatokoriyama, Nara 639-1186, Japan
2005 December Printed in Japan

Sharp MX5500,6200,7000 Service Manual

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Sharp MX5500,6200,7000 Service Manual

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

SERVICE MANUAL

Scanner 1-sided: 65 sheets/min

Process correction is forcibly

When in repair, check/maintenance (with replacing consumable parts)

Use SIM 46-21 to adjust the

Use SIM 67-25 to adjust the

B L2 Distance from the paper

Paper feed tray 1 trouble F3-12 3 3 3 3

H3, H4, U1, U2, U6 trouble check

When executing SIM 13, 14, 15, 16

User Information Print

Display Pattern Setting Following the System

Auto Wake Up Print Enabled

Metadata Set List *

f DSPF paper pass sensor 1

h DSPF paper feed clutch

h Entry detection F-15

d Paper exit full detection

operating system is a trademark or copyright of Microsoft

2000 Server, Windows

Server 2003 and Internet

are trademarks or copyrights of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and

1987- 2002 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights

Vous aimerez peut-être aussi